User manual | Norstar ul 824_dr4

l em*mmemmmmeemmmmmmemmmoommmmoomemm
Modular
Installer
Guide
telemanuals.com
Planning a network with
Components
2
Hardware installation
3
Introduction to programming
4
Startup
5
Configuration
6
Administration
Maintenance
Hardware upgrades
Troubleshooting
Network troubleshooting
11
features
12
Telephone user cards
13
Telephone
Technical data
Glossary 15
Planning a network
with
l
e e e * e e e e e e e e e o * e * e e e e e e e e e * e * e e e m e
telemanuals.com
Contents i
What’s new about
1
The Big Picture 2
Bits and pieces 2
Benefits 3
Customer use 3
Bits and pieces 5
E&M Trunks 7
Configuration
DID Trunks
Configuration
Loop Start Trunks
Configuration
Benefits
requirements 9
requirements 11
12
requirements 13
14
Security 14
Class of Service 14
Dialing filters 15
Direct inward system access (DISA) 17
Unified dialing plan 18
Directory Numbers 18
Line pools 18
Line Pool access codes 18
Unified dialing plan among four systems 19
Call handling capabilities 20
Auxiliary Ringing 20
Callback 20
Camp on 20
Delayed Ring Transfer 20
Held Line Reminder 21
Overflow Call Routing 21
Prime Telephone Call Capture features 21
Planning a network with
ii
Contents
Privacy 21
Service Modes 21
Customer Use
In the public network 23
Call one or more
telephones 23
Call
and select tie lines to the private
network 24
Call
and select lines to the public network 26
Call
and use the paging feature 28
In the private network 30
telephones 30
Call one or more
and select tie lines to other nodes in the
Call
private network 31
Call
and select lines to the public network 33
Call
and use the paging feature 35
In the
system 36
Call a
telephone 36
Select tie trunks to the private network 37
Select lines to the public network 38
Use
system features 39
Planning a network with
What’s new about
at’s new about
Modular Design Release 4 can now be part of your
corporate telecommunications network. You can connect
to your existing private network, or to other
systems to form a
network.
As a Network Manager, you understand your
network, but you want to know how
can add to your
network. This chapter will explain:
how
components behave in a network,
how they benefit your business, and
how you can configure
benefits.
to achieve those
This chapter will not teach you about telecommunications
networks, and it will not teach you about
in general.
If you want to know more about
see the other
chapters in the
Modular DR4 Installer Guide.
Planning a network with
1
2
What’s new about
The Big Picture
E & M trunks
Private network
Public network .
Modular is a digital key system that
enhanced
trunking abilities to broaden network access. Where a
company once had to rely on the public network to access a
small branch office, it can now reach the small office through
the corporate network.
A series of
systems can be linked together to extend
the communications reach of a business. Authorized users
can also access tie-lines, Central Office lines, and
features from-outside the
system.
Bits and pieces
The components that make network access possible are the
uses. Target lines concentrate
trunks and lines that
incoming calls on fewer trunks, and three types of trunks
provide the network access:
E&M trunks handle incoming and outgoing traffic
between the
system and the private network.
DID trunks route incoming calls from the public network
directly to telephones within the
system,
without an attendant.
Loop Start trunks handle incoming and outgoing calls
between
and the public network.
Planning a network with
What’s new about
3
Benefits
Security
provides the security that expanded access
demands:
Control remote access to tie-lines, Central Office lines,
and system features by setting up a specific Class of
Service for each type of caller.
Restrict outgoing calls to certain telephone numbers or
area codes by applying dialing filters to lines and
telephones.
Screen remote callers by configuring trunks to answer
with DISA, a system response that requires callers to
enter a valid password.
Unified dialing plan
When you link a number of
systems into a network,
you can configure them so that the length of Directory
the line pools, and the Line Pool access
Numbers
codes are consistent from one system to the next.
Call handling capabilities
In the
system, the concentrated environment
supports call handling features on up to 184 lines, of which
80 are physical trunks and 104 are target (virtual) lines.
Customer use
Callers in the public network can:
call directly to one or more
telephones.
.
call into the
system and select
tie
lines to access the private network.
call into the
system and select outgoing Central
Office lines to access the public network.
call into the
system and use remote features.
Planning a network with
4 What’s new about
Callers in the private network can:
call directly to one or more
telephones.
call into the
system and select outgoing tie
lines to access other nodes in the private network.
.
call into the
system and select outgoing Central
Office lines to access the public network.
call into the
Callers in the
system and use remote features..
system can:
call directly to a specific
telephone:
select outgoing tie lines to access the private network.
select outgoing tie lines to access features that are
available on the private network.
select outgoing Central Office lines to access the public
network.
use all of the
features, including two new ones:
Line Redirection and Unsupervised Conference with
two external parties.
Planning a network with
Bits and pieces 5
its and pieces
To understand the capabilities that are described later in this
chapter, you need to know how the trunks and lines behave
Modular system.
in the
system
A trunk is a physical connection between the
and the outside world. A line is a flexible communication path
between a
user and the outside world. This allows a
one-to-many relationship between trunks and lines.
What this means is that one trunk does not have to represent
one line, but can represent several lines. You achieve this in
two ways:
1.
Auto-answer trunks
If you want one trunk to serve
many lines, you configure it as Auto-answer. The
system answers calls and maps incoming digits
onto numbers that you define in programming. The
numbers can access the system, so that callers can
then use selected features or call out to another
destination (calling through the system). The numbers
can also access target lines that appear on one or
telephones. Target lines are the subject
more
of the next paragraph.
2.
Target lines incoming calls on one trunk can map
onto a number of different target lines. These are virtual
lines that can appear on a
telephone like any
other line. They are incoming lines only, and can not be
selected for outgoing calls. They are identified to the
system by their number. Any line with a number from
081 to 184 is a target line.
Of course, you can still have a one-to-one relationship
between a trunk and a line. In this case, you configure the
trunk as manual-answer.
Planning a network with
6 Bits and pieces
You can read more on target lines in the Configuration
chapter of the Nor-star Modular DR4 Installer Guide. To learn
more about the types of trunks and the important differences
between auto-answer and manual-answer trunks, read on.
Planning a network with
Bits and pieces
7
Trunks
Key system
intelligent network
PRX
Trunk
, cartridges
Key
An E&M trunk gives incoming and outgoing tie-line access
from other systems in the private network to the
system. E&M trunks can be configured as manual-answer or
auto-answer.
When a call comes in on a manual-answer E&M
alerts at all telephones with that line appearance.
it
When a call comes in on an auto-answer E&M trunk, the
system responds:
Planning a network with
8 Bits and pieces
If the trunk is configured to answer with DISA, the caller
hears stuttered dial tone. The caller must then use a
DTMF telephone to enter a 6-digit Class of Service
(COS) password.
If the trunk does not have DISA, or if the password is
valid, the caller hears system dial tone. The caller can
then use a DTMF telephone to enter a target line
DN (the number that will call for a
number, the
COS password), a Line Pool access code, or a remote
feature code.
When a call comes in on an auto-answer E&M trunk from an
system answers the call and
intelligent network, the
interprets the incoming digits:
If the digits map onto a target line,
routes the
devices with an appearance of that
call to all
line.
If the digits map onto the
DN, the caller hears
stuttered dial tone, after which the caller must use a
DTMF telephone to enter a valid Class of Service
password to get system dial tone.
If the digits map onto the Auto DN (the number for
direct system access), the caller hears system dial
tone, after which the caller can use a DTMF telephone
DN, a Line Pool
to enter a target line number, the
access code, or a remote feature code.
To place an outgoing call, a
caller selects an E&M
trunk by dialing a Line Pool access code or by pressing a
line button on the telephone or by pressing a memory button
which has been programmed with a Line Pool access
Planning a network with
.
Bits and pieces 9
Configuration requirements
In your configuration, you need one
Cartridge for every:
Trunk
2 E&M trunks.
2 DTMF receivers that you require for
Start trunks.
on Loop
You may configure an E&M trunk as the prime line for
telephone.
Planning a network with
Bits and pieces
593-1234
I
Central off ice
DID trunks give you direct inward dialing (DID) from the
public network to the
system. A typical application of
these trunks is to map incoming digits onto target line
appearances within the
system. DID trunks can
operate only as auto-answer trunks.
Planning a network with
Bits and pieces 11
When a call comes in on a DID trunk,
incoming digits:
interprets the
If the digits map onto a target line,
routes the
call to all
devices with an appearance of that
line.
..
If the digits map onto the
DN, the caller hears
stuttered dial tone, after which the caller must use a
DTMF telephone to enter a valid Class of Service
password to get system dial tone.
If the digits map onto the Auto DN, or if the COS
password is valid, the caller hears system dial tone.
The caller can then use a DTMF telephone to enter a
target line number, a Line Pool access code, or a
remote feature code.
Configuration requirements
You need one DID trunk cartridge for every four DID trunks.
Each DID Trunk Cartridge has four DID trunks and four
DTMF receivers dedicated to those trunks.
You can not configure a DID trunk as the prime line for a
telephone.
Planning a network with
12 Bits and pieces
Start Trunks
Loop Start trunks give you incoming and outgoing access to
the public network. However, you would typically configure
your system with Loop Start trunks for outgoing calls and
DID trunks for incoming calls. Loop Start trunks can be
configured as manual-answer or auto-answer.
When a call comes in on a manual-answer Loop start trunk,
it alerts at all telephones with that line appearance.
When a call comes in on an auto-answer Loop start trunk,
responds:
if the trunk is configured to answer with DISA, the caller
hears stuttered dial tone. The caller must then use a
DTMF telephone to enter a 6-digit Class of Service
(COS) password.
if the trunk does not have
or if the COS
password is valid, the caller hears system dial tone.
The caller can then use a DTMF telephone to enter a
DN, a Line Pool access
target line number, the
code, or a remote feature code.
To place an outgoing call, a
caller selects a Loop
Start line by dialing a Line Pool access code or by pressing a
line button on the telephone or by pressing a memory button
which has been programmed with a Line Pool access code.
Planning a network with
Bits and pieces 13
Configuration
requirements
You need one Loop Start Trunk Cartridge for every four
trunks beyond the eight that come with the Key Service Unit.
If you wish to configure your Loop Start lines as
answer, the lines must have disconnect supervision. You will
also need one
Trunk Cartridge for every two
Loop Start lines that you configure as auto-answer.
Note that an auto-answer Loop Start trunk can give you the
same kind of direct inward dialing function as a DID trunk,
but you will require
Trunk Cartridges (as
mentioned in the previous paragraph) to receive the
incoming digits from the Central Office.
You may configure a Loop Start line as the prime line for a
telephone.
Planning a network with
14
Benefits
Security
In the Capabilities section of Administration programming,
there are several ways of protecting your
system
from unauthorized access.
Class of Service
Class of Service (COS) refers to the capabilities that
provides to users who access the system from the public or
private network. The Class of Service includes:
filters that restrict dialing on the line.
an access package, which defines the set of line pools
that may be accessed and whether or not the user has
access to the paging feature.
The Class of Service that is applied to an incoming
access call is determined by:
the filters that you apply to the incoming trunk, or by
the COS password that the caller used to gain access
to the
system.
is not applied to incoming calls, the
In cases where
remote caller can change the Class of Service by dialing the
DN and entering a COS password.
To program COS passwords, see Capabilities in the
Administration chapter of the
Modular
Guide.
Planning a network with
Benefits 15
Dialing filters
You can use dialing filters to restrict the numbers that may
be dialed on any external line within your
system.
You may specify up to 100 dialing filters for the system. A
dialing filter consists of up to 48 restrictions and their
associated exceptions.
Dialing within the system
To restrict dialing within the system, you can apply
filters to outgoing external lines (as line filters), to telephones
(as set filters), and to external lines on specific telephones
(as line per set filters).
Line
Filter
no long
line 1
line 5
Line per Set
Filter
Planning a network with
16
Benefits
Dialed digits must pass both the line filter and the set filter.
The line per set filter overrides the line filter and set filter.
In the diagram on the previous page, a caller using line I
could not dial any long-distance number except to area
codes 212 and 718. A caller using line 3 could not dial any
long-distance number. A caller using line 5 could dial
distance numbers to area codes 212, 718, and 415.
Note:
Set filters have no effect on the numbers that are
dialed out on an E&M trunk.
.
Dialing outside the system
To restrict dialing outside the system (once a caller gains
remote access), you can apply dialing filters to incoming
external lines (as remote filters).
Line
Filter
no long
distance
Remote
Filter
Remote
caller
no long
distance
except
area codes
212.718
Access Code
,
Dialed digits in this case must pass both the remote filter and
the line filter. A remote caller can override these filters by
dialing the
DN and entering a Class of Service
password.
For programming instructions, see the Administration
chapter of the
Modular DR4 Installer Guide.
Planning a network with
Benefits 17
Direct inward system access (DISA)
To control access from the public or private network, you
configure auto-answer trunks to answer with DISA. Remote
callers hear stuttered dial tone and must then enter a Class
of Service password that determines what they are allowed
to do in the system.
Auto-answer Loop Start and E&M trunks are configured to
answer with
by default.
Note:
You must have one
Trunk Cartridge for
every two auto-answer Loop Star-t trunks.
DID trunks can not be configured to answer with DISA. If you
want incoming DID calls to be answered with
configure the system with a
DN. Incoming DID calls
that map onto the
DN will then be routed to a line that
has DISA.
For programming instructions, see the Configuration chapter
of the
Modular DR4 Installer Guide.
Planning a network with
18
Benefits
Unified dialing plan
The
system does not support a coordinated dialing
plan for other systems in the network. However, if you are
configuring more than one
system in your network,
you can make access between the systems much easier
with a unified dialing plan.
Directory Numbers
Make sure that the length of your
systems.
is the same for all the
Line pools
If the
systems are close to each other
geographically, you can conserve resources by not
duplicating access. For example, system A has a line pool to
New York, System B has a line pool to Los Angeles, and
system C has a line pool to Dallas. A
user in system
A calls system C to get the line pool to Dallas.
Line Pool access codes
To simplify access between
systems, all line pools
that go to the same destination should have the same Line
Pool access code. For example, system A and system B
both have a line pool to Nashville. You can configure both
systems with the same Line Pool access code for the
Nashville line pool.
Planning a network with
.
Benefits 19
Unified dialing plan among four systems
A dialing plan similar to the one below will let you to create a
company directory that includes the line pool access codes.
Netwk
5234
Rec’d #: 234
Internal #: 234
Netwk #: 6334
Rec’d #: 334
Internal #: 334
E&M
E&M
Netwk #: 8534
Netwk #: 7434
Internal #: 434
For instance, the person on System A at telephone 234 can
select an intercom button and dial 7434.
This means that telephone 234 has dialed the line pool
access code of the trunk to System C, and will receive the
dial tone of System C. The digits 434 then map to the
Received number 434, and ring telephone 434 with an
appearance of the associated target line.
Planning a network with
20
Benefits
Call handling capabilities
The addition of target lines to the Nor-star Modular system
means that call coverage is extended. All call handling
features that apply to regular lines also apply to target lines.
Here are some brief descriptions of features that apply to
any line appearance on a
telephone. For complete
information on these features, see the Telephone features
.
Modular
Installer Guide.
chapter of the
Auxiliary Ringing
If the
system has an auxiliary ringer (a bell that is not
part of a telephone), the target line can be administered so
that the auxiliary ringer alerts in addition to the telephone
ringer.
Callback
When an external call on a target line is transferred to a busy
telephone or not answered after a few rings, the call
automatically rings at the prime telephone for that line. The
display shows that the telephone was busy or that the call
was not answered.
Camp on
Even when a telephone is busy, a call on a target line can be
routed to the telephone, where it waits in a queue until the
telephone is not busy.
Delayed Ring Transfer
Target line calls that go unanswered after a specified
number of rings can be routed to the prime telephone if
programmed to do so in Configuration.
Planning a network with
.
Benefits 21
Held Line Reminder
When a target line call is placed on hold, the telephone gives
two reminder tones at periodic intervals until the call is taken
off hold. This happens only if Held reminder is activated
during Configuration programming.
Overflow Call Routing
If a call comes in for a target line that is busy,
routes
the call to the prime telephone for that target line. If you don’t
assign a prime telephone for the target line or if a call can
not be mapped onto a target line, the call will go to the prime
telephone for the incoming trunk.
Prime Telephone Call Capture features
See the Prime Telephone User Card for details.
Privacy
When a
user is on an external call and the Privacy
feature is turned on, no other
telephone with the
same target line can join in on the call. If Privacy is turned
off, another person with the same line can press the line
button to join in your conversation, forming a conference.
Service Modes
When there are fewer people available to answer calls
during lunch hours, nights, or weekends, you can administer
the system so that target line calls ring at certain telephones.
Planning a network with
22
Customer use
This section shows you sample configurations for the
different types of network access. Each example has four
parts:
A diagram shows the route that a call follows from
beginning to end.
A scenario explains the caller’s goal and the actions
needed to accomplish it.
A list shows the
the configuration.
hardware required to support
A table shows the programming settings in
Configuration and Administration. Only those settings
that are important to network access are described
here.
In many cases, there are several ways to configure your
system for a particular type of network access. The
examples show the more typical configurations.
Planning a network with
Customer use
23
the public network
Call one or more
telephones
Target line
Ms. Nelson
trunk
cartridges
Target line
083
Accountant
(telephone 226)
Ms. Nelson is a bank customer who has a question for an
accountant. She dials the telephone number that maps onto
target line 083. All of the accountants’ telephones ring.
Hardware : any version of KSU, 1 Trunk Module, 1 DID
Trunk Cartridge.
Program heading
Setting
1.
Rec’d
(for Line083)
Data
5. System Data
Rec’d length:4 (can be up to 7
digits, but must match number
of digits sent by Central Office)
Planning a network with
24
Customer use
Call
network
and select tie lines to the private
DID
E&M line pool
Campaign
manager
Nors
to
Washington
A campaign manager in Georgia wants to use the tie lines at
headquarters to call Washington. The manager dials a
telephone number that maps onto the
DN, enters a
Class of Service (COS) password, then dials a Line Pool
access code to select a tie line to Washington.
Hardware : any version of KSU, 1 Trunk Module, 1 DID
Trunk Cartridge, 2
Trunk Cartridges (for the three
trunks in the line pool to Washington)
Planning a network with
Customer use
Program heading
25
Setting
Incoming trunk:
1.
Data
4. Miscellaneous
5. System Data
Rec’d length:4 (can be up to 7
digits, but must match number
of digits sent by Central Office)
Outgoing trunk:
1.
Data
4. Miscellaneous
Line01
Line type:Pool F
Line pool
(up to 4 digits)
5. Capabilities
Dialing filters
Rem access pkgs
Line filters
COS passwords
Define filters.
Define remote access pkgs.
Assign a dialing filter to the line.
Assign passwords and filters for
each class of service.
Planning a network with
26
Customer use
Call
and select lines to the public network
Business
client
DID
Central office
Line
pool
Central office
Gord wants to make a long-distance business call from
home. To avoid being charged, he dials the telephone
number that maps onto the Auto DN at work. After hearing
dial tone, Gord dials a Line Pool access code to select a line
to the public network. He then dials the long-distance
number.
Hardware : any version of KSU, 1 Trunk Module, 1 DID
Trunk Cartridge
Planning a network with
Customer use
Program heading
27
Setting
Incoming trunk:
1.
Data
4. Miscellaneous
Auto
5. System Data
Rec’d # length:4 (can be up to 7
digits, but must match number
of digits sent by Central Office)
5. Capabilities
Dialing filters
Rem access pkgs
Line abilities
Define dialing filters.
Define remote access pkgs.
Assign a remote filter and
remote pkg to the line.
Outgoing trunk:
1.
Data
4. Miscellaneous
Line001
Line
Line pool
A
234
5. Capabilities
Line filter
Assign a dialing filter to the line.
Planning a network with
28 Customer use
Call
and use the paging feature
President
at home
“I’m going to
be late, people.
You’ve got 30
more minutes
to prepare
your reports.”
Central office
The company president is going to be late for a meeting at
the office. The president dials the number that maps onto the
Auto DN, dials the paging feature code, selects a page zone,
and makes an announcement.
Hardware : any version of KSU, 1 Trunk Module, 1 DID
Trunk Cartridge
Planning a network with
Customer use
Program heading
29
Setting
Incoming trunk:
1.
Data
4. Miscellaneous
Auto
5. System Data
Rec’d # length:4 (can be up to 7
digits, but must match number
of digits sent by Central Office)
5. Capabilities
Rem access pkgs
Line abilities
Define remote access pkgs.
Assign a remote pkg to the
trunk.
Planning a network with
30
Customer use
the private network
Call one or more
telephones
target line
E&M
083
Manager
in Dallas
PBX in
Houston
The production supervisor in Houston selects the
expensive company tie line to call the manager at the
Administration office in Dallas. Once the line is selected, the
production supervisor dials the digits that will map onto the
target line of the manager in Dallas.
Hardware : any version of KSU,
Trunk Cartridge
Program heading
Trunk Module, 1
Setting
Incoming trunk:
1.
Data
5. System Data
Planning a network with
Rec’d
(for target line 083)
E&M
Ans mode:Auto
Rec’d # length:4 (can be up to 7
digits, but must match number
of digits sent by Central
Customer use 31
Call Nor-star and select tie lines to other nodes in
the private network
r
At a branch office, Joan selects a tie line to the government
office downtown. After hearing dial tone, she dials a Line
Pool access code to select another tie line to a government
office in the next state.
Hardware : any version of KSU, 1 Trunk Module, 2
Trunk Cartridges (for the three lines in the line
pool and the one incoming line)
Planning a network with
32
Customer use
Program heading
Setting
Incoming trunk:
Data
1.
Ans mode:Auto
5. Capabilities
Dialing filters
Rem access pkgs
Line abilities
Define dialing filters.
Define remote access pkgs.
Assign a remote filter and
remote pkg to the trunk.
Outgoing trunk:
1.
Data
4. Miscellaneous
Line01
Line
D
Line pool
(up to 4 digits)
5. Capabilities
Line filter
Planning a network with
Assign a dialing filter to the
trunk.
Customer use
33
and select lines to the public network
r
Liz in
Memphis
Client in
Chicago
Key system
Central off ice
Liz needs to call long-distance to a client in Chicago. She
selects a tie-line to the branch office in Chicago. After
hearing dial tone, she dials a Line Pool access code to select
a line to the public network. Then she dials the client’s
number as a local call.
Hardware : any version of KSU, 1 Trunk Module, 1
Trunk Cartridge
Planning a network with
34
Customer use
Program heading
Setting
Incoming trunk:
Data
Ans mode:Auto
5. Capabilities
Dialing filters
Rem access pkgs
Line abilities
Define dialing filters.
Define remote access pkgs.
Assign a remote filter and
remote pkg to the trunk.
Outgoing trunk:
Data
4. Miscellaneous
Line001
Line type:Pool B
Line pool
(up to 4 digits)
5. Capabilities
Line filter
Planning a network with
Assign a dialing filter to the line.
Customer use
35
Call Not-star and use the paging feature
office now!”
Private network
Journalist
in Buffalo
New York office
A journalist in Buffalo knows that the New York editor is
never at her desk. The journalist selects an E&M tie-line to
the New York news office and dials the Page feature code.
The journalist then selects a page zone and pages the editor.
Hardware : any version of KSU, 1 Trunk Module,
1
Trunk Cartridge
Program heading
Setting
Incoming trunk:
Data
Ans mode:Auto
5. Capabilities
Dialing filters
Rem access pkgs
Line abilities
Define dialing filters.
Define remote access pkgs.
Assign a remote filter and
remote pkg to the trunk.
Planning a network with
36
Customer use
In the
system
Call a
telephone
Dr. Kidd
3459
telephone
To call within the
system, Dr.
in Research
dials an internal telephone number which makes Dr. Kidd’s
telephone alert in Pediatrics.
Hardware : Version 1 or higher KSU
Programming:
There are no network-related programming requirements for
an internal call.
Planning a network with
Customer use
37
Select tie trunks to the private network
For a confidential call, the Montana sales manager presses
the line button for a private E&M trunk to the Oregon office.
This automatically alerts at the line appearance on the
telephone of the Oregon sales manager.
Hardware : (for both systems) any version of KSU, 1 Trunk
Module, 1
Trunk Cartridge
Program heading
Setting
Outgoing trunk (Montana):.
1.
Data
Line type:Private
Incoming trunk (Oregon):
1.
Data
Ans
Line type:Private
Planning a network with
38
Customer use
Select lines to the public network
Marj’s
home
Marj
at work
Line I
Loop start
Central office
To call her home nearby, Marj in shipping presses a line
button on her telephone to select an outgoing line to the
public network. She then dials her home telephone number.
Hardware : Version or higher KSU
Program heading
Setting
Outgoing trunk:
Data
Line001
Line
(or Private)
5. Capabilities
Dialing filters
Set filter
Line filter
Planning a network with
Define dialing filters.
Assign a dialing filter to the set.
Assign a dialing filter to the line.
Customer use 39
Use
system features
Unsupervised Conference with two external parties
Central Office
Central Office
Customer
Maureen
Technical
information
A customer dials the number that maps onto the target line
at Maureen’s telephone. Maureen, the technical
representative, sees that the customer wants highly technical
information. She puts the customer’s call on hold and calls a
technical information service. Then she joins the two parties
in a conference call.
Planning a network with
40
Customer use
Central Off ice
I Central Office
Customer
Technical
information
Maureen
When it is clear that she is not needed, Maureen dials the
Transfer feature code and leaves the conference. The other
two parties remain connected, and the lines on Maureen’s
telephone stay busy until one of the two parties disconnects.
Hardware : Version 2 or higher KSU, a DID Trunk Cartridge
Note: The incoming trunk must have disconnect supervision.
Program heading
S e t t i n g
Incoming trunk:
1.
Data
Rec’d
target line)
5. System Data
(for Maureen’s
Rec’d # length:4 (can be up to 7
digits, but must match number
of digits sent by Central Office)
Outgoing trunk:
1.
Planning a network with
Data
Line001
Trunk mode:Super
Customer use 41
Line Redirection feature
Branch office
Main office
incoming call
The branch office is receiving more calls than it can handle,
so it redirects one of its lines to the main office. All calls that
come in on target line 092 will be routed out on line 003 to
the main office. Whenever a call is redirected, the target line
and outgoing line will be busy for the duration of the call.
Hardware : Version 2 or higher KSU, an
Trunk
Cartridge if the incoming trunk is E&M, or a DID Trunk
Cartridge if the incoming trunk is DID.
Any line appearance on a telephone can be selected
as the incoming line to be redirected. A target line
can not be selected as the outgoing line for
redirection.
Note: The incoming trunk must have disconnect supervision.
Planning a network with
42
Customer use
Program heading
Setting
Incoming trunk:
1.
Data
Line001
Trunk
Ans mode:Auto
OR
Line 009:DIDI
OR
Line
Ans mode:Auto
Rec’d
(for target line 092)
5. System Data
Rec’d length:4 (can be up to 7
digits, but must match number
of digits sent by Central Office)
Outgoing trunk:
1.
Data
Line 003:Loop
OR
Line01
For more information on features, see the Telephone
Installer Guide.
features chapter of the Not-star Modular
Planning a network with
telemanuals.com
telemanuals.com
Contents
About this chapter 1
Anaioq Terminal Adapter 2
Lamp Field 3
4
Central Answering Position module 5
Data Communications Interface 6
cables 7
Expansion Cartridae 8
Feature Cartridge 9
Kev Service Unit 10
telephone 11
M7208 telephone 12
M7310 telephone 13
M7324 telephone 14
brackets 15
PC Interface card 16
Power bar 17
Station Auxiliary Power Supply 18
Station Module 19
Trunk Cartridge 20
Trunk Module 21
Components
i
About this chapter
1
this chapter
This chapter briefly describes the main components of the
Modular system. The components are arranged in
alphabetical order. For quick reference, each component’s
description appears on a separate page. Illustrations help
you identify each component.
Components
2
Analog Terminal Adapter
Terminal Adapter
The Analog Terminal Adapter
converts the
digital interface to analog signals. This allows the connection
of analog devices such as single line telephones, FAX
machines, modems, and answering machines. The
allows single line telephones to access
features such
as Transfer, Call Pickup, and Exclusive Hold.
Analog Terminal Adapter
Components
Busy Lamp Field 3
The Busy Lamp Field (BLF) contains a panel of LCD
indicators, and connects to the
telephone. These
indicators reflect the status (idle or busy) of
telephones corresponding to dual-memory buttons
programmed for Internal Autodial.
Busy Lamp Field
-
II
-
-
J)
Components
4
Cable troughs
Cable troughs are used to route the cabling from the Key
Service Unit (KSU), the Trunk Module, and the Station
Module. Each cable trough is detachable from its module.
There are two sizes of cable troughs:
half-size
quarter-size
l
l
Two half-size cable troughs are attached to the KSU; one
half-size cable trough is attached to the Trunk Module; and
the quarter-size cable trough is attached to the Station
Module.
Half-size and quarter-size cable troughs
Components
Central Answering Position module
.
5
The Central Answering Position (CAP) module is a device
which connects to an M7324 telephone. A second CAP
module can also be attached to the first. Each CAP module
shows the status (busy or not busy) of as many as 48
telephones. You can press CAP module buttons to answer
external calls on up to 80 lines (if two CAP modules are
attached). You can also use CAP module buttons to program
features and
numbers. You need a Station Auxiliary
Power Supply for every two CAP modules.
CAP module
Components
6
Data Communications interface
Data Communications
The Data Communications Interface
allows you to attach
any serial RS-232 data device to the
system. You can
then place external data calls using an external line, or place
.
within the
system.
internal data calls to other
Data Communications Interface
Components
DS-30 cables
DS-30 cables connect Trunk Modules and Station Modules
to the KSU. One end of a DS-30 cable plugs into the
appropriate connector in the Trunk Module or Station
Module. The other end plugs into a connector in the
Expansion Cartridge.
DS-30 cables
Components
8
Expansion Cartridge
The Expansion Cartridge allows for the addition of extra
Trunk Modules and/or Station Modules to the
system. This Cartridge fits into the right slot of the Key
Service Unit (KSU).
The two-port Expansion Cartridge allows up to two additional
modules (Trunk Modules and/or Station Modules) to be
connected to the Modular system. The six-port Expansion
Cartridge allows the connection of up to six additional Trunk
or Station Modules.
and six-port Expansion Cartridges
Components
Feature Cartridge 9
The Feature Cartridge is made up of a Software Cartridge and
a Data Cartridge. The Software Cartridge contains the system
programming. The Data Cartridge contains the data from
Configuration and Administration programming.
The Software Cartridge slides into the Data Cartridge. The
Feature Cartridge assembly is then inserted into
When there is a software upgrade, only the Software
Cartridge, and not the Data Cartridge, needs to be replaced.
Unassembled and assembled Feature Cartridges
Software Cartridge
Data Cartridge
Components
10
Key Service Unit
The Key Service Unit (KSU) is the hub of the
System.
It can function on its own as a basic system (with up to 24
telephones and eight external lines). The system
may also be expanded by any combination of up to six Trunk
Modules and/or Station Modules.
Key Service Unit
Components
telephone
The
11
M7100 telephone offers the following features:
l
a one-line display
l
one memory button without an indicator
telephone
Components
12
M7208 telephone
telephone
The
M7208 telephone offers the following features:
a one-line display
l
eight memory buttons with indicators
l
Handsfree capability
M7208 telephone
Components
telephone
The
l
13
M7310 telephone offers the following features:
a two-line display
three display buttons
.
l
l
l
memory buttons with indicators
12 dual memory buttons without indicators
a shift button
Handsfree capability
telephone
Components
14
M7324 telephone
The
M7324 telephone offers the following features:
a two-line display
l
three display buttons
l
24 memory buttons with indicators
l
l
Handsfree capability
M7324 telephone
Components
Mounting brackets
15
brackets
Mounting brackets support the Key Service Unit, Trunk
Module and Station Module on a wall. These brackets are
notched at the ends to aid in mounting the modules. Three
sizes of mounting bracket are available:
Size:
Full-size
Half-size
Quarter-size
Mounting for:
Key Service Unit
Trunk Module
Station Module
Mounting brackets
Components
16 PC Interface card
The PC Interface card connects the
system to a
Personal Computer (PC), This allows PC applications to run
with the
system. The PC Interface card fits inside the
PC.
C Interface card
Components
Power bar 17
The power bar provides four plug-in outlets for Trunk
Modules and/or Station Modules. It should be installed in the
lower half of the cable trough. If more modules are required
than can be plugged into one power bar, a second power bar
is required.
.
There are two types of power bars:
the 110 volt power bar which is
approved
for use in North America
the 220 volt power bar for use outside North America
l
l
1 IO and 220 volt power bars
r
Components
18
Station Auxiliary Power Supply
The
Station Auxiliary Power Supply (SAPS) is a
power transformer which plugs into a grounded 110 V ac
outlet. The SAPS provides regulated direct current for either
of two
applications:
.
.
station loops longer than 305 m (1000 ft)
a Central Answering Position (CAP)
One SAPS can power two CAP modules, which do not have
to be connected to the same M7324 telephone.
Station Auxiliary Power Supply
Components
Station Module
19
odule
The Station Module allows up to 16 additional
telephones to be connected to the Modular system. A
DS-30 cable connects each Station Module to the KSU.
Station Module
.
Components
20 /Trunk Cartridge
The Trunk Cartridge, when inserted in a Trunk Module, adds
system. Up to three
up to four external lines to the
Trunk Cartridges can be added to each Trunk Module.
There are three types of Trunk Cartridges:
the Loop Start Trunk Cartridge (4 lines)
the
Trunk Cartridge (2 trunks)
the DID Trunk Cartridge (4 trunks)
l
l
l
The Loop Start Trunk Cartridge supports regular external
lines. The
Trunk Cartridge connects
to a
private network. The DID Trunk Cartridge supports direct
inward dialing on incoming external lines.
Loop Start,
Components
and DID Trunk Cartridges
Trunk Module
21
The Trunk Module allows additional Trunk Cartridge
installation. This in turn allows more external lines to be
connected to the
system. The Trunk Module has
three slots in front for inserting Trunk Cartridges. Each Trunk
Module can add a maximum of 12 external lines (four external
lines per Trunk Cartridge). All three types of Trunk
(Loop Start,
and DID) can be mixed in one Trunk
Module.
Trunk Module
Components
telemanuals.com
Hardware installation
l
**ooeaoooo*ooooooooooooooooooooooo
telemanuals.com
Regulations
iii
Rights of the Telephone Company
If the system is determined to be causing harm to the
telephone network, the telephone company may discontinue
your service temporarily. If possible, the telephone company
will notify you in advance. If advance notice is not practical,
you will be notified as soon as possible. You will be given the
opportunity to correct the situation and you will be informed
of your right to file a complaint to the FCC. Your telephone
company may make changes in its facilities, equipment;
operations or procedures that could affect the proper
functioning of your system. If it does this, you will be notified
in advance to give you the opportunity to maintain
uninterrupted telephone service.
In the event of an equipment malfunction, all repairs will be
performed by Northern Telecom Inc. or by one of its
authorized dealers.
Address of repair facility
USA
Canada
Northern Telecom Inc.
Northern Telecom Canada Ltd.
Product Service Center
Customer Service Dept. 9 1 4
Drive
12345
Albert Hudon
720
Nashville, TN
Attn. RA#
Use of a Music source
In accordance with U.S. Copyright Law, a license may be
required from the American Society of Composers, Authors
and Publishers, or similar organization if Radio or TV
broadcasts are transmitted through the Music On Hold or
Background Music features of this telecommunication
system.
Northern Telecom Inc. hereby disclaims any liability arising
out of the failure to obtain such a license.
Hardware installation
telemanuals.com
iv
Regulations
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for
radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the
Radio interference Regulations of the Canadian Department
of Communications.
General installation warnings
WARNING
telephones must not be used as Off Premises
telephones are for use with
Station Sets (OPS).
equipment only. Connecting a
telephone
directly to a CO line may result in equipment damage.
For OPS applications use the
Analog Terminal
with single-line telephones.
Adapter
Installers should also check the lightening protectors at
the cable entry point to the building with special attention
to the ground. Any problems should be reported to the
telephone company in writing.
telephone wiring
should not leave the building, as it is not
protected.
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock, hazard to personnel, or
equipment damage, observe the following precautions
when installing telephone equipment:
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless
the jack is specifically designed for wet locations.
Never touch non-insulated. telephone wires or terminals
unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the
network interface.
Use caution when installing or modifying the telephone
lines.
l
l
l
l
Hardware installation
telemanuals.com
Regulations i
Radio Frequency Interference
WARNING
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy. If not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, it may cause
interference to radio communications. It has been tested
and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of the
FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable
protection against such interference when operated in a
commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in
a residential area is likely to cause interference, in which
case the user, at his own expense, will be required to
take whatever measures may be required to correct the
interference. Each Meridian
Key Telephone
System is assigned an FCC Registration Number and a
Ringer Equivalence designation. The number and
designation are printed on the Key Service Unit (KSU)
label on the front of the unit inside the door.
Registration
The Meridian
Key Telephone System is registered
with the FCC based upon compliance with Part 68 of its
rules. Connection of the Meridian
Key Telephone
System to the nationwide telecommunications network is
made through a standard network interface jack that you
can order from your telephone company. Jacks for this type
of customer-provided equipment will not be provided on
party lines or coin lines.
Hardware installation
telemanuals.com
ii Regulations
Ringer Equivalence Number (REN)
The FCC Registration Label, on the inside of the door on the
front of the Key Service Unit (KSU), includes the Ringer
Equivalence Number (REN). This number shows the
electrical load that your
KSU requires from your
telephone line. If the KSU requires more electrical current
than your telephone company’s central office equipment can
provide, your telephones may not ring and you may have
difficulty dialing telephone numbers.
Call the telephone company to find out the total REN allowed
for your telephone line(s).
Hearing Aid Compatibility
Meridian
telephones are Hearing Aid compatible, as
defined in Section 68.316 of Part 68 FCC Rules.
Telephone Company Registration
It is usually not necessary to call the telephone company
with information on the equipment before connecting the
Meridian
Key Telephone System Key Service Unit
(KSU) to the telephone network but, if the telephone
company requires this information, provide the following:
Telephone number(s) to which the Key Service Unit (KSU)
will be connected.
FCC Registration Number (on label affixed to KSU,
inside the door).
Ringer Equivalence Number (on label affixed to KSU,
inside the door).
USOC Jack
RJ-21 X
for
service)
Service Order Code (SOC)
9.0 F
Facility Interface Code (FIC)
for
service)
l
l
l
l
l
l
Hardware installation
Contents v
Pre-installation
Checking the location
Environment
Power source 2
Checking the equipment 3
Internal wiring 3
Tools 3
Unpacking the equipment 3
Installation
The KSU, TM and SM 4
Recommended cable routing in cable troughs 4
Modular system hardware configuration 5
Reading the hardware chart 6
Hanging the modules on mounting brackets 8
Mounting the KSU, TM and SM 11
Installing an Expansion Cartridge 15
Installing a Trunk Cartridge 17
KSU and TM external lines 21
External line cable and wiring material required 21
Connecting external lines 21
KSU and SM internal wiring 25
Station telephone cable and wiring material required:
25
Connecting KSU and SM internal wiring: 26
Connecting
Cables 29
Installing the Feature Cartridge 32
Emergency telephones 34
Connecting emergency telephones for a KSU 34
Connecting the emergency telephone for a TM 35
Testing the emergency telephones 36
Hardware installation
vi Contents
Optional equipment 37
Installing an auxiliary ringer control 37
Installing an external music source 38
Installing an external paging system 39
Not-star telephones 42
Hearing aid compatibility 42
Installing M7324, M7310, M7208, and M7100
Telephones 42
Installing a wall-mounted telephone 43
Applying the button cap labels 47
Types of button caps 47
Typing the telephone numbers 48
default button assignments 49
Rules of default button assignment 49
Telephone button defaults 50
Power Bar installation 54
Installing a 110 V Power Bar 54
Installing a 220 V Power Bar 55
Power up
system 56
Powering up 56
Automatic Telephone Relocation and telephone
replacement 58
Automatic Telephone Relocation 58
Relocating a telephone 58
Telephone replacement 59
Replacing
telephones of the same type 59
Replacing
telephones of different types
Status of a telephone that was replaced 60
Hardware installation
Pre-installation 1
Checking the location
Check the location where the
system modules, the
telephones, and auxiliary equipment are to be installed. This
includes making sure sufficient space is available to install
the components.
If a smooth surface is not available, cut a backboard large
enough to accommodate the system modules and the
distribution block. The system module physical dimensions
are listed in the Installation section of this chapter.
CAUTION
All modules must be mounted well above the floor to
prevent water damage.
CAUTION
Mount the KSU vertically to avoid overheating.
Check also that the requirements for the environment and for
the power source are met.
Environment
Clean, dry, and well-ventilated
Temperature:
to 50°C (32°F to 122°F)
Humidity: 5% to
non-condensing
Location: at least 4 m (13.1 from equipment such as
copiers, electrical motors, and other equipment that can
produce electromagnetic, radio frequency, and
electrostatic interference.
Hardware installation
2 Pre-installation
Note:
Installers should also check the lightning protectors
at the cable entry point to the building with special
attention to the grounding. Any problems should be
reported to the telephone company in writing.
Telephone wiring must not leave the
buildings, as it is not lightning-protected.
Power source
Non-switched outlet
ac outlet located not more than 1.5 m (4.9 from the.
Key Service Unit (KSU). The actual distance from
KSU to the Power Bar may vary with additional Trunk
and Station Modules. Do not use an extension cord
between the KSU and the power bar.
For the
V system
Dedicated 110 V ac nominal,
service with third wire ground.
Hz, 15 A minimum
For the 220 V system
Dedicated 220-240 V ac nominal,
Hz,
10 A minimum service with third wire ground.
WARNING
The ac outlet must be equipped with
to avoid electromagnetic interference.
Hardware installation
wire ground
Pre-installation 3
Checking the equipment
Check that you have the equipment required for
wiring
All new or existing wiring must meet the following
specifications:
one twisted or spiraled pair per telephone
dc loop resistance less than 59 ohms
cable length (0.5 mm or 24 AWG) not exceeding 305 m
(1000
A
Station Auxiliary Power Supply can be used
to extend the length of the loop if the cable length
exceeds 305 m (1000 ft) but is less than 785 m
(2600 ft)
no bridge taps.
screwdriver, diagonal cutters, pliers, connecting tool,
pencil, level (optional)
backboard, wooden, 19 mm
recommended)
19 mm
bracket
38 mm (1
inch) thick (when
inch) screws suitable for surface mounting
inch) screws for cable trough.
Unpacking the equipment
When unpacking the equipment, keep the boxes and inserts
in case any of the equipment has been damaged and must
be shipped back.
Hardware installation
4 Installation
The MSU, TM and SM
The Key Service Unit (KSU), Trunk Modules (TM) and
Station Modules (SM) can be physically mounted in any
order. Allow suitable wall space for installing Trunk and
Station Modules for future expansion.
Note:
The doors of the KSU, TM and SM should not be
removed.
Recommended cable routing in cable troughs
Cable troughs beneath the KSU, TM and SM hold the
cables, the DS-30 cables, the power cord(s) and the
Power Bar (if required for a particular installation).
The cable troughs have been designed to keep the ac power
cables
cords and ac Power Bar separate from the
and to allow ease of access after the installation. Place the
cabling in the two shelves as described in the following chart.
Cable placement
Upper shelf
All
only.
cables and DS-30 cables
Place
cables in the back.
Place the DS-30 cables in the front.
Lower shelf
Hardware installation
All power cords and the Power
Bar(s) only.
Installation 5
Modular system hardware configuration
This chart shows combinations of Trunk Modules (TM),
Trunk Cartridges (TC) and Station Modules (SM) for
expanding the Modular system. The first number represents
the number of physical external lines; the second number
represents the number of telephones. See the next page for
how to read the chart.
.
Possible line and station configurations
SM
TM
TC
0
SM
SM
1
2
SM
SM
3
4
5
0
0
8-24
8-40
8-56
8-72
8-88
1
1
12-24
12-40
12-56
12-72
12-88
12-104
2
16-24
16-40
16-72
16-88
16-l 04
14
64-24
64-40
15
68-24
68-40
6
Note:
1
6
8-104 8 - 1 2 0
6
17
76-241
18
80-24
Number of physical lines shown is for Loop Start and DID Trunk Cartridges
only.
Trunk Cartridges provide half the number of
Hardware installation
6 Installation
Key to the terms
the hardware chart
Term
Number of Trunk Modules
Number of Trunk Cartridges (maximum of 3
for each TM)
Number of Station Modules
The KSU has a maximum of 8 lines and 24
telephones.
TC
SM
8-24
Reading the hardware chart
To find the maximum number of lines and telephones for a
particular configuration of KSU, TM(s) and
1.
Find the number of
in the left column.
2.
Find the number of
in the top row.
3.
Read across to the right from the TM column and down
from the SM row. A pair of numbers indicates lines and
and
telephones for that combination of
For each pair of numbers on the chart:
left number
right number
maximum number of lines.
maximum number of telephones.
Examples:
8-24
12-40
Hardware installation
=
8 lines and 24 telephones (KSU without
or
=
12 lines and 24 telephones (KSU lines and
telephones, plus one TM and one TC with 4
more lines, and no
=
12 lines and 40 telephones (KSU lines and
telephones, plus one TM and one TC with
more lines, and one SM with 16 more
telephones).
Installation 7
Physical dimensions of
KSU, TM
Height
without cable
trough
500 mm
(19.7 i n )
500 mm
(19.7 in)
500 mm
(19.7 in)
Width
395 mm
(15.5 in)
198 mm
(7.8 in)
98
(3.8 in)
171 mm
171 mm
171 mm
(6.7 in)
(6.7 in)
(6.7 in)
Clearance
(front)
346 mm
(13.6 in)
346 mm
(13.6 in)
245 mm
(9.6 in)
Weight
7 . 5 Kg
(16.6
4 . 3 Kg
(9.5 lb.)
2 . 4 Kg
(5.3 lb.)
Depth
Dimensions of the
r
Modular System
KSU
TM
395 mm(15.5 in.)
If possible, leave
enough room for
future expansion
t
SM
696 mm (27.5 in.)
SM
If possible, leave
enough room for
future
Widths
Note:
Modules may be installed in any order. If possible,
leave enough room for expansion as indicated.
Hardware installation
8 Installation
Hanging the modules on mounting brackets
Leave about 150 mm (6 inches) of space above the screw
holes of the mounting bracket. This allows room to lift the
KSU, TM and SM ON and OFF the bracket and provides
space for venting the heat from the modules.
Bottom
Ensure there is at least 100 mm (4 inches) of space between
the bottom of the cable trough and the floor, or any object
that may block the flow of air from the bottom, for cooling.
Sides
Leave enough room to be able to open the doors of the
modules and to run cabling out to the side.
Between modules
The space between two modules hung on the mounting
brackets is approximately 3 mm
inch).
Note:
Hardware installation
See the illustration showing dimensions of the
Modular system for additional module
clearance requirements.
Installation 9
Key Service Unit (KSU)
LED
CO Lines 50-pin connector
Feature cartridge (2 parts)
Cable
clips
Stations
connector
Expansion cartridge
cartridge shown)
Half-size
Cable trough
Trunk Module (TM)
Slot for Trunk cartridge
(face plate removed)
Protective faceplates
covering unused slots
LED
DS-30 port
Cable clip
50-pin connector
Trunk cartridge
Half-size
Cable trough
Hardware installation
IO
Station Module (SM)
LED
DS-30 port
Cable clips
connector
Cable clips
Quarter-size
Cable trough
Hardware installation
Installation 1 1
Mounting the KSU, TM and
-1.
Position metal mounting bracket(s): Fasten the
bracket to the wall using four 19 mm
in) screws.
Hint:
Use a level and draw a pencil line to align the
KSU. This will be useful to line up Trunk and
Station Modules if they are part of the system.
installing the KSU mounting bracket
Hardware installation
12 installation
2.
Slide the KSU, TM or SM down onto the mounting
brackets. Line up with the notches on either side of the
bracket as you slide the KSU onto the
mounting bracket(s). This facilitates accurate hanging.
Hanging the KSU
3.
Slide the cable trough(s) up under the appropriate
module(s). The KSU requires two cable troughs.
Hardware installation
Installation 13
4.
Open each cable trough door and allow the door to
swing down.
5.
Use 38 mm (1 in) screws to fasten each cable trough
to the wall as shown in the cable trough installation
illustration. Each cable trough requires two screws
through the holes provided in the lower tray of the cable
trough.
Installing the cable troughs
Hardware installation
14
Installation
KSU, TM and SM installed
Key Service Unit (KSU)
Station
Module
Feature
cartridge
Expansion
cartridge
shown)
Trunk
e
Start
Cable trough
Note:
Cable trough
(l/4-size)
The illustration shows a KSU, TM and SM
without the doors for clarity. The doors should
not be removed during installation or operation.
Also shown are the Feature, Expansion and
Trunk Cartridges which are installed later.
6.
Close the door(s) of the cable trough(s).
7.
Do not connect power at this point.
Hardware installation
installation 15
an Expansion Cartridge
Installation for Two-port and Six-port Expansion Cartridges
follow the same procedure. (Refer to the Port Numbering
section of the Technical data module for changes to default
DN length caused by installing an Expansion Cartridge.)
CAUTION
Do not touch the printed circuit board. This is an
electrostatic-sensitive device.
1.
Make sure that the KSU power is OFF before installing
or removing an Expansion Cartridge.
2.
Remove the cover of the Expansion Cartridge slot in
the KSU. Use a screwdriver at the bottom of the
cartridge slot cover, as indicated by the icon, to help
detach the cartridge slot cover from the slot.
Removing the cartridge slot cover
Hardware installation
16 installation
Make sure you are wearing a grounding strap when
handling any cartridge.
While holding the latches open, insert the Expansion
Cartridge in the appropriate slot as shown and close
the latches at the same time to align the cartridge
properly.
installing a Six-port Expansion Cartridge
Hardware installation
Installation 17
a Trunk Cartridge
The types of Trunk Cartridges available are
Loop Start Trunk Cartridge (with or without disconnect
supervision)
Trunk Cartridge
DID Trunk Cartridge
The procedures for installing the different types of Trunk
Cartridges are identical. For wiring charts, see the Technical
data chapter.
Programming Trunk Mode for Trunk Cartridges
It is important, in Configuration programming, to set the
Trunk Mode value for Loop Start Trunk Cartridges correctly.
All lines on a Trunk Cartridge will be affected by changing
the Trunk Mode setting on any one line. See the
Configuration chapter to set Trunk Mode.
Hardware installation
18 Installation
All three types of Trunk Cartridges can be installed in one
Trunk Module if required for a particular installation. When
mixing Trunk Cartridges, use a separate distribution block for
each type of Trunk Cartridge. This ensures that the proper
(Loop Start and DID) and
interfaces are obtained (see the examples in
the Technical data chapter on how to read the
and the DID wiring charts).
CAUTION
Do not touch the printed circuit board. This is an
electrostatic-sensitive device.
1.
Make sure that the Trunk Module power is OFF before
installing or removing a Trunk Cartridge.
2.
Remove the appropriate cartridge slot cover of an
unused Trunk Cartridge (TC) slot on the TM. Use a
screwdriver at the bottom of the cartridge slot cover, as
indicated by the icon, to detach the cartridge slot cover
from a Trunk Cartridge (TC) slot.
The Trunk Cartridges (TC) are installed starting
from the left slot to the right slot.
Hardware installation
Installation 19
Removing the cartridge slot cover
Hardware installation
20 Installation
3.
Make sure you are wearing a grounding strap when
cartridges.
handling
4.
While holding the latches open, insert the Trunk
Cartridge (TC) in the appropriate slot as shown and
close the latches at the same time to align the cartridge
properly.
Installing a Trunk Cartridge (TC)
Hardware installation
Installation 21
and
external lines
External line cable and wiring material required
KSU: One 25-pair, 0.5 mm (24 AWG) cable (for the
external lines and auxiliary equipment) terminated with
a female 50-pin connector on one end.
TM: One 25-pair, 0.5 mm (24 AWG) cable (for the
external lines and auxiliary equipment) terminated with
a female 50-pin connector on one end.
distribution block for each 25-pair cable.
Note:
Installers should also check the lightning protectors
at the cable entry point to the building with special
attention to the grounding. Any problems should be
reported to the telephone company in writing.
Connecting external lines
The following procedure is an example of one of several
methods for cross-connecting KSU and Trunk Module
external lines and for cross-connecting KSU auxiliary
equipment lines and the TM emergency telephone.
Hardware installation
22
Installation
1.
Plug the
connector of a
cable into the
corresponding external line connector on the KSU.
(The connector is labeled with an icon which represents‘
telephone poles as shown here.)
2.
Perform the same step for a TM in the installation.
Connecting the KSU external lines
Hardware installation
Installation 23
Connecting the
3.
Route the 25-pair cable(s) through the upper shelf of
the cable trough to the distribution block.
Note:
4.
external lines
Route the 25-pair cables straight out to one
side of the cable trough in a bundle. Use cable
ties to secure them to the wall and to support
their weight. This prevents undue stress on the
cable trough shelf when several 25-pair cables
are present.
Cross connect the external lines to the distribution
block (see KSU and TM external line wiring charts and
wiring arrangement diagrams in the
chapter).
Hardware installation
24
Installation
5.
Connect the auxiliary equipment lines to the distribution
block (see KSU and TM external line wiring charts and
wiring arrangement diagrams).
Note:
6.
Auxiliary equipment must not be connected to
interface.
the
To connect external lines to a standard
interface:
Bring the external cable to the distribution block and .
use the distribution block to cross-connect to the
corresponding KSU and TM external lines according to
the KSU and TM external line wiring charts and
diagrams. Refer to the following charts and illustrations
in Appendix A of the Technical data chapter:
Wiring arrangement for
KSU
Wiring arrangement for
TM.
KSU external lines and auxiliary
equipment wiring
Ml
Trunk Module with Loop Start Trunk
Cartridge external line wiring
7.
Wire the auxiliary equipment lines separately (see KSU
and TM external line wiring charts and diagrams).
Note:
Hardware installation
For the TM, the auxiliary equipment line is an
Emergency Telephone (ET). Also see wiring
arrangement illustrations listed above.
Installation 25
and
internal wiring
WARNING
telephones must not be used as Off Premises
telephones (OPX).
telephones are for use with
equipment only. Connecting a
telephone
directly to an external line may result in equipment
damage. For OPX applications use the
Analog
Terminal Adapter
with single-line telephones.
Station telephone cable and wiring material
required:
KSU: one
female
0.5 mm (24 AWG) cable with a
connector installed on one end.
SM: one
female
0.5 mm (24 AWG) cable with a
connector installed on one end.
Sufficient
distribution blocks to
accommodate the internal wiring.
Hardware installation
26 Installation
Connecting KSU and SM internal wiring
The following procedure is an example of one of several
methods for cross-connecting KSU and SM internal wiring.
1.
Plug a
connector of a
cable into the
corresponding station connector on the KSU. (The
connector is labeled with an icon which represents a
telephone as shown here.)
Connecting to the KSU
Hardware installation
Installation
2.
27
Perform the same step for an SM in the installation.
The SM station connector is located at the bottom of
the cable channel on the right front of the SM.
Connecting to the SM
Hardware installation
28 Installation
3.
Route the 25-pair cable(s) through the upper shelf of
the cable troughs underneath the KSU and SM, to the
distribution block.
Note:
Route the 25-pair cables straight out to one
side of the cable trough in a bundle. Use cable
ties to secure them to the wall and to support
their weight. This prevents undue stress on the
cable trough shelf when several 25-pair cables
are present.
4.
Connect the KSU and SM 25-pair wires to the
appropriate pins on the distribution block. Refer to the’
and illustrations in the Technical data
following
chapter:
KSU internal wiring
MOX16 Station Module internal wiring
5.
Cross-connect the KSU and SM telephone wires to the
corresponding station pins on the distribution block for
telephone wiring (see KSU and SM internal wiring
charts in the Technical data chapter).
6.
Using a single pair of wires for each telephone, connect
each of the telephones according to the wiring charts
(KSU internal wiring and MOX16 Station Module
internal wiring).
Hardware installation
Installation 29
Connecting
1.
Cables
Plug one end of the DS-30 cable into the DS-30 port on
the front of a TM or SM.
Plugging in a TM DS-30 cable
Hardware installation
30 Installation
Plugging in a SM DS-30 cable
2.
Route the cable through the cable clips on the right
side of the TM or SM.
3.
Route the cable through the upper shelf of the cable
trough to the KSU and up through the cable clip to the
Expansion Cartridge.
4.
Trunk Modules: Plug the end of the DS-30 cable of
the first TM into the HIGHEST available port of the
Expansion Cartridge and work DOWN.
Station Modules: Plug the end of the DS-30 cable of
the first SM into the LOWEST available port of the
Expansion Cartridge and work UP.
Hardware installation
Installation 31
Plugging
cables into a Two-port or Six-port
Expansion Cartridge
Plug TM DS-30 into
the HIGHEST available
port and work DOWN.
q
q
Plug SM DS-30 into
the LOWEST
port and work UP.
Hardware installation
32 Installation
Installing the Feature Cartridge
The Feature Cartridge is made up of two parts:
Software Car&ridge
Data Cartridge
CAUTION
Do not touch the printed circuit board. This is an
electrostatic-sensitive device.
1.
Turn the KSU power OFF before installing or removing
a Feature Cartridge.
2.
Make sure you are wearing a grounding strap when
cartridges.
handling
3.
insert the Software Cartridge into the Data Cartridge.
Hardware installation
Installation 33
4.
Insert the Feature Cartridge assembly into the KSU, as
shown in the illustration.
Installing the Feature Cartridge
Hardware installation
34 Emergency telephones
Emergency telephones (ET) are standard
line telephones that provide emergency service in case of
system is
power failure or when power to the
disconnected.
The KSU has two ET connections (ET1 and ET2).
Each TM has one ET connection.
Connecting emergency telephones for a KSU
Note:
1.
See the wiring chart for the KSU to external lines
and auxiliary equipment in the Technical data
chapter.
Wire a modular jack or equivalent to each set of ET
pins on the 50-pin connecting block for KSU external
lines.
ET connections for the KSU
KSU external lines
connector
Pin Wire color
35
Red-Slate
Auxiliary equipment
connections
Line Service Pin Wire color
ET 1
T
Slate-Red
2.
36
Black-Blue
ET
2
11
Blue-Black
ET
2
T
35
Red-Slate
10
Slate-Red
36
Black-Blue
11
Blue-Black
Connect a single-line telephone to the modular jack,
Hardware installation
Emergency telephones 35
Connecting the emergency telephone for a TM
Mote: See the wiring chart on
Trunk Module
external wiring in the Technical data chapter.
1.
Wire a modular jack or equivalent to the set of ET pins
connecting block for TM external lines.
on the
ET connections for the TM
TM external lines
connector
RJ-21
external
connector
Pin Wire color Line Service Pin Wire color
I
50
Violet-Slate
25
Slate-Violet
Note:
2.
ET
I
ET
T
I
No connection
No connection
The ET connections will not work if there is an
Trunk Cartridge in the first slot of
the TM.
Connect a single-line telephone to the modular jack.
Hardware installation
36 Emergency telephones
Testing the emergency telephones
1. Ensure that power to the KSU (and modules) is OFF.
2.
Pick up the emergency telephone receiver.
3.
Listen for the dial tone.
If the dial tone is present
check that the ET is
functioning properly.
If there is no dial tone
-check that the
external line is
connected properly.
verify that the
telephone is working
properly by
connecting it directly
to the external line.
verify that ac power to
the KSU or TM is
OFF.
-verify that there is dial
tone on lines 1 and 2
of the KSU and on
line 1 of the TM.
4.
If all previous steps have been verified and there is still
no dial tone at the emergency telephone, replace the
KSU or TM.
5.
Repeat the telephone test if necessary.
Hardware installation
Optional equipment
37
an auxiliary ringer control
The
KSU provides a control contact to operate an
external loud ringer. The auxiliary ringer can be activated by:
Auxiliary ring for specific external lines
Auxiliary ring for specific telephones.
Refer to the chapters on programming for more details.
Refer specifically to the following headings in Administration
and Configuration.
Programmed in:
Data
Configuration
Capabilities
Administration
Service Modes
Administration
1.
Follow the manufacturer’s installation instructions.
2.
Connect the Auxiliary Ring Generator to the
distribution block as shown on the next page (from the
wiring chart for the KSU to external lines and auxiliary
equipment in the Technical data chapter).
Hardware installation
38
Optional equipment
Auxiliary ringer control
KSU external connector
Aux. equipment connections
Service Pin Wire color
Pin
Wire color
43
Yellow-Green Auxiliary ring make
Green-Yellow
44
Yellow-Brown
Line
T
Auxiliary ring common
Auxiliary ring break
43
Yellow-Green
18
T
44
Yellow-Brown
The pins in this chart provide a control contact. They do not
provide ring current or dc voltage. The ringer must not draw
more than 50
from a 40 V dc source.
Installing an external music source
Music for callers on Hold and for Background Music must be
enabled through programming. Refer to the Programming
chapter for more details. Refer specifically to the following
programming headings in Configuration and confirm that the
following settings are implemented:
Heading
Setting
Call Handling
On Hold: Music
Miscellaneous
Background Music: Yes
External music source programming
The music source can be any low-power device such as a
radio with a high-impedance earphone jack. The
recommended KSU input level is 1 V rms across an
impedance of 3300 ohms.
Hardware installation
Optional equipment
1.
39
Connect the earphone from the music source (signal
and ground) to the 50-pin distribution block, as shown
below (from the KSU internal wiring chart in the
Technical data chapter).
External music source wiring
KSU internal wiring connector
Pin
Wire color
Port
Station Telephones (KSU)
Default DN
50
Violet-Slate
----
----
Music-on-hold ground ----
25
Slate-Violet
----
----
Music-on-hold input ----
CAUTION
To avoid damage to audio equipment, ensure that the
polarity of the audio input is the same as identified in the
KSU internal wiring connector chart above for pins 50
(Violet-Slate) and 25 (Slate-Violet).
2.
Adjust the volume of the music source to a comfortable
level by making a call into the system on an external
line and then putting the call on hold.
an external paging system
The
system allows a customer-supplied external
paging system to be connected to and operate in conjunction
with the
paging feature. The system allows
announcements to be made in offices, warehouses, and
buildings. The paging output from the
KSU, is
775
across an input impedance of 600 ohms.
1.
Follow the manufacturer’s installation instructions.
Hardware installation
40
Optional equipment
2.
Connect the paging system audio input to the
distribution block (paging output 775
across 600
ohms) as shown below. Refer to wiring chart for KSU to .
external lines and auxiliary equipment in the Technical
data chapter.
External paging system wiring
external connector
Pin Wire color
Line
45
Yellow-Slate
Page relay make
20
Slate-Yellow
Page relay common
46
Violet-Blue
Page relay break
21
Blue-Violet
No connection
47
Violet-Orange
Page out tip
22
Orange-Violet
Page out ring
Note:
Aux. equipment connections
Service Pin Wire color
T
45
Yellow-Slate
20
Slate-Yellow
T
46
Violet-Blue
----
21
Blue-Violet
T
47
Violet-Orange
22
Orange-Violet
system external paging supports talk-back
paging equipment only when an external line port is
used.
In addition, the
KSU provides a relay contact that
can be used for other applications (for example, switching
music ON or OFF).
Hardware installation
Optional equipment
External paging contacts
41
idle
Yellow-Slate
(make)
Slate-Yellow
(common)
Violet-Blue
(break)
External paging contacts active
Yellow-Slate
(make)
Slate-Yellow
(common)
Violet-Blue
(break)
The
Modular KSU provides both a “make” (normally
open) and a “break” (normally closed) set of contacts that
operate in conjunction with the External Page feature. These
contacts can be used to control various external devices.
The external device being connected through these-contacts
must not draw more than 5 0
from a 40 V dc source.
Hardware installation
42
telephones
telephones must not be used as Off Premises
telephones are for use with
telephones (OPX).
equipment only. Connecting a
telephone
directly to an external line may result in equipment
damage. For OPX applications use the
Analog
Terminal Adapter
with single-line telephones. (See
installation card for more information.)
the
Installers should also check the lightning protectors at
the cable entry point to the building with special attention
to the grounding. Any problems should be reported to
the telephone company in writing.
telephone
wiring should not leave the buiidings as it is not
protected.
Hearing aid compatibility
Meridian
telephones are hearing aid-compatible, as
defined in Section 68.316 of Part 68 FCC rules.
Installing
1.
Connect the receiver cord to the receiver jack on the
telephone (right-hand jack, when viewed from the rear).
Route the cord through the cord guide in the bottom of
the telephone.
2.
Connect the line cord. Route the cord through the cord
guide.
3.
Plug the other end of the line cord into the modular jack
that was previously wired to the distribution block.
Hardware installation
telephones 43
4.
Check the
telephone displays; the indicators
should flash for up to 20 seconds while the telephone is
initializing. The time and date are then displayed. For
example, Jan 1
Installing a wall-mounted telephone
The M7324, M7310, M7208, and M7100 Telephones can be
mounted on the wall.
1.
Remove the
wall-mounting base from the back
telephone. Grip the base, and with both
of the
thumbs, push on the top to pop it out.
Removing the wall-mounting telephone base
Hardware installation
44
telephones
2.
Remove the receiver clip from the base.
the clip
in the forward lip of the receiver rest.
Installing the telephone receiver clip
3.
Use a screwdriver or similar tool to remove the center
knock-out panel.
Removing the telephone knock-out panel
Hardware installation
telephones 45
4.
Install the wall-mounting base “upside down” so that
the modular jack projects through the knockout .
Installing the wall-mounting telephone base
5.
Connect the line cord between the modular jack and
the telephone jack (right-hand jack on the bottom).
Connecting the telephone line cord
Hardware installation
46
telephones
6.
Mount the telephone on the wall-mounting base. Route
the cord through the cord guide.
Mounting the telephone
7.
Plug the telephone into a modular jack. The indicators
should flash for up to 20 seconds while the telephone
initializes. The time and date are then displayed.
Hardware installation
telephones 47
Apply the button labels after you have powered up the
system and finished the Configuration and Administration
procedures. If the customer is likely to re-program some of
the buttons, it is better not to apply the labels until after reprogramming.
Use Button Inquiry
to verify that the label
agrees with the programming for that button. There are two
types of labeled buttons, pre-printed buttons and buttons
with blank labels you fill out yourself. Leave the labels and
extra button cap kits with the individual
telephones or
the System Coordinator.
Types of button caps
Unlabeled, clear button caps
with appropriate green or grey paper for typing in line
numbers, telephone numbers, and features
Pre-printed, colored button caps
in green or grey
Some example pre-printed button caps
Green caps
Note:
Grey caps
To make identification of line types easier, use
preprinted green button caps for lines that support
incoming and outgoing calls. Use clear button caps
for target lines that are incoming only.
Hardware installation
48
telephones
Typing the telephone numbers
1. Type the individual telephone numbers on the labels
and attach them to the appropriate
telephones.
2.
Type the telephone number and the internal number on
Receiver Card for each type
the appropriate
and color of telephone that is to be installed.
3.
Cover the
Receiver Card underneath the
receiver of each telephone with the plastic lens
provided.
Hardware installation
.
telephones 49
default button assignments
During the System Startup process, initial default features
are assigned automatically to the programmable buttons on
telephones. This is designed to assist the Installer in
programming the system.
During Startup, the installer chooses one of four default
Hybrid, or PBX. The default
templates: Square,
feature assigned to each button depends on the type of
template chosen and on the type of telephone. Unless a
button has been assigned as an external line, Intercom,
Answer, or Handsfree/Mute button, a default feature is
assigned automatically. These defaults are shown on the
following pages.
Note:
Telephones are shipped from the factory with the
button caps in place for the Square template.
Rules of default button assignment
Buttons are assigned in the following order:
Handsfree/Mute
button
If assigned to the
telephone in programming, this
feature appears on the bottom right-hand button (the bottom
button on the M7208 Telephone), moving the intercom
button(s) up one position. The
button does
Telephone.
not appear on the
Intercom button
A telephone may have up to eight Intercom buttons.
Intercom buttons appear above the Handsfree/Mute button
(if assigned) on the bottom right-hand buttons (the bottom
button on the M7208 Telephone).
Hardware installation
50
telephones
Answer button
Each telephone can have up to four Answer buttons. An
Answer button is assigned automatically to a telephone
when that telephone is assigned an Answer DN in the Line
Access section of Configuration programming. Answer
buttons appear above intercom buttons in the right column
and continue up from the bottom in the left column replacing
the features on those buttons. (On the M7208 Telephone,
Answer buttons appear above Intercom buttons and below
external line buttons in a single column of buttons.)
External line buttons
External line buttons appear in ascending line order, starting
at the top button in the left column (the top button on the
M7208 Telephone). If more than five external lines are
assigned to the
Telephone, or more than 12 to the
M7324 Telephone, assignment continues down the right
column, replacing the features on those buttons. Line
buttons have priority over feature access buttons but not
Handsfree/Mute, Intercom, or Answer buttons. There are no
external line buttons on the
Telephone.
Telephone button defaults
Defaults shown on the following pages are for a system with
three-digit
Other configurations may have two-digit to
seven-digit
Note:
Hardware installation
A telephone cannot have an Internal
that is programmed to dial its own DN.
button
telephones 51
Reading the following charts
Button defaults for the Square template are shown in the left
column. In the
Hybrid, and PBX columns, the
defaults shown are specific to these templates. Where no
default is shown, the default is the same as the Square
template. Line numbers in the chart are represented by ‘x’
(for example,
Telephone
Square
template and defaults
Hybrid
Telephone
PBX
template and defaults
Square
(Last No.
I
Hardware installation
telephones
Telephone
template and defaults
Dual memory buttons for the M7310
[
S
t
]
[
[ S e t ]
S
(
]
S
e
e
t
e
t
]
[ S e t ]
( S e t - j
Left column button assignments for the M7310
Square
[Line]
Hybrid
[Transfer]
PBX
[Transfer]
( L i n k ]
Right column button assignments for the M7310
Square
No.
[Voice Call
Hardware installation
Hybrid
PBX
telephones 53
M7324 Telephone
template and defaults
Left column button assignments for the M7324
Square
Hybrid
The remaining ten buttons on the left column are blank
lines, features, or
numbers are assigned.
Right column button assignments for M7324
Square
Hybrid
PBX
[Call]
Hardware installation
54 Power bar installation
a 110 Power Bar
1. Slide the 110 V Power Bar into the lower shelf of the
cable trough. All power cords must go only in the lower
shelf of the cable troughs. Where any combination of
four or more Trunk or Station Modules is present, use a
second Power Bar to provide additional plugs. The
power cord from the second Power Bar must be
plugged into the first Power Bar.
2.
Route the power cord from the KSU, TM, and SM
through the cable clips located in the lower shelf of the
cable trough.
Installing a Power Bar for the 110 V system
Hardware installation
Power bar installation 55
3.
Plug the ac power cord from the KSU, TM, and SM into
the power bar.
CAUTION
Use only a CSA certified and UL listed Power Bar having
a third wire ground.
4:
See the next section for instructions on powering up the
system.
a
1.
Power
Slide the 220 V Power Bar(s) into the lower shelf of the
cable trough. All power cords must go only in the lower
shelf of the cable troughs. Where any combination of
four or more Trunk or Station Modules is present, use a
second Power Bar to provide the additional plugs.
Connect two Power Bars with a separate power cord.
2.
Route the power cord from the KSU, TM, and SM
through the cable clips located in the lower shelf of the
cable trough.
3.
Plug the KSU, TM, and SM power cords into the Power
Bar(s).
CAUTION
Use only an approved
220 V Power Bar having a
third wire ground provided by the ac outlet.
4.
Plug the ac power cord into the Power Bar.
5.
See the next section for instructions on powering up the
system.
Hardware installation
56 Power up
system
Powering up
1.
Double check all wiring before turning the power ON for
the system.
2.
Connect to the ac outlet:
For a KSU alone (having no Power Bar,
or
110 V system
Plug the KSU power cord into the ac
outlet.
220 V system
Plug the KSU power cord into the
separate ac power cord supplied for
the 220 V system. This ac power
cord plugs into the ac outlet. See the
chapter on
components.
OR
For an installation with a KSU and
a Power Bar is required):
or
(where
110 V system Plug the Power Bar into the ac outlet.
220 V system
Note:
3.
Plug the Power Bar into the separate
ac power cord. This is the same cord
described for the KSU alone (220 V).
Use a non-switchable, third-wire ground ac
outlet.
Check to see that the red power
are ON. (The
KSU, TM, and SM each have one LED.)
Hardware installation
Power up
system
57
If none of the
are ON, check for power at the ac
outlet. If there is no power, ask the owner of the system
to check with building maintenance.
OR
If there is ac power at the outlet, replace the module(s)
that do not have a red LED ON.
KSU, TM, and SM
KSU LED
TM LED
SM LED
Hardware installation
58
Automatic Telephone Relocation and telephone replacement
Automatic Telephone Relocation and telephone replacement
are features associated with moving and replacing
telephones in the system. The basic difference between
them is:
relocation allows a moved telephone to retain its
programming;
replacement re-assigns or removes programming.
Automatic Teiephone Relocation
Automatic Telephone Relocation is disabled by default. For
Automatic Telephone Relocation to work, the system power
must be ON and the Automatic Telephone Relocation
feature must be activated in the Miscellaneous section of
Configuration programming.
Relocating a telephone
A telephone can be moved to a new location within the
system without losing the settings that are
settings,
programmed in it. The internal numbers,
and Personal Speed Dial codes remain with the telephone
when it is unplugged. To move a telephone, simply unplug it
and plug it in again at another location.
retains the
information programmed into the telephone. Recognition of
the telephone by the KSU may take up to 45
Hardware installation
Automatic Telephone Relocation and telephone replacement
59
Nofe:
telephones being moved should be
All
relocated before new telephones are plugged into
their place. This allows the moved telephones to
retain their programmed settings. If a new
is plugged into the
system before the old
telephone is reconnected at a new location,
will give the old telephone’s information to the new
telephone, and the old telephone will no longer be
recognized by the system. (See telephone .
replacement below.)
Note:
When changing a telephone’s DN (in Configuration
programming), wait one minute after Automatic
Telephone Relocation.
Telephone
replacement
In a powered-up system, an existing
telephone can
telephone. A new
be replaced by a new
telephone is one that was not previously in service within the
system.
Replacing
of the same type
(For example, replacing an M7208 with another M7208
Telephone.)
telephone is unplugged, and a new
If an existing
telephone of the same type is then plugged into the
same jack, the new telephone acquires the programming
and the internal number of the old telephone. This is
normally done to replace a defective telephone.
Hardware installation
60
Automatic Telephone Relocation and telephone replacement
Replacing
telephones of different types
(For example, replacing an M7208 with an
Telephone.)
telephone is unplugged, and a new
If an existing
telephone of a different type is plugged into the
same jack, the new telephone keeps the old internal number.
The new telephone receives a default profile for a telephone
of its type. (See the button defaults listed in the section on .
telephones and system defaults listed in the
Programming chapter).
Note:
If the telephone being replaced has more lines than
the new telephone, automatic outgoing line selection
may not work with the Handsfree/Mute feature. A
line must be selected manually.
Status of a telephone that was replaced
The old
telephone that was unplugged, and replaced
telephone, loses its programming and
by a new
internal number (DN). The old telephone’s DN has been
given to the new telephone and the programming has either
been removed or given to the new telephone when it was
plugged into the old jack. The replaced telephone (if still
functional) is now treated by the system as a telephone not
previously in service.
Hardware installation
telemanuals.com
l
oo*eae0o0*o*m*oo0o*ooom*ooooooom**l
telemanuals.com
Contents i
Customizing
1
Why program the telephones? 1
How programming is done 1
Programming overview 2
System Startup 2
Configuration 2
Administration 3
Reviewing programmed settings 3
Helping the installer 3
tools 5
The
Programming Overlay 5
The
Modular Programming Record
The Programming reminders 6
Telephone User Cards 6
The
The
Feature Card 6
6
Programming basics 7
What you can do in programming 7
Entering programming 7
Exiting programming 8
Finding your way around 8
Learning about
programming buttons 8
The
Programming Overlay buttons 8
The
display buttons 9
Using
telephone buttons
Entering names
Entering numbers 11
Viewing long telephone numbers 12
Introduction to Programming
telemanuals.com
ii Contents
programmed settings 12
Copying
Preparing for programming 15
Determining programming requirements 15
Planning when and where you will program 16
A programming example 17
Scenario 17
Determining programming requirements 17
Preparing for programming 17
Entering programming 18
Programming System Speed Dial 18
Entering the System Speed Dial code 18
Entering the new telephone number 19
Programming Line Selection 19
Programming Display Digits 19
Programming Name 20
Programming Bypass Restrictions 20
Exiting programming 21
Finishing programming 22
Distributing information 22
Installing button caps 23
Buttons assigned in Configuration 23
Buttons assigned in Administration 23
Using Button Inquiry 23
Introduction to Programming
telemanuals.com
Contents iii
Set Profile and Line Profile
24
Using Set Profile and Line Profile 24
Programming you can review 25
To begin Set Profile and Line Profile 26
To begin Set Profile 26
To begin Line Profile 26
To exit Set Profile or Line Profile 26
Using Set Profile 27
Using Line Profile for Loop Start or E&M lines 28
Using Line Profile for DTMF lines 30
Using Line Profile for Target lines 31
introduction to Programming
Customizing
1
Programming allows you to optimize the use of the Meridian
telephone system.
features can be
programmed for individual telephones, for specific external
lines, or for the system as a whole. This provides you with
real flexibility in making your telephones work together.
Why program the telephones?
Staff turnover, new business contacts, and other changes
will make many demands on the
system. Staff
names and System Speed Dial numbers are just two
examples of programmed settings that must be updated.
The system comes pre-programmed with default settings
that may initially be sufficient. Familiarity with
programming will help you determine which settings, default
or customized, will be most useful for the installed system.
programming is done
Programming is done at an M7324 or M7310 Telephone.
You press buttons on the telephone to enter a programmable
setting or to request a specific programming action.
guides you step by step on the telephone display
while you enter programming, select and change what you
want, and exit programming.
Introduction to Programming
2 Customizing
Programming
overview
provides three types of programming that affect the
system as a whole:
System Startup
Configuration
Administration
A diagram illustrating the relationship of the programming
types and their related functions is provided at the end of this
section.
A fourth type, Personal programming, does not follow the
same procedures as the three listed above. Personal
programming allows you to assign a particular function to
some of the buttons, and is unique to each telephone.
System Startup
System Startup is done by the Installer only once, when the
system is first installed. System Startup resets the
system memory, and allows an Installer to assign a specific
arrangement of external lines and feature button
assignments to the telephones.
Configuration
Configuration programming is done by an Installer when the
system is first installed and when system upgrades are
performed. Otherwise, this programming is not expected to
change frequently. Configuration allows an Installer to
program a variety of settings for the system as a whole, and
for individual external lines andtelephones.
Introduction to Programming
Customizing
3
Administration
Administration programming is performed by a System
Coordinator on an ongoing basis. It includes settings that
will probably have to be updated regularly. Administration
lets you change various
system-wide settings, and
lets you assign some features to individual external lines and
telephones.
Reviewing programmed settings
The Set Profile (set is another word for telephone) and Line
Profile features help you check your programming by
allowing you to review the programmed settings.
the Installer
Configuration programming provides the Set Copy and
Maintenance functions that make an Installer’s job easier.
An Installer can use Set Copy to copy programming from
telephone to another. This saves time, as it
one
allows the Installer to quickly program many telephones with
the same settings.
An Installer can use Maintenance to verify what hardware is
installed, and to diagnose problems within the
system.
Introduction to Programming
Programming tools
The
5
Programming Overlay
The
Programming Overlay is a paper cutout that
labels the function of four telephone buttons used during
programming. This makes it easier for you to recognize the
button you want. The
Programming Overlay
provided at the end of this chapter.
Programming Overlay
M7310 Telephone with a
Programming
Overlay
M7324 Telephone with a
Prdgramming
Overlay
Introduction to Programming
6 Programming tools
The
Modular Programming Record
The
Modular Programming Record provides a
convenient way to record the settings you have
programmed. The Record also helps you plan your
programming. Space is provided for you to write down all
the settings in the same order that they appear during
programming.
Pages from the Record may be photocopied as necessary
for programming many telephones or lines.
The Programming reminders
The Programming reminders provide a convenient way to
record the settings which most
users need on a day
to day basis. Refer to Finishing programming in this chapter
for more information.
The
Telephone User Cards
Each
telephone has a Meridian
Telephone
User Card that lists the most commonly used features and
operations of the
telephones.
The
Feature Card
The
Feature Card lists each of the features available
in the
system that may be accessed by using the
b u t t o n .
Introduction to Programming
.
Programming basics 7
What you can do in programming
In
programming, you can:
scan the settings to review current programming
choose or enter a new setting
erase an existing setting
copy programming to another external line or
telephone.
Programming changes can be made in two different ways.
For some programming settings, you can choose among
some predefined options. For other programming settings,
you must enter a name or number.
In the majority of cases, programming changes are saved
the moment they have been chosen or entered. Exceptions
occur when you are changing DN length, Received Number
Length, or Trunk cartridge type. In each of these cases you
must press “Heading”, “Next” or “Back”, after which an
important side-effect of your change is drawn to your
attention, and you are prompted for confirmation that you still
wish the change to take place.
Entering
programming
To enter programming, you require:
an access code
a password.
The access code is a sequence of digits that is entered from
the dial pad. To make it easy to remember, the default code
“spells out” a word.
introduction to Programming
8 Programming basics
The password is entered after the access code. To minimize
the possibility of unauthorized changes to programming, you
should distribute the password only to a limited number of
people.
The procedure for entering programming is described in a
programming example, later in this chapter.
You can exit programming at any time by pressing the
button.
Finding your way around
Headings and sub-headings in
programming help
you keep track of where you are in programming.
In Administration programming, an example of a main
d i a l for programming System
heading is
Speed Dial. If you program this feature, one of the
sub-headings is
for programming a name to the
System Speed Dial number.
Detailed programming procedures are provided in the
appropriate programming chapter.
Learning about Morstar programming buttons
Programming buttons allow you to move through the
programming headings and make the required changes to
the programmable settings.
The
Programming Overlay buttons
Programming Overlay buttons allow you to
“navigate” through the headings and sub-headings of
programming.
Introduction to Programming
Programming basics 9
The Overlay is placed over the top four memory buttons of
or the M7324 Telephone. During programming,
the
will appear next to any buttons that
indicators (such as
can be used at that programming step.
by the Overlay work as follows:
The buttons
To move “up” in the hierarchy of headings and
sub-headings.
[To
S h omove
w)
“down” in the hierarchy of headings
and sub-headings, or to begin programming for
a heading or sub-heading.
To move to the next heading, sub-heading or
setting.
To move to the previous heading, sub-heading
or setting.
The
display buttons
Display buttons can perform many different operations.
Depending on where you are in programming, one, two, or
three display buttons may be available at any one time. You
press one of the display buttons to select the operation that
you want to perform.
Display message
Display button message
--
--
-Display button
Introduction to Programming
10 Programming basics
The most common display button messages are:
To change a programmable setting.
To move the cursor one space backwards
(backspace) and delete a character. This
allows you to re-enter a number or letter.
To copy line or telephone programming.
To view the last part of a displayed message
longer than 16 characters.
To move the cursor one position forwards
when programming a name.
To view the first part of a displayed message
longer than 16 characters.
To move the cursor one position backwards
when programming a name.
Using
telephone buttons
Entering names
Letters and numbers can be entered as part of a name for
various settings. The method of entering a name is always
the same.
Begin with a setting that prompts you to enter a name. A
cursor (
appears on the display to indicate where you can
enter the next character. To enter a name:
Introduction to Programming
Programming basics 11
1.
Press the dial pad button with the printed letter or
number you want.
Each time you press the button, a new character
appears. For example, the dial pad button for the
number 3 has the letters D, E, and F, where:
appears after the first press
E appears after the second press
F appears after the third press
3 appears after the fourth press
appears again after the fifth press.
(Letters always appear in upper case.)
2.
When the character you want is displayed:
Press
to move the cursor to the next character
position.
OR
If you want to correct a character entered by mistake:
Press
to move the cursor back until it is
positioned beneath the character you want to correct.
OR
Press
to move the cursor back and delete a
time the display button is pressed.
3.
Repeat step 1.
Entering numbers
Numbers are entered from the
telephone dial pad.
The backspace display button may be used to edit the
number.
Line numbers must always be entered as a three-digit
number. Line numbers from
to 99 must be entered with
for example). Similarly, line
one preceding zero (line
numbers less than 10 must be entered with two preceding
zeros (line
for example).
introduction to Programming
Programming basics
Internal telephone numbers, also referred to as Directory
can be from two to seven digits long on a
Numbers
non-expanded system, and from three to seven digits long
on an expanded system. The default DN length is 2 on a
non-expanded system and 3 on an expanded system. The
DN length can be changed in Configuration programming.
Viewing long telephone numbers
External telephone numbers can be up to 24 digits, but the
telephone display is only 16 character spaces long. If you
wish to see a previously programmed number that is longer
than 16 digits, you must do the following:
Begin, for example, with 1234567838
The display shows only the first 15 digits. The three dots
at the end of the display indicate that more digits remain to
the external number.
I.
Press
to see the remaining digits.
2.
Press
to again see the first 15 digits.
Copying
programmed settings
Programmed settings for external lines,
telephones
and certain
Capabilities can be copied to other lines
or
telephones. If many lines or telephones require
the same settings, there is no need to program each one
individually. Instead., program one line or telephone, and
then copy those settings.
The Copy Record page in the Meridian
Modular
Programming Record provides space to record the lines or
telephones that are copied.
Introduction to Programming
Proqramming basics
13
Copying line programming
.
Line programming can be copied only for the following:
Data of Configuration programming.
OR
Line abilities in the Capabilities section of Administration
programming.
OR
Service Modes of Administration programming (only Ringing
Telephones may be copied).
Beginwith
.
1.
Press
.
appears.
2.
Enter the number of the line to be copied.
to 1
appears.
OR
Press
until you return to the desired heading,
if you do not wish to proceed with copying.
3.
Enter the number of the line to receive the
programming.
>
appears briefly ‘if, for example,
programming for line 001 was copied to line 002.
While this brief message is on the display, you can
already enter another line number to which the line
programming should be copied , or you can wait for the
to
l i n e : , prompt to appear, as in step 2.
Copying
telephone programming
telephone programming can be copied only for the
following headings:
Line Access of Configuration programming.
OR
Set abilities in the Capabilities section of Administration
programming.
Introduction to Programming
14 Programming basics
Begin with Show
1.
Press
.
.
appears.
2.
Enter the internal number of the telephone to be
copied.
appears.
OR
Press
until you return to the desired heading,
if you do not wish to proceed with copying.
3.
Enter the internal number of the telephone to receive
the programming.
2225 appears briefly if, for example,
222
programming for telephone 2221 was copied to
telephone 2225.
While this brief message is on the display, you can
already enter another internal number to which the
telephone programming should be copied , or you can
wait for the
again to appear, as in step 2.
t o
Copying
Capabilities programming
In addition to Line abilities and Set abilities,
Capabilities programming can be copied for the following
headings:
Dialing filters in the Capabilities section of Administration
programming.
OR
Rem access pkgs in the Capabilities section of
Administration programming.
OR
COS passwords in the Capabilities section of Administration
programming.
Introduction to Programming
Programming basics 15
Begin with
OR
1
Press
, and proceed by responding to prompts as you
would if you were copying line programming or
telephone programming.
Preparing for programming
Determining programming requirements
First read about the available programming settings in the
Configuration or Administration chapters, and then determine
how your co-workers would like the features programmed.
You should gather or define the following information:
For System Startup
the template that will assign the most appropriate
defaults
For Configuration or Administration
the numbers of the installed external lines
internal numbers of each installed
telephone
For Configuration
the appropriate length for internal numbers
appropriate settings for each external trunk and line
appropriate settings for each telephone
appropriate system-wide settings
.
Introduction to Programming
16 Programming basics
For Administration
telephone numbers that will be programmed into
System Speed Dial
names for external lines and telephones
external lines and telephones that will be subject to
Line abilities and Set abilities programming
required Filters and Remote access packages
Set abilities to be assigned to individual telephones
how the system should be programmed to make the
best use of the Service Modes feature
whether a new Administration password is required
whether Class of Service passwords are required
Planning when and where you will program
Only one
telephone can access Configuration or
Administration programming at a time. The telephone you
are using for programming cannot be used to make or
receive calls. Other users of the
system will still be
able to use their telephones. However, they will not be able
to do any Personal programming while you are
programming.
Introduction to Programming
A programming example
17
Once you have learned the programming basics, you can
always apply the same rules to guide you through the
programming steps. The following example takes you
through the programming of System Speed Dial settings in
Administration programming.
The taxi company your office normally uses has changed
both its telephone number and name. Change the telephone
number and name programmed in System Speed Dial of
Administration programming, and review the other settings.
Determining programming requirements
You have determined the following settings:
System Speed Dial code: 12
System Speed Dial telephone number: 5554568
Line Selection: Use prime line
Display Digits: N (No)
Name: Fleet Taxi
Bypass Restrictions: Y (Yes)
Preparing for programming
1. Choose the
telephone with which you will do
the programming changes.
2.
Obtain the
Programming Overlay and
over the buttons of your telephone.
it
3.
Record the changes you make in the appropriate
section of the
Modular Programming Record.
Introduction to Programming
18 A programming example
Entering
programming
1.
Enter the Administration access code using the feature .
button and the dial pad:
Press
which is the same as
Press [Feature)
appears.
OR
1.
dial appears if there is no password.
Proceed to Programming System Speed Dial.
2.
Enter the Administration password from the dial pad.
if you need to re-enter the password.
Press
The password does not appear on the telephone
display.
d i a 1 appears.
Programming System Speed Dial
Begin with 1.
1.
dial .
Press (Show) to begin programming System Speed
Dial.
dial
appears.
Entering the System Speed Dial code
1. Press
on the dial pad.
dial
Introduction to Programming
12 appears.
A programming example
19
Entering the new telephone number
1.
Press [ S h o w ) .
5553272 (the taxi company’s old number) appears.
2.
Press
.
appears.
3.
Enter the new telephone number:
q
on the dial pad.
Press
appears.
(If required, press the
display button to
backspace the cursor for re-entering a number).
4.
Press
when have completed entering the number.
Programming Line Selection
to move on to the Line Selection
1. Press
setting.
Use
1
appears (the default).
OR
l i n e : 002 appears (for example, if line 002
was previously assigned).
OR
24 appears (for example, if the Line
Pool access code 24 was previously assigned).
2.
Press
until
1
appears.
OR
Program Display Digits if that option is already
selected.
Programming Display Digits
1. Press [Next] to move on to the Display Digits
setting.
appears.
2.
Program Display Digits to
for No.
Press
appears.
OR
Program Name if that option is already selected.
Introduction to Programming
20 A programming example
Programming Name
1. Press
to move on to the Name setting.
appears.
2.
Press (Show] to view the name.
The old company’s name appears (if programmed). If
the name was not previously programmed, then the
default name appears as follows:
Dial 12 .
3.
Press
to change the name.
The cursor ( ) appears at the first character position
for the name.
4.
Enter the first letter (F) of the new name (Fleet Taxi):
on the dial pad.
Press
appears.
5.
Press
two more times.
appears.
6.
Press
to move the cursor to the next position.
appears.
Continue entering characters in the same way by
pressing the appropriate dial pad buttons until
appears.
FLEET
A blank space is created by pressing
twice.
If you make a mistake in entering the name, use
or
to move the cursor and re-enter
the character.
Programming Bypass Restrictions
1. Press
to move on to the Bypass Restrictions
setting.
appears.
2.
Program Bypass Restrictions to Yes.
Press
until
OR
Go to step 3 if that option is already selected.
3.
You have finished System Speed Dial programming.
Follow the next procedure to exit.
Introduction to Programming
A programming example 21
Exiting programming
1. Press .
three times to return to the main
heading.
dial appears.
OR
Press
End of
to exit Administration programming.
appears.
Introduction to Programming
22
Finishing programming
You should ensure that programmed settings are recorded
and easily available for reference:
Record settings in the
Modular Programming
Record.
Keep any passwords recorded in a safe place.
Complete the Programming reminders
of the
Administration chapter, and distribute copies of the
sections that your co-workers will find useful. The
Programming reminders that are required will depend
on what has been programmed.
The Programming reminders section identifies:
the names and internal numbers of each
telephone
l
l
l
l
the assignment of Prime Telephones, Central
Answering Positions, and Direct Dial Telephones
the locations of programmed Page Zones
the Line Pool access codes for each Line Pool, and
the type of Lines in that Line Pool (Public network or
Private network)
l
the digit that is dialed first to make an external call
l
the digit that is dialed first to retrieve a parked call
l
the digit that is dialed to reach Direct-Dial telephones
l
l
the members of each Call Pickup Group
the
DN for use by Remote Access callers to
change their Class of Service
Introduction to Programming
Finishing programming 23
Ensure that your co-workers know of any programmed
settings that affect the operation of their telephone.
The assignment of Handsfree, which assigns a
button to a telephone, is an example of this.
caps
Each
telephone comes with snap-on caps to identify
the buttons that you program. The following buttons may be
assigned to a telephone as a result of Configuration
Administration programming.
Buttons assigned in Configuration
Answer buttons (from Line Access programming)
external and intercom buttons (from Line Access
programming)
Buttons assigned in Administration
Handsfree buttons (from Set Abilities programming)
Some of the caps are already printed with a line number or
feature name, and some of the caps have a clear top. Write
programmed features or telephone numbers on the paper
labels supplied, and place the label in the clear button cap.
Using Button Inquiry
Use the Button Inquiry feature ([Feature] I”)
to check
the function or stored number programmed onto each button.
You can also use Button Inquiry to deactivate the buttons
before you press the button cap on.
Introduction to Programming
24 Set Profile and Line Profile
Use Set Profile and Line Profile to review the settings
programmed in Configuration and Administration
programming. Set Profile and Line Profile allow you to
browse through, but not change, the programmed settings.
,
Set Profile allows you to verify settings for each
telephone. Line Profile allows you to verify settings for each
external line.
Using Set
and Line Profile
As many as four people in the
system can use Set
Profile or Line Profile at the same time. You may access Set
Profile and Line Profile while on a call at your telephone.
If someone is using Configuration or Administration
programming, you can still access Set Profile and Line
telephone. The latest
Profile from another
programming changes can therefore be seen as soon as
they are made.
Set Profile and Line Profile can be used only from an M7310
or M7324 telephone.
Programming Overlay is not required to perform
A
Set Profile Line Profile.
Introduction to Programming
Set Profile and Line Profile
25
you can review
The following table shows the Configuration and
Administration programming headings that can be reviewed
in Set Profile and Line Profile.
Programming that can be reviewed
Set Profile
Line Profile
Set name
Line name
Line Access
Trunk data
(physical lines only)
Set abilities
Received number
(target lines only)
Line data
Line abilities
Service Modes
The following table shows how line names and telephone
names
on the display while you are using Set Profile
and Line Profile.
Telephone
name
2221: 2221
OR
2221:
Line
name
WHITE
internal
number or name (if
programmed)
Line00 1: Line00 1
external line
OR
Li
line
number or name (if
programmed)
1:
Introduction to Programming
26 Set Profile and Line Profile
begin Set Profile and Line Profile
To begin Set Profile
From an
or M7324 Telephone:
1.
Press
which is the same as
Press
appears.
2.
Enter the internal number of the telephone to be
reviewed.
OR
Press F I R S T to review programming for the
telephone with the first internal number.
3.
222 1: 222 1 appears, for example.
2 2 2 1 : C W H I T E appears, for example, if that name
was programmed for the telephone.
To begin Line Profile
From an
or M7324 Telephone:
1.
which is the same as
Press
appears.
2.
Enter the number of the line to be reviewed.
OR
P r e s s F I R S T t o r e v i e w programming for the first line
number.
3.
Li
1: Li
OR
Line00 1:
1 appears, for example.
appears, for example, if that name
was programmed for the line.
To exit Set Profile or Line Profile
1. Press
Introduction to Programming
Set Profile and Line Profile 27
Using Set Profile
Begin with:
2221: 2221 .
OR
2221:
WHITE .
1.
To see the Name for the next telephone,
(or to return to
set:
if this telephone is the
telephone with the last internal number),
Press NEXT .
OR
To see the Name for the previous telephone
(or to return to
if this telephone is the
telephone with the first internal number),
.
Press
OR
Press SHOW to review settings for this telephone.
2.
L i
3.
abilities appears.
Press SHOW to see programming for
appears.
Press SHOW to see programming for Line Access.
OR
Press so that the Name of the telephone
appears, as in step 1.
OR
Press NEXT to review the next setting.
Set
OR
Press
so that Line
appears, as in
step 2.
OR
Press NEXT to return to the Name of the telephone.
Introduction to Programming
28 Set Profile and Line Profile
Using Line Profile for Loop Start or
lines
When you begin Line Profile, respond to
1 i
with the line number of a Loop Start or E&M line.
You might, for instance, begin with:
Line009 .
OR
.
Li
1.
To see the Name for the next line,
if this is the last line
1
(or to return to
number),
Press NEXT .
OR
To see the Name for the previous line,
if this is the first line
(or to return to Show 1
number),
Press
.
OR
Press SHOW to review other settings.
2.
Trunk data appears.
Press SHOW to see programming
for Trunk data.
OR
Press
so that the Name of the line appears, as
in step 1.
OR
Press NEXT to review the next setting.
3.
data appears.
Press SHOW to see programming for Line data.
OR
Press
so that
data appears, as in
step 2.
OR
Press NEXT to review the next setting.
introduction to Programming
Set Profile and Line Profile 29
4.
Line a b i l i t i e s
appears.
Press
to see programming for
abi 1
OR
Press
step 3.
so that
appears, as in
OR
Press N E X T to review the next setting.
5.
Service
Press
appears.
to see programming for Service
OR
Press
in step 4.
so that L i
i 1 it
appears, as
OR
Press
to return to the Name of the line.
Introduction to Programming
30 Set Profile and Line Profile
Line Profile for
lines
When you begin Line Profile, respond to
with the line number of a DTMF line.
If you entered
11, for instance,
.
would be displayed.
1.
To see the Name for the next line,
Press NEXT .
OR
To see the Name for the previous line,
Press
.
OR
Press
2.
to check the DTMF setting.
11: DTMF appears,
confirming that Line 11 is a DTMF line.
so that the Name of the line
Press NEXT or
appears, as in step 1.
Introduction to Programming
Set Profile and Line Profile 31
Using Line Profile for Target lines
When you begin Line Profile, respond to
line:
with the line number of a Target line.
If you entered
for instance,
.
OR
would be displayed.
1.
To see the Name for the next line,
if this is the last line
1
(or to return to
number),
Press
.
OR
To see the Name for the previous line,
Press
.
OR
Press SHOW to review other settings.
2.
Press
in step
555 1629 appears.
so that the Name of the line appears, as
OR
Press
3.
to review the next setting.
data appears.
Press SHOW to see programming for Line data.
OR
Press
so that
as in step 2.
d
555 1629 appears,
OR
Press
4.
to review the next setting.
appears.
Press SHOW to see programming for Service Modes.
OR
Press
step 3.
so that Line data appears, as in
OR
Press
to return to the Name of the line.
Introduction to Programming
telemanuals.com
telemanuals.com
Contents i
to System Startup 1
When to perform Startup 1
The Startup code and Installer password 1
When to enter the Startup code 2
Retention of programming data if power fails 2.
Startup Procedures 3
Before you begin Startup 3
Performing Startup 3
Entering the Startup code and Installer password 3
Changing the default template 4
System default templates 5
Configuration defaults 5
Data 5
Trunk data 5
Received number (target lines only) 6
Line data (physical and target lines) 6
Line Access 7
Call Handling 8
Miscellaneous 9
System Data 9
General administration defaults 10
System Speed Dial 10
Names
Time and date
Direct-Dial 10
Capabilities 1
Service Modes 13
Password 14
Startup
telemanuals.com
Introduction to System Startup 1
When to perform Startup
Startup is to be used for initial installation only. Do not use
Startup after
is in operation because the procedure
erases all programmed data.
Perform Startup after the system hardware has been installed
and powered up.
The Startup code and Installer password
This code, and password, are used only by Installers for
access to the System Startup process. The System Startup
code performs the initialization procedure which erases any
existing system memory and resets it to the factory default
values. The Startup process lets you select one of four default
configuration settings (Square,
Hybrid and PBX)
which makes subsequent programming faster and easier.
Startup
telemanuals.com
introduction to System
When to enter the Startup code
To be accepted, the correct Startup code must be entered no
.
later than 15 minutes after the
system has been
powered
A Startup code entered at any time after the
out results in the message:
denied .
time
If 15 minutes have elapsed since you powered up the system,
turn system power OFF and ON, to prepare for the Startup
process.
CAUTION
Wait at least two minutes after System Startup before you
attempt Maintenance diagnostic tests or the
disabling/enabling of a module. If you do not wait two
minutes, ports may be disabled.
Retention of programming data if power fails
Ail Configuration and Administration data will be retained for at
system is
least three days if the power fails or if the
powered OFF. After three days without power, it may be
necessary to perform System Startup.
Startup
Startup Procedures 3
you begin Startup
Obtain:
the
Programming Overlay
the
Modular
Programming Record.
Know:
that the Startup code must be entered within 15 minutes
of the KSU power being turned ON.
Note:
To preserve the integrity of the Configuration and
Administration data, do not give the Startup access
code or Installer password to anyone.
Performing Startup
Entering the Startup code
Installer password
1. Enter the Startup access code from a
M7324 or
telephone dial pad, by pressing
which is the same as:
2.
Enter the Installer password:
which is the same as:
Specified digits for the Installer password are
on the display.
shown
Startup
Startup Procedures
The Installer password shown is the default normally
used for Startup. For a system which has already
been programmed, the Installer password might have
been changed in Configuration and recorded below.
If the Password has been entered incorrectly, you will still see
the prompt
.
Press RETRY and re-enter the password.
To quit from Startup without affecting system memory
you wish to quit instead of proceeding with Startup, you can
do so at this time, without affecting system memory:
1.
Press
Changing the default template
After entering the Startup access code and Installer password
the display shows Reset
,
1.
Press
1
OR
Press
2.
Press
(Square,
3.
Press
to select a default template.
appears on the display.
to exit without choosing a template.
to choose one of four templates
Hybrid or PBX).
to store the programming.
awl
appears on the display.
The indicators begin to flash after a few moments.
Jan 1
Startup
am appears.
System default templates
5
templates
Use System Startup to select an appropriate programming
template. The four templates available in the
system
are Square,
Hybrid, and PBX. The following charts
show the default settings for each template.
Hybrid
Square defaults are listed in full.
defaults are listed only when they differ from Square defaults.
Where a DN is specified, it is the three-digit DN that is the
default on an Expanded system. (Two-digit
are the
default on non-expanded systems.)
Configuration
defaults
Data
Trunk data
Parameter
Square
Line
(Trunk type)
Trunk mode
Loop
Ans mode
Manual
Ans with
(presented if Ans
mode is Auto)
Yes
Hybrid
PBX
Super
Signal
(presented if Line
is E&M)
Gain
(presented if Line
is E&M)
Normal
.
Dial mode
Full
on
idle line
(presented if Line
is
No
Startup
6
System default templates
Received number (target lines only)
Parameter
Square
Rec’d #
None
Line data
Hybrid
and taraet lines)
Parameter
Square
Line type
Public
Prime
Telephone for
each line
DN 221
Auxiliary ringer
for each line
Yes
Auto privacy
Yes
Public
Hybrid
PBX
Lines
Pool
001
009
013
017
021
025
029
033
037
041
045
049
053
057
061
Pool A
Pool
Pool
Pool D
Pool E
Pool F
Pool G
Pool H
Pool I
Pool J
Pool K
Pool L
Pool M
Pool N
Pool 0
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
008:
012:
016:
020:
024:
028:
032:
036:
040:
044:
048:
to 052:
to 056:
to 060:
to 064:
Target lines can not be placed into line pools.
Startup
PBX
System default templates
7
Line Access
Parameter
Square
Line
Line 001
Line 002
assignment
Hybrid
Line
Line 001
No lines
assigned
Answer
None
Ringing lines
Ring for
all
Ring for
all
assigned
lines.
Ring for
DN 221.
No ring
for other
No lines
assigned.
Any lines
added will
Ring.
Any lines
added will
Ring.
Any lines
added will
Ring.
Any lines
added will
Ring.
Ringing lines for
target lines
No target lines are assigned automatically,
but any lines added will be Ring
Line Pool access No
No
Yes (Pool A)
Line
Intercom
Intercom kevs 2
Prime line
None
Intercom
is a three digit line number. The
template
automatically performs a sequential assignment of lines to
It assigns Line 001 to DN 221, Line 002 to DN 222,
and so on, until all lines in the system have been assigned
to
These lines are automatically made the Prime
Lines for the
Startup
8
System default templates
Call Handling
Parameter
Held line
reminder
No
Remind delay (s)
(presented if
Held line
reminder is
changed to Yes)
60
DRT to Prime
Telephone
Yes
DRT delay
(rings)
3
Transfer
callback (rings)
3
Park prefix
1
Park timeout (s)
45
Camp timeout
45
Directed pickup
Yes
On hold
Tones
(s) is seconds.
Startup
Hybrid
PBX
System default templates
9
Miscellaneous
Parameter
Square
Background
music
No
Direct-dial #
0
Hybrid
PBX
DN
Auto DN
None
Alarm
Telephone
DN 221
CAP assignment None
Link time (ms)
600
Telephone
relocation
No
Host Delay (ms)
1000
Supervision (ms)
460
External code 9
9
None
None
Line pool codes
None
9 for
Pool A
9 for
Pool A
None for
Pools
B to 0
None for
Pools
B to 0
Hybrid
PBX
None
Installer
password
(ms) is milliseconds.
System Data
Parameter
Square
Individual
Individual
DN length
2 (non-expanded system)
3 (expanded system)
Rec’d # length
3 (Received numbers are used only on
expanded systems.)
may be changed.
.
Startup
System default templates
General
administration
defaults
System Speed Dial
Parameter
Square
Speed dial #
(no defaults assigned)
Line or Pool
Use prime line
Display digits
Yes
Name
(presented if
Display digits is
changed to No)
Sys Spd Dial
Bypass restriction
No
Hybrid
is a two-digit System Speed Dial code
example).
PBX
2, for
Names
Parameter
Square
Hybrid
Set names
DN (221, for example)
Line names
Line number (Line 001, for example)
PBX
Time and date
The default time and date is: 1:00 a.m., January 1 st, 1991
Direct-Dial
Parameter
Square
DN 221
Set2, Set3, Set4,
Startup
None
Hybrid
PBX
System default templates
11
Capabilities
Dialing filters
Parameter
Filter 00
Hybrid PBX
Square
T No restrictions (can not be
Filter 01
Filter 02 to 99
Restr: 0
Restr: 90
Restr: 1
Excpt:
1800
1555
Restr: 91
Excpt:
91800
91555
91’1 l 555
91 l 0*555
Restr: 911
Excpt: 911
Restr: 9911
Excpt: 9911
Restr: 411
Restr: 9411
Restr: 976
Restr: 9976
Hybrid and PBX
settings are the
same as those for
the Square
template
No restrictions
Remote access packages (Capabilities cont’d)
Hybrid
PBX
Parameter
Square
Package 00
Prohibits access to line pools and Remote
Page. Can not be changed.
Package 01
Line pool access
Y for Pool A
N for Pools B
to 0
Remote Page No
Packages 02 15
Line pool access
N for Pools A to 0
Remote Page No
Startup
12
System default templates
Set abilities (Capabilities cont’d)
Parameter
Square
Hybrid
Set filter
Line/set filter
None
Telephone lock
None
Full handsfree
No
Automatic
handsfree
(presented if Full
handsfree is Yes)
No
Handsfree
Answerback
Yes
Pickup group
No
Page zone
1
Auxiliary Ringer
No
Direct-Dial
Forward on busy
None
Forward no
answer
None
Forward delay
(# of rings only if
Forward no
answer is ON)
3
Redirect ring
Yes
Hotline
None
Use prime line
(presented for
external Hotline)
Yes
Priority call
No
Line abilities (Capabilities cont’d)
Startup
Parameter
Square
Dial filter
03
Remote filter
04
Remote
00
Hybrid
PBX
System default templates
13
Class of Service (COS) passwords (Capabilities cont’d)
Parameter
Square
COS passwords
None
Line filter
Defit
Remote pkg
Deflt
Hybrid
PBX
The ‘Deflt’ setting means that no COS filter is
programmed here. Any filters programmed elsewhere to apply
to the telephone, the line or the user’s COS password are still
in effect.
Service Modes
Hybrid
PBX
Parameter
Square
Control
Telephones
DN 221
Name1
Night
(if Setting is changed from Manual to Auto:
Stop =
Start =
Name2
Evening
(if Setting is changed from Manual to Auto:
Stop = 23:00)
Start =
Name3
Lunch
(if Setting is changed from Manual to Auto:
Stop = 13:00)
Start =
Setting
Manual
Trunk answer
Yes
Extra-dial
Telephone
221
Ringing
Telephone
221
Auxiliary Ringer
Yes
Startup
14
System default templates
Password
Parameter
Administration password
Startup
Default
q
telemanuals.com
telemanuals.com
Contents i
Configuration overview 1
Configuration headings 1
Trunk lines and Target lines 2
Trunks 3
Loop start trunks 4
E&M trunks 5
Direct Inward Dial 5
Target line 6
Remote system access 7
Getting started 10
Before you begin programming 10
Entering Configuration
Exiting Configuration 11
Data 12
What is
Data? 12
To begin
Data programming 13
Copying Trunk and Line data 14
Trunk data 15
1 5
Trunk mode 18
Answer mode 19
Answer with DISA 20
Signal 21
Gain 22
Dial mode 23
Full
23
Received number 25
Configuration
telemanuals.com
ii
Contents
Line data 26
Line type 26
Prime Telephone 28
Auxiliary Ringer 29
Privacy 30
Line Access 31
What is Line Access? 31
To begin Line Access programming
Programming Line Access 32
Line assignment 32
Answer DN 34
Ringing 35
Line Pool access 37
Intercom buttons 38
Prime line 39
31
Call Handling 42
What is Call Handling? 42
To begin Call Handling programming 43
Programming Call Handling 43
Held Line Reminder 43
Held Line Reminder delay 43
Delayed Ring Transfer 44
Delayed Ring Transfer delay 45
Transfer Callback delay 46
Park prefix 46
Park timeout delay 47
Camp timeout delay 48
Directed pickup 49
On hold 50
Configuration
telemanuals.com
Contents iii
Miscellaneous 51
What is Miscellaneous? 51
To begin Miscellaneous programming 5 1
Programming Miscellaneous 52
Background Music 52
Direct-dial digit 52
Direct Inward System Access Directory Number (DISA
DN) 53
Auto Directory Number (Auto DN) 54
Alarm telephone 55
CAP (Central Answering Position) assignment 56
Link Time 58
Telephone Relocation 58
Host delay 59
Disconnect Supervision delay 60
External code 61
Line Pool access codes 62
Installer password 64
System Data 66
What is System Data? 66
To begin System Data programming 66
Programming System Data 67
Individual
67
DN length 69
Received number length 71
Set copy 73
What is Set copy? 73
Accessing Set copy 76
Applying Set copy 77
Configuration
Configuration overview 1
overview
Configuration programming lets you change settings for the
system, as well as settings for individual
entire
telephones and external lines. Configuration programming is
the first programming that you do after system installation.
Before you begin Configuration programming, you should
use Startup to select one of the four system templates.
Although pre-programmed settings in these templates may
be sufficient, you should consider whether customized
settings may be better suited to your installation.
Configuration
headings
Configuration has five major sections:
Data lets you assign settings to each trunk,
external line and incoming target line.
Line Access lets you assign settings to each
telephone.
Call Handling lets you assign system-wide settings
associated with various call features.
Miscellaneous lets you assign various system-wide
settings.
System Data lets you change a telephone’s internal
number, the length of all internal numbers, and the
number of digits received by auto-answer trunks.
Configuration
2
Configuration overview
Trunk lines and Target lines
In order to configure a
system, you need to
distinguish between trunks and target lines.
A trunk is a physical line numbered from 001 to 080 (in a
fully expanded system).
A target line is a ‘virtual’ communication path between an
external caller and a
telephone (or other
device). This path is established on the basis of digits
received from an incoming trunk. Target lines number from
081 to 184 (in a fully expanded
system)..
Having target lines, independent of the physical lines, makes
it possible to have many target lines for a few physical
trunks. Telephones can be configured to have an
appearance of any type of line (including target lines). Calls
may be placed on all lines except target lines.
See the description of Line Pool programming under
the
setting (in
Data,
d a t a ) for the recommended assignments to
line pools.
Line numbers for Trunks and Target lines
Type of system
KSU trunks Trunk Module
(Loop start)
trunks
Non-expanded system
001
008
Expansion Cartridge
001
008
009
032
081 -120
6-port Expansion Cartridge
001
008
009
080
081
Configuration
none
Target
lines
none
Configuration overview
3
Trunks
A trunk provides the physical connection between a
system and other systems
or otherwise) in a private
or public network.
uses three types of trunks:
Loop start trunks
E&M trunks
Direct Inward Dial (DID) trunks
Loop start and E&M trunks can be used for both incoming
and outgoing calls. DID trunks, however, are used for
incoming calls exclusively.
Loop start and E&M trunks operate in one of two modes for
incoming calls: manual-answer or auto-answer. DID trunks
operate only in auto-answer mode.
Manual-answer trunks
Incoming calls on trunks configured for manual-answer alert
in the usual manner at all associated line appearances.
Auto-answer trunks
Trunks configured for auto-answer provide remote access to
the system. Any line appearance of such a trunk is normally
used only to monitor the incoming call status of the trunk, not
to answer calls.
Incoming calls on auto-answer trunks are answered by the
system. Typically, digits received from the far end are used
to route the call to a specific target line.
If they are idle, auto-answer Loop start and E&M trunks can
be used to make outgoing calls.
Configuration
Configuration overview
Disconnect supervision
Disconnect supervision is required for auto-answer trunks,
but not for manual-answer trunks. Note, however, that use of
unsupervised trunks (or trunks with disconnect supervision
inactive) for incoming calls will result in the inconsistent
operation of the Line Redirection feature, the ability to
tandem through the
system to other systems in the
network, and the ability to disconnect from a conference that
involves two external callers.
Note:
If a
trunk without disconnect supervision is
programmed for auto-answer mode, the trunk will
operate in manual-answer mode.
Loop start trunks
Both manual-answer and auto-answer trunks can be used
for making outgoing calls or receiving incoming calls. The
answer mode (manual-answer and auto-answer) determines
how the system handles incoming calls.
By default, auto-answer Loop start trunks are answered by
(Direct Inward System Access) capability,
the system
and are used to provide controlled access to a
system’s resources from the public network.
A user makes or receives calls on a manual-answer loop
start trunk by having a line appearance of the trunk, or by
selecting a line pool containing the trunk to make a call.
KSU trunk lines (001 to 008) are Loop start lines.
Configuration
.
Configuration overview
5
E&M trunks
E&M trunks connect two or more systems directly in a
private network.
An E&M Trunk Cartridge provides two E&M trunks and two
DTMF receivers. These are given consecutive line numbers.
For example, an E&M TC in slot 1 of a Trunk Module
plugged into the highest numbered DS-30 port will show the
E&M trunks as lines 009 and 010, and will show the
receivers as line numbers 011 and 012.
E&M trunks can operate in manual-answer mode, or in
answer mode with disconnect supervision. Manual-answer
E&M trunks alert directly at any telephone with a line
appearance associated with the trunk. By default,
answer E&M trunks are answered by the system
(Direct Inward System Access) capability, and are used to
provide controlled access to a
system’s resources
from elsewhere in a private network.
Capabilities available to a remote user are determined by a
Class of Service associated with the trunk or by the remote
user’s
password.
Direct
Diaf (DID) trunks
DID trunks handle only incoming external calls. The digits
received from the Central Office are used typically to route
calls to a target line. The DID call appears at every
telephone configured with an appearance of that target line.
Calls can also be made to the
DN or the Auto DN, if
the last digits of the DID number are the same as one of
these
Any appearance of a DID trunk can be used only to monitor
activity of the trunk, not to answer an incoming call.
Configuration
Configuration overview
Note:
The digits provided by the CO need not match the
numbering plan. You can use the
Configuration
d
heading to specify the
digits that will make a target line ring. You can use
the Configuration
DN or
headings to
specify the numbers that will make the system
answer a remote call automatically.
Target lines
A target line is a specific communication path reached by
means of digits received from an incoming trunk. Target lines
are used to answer incoming calls but can not be used to
make outgoing calls.
Auto-answer Loop start and E&M trunks, and DID trunks,
provide automated routing of calls to different destinations
depending on the digits dialed. The destination is usually a
target line (a virtual line) that can be assigned to telephones
in the same way as a physical line. Target lines provide for
attendant by-pass (calling directly to a specific department or
individual) and line concentration (one trunk can fan out into
many target lines).
The digits received on an incoming trunk may be:
received from a Central Office (in the case of DID)
received from a PBX (in the case of E&M)
dialed by a remote user after having received system
dial tone (in the case of auto-answer Loop start,
answer E&M trunks or DID trunks).
By default, no target lines are assigned. However, if
answer trunks are used in the system, you can assign target
lines to sets in the same way that other lines are assigned (in
2. Line
of Configuration).
Target lines are referred to by line numbers in the same way
as physical lines.
Configuration
Configuration overview
7
Remote system access
The remote access feature allows callers elsewhere on a
private network, or on the public network, to get access to a
system by dialing directly without going through an
attendant. Once on the system, the remote user can use
some of the system’s resources.
systems with at least one Trunk Module support
remote system access on the following trunk types which
may require the remote caller to enter a password for Direct
Inward System Access (DISA):
auto-answer Loop start trunks
auto-answer E&M trunks
DID trunks (by means of the
DN).
The system resources (dialing capabilities, Line Pool access
and feature access) that a remote user may access depends
on the Class of Service assigned to them. You can refer to
the description of Class of Service in the Administration
chapter for more details.
Remote access on Loop Start and E&M trunks
Loop start trunks provide remote access to
from the
public network; E&M trunks provide remote access from a
private network. Each must be configured to be auto-answer
(in Trunk data programming) to provide remote system
access.
A Loop start trunk must have disconnect supervision if it is
to operate in auto-answer mode. E&M trunks always operate
in disconnect supervised mode.
Configuration
Configuration overview
Auto-answer with DISA
When a caller dials in, the system answers with stuttered dial
tone. This is the prompt to enter a Class of Service (COS)
password which determines which system capabilities are
available to the caller.
Auto-answer without
When a caller dials into the system, the system answers with
system dial tone and no COS password is required. In this
case, control over the system capabilities available to the
caller is provided only by the Class of Service assigned to
the incoming line.
Remote access on E&M trunks connected to a
private network
Nodes on the private network deliver the last dialed digits to
node, for interpretation by the
the destination
node. The destination
node
destination
either matches the digits to a target line or interprets the
digits as a remote feature request. The call is either routed to
the specified target line, or the remote feature is activated.
Auto-answer E&M trunks connected to a private
network
By default, E&M trunks are set to answer with DISA. For
auto-answer E&M trunks connected to a private network,
change the default so that the trunks are not answered with
DISA.
If an auto-answer E&M trunk is configured to answer with
DISA, the system will try to interpret any received digits as a
COS password.
Configuration
.
Configuration overview 9
Auto-answer with the
DN and the Auto DN
The
DN and the Auto DN allow auto-answer private
network and auto-answer DID calls, in the same way that
calls on auto-answer Loop start and auto-answer E&M
trunks can be answered, with or without DISA. These
are described in 4.
i
11
programming.
Remote access on Direct Inward Dial (DID) trunks
Remote system access on DID trunks is similar to that of
E&M trunks connected to a private network. The main
differences are:
a remote caller is on the public network dialing
standard local or long-distance telephone numbers
the digits received are delivered by the Central Office
can not be administered to a DID trunk.
As with a private network, the dialed digits may be
programmed to match those of a specific target line DN or
Remote Feature
(the
DN and the Auto DN).
Configuration
Getting stat-ted
5efore you begin programming
For new installations:
make sure that you have chosen the appropriate
programming template, as described in Startup
Obtain:
the
Programming Overlay
the Nor-star Modular
Programming Record.
the
Record.
Network
Modular
Know how:
to enter Configuration programming
to exit Configuration programming
to use the buttons associated with the Programming
Overlay.
Remember:
to record the settings you are programming on the
Modular
Programming Record and on the
Modular DR4 Network Configuration Record.
that default options are shown in bold type. Most
display messages in the procedures show the default
option.
Defaults correspond to those assigned in System
Startup. The option you see while programming may be
different if that feature has been changed. If a line .
number or DN appears on the display during
programming, an example is shown in the
Configuration procedures.
Configuration
Getting started 11
Entering
Configuration
1.
Complete all calls on your
or M7324 Telephone.
(The receiver should remain on the telephone during
programming.)
2.
Enter the Configuration access code using the feature
button and the dial pad:
Press
.
which is the same as:
3.
Password:
appears.
Enter the Configuration password (the password does
not appear on the display as you enter it). The default
Password is
If the password is correct:
appears, and three triangular
appear on the vertical display next to the
indicators
rows of buttons.
If the password is incorrect, the display does not
change. Check the password. Press
and reenter the password.
4.
Place the
Programming Overlay over the
buttons pointed to by the indicators . .
5.
Press [Show).
1.
Data appears.
Exiting Configuration
1. Press
End
appears.
records all changes as you make them, there
Since
is no need to worry about leaving the session without
.
“saving” them.
Configuration
12
Data
What is
Data?
Data consists of:
Trunk data for specifying hardware connection
characteristics for external lines.
Line Data for specifying line characteristics for both
physical lines and target lines.
Note:
Target lines do not have any Trunk data settings. For
target lines, the physical connection information
consists of the received digit string (
d
used to access the target line.
Trunk data
Trunk mode
Answer mode
Answer with
Signal
Gain
Dial mode
Full
on idle line
Received number (target lines only)
Line data
Line type
Prime Set
Auxiliary Ringer
Auto Privacy
Configuration
Data 13
Select the feature or features to program, and find the
Data
description and programming procedure. The
settings are listed above in the order that the headings
appear during programming.
begin
Data programming
Begin with 1.
1.
Data .
Press [Show].
appears.
Show line:
2.
Enter a three digit line number (include leading zeros:
for example, 001 or 080).
Trunk data appears.
OR
Press
to copy all the
Data
programming from one line to another.
If you enter a target line number at the Show 1
prompt, all the Trunk Data settings are skipped, and
d
you are presented immediately with the
prompt instead. (Valid target line numbers are 081 to
120 with a Two-port Expansion Cartridge, or 081 to 184
with a Six-port Expansion Cartridge)
3.
Continue with Trunk data programming if you entered a
line number for a physical trunk
OR
Specify the received digits for which the target line
should ring if you entered a target line number.
Note:
If the number of received digits that will make a
target line ring is other than 3, you must change the
default received number length under the
Configuration System Data heading.
Configuration
Data
14
Copying Trunk and Line data
At the
1
prompt a .
button appears. This
allows you to copy programming from one line to other lines.
Copying data from different types of Trunk
Cartridges (TC)
Copying lines between different trunk types (for example,
from a Loop start TC to an E&M TC) will trigger the prompt
along with the display buttons
and
This is because all trunks on a given TC must be of the
same type. Changing the trunk type for one line on a TC will
change all lines on the same TC.
Note:
“nnn-mmm” is the number range for the lines in the
Trunk Cartridge to which the data is to be copied.
Copying limitations
when copying data for an E&M line to a Loop start line
or a DID line, if you reset the new line to E&M (in
response to the prompt), the first two lines in the
changed TC will be E&M and the last two lines DTMF
(see the description of E&M Trunks).
in copying data from a physical trunk to a target line (or
the other way around), only the data in common is
copied. For example, copying a target line to an E&M
trunk copies only the Line data settings because there
are no Trunk data settings for a target line.
the Received number
d
) of a target line is a
unique number and can not be copied.
the two lines on E&M
reserved for DTMF receivers
can not be copied to another line type (see the section
on E&M
for a description of E&M and DTMF lines).
You can copy data to KSU lines 001 to 008 only from
Loop start lines.
Configuration
Trunk data 15
Trunk data
Trunk Data settings apply to physical lines (001 to
and
not to target lines (081 to 184). Some Trunk Data settings
may not appear on the display during programming
depending on the type of trunk. Those that appear for a
given Trunk type are indicated in the table below.
Trunk data prompts that appear for a given Trunk type
Yes
Trunk mode:
Ans mode:
Yes
I
es
I
Yes
Yes
Yes
I
Yes
I
Ans with
DISA:
Signal:
Yes
I
Dial mode:
Full
I
I
Yes
I
es
Yes
I
Yes
Yes
The Line setting specifies the trunk type for a line. A valid
line number on a Trunk Cartridge, such as line 010, appears
on the display as
LOOP.
Configuration
16 Trunk data
Note that E&M Trunk Cartridges have two E&M lines and
two DTMF receivers (instead of four lines as in a Loop start
cartridge). For example, if an E&M Trunk Cartridge has the
range of line numbers 009 to 012, numbers 009 and 010 are
E&M lines, and numbers 011 and 012 are the DTMF
receivers. The display prompt for line 010 appears as
and for line 011 appears as
11:
After you change a Trunk type setting (or after you use the
display button to copy Line programming) you must
press one of the Next, Heading, or Back navigational
buttons. You will then be prompted to confirm that you want
to reset the Trunk type for all trunks supplied by the TC,
since all trunks on the same TC must be of the same type.
For instance, Reset
would appear, along with
and
display buttons, if you changed the Trunk setting
for one of the lines on the first TC in a system (009-0 1 2
refers to the line number range in the Trunk Cartridge).
Only when you press the YES display button, will a changed
or copied Trunk setting take effect.
Options expiained
Loop: is the default setting used for Loop start trunks
and for KSU Loop start lines (001 to 008).
E&M: is set for the first two line numbers on an E&M
Trunk Cartridge.
DTMF: is set for the two last lines on an E&M cartridge.
You must not assign DTMF receiver line numbers to
telephones. If you do, the lines will appear at the
telephone as out of service.
DID: is set for a Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Trunk
Cartridge.
Configuration
Trunk data 17
Note:
Changing the settings for Trunk Cartridge type (that
is, Loop start, E&M or DID) on a system in use, may
cause lines to be disabled and calls to be dropped.
Programming
Line
Begin with L i
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are
Loop, E&M (or DTMF) and DID.
2.
If you did not change the line setting, do one
following:
Next programming heading
Press button
Trunk data.
OR
d di i
(for target lines)
Trunk
(for Loop stat-t trunks)
(for E&M trunks)
(for DID trunks)
OR
If you did change the line setting, do one of the
following:
Press button Reset? Next programming heading
(Heading]
N
+
O
(Heading] +
YES
N
+
O
YES
Trunk d a t a .
Trunk
(or E&M, DTMF or DID)
Trunk mode
(for Loop start trunks)
(for E&M trunks)
(for DID trunks)
l i n e :
(under 1.
Data)
if
was set to DTMF
Configuration
18 Trunk data
Trunk mode
The Trunk mode setting is used only for Loop start lines on a
Trunk Cartridge or in the KSU.
Trunk mode lets you specify one of two modes of operation
for each line: disconnect supervision or unsupervised.
Disconnect supervision, also referred to as loop supervision,
releases an external line when an Open Switch Interval
is detected during a call on that line. This prevents the
line from remaining unavailable for other
users.
For example, if an external caller hangs up while on hold,
and disconnect
disconnect supervision can detect the
the call.
Options explained
“Super” (the default) assigns supervised mode, if
supported by the
hardware; otherwise,
unsupervised mode is assigned.
“Unspr” turns disconnect supervision OFF for the line.
Programming hints
The “Super” option is suitable for most installations. Assign
“Unspr” if disconnect supervision must be turned OFF for a
line connected to hardware that supports supervision.
The duration of an OSI before
disconnects a call is
programmed in the Supervision setting of Miscellaneous
programming.
For Loop start trunks to operate in auto-answer mode,
disconnect supervision is required.
Configuration
.
Trunk data 19
Programming Trunk mode
Begin with Trunk mode:
.
Press
to change the setting. The options are
Super and Unspr.
2.
Press [Heading] until you return to the desired heading.
OR
Next programming
Press button
(if Super)
Dial
(if Unspr)
Answer mode
The Answer mode prompt appears on the display during
programming for Loop start lines if the Trunk mode setting
was Super, and for E&M lines. The prompt is suppressed for
DID programming.
If the Auto setting is chosen for Answer mode, a secondary
with
prompt appears
Programming hints
Remember that disconnect supervision is required if Loop
start trunks are to operate in auto-answer mode.
setting to ‘N’, for
You should change the Answer with
E&M trunks in a private network operating in auto-answer
mode. The default
with
causes the
system to expect a Class of Service password after it
automatically answers a trunk.
Programming Answer mode
Begin with
1.
mode: Manual.
Press
to change the setting. Options are
Manual and Auto.
Configuration
20
Trunk data
Press [Heading] until you return to the desired
heading.
2.
OR
Next programming heading
Press button
Dial
I
(for Loop start trunks set to
Manual)
with
(for Loop start trunks set to Auto)
(for E&M trunks set to Manual)
with
(for E&M trunks set to Auto)
Answer with DISA
This setting is displayed during the programming of Loop
start and E&M lines if Answer mode was set to Auto. The
prompt is suppressed during DID programming.
The Answer with
setting allows you to specify whether
with
a trunk is answered with stutter dial tone
or with system dial tone
with
N).
Programming Answer with
Begin with
with
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are Y
(Yes) and N (No).
2.
Press
heading.
until you return to the desired
OR
Press button
[Next]
Next programming heading
i 1
(for Loop start trunks)
(for E&M trunks)
Configuration
Trunk data 21
Signal
The Signal setting appears on the display only for E&M or
DID programming.
Programming hints
Make sure that this matches the signal type programmed for
Modular
the trunk at the other switch. Refer to the
Network Configuration Record.
Programming Signal
Begin with Signal:
1.
Press
2.
Press [Heading] until you return to the desired
heading.
to change the setting. Options are
Immediate and
OR
Press button
Next programming heading
Gain
(for E&M trunks)
Dial mode
(For Loop start trunks)
Configuration
.
22
Trunk data
Gain
Control over the gain (transmission levels) can be set for
E&M trunk programming only.
Programming
hints
The default value
induces zero loss. Use it when
the E&M trunks are connected to facilities that present
at the interface, for both the transmit and receive
0
.
paths.
Receive
Transmit
E&M Gain set to NORMAL
The. value
induces 7db of loss in the receive path and
16db of loss in the transmit path. Use it when the E&M
in the
trunks are connected to facilities that present
receive path, and -16
in the transmit path, at the
interface.
Facility
Receive
Transmit
E&M Gain set to HIGH
Configuration
Trunk data 23
Programming Gain
Begin with Gain:
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are
Normal and High.
2.
Press
until you return to the desired
heading.
OR
Press .[Next] to program Dial mode.
Dial mode
The Dial mode setting appears on the display only for Loop
start and E&M trunk programming. Dial mode lets you
specify whether Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) or Pulse
signalling will be used on the trunk.
Programming Dial mode
Begin with
mode:
.
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are
Pulse or Tone.
2.
Press
OR
Press
Full
until you return to the desired heading.
to program Full
on idle line
Full
on idle line is a variation of the Automatic Hold
feature. If you select an idle line, but do not dial any digits,
that line will automatically be placed on hold if you then
select another line.
The line you first selected will be held until you press its
button. The line will not be available for use by anyone else.
Configuration
24 Trunk data
will appear only during Loop start
A prompt for Full
trunk programming. Full
is always in place for E&M
trunks; it has no meaning for incoming-only DID trunks.
The default setting should be changed only if Full
required for a specific application.
Programming Full
on idle line
with Full
Configuration
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are N
(No) and Y (Yes).
2.
Press
heading.
OR
Press
until you return to the desired
to program Line data.
is
Received number
25
number
The Received number setting applies only to target lines
(line numbers 081 and higher). It allows you to specify the
digits which make a specific target line ring. The default
value is no digits specified.
The length of a
can be one to seven digits .
(programmed in System Data); the default is three digits.
Received numbers must be unique among target lines, the
DN and the Line Pool access codes.
Auto DN, the
Programming Rec’d
Begin with 1.
Data.
1.
Press [Show].
line:
appears.
2.
Enter a valid three-digit target line number (from 081
and 120 for a Two-port Expansion Cartridge, from 081
to 184 for a Six-port. You must include leading zeros
for lines 081 to 099).
None appears.
OR
Press
to copy all the
Data
programming (except for received number) from one
line to another.
3.
Press
and enter a new set of digits
OR
Press
without entering digits to reset the value
to the default of no Received number.
4.
Press
to return to
1
OR
Press (Next] to program Line data. No Trunk data
prompts are displayed.
Configuration
26 Line data
Line data programming can be applied to all lines, trunks and
target lines:
lines 001 to 032 (trunks) and 081 to 120 (target line) for
a Two-port Expansion Cartridge.
001 to 080 (trunks) and 081 to 184 (target lines) for a
Six-port Expansion Cartridge.
Line type
This setting specifies how the line is to be used in relation to
other lines in the system. The options are Public, Private to:,
or Pool (A to 0, representing 15 line pools).
Options explained
A Public line can be accessed by more than one
telephone:
A Private line can be assigned only to one telephone
and the Prime Telephone for that line.
Pool assigns the line to one of the fifteen line pools. If a
line is assigned to a line pool, but is not assigned to
any telephone, that line will be available only for
outgoing calls.
Programming hints
Line pools must NEVER contain a mixture of Loop
start lines and E&M lines.
All lines in a given line pool should always go
the same location.
Configuration
Line data 27
There are two more programming settings that must be
assigned before a line pool can be used:
.
You must assign Line Pool access to telephones in
the Line Access section of Configuration
programming.
.
You must assign system-wide Line Pool access
codes in the Miscellaneous section of
Configuration programming.
A telephone can be administered to search
automatically for an idle line from several lines
appearing on the telephone. Assign a line pool as the
Primeline(in 2 . L i n e
l i n e ) and
all the lines in the line pool must appear on that
telephone. When the user lifts the receiver, or presses
handsfree, any one of the lines, if idle, can be selected
by Automatic Outgoing Line selection.
Develop a unified dialing plan for line pools where
systems are networked together. It may be
appropriate to provide a single line pool with E&M lines
for use by all callers on the network.
If you will be programming the Prime line to the
Intercom (l/C) setting later in Line Access
programming, you may wish to assign Loop start lines
to the first line pools. Remember that when the system
searches for an outgoing line, it begins at Line Pool A
and chooses the first available line.
Assigning a single E&M trunk to a line pool will allow
features like Ring Again on Busy Line Pool to help
manage access to a shared resource.
Programming Line type
Beginwith
1.
.
Press
to change the setting. Options are
Public, Private to, or Pool (A to 0).
Configuration
28 Line data
Line type
Setting
Line
(default setting)
Private
Enter the internal number to
program a private line to a
telephone.
Press
repeatedly to
choose pool settings A to 0 (or
back to Line
ic).
Note: The Pool settings do not appear for target lines.
2.
Press
until you return to the desired heading.
OR
Press
Telephone).
to program Prime set (Prime
Prime Telephone
This feature allows you to assign a telephone to provide
backup answering for calls on the line. Unanswered calls are
redirected to the Prime Telephone.
For auto-answer trunks, calls will ring only at the Prime
telephone for a trunk, and only when overflow call routing is
active.
For example, program a reception desk telephone as the
Prime Telephone, so that calls to other telephones will
automatically ring at the reception desk if nobody else
answers.
Programming hints
Each line can be assigned only one Prime Telephone.
Programming the Prime Telephone
Begin with
1.
Configuration
Press
Prime
set: 221 .
to change the setting.
appears.
Line data 29
2.
Enter an internal number (for example, 234). The
default assignment is 221.
Prime set.: 234 appears.
OR
Press
to assign no Prime Telephone.
appears.
Prime set:
3.
Press [Next] to program Auxiliary ringer.
OR
Press
until you return to the Line data.
heading.
Auxiliary Ringer
This setting allows you to turn the Auxiliary Ringer ON or
OFF. When turned ON, the Auxiliary Ringer will ring for any
incoming calls that ring on the line. The Auxiliary Ringer is an
optional device that must be connected by the Installer.
Note:
For auto-answer trunks, calls will ring only at the
Prime telephone for a trunk, and only when overflow
call routing is active.
For example, if a telephone can not be heard in a noisy
room, install a wall-mounted bell, and program the bell to
ring for the same lines assigned to the telephone.
Programming hints
An Auxiliary Ringer can be programmed, in the Service
Modes section of Administration programming, to ring for a
line placed into a Service Mode. An Auxiliary Ringer can also
be programmed to ring for calls to a telephone, in
Administration programming under Capabilities in the Set
abilities section.
Programming Auxiliary Ringer
Begin with Flux. ringer:
1.
.
.
Press
to change the setting. Options are Y
(Yes) and N (No).
Configuration
30 Line data
2.
Press [Heading] until you return to the desired heading.
OR
Press
to program Auto privacy.
Privacy
This feature controls whether one
user can select a
line in use at another telephone to join an existing call. The
default setting is Privacy ON, so that nobody with a
telephone can press a line appearance on their telephone to
join a call in progress at another telephone.
For example
Once a week, two managers of the branch office must
update head office of their activities. Program Privacy OFF
(assigned as “No”) to an external line which is shared by the
managers’ telephones. When it is time to make the weekly
call, one manager calls head office, and the other manager
joins the call by pressing the line button for the shared
external line.
Programming hints
Privacy can also be turned ON and OFF during a call with
the Privacy feature code.
Programming Privacy
Begin with
.
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are Y
(ON) and N (OFF).
2.
Press
another line.
line:
OR
Press
Configuration
to program Line data settings for
appears.
to return to the Line data heading.
Line Access 31
Line Access
What is Line Access?
Line Access allows you to program six characteristics for
each telephone.
When you are finished programming Line Access
one telephone, you can copy those settings to other
telephones.
for
Line Access programming includes:
Line assignment
Answer
Ringing
Line Pool access
Intercom buttons
Prime line
Select the feature or features you wish to program, and find
the description and programming procedure. The Line
Access settings are listed above in the order that the
headings appear during programming.
To begin Line Access programming
Begin with 2. Line
1.
.
Press [ S h o w ] .
Show
appears for programming Line Access
settings for each telephone.
OR
Press COPY to copy all the Line Access programming
from one telephone (if one has been programmed
already) to another telephone.
Configuration
32 Line Access
2.
Enter the internal number of the telephone you want to
program.
i
appears.
Li
Programming Line Access
Line assignment
This setting allows you to assign physical trunk lines and
target lines to each telephone. Target lines are assigned and
removed in the same manner as other lines.
For example
A Central Answering Position has been installed at the
company’s reception desk. The telephone attendant may
have to answer calls for many lines. Assign, to the
attendant’s telephone, the five lines used by the Consumer
Products division telephones and the two lines used by the
Marketing division.
Programming hints
The default line assignments depend on the system template
assigned during System Startup. The line assignment
defaults for the default template (Square) are lines 001 and
002 to all telephones.
In general, auto-answer loop start trunks, auto-answer E&M
trunks and DID trunks are not assigned to telephones. If
assigned, they are used for monitoring incoming call usage,
or for making outgoing calls (auto-answer Loop start and
E&M trunks).
You can not add a line that is private to another telephone.
Configuration
Line Access 33
Each line assigned to a telephone must appear at a button
with an indicator on that telephone. The maximum number
line buttons are:
8 for the M7208
10 for the
24 for the M7324
The
is an exception; it has no line buttons and can be
assigned any number of lines.
A Central Answering Position (CAP), with one or two CAP
modules, can provide extra line buttons if more than 12 lines
are assigned to the M7324. The remaining lines appear at
buttons on the first CAP module.
Programming lines
Begin with
1.
.
Press [ S h o w ] .
assigned appears if line 001 is the first line
already assigned to this telephone.
OR
1
appears if no lines have yet been
assigned.
2.
Press
1
to add a line,
appears.
OR
Press REMOVE to remove the line,
Li
1
briefly appears.
Programming continues at step 5.
OR
Press [Next].
Programming continues at step 5.
OR
Press [Heading] until you return to the desired heading.
Configuration
34 Line Access
3.
Enter the three-digit line number to be added to the
telephone. Use
if required.
Line002
appears (if, for example, line 002
was added). To add more lines return to step 2.
4.
Li
003
appears if, for example, line 003
is the next line already assigned to this telephone. To
add more lines return to step 2.
OR
appears if there are no more assigned
lines. Programming continues with the assignment of.
Answer
Answer
Calls for other
telephones can appear and be
answered at the telephone being programmed. The
of
One to
the other telephones are referred to as Answer
four Answer
may be assigned to the telephone being
programmed.
Programming hints
Every Answer DN assigned to the telephone will
automatically assign an Answer button with an indicator to
the telephone. These buttons should be labeled accordingly,
identifying the telephone with its name or DN.
More than one telephone can have an Answer button for the
same DN. In this way, more than one telephone can provide
call alerting and call answering for any calls directed to that
DN.
A Private line does not generate alerting at an Answer
button.
Configuration
Line Access 35
Programming Answer
Begin with
1.
.
Press
appears if DN 228 is the first Answer
228
i
DN already assigned to this telephone.
OR
appears if no Answer
have yet
been assigned.
2.
Press
to add an Answer DN,
appears.
OR
Press
to remove the Answer DN,
briefly appears.
228
Programming continues at step 5.
OR
Press
Programming continues at step 5.
OR
Press
until you return to the desired heading.
3.
Enter the internal number. Use
if required.
229
appears (if, for example, Answer DN
229 was added). Programming continues at step 2.
4.
238 assigned appears, for example, if DN 230 is the
next assigned Answer DN. Programming continues at
step 2.
OR
appears if there are no more assigned
Answer
Programming continues with Ringing
assignments.
Ringing
This setting allows you to choose:
which lines (including target lines), on the telephone
being programmed, will ring for an incoming call.
which Answer
on the telephone being
programmed, will ring for an incoming call.
Configuration
36 Line Access
If auto-answer Loop start trunks, auto-answer E&M trunks or
DID trunks are assigned to a telephone, the ringing
preference has an effect only when overflow call routing or
callbacks associated with overflow call routing occur. The
ring/no ring setting has no effect on incoming calls on the
trunks that are being routed to target lines.
For example
A secretary answers calls for the sales office. The calls are .
then transferred to the appropriate person. Each telephone
has four lines assigned, but only the secretary needs to
answer calls on two of the lines (the customer general
information number and the number for the business office).
Program those two lines as “Ring” only on the secretary’s
telephone. If necessary, the secretary can still transfer the
call to a sales person because they have the line assigned to
their telephone. However, the sales people are not expected
to answer every call that arrives on those two lines. If those
two lines on their telephones are programmed as “No ring”,
they will not hear that a call has come in unless it is a
transferred call.
Programming hints
Refer to Startup for default line ringing assignments in the
Hybrid and PBX system templates.
the Square,
Ensure that lines assigned to an M7100 will Ring; otherwise
incoming calls on the lines can not alert at the telephone.
You can not program Ringing if there are no lines or Answer
assigned to the telephone.
.
Configuration
Line Access 37
Programming
Ringing
Begin with Ringing .
1.
Press [ S h o w ] .
1:
appears, for example, if line 001 is
the first line assigned to the telephone, and that line is
assigned to ring.
OR
222:
if DN 222 is an assigned Answer DN, and
the telephone has no assigned lines.
2.
Press
to change the setting. Options are
Ring and No ring.
OR
Go to step 3.
3.
Press [ N e x t ]
appears (if the next line is 002).
Li
Programming continues at step 2.
OR
223: Ring appears if there are no more assigned lines
(example shows
but there are assigned Answer
DN 223). Programming continues at step 2.
OR
1
appears if there are no more
Programming continues
assigned lines or Answer
with Line Pool access.
Line Pool access
This setting allows a telephone to access one or more of the
fifteen line pools available (A to 0). When you assign “yes”
for a given line pool, the telephone being programmed will be
able to access any lines in that line pool.
Programming Line Pool access
Begin with
1.
.
Press
N appears.
Corifiguration
38 Line Access
2.
Press
to change the setting. Options are N
(No) and Y(Yes).
3.
Press .[Next] to assign Line Pool access for the
next line pool:
N appears.
Line
OR
appears, if Line Pool 0 was the
last line pool shown. Programming continues with
Intercom buttons.
Intercom buttons
This setting assigns the number of intercom buttons to a
telephone. Intercom buttons provide a telephone with access
to internal lines.
For example
Everyone in the office except for the accountant has a need
to make a conference call with two other employees in the
office. Program the accountant’s telephone with one
Intercom button, and all of the other telephones with two.
Programming hints
Each Intercom button assigned during programming will
appear on the telephone. The buttons start
with the lower right-hand button, or one button above if the
feature was assigned to the telephone.
Two Intercom buttons are required for establishing a
conference call with two other
telephones.
Only one Intercom button is required if internal calls are to be
made or received on the telephone, and line pools are to be
accessed.
The
default assignment of two Intercom buttons can
not be changed. These buttons do not appear on the
telephone.
Configuration
Line Access 39
Programming intercom buttons
Begin with
2 .
Press
to change the setting. Options are 0, 1,
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.
2.
Press
until you return to the desired heading.
OR
Press [Next] to program Prime line.
Prime line
This setting assigns a Prime line to the telephone. A Prime
line is the firs; line that is automatically selected when a call
is made from a
telephone.
The options are an external line, a line pool, an internal line,
or None.
For example
The company has both an office and workshop with
telephones. The workshop staff usually need to call only the
office, but the office staff usually need to call outside of the
company. Program the telephones of the office staff with an
external line as the Prime line. Select the line that they most
often use. Program an internal line as the Prime line for the
workshop telephones.
Options explained
Each assigned line appears as an available Prime line.
If any line pools are assigned to the telephone, each
line pool appears, with the word “Pool”, as an available
Prime line.
The internal line option appears as
(Intercom).
Configuration
40 Line Access
Programming hints
An assigned Prime line is not associated with the
assignment of a Prime telephone.
An external line must be assigned to the telephone in Line
assignment before it can be assigned as the Prime line to
the telephone.
A line pool must be assigned to the telephone in Line Pool
access before a line pool can be assigned as the Prime line
to the telephone.
A target line can not be a prime line for a telephone because
it is incoming-only.
A DID line should not be assigned as the prime line for a
telephone. assigned, it is treated as if no prime line has
been assigned. The message S e l e c t a 1
will appear
when the receiver is lifted.
Remember that if you set Prime line to Intercom (I/C), you
may wish to assign Loop start lines to the first line pools.
Remember that when the system searches for an outgoing
line, it begins at Line Pool A and chooses the first available
line.
By assigning a line pool as a Prime line, a telephone can be
made to search automatically for an idle line in a pool. This is
described in the section on programming Line type
(1.
D a t a , L i n e data)
Configuration
Line Access 41
Programming the Prime line
Begin with:
1
if no Prime line is assigned (the
default).
OR
i
.
1
1 if the Prime line is an external line (the
default). Line 001 is shown as an example.
OR
1
if the Prime line is a line pool. Line
Pool A is shown as an example.
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are
None, a line number, Pool (A to 0), and
Only assigned lines and line pools will appear.
2.
Press
until you return to the desired heading.
OR
Press
to program Line Access settings for
another telephone.
appears.
Show
Configuration
42 Call Handling
What is Call Handling?
Call Handling allows you to program any combination of up
to ten different system-wide characteristics for certain
features. These characteristics are not associated in
programming with any specific line or telephone.
Call Handling allows you to program:
Held Line Reminder
Held Line Reminder delay
Delayed Ring Transfer
Delayed Ring Transfer delay
Transfer Callback delay
Park prefix
Park timeout delay
Camp timeout delay
Directed Pickup
On hold
Select the feature or features you wish to program, and find
the description and programming procedure. The Call
Handling settings are listed above in the order that
headings appear during programming.
Configuration
Call Handling 43
begin Call Handling programming
Begin with 3. Call Handling .
1.
Press
appears for programming Held
Held
Line Reminder.
2.
Press
the display.
until the feature you want appears on
Programming Call Handling
Held Line Reminder
This feature reminds you that a call at your telephone is still
on hold. You will periodically hear two tones from your
telephone until you return to the call on hold.
Programming Held Line Reminder
Begin with Held reminder: N .
1.
2.
Press
to change the setting. Options are N
(No) and Y (Yes).
Press
until you return to the desired heading.
OR
Press
If you chose No, DRT to Prime: appears for
programming the Delayed Ring Transfer to Prime
Telephone.
60 appears for
If you chose Yes, Remind
programming the Held Line Reminder delay.
Held Line Reminder delay
This feature allows you to choose the number of seconds
before the Held Line Reminder feature begins at a telephone
that has an external call on hold.
Programming hints
The Held Line Reminder delay can be programmed only if
Held Line Reminder was turned ON.
Configuration
44
Call Handling
Programming Held Line Reminder delay
Begin with
Press
2.
Press
.
to change the setting. Options are 30,
120, 150, and 180 seconds.
until you return to the desired heading.
OR
Press
to program Delayed Ring Transfer.
Delayed Ring Transfer
This feature automatically forwards unanswered external
calls to a Prime Telephone, after a certain period of time.
This helps ensure that no external call goes unanswered.
Programming hints
An operational Prime Telephone must be assigned before
this feature can operate. A Prime Telephone is assigned to
one or more external lines in the Line Data section of
Configuration programming.
Programming Delayed Ring Transfer
Begin with
.
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are Y
(Yes) and N (No).
2.
Press [Heading] until you return to the desired heading.
OR
Press
If you chose No,
1 bk : 3 appears for
programming the Transfer Callback delay.
If you chose Yes, DRT
3 appears for
programming the Delayed Ring Transfer delay.
Configuration
Call Handling 45
Delayed Ring Transfer delay
This feature allows you to specify the number of rings
Delayed Ring Transfer transfers a call to a
Prime
Telephone.
For example
..
The company training room has a
telephone.
Program a delay of two rings so that the telephone will
quickly be answered at the Prime Telephone, and not
continue to disturb a class.
.
Programming hints
The Delayed Ring Transfer delay can be programmed only if
Delayed Ring Transfer was turned ON.
You can estimate the delay in seconds if you multiply the
number of rings by six.
Programming Delayed Ring Transfer delay
Beginwith D R T
3
.
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are 1, 2,
3, 4, and 6 rings.
2.
Press
OR
Press
delay.
until you return to the desired heading.
to program the Transfer Callback
Configuration
46 Call Handling
Transfer Callback delay
This delay allows you to specify the number of rings before a
Callback occurs on a transferred call.
For example
The company receptionist must often transfer calls to the
print shop. However, it is difficult to hear the telephone ring
there because of noise. Allow six rings at the telephone
.
before the callback to ensure that the print shop workers
have a chance to hear the telephone.
Programming hints
You can estimate the delay in seconds if you multiply the
number of rings by six.
Programming Transfer Callback delay
Begin with
3 .
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are 3, 4,
5, 6, and 12 rings.
2.
Press
until you return to the desired heading.
OR
Press
to program Park prefix.
Park prefix
The Park prefix is the first digit of the call park retrieval code
that must be entered to retrieve a parked call. If the Park
prefix is set to None, calls can not be parked.
Programming hints
The Park prefix can not be the same as:
the Direct-dial digit
the External Line access code
the first digit of a DN
Configuration
Call Handling 47
the first digit of a Line Pool access code.
If DN length is changed, and the changed
the Park prefix, the setting changes to
conflict with
Other programmable settings may affect which numbers
appear on the display during programming . Although the
numbers 0 to 9 are valid Park prefix settings, some may
have been already assigned elsewhere by default or by
programming changes. (To avoid a conflict, refer to the table
of default settings in the description of External code.)
Programming Park prefix
Begin with Park prefix: 1.
1.
Press
9, None or 0.
to change the setting. Options are 1 to
2.
Press [Heading) until you return to the desired
heading.
OR
Press
to program Park timeout.
Park timeout delay
This feature lets you assign the number of seconds before a
parked call on an external line will callback to the originating
telephone.
For example
In the store, customer’s orders are brought from the adjacent
warehouse and picked up at the front desk. For telephone
orders, the receptionist parks the call, and announces the
order to the warehouse. If the warehouse staff do not answer
the parked call after a specific delay, the receptionist
prepare the order. Program the delay as two minutes, or 120
seconds.
Configuration
48 Call Handling
Programming Park timeout delay
Begin with
timeout:
.
1.
Press
45,
2.
Press [Heading] until you return to the desired heading.
to change the setting. Options are 30,
120, 150, and 180 seconds.
OR
Press (Next] to program Camp timeout delay.
Camp timeout delay
This feature allows you to assign the number of seconds
before an unanswered camped call is returned to the
telephone which camped the call.
For example
When senior managers in the company are busy in a
meeting, they prefer having important calls camped on the
conference room telephone. They do not always want to be
disturbed by the telephone ring, but they still want to hear the
Camp-On tone. Program a short 30 second Camp timeout
delay to allow the managers to decide if they wish to take the
call.
Programming Camp timeout delay
Begin with
Press
45,
2.
timeout:
.
to change the setting. Options are
120, 150, and 180.
Press [Heading] until you return to the desired heading.
OR
Press [Next] to program Directed Pickup.
Configuration
Call Handling 49
Directed pickup
This feature allows you to answer any calls by specifying the
ringing telephone’s internal number.
For example
Two departments located next to each other in an open
concept office space want to answer each others’ telephones
in order to provide excellent customer service, even though
they are not in the same Call Pickup Group. Program
Directed pickup to improve the chances that anyone can use
the nearest telephone to answer a ringing call.
Programming hints
This feature is not to be confused with the Call Pickup Group
feature in Administration programming, which allows you to
answer a call at any telephone within a specific group
without specifying the internal number of the ringing
telephone.
Like Call Pickup Group, this feature is useful when not all the
telephones have been assigned the same lines, but you still
want to allow your co-workers to answer a call on any
external line from their telephones.
Programming Directed pickup
Begin with
.
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are Y
(Yes) and N (No).
2.
Press
OR
Press
until you return to the desired heading.
to program On hold.
Configuration
50 Call Handling
On hold
This feature lets you choose what a caller will hear on an
external line when the line has been put on hold.
For example
..
In the travel agency, customers have to wait on the
telephone until a travel agent is available. Program Music On
Hold so customers can hear music while they are waiting.
Options explained
Tones provides a periodic tone.
Music provides any signal from a source such as a
radio connected to the
Key Service Unit.
Silence.
Programming On Hold
Begin with On hold:
Configuration
.
1.
to change the setting. The options are
Tones, Music, and Silence.
2.
Press
until you return to the desired heading.
OH
to program the Miscellaneous section
Press
of Configuration programming.
Press
Miscellaneous 51
is
Miscellaneous allows you to program any of the following
system-wide characteristics:
Background Music
Direct-dial digit
D N
Auto DN
Alarm telephone
CAP assignment
Link Time
Telephone Relocation
Host delay
Disconnect Supervision delay
External code
Line Pool access codes
Installer password
Select the feature or features you wish to program, and find
the description and programming procedure. The
Miscellaneous settings are listed above in the order that the
headings appear during programming.
To begin Miscellaneous programming
Begin with 4.
.
Press
i c: N appears for programming
Background Music.
Configuration
52 Miscellaneous
2.
Programming
Press [Next] until the feature you want appears on
the display.
Miscellaneous
Background Music
This feature allows you to listen to music through your
telephone speaker. A music source must be connected to
the Key Service Unit.
Programming Background Music
Begin with
N .
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are N
(No) and Y (Yes).
2.
Press [Heading] until you return to the desired heading.
OR
Press
to program Direct-dial telephone(s).
Direct-dial digit
This feature allows you to dial a single system-wide digit that
can be used to call a specific telephone called a Direct-dial
telephone. There can be as many as five Direct-dial
telephones in a system. The Direct-dial telephone to which
specific telephones will connect is assigned in Administration
(4. Direct-Dial and 5. Capabilities).
People with common interests should be in the same
Direct-Dial group. For instance, the secretary who can best
handle calls or questions for a group could have a telephone
assigned as the Direct-Dial telephone for that group.
Programming hints
Another Direct-dial telephone, an Extra-dial
be assigned for each Service Mode in Service Modes
programming.
Configuration
Miscellaneous 53
Possible settings for the Direct-dial digit are: N (None), 0 (the
default) to 9. The Direct-dial digit can not be the same as:
the first digit of a DN
the first digit of a Line Pool access code
the External Line Access code
the Park prefix
If DN length is changed, and the changed
the Direct-dial digit, the setting changes to
conflict
To avoid a conflict, refer to the table of default settings in the
description of External code.
Programming Direct-dial #
Begin with Direct-dial
.
1.
Press
to change the setting.
2.
Press (Heading) until you return to the desired heading.
OR
Press
to program the
DN.
Direct Inward System Access Directory Number
(DISA DN)
For calls answered with DISA, the system presents a
stuttered dial tone to prompt a caller to enter a valid
password. The Class of Service (COS) that applies to the
call is determined by this COS password.
Once a remote user is on the
system, the
DN
can be used to change the existing Class of Service and
select another one.
Configuration
Miscellaneous
DN is the same as the
d
specified in
Data. The
DN will be cleared if the Received number length is
changed.
The length of the
Programming hints
The
DN can not conflict with any target line
and
can not have a first digit that conflicts with the first digit of a
Line Pool access code or with the External Line access
.
code.
Programming
Begin with
1.
DN
.
Press
to change the setting.
appears.
Enter the digits to be received from the auto-answer
trunk.
OR
Press
DN:
3.
if no
DN is to be assigned.
appears.
Press [Heading] until you return to the desired heading.
OR
Press
to program the Auto DN.
Auto Directory Number (Auto DN)
For calls answered without DISA, no password is required to
access the
system. The Class of Service (COS) that
applies to the call is determined by the COS for the trunk on
which the user is calling.
The length of the Auto DN is the same as the
specified in 5.
Data.
DN will be cleared if the Received number length is changed.
Configuration
Miscellaneous 55
Programming hints
The Auto DN can not conflict with any target line
and .
can not have a first digit that conflicts with the first digit of a
Line Pool access code or with the External Line access
code.
..
Programming Auto DN
Begin with
1.
2 .
.
Press
Auto DN:
to change the setting.
appears.
Enter the digits to be received from the auto-answer
trunk.
OR
Press
DN:
3.
Press
if no Auto DN is to be assigned.
appears.
until you return to the desired heading.
OR
Press
to program the Alarm telephone.
Alarm telephone
This feature allows you to assign a telephone on which
Alarm messages will appear when a problem has been
detected in the system.
For example
The System Coordinator is the person in the office most
familiar with
Assign this person’s telephone as the
Alarm telephone so that an appropriate action can be
decided if an Alarm message appears on the telephone’s
display.
Configuration
56 Miscellaneous
Programming Alarm telephone
Beginwith
1.
Press
221
.
to change the setting. The default is
221.
appears.
2.
Enter the internal number.
OR
Press .
assigned,
if no Alarm telephone is to be
appears.
3.
Press [Heading] until you return to the desired heading.
OR
Press
to program CAP assignment.
CAP (Central Answering Position) assignment
This setting designates a telephone as a CAP. The CAP
must be an M7324 telephone, and may have one or two
CAP modules attached. The DN used is the DN of the
M7324. A maximum of five
can be installed in a
system.
The CAP may be used to:
monitor the busy/not busy and Do Not Disturb status of
telephones
answer external calls on up to 120 lines, and extend
telephones
calls to other
send up to 30 messages to other
telephones
provide up to 96 extra memory buttons for the M7324
Telephone.
Configuration
Miscellaneous 57
For example
An increase in the number of calls that must be handled by
the company’s receptionist has resulted in the need for a
Central Answering Position (CAP). A Central Answering
Position module has therefore been installed on an M7324.
Assign 226, the internal number of that M7324, to
Programming hints
If CAP modules are attached to an M7324 that has not been
programmed as a CAP, then no CAP settings are assigned.
If a CAP module (or modules) is relocated with the M7324,
the settings are retained.
Programming CAP assignment
Begin with
1.
Press
If
i
.
have been previously defined:
1: 225 (for example) appears.
OR
if a CAP has not been assigned:
1:
appears (the default).
2.
Press
display.
3.
Press
4.
Enter the internal number of the CAP.
5.
Press (Heading] until you return to the desired heading.
until the desired CAP appears on the
.
OR
Press
to assign the next CAP.
After the fifth CAP assignment, programming continues
with Link Time.
Configuration
58 Miscellaneous
Link Time
This feature allows you to specify the duration of a signal
required to access a feature through a remote system.
For example
.
External dialing must reach through a
system. The
system requires a Link Time of 400 ms. Program a
Link Time of 400.
Programming hints
The Link Time required will depend on the requirements of
the host switching system that must be accessed.
Link is another name for recall or flash.
Programming Link Time
Begin with Link time: 600 .
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are 100,
and 1000
milliseconds.
2.
Press
until you return to the desired heading.
OR
Press
Telephone
to program Telephone Relocation.
Relocation
This feature allows you to move any telephone to a new
location within the
system without losing the settings
which were originally programmed on the telephone.
These settings include Personal programming, and any
and Administration programming for that
telephone.
Configuration
Miscellaneous 59
For example
The company is relocating the sales department to a new
location in the office. Turn Telephone Relocation ON during
the move so that the relocated telephones retain their
programmed settings.
Programming hints
It is advisable to turn Telephone Relocation ON after the
telephone installation and programming has been
provides you with more flexibility in testing equipment.
If this feature is OFF while a telephone is moved, that
telephone’s DN and Administration data remain with the
physical port on the KSU, and the telephone will not receive
the original programming when it is reconnected elsewhere.
Programming Telephone Relocation
Begin with
.
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are N
(No) and Y (Yes).
2.
Press
until you return to the desired heading.
OR
Press
to program Host delay.
Host delay
This feature lets you assign the delay between the moment
an outgoing line is selected to make an external call (by
lifting the receiver off the telephone, for example) and the
moment that
sends dialed digits or codes on the line.
For example
.
The telephone company informs you that dial tone is heard
within seconds after an idle line is selected. Program a
Host delay time of 600 milliseconds.
Configuration
60 Miscellaneous
Programming hints
Host delay is provided to ensure that a dial tone is present
before the dialing sequence is sent. Minimizing this delay
provides faster access to the requested features.
Programming Host delay
Begin with
.
: 1000 .
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are 200,
1200,
and
2000 milliseconds.
2.
Press
until you return to the desired heading.
OR
Press [Next] to program Disconnect Supervision
delay.
Disconnect Supervision delay
This setting allows you to specify the duration of an Open
Switch Interval (OSI) before the Disconnect (or loop)
Supervision feature disconnects a call on a supervised
external line.
For example
On occasion, a supervised line was unavailable because the
telephone network switch disconnected a line, but the
disconnection was not recognized by the
system.
The telephone company suggests that the Supervision delay
be decreased to 50 milliseconds. Program a delay of 60
milliseconds (the shortest setting available).
Programming hints
Disconnect Supervision is assigned to each line with the
Trunk mode setting in the Line Data section of Configuration
programming.
Configuration
Miscellaneous 61
Programming Disconnect Supervision delay
Begin with
.
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are 60,
100, 260, 460, and 600 milliseconds.
2.
Press [Heading] until you return to the desired heading.
OR
Press
code.
to program the External Line access
External code
This setting allows you to assign the External Line access
code. This code is used:
to allow an
telephone to access external lines
to allow an Analog Terminal Adapter
external lines
to access
For example
Program an external line access code of
to allow the
telephones to access external lines.
newly installed
Programming hints
The External Line access code can not conflict with:
the Park prefix
the Direct-dial digit
the first digit of a Line Pool access code
the first digit of a DN
conflict with
If DN length is changed, and the changed
the External Line access code, the setting changes to
The default external line access code is 9.
Configuration
62
Miscellaneous
Digits assigned by default to Configuration settings
Heading
0
Direct-dial #
4. Miscellaneous
1
Park
3. Call handling
2
the first digit of
5. System Data
3
the first digit of
expanded system
9
External Line access code
-
-
in an 5. System Data
4. Miscellaneous
4. Miscellaneous
Line Pool access code
(Not assigned by default, but
takes precedence over the
External Line access code if
there is a conflict.)
Programming External code
Beginwith E x t e r n a l c o d e : 9 .
1.
Press
.
2.
Enter the one digit code.
OR
Press
.
3.
Press
to program Line Pool access codes.
Line Pool access codes
This setting allows you to assign a Line Pool access code for
each of the fifteen line pools (A to 0). These codes are used
to specify the line pool you wish to use for making an .
outgoing external call.
For example
Program the Line Pool access codes
and
two assigned line pools in the
system.
Configuration
to the
Miscellaneous 63
Programming hints
The code can be one to four digits in length. Line Pool
.
access codes starting with the same digit must be the same
length.
A Line Pool access code can be the same as an external line
access code. In this case, the Line Pool access code takes
priority over the external line access code, and a line from
the line pool is selected.
A Line Pool access code can not conflict with:
the Park prefix
the Direct-dial digit
the first digit of any Received number
the first digit of any DN (including the Auto DN or the
DN).
To avoid a conflict, refer to the table of default settings in the
description of External code.
Programming Line Pool access codes
Begin with Line
1.
codes .
Press
Line
appears.
OR
Line
1 appears if Line Pool access code
81, for example, was previously assigned.
2.
3.
Press
until the desired line pool appears if
you do not wish to program the first code.
Press
Line
.
appears on the display.
Configuration
64 Miscellaneous
4.
Enter the digits for the Line Pool access code
(maximum of four digits).
OR
Go to step 5 to reset the Line Pool access code to
none.
5.
Press
.
If you reset the code, the code for the next line pool
appears.
OR
appears for programming the
Installer
Installer password if Line Pool 0 was the last code.
6.
Press [Heading] until you return to the desired heading.
OR
Press
to program the next code.
OR
appears for programming the
Installer
Installer password if Line Pool 0 was the last code.
Installer password
This setting allows you to change the Installer password that
allows access to Configuration programming.
Programming hints
You can choose any combination of one to six digits. You will
find it easier to remember the password if the digits spell a
word. Provide this password only to selected personnel to
prevent unauthorized access to Configuration programming.
The implications of such access may include the
rearrangement of line assignments, which could affect the
operation of the
system.
The default Installer password is 266344 (CONFIG).
Configuration
Miscellaneous 65
Programming Installer password
Beginwith
1.
Press
.
appears.
2.
Enter the new one to six digit Installer password (for
example, 2287 which spells “cats”). Use
if
required.
3.
Press
.
.
appears.
4.
Re-enter the digits and press
5.
If you re-entered the same digits:
5.
.
briefly appears.
Data appears for programming
Change
OR
If you re-entered different digits:
briefly appears and an error tone
Pswd
is heard.
again appears.
Configuration
66
System Data
What is System Data?
System Data allows you to specify system-wide settings
which include:
Individual
DN length
Rec’d number length
Select the feature or features you wish to program, and find
the description and programming procedure. The System
Data settings are listed above in the order that the headings
appear during programming.
To begin System Data programming
Begin with 5 .
1.
Data .
Press
I nd i vi dua 1
appears for programming
individual
2.
Press [Next) to program DN length.
2 appears for a non-expanded system, or
3 appears for an expanded system.
Note that if any future expansion is planned, the DN
length should be set to three, even on non-expanded
systems. Refer to the description of DN length, later in
this section, before you change the length of
in a
system.
Configuration
System Data 67
Programming System Data
This feature allows you to change the Directory Number
(DN) of a telephone.
Changing an individual DN locks the configuration session
into the System Data programming mode. When the System
Data session ends, re-enter the Configuration access code
and the Installer password to continue with other
Configuration or General Administration programming. Do
not perform Startup again, or all previous programming
be erased.
For example
Each lawyer in the office has a legal secretary, and everyone
has a
telephone. Rearrange the
so that each of
these pairs of telephones have a consecutive DN. This will
help all the office staff to remember who is the secretary for
each lawyer. Begin with programming the first lawyer’s DN
as 30, and the secretary’s DN as 31.
Programming hints
No DN changes occur until the Configuration session ends.
If the “new DN” already existed for another telephone, that
other telephone will be given the “old DN”.
All
must be the same length.
Configuration
68 System Data
The first digit of a new DN can not be the same as the first
digit of:
an External Line access code
a Line Pool access code
the Park prefix
..
the Direct-dial digit
To avoid a conflict, refer to the table of default settings in the
description of External code.
The lowest default DN for a non-expanded system is 21, and
the lowest default DN for an expanded system is 221.
Programming Individual
Begin with Individual
Configuration
.
1.
Press
DN:
appears.
OR
If no
were changed,
Press
until you return to the desired heading.
OR
If
were changed,
Press
Configuration programming is terminated, and you are
returned to an idle telephone.
2.
Enter the old DN you wish to change.
Press
if necessary to correct an entered digit.
3.
Press
when you are finished entering the DN:
DN:
appears.
4.
Enter the new DN.
Press if necessary to correct an entered digit.
System Data 69
5.
Press
when you are finished entering the DN:
briefly appears (if, for example, the old DN
was 224, and the new DN is 245).
appears, and programming returns to
step 1.
If the old DN does not exist or can not be used:
1 id 1 d
briefly appears.
I
appears in step
OR
If the new DN can not be used:
I
1 id new
briefly appears.
DN:
appears in step 1.
DN length
This feature allows you to change the number of digits for all
internal
The maximum length is seven. The default and
minimum length is three for an expanded (with Expansion
Cartridge)
system, and two for a non-expanded
system.
If any future expansion is planned, the DN length should be
set to three, even on non-expanded systems.
A DN length change, if required, should be the first
system.
programming change on a newly installed
CAUTION
You must wait for at least two minutes after a system
startup before you change the DN length.
Programming hints
CAUTION
Data devices will drop calls if the length is changed.
Configuration
70 System Data
Data devices use the
channel. The
and M7324 Telephones use the
are not dropped for these telephones.
M7208,
channel. Calls
Each increase in length will place the digit 2 in front of any
existing DN. For example, if DN 3444 was increased to a
length of 6, the new DN would be 223444.
Note:
If the DN length is changed so that a conflict is
created with the Park prefix, External Line access
code, Direct-dial digit, or any Line Pool access
the setting for the prefix or code will be changed to
None, and the corresponding feature will be
disabled.
A non-expanded system (with a default DN length of two) is
automatically changed to a DN length of three after an
expansion cartridge is installed and power is restored to the
KSU.
For example
The company is expanding and the
must be
re-assigned to accommodate the branch office, which has a
DN length of four. Change the three digit length to a four digit
length.
Programming DN Length
Beginwith
1.
Configuration
2 or
length: 3 .
Press
to change the setting.
Options are 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 for a non-expanded
5, 6, and 7 for an expanded system
system; and
(‘2’ is not available for an expanded system).
System Data 71
2.
Press ( N e x t ] .
If the DN length was not changed,
appears for programming the .
length of Received numbers.
OR
If the DN length was changed:
data calls? appears.
3.
Press
change.
OR
Press
of
if you do not wish to continue with the length
to make the change.
i
briefly appears.
exits from Configuration programming, and the
telephone returns to an idle state.
The DN length change is completed within two minutes,
depending on the size of the installed
system.
System response may briefly slow down during this
time.
You can not re-enter Configuration programming during this
time. If you enter the Configuration access code, the
message In
appears on the display.
Received number length
This feature allows you to change the number of digits
received on auto-answer trunks. These digits are used to
identify target lines, Auto
and
Note that target line number ( for example, line 081) and the
Received number for the target line (for example,
d
1234 for line 081) are two different numbers.
Note as well, that the Received number length maybe the
same as the system DN length, or may, because of network
or CO constraints, be set to some other value.
A received number may be one to seven digits in length. The
default length is three.
Configuration
72 System Data
Target lines are supported only on expanded
systems (with an Expansion Cartridge). The
prompt does not appear when programming non-expanded
systems (without an Expansion Cartridge).
Programming hints
Changing the Received number length will cause all
programmed received digits to be cleared.
Programming Rec’d # Length
Begin with
1.
Press
to change the setting.
Options are 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7.
2.
Press
If the Rec’d length was not changed,
Data appears for programming the Trunk
1.
and Line Data sections of Configuration programming.
OR
If the DN length was changed:
appears.
d
Cl
3.
Press
change.
if you do not wish to continue with the length
OR
Press
to make the change. All programmed
received digits will be cleared
1.
Data appears.
Configuration
Set copy 73
copy
What is set copy?
Set copy allows you to copy programmed data from one
telephone to another. You have two choices when deciding
which data to copy:
you can copy System data only;
you can copy System data and User administration data.
l
l
System data is programmed in Configuration and
Administration. User administration data is programmed by
people at their own telephones, in order to customize their
telephones to their own needs.
Remember:
Set copy operates only from the
or
M7324 Telephones.
Do not confuse Set copy with the
display button.
COPY is more selective than Set copy. It allows you to
copy specific groups of data from one telephone to
another telephone or from one external line to another
external line. You can copy more selective groups of
System data listed in the table below by pressina
when it appears.
If you are copying both System data and User
administration data, the source and destination
telephones must each be the same
model.
If you are copying System data only, the telephones
can be different
models.
Copying data to a telephone overrides any of that
telephone’s previous programming.
Know which data can and can not be copied. These are
shown in the following two charts.
Configuration
74 Set copy
System data
System data which
CAN NOT be copied
System data which CAN be copied
Alarm Telephone
designation
Answer button
assignments
Line assignment
CAP assignment
..
Direct-dial Telephone
designation
Automatic Handsfree
Line Pool access
Auxiliary ringer
Line
Directory Number (DN)
Call Forward No
Answer
Number of intercom or
extension buttons
Extra-dial Telephone
designation
Call Forward No
Answer Delay
Page Zone
Night Control Telephone
designation for a line
Call Forward On Busy
Pickup Group
Night Ringing
Telephone designation
for a line
applied
Call
to the telephone
Prime line designation
Prime Telephone
designation for a line
Call Restrictions
applied to the
telephone
Priority Call permission
Private line
appearances
Direct-dial Group
Redirect Ring
Telephone Name
Full Handsfree
Ringing line preference
Handsfree Answerback
Telephone
Administration Lock
Hotline
Telephone Filter
Configuration
Telephone Filter
Set copy 75
User administration data
User administration data
which CAN NOT be copied
User administration data which CAN
copied
CAP module memory button
assignments
Dialing modes (Automatic Dial, Pre-Dial,
Standard Dial)
Contrast adjustment
Language Choice
Ring Type
Line button positions
Ring Volume
Personal Speed Dial entries
Telephone memory button assignments
(Internal Autodial, External Autodial, and
feature access)
Configuration
76 Set copy
Accessing Set copy
From any
Telephone or M7324 Telephone:
1.
Place the Overlay on the telephone.
2.
Press
3.
Enter the existing Installer password. The
prompt appears. The default password is
which you can use if this is the first time that
Configuration programming has been entered.
4.
if the password is entered correctly,
appears.
OR
If the password has been incorrectly entered, the
prompt remains on display. In this case,
press
, and again enter the password.
Password:
Note:
5.
Configuration
Press
Set
To preserve the integrity of Configuration and
Administration data, do not give the Installer
password to anyone.
twice.
appears.
Set copy 77
copy
From
1.
2.
:
Press [ S h o w ] .
If you want to copy System data only, go to step 3.
OR
If you want to copy both System data and User
administration data, press
3.
Press ( N e x t ] .
4.
Enter the DN of the telephone from which you want to
copy data.
5.
Enter the DN of the telephone to which you wish to
copy data.
6.
Repeat step 5 if you wish to copy the same data to
another telephone.
OR
Press [Heading] to return to
OR
Press
to end the session.
Configuration
telemanuals.com
Administration
l
oeo*eeeeeooeeoeeeeeeeeeeeeoeeeeeee
telemanuals.com
Contents
Administration overview 1
Administration headings
Getting started 3
Before you begin programming 3
Entering Administration 4
Exiting Administration
System Speed Dial 5
What is System Speed Dial? 5
To begin System Speed Dial programming 5
Programming System Speed Dial 6
System Speed Dial number 6
Line Selection 7
Display Digits 8
System Speed Dial Name 8
Bypass Restrictions 10
Names 11
What is Names? 11
To begin Names programming 11
Programming Names 11
Telephone Names 11
Line Names 13
Time and Date 15
What is Time and Date? 15
To begin Time and Date programming 15
Programming Time and Date 16
Time 16
Date 17
Administration
telemanuals.com
ii Contents
Direct-Dial 19
What is Direct-Dial? 19
Programming Direct-Dial 19
Capabilities 21
What is Capabilities? 21
To begin Capabilities programming 22
Dialing filters 23
Remote access packages 29
Telephone (Set) abilities 31
Programming Telephone (Set) abilities 32
Telephone (Set) filter 32
Line/telephone (Line/set) filter 33
Telephone Administration Lock 34
Full Handsfree 36
Automatic Handsfree 37
Handsfree Answerback 37
Call Pickup (Group) 38
Page zone 39
Auxiliary Ringer 39
Direct-dial telephones 39
Call Forward On Busy 40
Call Forward No Answer 41
Redirect ring 42
Hotline 43
Line abilities 48
Line filter 48
Remote filter 49
Remote package 50
Class of Service (COS) passwords 51
User filter 54
Line filter 55
Remote package 56
Administration
telemanuals.com
Contents iii
Service Modes 57
What is Service Modes? 57
To begin Service Modes programming
Programming Service Modes
58
Control telephones 58
Service Mode
60
Service Mode name 60
Service Mode setting
61
Trunk Answer
64
Extra-dial telephone 64
Ringing
65
Service Mode 2
67
Service Mode 3
67
58
Password 68
What is Password? 68
Programming the Administration password 69
Programming reminders 70
Administration
telemanuals.com
Administration overview 1
Administration programming lets you change settings for the
system, as well as settings for individual
entire
telephones and external lines.
Pre-programmed default settings may initially be sufficient
for your needs. You can use Administration programming,
however, to customize your
by changing
these default settings.
Administration
headings
Administration programming has seven major sections:
System Speed Dial assigns a two-digit code (01-70)
for fast dialing of up to 70 telephone numbers from any
telephone.
Names identifies external lines and telephones by
name (for example, LAURA or ROOM 6). When you
call a co-worker, your name appears on the display of
your co-worker’s
telephone.
Time and Date adjusts the time and date displayed on
telephone.
each
Direct-Dial designates the telephones that can be
reached by dialing a single digit. There can be five
Direct-Dial telephones, each with a group of telephones
from which it will receive Direct-Dial calls.
Capabilities defines dialing fiiters, remote access
packages, line abilities and telephone abilities. It
assigns restrictions and capabilities to Class of Service
(COS) passwords, to telephones, to lines and to
line/telephone combinations. Dialing filters, remote
access packages and COS passwords control access
to the system’s resources by internal and remote users.
Administration
2
Administration overview
Service Modes controls how the
system will
respond to calls, depending on the time of day. For
example, incoming calls during lunch can be made to
ring both at their normal destination, and at a
receptionist’s desk.
Password changes the password that controls access
to Administration programming.
Administration
Getting started 3
etting started
Before you begin programming
Obtain
the
Programming Overlay
the Nor-star Modular DR4 Programming Record
Know how
to enter and exit Administration programming
to use the buttons associated with the Programming
Overlay.
Remember
to record programming changes on the
Modular DR4 Programming Record. Photocopy the
appropriate pages, and distribute them to everyone
who uses the
system. You can also record
information for distribution on the Programming
reminders charts at the end of this chapter.
that default options are shown in bold type. Most
display messages in procedures show a default option.
that defaults correspond to those assigned during
installation. The option you see while
programming may be different if that feature has been
changed. If a line number or internal number appears
on the display during programming, an example is
shown in the Administration procedures.
that the default
internal numbers depend on the
system. The defaults are:installed
* two-digit internal numbers (beginning at 21) for
expanded
systems
three-digit internal numbers (beginning at 221) for
systems.
expanded
l
Administration
4
started
Entering
1.
Administration
Complete all calls on your
or M7324 Telephone.
(The receiver should remain on the telephone during
programming.)
2.
Enter the Administration access code, using the feature
button and the dial pad:
Press (Feature]
which is the same as:
Press
3.
Password: appears.
Enter the Administration password from the dial pad.
(The password does not appear on the display as you
enter it.)
If the password is correct, 1.
dial
appears, and three triangular indicators
appear on
the vertical display next to the rows of buttons.
If the password is incorrect, the display does not
change. Check the password. Press
and reenter the password.
4.
Exiting
Place the
Programming Overlay over the
buttons pointed to by the indicators
Administration
1. Press
End
appears.
records all changes as you make them, there
Since
is no need to worry about leaving the session without
“saving” them.
Administration
System Speed Dial 5
What is System Speed Dial?
System Speed Dial allows you to program up to 70
telephone numbers that can be dialed, using a two-digit code
from any
telephone.
(01 to
System Speed Dial includes the following five settings:
System Speed Dial number
Line Selection
Display Digits
System Speed Dial Name
Bypass Restrictions.
Select the setting or settings you wish to program, and find
the description and programming procedure. The System
Speed Dial settings are listed above in the order that they
appear during programming.
To begin System Speed Dial programming
Begin with
1.
dial .
Press
dial
2.
appears.
Enter the two-digit System Speed Dial code (from 01 to
70) from the dial pad.
dial
12 , for example, appears if 12 was
entered.
OR
Press
to program the first System Speed
Dial number.
dial
appears.
Administration
6 System Speed Dial
Programming System Speed Dial
System Speed Dial number
This setting lets you assign a System Speed Dial telephone
number to a two-digit code. The System Speed Dial number
may contain 24 characters.
You may first view a previously programmed number before
changing it, or directly proceed to change the number.
Programming hints
A Host System Signaling feature code may be inserted into
the System Speed Dial number. Pause and Run/Stop each
use one character position; and Link, Timed Release, and
Programmed Release each use two positions.
Programming the System Speed Dial number
Begin with
dial
0 1 , for example.
1.
Press
only if settings for this System Speed
Dial code were already assigned, and you wish now to
assign default settings.
Go to step 6.
2.
Press [Show] :
appears if no number was
No number
previously assigned.
OR
5552466 , for example, appears if a number was
previously programmed. I EW- and
I EW
appear if the number is longer than 16 digits.
3.
Administration
Press
.
appears.
System Speed Dial 7
4.
Enter the new telephone number from the dial pad
(maximum of 24 digits), including all digits such as an
or an area code that must be dialed to call the‘
initial
number manually.
99975823, appears, for example.
If the number is more than 16 digits long, the left-most
digits disappear from the display as you continue to
enter the System Speed Dial number.
display button if required to
Press the
backspace the cursor.
5.
Press
6.
Press
to program another System Speed
Dial number.
Speed dial
appears on the display to allow you to
continue programming at step 1.
OR
Press
to program Line Selection.
when the number has been entered.
Line Selection
This setting allows you to specify the external line that will be
used for a System Speed Dial number. The options are the
Prime line (the default), an external line, or a line pool.
Programming Line Selection
Begin with:
1 ine (the default).
OR
line:
, for example, if a line is already assigned.
OR
42 , for example, if a Line Pool access code
is already assigned.
.
If you wish to change the setting,
Press
until the required setting appears.
2.
If you have chosen a line number or a Line Pool access
code, enter the digits from the dial pad. A Line Pool
access code can be from one to four digits long.
Administration
8 System Speed Dial
3.
Press
when the digits have all been entered,
to program Display Digits.
Display Digits
This setting determines whether the telephone number will
be displayed when a System Speed Dial number is used, or
whether a name associated with that number will be
displayed.
Programming Display Digits
Begin with
.
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are Y
(Yes), and N (No).
2.
Press
:
If you chose No, program System Speed Dial Name.
OR
If you chose Yes, program Bypass Restrictions.
System Speed Dial Name
This setting allows you to assign a name to the stored
System Speed Dial number. The name can be up to the full
length of the display (16 characters).
When the Display Digits setting is “No”, this name will be
displayed on the
display when someone uses the
System Speed Dial feature.
This option appears only if the Display Digits setting is “No”.
If no name is specified, only the System Speed Dial number
appears. The display shows, for example,
Dial
for System Speed Dial code 02.
Administration
System Speed Dial 9
Programming the System Speed Dial Name
Begin with
1.
.
Press [ S h o w ] .
Dial
appears, for example.
OR
COURIER appears if, for example, the name “Courier”
was assigned.
2.
Press
to enter the new name.
OR
Press
3.
to program Bypass Restrictions.
Enter the first character of the name by pressing the
appropriate dial pad button one, two, three, or four
times.
OR
Press
to restore the default name and
proceed to program Bypass Restrictions.
4.
to move the cursor to the next position.
Press
Continue entering characters (remember the 16
character limit).
5.
Press
to program Bypass Restrictions.
Administration
System Speed Dial
Bypass
Restrictions
This setting allows the System Speed Dial number to bypass
any previously programmed restrictions.
Restrictions prohibiting calls are programmed in the
Capabilities section of Administration programming.
Programming Bypass Restrictions
Begin with
.
Press
to change the setting. Options are N
(No), and Y (Yes).
2.
Administration
Press [Heading] until you return to the desired
programming heading.
OR
Press
to program the next System Speed
Dial number.
Names 11
What is Names?
Names allows you to assign names to identify external lines,
telephones. During
target lines and your co-workers’
a
call, the name (if programmed) appears on each
telephone’s display instead of the external line
number or internal telephone number of the caller.:
Names includes the following settings:
Telephone Names
Line Names
Select the setting or settings you wish to program, and find
the description and programming procedure. The Names
settings are listed above in the order-that they appear during
programming.
To begin Names programming
Begin with 2. Names .
1.
Press [ S h o w ] .
appears for programming telephone
names.
2.
Press
appears for programming line names.
Programming Names
Telephone Names
You personalize your office communication by assigning
names to the telephones in the
system. A
telephone’s internal number is its default name (for example,
"227: 227").
Administration
12 Names
Programming hints
Telephone names can contain both letters and numbers, but
cannot be longer than seven characters. The #and
symbols cannot be used.
.
If Automatic Telephone Relocation is turned ON, the name
and internal number of a telephone are saved if the
telephone is moved within your system.
You can give the same name to two or more telephones; or
to a telephone and a line in your system. To avoid confusion,
however, you should avoid such duplication. Use initials,
abbreviations, or even nicknames to give each telephone a
unique name.
Programming a Telephone Name
Begin with S e t
1.
Press
set:
2.
.
appears.
Enter the internal number of the telephone.
OR
for the name of the telephone with the
Press
first internal number.
22 1: JOHN appears, for example, if the name John is
already assigned; or,
221:
appears, for example, if a name has not yet
been assigned.
3.
Administration
Press
.
A cursor appears, and the name disappears from the
display.
Names 13
4.
Enter the first character of the name by pressing the
appropriate dial pad button one, two, three, or four
times.
OR
Press
to restore the default name and
proceed to program the name for the next internal
number.
5.
to move the cursor to the next position.
Press
Continue entering all of the required characters .
(remember the seven-character limit) for the name.
6.
To enter the name for another telephone:
Press (Back] to return to Show
.
OR
Press
number.
to show the name for the next internal
Line Names
This setting allows you to assign a name to an external line.
The line number is the default name (for example,
For example
One external line in your company is assigned to calls to the
main warehouse only. Name the line “WAREHSE”.
Programming hints
Line names can contain both letters and numbers but cannot
be longer than seven characters. The # and symbols
cannot be used.
l
You can name a line by its seven-digit telephone number.
Two lines cannot have the same name. If you enter a line
name which has already been used, you will hear an-error
tone, and Use
appears on your telephone’s
display. You can, however, give the same name to a
telephone and a line in your system.
Administration
14
Names
Programming a Line Name
Begin with Lit-e names .
1.
Press ( S h o w ] .
1
2.
appears.
Enter the line number from the dial pad.
OR
Press
line (001).
to program the name of the first
1:
appears, for example, if the name
WATS is already assigned; or,
1:
1 appears, for example, if a name
has not been assigned.
3.
Press
. A cursor appears, and the name
disappears from the display.
4.
Enter the first character of the name by pressing the
appropriate dial pad button one, two, three, or four
times.
OR
Press
to restore the default name and
proceed to program the name for the next external line.
5.
Press
to move the cursor to the next position.
Continue entering all of the required characters
(remember the seven-character limit) for the name.
6.
To enter the name for another external line:
to return to
1
Press
.
OR
Press
line.
Administration
to show the name for the next external
Time and Date 15
is Time and Date?
When a
telephone is in its normal idle state, the
current time and date appear on the display
(Mar 3 1 3: 45
, for example). When active, some
features cause a different message to appear.
Time and Date adjusts the following settings:
Time
Date
Select the setting or settings you wish to program, and find
the description and programming procedure. The Time and
Date settings are listed above in the order that the headings
appear during programming.
To begin Time and Date programming
Begin with 3. Time and date .
1.
2.
Press [ S h o w ] .
Time 15: 45 , for example, appears
the time.
programming
Press
Date 31 Mar 9 , for example, appears for
programming the date.
Administration
16 Time and Date
Programming Time and Date
Time
This feature allows you to assign the time.
Programming hints
During normal service, the time display in English is in
12-hour format showing am or
. In the Alternate
Language, the time is always displayed in 24-hour format as
follows:
English
Mar
French
3 1
Spanish
31
31
Mar
If the display on a telephone is blank, the telephone may be
disconnected, or there may be no power to the Key Service
Unit (KSU). If power is out for more than three consecutive
days, or if you reset the system, the display will show
Jan 1 1 : 00
when the system is restarted. When
power is restored, the clock will begin to run again, but the
time will be incorrect.
All entries must consist of either one or two digits. If the
system is being administered in English and the hour entry is
.
less than 13, the display prompts you to specify am or
Programming Time
Begin with Time 15: 45 .
1.
Press
Hour:
2.
Press
erased.
.
15 appears.
to program the hour. The hour is .
OR
If you do not wish to change the hour, go to step 4.
Administration
Time and Date 17
3.
Enter the digit(s) for the hour in 12 or 24-hour format
from the dial pad.
4.
Press [Next].
45 appears.
If you do not wish to change the minutes, go to step 7.
5.
Press
6.
Enter the digit(s) for the minutes from the dial pad.
7.
Press
If
or
appears, and you wish to change the
setting, go to step 8.
.
OR
Go to step 9 if you do not wish to change AM/PM.
OR
Programming continues at step
8.
Press
.
9.
Press [ N e x t ] .
10. Date 3 1 Mar
1 appears.
Proceed to program the date.
OR
Press (Heading] until you return to the desired
programming heading.
OR
Press
to program Direct-Dial.
Date
This feature allows you to assign the date.
Programming hints
All entries must consist of either one or two digits. The month
is entered as a one or two-digit number between 1 and 12.
For example, March is entered as either “3” or
Only the
last two digits of the year are entered.
Administration
18 Time and Date
Programming Date
Begin with Date 3 1
1.
Press
1 .
.
appears.
2.
Press
to program the year.
OR
If you do not wish to change the year, go to step 4.
3.
Enter the last two digits of the year from the dial pad.
4.
Press
:
appears.
If you do not wish to change the month, go to
step 7.
5.
Press
6.
Enter the digit(s) for the month from the dial pad.
7.
Press [ N e x t ] .
D a r : 3 1 appears.
If you do not wish to change the day, go to step 10.
8.
Press
9.
Enter the digits from the dial pad.
.
.
Press (Heading] until you return to the desired
programming heading.
OR
Press (Next] to program Direct-Dial.
Administration
Direct-dial 19
is Direct-Dial?
This feature allows
users to call a Direct-Dial
telephone assigned to their telephone, by dialing a single
digit. Up to five Direct-Dial telephones can be designated to
handle calls from five groups of telephones.
Use this Administration heading to specify which teiephone
directory numbers
will be designated as Direct-Dial
telephones.
Programming hints
You must select the Direct-Dial digit in Configuration
i
You must also specify which
telephones can call a Direct-Dial telephone, and which one
they will call, in Administration
1 it
Programming
Direct-Dial
Begin with 4. D i r e c t - D i a l
1.
.
Press [Show].
22 1, for example, appears as the default DN
Set
assigned as the first Direct-Dial telephone.
OR
Press
2.
to program Capabilities.
You can assign a new DN as a Direct-Dial telephone by
pressing
and entering the digits of the new
DN.
OR
You can change the value to
by pressing
, and pressing [Next].
Administration
20 Direct-dial
3.
Press
until you return to the programming
heading 4.
.
OR
to continue programming up to a total
Press
of five Direct-Dial telephones.
After the fifth Direct-Dial programming heading,
pressing
displays the programming heading
for Capabilities.
Administration
Capabilities programming 21
What is Capabilities?
Capabilities programming assigns limitations, permissions,
and remote access capabilities to Class of Service (COS)
passwords, telephones, and lines.
The main sections of Capabilities programming are:
Dialing Filters
.
Remote access packages
Telephone (set) abilities
Line abilities
Class of Service (COS) passwords
Dialing filters allows you to group restrictions on dialed-digit
sequences into “filters”. These filters can later be applied to
specific telephones or external lines.
Remote access packages allows you to define the types of
access to Page and line pools that you will permit remote
users.
Telephone abilities applies Dialing filters to telephones.
Line abilities applies Dialing filters, Remote access dialing
filters, and Remote access packages to lines for remote
access.
Class of Service (COS) passwords use Dialing filters and
to
Remote Access packages to control remote
the system’s resources. COS password programming
defines passwords, their associated filters, and their remote
access packages.
Administration
22 Capabilities programming
begin Capabilities programming
Begin with 5.
1.
.
Press [Show.
Dial
i
appears for programming the first
level of Capabilities.
2.
Press
i
appears for selecting a filter to be
programmed.
OR
Press [ N e x t ] .
appears for programming the
remote access packages.
OR
Press
twice.
i 1 it
appears on the display for
programming the telephone characteristics.
OR
Press
three times.
a b i l i t i e s appears for programming line
characteristics.
OR
Press
four times
Passwords appears for programming Class of
Service passwords.
Administration
Capabilities
Dialing filters 23
Dialing filters
A dialing filter is made up of restrictions and exceptions.
These specify the external numbers which can or cannot be
dialed from a telephone or on a line.
Filters are defined under the programming heading
1
. A dialing filter can be applied later to
one or more telephones, or lines, in programming
abilities
a b i l i t i e s and
. They may be used as telephone (set)
filters, line filters and line/set filters to manage outgoing calls,
and as remote filters applied to lines. Remote filters control
the numbers that can be dialed by remote users when they
are calling into
to use a
line for placing calls.
Internal users
Dialing filters restrict the numbers that an internal user can
dial on external lines.
If a line/set filter has been defined for the line selected at the
user’s telephone, it completely replaces any line filters or
telephone filters which might otherwise apply.
If no line/set filters have been defined then dialed digits are
filtered through (and may be rejected by either of) the
telephone filter (if defined) and the line filter (if defined).
External users
For a remote user, who has dialed into
on an
auto-answer line (or a DID line), and passed through any
security, there are no restrictions on the numbers the
user can dial.
.
For remote users trying to tandem through the
system, the Line filters and Remote filters assigned in Line
abilities apply.
Administration
24 Capabilities
Dialing filters
the
For a remote user entering the system through
filters and Remote access packages associated with their
COS password replace the Remote filter, the Line filter, and
the Remote access package assigned to the incoming line.
Programming hints for Filters with Restrictions
and Exceptions
can have up to 100 dialing filters (00 to 99).
Filter 00 permits unrestricted dialing. Unlike filters 01 to
99, the restrictions and exceptions for filter 00 cannot’
be changed.
Filter 01 is pre-programmed with five restrictions and
some associated exceptions. See the Dialing filter
default templates.
Dialing filter default templates
Filter
Sauare
Hybrid PBX
00
Unrestricted dialing
01
Restr’n 0
Restr’n 90
Restr’n 1
Excpt’n:
1800
1555
Restr’n 91
Excpt’n:
91800
91555
1 l 0*555
Restr’n 911
Excpt’n 911
Restr’n 9911
Excpt’n 9911
Restr’n 411
Restr’n 9411
Restr’n 976 Restr’n 9976
02 99
Administration
None
Hybrid and PBX
settings are the
same as the
Square template
.
Capabilities
Dialing filters 25
The asterisk * is a “wild card” character that stands for
any digit.
Each filter (01 to 99) can have as many as 48
restrictions; there is no specific limit on the number of
exceptions that can be allocated to any restriction.
Note:
The total number of restrictions and exceptions
allocated to the 99 programmable filters cannot
exceed 400.
Filters 02, 03, and 04, although not pre-set with
restrictions and exceptions, are the default filter
settings used later in programming:
Filter
Where the filter appears as a default
setting in Capabilities programming
02
03
abilities--
Set
filter:
Line abilities-- Line filter:
Line
abilities--
Remote
filter:
The maximum length for a restriction is 15 digits; for an
exception, the maximum is 16 digits.
Any restriction or exception can be used in one or more
filters. Each time it is used, it counts as one entry. For
example, if restriction 411 appears in filters 01, 02 and
03 it has used up three entries of the 400 entries
available.
Removing a restriction also removes the exceptions
associated with it. This also changes the identifying
number of the restriction. For example, removal of
restriction 01 causes restrictions 01 to 48 to be renumbered and displayed as 01 to 47.
Administration
26 Capabilities
Dialing filters
Note:
The removal of a restriction and its exceptions
from one dialing filter has no effect on the
contents of another filter into which the
restriction and exceptions were copied.
Deleting a filter is not possible. Removing the
restrictions programmed on a filter makes it an
unrestricted filter but the filter is not removed (for
example, filter 08 remains filter 08 despite any changes
to it or to other filters).
For example
You may need filters for three different types of users:
Managers may require unrestricted dialing.
Secretaries may need to be limited to calls on line 003
to the west coast office only.
Clerks may need to be limited to calling specific area
codes and the west coast office.
In the table below, notice the reduction in the number of
available restrictions and exceptions after each filter has
been programmed.
ser
Filter # type
Note:
Administration
I #of
I #of
I # of restr’n excat’n
Restr’n Excpt’n remaining (400
Record restrictions and exceptions for each filter on
the
Modular DR4 Programming Record.
Capabilities
Dialing filters 27
Programming Dialing filters with Restrictions and
Exceptions
Restrictions
Begin with Dialing filters .
1.
Press [ S h o w ) .
appears on the display for entering
a filter number to be programmed.
Show filter:
2.
Enter a two-digit filter number (for example, 05).
restrictions appears on the
The prompt
display if this filter has not been programmed before.
3.
Press
4.
Enter the digits for the restriction.
5.
Press
to program a restriction.
appears on the display.
to program the restriction.
0 1: 1234, for example, appears on the
display.
6.
Press
to program another restriction for the filter.
appears on the display.
OR
Press [Show] to program any exceptions to this
restriction.
ions appears.
OR
Press (Heading] or
filter:
7.
to program another filter.
appears on the display.
prompt, press [Heading],
At the
i1ter:
to continue programming with
then press
Remote Access Packages.
Administration
28 Capabilities
filters
Exceptions
Exceptions, if required, are entered for individual restrictions
as soon as the restriction is programmed.
Begin, for example, at
from step 5 above).
0 1: 1234 (continuing
1.
Press [ s h o w ] .
i
appears on the display.
2.
Press
3.
Enter the digits for the exception (for example 12345).
4.
Press
5.
Press
to program another exception to the
restriction.
appears on the display.
to program an exception.
00 1:
appears on the display.
to program the exception.
00
12345 appears on the display.
OR
Press
restrictions.
0 1:
or [Back] to return to programming
appears on the display.
OR
Press
filter:
6.
appears on the display.
.
filter:
prompt, press
to
return to the Dial ins i 1
heading, then press
to continue programming with Remote
Access Packages.
Administration
Capabilities
Remote access packages
29
Wemoteaccesspackages
Remote access packages allow you to control the remote
use of
line pools and the Remote Page feature.
Remote access packages are associated with COS
passwords and the auto-answer lines used by remote users.
Programming hints
systems can have up to 16 Remote access
packages (00 to 15). The limitations are:
Package 00 permits no access to line pools or to
remote paging. Unlike packages 01 to 15, package 00
cannot be changed.
For remote users calling into the
system to use
lines for calling out, for example, the Remote
dialing filters and the outgoing Line dialing filters (in
abi 1
still apply.
Remote access packages default template
Parameter
Square
Hybrid
PBX
Prohibits access to line pools and Remote
Page. Can not be changed.
Package 01
Line Pool
access
Y for Pool A
N for Pools B to 0
Remote Page No
Packages 02
15
N for Pools A to 0
Line Pool
access
Remote Page
.
No
Remote package 00 appears later in programming Line
abilities as the default setting for the Remote package
setting.
Administration
30 Capabilities
Remote access packages
Programming Remote access packages
Begin with
1.
.
Press ( S h o w ] .
appears on the display.
OR
Press
to program Telephone (Set) abilities.
2.
Enter a two-digit package number.
appears on the,
The heading Line
display.
3.
Press [ S h o w ] .
N , for instance, appears on the display.
Note:
This display shows an alphabetic line pool
identifier, followed by a numeric line pool
access code between brackets (defined in
4. Miscel
of Configuration). If no
access code has been identified, the brackets
appear empty (for example
N).
OR
Press
to program Remote paging.
to allow Line Pool access.
4.
Press
5.
or
to display the settings for
Press
the next or previous line pools.
N appears on the display after the last
line pool.
6.
Press
to allow Remote paging.
OR
Press
to return to the heading
to program another Remote
Show package:
access package.
7.
Program another Remote access package.
OR
Press
to return to Rem access
,
to continue programming
and then press
with Telephone (Set) abilities.
Administration
Capabilities
Telephone abilities 31
Telephone (Set) abilities
Telephone (Set) abilities programming applies dialing filters
and permissions to telephones. Telephone abilities include
the following settings:
Telephone (set) filters
Line/telephone filters
Telephone Administration Lock
Full Handsfree
Automatic Handsfree
Handsfree Answerback
Call Pickup Group
Page zone
Auxiliary Ringer
Direct-dial telephones
Call Forward On Busy
Call Forward No Answer
Redirect ring
Hotline
Priority Call.
Administration
32 Capabilities
Telephone abilities
Programming Telephone (Set) abilities
Begin with Set abilities.
1.
Press
appears on the display
2.
Enter the digits for a telephone’s DN to begin
programming Set abilities.
02 appears on the display.
Set i 1
OR
Press
to copy Set abilities programming from one
telephone to another.
OR
Press [Heading] to return to the heading
Set abilities .
3.
Press
to program the Line/telephone filters.
OR
Press
until you return to the desired
programming heading.
Telephone (Set) filter
A telephone filter is a collection of restrictions and exceptions
defined in Dialing filters. These filters are applied to
telephones through Set filter programming.
Programming hints
Filters are most commonly used to prevent unauthorized
long-distance calls, without restricting local calls.
Telephone filters do not apply to calls dialed out on E&M
trunks. Someone could dial out to a destination on the
private network that is restricted on the public network.
To restrict calling on E&M lines, apply a restriction to the line
rather than to the telephone.
Administration
Capabilities
Telephone abilities 33
Programming Telephone filters
Beginwith S e t f i l t e r : 0 2 .
1.
2.
Press
to change the filter number.
Enter a new two-digit filter number.
OR
Press (Next] without entering any digits to set the
filter to the 00 filter which permits unrestricted dialing.
3.
Press
to program the Line/telephone
OR
Press [Heading] until you return to the desired
heading.
Line/telephone (Line/set) filter
A Line/telephone dialing filter is applied to a line at a
telephone. This type of filter replaces any line or telephone
filters which might otherwise apply.
As with dialing filters applied to telephones, or to lines,
line/set filters control the numbers that may be dialed on
specific external lines.
For example, a Line/set filter can permit a specific telephone
to call a specific long-distance number on line 003, but no
other long-distance numbers, and on no other line.
Programming hints
Remember that up to 100 filters may be defined in the
system (filters 00 to 99). Line/set filters fall under this
limitation.
A maximum of 255 Line/set dialing filters may be
applied to lines at telephones.
Administration
34 Capabilities
Telephone abilities
Programming
Line/telephone
Beginwith L i n e / s e t
1.
filters
.
Press ( S h o w ] .
appears on the display to allow entry
of a three-digit line number.
Show
line:
2.
Enter a three-digit line number.
Fi1
None appears on the display for assigning a
filter.
3.
Press
to be able to enter a filter number.
OR
Press
Show
line:
to retain the default of
appears on the display.
4.
Enter an appropriate two-digit filter number.
5.
Press
or (Heading] to program a Line/set
filter on another line.
appears on the display.
S h o w line:
6.
Enter a three-digit number to program a filter for
another line
OR
Press [Heading] to return to
i1
,
and then press
to continue programming
with Telephone Administration Lock.
Telephone Administration Lock
Telephone Administration Lock limits the types of features
that may be used or programmed at a telephone.
There are three options: None, Full and Partial.
Options explained
None allows you to access any feature on your .
telephone.
Administration
Capabilities
Telephone abilities
35
Partial Telephone Administration Lock prevents the
following at a telephone:
l
l
programming
buttons
programming Personal Speed Dial numbers
l
programming feature buttons
l
changing the display language
l
l
changing Dialing Modes (Automatic Dial,
and Standard Dial)
using Voice Call Deny
l
using Administration programming
l
moving line buttons
l
saving a number for Saved Number Redial
Full Telephone Administration Lock prevents the
following at a telephone:
programming
buttons
programming Personal Speed Dial numbers
programming feature buttons
changing Background Music
changing Do Not Disturb
changing the display language
changing Dialing Modes (Automatic Dial, Pre-Dial,
and Standard Dial)
changing Privacy
using Ring Again
using Call Forward all calls
using Send Message
using Trunk Answer
Administration
36 Capabilities
Telephone abilities
. using Voice Call Deny
l
using Administration programming
l
moving line buttons
l
activating Service Modes
l
saving a number with Saved Number Redial
Programming Telephone Administration Lock
Begin with Set
:
.
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are
None, Full and Partial.
2.
Press
until you return to the desired
programming heading.
OR
Press
to program the Full Handsfree feature.
Full Handsfree
This feature allows you to make or receive calls without
picking up the receiver, and allows a headset to be used with
the
telephone.
Programming hints
A
button is automatically assigned to a telephone
that is programmed with Full Handsfree.
Full Handsfree is disabled for an M7100 Telephone.
Programming Full Handsfree
Begin with Full
1.
Administration
N .
Press
to change the setting. Options are N
.
(No), and Y (Yes).
Telephone abilities 37
2.
Press [Heading] until you return to the desired
programming heading.
OR
Press [Next].
If you chose No, programming continues with the
Handsfree Answerback feature.
If you chose Yes, programming continues with the
Automatic Handsfree feature.
Automatic Handsfree
This feature activates the Handsfree microphone and
speaker when you make or receive calls by pressing a line
button.
Programming hints
You can program this feature only if the telephone has Full
Handsfree programmed.
Programming Automatic Handsfree
Begin with
N .
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are N
(No), and Y (Yes).
2.
Press
until you return to the desired
programming heading.
OR
Press
to program the Handsfree
Answerback feature.
Handsfree
Answerback
This feature allows you to answer a Voice Call without lifting
the receiver.
Programming hints
Regardless of the setting that you program, Handsfree
Telephone.
Answerback is always disabled for an
Administration
abilities
38
Programming Handsfree Answerback
Begin with HF
.
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are N
(No), and Y (Yes).
2.
Press
until you return to the desired
programming heading.
OR
Press .
feature.
to program the Call Pickup (Group)
Call Pickup (Group)
You can assign each telephone to one of up to nine Call
Pickup groups. Members of a Call Pickup group can answer
any calls ringing at another telephone in the group.
Programming hints
Each telephone in a Call Pickup Group does not have to be
assigned the same external lines (programmed by the
Installer in Configuration programming).
A call on a Private line in a Call Pickup Group cannot be
picked up.
You cannot pick up a call that is ringing only the Auxiliary
Ringer.
Programming Call Pickup Group
Begin with Pickup
.
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are NO,
8, and 9.
2.
Press
until you return to the desired
programming heading.
OR
Press
Administration
to program the Page zone feature.
Capabilities
Telephone abilities
39
Page zone
You can assign each telephone to one of six zones for
receiving Page messages. A zone is any selection of
telephones you want to group together, regardless of
location.
Programming Page zone
Begin with Page
1 .
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are 1 ,
and
NO.
2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
2.
Press (Heading] until you return to the desired
programming heading.
OR
to program the Auxiliary Ringer
Press
feature.
Auxiliary Ringer
This feature rings the Auxiliary Ringer (if installed) when the
telephone rings. An Auxiliary Ringer is important in noisy
environments where a
telephone might otherwise not
be heard.
Programming Auxiliary Ringer
Beginwith
ringer: N .
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are N
(No), and Y (Yes).
2.
Press
until you return to the desired
programming heading.
OR
Press
to specify a Direct-dial telephone.
Direct-dial telephones
A telephone can be assigned to call a Direct-dial telephone
when the user dials the single digit defined in Configuration
(4. Miscellaneous, Direct-dial).
Administration
40 Capabilities
Telephone abilities
Each telephone can call only one Direct-dial telephone,
although up to five Direct-dial telephones can be designated
in Administration (4. Direct-Dial). There is no limit to the
number of telephones that can be assigned to call a
particular Direct-dial telephone.
Programming Direct-dial telephones
Begin with
.
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options
, Set2, Set3, Set4, Set5 and None.
2.
Press
until you return to the desired
programming heading.
OR
Press
feature.
to program the Call Forward on Busy
Call Forward On Busy
This feature always redirects an incoming call to another
system when you are busy on a
telephone on your
call, or when you have Do Not Disturb activated at your
telephone.
Exceptions to this occur as follows:
If you are busy on a target line call, another call to that
target line will be redirected to the Prime telephone for
the trunk that received the second target line call.
If Line Redirection is in effect, it will take precedence.
Programming Call Forward On Busy
Begin with Forward
1.
Press
Forward to:
Administration
.
appears.
Capabilities
2.
Press
Telephone abilities 41
to enter an internal number.
OR
Press .
to program the Call Forward No
Answer feature.
3.
Enter the internal number from the dial pad.
4.
Press (Heading] until you return to the desired
programming heading.
OR
Press
to program the Call Forward
Answer feature.
Call Forward No Answer
This feature lets you redirect an incoming call to another
telephone on your
system when the call is not
telephone. Note, however, that
answered at your
Line Redirection will take precedence over this setting.
Options explained
If you assign another telephone to receive your calls, you
can also assign the number of times that the incoming call
will ring before the call is forwarded (the Call Forward No
Answer delay). To estimate the delay time in seconds,
multiply the number of rings by six.
Programming Call Forward No Answer
Beginwith F o r w a r d
1.
.
Press
Forward to:
or F o r w a r d t o : 2 2 3
appears (for example).
Administration
42 Capabilities
Telephone abilities
2.
Press
to enter the internal number.
OR
If a number is already assigned, press
to
program the Forward No Answer delay.
OR
If you wish to delete an assigned number, press
followed by
The number will be
deleted, and you can move on to program the Redirect
ring feature.
OR
If None, press
to program the Redirect ring
feature.
3.
Enter the internal number from the dial pad.
OR
Press
to assign none. Programming
continues with Redirect ring.
4.
Press
delay.
to program the Forward No Answer
Programming Forward No Answer delay
Begin with
1.
2.
Press
6, and
3 .
to select the delay. Options are 2,
4,
rings.
Press [Heading] until you return to the desired
programming heading.
OR
Press [Next] to program Redirect ring.
Redirect ring
The Redirect ring setting causes a telephone to ring briefly (a
200 millisecond burst) when a call is redirected on one of its
lines. Each telephone with a ringing appearance of that line
will also ring briefly for the redirected call if the Redirectring
setting for them is
(the default).
Administration
Capabilities
Telephone abilities 43
A user enters the Line Redirection feature code to redirect
calls. See the explanation of Line Redirection in the
Telephone Features chapter for more information on
redirecting lines.
Programming Redirect ring
Begin with
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are
(Yes) and N (No).
2.
Press [Heading] until you return to the desired
programming heading.
OR
Press
to program the Hotline feature.
Hotline
This feature automatically calls a pre-assigned number when
you lift the receiver or press
at your telephone.
Hotline has three options: None, internal (Intrnl), and
external (Extrnl).
Options explained
assigns an internal number.
Extrnl assigns an external number.
If you select an external number, you can also select
the line on which the call is made:
Use
1
selects the telephone’s Prime line.
Use l i n e :
assigns an external line number.
code:
assigns the Line Pool access code of
a line pool.
Administration
44 Capabilities
Telephone abilities
Programming hints
The telephone should be labeled to inform anyone using it
that this feature is active.
A telephone’s Prime line, Line Pool access codes, and
access to a line pool are assigned by the Installer in
Configuration programming.
Programming
Begin with
Hotline
None .
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are
None, Intrnl, and Extrnl.
2.
If you chose None,
Press ( N e x t ] .
c a l l : N appears for programming the
Priority Call feature.
OR
If you chose Intrnl,
Press
Intrnl
appears (an internal number
appears if previously programmed).
OR
If you chose Extrnl,
Press [show].
Extrnl
appears (an external number
appears if previously programmed).
3.
Refer to the following procedures for each of the above
options.
OR
Press [Heading) until you return to the desired heading.
OR
Press [Next] to program the Priority Call feature.
Administration
Capabilities
Telephone abilities
45
Programming the internal number
Begin with:
I
1
OR
.
222, for example, if a number was previously
entered.
1.
To specify an internal number, press
and
enter an internal number from the dial pad.
OR
To erase an internal number and return the setting to
press
followed by
2.
Press
until you return to the desired
programming heading.
OR
to program the Priority Call feature.
Press
Programming the external number
Begin with:
.
OR
123456 , for example, if a number of seven
digits or less was previously entered.
OR
If a previously entered number is more than seven digits, the
entire number will be displayed.
and
appear if a previously programmed number is greater than
16 digits.
1.
Press
to enter the external number.
2.
Enter the digits from the dial pad.
Press
to move the cursor back one space to
edit a number.
3.
Press
4.
Press (Next] to program Line Selection.
after the complete number is entered.
Administration
46 Capabilities
Telephone abilities
Programming Line Selection
Begin with:
Use
.
OR
Use
line:
00 1
(example shows external line 01).
OR
code:
(example shows Line Pool access
code 1234).
1.
Press
to select the option you wish.
2.
Press [Heading] until you return to the desired
programming heading.
OR
If you selected the Prime line,
Press
to program the Priority Call feature.
OR
If you selected an external line or a line pool,
Go to step 3.
3.
Enter from the dial pad the three digits of the line or the
one to four digits of the Line Pool access code for the
desired line pool.
4.
Press (Heading] until you return to the desired
programming heading.
OR
Press
Administration
to program the Priority Call feature.
Capabilities
Telephone abilities
47
Priority Call
This feature lets you call from your
telephone and
interrupt calls or override Do Not Disturb on another
telephone.
Programming hints
Apply this feature only to telephones from which such
interruptions can be justified.
Programming Priority Call
Beginwith
call:
.
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are N
(No), and Y (Yes).
2.
Press
to return to program Set abilities for
another telephone.
appears.
OR
Press
until you return to the beginning of Set
abilities programming.
i 1 it i
appears on the display.
3.
If you returned to Set ab i 1 it ies, press
program Line abilities .
to
Administration
48 Capabilities
Line abilities
Line abilities
Line abilities programming applies dialing filters, remote
access dialing filters and remote access packages to lines.
Line abilities includes the following settings:
Line filter
Remote filter
Remote package
Programming Line abilities
Begin with Line abilities.
1.
Press [ S h o w ] .
Show line:
2.
appears on the display.
Enter a three-digit line number to begin programming
Line abilities.
i
i1
:
appears on the display.
OR
Press
to copy Line abilities programming from
one line to another.
OR
Press
to return to the heading
abi 1
Line filter
A Line filter is a collection of restrictions and exceptions
defined in the
filters and applied to an
outgoing line. Filter 03 is the default Line filter.
A Line filter on an outgoing line may be used to limit the
capabilities of that line to carry calls made to specific area
codes or destinations.
.
Administration
.
Capabilities
Line abilities 49
Programming Line filters
Begin with Line
1.
Press
.
.
appears on the display.
fi
2.
Enter a two-digit filter number.
OR
3.
Press
to set the line filter to 00
Press
to program a Remote filter.
OR
Press
until you return to the desired
programming heading.
Remote filter
A remote access dialing filter can control dialing on incoming
auto-answer trunks used for making tandem calls (that is,
calling into
to use one of its lines for placing calls).
Filter 04 is the default Remote filter.
Employees can be allowed to telephone into a
system on auto-answer lines, and call out on a line
designated for long-distance calls to specific area codes.
Programming Remote filters
Begin with
1.
Press
filter: 84 .
.
appears on the display .
2.
Enter a two-digit filter number.
OR
Press (Next] to set the line filter to 00
3.
Press [Next] to program a Remote package.
OR
Press
until you return to the desired
programming heading.
Administration
50 Capabilities
Line abilities
Remote package
Remote access packages control access to line pools and
the Remote Page capability, for calls on incoming
auto-answer trunks.
Package 00 is the default Remote package, which gives no
access to line pools or to Remote page.
Programming Remote packages
Begin with
1.
00 .
Press
.
appears on the display.
2.
Enter a two-digit remote access package number.
OR
3.
Press
to set the line filter to 00.
Press
or [Heading].
appears on the display.
Show
4.
line:
Enter another three-digit line number to program line
abilities on another line.
OR
Press
or [Heading]
Li
ab i 1 it i
appears on the display.
5.
Administration
At the Line abilities heading, Press
program Class of Service passwords.
to
Capabilities
Class of Service
Class of Service passwords 51
passwords
Class of Service (COS) passwords permit controlled access
to a system’s resources by remote users. Class of Service
programming defines passwords, their associated dialing
filters, user filters and remote-user access packages.
The three programming sections of COS passwords are:
User filter
Line filter
Remote access package
A Class of Service can be associated with a telephone, a line
or a COS password. Class of Service determines whether a
remote user can or can not access lines in line pools and
remote paging. It also determines the dialing capabilities that
apply to outgoing lines from line pools (in the case of remote
users), or to internal telephones and any lines used for
external calls (in the case of internal users).
The capabilities to which a remote user has access depend
on:
the COS associated with the auto-answer trunk on
which the user is calling
a COS password, if entered.
Depending on the COS in effect, remote users may be able
to access all, or some of the system’s resources available to
remote users. Typically, each user has a separate password.
Several users can share a password or one user can have
.
several passwords.
Entry of a
DN ( if one has been programmed) allows a
remote user to change the COS applied for the duration of
the call.
Administration
52 Capabilities
Class of Service passwords
COS passwords for internal users
internal users have a Class of Service associated with their
telephones, in the sense that there are dialing filters
associated with telephones, as well as line pool
assignments. Internal use of a COS password affects only
the telephone’s dialing capabilities.
.
The ability to change the COS internally means that
someone using another person’s telephone can temporarily
change the restrictions that would normally be applied.
Password security
Class of Service passwords for a system should be
determined randomly, and should be changed on a
regular basis.
System users should memorize their COS passwords
instead of writing them down.
Employees’ COS passwords should be deleted when
they leave the company.
You can block tandem calls that would use expensive routes
by using Class of Service to restrict access to line pools, and
you can control the external destinations dialed through the
use of dialing filters.
You can use Class of Service to prevent remote access to
line pools and remote paging. Remote calls will then be
limited to target lines in the system.
Groups of users can be restricted, or permitted, to access
remote paging through the Class of Service applied to their
password.
Administration
Capabilities
Class of Service passwords 53
Programming hints
A system can have a maximum of 100 six-digit COS
passwords (00 to 99).
You can copy the data from one COS password to
display
another COS password number using the
button in the same way that telephone and line data
can be copied.
When a DR3 system is upgraded to DR4, the system
extends existing four-digit restriction override
passwords to six-digits by adding two zeros to the end
of the old password. For example,
1: 1576
changes to
0 1:
The passwords are
assigned filter 00, to provide no restrictions.
DR4 passwords must be unique. In DR3, different
0 1: and
password identifiers (for example,
could be administered with the same
sequence of digits (for instance, both could be 2345).
When upgrading from DR3 to DR4, if there are two or
more COS passwords with the same digits, the digits
for the first password are kept (with that addition of two
zeros) and any others are changed to the value
Programming COS passwords
Begin with
1.
passwords .
Press
Show password:
appears on the display
2.
Enter a two-digit password number. For example, enter
0 1:
appears on the
the numbers 01 and
display.
OR
Press
for password 00.
3.
Press
OR
Press
Show
to enter a new password code.
to return to the heading
.
Administration
54
Capabilities
4.
Class of Service passwords
Enter the digits for the new password. When the sixth
digit is entered
and the cursor disappears and
re-appears.
OR
Press
or
to set the password to
.
the value
Press
to program COS user filters for the
password appearing on the display.
1
:
t appears on the display.
OR
Press
or [Back] to see other passwords’
that have been programmed (if any).
OR
Press
to return to the heading
User filter
The COS User filter replaces the telephone (set) filter, the
line/set filter or the remote filter, that would otherwise apply
1
to a specific call. The default setting for this feature
means that any other filters in place (telephone (set) filter,
line/set filter, or remote filter) will still apply.
Programming User filters
Beginwith
.
Press
1
:
.
appears on the display.
2.
Enter a two-digit filter number.
OR
Press
User
1 tr:
1 t appears on the display.
3.
Press
to program the COS line filter.
Line
appearson thedisplay.
OR
Press (Heading].
Password:
appears on the display to.
program another password.
Administration
Capabilities
Class of Service passwords 55
Line filter
The COS Line filter replaces the line filter that would
otherwise apply to a specific call. The default setting for this
feature
means that any line filter in place will still
Programming Line filters
Begin with Line
1.
2.
.
Press
.
Line
appears on the display.
Enter a two-digit filter number.
OR
Press
appears on the display.
Line
3.
Press
to program the COS remote package.
1 t appears on the display.
OR
Press
appears on the display to
program another password.
Show password:
Administration
56 Capabilities
Class of Service passwords
Remote package
The COS Remote package replaces the remote access
package that would otherwise apply to a specific call. The
default setting for this feature
l t ) means that any
remote access package in place will still apply.
Programming Remote packages
Beginwith R e m o t e
Press
.
.
Remote
2.
Enter a
appears on the display.
number.
OR
Press
t appears on the display.
3.
Press
to go to the next highest password
number.
For example, P s w d 82: 1 2 3 4 5 6 appears on the
display or if the current password is the highest, then
S h o w P a s s w o r d : appears.
OR
Press [Heading).
S h o w P a s s w o r d : , appears on the display to
program another password.
4.
Press
5.
Press
Passwords
continue programming with Service modes.
Administration
at the Show password:
P a s s w o r d s appears on the display.
prompt.
Service Modes 57
is Service Modes?
Service Modes controls how the
system will respond
to calls, depending on the time of day. You can program up
to three different Service Modes, each with unique ringing
arrangements.
Service Modes include the following six settings:
Control telephones
Service Mode name
Service Mode control
Trunk Answer
Extra-dial telephone
Ringing telephones and Auxiliary Ringer.
Select the setting or settings you wish to program, and find
the description and programming procedure. The Service
Modes settings are listed above in the order that the
headings appear during programming.
Administration
Service Modes
To begin Service Modes programming
Begin with
1.
Press [Show].
appears for programming Control
telephones.
Press (Next].
appears on the display for
programming the first Service Mode.
OR
Press (Next] twice .
appears for programming the
second Service Mode.
OR
Press (Next] three times.
Lunch appears for programming the third
Service Mode.
Programming Service Modes
Control telephones
This setting allows you to assign a telephone to each
external line. That telephone can be used to control the
Service Mode by allowing you to turn the Service Mode ON
or OFF for that line.
Programming hints
Only the external lines programmed with a Control telephone
can be placed into a Service Mode.
You can assign a Control telephone to more than one
external line, but a line cannot be assigned to more than one
Control telephone.
Only one Service Mode applies at any one time to all
external lines controlled by a given Control telephone.
Administration
Service Modes 59
By default, telephone 221 is assigned as the Control
telephone and as a Ringing telephone, for all lines. This
means that all lines will ring at Control telephone 221, when
it (221) activates a Service Mode. Therefore, when
programming Control telephones you must remember to
remove the default assignment of 221 for each line that
should not ring when Control telephone 221 activates a
Service Mode.
Programming Control telephones
Begin with
sets .
1.
Press [ S h o w ] .
line:
appears.
2.
Enter a line number from the dial pad.
OR
Press
to assign the Control telephone for the
first line ( 0 0 1 ) .
Line00 1: 22 , for example, appears if that Control
telephone has been previously assigned to line 001
(default is 221).
1: N o n e appears if no Control telephone is
assigned for the line
3.
Press
line.
to assign a Control telephone to the
appears.
OR
Go to step 5.
4.
Enter an internal number from the dial pad.
5.
Press
next line.
to assign a Control telephone to the
appears after the last line has been
assigned a Control telephone.
Name
OR
Press
of step 1.
to return to Show 1
Administration
60 Service Modes
Service Mode 1
You can assign all Service Mode settings except the Control
telephones.
Beginning Service Mode 1 programming
Begin with
1.
Press
Name
.
to change the Service Mode name.
appears.
OR
Press
to program the Service Mode control.
appears.
OR
Press
to program the second Service Mode.
Service Mode name
The Service Mode name identifies the active Service Mode,
and appears on the display of the Control telephone when
the Service Mode is turned ON.
Programming hints
The default names of the three possible Service Modes are
only suggestions, and may be changed to any other name.
A Service Mode name can be one to seven characters.
Programming Service Mode name
Begin with Name 1:
.
1.
Enter the first character of the name by pressing the
three, or four
appropriate dial pad button one,
times.
2.
Press
to move the cursor to the next position.
Continue entering characters (maximum of seven).
3.
Press
Administration
to program Service Mode control.
.
Service Modes 61
Service Mode setting
This setting allows you to control how the Service Mode can
be turned ON and OFF.
Options explained
“Manual” allows you to turn the Service Mode ON and
OFF at any time from a Control telephone. The Service
Modes feature code must be entered at the telephone
to access this feature.
“Automatic” allows you to pre-assign a stop and start
time during which the Service Mode will be active. You
will still be able to start and stop the Service Mode by
entering the Service Modes feature code at a Control
telephone.
You can also turn the Service Mode OFF, so that it can
not be activated.
Programming hints
Default stop and start times correspond to typical hours
which may be required for a night Service Mode.
Default Service Mode times
Service Mode
Start time
Service Mode 1:
23:00
Service Mode 2:
23:00
i
Service Mode 3: Lunch
time
12:oo
13:oo
Overlapping times may be assigned. For example, if Service
Mode 1 is assigned from 9:00 am to 4:00 pm and Service
Mode 2 is assigned from I :00 pm to 5:00 pm, then the start
time of the second Service Mode is treated as a
time for
the first Service Mode. This is also true if two Service Modes
have the same stat-t time but different stop times.
Administration
62
Service Modes
If one Service Mode starts and stops within the times of
another Service Mode, the first service temporarily ends
when the second service starts. The first service then
resumes when the second service has ended.
Programming Service Mode setting
Begin with
Manual .
Press
to change the setting. Options are
Manual, Off and Auto.
2.
Press
If you chose Manual,
appears for programming the
Trunk Answer feature.
OR
If you chose Off,
appears for programming the next
Service Mode.
OR
If you chose Automatic,
Start time:
appears for programming the
start and stop time.
Trunk answer:
Programming the Automatic start time
Begin with Start time: 23: 00 .
Press
to change the start time.
23 appears.
2.
Press
3.
Enter the digit(s) for the hour in
from the dial pad.
4.
Press
to program the minutes.
Minutes: 00 appears.
5.
Press
6.
Enter the digit(s) for the minutes from the dial pad.
Administration
to program the hour.
or 24-hour format
.
.
Service Modes 63
7.
Press
If
or PM appears, go to step 8.
OR
Programming continues with the Automatic stop time.
8.
9.
Press
to choose the
or PM setting.
Press [Next] to program Automatic stop time.
OR
Press (Heading] until you return to the desired
programming heading.
Programming the Automatic stop time
Begin with
time: 07: 00 .
1.
Press
to change the stop time.
Hour: 07 appears.
2.
Press
3.
Enter the digit(s) for the hour in
from the dial pad.
4.
Press
Minutes:
5.
Press
6.
Enter the digit(s) for the minutes from the dial pad.
7.
Press
.
or PM appears, go to Step 8.
to change the hour.
or 24-hour format
to program the minutes.
00 appears.
.
OR
Programming continues with the Trunk Answer feature.
8.
Press
9.
Press
to choose the
or PM setting.
to program Trunk Answer.
OR
Press
until you return to the desired
programming heading.
.
Administration
64 Service Modes
Trunk Answer
This feature allows you to answer, from any telephone, an
external call which is ringing at another telephone in your
off ice.
This feature is useful if the other telephones have not been
assigned the same lines as the telephone you are using to
answer the call.
Programming Trunk Answer
Begin with Trunk
1.
Press
.
to change the setting. Options are
and
2.
Press
to program the Extra-dial telephone.
Extra-dial telephone
A telephone normally in service as a Direct-Dial telephone,
can be programmed in Service Modes to extend its ringing to
an Extra-Dial telephone.
When this is programmed, internal calls to the Direct-Dial
telephone also ring at the Extra-dial telephone.
Programming hints
Up to five Direct-Dial telephones can be assigned in the
Direct-Dial section of Configuration programming. The
dial telephone provides the option of assigning one more
Direct-Dial telephone in the
system for each
operational Service Mode.
Administration
Service Modes 65
Programming the Extra-dial telephone
Begin with Extra-dial
Press
1.
2.
22 1 .
to change the Extra-dial telephone.
Enter an internal number from the dial pad. Default is
221.
OR
3.
Press
for
Press
to program Ringing.
appears.
1 it-e:
Ringing
You can assign additional telephones to ring for incoming
calls on each external line. Ringing can also be assigned to
target lines.
You can also indicate that the Auxiliary Ringer (if installed)
will also ring for those calls.
Programming hints
A Ringing telephone can be assigned to more than one
Service Mode.
Programming Ringing
Begin with
1.
line:
.
Enter an external line number from the dial pad.
Sets appears.
OR
Press
to copy the Ringing telephone
assignments from one line to another.
OR
Press
to program the next
Administration
66 Service Modes
2.
Press
to program Auxiliary Ringer in step 6
appears).
OR
Press
to assign ringing telephones.
221 appears, or
if none
are assigned. Default is 221.
3.
to add a new ringing telephone for the line.
Press
Go to step 4.
OR
Press
to remove the ringing telephone from
the line. Repeat step 3.
OR
Go to step 5.
4.
To add a new ringing telephone:
Enter the internal number from the dial pad.
Repeat step 3 to assign more ringing telephones.
5.
Press (Next] to program the Auxiliary Ringer.
appears.
6.
Press
to change the setting. Options are
and
7.
Press
line:
to program Ringing for another line.
appears.
OR
Press
until you return to the desired
programming heading.
Administration
Service Modes 67
Service Mode 2
The second Service Mode is programmed in the same way
as Service Mode 1.
Beginning Service Mode 2 programming
Beginwith
1.
Press
.
to change the Service Mode name.,
appears.
OR
Press
to program the Service Mode control.
M a n u a l appears.
OR
Press
to program the third Service Mode.
Service Mode 3
The third Service Mode is programmed in the same way as
Service Mode 1.
Beginning Service Mode 3 programming
Begin with
1.
Press
Lunch .
to change the Service Mode name.
appears.
OR
Press (Show] to program the Service Mode control.
Setting: Manual appears.
OR
Press
to program the Passwords feature.
Administration
68 Password
What is Password?
The Administration password helps prevent misuse of the
telephone system. To ensure security, limit the
distribution of the passwords to selected personnel.
The password is a one to six-digit number that allows access
to Administration programming. This prevents unauthorized
or unintentional changes to settings.
Th default value of the Administration password is :
q
which is the same as:
The digits you enter for the password are not shown on the
display.
Programming hints
Keep a record of your password in a secure place.
The password will be easier to remember if the digits
correspond to the letters in a word.
If you forget the Administration password, you will not be
able to access Administration programming. Call your
Service Representative to re-assign a new Administration
password through Configuration programming.
For security reasons, it is a good idea to change the
password periodically.
Administration
.
Password 69
Programming the Administration password
Begin with
.
Press
Rdmin. Password appears for programming the
Administration password.
2.
Press
3.
Enter the digits of the new password (maximum six
digits) from the dial pad. Use the
display button
if required.
OR
to erase the password.
Press
briefly appears.
Password appears.
to go to step 6.
Press
4.
to confirm the new password.
Press
appears.
Re-enter:
5.
Enter the new password again.
6.
Press
.
appears.
:
changed briefly appears.
OR
changed briefly appears if you did not
enter the same password again. The display returns to
Password at the beginning of Administration
programming.
7.
Press (Heading] until you return to the desired
programming heading.
Administration
Programming reminders
r
r
The Programming reminders are a record of programmable
users may need to know on a day-tosettings which
day basis.
Fill out whatever sections are programmed and must be
known. If more space is required to record the information,
first photocopy the page before you begin. Not all of the
programmable features may be required information.
Programmable settings can be determined from a review of
the
Modular
Programming Record and use of
the Set and Line Profile feature.
Distribute the Programming reminders to each desk that has
a
telephone, or post them on the wall next to the
telephone.
Administration
Programming reminders
71
telephones
User name/location
internal number Page zone
Administration
72 Programming reminders
Prime telephones
Prime Telephone operator
Internal number
- - - - - - -
Lines answered at the Prime telephone
- - -
_ _ _
-
_ _ _
- - -
- - -
-
- - .
Prime Telephone operator
Internal number
- - - - - - -
Lines answered at the Prime telephone
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
_-__
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -
-
Prime Telephone operator
Internal number
- -
Lines answered at the Prime telephone
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Prime Telephone operator
Internal number
Lines answered at the Prime telephone
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Central Answering Position
CAP operator
Administration
Internal number
Programming reminders 73
Page zones
Page zone
Location
2
3
4
5
6
Line Pools
Pool
Access code
A
B
-
-
-
-
C
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Use
D
E
F
G
H
l
J
K
L
M
N
0
Miscellaneous programming
Direct-dial telephone
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
DISA DN (used to change COS)
Direct-dial digit
Call Park Prefix digit
Dial first to make external calls
Administration
74 Programming reminders
Call Pickup Groups
Pickup Group
Administration
Names of members in the group
Programming reminders
75
Service Modes
Service Mode 1
Service Mode 2
Service Mode 3
Name
Name
Name
Start
Time
.
- - - - - - Start
Time
Time
.
.
stop
Time
.
Control telephone
Control telephone
- - - - - - -
- - - - - - -
Ringing telephones
Ringing telephones
- - - - - - -
Start
Time
.
---
Time
.
Control telephone
- - - - - - Ringing telephones
- - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - - - -
Extra-dial telephone
- - - - - - -
Extra-dial telephone
Extra-dial telephone
- - - - - - c
Administration
telemanuals.com
telemanuals.com
Contents
introduction 1
What is a Maintenance session? 1
Before you begin 1
Beginning a Maintenance session 2
System Version 3
What is System Version? 3
How can it help me? 3
Before you begin 4
Checking the version numbers 4
Status 5
What is
Status? 5
How can it help me? 5
Before you begin 6
Status 7
Examining
Identifying any device connected to the system 7
Checking the version number of the device 9
Checking the state of the device 9
Disabling the device when it becomes idle 11
Disabling the device immediately 11
Enabling the device 13
Returning to the beginning 13
Maintenance session
telemanuals.com
ii
Contents
Module Status 14
What is Module Status? 14
How can it help me? 14
Before you begin 14
Examining Module Status 15
Looking at the module inventory 15
Checking the number of Trunk Cartridges
attached to a TM 17
Checking the state of a TM 17
Checking the state of a cartridge 19
Disabling the module or its cartridges 20
Enabling the module or its cartridges 20
Returning to the beginning 20
Diagnostics 21
What is Diagnostics? 21
How can it help me? 21
Before you begin
Running Diagnostics 23
Selecting the connectivity test 23
Identifying which ports you wish to test 23
Beginning the connectivity test 23
Checking the test results 24
System Test Log 26
What is the System Test Log? 26
How can it help me? 26
Before you begin 26
Examining the System Test Log 27
Checking the items in the log 27
Checking the current alarm 27
Checking when each item in the log occurred
Checking the number of consecutive
repetitions of an event or alarm 28
Erasing the log 28
Maintenance session
.
28
telemanuals.com
Contents iii
System Administration Log 29
What is the System Administration Log? 29
How can it help me? 29
Before you begin 29
Examining the System Administration Log 30
Checking the items in the log 30
Checking the current alarm 30
Erasing the log 31
Checking when each item in the log occurred 3 1
Alarm codes 32
What are alarm codes? 32
If you see an alarm code 32
Alarm troubleshooting 34
Alarm:
34
Alarm: 11 35
Alarm: 50-X 35
Alarm: 51-X 35
Alarm: 52-X-Y 35
Alarm: 61-X-Y 36
Alarm: 62-Y-Z 36
Alarm: 63-Z 36
Event messages 37
What are event messages? 37
Dealing with event messages 37
Significant event messages 37
Complete list of event numbers 40
Maintenance records 43
What are Maintenance records? 43
Before you begin 43
Recording information on the Maintenance records 43
Version number record 44
System Test Log record 45
System Administration Log record 46
Maintenance session
Introduction
1
What is a Maintenance session?
A Maintenance session is a
software feature which
helps you quickly diagnose problems that may occasionally
arise within the
system.
During a Maintenance session, six sub-headings
Status
3.
Before you begin
Obtain
the
Programming Overlay.
Know how
to use the Overlay buttons.
Remember
You may run a Maintenance session from any working
M7310 or M7324 Telephone. Keep a
handy to
record important information on photocopies of the
Maintenance records. The Maintenance records are found at
the end of this chapter.
Maintenance session
2
Introduction
Beginning a Maintenance session
1.
Place the Overlay on the telephone.
2.
From the
Press
or M7324 Telephone dial pad,
Which is the same as:
The display prompts you to enter the password.
3.
Enter the existing Installer password. The default
password is
which you will have to use if this
is the first time that Configuration programming has
been accessed.
4.
if the password is entered correctly,
appears.
i
i
OR
If the password is entered incorrectly, you will still see
the
prompt. In this case, press RETRY,
and again enter the password.
5.
Press
i
three times until
appears.
Only one person at a time can access a
Maintenance session.
Maintenance session
System Version
3
What is System Version?
System Version allows you to note the version numbers of
the software in the two processors in the Modular system:
System Processor (SP)
Real Time Processor (RTP)
The SP and RTP each use different software. The SP
software resides in the Feature Cartridge, while the RTP
software resides in the Key Service Unit (KSU).
Write down the SP and RTP version numbers in the
Maintenance records.
How can it help me?
When you report version numbers to the
distributor,
they can be used to determine whether you have the latest
software release, and to trace a software fault if one occurs.
For instance:
SP and RTP version numbers can indicate a Software
Cartridge incompatibility.
Trunk Cartridge and RTP version numbers can indicate
a Trunk Cartridge incompatibility.
SP and telephone version numbers can indicate a
telephone version incompatibility.
SP and functional terminal version numbers can
indicate a functional terminal incompatibility.
Maintenance session
4
System Version
Before you begin
Obtain
the Not-star Programming Overlay.
Know how
to enter a Maintenance session
to exit from a Maintenance session
to use the Overlay buttons.
Checking the version numbers
Ma
From
1.
Press ( S h o w ] .
The display shows 1.
2.
Press [ S h o w ] .
The display shows the version number of the SP.
3.
Write down the SP version number on the appropriate
Maintenance record.
4.
Press
The version number of the RTP appears.
5.
Write down the RTP version number on the appropriate
Maintenance record.
6.
Press (Heading].
The display returns to 1.
Maintenance session
Version.
Status
Status
What is
Status?
Status allows you to:
identify any device or line connected to the Modular
system.
check the version number of a device (an Analog
Terminal Adapter, for example) for compatibility with
the system.
check the state of a device or line (for example, idle or
busy).
disable or enable a device or line.
l-low can it help me?
Use
Status to:
determine which port number corresponds to each DN.
determine the port number of a malfunctioning device.
determine if a malfunctioning device is incompatible
with the
system.
disable a device before replacing it. This generates
telephone display messages informing device
users of what you are doing.
Maintenance session
6
Status
Before you begin
Obtain
the
Programming Overlay.
Know how
to enter a Maintenance session
.
to exit from a Maintenance session
to use the Overlay buttons.
Remember
You should not disable devices or lines when many people
are using the
system.
telephone from which you
You cannot disable the
are accessing the Maintenance session. If you try to do this,
a message appears on the display and you hear an error
tone. Therefore, if you wish to disable that particular
telephone, you will have to conduct the Maintenance session
from another
telephone.
Do not enable or disable ports at the following times:
during the first two minutes after a System Startup
before DS-30 cables are connected.
If you do so, incorrect ports may be enabled or disabled. To
recover from this, disable then enable the affected modules
using Module Status.
Note:
Maintenance session
Status allows you to check lines and
devices on the Modular system. Although the
following procedures describe how to check devices,
you can use the same procedures to check lines.
Status
Examining
7
Status
Identifying any device connected to the system
From
1.
Press
2.
appears.
2.
Press [Show].
The display shows
3.
Enter, on the dial pad, the port number of the device.
OR
Press
then enter the directory number of the
device.
Device information appears (see the sample device
identification display in the following figure). This
channel.
identifies the device connected to the
4.
if there is an add-on device attached to a
telephone such as a Central Answering Position (CAP)
module or a Busy Lamp Field (BLF):
Press
to view the add-on devices.
OR
If you want to identify the device connected to the B2
channel:
Press
5.
Press
2.
twice to return to
Maintenance session
8
Status
Sample device identification display
Device
7324 2224
STATE
Note:
The sample display above associates DN 2224 with
port 104.
The following chart lists some of the device types which may
device identification display.
appear on the
Explanation of device type
Display
Explanation
7
Telephone
M7208 Telephone
Telephone
73
7324
1:
M7324 Telephone
1
First add-on CAP module attached to an M7324
2 :
Second add-on CAP module attached to an M7324
BLF
Busy Lamp Field
Analog Terminal Adapter
Maintenance session
Status
9
Checking the version number of the device
From the
device identification display:
1.
Press
(if it is available).
The display shows the version number of the device.
OR
appears briefly and then the
previous display re-appears. In this case, you cannot
record the version number.
2.
If the display showed a device version number, wiite
down this number on the appropriate Maintenance
record.
To return to the
device identification display from the
display showing the version number:
1.
If you want to retain the same port number:
Press
OR
If you want to see information about the next higher
port number (or DN if that is how you entered):
Press ( N e x t ] .
OR
If you want to see information about the next lower port
number (or DN if that is how you entered):
Press
Checking the state of the device
From the
device identification display:
1.
Press
The display shows one of the states listed in the
following chart.
2.
If you want, you can disable or enable the device (see
Disabling the device or Enabling the device in this
section).
OR
Press
if you want to return to the device
identification display.
Maintenance session
Status
How the device state is shown on the display
State of device
The device is in use.
The device is being disabled.
The device is being enabled.
The device is not in use.
The device will be disabled as soon as it
becomes idle.
There is no device connected to that port.
The device has been disabled by someone
running a Maintenance session.
The device has been disabled by the system
because it is faulty or because a test is
running.
There is no state available.
Maintenance session
Status 11
Disabling the device when it becomes idle
When the display shows you that the device is busy:
1.
Press
The display shows
2.
Press
The device is disabled immediately after the user
hangs up.
Note:
If you disable a line on a Trunk
the
remaining three lines on that Trunk Cartridge
are also disabled.
Note:
If you choose the
at
option,
but the device remains in use, you can disable
the device immediately.
Disabling the device immediately
Note:
Make sure you inform people that you are going to
disable their devices (or lines). A device becomes
from
disabled one minute after you press
at once?. The next two charts show
examples of the sequence of messages that might
appear on a telephone that you are disabling.
Examples of display messages if you are disabling the device
Sequence of messages
before disabling
1
UP
i
Message after disabling
(twice)
test
45
unt.i 1 disconnect
U
In
P
Maintenance session
12
Status
Examples of display messages if you are disabling the line
Sequence of messages
Message after disabling
before disabling
To disable immediately when the display shows you that the
device is busy:
1.
Press
The display shows
at idle?
2.
Press
The display changes to Disable at
3.
Press
The device prompts its user (described previously) and is
disabled in one minute (or immediately, if the device is idle).
Maintenance session
Status
13
Enabling the device
When the display shows you that the device is disabled:
1.
.
Press
. . appears briefly. The device is
appears.
immediately enabled and
Note:
The display may briefly show
1i
..,
then either
or
In this case, the
is waiting to disable the module. This may
occur after someone has run a Maintenance
session and used either Module Status or
Diagnostics. You cannot enable the device until
its module has been disabled.
Returning to the beginning
From the display showing the state of the device:
1.
Press
2.
Press [Heading].
3.
Press
again.
The display shows
Status.
Maintenance session
Module Status
What is Module Status?
Module Status allows you to:
look at the inventory of Station Modules
Trunk
Modules
and modules inside the Key Service
Unit (KSU).
check the number of Trunk Cartridges
to each Trunk Module.
attached
check the state of the module or its cartridges.
disable or enable the module or its cartridges.
How can it help me?
You may use Module Status to:
isolate any malfunctioning modules.
disable a module before replacing it.
you begin
Obtain
the
Programming Overlay.
Know how
to enter a Maintenance session
to exit from a Maintenance session
to use the Overlay buttons.
Maintenance session
Module Status
15
Examining Module Status
Looking at the module inventory
From 2.
1.
2.
3.
Press
3.
Press
Show
appears.
1
:
appears.
Enter the module number. Modules 1 and 2 are located
inside the KSU. Refer to the two figures entitled Module
numbering scheme for a Two-port Expansion Cartridge
and Module numbering scheme for a Six-port
Expansion Cartridge.
OR
Press
if you want to check the first module.
The display which you see after step 3 is called the
module inventory display.
If you choose module 1 or 2, the display shows how
many telephones or lines are connected to the KSU.
If you are checking a Trunk or Station Module, the
display either shows how many Trunk Cartridges are
connected to the Trunk Module or how many devices
are connected to the Station Module.
Note:
devices may occupy both the
and
channels. This may increase the number of devices
indicated on the module inventory display.
Maintenance session
16
Module Status
Module numbering scheme for a Two-port Expansion
Cartridge
Module numbers
Plug Trunk Module’s DS-30
into HIGHEST available port
and work DOWN.
Plug Station Module’s
DS-30 into LOWEST
available port and work
UP.
Note:
Modules 1 and 2 are located inside the KSU.
Module numbering scheme for a Six-port Expansion
Cartridge
Module
numbers
Plug Trunk Module’s
DS-30 into HIGHEST
available port and work
DOWN.
Plug Station Module’s
DS-30 into LOWEST
available port and work
UP.
Maintenance session
Module Status
17
Checking the number of Trunk Cartridges
attached to a TM
Start from the module inventory display, which shows the
number of Trunk Cartridges connected to the module you
4).
chose (for example, 3
1.
Press
The display shows that zero lines are connected if
there is no Trunk Cartridge in a slot. If there is a
Cartridge in a slot, the display shows that four lines are
connected (for example,
1
on
1).
Note:
If there is no Trunk Cartridge in slot number
one (the left-most slot), the display shows that
the module is empty.
2.
If you want to check if there are Trunk Cartridges
present in the other two slots:
Press
or (Back].
3.
Press
display.
to return to the module inventory
Checking the state of a TM
Start from the module inventory display, which shows the
number of Trunk Cartridges connected to the module you
chose (for example, 3
TM 4).
.
2.
Press
The state of the module is shown on the display. Some
examples of this display are shown on the following
If you want, you can disable or enable the module.
(See Disabling the module or its cartridges or
the module or its cartridges later in this section.)
OR
If you want to return to the module inventory display:
Press
Maintenance session
18
Module Status
How the module or cartridge state is shown on the display
State of module or cartridge
There are three devices in use which are
connected to the module or cartridge.
There are two ports in use which are connected
to the module or cartridge.
There are four lines in use which are connected
to the module or cartridge.
The module or cartridge is being disabled.
The module or cartridge is being enabled.
The module or cartridge will be disabled as
soon as it becomes idle.
There is no module or cartridge connected to
that DS-30 port.
The module or cartridge has been disabled
from a Maintenance session.
The module or cartridge has been disabled by
the system because it is faulty or because there
is a test running.
Maintenance session
Module Status
19
Checking the state of a cartridge
Start from the display that shows the number of lines
connected to the Trunk Cartridge you chose (for example,
4
on
1).
1.
Press
The state of the cartridge is shown on the display.
Some examples of this display are shown on the
previous page.
2.
If you want to check the state of a Trunk Cartridge
present in one of the other two slots:
Press (Next] or (Back].
3.
If you want, you can disable or enable the cartridge.
(See the next two sections entitled Disabling the
module or its cartridges and Enabling the module or its
cartridges.)
OR
if you want to return to the display showing how many
lines are connected to the Trunk Cartridge:
Press
Disabling the module or its cartridges
If you want to disable a module while people are
system, first inform them by using
using the
the Page feature. Mention that they may experience
delays in the performance of their devices.
From the display showing the state of the module or
cartridge:
1.
Press
I
2.
If the module or cartridge is not idle and
want to
disable it when it becomes idle:
Press YES
O R - If you want to disable the module or cartridge
immediately:
Press
then press
Maintenance session
20
Module Status
Enabling the module or its cartridges
From the display showing the state of the module or
cartridge:
1.
Press
. . appears briefly. The module or
cartridge is immediately enabled. The display then
shows the state of the module or cartridge.
Returning to the beginning
From any display showing the state of the module or
cartridge:
1.
Press
2.
Press [Heading] twice.
The display returns to show 3. Module
Maintenance session
Diagnostics 21
What is Diagnostics?
Diagnostics allows you to:
select the connectivity test (test
identify which ports you wish to test.
begin the test.
check the test results.
l-low can it help me?
If you suspect that a voice connection may be broken, you
can use Diagnostics to run the connectivity test. This test
runs in three stages, stopping when any stage fails.
1.
Stage 1 initializes any empty ports and runs a sanity
devices on that port.
test to
2.
Stage 2 disables the specified port and runs a write and
read test.
3.
Stage 3 disables both modules associated with the
specified port and runs a write and read test.
Before you begin
Obtain
the
Programming Overlay.
Know how
to enter a Maintenance session
to exit from a Maintenance session
to use the Overlay buttons.
Maintenance session
22
Diagnostics
Remember
Do not run the connectivity test at the following times:
while ports or modules are being disabled
during the first two minutes after a System Startup.
If you do so, the test may stop running with ports still
disabled. To recover from this, power down, then power up
the KSU.
CAUTION
The connectivity test may disrupt service as modules are
disabled. Do not run this test when many people are using
the
system.
Maintenance session
Diagnostics 23
Running Diagnostics
Selecting the connectivity test
Note:
If you want to run the connectivity test while others
system, you should first inform
are using the
them by using the Page feature. Mention that they
may experience delays in the performance of their
devices.
1.
Press
2.
Press
The display shows
3.
Enter
from the dial pad.
appears.
Identifying which ports you want to test
Note:
You can
of 16 ports.
From
the connectivity test on a maximum
Fort.: -:
1.
Enter all the port numbers from the dial pad, pressing
after each entry.
2.
Press [ N e x t ] .
The display shows you how many modules may be
disabled when you run the test.
The display then changes to
i
Beginning the connectivity test
From
1.
Press
The display shows
1
1
Maintenance session
24
Diagnostics
Checking the test results
From the
results? display:
If you do not want to see the test results from the display:
1.
Press
The display momentarily shows:
If you want to see the test results from the display:
1.
Press
i
appears.
When the test is finished, the display shows the test
In this case, port
results, for example, F 110
number 110 was the first port tested, and
is the
result code of test 100. The result codes are explained
in the following chart.
2.
Press if it appears as a display button. The test
results for the next port number are shown.
3.
Repeat step 2 if applicable.
4.
Press EXIT.
You are returned to
Note:
Maintenance session
i cc..
If you press
at
results?,
then change your mind, you can still follow the
previous procedure to see the results. If your
Nor-star telephone is connected to the module
you test, it will be disabled. Run a new
Maintenance session to see the results.
Diagnostics 25
Connectivity test results
t
code
Test results
00
You entered an invalid port number.
01
Stage 1 passed: the KSU device port is receiving signals properly.
If the device has no voice connection, the problem is with the device.
02
Stage 1 passed: the KSU trunk port is receiving signals properly.
If the trunk has no voice connection, the problem is likely with the
cable or the cross-connect.
external line, the
03
Stage 1 passed: the Trunk Cartridge is receiving signals properly.
If the trunk has no voice connection, the problem is likely with the TC,
cable, or the cross-connect.
the external line, the
04
Stage 1 failed: there is no signaling to this KSU-based device, but
other devices on the KSU work.
cable to
The problem is likely with the TCM line, the device, the
the KSU, or the cross-connect.
05
Stage 1 failed: there is no signaling to this SM-based device, but other
devices on this SM work.
cable to
The problem is likely in the TCM line, the device, the
the SM, the cross-connect, or the SM.
06
Stage 1 failed: there is no signaling to any KSU-based device.
cable to the KSU or with the
The problem is likely with the
cross-connect.
07
bus.
Stage 1 failed: there is no signaling to any device on this
cable to the module, the module,
The problem is likely with the
cable, or the Expansion Cartridge.
the
Stage 3 failed: a KSU-based fault was detected.
Replace the KSU.
09
Stage 3 failed: a fault was detected in the Expansion Cartridge.
Replace the Expansion Cartridge.
Maintenance session
26
System Test Log
What is the System Test Log?
The System Test Log shows you a list of diagnostic test
results, audits, event messages, and alarm codes. By using
this feature you can:
check the items in the log.
check the current alarm (if there is one).
check when each item in the log occurred.
check the number of consecutive occurrences of an
event or an alarm.
erase the log.
The System Test Log holds a maximum of 20 items.
You should check and record these items at regular
intervals. Erase the log after dealing with all the
items.
Note:
can it help me?
You may use the System Test Log to find out which tests,
events or alarms have occurred.
Before you begin
Obtain
the
Programming Overlay.
Know how
to enter a Maintenance session
to exit from a Maintenance session
to use the Overlay buttons.
Maintenance session
System Test Log
27
Examining the System Test Log
Checking the items in the log
From
1.
2.
Press ( N e x t ] .
Test
5.
appears.
Press ( S h o w ] .
The display shows S t a r t o f
o f
104 or
.
3.
Press
or
A log item is displayed.
4.
Write down the item on the appropriate Maintenance
record.
5.
If the log item is an event message or an alarm code,
refer to the Event messages section or the Alarm codes
section in this chapter.
6.
Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 until you have recorded all the
items.
Checking the current alarm
If you want to check quickly the highest severity alarm before
viewing all the log items, from
of
or
o f
1.
Press
The display shows an alarm code if there is a current
alarm.
2.
Press EXIT to return to Start of log.
OR
The display shows
alarm and returns
to show Start
new
or Start
Note:
All alarms are recorded as items in the System Test
Log.
Maintenance session
28
System Test Log
Checking when each item in the log occurred
From any display showing a log item:
1.
2.
Press TINE
The
time momentarily appear on the display.
Write down the date and time on the appropriate
Maintenance record.
Checking the number of consecutive repetitions
of an event or alarm
If
appears under a display showing a log item:
1.
Press
The display shows the number of consecutive times the
event or alarm occurred.
Erasing the log
If you want to erase the System Test Log,
or Start of
at Start of
1.
Press
Erase
appears.
2.
Press
If no new items have been added since the list was
entered, the log is erased and LOS is
appears.
OR
If new items have been added since the list was
has
is shown.
entered,
3.
If Los has
appears,
Press (Show] to show the new log.
OR
Press EXIT to return to 5.
Maintenance session
.
System Administration Log
29
Administration Log
What is the System Administration Log?
The System Administration Log keeps a record of
administrative events such as system initializations,
Configuration sessions in which a change was made, invalid
password attempts, and password changes. By using
feature you can:
check the items in the log.
erase the log.
check when each item in the log occurred.
Note:
The System Administration Log holds a maximum of
ten items. Erase the log after dealing with all the
items.
How can it help me?
The System Administration Log helps you find out about
administrative events performed on the system.
Before you begin
Obtain
the
Programming Overlay.
Know how
to enter a Maintenance session
to exit from a Maintenance session
to use the Overlay buttons.
Maintenance session
30
System Administration Log
Examining the System Administration Log
Checking the items in the log
From 5.
1.
Press
i t-t Los appears.
2.
Press
The display shows
104 or
3.
Press
or
A log item is displayed.
4.
Write down the item on the appropriate Maintenance
record.
5.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you have recorded all the
items.
Checking the current alarm
From
new
or Start
1.
Press
The display shows an alarm code if there is a current
alarm.
2.
Press EXIT to return to S t a r t
OR
The display shows
to show
Maintenance session
and returns
System Administration Log
31
Erasing the log
If you want to erase the System Administration Log, begin .
with
of
1.
Press
Erase
appears.
2.
Press
If no new items have been added since the list was
is
appears.
entered,
OR
If new items have been added since the list was
entered,
is shown.
3.
If Los
appears:
Press (Show] to show the new log.
OR
Press EXIT to return to
Checking when each item in the log occurred
From any display showing a log item:
1.
Press TIME
The
time momentarily appear on the display.
2.
Write down the date and time on the appropriate
Maintenance record.
Maintenance session
32 /Alarm codes
What are alarm codes?
The
Modular KSU generates alarm codes after
system disconnections or after certain anomalies in system
operation. All alarm codes appear at the Alarm Telephone
and in the System Test Log of a Maintenance session. The
following figure shows an alarm code appearing on a
Alarm Telephone display.
--
--
-Display buttons
Note:
Alarms have a higher severity than events. Attend to
alarm codes before event messages.
If you see an alarm code
1. Write the alarm code on the appropriate Maintenance
record.
2.
Determine the cause of the alarm from the chart below.
3.
Follow Alarm troubleshooting in this chapter.
4.
Press TIME to see when the alarm occurred.
5.
Press
to clear the alarm.
An alarm code may not displayed until two minutes after it
has been triggered. If the KSU is powered OFF when the
alarm is triggered, the alarm code is not displayed until two
minutes after the KSU is powered ON.
Maintenance session
Alarm codes
33
Causes of alarm code
Example display
Meaning
All KSU
devices
disconnected.
Possible causes
The last device on
bus 1 (port numbers
124) has been removed.
The
cable was
disconnected from the
There is an internal KSU
fault.
11
Internal KSU
failure.
The KSU is defective.
All devices on
SM
disconnected.
The last device on
bus X (port numbers
X16) has been removed.
The
cable was
disconnected from the SM.
The DS-30 cable from the
SM to the KSU has been
disconnected.
The SM was powered down.
1
:5
Trunk Module
disconnected.
All Trunk Cartridges have
been disconnected from the
TM on DS-30 port X.
The TM was powered down.
The DS-30 cable from the
TM to the KSU has been
disconnected.
= DS-30 port number (1-8)
Maintenance session
34
Alarm codes
Causes of alarm codes (continued)
Example display
Meaning
Possible causes
TC
disconnected
from TM
Trunk Cartridge Y on DS-30
port X has been
disconnected from the TM.
Incompatible
Trunk
Cartridge
Trunk Cartridge Y on DS-30
port X cannot operate with .
the Trunk type assigned to
in Configuration.
Unsupported
Auto-answer
setting (Loop
Start TC only)
Trunk Cartridge Y on Trunk
port does not support the
auto-answer setting.
No available
DTMF
receivers
DTMF receivers are busy,
not working properly, or have
not been installed.
DS-30 port number (I-8)
= Trunk Cartridge number (numbered from left to right)
= Trunk port number
Alarm troubleshooting
Note:
Refer to the previous chart before following these
procedures.
0
1.
Check to see if there is a device connected to the KSU
(that has a port number beginning with the number
2.
If there are no devices connected to the KSU, connect
.
one and then press
3.
If there are any devices connected to the KSU, check
all the wiring associated with the devices.
Maintenance session
Alarm codes
4.
35
Refer to the section entitled KSU down in the
Troubleshooting chapter.
Alarm: I 1
1.
Power down the KSU and then power it up.
2.
If the alarm persists, replace the KSU.
1.
Check to see if there is a device connected to the
Station Module (that has a port number beginning with
a number from three to eight).
2.
If there are no devices connected to the Station
Module, connect one and then press
3.
If there are any devices connected to the Station
Module, check all the wiring associated with the
devices.
4.
Refer to the section entitled Station Module down in the
Troubleshooting chapter.
Alarm:51 -X
1.
Check the wiring from the KSU to the TM.
2.
Follow the procedure in the section Checking the Trunk
Cartridge in the Troubleshooting chapter.
3.
Refer to the section entitled Trunk Module down in the
Troubleshooting chapter.
1.
Follow the procedure in the section entitled Checking
the Trunk Cartridge in the Troubleshooting chapter.
2.
If the problem persists, replace Trunk Cartridge Y on
DS-30 port X. (Refer to the previous chart for the
definition of
and
.
Maintenance session
36
Alarm codes
1.
Check that the proper Trunk Cartridges are inserted in
the proper slots of the Trunk Module.
2.
Run a Configuration session and look under the
Data heading. Check that the Trunk type and
Trunk mode settings are the same for every Loop Start
line connected to Trunk Cartridge Y.
1.
Check that the proper Trunk Cartridges are inserted in
the proper slots of the Trunk Module.
2.
Run a Configuration session and look under the
Data heading. Check that the Trunk mode and
Answer mode settings do not conflict for every line
connected to Trunk Cartridge Y. If Trunk mode is
unsupervised, Answer mode must be manual.
1.
Check that you have the required
Trunk
Cartridges (one for every two auto-answer Loop Start
lines).
2.
Run a Configuration session and look under the
Data heading. Check that the Answer mode is
correct for all the Loop Start lines.
3.
If the problem persists, an
Trunk Cartridge
may be malfunctioning. Replace one
Trunk
Cartridge at a time until the problem is resolved.
Maintenance session
Event messages
37
messages
What are event messages?
Event messages appear as items in the System
Administration Log or the System Test Log of the
Maintenance session. Most of these event messages can
only be caused by an unusual combination of events, and
should rarely occur.
Each event is assigned a severity number. An
preceding
for example, may appear in the event
this number,
message. If the Log is full, new event messages with a
higher severity number replace existing event messages of a
lower severity. For this reason, you should check event
messages at regular intervals. You can then deal with all
messages before they are replaced.
Dealing with event messages
For every event message that you see, do the following:
Record the event on the appropriate Maintenance
record.
2.
Consult the next section entitled Significant event
messages.
3.
Consult the subsequent section entitled Complete list of
event numbers to see if the event caused the
system to automatically restart.
Significant event messages
The chart on the next page lists event messages which are
relevant to Maintenance activities. The time that
message is recorded is also provided.
Maintenance session
38
Event messages
Significant event messages
Example of event
message
Time that the event message is recorded
When diagnostic test number 100 starts
When diagnostic test number 100 has been
completed
When the System Administration Log has
been cleared bv the DN (3546 in this case)
When the System Test Log has been cleared
by the DN (3546 in this case)
When the DN (3546 in this case) enters the
debugging facility which is password
protected
When the KSU takes the E&M line on port
302 out of service because the far end did
not respond to a disconnect signal
When the E&M line on port 302 is returned to
service after the far end finally responded to
a disconnect signal (see Evt :
When the E&M line on port 302 did not
receive an expected wink signal or delay dial
signal from the far end
has lost data due to a
When Dialing filter
fault in the system memory
When the Line/set filter for the DN (3546 in
this case) has lost data due to a fault in the
system memory
When the system powers up after a power
failure
When a System Startup is performed using
the dial pad digits
[Feature)
Maintenance session
.
Event messages
39
Significant event messages (continued)
Example of event
message
Time that the event message is recorded
When there are no more codes for Speed
Dial numbers
When there is no more memory for Speed
Dial codes
When the Installer password has been
changed by the DN (3546 in this case)
When the Administration password has been
changed by the DN (3546 in this case)
When an invalid Installer password has been
entered by the DN (3546 in this case)
When an invalid customer password has
been entered by the DN (3546 in this case)
When system Configuration is performed
usinq the dial pad digits
When system Administration is performed
usinq the dial pad digits
When a DN change is successful
When the time setting has been changed
When a DN change failed
When a length change by the DN (3546 in
this case) has been requested
When an individual DN change
been
requested by the DN (3546 in this case)
When Alarm code 63 is sent because there
are no DTMF receivers for an incoming call
Maintenance session
40
Event messages
Complete list of event numbers
You should rarely see any event messages that are not
described in the section entitled Significant event messages.
If you do see one of these event messages, the
system has followed its normal recovery from an unusual
combination of system events. Although the problem is not a
serious one, repeated occurrences of the event number
should be repot-ted to the Central Support Center as soon as
possible.
As a result of some events, the
system automatically
the
restarts itself. The chart on the next two pages
event numbers and tells you which of these events are
associated with
system restarts
Most of these events are recorded in the System Test Log.
The few exceptions to this are recorded in the System
Administration Log, as indicated.
Maintenance session
Event
Event
messages/41
numbers
Event Number(s)
System
Restart
101-106
Event Number(s)
System
Restart
229 (Admin log)
107
N
108-112
230-235
i
245-248
113
N
114-116
117
I
118-120
250-256
260-271
N
280-283
N
285-298
121-123
i
N
I
N
299
124-125
log)
126-129
N
130
131-132
401-403
N
405-411
N
N
l o g ) N
133-134
N
135-136
424-425
N
426-430
431
152
N
160-164
N
600-602
170-173
N
603-613
200-211
N
614
N
I
N
N
221-222
N
log)
224
225-228
N
800-802
N
803
Y
Maintenance session
42
Event messages
Event numbers (continued)
Event Number(s)
System
, Restart
804-807
N
808
N
810
81 l-820
Maintenance session
N
Event Number(s)
System
Restart
823
824-825
N
900
N
940-943
N
950-989
N
Maintenance records
43
What are Maintenance records?
Maintenance records are charts on which you can record
information you have obtained while running a Maintenance
session.
Before you begin
Obtain
photocopies of the three charts in this section.
Recording information on the Maintenance
records
To use the following records, do the following:
1.
Write on your photocopied charts information that you
obtain while running a Maintenance session.
2.
Return the completed charts to the
distributor.
Maintenance session
44
Maintenance records
Version number record
The Maintenance session tells you the software versions of
the Real Time Processor (RTP), the System Processor (SP),
and devices connected to the
system. Use the
following chart to record these version numbers when you
run a Maintenance session. You can check the RTP and SP
version numbers under the heading 1
Version.
.
Device version numbers are found under the heading
Status.
Version Numbers
Version
Device:
Device:
Device:
.
Maintenance session
.
Maintenance records
System Test
45
record
You can check under the heading
Test Log to find a list of
test results, audits, event messages, and alarm codes. Use the following
chart to record these log items when you run a Maintenance session.
System Test Log
Log Item
Number of repetitions
Time of log item
.
.
--
Time and date that log was checked
..
..
.
..
..
..
..
..
i
..
Maintenance session
46
Maintenance records
System Administration Log record
You can check under the heading
Admin Log to find a list of
administrative events performed on the
system. Use the following
chart to record these log items when you run a Maintenance session.
System Administration Log
Log Item
Time and date that log was checked
Log Item
Time and date that log was checked
Maintenance session
Time of log item
Number of
..
Time of log item
..
Number of repetitions
telemanuals.com
Hardware
upgrades
telemanuals.com
Contents i
introduction
upgrading the
system 1
Flexible Numbering Plan and DS-30 cables 1
Replacing components 1
Adding an Expansion Cartridge to a non-expanded
system 2
Mounting the new modules 2
Installing the Expansion Cartridge 3
Upgrading from a Two-port to a Six-port Expansion
Cartridge 4
Mounting the new modules 4
installing the Expansion Cartridge 4
Re-connecting the cabling 5
Connecting the Power Bar(s) 5
Adding a new
Trunk Module 6
Installing a new Trunk Module 6
Adding a new MOX16 Station Module 8
Replacing components 9
Introduction 9
Replacing the KSU, TM or SM 9
Replacing the Trunk Cartridge 11
Replacing the Expansion Cartridge 12
Replacing the Feature Cartridge 12
Hardware upgrades and replacing components
telemanuals.com
Introduction to upgrading the
system
to upgrading
star
.
Upgrading a
system may involve installing the
following hardware:
Two-port or Six-port Expansion Cartridge
Trunk Cartridges (TC)
Loop Start,
or DID
Trunk Module (TM)
Station Module (SM)
DS-30 cables for each module
Power Bar(s)
Flexible Numbering Plan and DS-30 cables
To avoid gaps in the numbering plan, use the rule described
in the installation chapter under Connect DS-30 cables:
plug Trunk Module DS-30s in the top port and work
down,
plug Station Module DS-30s in the bottom port and
work up.
Replacing
components
To replace components on a system that is in operation, see
the section on Replacing components which covers:
replacing the Key Service Unit (KSU), TM or SM
replacing the Trunk Cartridges
and DID
Loop Start,
replacing the Expansion Cartridge
replacing the Feature Cartridge
Hardware upgrades and replacing components
telemanuals.com
2
Adding an Expansion Cartridge to a non-expanded system
ridge to a
system
A non-expanded system consists of a KSU alone (without
an Expansion Cartridge, TM, or SM). To expand the
system with TM(s) or
install a Two-port or Six-port
Expansion Cartridge in the existing system. Installing an
to
Expansion Cartridge causes the default length of
change from two digits to three digits.
Note:
To verify the actual Directory Numbers (DN)
assigned, which may have been altered by previous
programming or by this upgrade, use Button Inquiry
[Feature)
Mounting the new modules
1.
Install mounting brackets for any additional
and hang these modules.
or
2.
Unplug the KSU ac power cable from the ac outlet.
3.
Install the appropriate Expansion Cartridge (the
port or the Six-port) for the upgrade. This is described
in the Installation chapter in Expansion Cartridge
Installation.
4.
Plug one end of the DS-30 cables into the appropriate
connector(s) on the new TM(s) and/or
as
described in the Installation chapter in Connect DS-30
cables.
Plug the other ends of the DS-30 cables into the
Expansion Cartridge.
Hardware upgrades and replacing components
telemanuals.com
Adding an Expansion Cartridge to a non-expanded system
3
Installing the Expansion Cartridge
1. install the Power Bar(s) as described
in the section on
Power Bar installation and plug the ac power cords
from the KSU and the modules into the Power Bar(s).
2.
Power up the system again by plugging the ac power
cord from the appropriate Power Bar into the ac outlet.
Hardware upgrades and replacing components
4
Upgrading from a Two-port to a Six-port Expansion Cartridge
.
An expanded system consists of a KSU with an Expansion
Cartridge. The cartridge is connected to one or more
or
by the DS-30 cable(s).
Note:
To verify the actual Directory Numbers (DN)
assigned, which may have been altered by previous
programming or by this upgrade, use Button Inquiry
[Feature]
Mounting the new modules
Install mounting brackets for any additional TM(s) or
and hang these modules.
2.
Unplug the Power Bar ac power cable from the ac
outlet.
3.
Unplug DS-30 cables from Two-port Expansion
Cartridge.
Note:
4.
Label the DS-30 cables to identify the
Expansion port numbers and modules they
plug into if you have not already done so.
Remove the Two-port Expansion Cartridge while
wearing a ground strap.
Installing the Expansion Cartridge
1. Install a Six-port Expansion Cartridge. This is described
in the section on Expansion Cartridge Installation.
Hardware upgrades and replacing components
Upgrading from a two-port to a six-port expansion cartridge
5
Re-connecting the cabling
1.
Re-connect the original SM DS-30 cable(s) from the
Two-port Expansion Cartridge into the Six-port
Cartridge starting from the BOTTOM port (port
working UP. This maintains the numbering plan
sequence of
.
and
2.
Plug any new SM DS-30 cable(s) into the Six-port
Expansion Cartridge starting at the next highest port
available on the Expansion Cartridge and working, UP.
3.
Plug the original TM DS-30 cable(s) from the Two-port
Expansion Cartridge into the Six-port Cartridge, starting
from the TOP port (port
and working DOWN.
4.
Plug any new TM DS-30 cable(s) into the Six-port
Expansion Cartridge, starting at the next highest port
available on the Expansion Cartridge and working
DOWN.
Note:
Remember to re-label the DS-30s at both ends
with the new port number on the Six-port
Expansion Cartridge.
Connecting the Power Bar(s)
1.
Plug the ac power cords from the new TM(s) and
into the ac Power Bar.
Note:
2.
Refer to the Power Bar installation chapter for
Power Bar procedures and for information on
using a second Power Bar.
Power up the system again by plugging the power cord
from the Power Bar into the ac outlet.
Hardware upgrades and replacing components
6 /Adding a new
ding
Trunk Module
new
Trunk Module
Trunk Modules (TM) can be connected to an existing
KSU without having to power down the KSU if enough ports
on the Expansion Cartridge are available to plug in the new
Trunk Module(s).
However, if a new Expansion Cartridge is needed, the KSU
must be powered down to allow installation of the cartridge.
See Upgrading from a Two-port Expansion Cartridge to a
Six-port Expansion Cartridge for the procedure or see the
Installation chapter under Expansion Cartridge installation.
Installing a TM where the KSU has not been
powered down often results in a delay before the
system recognizes the new TM. The delay may be a
maximum of two minutes.
Note:
and DID Trunk Cartridges
Loop Start,
can be installed in the same TM.
Installing a new Trunk Module (TM)
1.
Unpack the TM and the Trunk Cartridges (TC) for the
TM.
2.
Mount the TM according to the procedures shown in
the Installation chapter: Mounting Procedure for KSU,
TM and SM.
Hardware upgrades and replacing components
.
Adding a new
3.
Trunk Module
7
install Trunk Cartridge(s) according to the procedures
shown in the Installation chapter: Trunk Cartridge (TC)
installation.
To avoid possible equipment damage ensure that TM
power is OFF when installing a Trunk Cartridge (TC).
4.
Connect the TM external wiring according to
procedures shown in the Installation chapter: Connect
KSU and TM external lines. Refer to the Technical data
Trunk Module external lines
chapter for the
wiring chart.
5.
Connect the DS-30 cables according to the procedures
shown in the Installation chapter: Connect DS-30
Cables.
6.
Power up the TM by plugging the ac power cord into
the Power Bar.
Note:
7.
Note:
Refer to the Power Bar installation chapter for
Power Bar procedures and for information on
using a second Power Bar.
Do the Configuration and Administration programming
for the additional lines following the procedures and
charts provided in the programming chapters.
It is important to program Trunk mode correctly. See
Trunk Cartridge installation in the installation chapter
Data
and Trunk mode programming in the
section of the Configuration chapter.
Hardware upgrades and replacing components
8
Adding a new MOX16 Station Module
ng a
Station
MOX16 Station Modules (SM) can be connected to an
existing KSU without having to power down the KSU if
enough ports on the Expansion Cartridge are available to
plug in the new module(s). However, if a new Expansion
Cartridge is needed, the KSU must be powered down to
allow installation of the cartridge. See Upgrading from a
Two-port Expansion Cartridge to a Six-port Expansion
Cartridge for the procedure or see the Installation chapter
under Expansion Cartridge installation.
,
1.
Unpack the SM.
2.
Install the SM according to the procedures shown in the
Installation chapter:
Mounting Procedure for KSU, TM and SM
Connect KSU and SM wiring procedure. Refer to
the Technical data chapter for the wiring chart:
MOX16 SM station internal wiring.
Connect DS-30 Cables
3.
Power up the SM by plugging the ac power cord into
the Power Bar.
Note:
4.
Refer to the Power Bar installation chapter for
Power Bar procedures and for information on
using a second Power Bar.
Do the Configuration and Administration programming
for the additional telephones following the procedures
and charts provided in the Programming chapters.
Hardware upgrades and replacing components
Replacing components
9
Introduction
In a
system, you replace components to upgrade the
system or to replace faulty components. In either case, you
should disable the components before replacing them. The
Maintenance session chapter shows how to disable
components. The following sections tell you how to
these components.
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock, do the following:
1. Unplug the power to any module before servicing.
2. Do not remove the cover of a module.
3. Refer to the Installation chapter or to this chapter
when re-installing components.
Replacing the KSU, TM or SM
You can replace the KSU, a TM or a SM without having to
remove other components. Replacing a TM or a SM with a
new module of the same type does not affect the system’s
programming. If you replace the KSU and you do not retain
the Data Cartridge, you must reprogram the system.
Note:
Removing a module without first disabling it causes
an alarm to appear on the Alarm Telephone (if
available). See the section on Alarms in the
Maintenance session chapter.
To replace the module do the following:
Disabling the module
1. Disable the module
.
by running a Maintenance session
(see the Maintenance session chapter).
Hardware upgrades and replacing components
10
Replacing components
Unplugging the cabling
1.
Unplug the module’s ac power cord from the ac Power
.
Bar. Detach the cord from the cable clip in the cable
trough shelf.
2.
Unplug the DS-30 cables and detach them from the
cable clip on the front of the module.
3.
Unplug the
connector(s) and detach the cable
from the cable clip on the front of the module.
Note: To replace the Trunk Cartridge, see the
following section on Replacing the Trunk
Cartridge.
Removing the module
1. Lift the module gently
from underneath to free it from
the cable trough and from the mounting bracket. Both
the cable trough and the mounting bracket remain
attached to the wall.
installing the new module
1.
To replace the module with a new one, simply slide the
new module onto the mounting bracket, taking care that
the prongs on the bottom of the module fit back into the
cable trough properly.
2.
Re-connect the
connector(s), DS-30 cables and
ac power cord to the same connectors from where they
were removed. (The DS-30 cables should have been
labeled with the port number previously during initial
installation.)
3.
If the KSU was replaced and the Data Cartridge was
not retained, re-program the system.
4.
Enable the new module by running a Maintenance
session.
Hardware upgrades and replacing components
Replacing components
11
Replacing the Trunk Cartridge
CAUTION
Do not touch the printed circuit board. This is an
electrostatic-sensitive device.
Note:
It is important to program Trunk mode correctly. See
Trunk Cartridge installation in the Installation chapter
and Trunk mode programming in the
section of the Configuration chapter.
Disabling the Trunk Module
1.
Turn OFF the power to the TM before unplugging or
removing the cartridge(s).
Removing the
1. Open the
latches on the Trunk Cartridge with a
screwdriver or similar tool.
2.
While holding the latches open, remove the defective
cartridge from the slot.
Installing the new TC
1. While wearing a grounding
strap, remove the
replacement cartridge from its anti-static package.
2.
While holding the latches open, insert the new cartridge
into the appropriate slot and close the latches at the
same time to align the cartridge properly.
Note:
The Trunk Cartridges are installed starting from
the left slot to the right.
Hardware upgrades and replacing components
Replacing components
Replacing the Expansion Cartridge
CAUTION
If you replace a Six-port Expansion Cartridge with a
Two-port Expansion Cartridge, the system will lose all
Configuration and Administration programming. No
programming is lost, however, if you upgrade from a
Two-port to a Six-port Expansion Cartridge.
1.
To replace the Expansion Cartridge, follow the same
procedure as in Replacing the Trunk Cartridge.
Replacing the Feature Cartridge
One or both parts of the Feature Cartridge can be replaced.
Replacing a faulty component
If the Feature Cartridge is faulty, replace both the Software
Cartridge and the Data Cartridge.
1.
Ensure that there is no call activity by informing all
users that the system will briefly be out of
operation.
2.
Turn OFF the KSU power (unplug the power cord).
3.
While wearing a grounding strap, remove the Feature
Cartridge from the KSU.
Insert the new Software Cartridge into the new Data
Cartridge.
5.
Insert the new Feature Cartridge into the KSU.
6.
Turn ON the KSU power (plug in the power cord).
Hardware upgrades and replacing components
Replacing components
Upgrading the system
For system upgrades, replace the Software Cartridge only.
1.
Ensure that there is no call activity by informing all
users that the system will briefly be out of
operation.
2.
Turn OFF the KSU power (unplug the power cord).
3.
While wearing a grounding strap, remove the Feature
Cartridge from the KSU.
4.
Remove the Software Cartridge from the Data
Cartridge.
5.
Insert the new Software Cartridge into the Data
Cartridge.
6.
insert the new Feature Cartridge into the KSU.
7.
Turn ON the KSU power (plug in the power cord).
Hardware upgrades and replacing components
telemanuals.com
Troubleshooting
telemanuals.com
Contents i
Introduction to troubleshooting
General troubleshooting 1
Specific troubleshooting 1
General troubleshooting 2
General troubleshooting procedure 3
Testing the
system 4
Testing the
telephone operations 4
Programmable buttons 4
Checking Line and Telephone programming 5
Testing the optional equipment 5
Testing the
system programming features 5
Testing Automatic Telephone Relocation 5
Checking the hardware 6
KSU and module ac power cords check 6
Power Bar ac power cords check 6
Feature Cartridge check 6
Expansion Cartridge check 7
Trunk Cartridge check 7
DS-30 cables check 7
connectors check 7
wiring check 8
Internal wiring check 8
Cross-connections check 8
Troubleshooting
telemanuals.com
ii
Contents
Specific troubleshooting 9
Telephone operation trouble
button cannot be programmed
Calls cannot be made
Dial tone absent (on external lines) 12
Hung lines at a telephone 13
Music on Hold/Background Music trouble 14
Personal Speed Dial cannot be programmed 15
Telephone dead 15
equipment trouble. 16
KSU down 16
telephone display unreadable 16
Trunk Cartridge trouble 17
Trunk Module down 18
Station Module down 19
Optional equipment trouble 20
Analog Terminal Adapter 20
Auxiliary ringer trouble 22
External paging 24
Troubleshooting
telemanuals.com
Introduction to troubleshooting
1
to
troubleshooting
These troubleshooting procedures allow you to solve many
problems in the
system. Follow these procedures
before replacing any components.
If you are experiencing difficulties with remote use of
or with network capabilities, refer to the Network
troubleshooting chapter.
system troubleshooting procedures are divided into
two main sections and several sub-sections as shown below.
General
troubleshooting
Types of problems
General
troubleshooting
Testing the
procedure
system
Checking the hardware
Specific troubleshooting
Telephone operation trouble
equipment trouble
Optional equipment trouble
WARNING
Replacement of components and servicing of
are to be performed by qualified personnel only.
Troubleshooting
2
General troubleshooting
Types of problems
The problems you encounter will likely fall into one of the
following categories:
Misunderstanding of a feature
A problem may be reported because a
user is
unfamiliar with the operation of a given feature. You may be
able to solve the problem simply by demonstrating how to
use the feature correctly.
Programming errors
You may encounter problems caused by errors in
programming. A feature may have been programmed
incorrectly or may not have been programmed at all.
Wiring connections
Wiring problems are caused by loose, unconnected, or
incorrectly connected wires. Use the procedures in the
section on Checking the hardware as a guide.
Equipment defects
You may encounter problems caused by
equipment
defects. See the section in this chapter on Specific
troubleshooting problems for problems related to the system
hardware.
Troubleshooting
General troubleshooting
General
troubleshooting
3
procedure
Diagnose the trouble
Ask the users for information on:
the types of problems they have experienced
(related to placing or retrieving calls, to a feature,
or to a specific line)
how frequently the problems have occurred
how many telephones are affected.
2.
Test system features and functions. Use the tests
described here in the section on Testing the system.
Check how a feature is being used
1.
A problem may have been reported because of a
misunderstanding about how a feature works. You
should confirm that the person who reported a problem
understands the intended use and operation of any
feature in question.
Check for programming errors
1.
Check that the programming recorded in the
Programming Record is correct for the intended
operation of the system, and verify that this
Configuration and Administration programming has
been correctly entered. In this Troubleshooting chapter,
see the sections Testing the system and Specific
troubleshooting problems.
Check wiring or hardware connections
1.
Check the wiring and hardware connections next. Refer
to procedures
the section on Checking the hardware.
Run a Maintenance session
1.
If the problem persists, run a Maintenance session as
described in the Maintenance chapter.
.
Check equipment defects
If hardware is shown to be defective, replace it.
2.
If the trouble requires expert advice, follow your
company’s procedure for obtaining assistance.
Troubleshooting
General troubleshootina
Testing the
system
Verify
system functions and programming options by .
working through the user cards for
telephones and
optional equipment, as described below:
Testing the
1.
2.
3.
telephone operations
Make and receive calls.
Make notes on any problems”
Check calls that have been put on hold.
Programmable
buttons
Use the following feature codes to check what is
programmed on the programmable buttons.
Button Inquiry code
Personal
programming
External
Internal
code
code
Program features
Personal Speed Dial entries
Language Choice
English
Alternate language
Ring and display settings
Ring Type
Ring Volume
Contrast Adjustment
Troubleshooting
General troubleshooting
5
Checking Line and Telephone programming
You can use the Line and Telephone profile inquiry featuresand
to verify the programming applied
to a specific line or telephone. Refer to Introduction to
Programming for a description of how the Line and
Telephone profile features operate.
Testing the optional equipment
Follow the procedures in the user cards or installation
documentation for the following equipment:
Analog Terminal Adapter
Auxiliary
ringer
(customer-supplied)
Busy Lamp Field
Central Answering Position (CAP) modules
Headset (customer-supplied)
Music source (customer-supplied)
Paging (customer-supplied)
Station Auxiliary Power Supply (SAPS)
Testing the
1.
system programming features
Try out some of the features such as System Speed
Dial, Telephone/Line filters, and Class of Service.
Testing Automatic Telephone Relocation
1. Check that Telephone Relocation is set to for yes in
the Miscellaneous section of Configuration
programming.
2.
Move the telephone to another location to
that a
telephone can be re-located without re-wiring or reprogramming.
Troubleshooting
6
General troubleshooting
Checking the hardware
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock, do the following:
1. Unplug the power to any module before servicing.
2. Do not remove the covers of a module.
3. Refer to the Installation chapter when re-installing
components.
Follow this procedure in the sequence below for checking
apparent hardware faults.
and module ac power cords check
1.
Check if the LED on the KSU or module (if included in
the installation) is ON.
2.
If the LED is OFF, check that the ac power cords for
the KSU and module are plugged into the ac Power
Bar.
Power Bar ac power cords check
1.
Check that the ac power cord from the Power Bar is
plugged into a working ac outlet.
Note:
Two Power Bars are required if there are four
or more modules. Make sure that the power
cord from the second Power Bar is plugged
into the first Power Bar.
Feature Cartridge check
CAUTION
Always power down before removing or inserting the
Feature Cartridge.
1.
Troubleshooting
Make sure that the Feature Cartridge is firmly seated in
its slot.
General troubleshooting
7
Expansion Cartridge check
CAUTION
Always power down before removing or inserting an
Expansion Cartridge.
1.
If the installation requires an Expansion Cartridge in the
KSU, make sure it is inserted properly.
Note:
If power is re-applied when the cartridge has
been removed, the system programming will
return to default settings.
Trunk Cartridge check
CAUTION
Always power down the Trunk Module before removing or
inserting a Trunk Cartridge.
1.
If the installation requires a Trunk Module, make sure
the Trunk Cartridge (TC) is inserted properly.
DS-30 cables check
1.
Make sure that both ends of the DS-30 cables (if
included in the installation) are plugged into the KSU
Expansion Cartridge and the module connectors.
50-pin connectors check
1.
Make sure the
connectors for the external lines
and for the internal wiring are plugged in and fastened
securely. Refer to the wiring charts in the Technical
data chapter.
Troubleshooting
8
General troubleshooting
25-pair wiring check
1.
Ensure that the wires are terminated on the distribution
block and connected to the correct pins. See the
Technical data chapter for wiring charts.
Internal wiring check
1.
Check that the station loop resistance does not exceed
59 ohms on 0.5 mm or 24-American wire gauge.
2.
If the loop length is greater than 305 m (1000 ft),
.
ensure that the
Station Auxiliary Power Supply.
(SAPS) is in place and functional.
3.
Follow the
Station Auxiliary Power Supply
Installation Card for instructions.
Cross-connections check
1.
Check that both ends of cross-connect wires are
attached.
Troubleshooting
Specific troubleshooting
9
ecific troubleshooting
These troubleshooting procedures are designed for the
system. Follow the procedures here before replacing
any components.
Specific troubleshooting procedures cover the following main
sections:
Telephone operation trouble
equipment trouble
Optional equipment trouble
Troubleshooting
10
Specific troubleshooting
Teiephone operation trouble
The troubleshooting problems listed here focus on trouble
with making calls or using
features. Included here is
a list of common telephone operation problems.
button cannot be programmed
1.
Refer to the Telephone features chapter.
2.
If the message
memory left for
3.
i
appears, someone
If the message
may be programming changes. Wait five minutes, then
try again to program the buttons.
4.
Run a Maintenance session and look at the events
shown under 5.
Calls cannot be made
1. Refer to the section
11 appears, there is no .
buttons.
on General troubleshooting.
OR
If the telephone is dead, refer to the procedure under
Telephone dead in this section.
3.
Select a line button.
4.
If an incorrect line number or name appears (or if
telephone display,
neither appears) on the
check the Configuration settings.
OR
If the correct line number or name appears on the
telephone display, make sure the external lines
.
are properly cross-connected.
Troubleshooting
.
Specific troubleshooting
5.
11
If Trunk Modules or Trunk Cartridges are installed, refer
to Trunk Cartridges and Trunk Module down, in the
equipment trouble.
section on
Note: To check for other
related problems
(for example, no dial tone or a dead module)
refer to the appropriate procedures in this
section.
6.
Check the external lines by terminating a test telephone
directly on the distribution block, or equivalent, which
connects to the Trunk Module.
7.
Ensure that the 25-pair cable is properly connected to
the modules or the KSU.
Running a Maintenance session to check the
external line
1.
Run a Maintenance session to ensure that the line (and
the Trunk Cartridge) is not disabled or unequipped.
(See
Status in the Maintenance session
chapter.)
2.
Disable the appropriate ports using the subheading
2.
Note:
For charts showing external line port number
defaults, refer to the Technical data chapter in
the section on
system numbering plan.
3.
Enable the appropriate ports using the subheading
2.
4.
If you still cannot make external calls, power down,
then power up the KSU. This should be done after
business hours to avoid losing calls.
Note:
To check the line, contact the telephone
company.
.
Troubleshooting
12 Specific troubleshooting
Dial tone absent (on external lines)
Use Button Inquiry (Feature]
to display the
number of the external line you are testing.
2.
Check for a dial tone by using a test telephone at the
connections for the external line on the distribution
block.
3.
If applicable, make sure that a Trunk Cartridge for the
line is properly installed in the Trunk Module.
4.
Make sure that the Trunk Module DS-30 cable is
properly connected to the Expansion Cartridge on the
KSU.
5.
Refer to the sections Trunk Cartridges and Trunk
Module down, in this chapter.
6.
Run a Maintenance session to ensure that the line is
Status in the Maintenance
not disabled. (See
session chapter.)
7.
While you are in the Maintenance session, run a
connectivity test on the external line that has no dial
tone. This should be done after business hours to avoid
losing calls.
Troubleshooting
Specific troubleshooting
13
Hung lines at a telephone
Line indicators that have been solid for a long time are the
only visible indication that lines are hung.
A line that has been redirected using Line Redirection may,
under some circumstances, remain busy after a call is over.
the redirection will also
If this happens, the outgoing
remain busy. You can clear such a hung line only at
telephone that was used to redirect the line.
1.
Select Button Inquiry ([Feature)
at the
telephone that was used to redirect the line.
2.
Press the button of the redirected line.
3.
Press
or
.
4.
Press
or q
,
Both the redirected line and the outgoing line for the
redirection should now be cleared.
For lines that are hung for any other reason you will have to
run a Maintenance session.
1.
Run a Maintenance session and go to the subheading
3.
2.
If the hung line is on the KSU, disable and enable
Module 2.
OR
If the hung line is on a Trunk Cartridge, disable and
enable only that Trunk Cartridge.
Troubleshooting
14
Specific troubleshooting
Music on Hold/Background Music trouble
Note:
Although Music on Hold and Background Music are
separate features, they share the same wiring and
customer-supplied music source.
1.
Ensure that the proper feature access code
is turned ON. Adjust the volume using
[Feature]
the volume control bar.
2.
Use the Button inquiry feature
to verify the feature on a
programmable memory button.
3.
If there is trouble with Music on Hold, check
Call Handling in Configuration.
OR
If there is trouble with Background Music, check
Miscellaneous in Configuration.
4.
Check the wiring between the music source and the
pin connector.
No Music on Hold/Background Music
Service
Pin
Music on Hold (Ground)
50 (Violet-Slate)
Music on Hold (Input)
25 (Slate-Violet)
Note:
Also check the polarity of the connections
between the music source and the distribution
block.
5.
Ensure that the music source is turned ON, is
operational, and the volume control is set properly.
Note:
Any music source with a low-output impedance
(for example, less than 3,300 ohms) can be
connected. Nominal output level should be less
than one volt.
Troubleshooting
Specific troubleshooting
15
Personal Speed Dial cannot be programmed
1. See the procedure
buttons cannot be
programmed, described earlier in this section.
Telephone dead
if more than one telephone is affected, refer to the
section in this chapter entitled Station Module down.
2.
Check for the dial tone.
3.
Check the display.
4.
If the problem persists, replace the telephone with a
telephone of the same type so
known working
that the programming is retained.
5.
Check the internal wiring at both the modular jack and
the distribution cross-connect.
6.
Check the line cord.
Note:
A TCM port should have between 15 and 20 V
dc across the Tip and Ring when the telephone
is disconnected.
Running a Maintenance session to test a dead
telephone
1.
Run a Maintenance session to ensure that the
telephone is not disabled. (See
Status in the
Maintenance session chapter.)
2.
While you are in the Maintenance session, run a
connectivity test on the port connected to the
telephone: This should be done after business hours to
avoid losing calls.
3.
Disable the port connected to the telephone using the
subheading: 2.
4.
Enable the port connected to the telephone using the
subheading:
Status.
Troubleshooting
16
Specific troubleshooting
Morstar equipment trouble
This section concerns
system equipment faults.
Check first for user problems, then wiring and programming
errors (as described in the General troubleshooting section)
before replacing
equipment.
KSU down
1.
See the section on General troubleshooting procedure.
2.
If ac power is present and the LED indicator on the
KSU is OFF, replace the KSU. (The location of the LED
indicators is described in the installation chapter.)
Morstar telephone display unreadable
If the trouble is with an M7310 Telephone or an
M7324 Telephone:
1.
Press
2.
Press the Up or
display button to adjust the
display to the desired level.
3.
Press the
display button.
If the trouble is with an M7100 Telephone or M7208
Telephone:
1.
Press [Feature]
2.
Press a number on the dial pad to adjust the display to
the desired level.
3.
Press
If the display is still unreadable:
1.
Disable the problem telephone.
2.
Replace the problem telephone with a known working
.
one.
3.
Enable the working telephone.
Troubleshooting
Specific troubleshooting
Trunk Cartridge trouble
1.
Check that the cartridge is properly inserted in the
17
.
Trunk Module.
2.
Run a Maintenance session to ensure that the cartridge
is not disabled.
3.
While you are in the Maintenance session, run a
connectivity test on the appropriate ports.
If the problem persists, follow as many of the next
steps as required to solve the problem:
1.
If ac power is present and the LED indicator on the
Trunk Module is OFF, replace the Trunk Module.
2.
Replace the DS-30 cable.
Note:
Refer to the Hardware upgrades and replacing
components chapter for information on
replacing components.
3.
Replace the Trunk Cartridge.
4.
Replace the Expansion Cartridge.
5.
Replace the KSU.
Troubleshooting
18
Specific troubleshooting
Trunk Module down
1.
See the section on General troubleshooting procedure.
2.
Run a Maintenance session to ensure that the Trunk
Module is not disabled. (See the Maintenance session
chapter.)
3.
Disable the module using the Maintenance subheading
3.
4.
Enable the module using the Maintenance subheading
Status.
5.
While you are in the Maintenance session, run a
connectivity test on the appropriate ports.
6.
Check the external line by terminating a single line
telephone directly on the distribution
equivalent, which connects to the Trunk Module.
If the problem persists, follow only as many of the next
steps as required to solve the problem:
1.
If ac power is present and the LED indicator on the
Trunk Module is OFF, replace the Trunk Module.
2.
Replace the DS-30 cable .
Note:
Refer to the Hardware upgrades and replacing
components chapter for information on
replacing components.
3.
Replace the Trunk Cartridge.
4.
Replace the Expansion Cartridge.
5.
Replace the KSU.
Troubleshooting
Specific troubleshooting
19
Station Module down
1.
See the section on General troubleshooting
2.
Run a Maintenance session to ensure that the module
is not disabled. (See Module Status in the Maintenance
session chapter.)
3.
Disable the Station Module using the subheading
4.
Enable the Station Module using the subheading
5.
If the Station Module is still down, power down, then
power up the KSU.
If the problem persists, follow as many of the next steps
as required to solve the problem:
1.
If ac power is present and the LED indicator on the
Station Module is OFF, replace the Station Module.
2.
Replace the DS-30 cable.
Note:
Refer to the Hardware upgrades and replacing
components chapter for information on
replacing components.
3.
Replace the Expansion Cartridge.
4.
Replace the KSU.
Troubleshooting
20
Specific troubleshooting
Optional equipment trouble
Other equipment trouble for the Analog Terminal Adapter
auxiliary ringer, and external paging are described
here.
Analog Terminal Adapter
trouble
1.
Check the single line telephone by using a known
telephone.
working test
2.
Check the connections to the jack.
3.
Check the connections to the
4.
Disconnect the
and replace it with a working
telephone. If the telephone still works properly,
the KSU and/or the SM are operating properly.
5.
Verify that the programming has been done as
described in the
Modular DR4 Programming
Analog Terminal Adapter
Record and the
Card.
6.
If the trouble seems to be in the KSU or SM,
check all wiring and programming options. If this does
not help, refer to the sections on KSU down or Station
Module down.
OR
If the trouble seems to be with the
disable the
and replace it with a known working one.
Troubleshooting
.
Specific troubleshooting
Running a Maintenance session to test an
1.
Run a Maintenance session to ensure that the
is
not disabled. (See
Status in the Maintenance
session chapter.)
While you are in the Maintenance session, run a
connectivity test on the port connected to the
telephone. This should be done after business hours to
avoid losing calls.
Disable the port connected to the
subheading: 2.
Enable the pot-t connected to the
subheading: 2.
using the
.
using the
Troubleshooting
22
Specific troubleshooting
Auxiliary ringer trouble
1.
If the auxiliary ringer is used for Service Modes (Night,
Evening, or Lunch service), ensure that Service Modes
is activated from the Control Telephone.
2.
Check the wiring between the auxiliary ringer generator
and the ringing device. Refer to the auxiliary ringer
wiring chart.
3.
Check the wiring between the auxiliary ringer generator
and the distribution block:
Auxiliary ringer wiring
Feature
Pin
Auxiliary ring (Make)
43 (Yellow-Green)
Auxiliary ring (Common)
18 (Green-Yellow)
4.
Ensure that the auxiliary ringer contacts are operating
properly by checking for contact operation with an
ohmmeter across the auxiliary ringer pin contacts listed
above.
5.
Check that the auxiliary ringer pin contacts are
programmed to operate in conjunction with any or all of
the features in the auxiliary ringer programming chart.
Troubleshooting
Specific troubleshooting
23
Auxiliary ringer programming
Feature
Programmed in
Auxiliary ringer: Lines
Configuration:
Line Data
Auxiliary ringer: Sets
Administration:
Telephone abilities
Service Modes (Night,
Evening, Lunch)
Administration:
Service Modes
Note:
The current capacity of the
relay
contacts is 50
dc. They are designed to
operate with the auxiliary ringer generator, or
equivalent.
Troubleshooting
24
Specific troubleshooting
External paging trouble
1.
Use the Button Inquiry feature
to verify the feature of a programmable
memory button.
2.
Check the wiring between the 50-pin connector and the
paging amplifier or between the connections shown in
the external paging wiring chart.
External paging wiring
3.
Troubleshooting
Feature
Pin
Page out (Tip)
47 (Violet-Orange)
Page out (Ring)
22 (Orange-Violet)
Test external paging [Feature)
working. The output signal from the
across 600 ohms.
to ensure that it is
KSU is 775
Network
troubleshooting
telemanuals.com
telemanuals.com
Contents i
Introduction 1
Getting ready 1
Other troubleshooting tools 2
Symptoms to
users 3
Symptoms at the alarm telephone 3
Alarm telephone shows
3
Alarm telephone shows
4
4
Alarm telephone shows
Symptoms at other
telephones 5
Auto-answer line rings at a
telephone
Prime telephone gets misdialed calls 6
Selected line shows Not in service 6
Selected line pool shows No free lines 8
Dialed number shows Restricted call 8
Remote feature code gets no response 9
5
Symptoms to remote callers
Calling directly to
10
and the wrong person 10
Dialed number gets
Dialed number gets stuttered dial tone instead of
1 0
Dialed number gets dial tone instead of
11
Dialed number gets busy tone 11
Dialed number does not get through 12
Calling
through
14
Dialed number gets
instead of stuttered dial
tone 14
Dialed number gets dial tone instead of stuttered dial
tone 15
COS password gets overflow tone 15
Network Troubleshooting
telemanuals.com
ii
Contents
Using Nor-star remote features 17
Dialed feature code gets overflow tone 17
Dialed feature code gets busy tone 18
Calling through
to another system 18
Line Pool access code gets overflow tone 18
Line Pool access code gets
19
Line pool access code gets busy tone 20
Dialed number gets no response 21
Network Troubleshooting
telemanuals.com
Introduction to Network Troubleshooting
1
The troubleshooting procedures in this chapter will help you
solve problems specific to the operation of your
system in a network. Try these procedures and suggested
solutions before replacing any components.
WARNING
Only qualified personnel can replace components and
service hardware.
The procedures and suggested solutions are grouped by
their symptom. Where a symptom may have more than one
cause, each cause is followed by a brief paragraph
describing the procedure.
Where more than one procedure is given, the procedures
represent different options from which you should select just
one.
Getting ready
Before you begin troubleshooting, gather all the information
that is relevant to your network configuration:
the Not-star Modular DR4 Programming Record
the Nor-star Modular DR4 Network Configuration
Record
records from people who use the network
information about other hardware and
features within the public or private network
Network troubleshooting
2
Introduction to Network Troubleshooting
Other troubleshooting tools
Remember that you can check many of the system
parameters without having to go into a Configuration or
Administration session.
From an M7310 or M7324 telephone, check line data
by entering the feature code for Line profile:
From an M7310 or M7324 telephone, check
data by entering the feature code for Set profile:
To check the buttons on a particular telephone, use the
feature code for Button inquiry:
Network troubleshooting
Symptoms to
Symptoms to
users
3
users
Certain symptoms, although they can occur in many
situations, may mean that there is a problem with the
network configuration.
This section describes symptoms that a local caller in the
system might encounter.
Symptoms at the alarm telephone
The troubleshooting procedures in this section focus on
alarm codes specific to network configuration.
Alarm telephone shows
1-X-V
You have configured one or more lines as one trunk type,
but the Trunk Cartridge in slot Y of Trunk Module X is not
that type.
Reconfigure the Trunk type to match the type of Trunk
Cartridge that has been installed in slot Y of Trunk
Module X.
OR
Install a Trunk Cartridge in slot Y that matches the type
of Trunk you have configured.
Network troubleshooting
Symptoms to
users
Alarm telephone shows
1
62-V-Z
You have configured one or more Loop Start trunks as
answer, but the hardware on trunk port Z does not provide
disconnect supervision.
Reconfigure your auto-answer Loop Start trunk or
trunks as manual-answer.
OR
If the line number of your auto-answer Loop Start truhk
is 009 or greater, install a Loop Start Trunk Cartridge
with disconnect supervision in slot Y, trunk port Z.
OR
If the line number of your auto-answer Loop Start trunk
is between 001 and 008, install a Version 2 or higher
KSU.
Alarm telephone shows
1 arm:
The trunk of port Z has tried, unsuccessfully, to access a
DTMF receiver. You have configured more auto-answer
Loop Start trunks than you have DTMF receivers.
Increase your ratio of
Trunk Cartridges to
Loop Start trunks. The maximum is one
Trunk Cartridge for every two Loop Start trunks that
you have configured as auto-answer.
Make sure that all of your
trunks are
configured as E&M or DTMF (whichever applies) so
that the system knows the receivers are there.
The DTMF receivers are not working properly.
Check the DTMF receivers on every
Cartridge.
Network troubleshooting
Trunk
Symptoms to
Symptoms at other
users
5
telephones
This section deals with messages or calls at any telephone
within the
system.
Auto-answer line rings at a
telephone
You configured a Loop Start trunk as auto-answer but the
installed hardware does not support disconnect supervision.
(In this case, the symptom would be accompanied
Alarm 62 code symptom.)
Reconfigure the trunk as manual-answer.
OR
If the line number of your auto-answer Loop Start trunk
is 009 or greater, install a Loop Start Trunk Cartridge
with disconnect supervision in slot Y, trunk port Z.
OR
If the line number of your auto-answer Loop Start trunk
is between 001 and 008, install a Version 2 or higher
KSU.
You configured the line as auto-answer and supervised, and
then reconfigured the line as unsupervised.
Reconfigure the line as manual-answer.
OR
Reconfigure the line as supervised.
Network troubleshooting
6
Symptoms to
users
Prime telephone gets misdialed calls
The digits sent by a switch at a Central Office or in the
private network did not match any Rec’d
the Auto DN, or
DN. The call has been routed to the Prime
the
telephone for the incoming trunk.
Verify that the switch is sending the correct number of
digits for the Rec’d # length defined in your system.
Verify all the digit strings that the switch should be
sending.
Check that you have defined the corresponding Rec’d
for every target line in your system.
Make sure that the published telephone numbers for
your network are correct.
Selected line shows
in service
You have configured a DTMF line to appear at the
telephone.
Reconfigure the line so that it does not appear at any
telephone and configure another line to replace it at the
telephone.
OR
Reconfigure the line as a different type and install trunk
hardware to support the new type of line.
Network troubleshooting
Symptoms to
users
7
The
system has taken an E&M line out of service
because the far end did not respond to a disconnect signal
from the
system. The symptom would be
accompanied by Event code 263 in the System Test Log.
Check with the operators of the system at the far end
and find out if their system is operating.
Check that your system hardware is receiving signals
properly.
Check the trunk between your system and the far end
system for a break.
system has detected no response on an E&M
The
line from the system at the far end. The symptom will be
accompanied by Event code 265 in the System Test Log.
Check with the operators of the system at the far end
and get them to troubleshoot their system.
The line has been disabled for maintenance purposes.
Enable the line.
OR
If the line will be out of service for some time, configure
another line to replace it on the telephone.
Network troubleshooting
8
Symptoms to
users
Selected line pool shows No
1
If this happens often, there are not enough lines in the line
pool to serve the number of line pool users.
If the line pool contains Loop Start trunks, enter
Configuration and move under-used Loop Start trunks
from other line pools into the deficient line pool.
OR
If the line pool contains E&M trunks, order more trunks
from the telephone company or private network vendor.
install additional Trunk Cartridges of the appropriate
type. In Configuration programming, add the new
trunks to the deficient line pool.
Dialed number shows Restricted call
If this happens often, the
telephone or user has an
inappropriate set of dialing restrictions.
In Administration programming, check the Set
and
Line/set filter for the telephone. Assign restrictions
and exceptions that will permit access to the required
destinations.
OR
Give the
user a Line Pool access code to a line
pool that permits access to the required destinations.
OR
If this happens to a number of people who share a line,
check the Line filter. Assign restrictions and exceptions
that will permit access to the required destinations.
OR
If the caller used the changed Class of Service,
the User filter for the Class of Service. Ensure that the
restrictions and exceptions are appropriate for the user.
Network troubleshooting
Symptoms to
users
9
Remote feature code gets no response
A
user has called into another
system and is
trying to activate a remote feature but gets no response after
dialing the feature code. The
user may have pressed
the Feature button to activate the remote feature.
Ensure that remote callers are dialing the feature code
correctly. Only the asterisk (*) character, followed by
the feature code, can activate a remote feature.
Network troubleshooting
Symptoms to remote callers
to remote callers
Symptoms described in this section are those which appear
to a remote caller attempting to use
system
resources. The remote caller may be calling from the public
network or the private network.
directly to
A remote caller is trying to reach a
telephone or
device and reports one of these symptoms,
Dialed number gets
person
and the wrong
The digits sent by a switch at a Central Office or in the
the Auto DN, or
private network did not match any Rec’d
DN. The call has been routed to the Prime
the
telephone for the incoming trunk.
Verify that the switch is sending the correct number of
digits for the Rec’d # length defined in your system.
Verify all the digit strings that the switch should be
sending.
Check that you have defined the corresponding Rec’d
for every target line in your system.
Make sure that the published telephone numbers for
your network are correct.
Dialed number gets stuttered dial tone instead of
The remote caller has tried to reach a
target line, but
instead. Alternatively, the
has reached a trunk with
system has mapped incoming digits onto the
DN.
Network troubleshooting
Symptoms to remote callers
11
Verify all the digit strings that the switch should be
sending.
Check that you have defined a corresponding Rec’d
for every target line in your system.
Check that you have defined the correct
your system.
DN for
Make sure that the published telephone numbers for
your network are correct.
Dialed number gets dial tone instead of
The remote caller has tried to reach a
has reached the.
system instead.
The
Auto DN.
target line, but
system has mapped the incoming digits onto the
Verify all the digit strings that the switch should be
sending.
Check that you have defined the corresponding Rec’d
for every target line in your system.
Check that you have defined the correct Auto DN for
system.
published telephone numbers for
Make sure
your network are correct.
Dialed number gets busy tone
The target line that the incoming digits map onto is busy, and
there is no Prime telephone for the incoming trunk.
For maximum call coverage, make sure that you
configure a Prime telephone for every incoming trunk.
Network troubleshooting
12
Symptoms to remote callers
Dialed number does not get through
The digits sent by a switch at a Central Office or in the
the Auto DN, or
private network did not match any Rec’d
the
DN. There is also no Prime telephone assigned for
the incoming trunk. In this case, the caller may hear overflow
system or a recorded message from
tone from the
the originating switch.
Configure a Prime telephone for every incoming trunk.
Verify that the switch is sending the correct number of
digits for the Rec’d # length defined in your system.
Verify all the digit strings that the switch should be
sending.
Check that you have defined a Rec’d
line in your system.
for every target
Make sure that the published telephone numbers for
your network are correct.
The
system did not receive some or all of the
incoming digits.
Check that the system hardware is receiving signals
properly.
Verify that the switch is sending the correct number of
digits for the Rec’d # length defined in your system.
If the switch at the far end is sending pulse signals,
make sure they are being sent at the proper rate.
(Pulse digits must be 300 ms or more apart for
to receive them.)
If remote callers are having difficulty getting through from the
public network, there may be a problem with your DID TC:
Connect a single-line telephone with DTMF tones to a
DID trunk input on the DID TC.
Network troubleshooting
Symptoms to remote callers
13
Use the single-line telephone to enter a Rec’d that
has been programmed for a target line in your system.
Listen for ringback.
If the Rec’d # does not result in ringback, check that the
target line is assigned to a telephone and that there is a
Prime telephone assigned for the DID trunk.
If you are still unable to achieve
after the
programming for the Rec’d is verified, check the ,
cross-connections. If all the cross-connections
correct replace the Trunk Cartridge.
If remote callers are having difficulty getting through from the
private network, there may be a problem with your E&M TC.
Check the cross-connections for the
TC.
If the E&M trunks are connected to another
system, ensure that connections have been made as
indicated in the chart below:
Back-to-back cross connections
1st
distribution
Next
block
distribution
T
R
block
Tl
T
RI
E
SG
M
SB
M
SG
SB
Use the table below to check for correct voltage on the
leads:
Voltages on E&M leads
Leads
T-R
Voltage: active
125
ac on steady dial tone
125
ac on steady dial tone
- Voltage: inactive
0 V ac
E-SG
0 V dc to -5 V dc
-48 V dc
M-SB
0 V dc to + 2 V dc
-48 V dc
Network troubleshooting
14
Symptoms to remote callers
Calling
through
A remote caller expects to hear two different kinds of tones
when calling a DISA. number. The caller expects stuttered
dial tone first to indicate that the system is ready for a COS
password. Once the password is entered, the caller expects
to hear dial tone.
Dialed number gets
dial tone
instead of stuttered
The remote caller has dialed a
number, but has
instead reached a target line, or has been routed to the
Prime telephone for the auto-answer trunk. The
system has mapped the incoming digits from a switch onto a
target line, or has been unable to map the digits anywhere.
Verify that the switch is sending the correct number of
digits for the Rec’d length defined in your system.
Verify all the digit strings that the switch should be
sending.
Check that you have defined the correct
your system.
DN for
Make sure that the published telephone numbers for
your network are correct.
Network troubleshooting
.
Symptoms to remote callers
15
Dialed number gets dial tone instead of stuttered
dial tone
The remote caller has dialed a
number, but has
system instead. The
system has
reached the
mapped the incoming digits from a switch onto the Auto DN.
Verify that the switch is sending the correct number of
digits for the Rec’d # length defined in your system.
Verify all the digit strings that the switch should be
sending.
Check that you have defined the correct
your system.
DN for
Make sure that the
DN and Auto DN are different
enough to prevent misdialing.
Make sure that the published telephone numbers for
your network are correct.
COS password gets overflow tone
The remote caller may have entered an invalid password.
Check the Administration programming under COS
passwords and verify that the caller has a valid
password.
Note:
Make sure that all users are informed of
password changes.
The remote caller may have entered an asterisk (*) as one of
the 6 digits.
Instruct remote callers to enter their COS password
correctly: enter 6 digits that are numeric characters.
may be entered after the 6th digit,
The number sign
but is not required.
Network troubleshooting
16
Symptoms to remote callers
The remote caller may have entered a number sign
one of the 6 digits.
as
Instruct remote callers to enter their COS password
correctly: enter 6 digits tha? are numeric characters.
The number sign (#) may be entered after the 6th digit,
but is not required.
The remote caller may have waited more than 15. seconds
between entering digits.
Instruct remote callers to enter their COS password
correctly: enter 6 digits that are numeric characters.
and do not pause too long between digits The number
sign (#) may be entered after the 6th digit, but is not
required.
The caller may be dialing from a rotary-dial telephone or
from a push-button telephone that has the dial-mode set to
‘pulse’.
Inform remote callers that they must dial from a pushbutton telephone that has the dial-mode set to ‘tone’.
Network
troubleshooting
Symptoms to remote callers
Using
17
remote features
A remote caller has received dial tone for the
system
but then encounters this symptom when trying to enter the
remote feature code.
Dialed feature code gets overflow tone
The remote caller does not have access to that feature.
If the call came in on a trunk with
check the
Class of Service that is associated with the remote
caller’s COS password. If it is too restrictive, assign
another COS password that is more suitable.
If the call came in on a trunk without DISA, check the
Class of Service that you assigned to the incoming
trunk. Make sure that it gives the appropriate access to
the remote caller.
The feature code is not valid.
Ensure that remote callers have a correct listing of the
features that are programmed for remote access.
Ensure that remote callers are dialing the feature code
correctly. Only the asterisk (*) character, followed by
the feature code, can activate a remote feature.
The caller may be dialing on a rotary-dial telephone or on a
push-button telephone that has the dial-mode set to ‘pulse’.
inform remote callers that they must dial from a pushbutton telephone that has the dial-mode set to ‘tone’.
Network troubleshooting
18
Symptoms to remote callers
Dialed feature code gets busy tone
A resource that the remote feature uses may currently be in
use. For example, a remote caller trying to use the paging
feature would get a busy tone if the auxiliary speaker were
being used at the time.
.
If repeated attempts to use the remote feature get busy
tone, there may be a malfunction in a resource that the
feature uses. Check that the remote feature hardware ,
is functioning normally.
Calling through
to another system
A remote caller is trying to use your
trunks to reach
another system and reports one of these symptoms.
Line Pool access code gets overflow tone
If the published Line Pool access code is valid, the remote
caller does not have access to that line pool.
,
If the incoming trunk answers with
give the
remote caller a COS password that permits access to
that line pool.
OR
Change the Class of Service for the incoming trunk so
that it permits access to that line pool.
OR
Give the remote caller a Line Pool access code that is
permitted within the Class of Service on the incoming
trunk.
Network troubleshooting
Symptoms to remote callers
19
If the published Line Pool access code is invalid, the system
has attempted, without success, to match the invalid code to
a
target line DN, and there is no Prime telephone for
the auto-answer trunk.
Make sure that the published Line Pool access codes
are correct.
Check that the Line Pool access codes have been
entered correctly under 4.
Configuration programming.
The caller may be dialing from the network on a rotary-dial
telephone or on a push-button telephone that has the
mode set to ‘pulse’.
Inform remote callers in the public network that they
must dial from a push-button telephone that has the
dial-mode set to ‘tone’.
Line Pool access code gets
The published Line Pool access code is invalid, and the
system has routed the call to the Prime telephone for the
incoming trunk.
Make sure that the published Line Pool access codes
are correct.
Check that the Line Pool codes have been entered
correctly under
in Configuration
programming.
Network troubleshooting
20
Symptoms to remote callers
Line pool access code gets busy tone
There are not enough lines in the line pool to serve the
number of users.
If the line pool contains Loop Start trunks, enter
Configuration and move under-used Loop Start trunks
from other line pools into the deficient line pool.
OR
If the line pool contains E&M trunks, order more trunks
from the telephone company or private network vendor.
Install additional E&M Trunk Cartridges. In
Configuration programming, add the new trunks to the
deficient line pool.
OR
Create a separate line pool for remote users only.
There are DID lines in the line pool.
In Configuration programming, make sure that there
are no DID lines in any of the line pools.
Network troubleshooting
Symptoms to remote callers
21
Dialed number gets no response
The remote caller, after accessing a line in a line pool, may
have started dialing before the far end was ready to receive
digits.
Instruct remote callers to wait until they hear feedback
before entering any digits.
There may be a malfunction in the line that the remote caller
accessed.
If the problem is persistent, check that all lines in the
affected line pool are functioning normally.
There may be a malfunction in the system that the caller is
trying to reach.
Inform the operators of the system at the far end that
the dialed number is not getting through.
Network troubleshooting
telemanuals.com
Telephone
features
telemanuals.com
Contents i
Feature Finder 1
features 2
Using
Answering the telephone 5
Callback 5
Call Queuing 5
Delayed Ring Transfer 5
12
External
Internal
12
12
Call Forward 15
Call Forward on Busy 15
Call Forward (No Answer) 15
Call Forward Override 15
Call Park 18
Call Pickup 20
Directed Pickup 20
Group Pickup 20
Trunk Answer 20
Camp On 23
Conference 25
COS Password 29
Telephone features
telemanuals.com
ii
Contents
Customizing your telephone 30
Automatic Handsfree 30
Contrast Adjustment 30
Dialing Modes 31
Language Choice 32
Move Line buttons 33
Pulse/Tone Dialing 34.
Ring Type 35
Ring Volume 35
Telephone Administration Lock 35
Dialing 37
Direct Dial 37
External line access code 37
Last Number Redial 37
Ring Again 38
Saved Number Redial 38
Do Not Disturb 43
Feature Programming 45
Erase a button 45
Button Inquiry 45
Group Listen 48
Handsfree/Mute 49
Hold 51
Automatic Hold 51
Exclusive Hold 51
Listen on Hold 51
Music/Tones/Silence on Hold 52
Telephone features
telemanuals.com
Contents iii
Host System Signaling 53
Link 53
Pause 53
Programmed Release 54
Run/Stop 54
Timed Release 54
Line Pools 56
Line Redirection 58
Long Tones 63
Message 64
Telephones 67
Buttons 67
Feature button 67
Hold button 67
Memory buttons 67
Answer buttons 67
6 8
Line buttons 68
Programmed Feature Buttons 68
Release button 69
Volume Bar 69
Headset 69
Using a headset 69
Hearing Aid Compatibility 70
Wall Mounting 70
.
Page 71
Priority Call 73
Telephone features
iv
Contents
Service Modes 75
Special
Telephones
77
Alarm telephone 77
Central Answering Position 77
Control telephone 78
Direct Dial 78
Emergency telephone 79
Extra-Dial telephone 79
Hotline telephone 79
Prime telephone 81
Speed Dial 82
Program Personal Speed Dial 82
System features 85
Accidental Disconnect Protection 85
Automatic telephone relocation 85
Background Music 85
Cancel Background Music 86
Class of Service 86
Internal numbers 86
Lines 87
Disconnect Supervision 87
Line appearance 87
Line Pools 87
Private lines 88
Prime line 88
Ringing Line Preference 88
Target line 88
Overflow Call Routing 89
System Speed Dial 89
Time features 90
Call Duration Timer 90
Telephone features
.
Contents
v
Show Time 90
Transfer 91
Transfer with Announcement 91
Unsupervised Conference 91
Transfer using Hold 92
Using
remotely 95
Voice Call 100
Mute Voice Call tones 100
Handsfree Answerback 100
Voice Call Deny 100
Telephone features
Feature Finder 1
ture Finder
Answer a call
Answering the telephone 5
Answer a call ringing
on another telephone
Call Pickup 6, 21
Bring another person into
a telephone conversation
Conference 26
Group Listen 48
6, 49, 100
Privacy 27
Change how
your telephone works
Button Inquiry 45
Contrast Adjustment 31
Class of Service 30, 86, 98
Customizing your telephone 31
Dialing Modes 32, 39
Do Not Disturb 6, 17, 44
Feature programming 37
language Choice 34
Line appearance 87
Line buttons 35, 68
Lines 87
Telephones 67
Prime line 88
Private lines 88
Ring Type 36
Ring Volume 36
Telephone
Admin. Lock 36
- Communicate with
another person in your office
Dialing 38
Direct Dial 38, 77
Message 6, 64
Page 70
Priority Call 39, 73
Ring Again 38
Voice Call 7, 71, 100
Handle many calls at once
Answer buttons 67
Central Answering Position 77
Call Queuing 5
Hold 51, 67
Prime telephone 6, 11, 81
Have your calls answered
at another telephone
Call Forward 16
Line Redirection 58
Service Modes 75
Make calls quickly without having to
dial the whole number
13, 37, 68
Hotline telephone 79
Last Number Redial 38
Speed Dial 82
Saved Number Redial 39
Make calls to numbers outside your
system
Dialing 38
External line access code 38
Host System Signaling 53
Line Pools 39, 56, 88
See how long
you have been on a call
Call Duration Timer 90
Show Time 90
Transfer a call
to another person
Call Park 19
Camp 24
Transfer 24, 27, 91
Use
Using
.
remotely
remotely 95
Telephone features
2 Using
features
features
Using a feature
To use a
feature, enter the feature code and watch
your telephone display for instructions. Different displays
come up, at different times, depending on how you invoke
the feature and the choices you make while using the
feature. If you want more information about a
it
up in the Display section of each feature listing.
Note that some features only work in certain circumstances.
For instance, to use Conference you must have two calls at
your telephone, one active and one on hold.
One line and two line displays
All
telephones have LCD displays that give you
information about your calls and guide you through
features. The
and M7208 telephones have a one-line
display. The
and M7324 telephones have a two-line
display. The second line of a two-line display shows the
functions of the three buttons directly below it. If you have a
telephone with a two-line display, you can use these display
and
buttons. Some display buttons, such as
are simply shortcuts. If you have a telephone with a one line
display, these shortcuts are not available. Other display
buttons , such as
and SHOW, perform essential functions.
If your telephone has a one line display, you can use the
following buttons in place of these display buttons:
OK
QUIT
SHOW
Telephone features
Using
features 3
All displays listed in this book are shown as they appear on
the two line display, except those that appear only on
telephones with a single line display. If you are using a
telephone with a single line display, ignore the second line of
the display shown in this book, and the instructions for using
display buttons.
Common feature displays
You may see the following displays when you use a feature.
Someone is in Configuration or
Administration programming. You
cannot use programming features.
Try again later.
You have taken more than 15
seconds to press a button in
response to a display.
You have entered an invalid feature
code.
You have tried to use a feature that
is not available in the present set-up
of your
system.
You cannot use the feature you have
chosen because your telephone is
locked. See Telephone
Administration Lock in Customizing
your telephone.
Dialing and Answering the telephone
Many
features require you to dial telephone
numbers. The displays associated with dialing are listed in
the Dialing section. If you see a display that is not listed with
the feature you are using, look for it in the Dialing section. All
the displays that appear when you are receiving a call are
listed in the Answering the telephone section.
Telephone features
Using
features
One button access
You can program most
feature codes onto telephone
memory buttons so that you can use the feature by pressing
a single button. See Feature programming for instructions.
.
Whenever this chapter tells you to enter a feature code, you
can do so either by pressing the buttons shown in the feature
description or by pressing a memory button on which the
feature code has been programmed. Similarly, you can enter
a telephone number by pressing an
button.
a feature
Some features change the way your telephone works. To
make your telephone work normally again you must cancel
the feature. To cancel a feature, press (Feature], then
and the feature code. Thus, to cancel Call Forward, which
you activate by pressing
press
If a feature code is programmed onto a memory button, you
can cancel the feature by pressing the memory button.
If you change your mind in the middle of using a feature, you
can back out by pressing
or
Be aware that
pressing
will disconnect your current call.
telephone
Because the M7100 telephone does not have any line
buttons it sometimes works slightly differently from other
telephones. Where other telephones may require
you to select a line button to answer a call, on the
you simply pick up the receiver. Where other telephones
require you to select a line button to take a call off hold, you
press
on the
The
cannot have a
button. You will find special instructions for the
in some feature descriptions.
Telephone features
Answering the telephone 5
the telephone
Answering
Your
telephone can receive many different types of
calls. Your telephone’s display tells you what sort of call you
are receiving. The usual way to answer a call is to pick up
the receiver, but there are several other possible methods,
depending on how your system is set up and what kind of
call is ringing.
Callback
When you direct a call you have answered to another
telephone, the system monitors the call to make sure
someone answers it. If no one answers a call within a set
time, the system directs it back to you. Callback generates a
variety of displays. Most occur after a programmable delay
and are listed in this section. Some occur immediately, if the
telephone to which you are directing a call is out of service or
otherwise unavailable. These are listed with the descriptions
of the features in which they occur.
Call Queuing
When you have more than one call ringing at your telephone,
you can choose the call that has the highest priority.
1.
Enter the Call Queuing feature code
The system connects you to the
call that has the highest priority.
Call Queuing answers incoming calls before callback and
camped calls.
Delayed Ring Transfer (DRT)
If no one answers a call within a set time, the system
transfers the call to the Prime telephone.
Telephone features
6
Answering the telephone
Related features
Call Pickup
Call pickup lets you use your telephone to answer a call that
is ringing at someone else’s telephone. See Call Pickup.
Do Not Disturb
If you do not wish to receive calls, turn on Do Not Disturb.
See Do Not Disturb.
Handsfree/Mute
You can answer calls without picking up the receiver using
See
Prime telephone
A Prime telephone receives calls that go unanswered at
other telephones. See Special
Retrieving a Parked Call
You can retrieve a parked call at any telephone in the
system. See Call Park.
Voice Call Deny
If you do not wish to receive voice calls, turn on Voice Call
Deny. See Voice Call.
What line indicators mean
Flashing on and
off for equal lengths
of time
There is an incoming call on the line.
Flashing on and
off more quickly
You have placed a call on hold.
Flashing on for
longer than off
Someone else has put a call on hold
on that line.
Telephone features
.
Answering the telephone
On, not flashing
Off
7
You are connected to the call on that
line or the line is in use elsewhere.
The line is free.
Rings you may hear
A double beep every
ten seconds
A call has been camped to your
telephone.
A long single ring
There is an external call on the line
for you.
A shorter double ring
There is an internal call on the line
for you or a call is being transferred
to you.
A brief single ring
A call is being redirected on one of
your redirected lines. You cannot
answer this call. See Line
Redirection.
Three beeps
descending in tone.
You are receiving a priority call.
Displays
You will see one or more of the following displays when you
receive a call on your telephone and while you are
answering that call. See Message for a full explanation of the
Message feature. See Dialing for a full explanation of Ring
Again.
You are connected to an internal call.
to transfer
You can press
the call.
Either you are receiving an internal
call from telephone 4302 forwarded
by telephone 4321 or you have an
Answer button for telephone 4321
and an internal call from 4302 is
ringing on 4321.
Telephone features
8 Answering the telephone
You are receiving a call from
telephone 4321.
You have received a Ring Again
offer for a call to an internal
telephone. To call the number again,
or the flashing internal
press
line button. On the M7100, just lift
the receiver. Otherwise, press
or
wait 30 seconds for the Ring Again
offer to expire. For an explanation-of
Ring Again, see Dialing.
Call
The person to whom you camped the
call did not answer it. The call has
come back to you. Press the
button or the line button
to reconnect to the call.
You are connected to an external
to
call. You can press
transfer the call.
The call on line 001 is being
transferred to you by someone else
in your
system.
A camped call is waiting. Press the
line button or use Call Queuing to
answer the call. If you have an
M7100 telephone, press
1
Either you are receiving an external
call forwarded from teiephone 4321
or you have an Answer button for
telephone 4321 and an external call
is ringing on that telephone.
You tried to use Call Queuing but no
call was ringing at your telephone.
Telephone features
Answering the telephone 9
There is no call ringing at your
telephone. If you have a flashing line
button but your telephone is not
ringing, you must press the line
button to answer the call on that line.
Nobody answered the call you
parked. The call has come back to
you.
You have used the Call Queuing
feature without picking up the
receiver. Auto Handsfree has not
been assigned to your telephone.
You must use the receiver or
to answer a ringing or
camped call.
You are receiving a Priority Call. If
you are on another call, inform the
person you are speaking to that the
call is about to be put on hold. Press
the flashing line indicator of the
Priority Call or wait till the call
connects automatically (in eight
seconds).
The Priority Call goes through when
you hear the next beep.
Your active call is placed on
Exclusive Hold. It will be reconnected
automatically when the priority call
ends (unless you transfer the Priority
Call, in which case you must press
the line button of your original call to
reconnect).
To reject a Priority Call, use DND
([Feature]
press
You have no free line buttons on
which to receive a call. Release one
of your current calls and try again to
answer the incoming call.
Telephone features
Answering the telephone
You have received a Ring Again
offer for a line pool. To use the line
pool, press
or the flashing
internal line button. On the M7100,
just lift the receiver. Otherwise, press
or wait 30 seconds for the Ring
Again offer to expire. For an
explanation of Ring Again, see
Dialing.
Prime telephone displays
If yours is a Prime telephone, you may see the following
displays.
The person at telephone 4321 has
forwarded a call to you using Do Not
Disturb.
The system has transferred a call to
you from a telephone in Do Not
Disturb mode.
Line 001
1
Nobody answered this call so the
system transferred it to you.
Someone has camped, parked, or
transferred a call on line 001, but no
one has answered it. Press the
button or the line button
to connect to the call.
Line001
There is no telephone that can
receive a call on line 001 so the
System has transferred it to you.
The call coming in on line 015 was
intended for target line 087. Line 087
is busy so the call has come to
Telephone features
Answering the telephone 11
Notes
There are three indications of an incoming call: ringing, a line
button flashing, and a message on the display. You will not
necessarily receive all three indications for any particular
call. You may have a line that has been set up not to ring at
your telephone. If so, you will see only a flashing line button.
If there is no button free for a camped call to appear, you will
get a special ring and a message on your display, but no line
button will flash. If someone makes a voice call to you, you
will hear a beep followed by their voice. There are many
possible combinations, depending on how your system is set
up. See Lines in the System features section for more
information on the behavior of lines.
There are many ways to answer a call. Many of them
depend on settings in Administration programming.
Depending on various settings and the type of call you are
receiving, you may be able to answer a call by: picking up
the receiver, picking up the receiver and pressing a line
button, pressing
pressing
and pressing
a line button, pressing a line button, or simply speaking.
If you receive a Priority Call and your telephone has no free
internal line buttons, you cannot transfer the call or do
anything else with it, except release it.
On M7100 telephones, you may answer a second call by
pressing [Hold]. Your active call is put on hold and you
are connected to the waiting call. You can have no more
than two calls at a time.
Telephone features
12
You can program memory buttons for one-touch dialing of
internal or external telephone numbers.
External
1.
Enter the external
2.
3.
Select the button you want to program.
If you want this autodialer to use a particular line or line
pool, select that line or line pool.
Enter the number.
4.
Internal
1. Enter the internal
2.
3.
feature code
feature code
Select the button you want to program.
Enter the number.
Displays
You will see some of the following displays while
an
button. See Dialing for displays
that may occur while using an
button.
Continue to enter digits until the
number is complete. Press
or
(volume down) to erase
an incorrect digit.
or
when you are finished.
The memory allotted to
numbers in your
system is
.
full.
While programming External
Autodial, you pressed
before
entering any digits. This erases the
button.
Telephone features
13
Enter the number you wish to
program exactly as you would if you
were dialing it yourself.
You cannot program an
button while you are on a call. Finish
your call or place it on hold before
programming an
button.
Enter the internal telephone number
you wish to program.
Press the memory button you want
to program.
and HOLD/ Enter the number you want to
program onto the button, then press
(Hold]. You may include a line or
line pool selection in an
sequence by selecting the line before
entering any digits.
Enter the number you want to
program onto the button, then press
You may include a
line or line pool selection in an
sequence by selecting the
line before entering any digits.
The number is stored on the button.
If the power to your
system is off for more than three
days,
numbers may be lost from the memory.
numbers must be programmed onto
buttons. They can not be programmed onto line buttons, the
Handsfree/Mute button, or Answer buttons.
Telephone features
14
You can program Host System Signaling codes as part of a
number on an External
button. See Host System
Signaling.
If you do not include a line selection in an autodialer, the call
will use your prime line, if you have one. If you select a line
button, any line selection
before pressing the
programmed onto the button will be ignored.
You can copy the telephone number from a Last Number
Redial button or Saved Number Redial button onto an
button. Simply enter the Last Number Redial feature
code or Saved Number Redial feature code when the
feature asks you to enter a number.
Telephone features
Call Forward 15
Forward your calls
[Feature]
You can have all your calls forwarded to another telephone
system.
in the
1.
2.
Enter the Call Forward feature code
Enter the number of the internal telephone to which you
want your calls forwarded.
Forwarding remains in effect until you enter the Cancel Call
Forward feature code.
Cancel Call Forward
You can start to receive calls again.
Enter the Cancel Call Forward feature code
([Feature]
Call Forward on Busy
Call Forward on Busy redirects calls to another telephone
when you are busy with a call. The System Coordinator sets
up Call Forward on Busy in Administration programming.
Call Forward (No Answer)
Call Forward (No Answer) forwards unanswered calls to
another telephone. The System Coordinator sets up Call
Forward (No Answer) in Administration programming.
Call Forward Override
You can call someone and ask them to stop forwarding their
.
calls to you.
1.
Dial that person’s number and ask them to cancel call
forwarding. Your call will ring at that person’s telephone
even though they are forwarding their calls.
Telephone features
16 Call Forward
Related features
Do Not Disturb
You can use the Do Not Disturb feature to forward your calls
to the Prime telephone. See Do Not Disturb.
Line Redirection
Note the differences between Line Redirection and Call
Forward. Call Forward forwards all calls that arrive at a
particular telephone to another telephone within the
system. Line redirection redirects only the lines you specify,
no matter which telephones they appear on, to a telephone
outside the
system.
Displays
You will see some of the following displays while forwarding
your calls. See Do Not Disturb for a full explanation of that
feature. See Answering the telephone for displays that occur
when a telephone receives a call forwarded by another
telephone.
You cannot forward calls to the
number you have chosen. There are
several reasons why this can
happen. For instance, you cannot
forward your calls to a telephone that
has been forwarded to your
telephone.
to:
Dial the internal number or press the
button of the
Internal
telephone to which you want your
calls to be forwarded.
Your calls are being forwarded to
telephone 4321. Press the
button or [Feature)
w h e I#] n
y o u
your calls.
want to stop
Telephone features
Call Forward 17
Two or more telephones are linked in
a forwarding chain, and one of
is out of service or is being used to
program the system.
Notes
When a call is forwarded, it does not ring but its line indicator
still flashes on your telephone. You can answer the call by
pressing the button next to the flashing indicator.
If the telephone to which you forwarded your calls does not
have the same external lines as your telephone, the
forwarded calls appear on internal line buttons.
Telephones that have Call Forward on Busy active can still
receive Priority calls. Call Forward on Busy does not forward
camped calls.
When Call Forward is active, all calls go to the call forward
destination, regardless of the Call Forward on Busy and Call
Forward no Answer settings.
If you are one of a group of people who regularly forward
their calls to one another, be aware that it is possible to set
up forward loops in which a call is forwarded from one
telephone to another in a circle, and is never answered
anywhere.
Calls that are redirected by Line Redirection are not affected
by any of the Call Forward features.
Telephone features
18 Call Park
Park a call
You can suspend a call so that it can be retrieved from any
telephone in your system.
1.
2.
Enter the Call Park feature code
Use the Page feature to announce the retrieval code
displayed by your telephone.
Retrieving a parked call
1. Select an internal line on any
2.
telephone.
Dial the call park retrieval code.
Displays
You will see some of these displays while parking a call. You
may see some of these displays while retrieving a parked
call.
The person you were talking to has
already parked your call. You cannot
park the same call.
call first
I You have attempted to park a call
with no active call on your telephone.
If the call you wish to park is on hold,
you must reconnect to it before you
can park it.
You have entered an invalid retrieval
code.
call
call
Telephone features
101
There was no call on the retrieval
code you entered.
.
You have attempted to park a call,
but there are no calls at your
telephone.
Call Park 19
You have tried to park a conference
call. Split the conference and park
the calls separately. The person who
retrieves the calls can reconnect the
conference.
Record the code shown. Use Page
((Feature]
t
or press
o
announce the call and its retrieval
code.
All available retrieval codes are in
use. Transfer the call or take a
message instead.
Notes
When you park a call, the system assigns one of nine codes
for the retrieval of the call. These codes consist of the Call
Park prefix, which may be any digit from 0 to 9, and a two
digit call number between 01 and 09. Thus, if the Call Park
prefix is 3, parked calls are assigned Retrieve Park codes
301, 302, etc.
Your Installer sets the Call Park prefix in Configuration
programming. If the Call Park Prefix is set to NONE, parking
is disabled.
Telephone features
20 Call Pickup
You can pick up a call that is ringing at another telephone.
Directed Pickup
You can answer any telephone that is ringing in your
system
1.
Enter the Directed Pickup feature code
([Feature]
2.
Enter the internal number of the ringing telephone.
Group Pickup
Your
system can be divided into as many as nine
pickup groups. If you are a member of a pickup group, you
can pick up a call that is ringing at any telephone in your
pickup group.
1.
Enter the Group Pickup feature code.
Trunk Answer
The Trunk Answer feature allows you to answer an external
call that is ringing at any other telephone in your office.
Trunk Answer works only with calls that are ringing on lines
for which a Service Mode is active and Trunk Answer is ON
in Administration programming.
1.
Enter the Trunk Answer feature code
Telephone features
Call Pickup 21
Displays
You may see some of these displays while using a Call
Pickup feature.
You are already connected to the
telephone that made the call you are
trying to pick up. This can happen if
you are on a call to a co-worker, your
co-worker dials the number of a
telephone in your Pickup Group, and
you attempt to pick up that call.
Your telephone is not a member of a
Pickup Group.
You have attempted to pick up a call
on someone else’s private line.
You have tried to pick up a call when
you have no line button available.
(Pickup) There is no call that you can
pick up or the call that was ringing
has already been answered.
(Trunk Answer) The call that is
ringing is on a line that is not in a
Service Mode.
Enter the internal number of the
telephone that is ringing. (You may
button to do
use an Internal
this.)
If you decide not to answer a ringing
call once you have activated
Directed Pickup, press
The call will continue to ring.
Telephone features
22 Call Pickup
Notes
Call Pickup cannot be used on private lines. Group Pickup
can not be used to retrieve a camped call.
To use Directed Pickup, the telephone must be ringing. If, for
example, the auxiliary ringer is ringing, but the call is not
ringing at a telephone, the call cannot be answered using,
Directed Pickup. It must be answered normally at a
telephone that has a flashing indicator for the call, or by
using Trunk Answer.
If a call is ringing on an Answer button, you can use Directed
Pickup to answer the call by entering the internal number of
any member of the Answer group.
If there is more than one incoming call at a telephone in a
pickup group, a call ringing on the Prime line is answered
first followed by calls on external lines and, finally, calls on
internal lines.
If there is more than one incoming call on lines in a Service
Mode, the Trunk Answer feature picks up the external call
that has been ringing the longest. See Service Modes.
The System Coordinator can assign telephones to one of
nine Pickup Groups in Administration programming.
Telephone features
Camp On 23
On
.
Camp a call
You can send an external call to another telephone, even if
all its lines are busy.
1.
2.
Enter the Camp On feature code
Dial the number of the telephone you want to camp the
call to.
Related features
Transfer
Camp On is a variation of the Transfer feature. See Transfer.
Displays
You will see some of the following prompts while Camping a
call.
You tried to camp a call to a
telephone that already has a camped
call. The call has come back to you.
button or the
Press the
line button to reconnect to the
On the
telephone, just pick
up the receiver.
The person to whom you redirected
a call has Do Not Disturb active on
the telephone. The call has come
back to you. Press the
button or the line button to
to the call. On the
telephone,
just pick up the receiver.
You have tried to camp an internal
call. You can only camp external
calls.
Telephone features
24 Camp On
Dial the number of the internal
telephone to which the call will be
sent.
The telephone to which you camped
a call did not answer the call. The
call has come back to you. Press
or the line button to
reconnect to the call. On the
telephone, just pick up the receiver:
A call you camped has come back to
you, but the caller hung up before
you could reconnect.
You have no call to camp. If the call
you want to camp is on hold, take it
off hold and then camp it.
The telephone to which you have
camped a call is out of service or is
being used for Configuration or
Administration programming. The
call has come back to you. Press
or the line button to
reconnect to the call. On the
telephone, just pick up the receiver.
The line that the camped call is on is
in use or that line does not appear at
your telephone. Release the line or
release an internal line.
Notes
If you use Call Queuing to answer a camped call, external
calls are answered before the camped call.
.
Camped calls appear on a line button on the receiving
telephone, if one is available. If not, there is just a message
on the display and Camp tones.
Telephone features
.
Conference 25
[Feature]
Create a conference
You can talk to two people at once.
1.
2.
3.
Make sure you have two calls, one active and one on
hold.
Enter the Conference feature code
Take the held call off hold (this is automatic on the
telephone).
Conference using Privacy
Normally your calls are private; no one else can pick up your
line and join in your conversation. You can turn privacy off
for a call allowing another person with the same line to press
the line button and join in your conversation, forming a
conference.
1.
2.
Enter the privacy feature code ((Feature]
Tell the other person to press the line button and join
your conversation.
Disconnect one party
You can disconnect one party from a conference and
continue talking to the other.
1.
2.
3.
Press the line button of the call that you want to
disconnect. The call that you want to keep is
automatically put on hold.
Press
The call is disconnected.
Press the line button of the held call.
Independently hold two calls
.
You can put the two people on hold independently so that
they cannot talk to each other.
1.
2.
Press the line button of one person. The other person
is automatically put on hold.
Press
The second person is put on hold.
Telephone features
26 Conference
You can reestablish the conference.
1.
2.
3.
Take one call off hold.
Enter the Conference feature code.
Take the other call
hold.
Put a conference on hold
You can put a conference on hold, allowing the other two
people to continue speaking to each other.
1.
Press
The conference is on hold.
You can reconnect to the conference.
Press either of the held line buttons. You are
reconnected.
Split a conference
You can talk with one person while the other person is on
hold.
1.
Press the line button of the person you want to speak
to. The other person is automatically put on hold.
You can reestablish the conference.
1.
2.
Enter the Conference feature code
Take the held call off hold.
Related Features
Unsupervised
Conference
You can disconnect yourself from the conference and leave
the other two people talking by entering
feature
However, if both of the other people
code
are outside the system there are some restrictions: At least
one of the outside callers must have called you and that call
must be on a disconnect supervised line.
Telephone features
Conference 27
Displays
You will see some of these displays while using the
Conference feature.
You are trying to add a fourth party
to your conference call, or to join two
conferences together. Release one
call from the conference
adding another, or keep the two
conferences separate.
Privacy control cannot be used on
internal or conference calls.
You have put a conference call on
telephone,
hold from your
then tried to get another line. Your
M7100 can handle only two lines at a
time, and your conference call is
using both of them.
You have tried to make a conference
call, but your system is already
handling its maximum number of
conference calls.
You are on a conference with the two
lines or telephones shown. You can
drop out of the conference and leave
the other two parties connected
(Unsupervised Conference) by
or entering the
pressing
Transfer feature code.
You have tried to set up a
conference call, without having made
the calls that are to be connected.
Make both calls first.
You have tried to use Privacy Control
when you are not on a call.
Telephone features
28 Conference
You have tried to set up a
conference call while connected to
only one caller. Put your first call on .
hold, make a second call, and enter
the Conference feature code again.
You have activated the Conference
feature with one call active and
another on hold. Press the line of the
call on hold to bring that person into
the conference.
Notes
Only the person who established the conference can
process the conference in any of the ways described above.
The Conference feature supports only three people.
If you are using an M7100 telephone:
Your conference is connected as soon as you enter the
Conference feature code. There is no need to take the
second call off hold.
To split a conference, enter
You cannot independently hold two calls.
You cannot join an existing two-party call to establish a
Privacy conference although you can use the Privacy
feature for calls at your telephone.
When a third person joins a conversation on a line that has
privacy turned off, the call becomes a conference.
the
rules applicable to a conference apply except that there is
only one line in use, instead of the normal two. This means
that you cannot split a conference set up using Privacy.
Telephone features
COS Password 29
Change your Class of Service
A Class of Service password is a six digit code that lets you
switch from your current Class of Service to one that lets you
dial numbers prohibited by your current Class of Service.
1.
Enter the COS Password feature code
2.
Enter your COS password.
Displays
You will see the first of these displays when entering a COS
password, you may also see the second.
(Blank display) Enter your password.
It will not be shown on the display.
You have entered a password that is
not programmed into your system.
Notes
If you use your
system from outside the office, you
may have to enter a Class of Service password to gain
access to the system. Class of Service passwords can give
you access to features not available with the regular Class of
Service. See Using
remotely.
You must enter a Class of Service password each time you
wish to make a call using a Class of Service not normally
available on your line or telephone.
allows up to 100 Class of Service Passwords.
The System Coordinator defines Class of Service passwords
in Administration programming.
Telephone features
30 Customizing your telephone
You can change the way a telephone works in several ways.
Some of the features described below are assigned to
telephones in Administration programming. You can turn
others on and off at individual telephones.
Automatic Handsf ree
.
Automatic Handsfree lets you make or answer a call without
button.
having to pick up the receiver or press the
The telephone’s internal microphone and speaker turn on
automatically when you make or answer a call.
The System Coordinator assigns Automatic Handsfree
capability to a telephone in Administration programming. Full
Handsfree capability must be assigned to a telephone before
Automatic Handsfree capability can be assigned to it. This is
also done in Administration programming.
This feature is not available on M7100 telephones.
Contrast Adjustment
You can set the contrast level of your telephone display.
Enter the Contrast Adjustment feature code.
2.
Choose the contrast level you like best. The number of
contrast levels available varies from one
telephone to another.
This is the display you will see in Contrast adjustment.
Press a number for the contra& level
you want or press
or
Press
to set the new
contrast level.
Telephone features
.
Customizing your telephone 31
Dialing Modes
You can set the dialing mode of your telephone.
1.
2.
Enter the Dialing Modes feature code.
Choose the dialing mode you want.
supports three dialing modes; Automatic Dial,
Dial, and Standard Dial. All three modes support on-hook
dialing. (On-hook dialing means dialing a call
up the receiver.) The special features of the Automatic and
Pre-Dial modes are available only when you dial on-hook.
The Dialing Modes feature code cannot be programmed onto
a memory button.
Standard Dial
In Standard Dial mode you make a call by selecting a line
and dialing the number. If you have a prime line, it is
selected automatically when you lift the receiver or press
Handsf ree .
Standard Dial does not support on-hook dialing on an
telephone. If you have an
use the Automatic Dial or
Pre-Dial feature for on-hook dialing.
Automatic Dial
If you have a prime line assigned to your telephone,
Automatic Dial allows you to dial a number without selecting
a line. Your prime line is selected as soon as you start
dialing a number. Automatic Dial does not work if your prime
line is in use.
Telephones connected to an Analog Terminal Adapter
cannot use Automatic Dialing.
Telephone features
32
Customizing your telephone
Pre-Dial
Pre-Dial allows you to enter a telephone number, check it,
then change it before actually making the call. The call is not
dialed until you select a line or line pool or pick up the
receiver.
You can pre-dial both external and internal numbers. You
must, however, select the correct type of line (external or
internal) for the type of number you have entered.
If all the lines on your telephone are busy, you will not be
able to enter a telephone number.
If your telephone starts ringing while you are pre-dialing a
number, you can stop the ringing by turning on Do Not
Disturb
This does not affect numbers you
are entering.
This is the display you will see when selecting a Dial mode.
The current dial mode is shown.
Press
or NEXT until the dial
mode you want appears. Press
to select the
displayed dial mode. If Automatic dial
is not available it is because you
have no prime line.
Language Choice
English
You can select English as the language of your telephone
display.
1.
Enter the English language choice feature code
([Feature]
Alternate Language
You can select the alternate language as the language of
your telephone display.
Telephone features
Customizing your telephone 33
Enter the alternate language choice feature code
([Feature]
Each
system supports English and one alternate
language.
systems are available with either French
or Spanish as the alternate language. Button caps are
available in both alternate languages.
You can select either English or the alternate language at
each telephone. When your system is first
telephones will use English.
You can program a memory button for one-touch switching
between languages. Program [Feature)
onto the
button. Pressing the button will switch you back and forth
between English and the alternate language.
cannot be programmed onto a
memory button.
One of the following displays will appear when you enter a
language choice feature code.
En
.
Telephone display messages will be
in French.
Telephone display messages will be
Telephone display messages will be
Move Line buttons
You can move external lines to different buttons on your
telephone. You can use this feature to arrange your lines in
the way that makes the most sense to you.
1.
2.
3.
Enter the Move Lines feature code
([Feature]
Press the button you want to move the line from.
Press the button you want to move the line to.
Telephone features
34 Customizing your telephone
You will see some of these displays while moving lines.
Invalid
You have tried to move a line to a
button that cannot be used as a line
button, such as a
button, or an Answer button.
Press the button of the line you want
to move. Press Q U I T or
when you have finished moving
.
lines.
Press the button you want to move
the line to. Neither of the buttons is
erased. The lines, or the line and
feature, simply switch places.
a line
The button you are trying to move is
not a line button. If you are trying to
switch a line and a feature, move the
line to the feature button and not vice
versa.
Pulse/Tone Dialing
Each external line is set to either pulse or tone dialing. Pulse
dialing is the traditional method of dialing used by rotary dial
or push button single-line telephones. Tone dialing allows
telephones to communicate with other devices such as
answering machines. Tone dialing is required to access the
features that PBX systems may offer or to use another
system remotely (see Using
remotely).
Your Installer sets your lines to pulse or tone dialing in
Configuration programming.
T o switch from pulse to tone dialing
If your external lines are programmed for pulse dialing,
can switch your telephone temporarily to tone dialing.
1.
Press q
while on a call. Once you hang up, your
telephone returns to pulse dialing.
Telephone features
El
Customizing your telephone 35
Ring Type
You can choose one of four distinctive rings for your
telephone. This makes it easier to identify your telephone in
an open office.
1.
2.
Enter the Ring Type feature code.
Choose the ring type you want.
This is the display you will see when choosing a ring type.
hear the selected ring for two
seconds. Repeat until you hear the
ring you prefer, then press
Ring Volume
You can set the volume at which your telephone rings.
1.
2.
Enter the Ring Volume feature code. The telephone will
ring.
Press
to adjust the volume.
This is the display you will see while setting Ring volume.
Press either side of the volume bar
to adjust the volume.
Telephone Administration Lock
Telephone Administration Lock limits the ways in which you
can customize your telephone. There are three types of
Telephone Administration Lock: Full, Partial, and None.
Full Administration Lock lets you change the contrast of your
telephone’s display, use Ring Type, Ring Volume and Button
Inquiry, and control the volume of your speaker.
Telephone features
36 Customizing your telephone
Partial Administration Lock allows you to forward your calls,
turn on Do Not Disturb and Service Modes, and use the
Background Music, Send Message, Ring Again, Privacy, and
Trunk Answer features
.
No Administration Lock allows you to access all features that
are programmed for your telephone. The System
Coordinator assigns Administration Lock to each telephone
in Administration programming.
Telephone Administration Lock does not affect call handling
features.
Related Features
[Feature]
You can program your telephone’s memory buttons to dial
feature. See
frequently used numbers with the
Autodial.
Feature programming
You can program feature codes onto your telephone’s
memory buttons using the Feature programming feature.
See Feature programming.
Speed Dial programming
You can program personal speed dial numbers onto speed
dial codes 71 to 94 using the Personal Speed Dial
programing feature. See Speed Dial.
Telephone features
Dialing 37
One of the most important features of your telephone system
is the ability to dial telephone numbers. Many features
require you to dial telephone numbers. The displays
associated with dialing are listed here.
Direct Dial
You can dial a Direct Dial telephone with a single digit. The
Direct Dial telephone is usually in a central location, such as
a receptionist’s or secretary’s desk. It is usually a Prime
telephone and a Central Answering Position (CAP).
External line access code
The external line access code is the number you dial to get
an external line. You will need to use an external line access
code if your prime line is an internal line. The code will
connect you to a line pool through your internal line.
If your prime line is an external line, or if you select an
outgoing external line on your telephone, you will not need
an external line access code. You will always need an
external line access code on an
telephone.
Your Installer assigns the external line access code in
Configuration programming.
Last Number Redial
[Feature]
You can redial the last external number you dialed.
1.
Enter the Last Number Redial feature code
Telephone features
38 Dialing
Ring Again
you can’t get through to someone on your
system
because their telephone is busy or there is no answer, you
can have the
system tell you when they hang up or
next use their phone.
1.
Enter the Ring Again feature code
before you hang up.
You can also use Ring Again to tell you when a busy line .
pool becomes available.
Using Ring Again cancels any previous Ring Again requests
at your telephone.
Cancel Ring Again
You can cancel a ring again request by entering the Cancel
Ring Again feature code.
Saved Number Rediai
You can save the number of the external call you are on
(providing you dialed the call) so that you can call it again
later.
1.
Enter the Saved Number Redial feature code while you
are still on the call.
You can dial a saved number.
1.
Enter the Saved Number Redial feature code when you
are not on a call.
Related Features
The
feature lets you program telephone numbers
onto memory buttons for one-touch dialing. See the
section.
Telephone features
Dialing 39
Dialing modes
supports three different methods of dialing. They are
described in the Customizing your telephone section under
the heading Dialing Modes.
Line Pools
Line pools give you access to many external lines. See Line
Pools.
Priority Call
If you get a busy signal when you call someone in your
office, you can interrupt them using Priority Call. See Priority
Call.
Speed Dial
The Speed Dial feature lets you dial programmed numbers
by entering speed dial codes. See Speed Dial.
You will see some of these displays while selecting lines and
dialing telephone numbers and in response to the numbers
you dial.
You are dialing using Pre-Dial. To
erase an incorrect digit, press
or
(volume down). When
the number is complete, select a line
or lift the receiver.
The telephone you have called has
no internal lines available.
This prompt remains on your display
as long as you are on a call you have
dialed. You may transfer the call by
pressing
Telephone features
40 Dialing
Your telephone is already connected
to the telephone you are trying to
call. Check your active line buttons,
and return to that call.
Wait for the telephone to be
answered, or press
to use the
Ring Again or Message features.
Wait for the telephone to be
answered. If no one answers, you
may press
to use the Ring’.
Again or Message features or press
PRIORITY to make a priority call.
You cannot use Ring Again on your
current call. You can only use Ring
Again while you have a busy signal
on an internal call or line pool
request or while an internal call is
ringing.
The telephone you are calling is in
Do Not Disturb mode.
to use the Ring Again or Message
features.
The line you have chosen is in use at
another telephone. Use a different
line, or wait until the line is free.
You have tried to use a line that is
active on an external call.
You have entered a number that
does not exist.
I
Telephone features
The line you have chosen is in use.
Try another. If the line remains in use
and never seems to clear, it may be
hung. See Lines in the System
Features section for information on
hung lines.
Dialing 41
Enter the digits of the number you
want to dial.
No
button free
You have tried to make or receive a
call when no line button was
available.
last number
You have not dialed an external
telephone number since the last
power interruption or system reset.
Either you have no prime line or your
prime
is busy. Select a line
manually before dialing.
No
You have tried to save the number of
an incoming call. You can only save
numbers that you have dialed
yourself.
No saved number
Not
You have tried to use Saved Number
Redial, but have not first saved a
telephone number. The Saved
Number Redial memory is empty.
You have entered the number of a
telephone that is not in service.
in
The telephone you have called is on
another call. Press
to use the
Ring Again or Message features.
Release a call
You have Pre-Dial assigned to your
telephone but you have no free line
buttons. Release one of your calls
and try Pre-Dial again.
Restricted
The call you are trying to make is not
allowed for your Class of Service.
Make your call on a line or telephone
that is not restricted, or use a Class
of Service password to bypass the
restriction.
call
Telephone features
42 Dialing
to use Ring Again. Press
Press
if you prefer to send a message.
See Message and Ring Again.
Either you have no prime line, or the
prime line is in use, or the line
programmed onto an Autodialer,
Speed Dialer, Last Number Redial,
Saved Number Redial or Hotline is in
use. Select a line and dial again.
to send a message. See
Press
Messages.
You have dialed your own number.
Notes
The maximum number of digits that Last Number Redial or
Saved Number Redial records is 24.
You can copy the telephone number from a Last Number
Redial or Saved Number Redial button onto an
button. Simply enter the Last Number Redial or Saved
Number Redial feature code when the
feature asks
you to enter a number.
Each telephone can save only one number at a time with
Saved Number Redial, not one number for each line.
Telephone features
.
Do Not Disturb 43
Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb
You can stop calls from ringing at your telephone.
1.
Enter the Do Not Disturb feature code
Only Priority Calls will ring at your telephone. A line button
will flash when you receive a call, but the call will not ring.
You can refuse to answer a particular call (including a
Priority Call).
1.
Enter the Do Not Disturb feature code
while your telephone is ringing.
([Feature]
Cancel Do Not Disturb
You can cancel Do Not Disturb.
1.
Enter the Cancel Do Not Disturb feature code
q ).
Displays
Your telephone is in Do Not Disturb
mode. To cancel Do Not Disturb,
press
Your telephone is receiving calls
Telephone features
44 Do Not Disturb
Notes
If you use Do Not Disturb while an external call is ringing, the
call will be forwarded to the Prime Telephone. may also be
answered by anyone whose telephone shares the line it is
on. Once you turn Do Not Disturb on, calls will be forwarded
to the Prime telephone only if there is no other telephone on
which the line appears. (The Delayed Ring Transfer feature
transfers all unanswered calls to the Prime telephone after a
set time.)
Telephone features
Feature Programming 45
Program a button
You can program a feature code onto a memory button.
1.
2.
3.
Enter the Feature Programming feature code
([Feature)
Select the button you want to program.
Enter the feature code you want to program onto the
button.
Erase a button
You can erase a memory button.
1.
2.
Enter the Erase Button feature code
This is actually the External
feature code.
Erase the button by programming it with no number.
You cannot erase Answer,
buttons.
Intercom, or line
Button Inquiry
You can check the function of any line, intercom, or memory
button on your
telephone.
1.
Enter the Button Inquiry feature code
2.
3.
Press the button you want to know about.
Read the display.
When you are labeling or replacing a button cap, activate
Button Inquiry so that you won’t accidentally activate a
feature.
Telephone features
46
Feature Programming
Displays
You will see some of the following displays while
programming, erasing, or checking buttons. A variety of
displays appear in Button Inquiry. See the display
for information applicable to these displays.
Press q
to move either right or left,
or press
or
to
a
number that is too long to fit on the
when
display. Press
you are finished.
The name of the feature assigned to
a button is displayed when you press
the button.
appears when there
is more information available. Press
or
for additional
information.
If you are checking a Speed Dial
button, enter the two-digit Speed Dial
code that you want to check.
To erase a button, press (Hold].
While entering a feature code you
can press
or
to quit
programming or
to clear.out
the characters you have entered.
The system will accept the entry as
soon as you enter a valid feature
code.
and enter the
Press
feature code you want to program
onto the button. Invalid codes cannot
be entered.
Telephone features
Feature Programming
47
You have programmed a button with
a feature that was already
programmed onto another button.
The feature has moved to the button
you just programmed. Its original
button is blank.
You cannot program an autodialer or
feature button while you are on a
call.
Press the button you want to check.
Press
or EXIT when you
are finistied.
and
To erase a button, press
To erase a button, press
press
You have tried to use Button Inquiry
while you were on a call or had calls
on hold.
Notes
When this book tells you to enter a feature code, you can do
so by pressing a memory button programmed with that
feature code. In some cases, pressing the button a second
time cancels the feature.
On the M7100 telephone, Button inquiry shows your internal
number followed by the function assigned to your single
memory button.
Any memory button not programmed as an external or
internal line, target line, Answer button, or
button, is available for programming features.
The following feature codes cannot be programmed onto a
memory button: Long Tones and any code beginning with q
except Language Choice and Contrast Adjustment.
Telephone features
48 Group Listen
Group Listen
You can let people in your office listen in on a call.
1.
2.
Enter the Group Listen feature code
([Feature]
You will hear the caller’s voice
through your telephone’s speaker.
Continue to speak to the caller through the telephone
receiver. The caller will not hear people in your office.
Cancel Group Listen
You can cancel Group Listen for the current call.
1.
Enter the Cancel Group Listen feature code
Group Listen is cancelled automatically when you hang up
the Group Listen call.
Displays
You may see one of these displays with Group Listen.
You have tried to use Group Listen
when you are not on a call.
r e cU eP i v e r
You have tried to use Group Listen
without picking up the receiver.
Notes
Keep the receiver away from the speaker, or you may hear
feedback. The higher the volume, the more the feedback.
Press the
button to prevent feedback when hanging up.
You can switch a Group Listen call to Handsfree by pressing
To switch back to Group Listen, enter the Group
Listen feature code again.
Telephone features
49
Make calls without lifting the receiver
You can make calls without lifting the receiver.
1.
2.
3.
Press
The telephone’s internal microphone
and speaker are automatically turned on.
Dial your call.
Speak normally.
Answer calls without lifting the receiver
You can answer calls without lifting the receiver.
2.
When your telephone rings, press
The
telephone’s internal microphone and speaker are
automatically turned on.
Speak normally.’
Mute Handsfree
You can switch off the telephone microphone so that you can
speak privately to someone in your office while you are on a
handsfree call.
1.
Press
The microphone is turned off.
You can turn the microphone back on again and continue
your handsfree call.
1.
Press
Regular call to Handsfree
You can turn any regular call into a handsfree call.
1.
Press
and hang up the receiver. .
Handsfree to regular call
You can turn a handsfree call into a regular call.
Lift the receiver.
Telephone features
50
Notes
The indicator next to
is solid when you are in
handsfree mode. It flashes when you mute the microphone.
Always tell the person you are speaking to that you are using
Handsfree, and let them know who else is listening to the
conversation.
Direct your voice toward the telephone. The closer you are to
the telephone, the easier it is for the microphone to transmit
your voice clearly to your listener.
Wait for your caller to finish speaking before you speak. The
microphone and speaker cannot both be on at once. Your
caller’s voice may be cut off if you both speak at the same
time. Noises such as a tapping pencil could be loud enough
to turn on your microphone and cut off your caller’s speech.
To prevent a possible echo, keep the area around your
telephone free of paper and other objects that might screen
your microphone. Turning down the microphone’s volume
also prevents echo.
(using
Handsfree calls may be heard in nearby offices. In
concept environments, use the receiver or a headset when
Handsfree communication is not necessary, or when you
need privacy during a call.
Place the telephone so that any unavoidable local noise
(such as an air conditioner) is behind it. This limits the
amount of disruptive background noise.
A Handsfree button is assigned to a telephone by the
System Coordinator in Administration programming.
The Handsfree/Mute feature is not available on
Telephones.
Telephone features
Hold 51
[Hold)
Put a call on hold
You can temporarily suspend a call.
1.
Press
.
When a call is on hold, its indicator flashes on all telephones
that have access to the line. The call can be retrieved from
any of these telephones.
Retrieve a held call
You can connect to a call on hold.
1.
Press the flashing line button of the held call.
Automatic Hold
You can switch from one call to another.
1.
Press the line button of the caller you want to speak to.
Your current caller is put on hold automatically.
Exclusive Hold
You can put a call on Exclusive Hold so that it can be
retrieved only at your telephone.
1.
Enter the Exclusive Hold feature code. The line
appears busy on all other telephones, and the call
cannot be picked up by anyone else in the office.
Listen on Hold
If you have been put on hold, you can hang up the receiver
while you wait for the other person to return.
1.
2.
3.
Press
Hang up the receiver.
Press the line button of the call. You may hear
indications from the far end that you are on hold (for
example, tones or music).
Telephone features
52 Hold
4.
When the person you were talking to returns you will
hear them through your telephone speaker. Lift the
receiver and talk.
Music/Tones/Silence on Hold
External callers can hear either music, a periodic tone, or
silence while they are on hold. In order for your caller to hear
music, your company must have installed a music source.
Warning
In accordance with U.S. copyright law, a license may be
required from the American Society of Composers,
Authors and Publishers, or a similar organization, if radio
or TV broadcasts are transmitted through the Music on
Hold feature of this telecommunication system.
Northern Telecom Inc. hereby disclaims any liability
arising out of the failure to obtain such a license.
Your Installer sets this feature to music, tones, or silence in
Configuration programming.
Notes
On the M7100 telephone,
alternates between two
lines; one active, one on hold. The M7100 cannot retrieve a
call placed on hold by another telephone.
If the Automatic Handsfree feature has been assigned to
your telephone, use the
feature instead of
Listen on Hold.
.
Telephone features
Host System Signaling 53
System Signaling
You can access Host systems, such as Private Branch
by using Host System
Exchanges (PBX) from
Signaling features (also known as End-to-End Signaling).
These features either send a special signal to the host
system or allow you to program delays required by host
systems onto external
buttons or Speed Dial codes.
Host system signaling codes
Link
If your
system is connected to a Private Branch
Exchange (PBX), you can use a Link signal to access
special features.
The Link signal can also be included as part of a longer
button or in a
stored sequence on an External
Speed Dial code. The Link symbol
uses two of the 24
spaces in a dialing sequence.
Pause
The Pause feature enters a 1.5 second delay in a dialing
sequence on an external line. This is often required for
signaling remote devices, such as answering machines, or
when reaching through to PBX features or Host systems.
You can obtain a Pause with one button press if you
program the feature code onto a memory button. More than
one Pause can be programmed onto an External
button.
The Pause symbol (6) uses one of the 24 spaces in a dialing
sequence.
Telephone features
54 Host System Signaling
For Pulse Dialing,
dialing sequence.
inserts a 1.5 second pause into the
Programmed Release
The Programmed Release feature performs the function of
the
button in a programmed dialing sequence. When the
system encounters Programmed Release in a programmed
dialing sequence, it stops dialing and hangs up the call. The
Programmed Release symbol
takes up two of the 24
spaces in a programmed dialing sequence.
Run/Stop
Run/Stop inserts a break point into a sequence of dialed
numbers or characters used for automatic dialing. This may
be necessary when you are connecting to a PBX or similar
Host system.
For example, you may call a company with an automated
attendant that instructs you to dial the extension number you
need. You can program the company number, a Run/Stop,
then the extension number on one External
button.
Press the autodialer once to dial the company number.
When you hear the automated attendant, press the
autodialer again to dial the extension number.
The Run/Stop symbol
uses one of the 24 spaces in ‘an
External
or Speed Dial sequence.
Timed Release
The Timed Release feature inserts a 1.5 second pause into
a sequence. You can use it in a dialing sequence for
accessing a remote system, such as a PBX. You can
dial it if you wish to release a call from your line but keep the
line for another call. You will return to dial tone.
takes up two of the spaces
The Timed Release symbol
in a programmed dialing sequence.
Telephone features
Host System Signaling
55
Displays
You may see this display while entering Host System
Signaling codes:
id
You have entered a code that can
only be used in a programmed
or Speed Dial sequence, not
on a call you dial directly.
Programmed Release and Run/Stop
are for use in programmed dialing
sequences only.
Notes
If your external telephone lines are programmed for Pulse
Dialing, you can temporarily switch to Tone Dialing by
pressing
after selecting the line. Tone Dialing lets your
telephone communicate with devices and services
that respond to tone signals, such as automatic
switchboards, and FAX or answering machines.
Telephone features
56 Line Pools
Use a line pool
A line pool is a group of external lines that can be shared by
many telephones. You can use a line in a line pool to make
an external call.
.
1.
If you have a free internal line, dial a line pool access
code on an internal line. (You do not need the Line
Pool feature code.) If you have no free internal line,
enter the line pool feature code
and
then a line pool access code.
Everyone in the office should have a list of the line pool
access codes for the line pools their telephones can use.
Displays
You may see some of the following displays while using a
line pool. For displays associated with dialing telephone
numbers, see the Dialing section.
Enter a line pool access code.
Access to the line pool you
requested is denied in Configuration
programming.
You have entered an invalid line pool
access code.
The line chosen by the system for
your line pool request became active
before connecting with your call.
Retry the line pool request.
There is no free button on which the
line pool line can appear.
Telephone features
Line Pools 57
You have tried to access your line
pool, but there are no lines in the
pool or all the lines are busy. Use
Ring Again or call again later.
Notes
You do not usually need to enter the Line Pool feature code
to use a line pool. Simply dial the line pool access code on
an internal line. If you have no free internal lines, you will
need to use the feature code to get a line pool. You will also
need it to program access to a specific line pool onto a
memory button.
You can program a button to access a line pool by
programming the Line Pool feature code and a line pool
access code onto a memory button in Feature programming
When all the lines in a Line Pool are busy,
the indicator for the Line Pool button turns on. The indicator
turns off when a line becomes available.
system can have 15 line pools, and a
Your
telephone can be programmed to access any number of
them.
You can use a line pool only to make external calls.
If no lines are available in the line pool, you can use Ring
Again at the busy tone. You will be notified when a line in the
line pool becomes available. See Ring Again.
Your Installer gives telephones access to line pools in
Configuration programming. Each line pool is assigned a line
pool access code in Configuration programming.
Telephone features
58
Line Redirection
Line Redirection
Redirect a line
Line Redirection lets you send your external calls to a
telephone outside the office, You may choose to redirect all
your external lines or only some of them.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Enter the Line Redirection feature code
([Feature]
Select the outgoing line to be used for redirected calls.
Enter the number to which calls will be redirected.
Select the lines to be redirected.
Cancel Line Redirection
You can cancel Line Redirection.
1.
2.
Enter the Cancel Line Redirection feature code.
Select the lines for which redirection is to be cancelled.
Related Features
Call forward
Note the differences between Line Redirection and Call
Forward. Call Forward forwards all calls that arrive at a
particular telephone to another telephone within the
system. Line redirection redirects only the lines you specify,
no matter which telephones they appear on, to a telephone
system. Line Redirection takes
outside the
precedence over Call Forward
Displays while redirecting lines
.
You will see some of the following displays while
programming Line Redirection. The displays you see while
cancelling redirection are listed under the heading Displays
while cancelling redirection, below. See the Dialing section
for displays that occur while entering telephone numbers.
Telephone features
Line Redirection
59
Continue entering digits. Press
or
(volume down) to
delete incorrect digits. Press
or
when you are finished.
You cannot perform line redirection
on an
telephone.
Enter the telephone number to which
you wish to redirect calls using one
of the following methods:
Press
button.
External
Enter an external telephone
number of no more than 24 digits.
or
Then, press
Press
or
if the line
you have chosen as the outgoing
line is a private network line that
does not require you to dial digits.
You have tried to program redirection
while someone else is programming
redirection. Only one person can
program line redirection at a time.
The line you are trying to use for
redirecting calls is for incoming calls
only. Choose an outgoing line.
The line you have selected is private
to another telephone. Only the owner
of a private line can redirect it.
or the
button to begin
redirection. Press REMOVE or
to
cancel a previous redirection.
You have one external
on your
telephone, but you need a second
line to perform line redirection.
Redirect your external line using a
line pool as the outgoing line.
Telephone features
60 Line Redirection
line
J
You are attempting to redirect a line
and the line you have chosen is the
outgoing line you have selected
destination. You cannot redirect a
line to itself. Select another line.
Enter a valid line pool access code.
This message appears when you
have successfully redirected line or
successfully cancelled redirection of
a line.
You have attempted to redirect a
line, but someone else has already
redirected that line. You may press
I DE or
to override the
previous redirection and redirect the
line as you wish.
The destination you have chosen for
line redirection is restricted.
Select the line that will be used to
redirect calls out of the system, using
one of the following methods:
Press an external line button.
Press an internal line button and
dial a line pool access code.
Press a line pool memory button.
Press an External
button.
Press the lines that are to be
redirected. To deselect a line, press
it again. You may
to
redirect all your lines.
Continue to press the lines that are
to be redirected. Press
or
(Hold]
you are finished.
Telephone features
Line Redirection 61
The line you are attempting to
redirect cannot be redirected
because the hardware does not .
support redirection.
Displays while cancelling redirection
You will see the following displays while cancelling Line
Redirection.
This line is redirected bv someone
else.
to
cancel redirection of the line.
Press the lines that are no longer to
be redirected. The lines light up as
you press them. Once you cancel
redirection for a line you cannot
restore it by pressing the line again.
You may press
to cancel
redirection for all your lines. When
you are finished, press
or
[Hold
.
Continue to press the lines that are
no longer to be redirected. Press
or
when you are finished.
Notes
You can answer the telephone if it rings while you are in the
middle of programming Line Redirection, but none of the
call handling features will be available until the
feature to
feature times out. If you need to use a
process the call, you must quit Line Redirection programing
by pressing the [Feature] button. Do not press
or you
will disconnect the call you are trying to process.
Telephone features
Line Redirection
While you are programming Line Redirection you will not
receive any indication of calls that do not actually ring at your
telephone.
The system does not check that the number you give for
Line Redirection is a valid one. If you redirect to an invalid
number, redirection will fail. Using an autodialer to enter the
redirection number helps avoid this possibility. An autodialer
.
used for line redirection must have a specific line
programmed onto it.
If you use the
button to redirect all your lines, it is
important that you wait until all the lines on your telephone
or
If you press
light up before pressing
or
before all the lines light up, those lines not lit
will not be redirected.
Be aware of the consequences of redirecting your lines. If
you redirect your target line to your home, for instance, and
someone calls you from home, they will get a busy signal
when the system tries to call the telephone they are using.
Companies with offices in different time zones should avoid
situations in which the lines from the eastern office are
redirected to the west and those from the west are redirected
to the east. This could result in a costly long distance
redirection loop.
The system can be set up so that redirected calls give a brief
ring on telephones in the
system as they are
redirected. These calls cannot be answered within the
system until you cancel redirection.
The line chosen for redirecting calls on other lines can still be
used normally when it is not busy on a redirected call. To
avoid redirection failing because the chosen line is in use,
choose a line pool with several lines in it.
Telephone features
Long Tones 63
bong Tones
Use long tones
The Long Tones feature lets you control the length of a tone
so that you can signal devices such as Fax or answering
machines which require tones longer than the standard 120
milliseconds.
1.
2.
Enter the Long Tones feature code
([Feature]
Press the dial pad buttons to produce the appropriate
tones. Each tone will sound for as long as you hold
down the button.
Displays
You will see some of the following displays while using Long
Tones.
At the appropriate time, press any
dial pad button. Hold each button
down for as long as necessary. You
can cancel Long Tones by pressing
[Feature] or
Make call
You have tried to use Long Tones
when you are not on a call.
The person you are calling has
cancelling your
pressed
long tones.
Notes
Long Tones can be used on any call except a conference
call. You can use internal lines of the
system to
activate a device connected to an Analog Terminal Adapter
in another area of your office; or external lines to
access devices outside the
system.
Telephone features
64
Message
essage
Send a message
You can leave a message on the display of another
telephone in your
system.
1.
Enter the Message feature code
The message sent reads
YOU.
Cancel a sent message
You can cancel a message that you have sent to someone.
1.
Enter the Cancel a sent message feature code.
Reply to a message
You can call the person who sent you a message.
1.
Enter the Reply to Message feature code
The system calls the person who
sent the message.
On a telephone with a two line display you can view your
messages and decide if you want to reply to them.
1.
Enter the Reply to Message feature code
2.
Review your messages, reply to them, or erase them.
Show your sent messages
[Feature]
You can show and scan the messages you have sent.
1.
2.
Enter the Message feature code ([Feature
Press SHOW to display your first sent message.
Erase a waiting message
You can erase a message you have received.
1.
Enter the Erase Message feature code
([Feature]
Telephone features
Message 65
Displays
You will see some of the following displays while sending
messages.
When reviewing the messages you
have sent, press NEXT to view the
to erase the
next message or
message on the display.
This is the
message in the list.
Press NEXT to see the next
to reply to
message. Press
to
the message. Press
erase the message.
You have tried to send a message to
a
Analog Terminal Adapter.
Analog Terminal
The
Adapter does not have a display so it
cannot show a message.
Can’t
Cancel denied
I
You have entered an invalid number
when attempting to cancel a
message.
Dial the internal number to which you
sent the message you wish to
cancel.
Message
You have tried to send a message to
an invalid internal number or to a
telephone that is out of service.
You have a message waiting. Press
to review the message or enter
t o
r e p l y .
The SHOW display
only if you have outstanding
messages. Press SHOW to review or
erase messages you have sent.
Press
to send a new message.
Telephone features
66
Message
Enter the internal number of the
telephone to which you would like to
send a message.
You have several messages waiting.
Press
to review the messages
or t o r e p l y t o t h e
first message.
free
You have no line button free with
.
which to reply to a message.
You don’t have any messages to
cancel or there are no messages to
scan through.
You are trying to send a message to
a telephone whose message waiting
list is full.
list full
You have tried to send a message
but your telephone’s list of sent
messages is full. Cancel one of the
messages you have sent, if possible,
or wait until you have received a
reply to one of those messages.
You can send up to four messages to different telephones.
Each telephone, including the Prime telephone, can receive
up to four messages from different telephones, but only one
message from any one telephone. Direct Dial telephones
and Central Answering Positions (CAPS) can receive up to
four messages, but can send up to 30 messages.
Any message can be cancelled either by the person who
.
sent it or by the person who received it.
If your reply to a message is forwarded or is answered at
another telephone using the Call Pickup feature, the
message remains on your telephone until you cancel it or
successfully contact the telephone that sent the message.
Telephone features
Telephones 67
This section covers the basic features of your
telephone and optional equipment that may be attached to it.
See the Components chapter for the differences between
telephone models.
Buttons
Feature button
You use the Feature button to invoke
features section.
the Using
features. See
Hold button
You use the Hold button to put calls on hold. See the Hold
display button on
section. It is also used in place of the
telephones with single line displays.
Memory buttons
Memory buttons are the buttons with indicators on the
M7208, M7310, and M7324 telephones, and the dual buttons
without indicators on the
There is also a single
memory button, without an indicator, -on the
Memory
buttons can be used for any of the purposes listed below,
except that lines and Answer buttons must appear on
buttons with indicators.
Answer buttons
You can use an Answer button to monitor calls on another
person’s telephone. All calls to the monitored telephone
appear on the Answer button. Such calls may also
at the
telephone with the Answer button, depending on how the
system is configured. Answer buttons are most useful for a
secretary who monitors incoming calls for one or several
managers.
Telephone features
68
Telephones
If more than one call is ringing at the manager’s telephone,
the first call appears on the secretary’s Answer button. Any
subsequent calls appear on Intercom buttons if they are
available.
More than one secretary may have an Answer button for a
single manager. This allows two or more secretaries to
handle calls for a busy manager.
Similarly, one person can handle calls for up to four other
people, using separate Answer buttons for each person.
A secretary’s telephone should have a memory button with
an indicator programmed as the Internal
button for
the manager’s telephone. This allows the secretary to call
the manager and to deal efficiently with incoming calls.
You cannot make calls using Answer buttons.
buttons
buttons let you dial numbers by pressing a single
button. See the
section.
Line buttons
You have one line button for each line assigned to your
telephone. You press the line button to select the line you
want to answer or use to make a call. Having several line
buttons allows you immediate access to more than one line
so you can handle and monitor calls easily. The
does
not have line buttons and can have a maximum of two lines.
You can switch between its two lines, one active and one on
hold, by pressing
.
Programmed Feature Buttons
Programmed feature buttons allow you to invoke
features by pressing a single button. See the Feature
Programming section.
Telephone features
Telephones 69
Release button
cRls l
Pressing
ends a call. You do not have to put the receiver
down.
also ends feature programming.
to end a feature
While you are on a call, do not press
you are using (such as Show Message). If you do, you will
disconnect the call. Use [Feature] instead.
Volume Bar
The Volume Bar controls the volume of the receiver,
telephone ring, Handsfree speaker, headset and Background
Music. Press either end of the volume bar
to
adjust the volume.
Headset
A headset lets you keep both hands free while you are on a
call without others overhearing your telephone
conversations.
If you plug a headset into your telephone while you are on a
call, your telephone’s microphone and speaker (or your
receiver if you are on a regular call) are turned off and your
headset microphone and earpiece are turned on.
You must have the Handsfree/Mute feature assigned to your
telephone if you wish to use a headset.
While you are using the headset, the receiver and the switch
in the telephone cradle do not work.
A headset cannot be used on an
Telephone.
Using a headset
While on a call using the headset, press
your headset on and off.
to turn
Telephone features
70
Telephones
To answer a call, press
To adjust the volume, press the appropriate side of the
volume bar
To change to a Handsfree call while you are on a call using
your headset, unplug your headset. Your telephone’s
microphone and speaker turn on and the call becomes a
Handsfree call. (It is a good idea to put the call on hold while
you do this.)
You may see this prompt when you try to use a headset.
You are attempting to use a headset,
but Handsfree/Mute is not
programmed for your telephone. If
you are not using a headset, you
have accidentally plugged your
telephone receiver into the headset
outlet on the bottom of the
telephone.
Hearing Aid Compatibility
The receivers on all
telephones are compatible with
hearing aids as defined in the FCC rules, Part 68, section
68.316.
Note: Not all hearing aids are optimized for use with a
telephone.
Wall Mounting
Most
telephones can be mounted on a wail.
the Installer or Service Representative if you wish to have
any telephones in your system wall-mounted.
Telephone features
Page
Make a page announcement
You can make announcements over the
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
system.
Enter the Page feature code
Choose a page type.
If necessary, choose a zone.
Make your announcement.
Press
Page types are :
through the telephone speakers (Internal Page)
through an external speaker (External Page)
both internal and External (Combined Page)
Paging shortcuts
Instead of entering the Page feature code followed by the
page type, you can enter the following shortcut codes.
and zone (0 to 6)
Internal
External
[Feature]
(code 2 has no zones)
Combined
[Feature]
and zone (0 to 6)
Related Features
Voice Call
You can make an announcement to one person by placing a
voice call to their telephone. See Voice Call.
Displays
You will see some of these displays while making a Page
announcement.
Telephone features
72 Page
Enter the desired zone number (O-6)
or press
to page to all zones. (0
equals all zones.)
You have entered a page zone code
that is not between 0 and 6.
Select the type of page you want by
pressing:
or SETS
Internal Page
or
External Page
Combined Page
or B O T H
timeout
The time allotted for paging has
expired.
The prompt appears while you are
paging and shows the page zone
you have chosen. Press
or
when you are finished paging.
A page is already being made in the
Page Zone you have requested.
Notes
Page zone 0 equals all zones.
When making an announcement using External Page or
Combined Page, the Long Tones feature is automatically
activated for the external paging system only. This allows
you to control optional equipment with the Long Tones
feature.
Each
telephone can be assigned to one of six Page
Zones, or to none, in Administration programming.
Make sure that everyone who needs to make page
announcements has a list showing which telephones are in
which page zones.
Telephone features
Priority Call 73
Call
If you get a busy signal when you call someone in your
office, you can interrupt them. Use this feature for urgent
calls only.
1.
2.
Enter the Priority Call feature code
Wait for a connection, then speak.
A person who receives a Priority Call while they are on
another call has eight seconds to accept or reject the call. If
the person does nothing, the Priority Call feature puts their
active call on Exclusive Hold and connects your call.
Displays
You will see some of these displays while making a Priority
Call.
You tried to place a Priority Call to
another
telephone. The
person you called has blocked your
call. Try to call the person later.
You have tried to make a Priority
Call, but this feature has not been
assigned to your telephone.
You have attempted to use the
Priority Call feature with no ringing or
busy tone on the line. Use Priority
Call only when you hear ringing or a
busy signal.
The party you are calling has eight
seconds to decide whether to accept
or reject your Priority Call.
denied
The telephone you are calling is
already in Priority Call or is unable
to receive Priority Calls.
Telephone features
74 Priority Call
Notes
You can-make a Priority Call only while your telephone
display shows one of the following prompts:
4321
PRIORITY
LRTER
If Call Forward is active at the telephone you are trying to
reach, your call will be forwarded.
If the telephone receiving the Priority Call is in a conference
call, the other two parties are automatically put on hold when
the Priority Call is accepted.
The System Coordinator gives a telephone permission to
make priority calls in Administration programming.
Telephone features
Service Modes 75
Service Modes
Switch to a service mode
You can use Service Modes to make your
system
behave differently at different times of day. For instance, all
incoming external calls can be directed to a security guard’s
telephone during the night, or calls to one receptionist can be
directed to another receptionist during lunch.
1.
2.
Enter the Service Modes feature code
([Feature]
on a Control telephone. (See Special
telephones for information on Control telephones.)
Select the service mode you want.
Cancel Service Modes
You can return to normal operation or cancel the manual
override of an automatic mode. You cannot cancel an
automatic mode.
Enter the Cancel Service Modes feature code.
Displays
You will see some of the following displays when selecting a
service mode.
The name of the current service
mode (“Night Service”, in this case)
is displayed. Press q
or NEXT to
see other service mode options.
Press [Hold] or
to select the
desired Mode.
You are trying to activate a service
mode from a telephone that is not a
Control telephone or Direct Dial
telephone, or else all service modes
are disabled in Administration
programming.
Telephone features
76
Service Modes
Notes
A service mode allows you to change which lines ring at
which telephone, to activate or deactivate the auxiliary ringer
for certain lines, and to have Direct-Dial calls ring at the
Extra-Dial telephone. Service modes can be programmed to
begin automatically at certain times or they can be turned on
and off at the control telephone. The System Coordinator
sets up service modes in Administration programming.
Automatic service modes are indicated by an asterisk
before the name of the service mode on the display. You can
neither manually activate nor cancel automatic service
modes, although you can override them with manual modes.
The Control telephone can override automatic service modes
at any time by entering the Service Modes feature code
and selecting a different service mode;
this override will remain in effect until it is cancelled by
means of (Feature]
Note that if you selected a
the next automatic service
service mode with an asterisk
mode will come into effect at the programmed time.
Direct dial calls to a Direct-dial telephone will ring at the
(designated in Administration
Extra-dial
programming) only when the Service Modes feature code
([Feature]
is entered at that Direct-dial telephone.
Note that only the Extra-dial telephone will be activated, not
the actual service mode (unless that Direct-dial telephone is
also a Control telephone).
provides three service modes named “Night”,
“Lunch”, and “Evening”. You can change these names to suit
yourself. In addition, there is normal service when no service
modes are active.
Telephone features
Special Telephones 77
Telephones
You can assign several special functions to the telephones in
system. Except where noted, you do not need
your
special hardware. A special function is assigned to a
telephone either by your Installer in Configuration
programming or by the System Coordinator in Administration
programming.
Alarm telephone
An Alarm telephone is a
telephone with a two line
display
or M7324) that your Installer has assigned to
display Norstar’s system alarm codes, should they occur.
If an alarm message appears on the Alarm telephone’s
display, follow the instructions below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Record the alarm number.
Press T I M E and record the time displayed.
Call your Installer or Service Representative and report
the alarm code.
After speaking to your Installer or Service
Representative, press
This is an example of an alarm display.
Report this alarm and the time it
occurred to your Installer or service
representative.
Telephone features
78 Special Telephones
Central Answering Position
A Central Answering Position (CAP) is a
M7324
Telephone that your installer has defined as a CAP in
Configuration programming. You can connect one or two
CAP modules to the CAP to increase the number of
in a
lines it can handle. There can be from one to five
system. It is best if the CAP is also the Prime
telephone and Direct-Dial telephone for the lines and
telephones it serves.
The CAP module displays the busy/not busy status of the
telephones in your system by using the triangular indicators
beside Internal Autodial, Programmed Feature or line
buttons. A CAP can support 120 external lines.
You can send up to 30 messages from a CAP.
For more information, see the
Position User Card.
Central Answering
Control telephone
The Control telephone lets you place the external lines for
which it has responsibility into and out of Service Modes.
See Service Modes.
Direct-Dial
You can dial a Direct-Dial telephone with a single digit. The
Direct-Dial telephone is usually in a central location, such as
a receptionist’s or secretary’s desk. It is usually a Prime
telephone and a Central Answering Position (CAP).
There may be up to five Direct-Dial telephones in your
system, but each telephone in the system is assigned to a
single Direct-Dial telephone. There is a single Direct-Dial
digit for the whole system that lets each telephone call its
assigned Direct-Dial telephone.
Telephone features
Special Telephones 79
Each
Direct-Dial telephone can send up to 30
messages and each can invoke Service Modes to activate‘
the Extra-Dial telephone.
Your installer sets up Direct-Dial telephones in Configuration
programming. The System Coordinator assigns telephones
to Direct-Dial telephones in Administration programming.
Emergency telephone
The emergency telephone is a single-line telephone (not a
telephone) that functions independently of the
system. You can use the emergency telephone
when your
system is not working.
Emergency Transfer/Power Failure Cut-through provides
basic telephone service on external line 001 through an
Emergency Telephone if the power fails or if a system error
occurs.
The emergency telephone is usually located near the Key
Service Unit (KSU). Each KSU can support two Emergency
telephones, and each Trunk Module can support one
additional Emergency telephone.
Extra-Dial telephone
In Service Modes, a second telephone can be assigned to
ring on calls made to a Direct-Dial telephone. There may be
one Extra-Dial telephone for each Direct-Dial telephone, and
it may be a different telephone in each Service Mode.
Hotline telephone
You can call a programmed internal or external telephone
number simply by picking up the receiver of the Hotline
telephone (or by pressing
Telephone features
80 Special Telephones
A Hotline telephone can be set up to dial an operator or an
emergency number. You should put a notice by the Hotline
telephone to let people know which number will be dialed
when they lift the receiver.
If the Hotline telephone is set up to dial an external number
using the prime line, there must be an external prime line
assigned to the telephone. If not, the Hotline call will fail.
The System Coordinator sets up the Hotline telephone, the
telephone number it dials, and the line on which that number
is dialed, in Administration programming.
To bypass a Hotline
.
Press a line button, or use the Pre-Dial or Automatic Dial
feature before you pick up the receiver or press
The following displays may occur at a Hotline telephone.
The line assigned to the Hotline is in
use. Make the call using normal
methods or wait until the Hotline line
is free.
The Hotline has been set up to dial
an external number on a prime line
but the Hotline telephone does not
have a prime line. This must be
corrected in Configuration or
Administration programming.
Telephone features
Special Telephones 81
The Hotline has been set up to dial
an external number on a prime line
but the Hotline telephone has an
internal prime line and no access to
line pools. This must be corrected in
Configuration or Administration
programming.
This message may also appear if the
line pool assigned to the telephone is
busy.
Prime telephone
Each line in a
system can have a telephone
assigned to it as a Prime telephone. Calls not answered at
their normal destinations are transferred to the Prime
telephone. The Prime telephone is usually the telephone on
the receptionist’s desk and it is often the Control telephone
and a Central Answering Position as well. A Prime telephone
is assigned to a line in Configuration programming.
See the Answering the telephone section for the displays
that may occur at a Prime telephone.
Telephone features
82 Speed Dial
Speed Dial
Make a speed dial call
[Feature) q
[Feature)
You can quickly dial external telephone numbers that have
been programmed onto speed dial codes.
1.
2.
Enter the Speed Dial feature code
Enter the appropriate two-digit Speed Dial code.
supports two types of Speed Dial codes, Personal
and System. System Speed Dial codes are from 01 to 70.
The System Administrator can assign numbers to System
Speed Dial codes for the entire system in Administration
programming. Personal Speed Dial codes are from 71 to 94
and may have different numbers assigned to them on each
telephone. Users can program their own Personal Speed
Dial numbers.
Program Personal Speed Dial
You can add or change a Personal Speed Dial number on
your telephone.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Enter the Personal Speed Dial programming feature
code
Enter the code onto which you want to program a
number.
If you want to include a line selection for this number,
select the line or line pool.
Enter the number you want to program.
Displays
You will see some of these prompts while using or
programming Speed Dial.
Telephone features
Speed Dial 83
Continue entering the number you
wish to program. You can change
the number by pressing the left side
of the volume bar or by pressing
When you are finished, press
[Hold) or
You have tried to program a
Personal Speed Dial number while
someone else on the system’ is in
Configuration or Administration
programming.
full
You have tried to enter a new
personal speed dial number, but the
memory for these numbers in your
system is full.
Enter a two-digit code between 71
and 94 for the personal speed dial
number you want to program.
Enter
Enter the telephone number you
OK wish to program exactly as you
would if you were dialing it normally.
When you are finished, press
Enter
WIT
You have entered a code outside the
code range (01-94).
Invalid
There is no number stored on the
speed dial code you have dialed.
and
If you want to program a line or line
pool selection for this speed dial,
select the line or line pool.
Otherwise, enter the telephone
number you wish to progt-am exactly
as you would if you were dialing it
normally. When you are finished,
press [Hold].
Telephone features
84 Speed Dial
a n d
If you want to program a line or line
pool selection for this speed dial,
select the line or line pool.
Otherwise, enter the telephone
number you wish to program exactly
as you would if you were dialing it
normally. When you are finished,
press [Hold] or
The line associated with your speed
dialer is busy or there is no line
associated with it. Select a free
external line or line pool and enter
the Speed Dial feature code again.
Enter a two-digit Speed Dial code
(01-94). You must enter the zero for
codes 01 to 09.
Notes
There is no difference between using Personal Speed Dial
and using System Speed Dial. They differ only in how you
program them.
Speed Dial numbers may include line choices and Host
System Signaling codes.
Speed Dial numbers are subject to the same Class of
Service as regularly dialed numbers. System speed dial
numbers can be programmed to bypass dialing restrictions.
Normally, speed dial numbers are shown on the display
while they are being dialed. System speed dial numbers may
be programmed to show a speed dial name instead of the
number, keeping the actual number confidential.
Telephone features
System features
85
System features
The following features are available for the whole
system.
Accidental Disconnect Protection
If you accidentally drop the receiver back into the telephone
cradle while answering a call, you can quickly retrieve the
call.
Pick up the receiver again or press
connected to your call.
1.
You are
Automatic telephone relocation
If Automatic telephone relocation is enabled, you can move
your telephone from one
jack to another without it
losing any of its custom programming. Your Installer enables
Automatic telephone relocation in Configuration
programming.
Background Music
You can listen to music through your telephone speaker.
1.
Enter the Background Music feature code.
Warning
In accordance with U.S. copyright law, a license may be
required from the American Society of Composers,
Authors and Publishers or a similar organization if radio or
TV broadcasts are transmitted through the Background
Music feature of this telecommunication system.
Northern Telecom Inc. hereby disclaims any liability
arising out of the failure to obtain such a license.
The music stops automatically if you make or answer a call.
Telephone features
86 System features
Your Installer makes this feature available to all telephones
in Configuration programming. You will need supply a
music source, such as a radio, attached to your KSU (Key
Service Unit.)
Cancel Background Music
You can cancel Background Music.
1.
Enter the Cancel Background Music feature code.
Class of Service
The Class of Service for a call consists of all the
features and lines available to you for that call. This is
determined by the features assigned to the telephone in
Administration programming, including all Dialing Filters and
Remote Access Packages.
Users who need to dial numbers not permitted by the Class
of Service of the line or telephone that they are using, can
switch to a different Class of Service by entering a Class of
Service Password. Remote users can change the set of
features available to them by entering the
DN
followed by a Class of Service password. See Class of
Service Password.
Internal numbers
Each telephone in the
system has its own internal
number. The length of internal numbers in your system may
be from 2 tc 7 digits. All numbers in your system are the
same length. Your Installer sets the length of internal
numbers (also called the DN length) in Configuration
programming.
.
To find out your internal number, use the Button Inquiry
feature
on an internal line button. On the
telephone, Button inquiry shows your internal number
followed by the function assigned to your single memory
button.
Telephone features
.
System features 87
Lines
The following features and characteristics are associated
with the use of lines.
Disconnect
.
Supervision
When Disconnect Supervision is assigned to a line, the
system monitors it to detect if an external caller
hangs up. This allows the system to release the line for other
uses. Your installer assigns disconnect supervision to lines
in Configuration programming. Disconnect supervision can
be turned on and off only on Loop start trunks. E&M and DID
trunks are always disconnect supervised.
Line appearance
Any of the lines in your system may appear at any of your
telephones. Your Installer assigns lines to telephones in
Configuration programming.
Usually, only the lines that are appropriate for a particular
person appear at that person’s telephone. When a line is
assigned to a telephone it is automatically given a line button
on that telephone, if a button is available. The M7100
telephone has no line buttons for its lines.
Normally, you cannot answer a call that is ringing on a line
that does not appear on your telephone. The following
features will allow you to pick up such a call: Call Pickup,
Call Park, and Transfer.
Hung lines
A line that has been redirected using Line Redirection may
remain busy after a call is over. If this happens, the outgoing
line for the redirection will also remain busy. These are hung
lines and you must clear them.
Telephone features
88 System features
Note that a line indicator that has been solid for a long time
is the only real indication that a line is hung. However, the
solid line indicator may also indicate a genuine call in
progress. Make resonably sure that the line is indeed hung
before clearing it or you may cut off a real conversation.
You can clear a hung line only at the telephone that was
used to redirect the line.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select Button Inquiry ([Feature]
at the
telephone that was used to redirect the line.
Press the button of the redirected line.
Press
or q .
Press
or
The hung line is cleared.
Clearing the redirected line clears the outgoing line for the
redirection as well.
Line Pools
A line pool allows each telephone access to external lines
from a group (or “pool”) of external lines. You can access
such lines by pressing an Intercom button and entering a line
pool access code or by pressing a memory button
programmed with the line pool feature code.
Private lines
A private line is exclusive to a particular telephone. Calls that
are put on hold or left unanswered on a private line cannot
be picked up at any telephone except the Prime telephone.
Prime line
Your telephone can be programmed to select an internal or
external line or a line pool automatically whenever you lift the
receiver or press
This is your Prime line.
Telephone features
System features 89
Ringing Line Preference
Each telephone in the
system can be programmed-to
ring or remain silent for incoming calls on any external lines
that appear on the telephone.
For example, a telephone may have buttons assigned for
lines 1 to 3, but have only lines 1 and 2 programmed to ring.
An incoming call on any of the three lines causes a line
button indicator to flash, and the telephone can be
to
answer the call. This is especially useful for people who
monitor other telephone lines, but want only their own lines
to actually ring.
If a telephone has an external line as a prime line, that line is
usually made to ring.
Target line
A target line is used to route a call dialed with a particular
number to a particular telephone or group of telephones. A
target line can be used for incoming calls only. A single trunk
may provide connections to several different target lines.
This allows each person or department in the office to have
their own number without having as many trunks on the
system as there are people in the office.
Overflow Call Routing
If a call comes in for a target line that is busy,
routes
the call to the Prime telephone for that target line. If there is
no Prime telephone assigned to the target line or if a call
cannot be directed to a target line, the call will go to the
Prime telephone for the incoming trunk.
.
System Speed Dial
Speed dial codes 01 to 70 are the same for the entire
system. See the Speed Dial section for details.
Telephone features
90 Time features
e features
The Time features let you check the present time and how
long you have spent on a call.
Call Duration Timer
You can see how long you spent on your last call or how
long you have been on your present call.
1.
2.
Enter the Call Duration Timer feature code.
Read the display.
Show Time
You can see the present date and time while you are on a
call.
1.
2.
Enter the Show Time feature code.
Read the display.
Displays
One of the following displays will occur when you use a Time
feature.
call first
432 1 82: 47
9
Telephone features
You have not made a call since your
telephone’s clock was last reset.
The display shows the last call you
made, or the current call, and the
total elapsed time in minutes and
seconds.
I The display shows the present time.
Transfer 91
Transfer a call
You can transfer a call to another person in your office.
1.
2.
Enter the Transfer feature code
Dial the number of the person to whom you want to
transfer the call.
To transfer a call to someone outside your office, see
Unsupervised Conference below.
Transfer with Announcement
You can consult a co-worker before transferring a call. This
type of Transfer can only be used on the M7324 and M7310
telephones.
1.
2.
Enter the Transfer feature code.
Press
.
3.
Enter the number of the co-worker to whom you are
transferring the call. You can announce the transfer
when your co-worker answers.
Press JOIN.
4.
Unsupervised Conference
You can use the Unsupervised Conference feature to
connect yourself and two other people, then drop out of the
conference leaving the other two to talk to each other. If
both parties are external, certain restrictions apply. See
Notes below.
2.
Establish a Conference call as described in
Conference.
Enter the Transfer feature code ([Feature)
.
If you are unable to establish an unsupervised conference,
you can put the conference on hold. See the Conference
section.
Telephone features
92 Transfer
Transfer using Hold
Call the person you want to transfer the call to and tell them
there is a call on hold for them. Do not enter the Transfer
feature code. To accept the call, your co-worker presses the
line button with the flashing indicator.
Transfer using Hold can only be used to transfer an external
call to another telephone that has a button for the line that
the external call is on.
An M7100 telephone can transfer a call using Hold but it
cannot receive a call transferred in this way.
Displays
You will see some of the following displays while transferring
calls.
The person to whom you tried to
transfer a call is on another call.
Press
or the flashing line
button to reconnect to the call. On
the
telephone, lift the
receiver.
busy
The person to whom you tried to
transfer a call has Do Not Disturb
active on their telephone. Press
or the flashing line button
to reconnect to the call. On the
telephone, lift the receiver.
U
(432 1 n o
Telephone features
P
The internal caller you were trying to
transfer hung up before the transfer
.
was complete.
The person to whom you tried to
transfer a
did not-answer. Press
or the flashing line button
to reconnect to the call. On the
telephone, lift the receiver.
Transfer 93
Press JOIN to transfer the call from
telephone 4321 to telephone 4322.
Dial the internal telephone number of
the person to whom you want to
transfer the call. If you are already
connected to that person, press the
line button of their call.
Press JOIN to connect the two
calls. Press
to reconnect to
the person you were trying to
transfer. If you are not reconnected,
press
and then press the line
button of the call on hold.
Either wait for the telephone to be
answered, or press LRTER to use the
Ring Again or Message features, or
press PRI
to make a priority
call.
U P
call first
The external caller you were trying to
transfer has hung up before the
transfer was complete.
Press JOIN to transfer the call on
line 001 to telephone 4321.
You have tried to use the Transfer
feature when you have no call to
transfer.
The telephone to which you are
trying to transfer a call is out of
service. Press
or the
flashing line button to reconnect to
the call. On the M7100 telephone, lift
the receiver.
.
The telephone to which you are
trying to transfer a call is out of
se
Telephone features
94 Transfer
Your transfer cannot be completed
for one of these reasons:
All the internal resources needed
to perform a transfer are in use.
Try again later.
You have tried to transfer an
external call to another external
party. Try establishing an
Unsupervised Conference,
instead.
An Unsupervised Conference is
not possible for your call. See
Notes below.
if you wish to
Press
announce the call. Otherwise enter
the internal number of the person
you want to transfer the call to.
Notes
You can establish an Unsupervised Conference whether the
system.
other two people are inside or outside the
However, if both of the other people are outside the system
there are some restrictions: At least one of the outside
callers must have called you and that call must be on a
disconnect supervised line.
You may discover that you can establish an Unsupervised
Conference between two internal calls or one internal and
one external call, simply by hanging up or pressing
This
is not a good habit to get into, because if you do it when you
have two external calls, you will drop the calls.
Telephone features
Using
Using
remotely 95
remotely
You can use the lines, and some of the features, of a
system from outside that system. You can do this over the
public telephone network when you are away from the office,
or you can call into a
system in another office from
your own
system over a private network.
.
The exact facilities available to you through Remote Access
will vary depending on how your system is set up. The
features that can be made available to remote users
are: access to lines, access to line pools, and remote paging.
Examples
A salesman who spends most of his time on the road needs
to make long distance calls to the European office. Your
system has a leased line to Europe with reduced
transatlantic charges. You provide that salesman with a
Class of Service password that gives access to the
transatlantic line. The salesman can then telephone into the
system from a client’s site, enter his Class of Service
password, and use the leased transatlantic line to make his
calls.
The manager of one of your branch offices also needs to talk
to the European office. She uses a private network line
between her branch office and the head office to access the
head office’s
system and use its transatlantic lines.
Accessing
remotely
.
Over the public network
You can use
network.
remotely over the public telephone
Telephone features
96 Using
remotely
1.
2.
3.
Dial the
system’s remote access number.
If you hear stuttered dial tone, enter a COS password.
Wait for system dial tone.
Over a private network
You can access
line.
.
1.
2.
3.
4.
remotely using a private network
Select the private network line or the line pool that
contains private network lines.
Dial the number, if any, needed to access the remote
system.
If you hear stuttered dial tone, enter a COS password.
Wait for system dial tone.
Using
remotely
Once connected to a remote system you can do any one of
the following:
enter the
DN followed by a COS password to
change your Class of Service.
dial the number of someone on the remote
system.
dial a line pool access code and make an external call.
enter a paging feature code (60 through 63). Use q
instead of [Feature) when entering the feature codes.
See Page.
Tones you may hear
Busy tone
Telephone features
The number you dialed on the
system is busy. Your call will
be disconnected after five seconds.
Using
system dial
t o n e
remotely 97
You may:
enter the
DN followed by a
COS password to change your
Class of Service.
dial the number of someone on
system.
the remote
dial a line pool access code and
.
make an external call.
enter a paging feature code (60
through 63) using
instead of
See Page.
Fast busy tone
You have done one of the following:
entered an incorrect COS
password. Your call will be
disconnected after five seconds.
taken too long while entering a
COS password. Your call will be
disconnected after five seconds.
tried to use a line pool or feature
not permitted by your Class of
Service. You will hear system dial
tone again after five seconds.
dialed a number in the
system which does not exist.
Your call will be disconnected
after five seconds.
Stuttered dial tone
Enter your COS password on the dial
pad of your telephone.
Controlling access to your
system
It is important that you maintain the security of your
system by limiting access to authorized users and limiting
those users to just those features they need. Remember that
a remote user can make long distance calls that will be
charged to your company and can make page
announcements in your office.
Telephone features
98 Using
remotely
Direct inward System Access
You can control access to your
system with Direct
Inward System Access (DISA). If you set up the trunk used
for remote access for auto-answer with
callers will
hear stuttered dial tone and must enter a Class of Service
password before they are allowed into the system. Access to
your
system from the public telephone network
should always be controlled with DISA.
If you are setting up access to your system from another
system over a private network, you may not need
DISA. If you set up your E&M trunk to answer without DISA,
callers from remote
systems will receive system dial
tone immediately.
facility has a number (the
DN) which an
Your
external caller can dial when they hear system dial tone to
activate
and enter a Class of Service password to
change to a different Class of Service.
Class of Service
You can control which feature a remote user can access
through the Class of Service for the call. The Class of
Service of a Remote Access call is determined either by the
Class of Service password entered when the system
answers with
or by the Class of Service associated
with the trunk when the system answers without DISA.
After having accessed the system, a remote user can
change the Class of Service for the call by dialing the
DN followed by a Class of Service password.
Maintaining security
To maintain the security of your system, the following
practices are recommended:
Telephone features
.
Using
remotely 99
Warn anyone to whom you give the remote access
number to keep it confidential.
Change Class of Service passwords often.
Warn anyone to whom you give a Class of Service
password to remember it and not to write it down.
Remove the Class of Service password of anyone who
leaves your company.
Notes
Remote Access is possible only on DID and E&M trunks,
and Loop start trunks that are set to auto-answer.
To use the system remotely, the telephone you are using to
call the system must use tone dialing.
If the Loop start trunk used for Remote Access is set to
unsupervised mode, auto-answer will not function and the
caller will hear ringing instead of stuttered or system dial
tone.
If you use one
system to call remotely into another
system, you can use the available features of the
remote
system by pressing q
followed by the
feature code. If you
you will invoke the
features of the local system, not the remote one.
Your Installer sets trunks to be auto-answer, with or without
are set in
DISA, in Configuration programming.
Configuration programming. The System Coordinator sets up
Classes of Service and Class of Service passwords in
Administration programming.
Telephone features
100 Voice Call
ice
Make a voice call
You can make an announcement or begin a conversation
through the speaker of another telephone in the system.
1.
2.
Enter the Voice Call feature code
Wait for the beep, then speak.
Mute Voice Call tones
When a Voice Call begins at your telephone, you hear a
beep every 15 seconds as a reminder that the microphone is
on. You can stop it beeping.
Pick up the receiver or press
Han&free Answerback
If Handsfree Answerback is assigned to your telephone, you
can respond to a Voice Call without touching the telephone.
1.
When someone makes a voice call to you, simply start
talking. Your telephone’s microphone picks up your
voice.
Your telephone will beep periodically to remind you the
microphone is on. You can stop it beeping.
Pick up the receiver or press
Voice Call Deny
You can prevent your telephone from receiving voice calls.
1.
Enter the Voice Call Deny feature code
Voice calls will ring like regular
internal calls. Your other calls will proceed normally.
Cancel Voice Call Deny
You can cancel Voice Call Deny.
1.
Enter the Cancel Voice Call Deny feature code
Telephone features
Voice Call 101
Displays
You will see some of these displays while making a voice
call.
.
Dial the internal number or press the
button of the person
internal
to whom you want to speak.
The line is open for you to speak.
voice call
The telephone receiving the call
cannot accept voice calls for one of
the following reasons: it is active or
ringing with another call; it is in Call
Forward mode; it is in Do Not Disturb
mode; it has Voice Call Deny turned
telephone.
on; it is not a
Your call proceeds automatically as
a regular ringing call.
Notes
Once you have answered a voice call, you can put it on hold,
transfer it, or otherwise treat it as a normal call.
When you have Handsfree Answerback assigned to your
telephone, and you are using an On-Hook Dialing Mode, the
microphone and speaker are both activated for external
calls.
The System Coordinator assigns Handsfree Answerback to
a telephone in Administration programming. You can not
assign Handsfree Answerback capability to the
00
telephone.
Telephone features
Telephone
user
cards
telemanuals.com
l eeeeo*eeeeee*ee*ee*eeeeeeemeeeeeee
telemanuals.com
MDR4 Feature Card
I
Cancel
to music
by your
through your telephone speaker when you are not on a
call.
Button
q
inquiry
Check what is stored on any button. Use when labeling memory buttons.
Call Duration
Timer
Temporarily displays the approximate length of your current or most recent call
Call Forward
Cancel
Send your calls to another telephone within your
system.
Call Park
Automatically puts a call on hold and a retrieval code from 001 to 909 is displayed. The call can
system.
be retrieved from any telephone in your
Call Park
Retrieval
Call Pickup
Directed
Call Pickup
Group
Call Queuing
q to
Get a parked call from any telephone by selecting an
Telephone has no
(001 to 909). The
line and entering the retrieval code
so just dial the retrieval code.
Answer any ringing telephone by using the feature code and
number.
that telephone’s internal
A member of a pickup group can answer a call that is ringing at another telephone within the
same group.
q
Answers the next available call. Gives priority to the longest waiting external call.
Camp-On
Lets you re-route a call to another telephone even if all its lines are busy. Enter the feature code,
then dial the internal number of the receiving telephone. To answer the call, use Call Queuing. If
more than one call is waiting, priority is given to incoming external calls over camped calls.
Class of Service
q
Enter this feature code and a password provided by your System Coordinator to switch from one
Class of Service to another. The Class of Service determines which numbers you can dial.
Lets you set up a three-person call or transfer a call to another telephone within or outside of
system.
your
Contrast
Adjustment
Dialing
Modes
To adjust the contrast of your telephone display, enter the feature code and then press
through
(depending on your telephone) to select the correct level.
q
Lets you choose the method for dialing without lifting the receiver. To change the Dialing Mode
to select
from Standard Dialing to Pre-Dial or Automatic, enter the feature code, then press q
to store the selected Dialing Mode.
the mode. Press
User cards
telemanuals.com
2
Feature Card
Standard Dialing: The ordinary way to dial without lifting the receiver. Press a line button, then
the telephone number.
Automatic Dialing: Dial a telephone number
receiver or pressing a line button.
Pre-Dial: Dial a telephone number, revise by pressing
the call. For the M7208 or M7100 Telephone, press
the number.
on the dial pad without
up the
then press a line button to place
(volume down) on the volume bar to
Pre-Dial (Line Pool): Program Pre-Dial on the telephone first. Dial a telephone number. Press a
memory button that has been programmed for direct access to a Line Pool.
Do Not Disturb
Cancel
Prevents incoming calls from ringing at your telephone.
Exclusive Hold
Temporarily suspends a call and prevents other telephones from picking it up.
Exclusive Hold Retrieval: Press
of the held call (press
on the
Group
Listening
Language
Choice
Cancel
Use both the receiver and your speaker at the same time while you are on a call. To avoid
feedback, hold the receiver away from the speaker during a call, and before hanging up,
press
English language: Displayed on your telephone.
Alternate language: Displayed on your telephone.
Last Number
Redial
Automatically redials the last external telephone number that you dialed.
Line Pools
Several external lines can be shared by a group of telephones, but not all telephones require a
button for every line. Enter the feature code, then enter the Line Pool access code.
Line
Redirection
Cancel
You can redirect one or more lines on your telephone so that calls coming in on the line(s) will
system.
be directed to one or more locations outside the
Link
Generates a Link signal (also called flash or recall) to access other systems or carriers.
Long Tones
necessary to communicate with devices (such as fax or answering machines) which
use longer tone signals. A Long Tone lasts as long as a dial pad button is held down.
Messages
Cancel
Message, Reply: Call back the co-worker who sent you a message on your display.
[Feature)
Cancel
Message, Send: Leave a message on a co-worker’s telephone display to call you back.
not available on the
User cards
Telephone.
.
telemanuals.com
MDR4 Feature Card 3
Lets you change the position of a line button. Enter the feature code and press the line button
you want to move. Then, press the button to which you want the line to move The two
positions. Lines can not be moved to positions occupied by
,
o
r
buttons.
Page
q
and zone (0 to 6) (0 means all zones)
Internal (Zone): Make announcements, through the
telephone speakers, to a select group
telephones.
or to all
External: Make announcements through your office’s loudspeaker system (if connected)
and zone (0 to 6) (0 means all zones)
Make announcements through both your
office’s loudspeaker system.
telephone speakers and your
and code (1 to 3) then zone (0 to 6)
General: You have a choice of making announcements through the internal and external
speakers. Press
for internal,
for external or q
for both.
Pause
For Pulse and Tone Dialing: Inserts a 1.5 second delay
a number being dialed.
For Pulse Dialing only: Inserts a 1.5 second delay in a number
dialed.
Priority Call
you to interrupt another telephone while it is on another call, or lo override a telephone
on Do Not Disturb. See your System Coordinator. When you are on another call, you have the
option of blocking a Priority Call on your telephone by entering the Do Not Disturb feature code or
by pressing
Privacy
[Feature]
Prevents another telephone, which shares your line, from joining your current call or permits
join.
to
q
When programmed at the end of an External
Ring Again
sequence, performs the same function as
Cancel
When another telephone or Line Pool within the
system is busy, Ring Again
to call back when the telephone or Line Pool becomes available.
you
Ring Type
Select a distinctive ring to help differentiate between your telephone and others nearby. Enter the
through
to select the new Ring Type. Press [Hold] to store
feature code and press q
the new ring.
.
Ring Volume
Makes your telephone ring so you can adjust the volume, even while you are on a call
Feature not available on the M7100 Telephone.
User cards
4
Feature Card
Run/Stop
When
the External
programming feature, store more than one number on a
memory button by inserting a break point between each two numbers. The first press of the
memory button
the first number; the second press dials the second number. and so on.
Saved Number
Slores
external telephone number
feature code IS entered.
on the display.
the number when the
Service Modes
You can
a specific telephone to accept all
external, incoming calls. You can
options for specific times of the day, for
program up to three different telephone
example, at night or at lunch time. This eliminates the need to forward all your calls. Only an
Control
can turn ON Service Modes. See vour Svstem Coordinator.
Show Time
You can temporarily display the date and the time while you are on a call.
Soeed Dial
Personal:
a telephone number into a Personal Speed Dial code (from 71 to 94)
Personal and System: Lets you dial a telephone number using Personal codes (71-94) or System
codes (01-70). System Speed Dial codes are programmed by your System
Telephone
programming
External Aulodial: Lets you store an external telephone
onto a memory button for
button access to that number.
Internal Autodial: Store an internal telephone number onto a memory button for
button access to that telephone number.
Program Features: Store a feature onto a memory button for one-button access to that feature.
You cannot program
Timed
or
buttons.
Release
Generates a longer Link signal (1.5 seconds). Use this feature when you want to release a call on
your line but retain the use of the line for another call.
Transfer
Sends a call to another telephone within your
system.
Trunk Answer
Lets you pick up an external call that is
Modes from any telephone within the
lines.
on a line which has been placed into Service
system. This feature does not work on private
Voice Call
.
You can make a voice announcement or
a conversation through the speaker of another
telephone without first makina the other teleohone rino.
Voice Call Deny
Cancel
Prevents your telephone from receiving
User cards
Calls, permits only ordinary ringing calls.
MDR4 Feature Card
How to use
features
You can use many features by pressing
1. Press
5
plus a code.
2. Enter the code from the dial pad.
3. Follow the display messages for specific operations of a feature.
How to program
features
You can program many features onto memory buttons by pressing
1. you are on a call or have an open line, press
or
2. Press ( F o r
Telephones, go to step 4.)’
3. Press the memory button that you wish to program.
4. Press
then enter the code from the dial pad.
See your System Coordinator for more detailed information.
With a Line Pool, several external lines can be shared by a group of
telephones without requiring each telephone to have a button for every line.
Telephones have access to external lines through a programmed system-wide
access code. This code is assigned in Configuration programming and is
particularly useful for M7100 Telephones which have no line buttons.
To program a Line Pool feature button
1. If you are on a call or have an open line, press
2. Press
3. Press the memory button you want to program
4. Press
or
5. Enter the access code for a Line Pool.
To use a Line Pool
1.
and dial the Line Pool access code for one of the Line
Pools assigned to your telephone.
OR
Press
(if programmed).
2. If you are using a line pool which connects you to the public network, dial
the telephone number of the person you want to call.
If you are using a line pool which automatically connects you to another
system, see Using
outside the office.
If you are using a line pool which automatically connects you to a system
follow the procedure for using that system. Ask your
other than
System Coordinator if you need help.
Meridian and
are trademarks of Northern Telecom
User cards
6
MDR4 Feature Card
conference (three- way conference call)
Make or answer the first call.
2. Put the first call on hold.
3. Make or answer the second call.
4. After the second call is connected, press
(or press
if programmed).
5. Press the line button of the first held call. (This step is not required on the
Telephone.)
6. Press
to end the conference call.
Managing fhree-way conference calls
See your System Coordinator for complete instructions for these operations:
a conference on
Put your end of the call on hold; the other two
callers can still speak to each other.
Splitting a conference Speak privately to one of the callers.
Disconnecting one party Drop one call and stay connected to the other.
Independent/y holding
calls Put both parties on hold as separate calls.
To establish an unsupervised conference
When you are on a conference call, press
if programmed). The other two parties remain connected.
(or
If both of the parties are external, one of them must have called you.
Some external lines may not support this type of transfer if two
external parties are involved.
Transfer without Announcement
Make or answer a call.
2. Press
(or
if programmed).
3. Dial an internal telephone number or press an Internal
The call is immediatelv transferred.
button.
Note: If an external call is transferred to a busy internal line, or not answered
display
after a few rings, the call automatically rings you back and
indicates that the line was busv or that no one answered.
Transfer with Announcement
(Not available on the
Telephone.)
1. Make or answer a call.
2. Press (Intercom]. The call is automatically put on hold.
3. Dial an internal telephone number or press an Internal
4. Announce the call after the called party answers.
5. Press
(or
if programmed).
6. Press the line button of the first held call.
User cards
MDR4 Feature Card
About Speed Dial
codes
7
Speed Dial lets you dial external telephone numbers using a two-digit code.
There are two types of Speed Dial codes. System Speed Dial codes (01 to
telephone in the system and are assigned
70) can be used from any
by your System Coordinator. Personal Speed Dial codes (71 to 94) can be
used exclusively at your telephone and are assigned by you.
You cannot assign Speed Dial codes while someone is programming
Business Communication System.
your Meridian
Assigning numbers
to Personal Speed Dial
codes
1. If you are on a call or have an open line, press (Hold] or
2. Press
to enter Personal Speed Dial codes.
3. Enter a two-digit code (from 71 to 94).
4. Dial the telephone number you want to assign to that code.
Telephone numbers cannot exceed 24 digits.
5. Press
to finish programming.
6. Keep a record of each Personal Speed Dial code.
Dial
Using Sped Dial
1. Press
(or press [Dial] if programmed)
Dial code (01 to 70) or Personal Speed
2. Enter the two-digit
Dial code (71 to 94) for the number you want.
A line is automatically selected and your call is placed.
Calling
from
outside the office
You can use your
system even when you are not in the office. You
to make calls or use the paging feature. You may
will be able to use
be required to enter a Class of Service password to get onto the system.
Your Class of Service will determine which features you can use and which
numbers you can dial.
connect to the
Dial the remote access number provided by your System Coordinator.
2. If you hear stuttered dial tone, enter a 6-digit COS password.
3. When you hear steady dial tone, you are connected to the
system.
You can do one of the following:
Change your Class of Service by dialing the
DN and entering a Class
of Service password.
.
Dial the number of someone in the office.
Enter a line pool access code to use external lines in a line pool.
Enter a Page feature code
through
and the
appropriate page type and zone number to page someone in the office.
Note: Ask your System Coordinator for details on your Classes of Service
and Class of Service passwords.
User cards
8
DR4 Prime Telephone User Card
What is a Prime
Telephone?
A Prime Telephone can be any Meridian
telephone that has been
assigned to provide a backup answering service for incoming external calls.
An external call rings at a Prime Telephone when the call is not answered at
any other telephones with that call’s line appearance.
A Prime Telephone can be any one of the following:
l
l
l
Your role in
operating a Prime
Telephone
any
telephone
an M7310 telephone with a Busy Lamp Field (BLF)
an M7324 telephone with a Central Answering Position (CAP) module(s).
As the assigned Prime Telephone operator, you are responsible for
answering unanswered external calls. You are alerted to these calls when
your telephone display shows you a descriptive message, the line indicator
flashes, and the call rings.
After answering a call, you may take a message or redirect the call to another
telephone.
Who assigns the
external lines for my
Prime Telephone?
Check with your System Coordinator to determine which external lines have
been assigned for backup answering and which of those lines ring at your
Prime Telephone. To help you do your job well, this person should provide a
telephone and
list of names and numbers associated with each
external line, and a list of System Speed Dial names and numbers. This
person can also tell you which features have been assigned to your telephone.
There may be more than one Prime Telephone operator in your
system. If this is the case, then each Prime Telephone operator is responsible
for a particular group of assigned lines when providing a backup answering
service. Let the appropriate people within your backup answering group know
that you are now providing a service for them.
Meridian and
User cards
are trademarks
Northern Telecom.
DR4 Prime Telephone User Card
When do I answer
a call?
9
You answer a call if:
someone within
calls you. You hear the
internal ring (two
flashes beside
quick rings followed by a longer pause), and an indicator
one of your telephone’s intercom buttons.
an external call comes directly to your Prime Telephone. You hear the
flashes beside one of
familiar external telephone ring, and an indicator
your telephone’s external line buttons.
a call is redirected to your Prime Telephone from somewhere else within the
system. You hear an internal ring, an external ring, or the Camp-On
tone (two quick beeps), and you see a message on the display of your
telephone.
Note: You do not answer the call if your Prime Telephone does not ring
How do
a call?
answer
automatically scicctcd:
If you want a line to
(if assigned).
1. Pick up the receiver or press
OR
If you want to manually answer a line:
1. Press the line or intercom button with a slow flashing
2. Pick up the receiver if you want the handsfree
OFF.
Note: A fast flashing indicator
Handling more than
one call at once
shows that a line is on hold.
When you have more than one call arriving at your telephone, the Call
Queuing feature allows you to answer each of the waiting calls by
selecting the next call for you.
Use Call Queuing when you are on a call and a new call alerts you by ringing
at your telephone, or by sending Call Queuing tones.
1. Pick up the receiver to answer the first call.
or the Call Queuing button if
2. Press
The call you were on is automatically put on hold.
3. To return to a previous call:
Press the external line button of the call on hold.
4. Continue to answer incoming calls.
when you are finished with the call you are on.
5. Press
User cards
10
DR4 Prime Telephone User Card
Redirecting calls
using display
messages
The display messages which appear on your Prime Telephone for redirected
calls should help you to understand why those calls were passed to
your Prime Telephone. This information is useful when you need to decide
what to do with the call once it has been answered.
The following table lists some example display messages that could appear on
a Prime Telephone when you receive redirected calls:
Karen holds a call for too long.
Held
The call you transferred is returned to you
because the telephone is in Do Not
Disturb mode.
Delayed
Transfer redirects an
unanswered call on line 025.
L i
Lit-412 to
A call on line 012 cannot ring elsewhere
A call on line 010 was forwarded or
routed to Janet, but was not answered.
Line883
callback
A transferred, camped, or parked call on
line 003 was returned to the originator
using the Callback feature, but was not
answered.
The Held Line Reminder message Held call is repeated periodically after
appears. This message is
the first message Held
accompanied by the same tone used with the Camp-On feature (two quick
beeps).
User cards
DR4 Prime Telephone User Card 11
Your options
You have just answered a call for someone else. What do you do next?
You can:
Transfer the call to another telephone within or outside of the
OR
Camp the call on another
telephone.
OR
Announce the call to the office, asking that someone take the call.
OR
Take a message.
Transferring
the active call
To another
system.
telephone:
1. Check whether the telephone to which you want to transfer is already
busy:
Is there an indicator
beside the Internal
button for the other
telephone?
If you have a BLF, is the indicator ON for the other telephone?
If you have a CAP module, is the indicator
ON for the other
telephone?
2. Transfer the call using one of these four methods:
*Transfer with Announcement you first talk on the telephone to the
person to whom you want to transfer the call.
Transfer without Announcement you immediately transfer the call after
talking to the caller.
Establish a conference call.
Transfer using hold.
l
l
l
Do not forget that you can use programmed
telephone and CAP module (if installed) to select a
To a telephone outside the
buttons on your
telephone.
system:
Call the person to whom you wish to transfer the call.
2. Establish a conference with the two parties.
3. Drop out of the conference using the Unsupervised Conference feature.
Note: Some external lines may not support an unsupervised conference call.
In this case, you may put the conference on hold, allowing the other
two parties to continue talking to each other.
button to create an unsupervised conference.
Note: Do not use the
Although it will create an unsupervised conference with internal parties,
it will not work in a conference with two external parties.
User cards
12
DR4 Prime Telephone User Card
Camping the call
If the
telephone you want to transfer the call to is busy on another
call, you may want to camp the call on that telephone. The person receiving
the camped call will hear Camp-On tones (two quick beeps).
or the Camp-On button (if programmed).
1. Press
2. Dial the internal number of the other telephone or press its Internal
button if programmed.
Announcing
the active call
You are trying to pass calls you have answered to co-workers who are not at
their telephones. Using the Page feature, you can announce the calls over the
telephones, an external loudspeaker, or both. A co-worker
announcement can answer the call from the nearest
telephone.
If
want
telephone:
co-worker to take the
a specific
1. Place the call on hold.
2. Using the Page feature, announce the call and the location of the telephone
to which you will transfer the call.
3. Transfer the call to the appropriate
telephone.
OR
Camp the call on the appropriate
telephone.
4. Replace your receiver.
If you want your co-worker to take the
on a specific line:
1. Place the call on hold.
2. Use the Page feature to announce the call and its line number.
3. Replace the receiver.
telephone that has that
Your co-worker can now go to the nearest
line, select the line, and lift the receiver.
If you want your co-worker to take the call from any
telephone:
1. Use the Call Park feature to place the call on hold. Your telephone shows a
three-digit Call Park Retrieval code on the display.
2. Use the Page feature to announce the call and the Call Park Retrieval code.
3. Replace your receiver.
Your co-worker can now retrieve the call from any other
telephone
by lifting the receiver and dialing the three-digit code.
Note: Remember that callback (the call is redirected back to your Prime
Telephone) occurs if your transferred, parked, or camped call goes
unanswered.
User cards
DR4 Prime Telephone User Card
informing your
co-workers about
their calls
13
Use the Send Message feature to notify co-workers that they should call you
for information.
If the person you are trying to call is on another line, or their telephone has Do
Not Disturb ON, a display message shows you that their telephone is busy. If
the person you are trying to call does not answer, a display message informs
you that there is no reply. In each case, you can use the Ring Again feature.
The Ring Again feature is a method of ensuring that you immediately know
when there is a change in the use of the other telephone. You can then try
again to place a call.
Working with other
features
Some of the many special features which
provides may be particularly
useful to you. Some of these features, however, are only available if assigned
during Configuration or Administration programming. Speak to your System
Coordinator to determine which features you can use, and to obtain details on
how to use them.
Answer Group: You can immediately answer and monitor a specific group of
telephones, for example, your managers’, using Answer buttons.
Automatic Handstree: If programmed, you can use the Handsfree
microphone and speaker for all your calls.
Call Pickup Directed: Anyone in the office can answer a call ringing at any
telephone by dialing that telephone’s internal number.
other
Call Pickup Group: Any member of a specified group can answer an external
or internal call ringing at another telephone within that specified group.
Direct-Dial Telephone: If your Prime Telephone is administered as a
Dial telephone, anyone assigned to your Direct Dial telephone can quickly
contact you by dialing an assigned single-digit number.
Hotline: A
telephone may be programmed to automatically dial your
Prime Telephone as soon as its receiver has been lifted.
Multiple Prime Telephones: There may be a requirement for more than one
Prime Telephone to provide backup answering.
Page Zone: If you do not want to disturb the entire office with an
announcement, you can direct the page to a choice of smaller areas.
Priority Call: If you have answered an urgent call for someone who is busy
on another line, you can interrupt the person with this feature.
User cards
14
DR4 Prime Telephone User Card
Some unique
situations
If an external call comes to you, and no remaining external line buttons are
available, the indicator
for that call will appear next to any available
intercom buttons on your telephone.
If your Prime Telephone receives a callback call, you will hear the internal
telephone ring instead of the familiar external telephone ring.
The Held Line Reminder or the Delayed Ring Transfer feature is not available
unless assigned during Configuration programming.
If you are using all of your external line buttons and intercom buttons; you
can still receive a camped call (you will hear two quick beeps).
If your Prime Telephone is an M7324 telephone, you can monitor the busy/not
telephones. Check for the presence or absence
busy status of other
beside the Internal
buttons for the other telephones.
of indicators
Where to get help
To learn more about
and its features, the System Coordinator can
documents:
provide you with the following
The Meridian
Telephone User Cards show you how to:
make an external call
make an internal call
put a call on hold
use
program memory buttons.
The Meridian
features.
Feature Card lists the feature codes and describes the
Busy Lamp Field
The Meridian
the Busy Lamp Field.
User Card describes how to use
Central Answering Position (CAP) User Card describes
The Meridian
how to use Central Answering Position modules.
User cards
User Card 15
Release
cancels active calls.
Display
shows the time, date, call information and guides
features.
you while using
is programmable to store a feature or to
automatically dial internal or external
number.
Feature button
starts or ends a feature.
Volume control
Hold button
Button inquiry
Confirm that your memory button has the correct snap-on cap by checking its
programming.
1. Release all calls and open lines with dial tone.
2. Press
3. Read the display.
when finished.
4. Press
Adjusting display
contrast
Press
2. Press
Selecting a ring type
and volume
1. Press
2. Press q
,q
, or to hear the different types of rings.
3. While the telephone is ringing, press
to adjust the volume
louder
4. Press
to store the ring.
Adjusting receiver or
telephone speaker
volume
1. Press
and
to
for the level you want.
when using the receiver or the speaker.
louder
are trademarks of Northern Telecom.
User cards
16
User Card
Internal calls
1. Pick up the receiver.
2. Dial the internal number.
External calls
1. Pick up the receiver.
2. Dial
(or your system’s external line access code).
3. Dial the external telephone number.
Internal numbers and the external access code are supplied by your
System Coordinator.
Making and
answering a second
call
The
By using
telephone allows you to have two calls active at the same time.
you can switch between calls.
To answer a second call while on another call
1. Press
to put the first call on hold.
The second call automatically comes onto the line.
To hold a call and make a second call
1. Press
to put the first call on hold.
2. Dial the telephone number for the second call.
To
fo
call
1. Press [Hold] again to return to the first call on hold.
The second call is automatically put on hold.
[Hold
User cards
To ho/d a
1. Press (Hold] .
2 Press (Hold] again to return to the call on hold.
Check the display for confirmation or additional information.
User Card
The memory button can store a
telephone number or feature
code to give you one touch
dialing or feature activation. You
can change the memory button
programming it with a new
memory button
Remember: Press
Programming
memory buttons
17
to check the memory button.
External
1. If you are on a call or an open line with dial tone, press
2. Press
3. Dial the external number.
4. Press (Hold] to store the number.
5. Label your new button.
Internal
1. If you are on a call or an open line with dial tone, press
2. Press
3. Dial the internal number.
4. Label your new button.
Features
1. If you are on a call or an open line with dial tone, press (Hold]
2. Press
3. Press
and the feature code.
4. Label your new button.
Erasing memory buttons
1. If you are on a call or an open line with dial tone, press
or
2. Press
3. Press
to erase the button.
User cards
18 M7208 User Card
Display
I
date, call information and
features.
while using
you
indicators
appear beside active lines and features.
Feature button
starts or ends a feature.
.
button
cancels active calls.
Hold button
Dial pad
Volume control
Memory and line buttons
are buttons with indicators
one
touch dialing, feature operation or line
access.
Button Inquiry
Confirm that your memory and line buttons have the correct snap-on caps by
checking their programming.
Release all calls and open lines with dial tone.
2. Press
3. Press the button you want to check.
4. Read the display.
when finished.
5. Press
Adjusting display
contrast
1. Press
2. Press a number on the dial pad for the contrast level you want, the higher
the number the higher the contrast level.
Selecting a Ring
Type and volume
1.
2.
3.
4.
level
Adjusting receiver or
telephone speaker
volume
and
User
are trademarks
cards
Press
Press
to hear the different types of rings.
While the telephone is ringing, press
to adjust the volume.
to store the ring.
Press
Press
when using the receiver or the speaker.
.
Northern Telecom.
M7208 User Card 19
About line buttons
systems can have different types of line buttons. Match the line
buttons on your telephone with the ones below for instructions on how to use
them.
internal calls using Intercom buttons
1. Pick up the receiver.
2. If
appears beside an intercom
button, then dial.
OR
Press an Intercom button without
then dial.
[ L i n e ]
External calls using numbered Line
buttons
1. Pick up the receiver.
appears beside a
2. When
numbered Line button, then dial.
OR
Press a numbered Line button
then dial.
without
Note: Internal numbers are supplied by your System Coordinator.
I
Internal calls using extension
buttons
1. Pick up the receiver.
appears beside an
2. When
extension button, then dial.
External calls using extension
buttons
Pick up the receiver.
appears beside the
2. When
extension button, dial
(or your system’s external line
access code) and the number.
Holding Calls
1. Press
. The
flashes beside the line on hold.
2. Press the line button with the flashing
to return to the call.
Check the display for confirmation or additional information.
Automatic hold
Calls are put on hold automatically when you switch from one line to another.
This button operates the telephone’s built-in microphone and speaker in place
of the receiver. Your System Coordinator can program Handsfree to your
telephone.
Making calls
instead of picking up the receiver.
Switching between Handsfree and handset
and replace the handset to switch to Handsfree.
2. Pick up the receiver to switch back.
Using Mute
to turn the microphone OFF.
2.
again to turn the microphone ON.
Dialing without
lifting the handset
line button without
then dial your call.
2. When answered, pick up the receiver, or press
3. If the call is not answered, or the line is busy, press
.
User cards
20
M7208 User Card
Memory buttons are the buttons
with indicators other than line or
Handsfree buttons. Memory
buttons store telephone numbers
or feature codes to give you one
touch dialing or feature activation.
You can change what a memory
button does by just programming
it with a new number or feature.
You cannot program a line or
Handsfree button.
About memory
buttons
Remember:
Programming
memory buttons
to check a memory or line button
External
1. If you are on a call or an open line with dial tone, press
2. Press
3. Press a memory button.
4. Dial the external number.
5. Press
to store the number.
6. Label vour new button.
Internal
1. If you are on a call or an open line with dial tone, press
2. Press
3. Press a memory button.
4. Dial the internal number.
5. Label your new button.
features
1. If you are on a call or an open line with dial tone, press
2. Press
3. Press a memory button.
and the feature code.
4. Press
5. Label your new button.
Erasing memory buttons
1. If you are on a call or an open line with dial tone, press
2. Press
3. Press the memory button you want to erase.
4. Press
to erase the button.
User cards
or
or
or
or
.
M7310 User Card 21
Shift button
for
the top
of a dual-memory button.
Feature button
starts or cancels a feature.
Release button
cancels active calls.
Hold button
Dial pad
Memory and line buttons
are buttons with indicators for
one touch dialing, feature
operation or line access,
Volume control
Indicators
appear beside active lines and features.
Using display
buttons
Display buttons change with each feature you use
The labels for display buttons appear in capital
letters directly above them on the second line of
the display. A display button with an “OK” label
in this card.
above it is represented as
Button inquiry
Confirm that your memory and line buttons have the correct snap-on caps by
checking their programming.
1. Release all calls or open lines with dial tone.
2. Press
3. Press the button(s) you want to check and read the display.
when finished.
4. Press
Adjusting display
contrast
1. Press
2. Press
or
3. Press OK whenfinished.
Selecting a ring type
and volume level
1.
2.
3.
4.
Meridian and
level you want.
Press
or
to hear the different types of rings.
Press
While the telephone is ringing, press
to adjust the
louder
Press OK to store the ring.
e.
are trademarks of Norlhern Telecom.
User cards
22
User Card
About line buttons
systems can have different types of line buttons. Match the line
buttons on your telephone with the ones below for instructions on how to use
them.
Internal calls using Intercom buttons
1. Pick up the receiver.
2. If
appears beside an Intercom
button, then dial.
OR
Press an Intercom button without
, then dial.
External calls using numbered Line
buttons
1. Pick up the receiver.
appears beside a
2. When
numbered Line button, then dial.
OR
Press a numbered Line button
then dial.
without
Note: Internal numbers are supplied by your System Coordinator.
Internal calls using extension
buttons
Pick up the receiver,
appears beside an
2. When
extension button, then dial.
External calls using extension
buttons
1. Pick up the receiver.
2. When
appears beside the
extension button, then dial
(or your system’s external line
access code) and the number.
Holding Calls
Press
. The
flashes beside the line on hold.
2. Press the line button with the flashing
to return to the call,
Check the display for confirmation or additional information.
Automatic hold
Calls are put on hold automatically when you switch
line to another.
This button operates the telephone’s built-in microphone and speaker in place
of the receiver. Your System Coordinator can program Handsfree to your
telephone.
Making calls
Press
instead of picking up the receiver.
Switching between Handsfree and handset
1. Press
and replace the handset to switch to Handsfree.
2. Pick up the receiver to switch back.
Using Mute
Press
2. Press
Dialing without
lifting the handset
User cards
turn the microphone OFF.
again to turn the microphone ON.
Press a line button without
then dial your call.
2. When answered, pick up the receiver, or press
3. If the call is not answered, or the line is busy, press
M7310 User Card
23
There are two types of memory
buttons: single-memory and
memory. Memory buttons store
telephone numbers or feature
codes to give you one touch
dialing or feature activation.
About memory
buttons
Dual-memory buttons
To use the bottom function, press
the dual-memory button.
To use the top function, press the
shift button, then press the
memory button.
Single-memory buttons
Single-memory buttons are the
buttons with indicators other than
line or Handsfree buttons.
Remember: Press
Programming
memory buttons
to check a memory or line button.
If you are on a call or an open line
with dial tone, press
or
Press
Press a memory button.
Dial the external number.
Press
to store the number.
Label your new button.
1. If you are on a call or an open line
with dial tone, press (Hold]
or
2. Press
.
3. Press a memory button.
4. Dial the internal number.
5. Label your new button.
features
1. If you are on a call or an open line
with dial tone, press
or
2. Press
3. Press a memory button.
4. Press
and the feature
code.
5. Label your new button.
Erasing memory buttons
1. If you are on a call or an open line
[Hold]
with dial tone,
or
2. Press
3. Press the memory button you
want to erase.
4. Press OK to erase the button.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
User cards
24
M7324 User Card
Memory and line buttons
are buttons
access.
Indicators for one touch dialing, feature operation or
Display
shows the time, date, call information and guides
you
using
features. The lower
line of the
IS reserved for display
button
buttons
Dial pad
Volume control
Feature button
starts or ends a feature.
Hold button
Release button
cancels active calls.
Indicators
appear beside active lines and features.
Using display
buttons
Display buttons change with each feature you
use. The labels for display buttons appear in
capital letters directly above them on the
second line of the display. A display button
with an “OK” label above it is represented as
in this card.
Button inquiry
Confirm that your memory and line buttons have the correct snap-on caps by
checking their programming.
1. Release all calls or open lines with dial tone.
2. Press
3. Press the button(s) you want to check and read the display.
4. Press
when finished.
Adjusting display
contrast
Selecting a ring type
and volume level
1. Press
2. Press
3. Press
for the level you want.
whenfinished.
1. Press
2. Press
,
,
or
to hear the different types of rings.
3. While the telephone is ringing, press
to adjust the volume.
louder
the ring.
4. Press
and Norslar are trademarks of Northern Telecom
User cards
or
M7324 User Card 25
About line buttons
systems can have different types of line buttons. Match the line
buttons on your telephone with the ones below for instructions on how to use
them.
internal calls using intercom buttons
1. Pick up the receiver.
2. If
appears beside an intercom
button, then dial.
OR
Press an Intercom button without
then dial.
External calls using numbered Line
buttons
1. Pick up the receiver.
appears beside a
2. When
numbered Line button, then dial.
OR
Press a numbered Line button
then dial.
without
Note: Internal numbers are supplied by your system coordinator.
Internal calls using extension
buttons
1. Pick up the receiver.
2. When
appears beside an
extension button, then dial.
External calls using extension
buttons
1. Pick up the receiver.
2. When
appears beside the
(or
extension button, then dial
your system’s external line access
code) and the number.
Holding Calls
1. Press T h e
flashes beside the line on hold.
2. Press the line button with the flashing
to return to the call.
Check the display for confirmation or additional information.
Automatic hold
Calls are put on hold automatically when you switch from one line to another.
This button operates the telephone’s built-in microphone and speaker in place
of the receiver. Your System Coordinator can program Handsfree to your
telephone.
Making calls
1. Press
instead of picking up the receiver.
Switching between Handsfree and handset
1. Press
and replace the handset to switch to Handsfree.
2. Pick up the receiver to switch back.
.
Using Mute
Press
to turn the microphone OFF.
2. Press
again to turn the microphone ON.
Dialing without
lifting the handset
1. Pressaline button without
then dial your call.
2. When answered, pick up the receiver, or press
3. If the call is not answered, or the line is busy, press
User cards
26
M7324 User Card
Memory buttons are the buttons .
with indicators other than line or
Handsfree buttons. Memory
buttons store telephone numbers
or feature codes to give you one
touch dialing or feature activation.
You can change what a memory
button does by just programming
it with a new number or feature.
About memory
buttons
If you have programmed a
memory button with an internal
number the indicator comes on
when the number is busy.
Remember: Press
Programming
memory buttons
to check a memory or line button.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
If you are on a call or an open line with dial tone, press
Press
Press a memory button.
Dial the external number.
Press OK to store the number.
Label your new button.
or
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
If you are on a call or an open line with dial tone, press
Press
Press a memory button.
Dial the internal number.
Label your new button.
Or
Features
1. If you are on a call or an open line with dial tone, press
2. Press
q .
3. Press a memory button.
and the feature code.
4. Press
5. Label your new button.
Erasing memory buttons
1. If you are on a call or an open line with dial tone, press
2. Press
.
3. Press the memory button you want to erase.
to erase the button
4. Press
User cards
or
.
or
Busy Lamp Field User Card 27
Busy Lamp Field
User Card
l
e * e o e e o e e * e o * e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e
The Meridian
Busy Lamp Field (BLF) is a device with indicators that turn ON individually when
telephones in your office are in use. The BLF attaches to your M7310 telephone and is a welcome aid
when you answer the telephone for co-workers or operate a message center. You can tell at a glance
which telephones are in use and avoid interrupting people who are busy on calls.
The Busy Lamp Field
attached to an
telephone
The Busy Lamp Field indicators are arranged to match up with the dual-memory buttons above the
display of your M7310 telephone. Each half of a dual-memory button that has been programmed as an
button is matched with one half of a BLF indicator. The top portion of a BLF indicator
internal
turns ON when showing an active call on the top half of a dual-memory button; the bottom portion turns
ON when showing an active call on the bottom half of a dual-memory button.
If you move an internal
number from one button to another, the BLF indicator moves
automatically. BLF indicators corresponding to internal
buttons turn ON and OFF.
The BLF indicator is ON
l
l
When a call is active on a
OR
The BLF indicator is OFF
telephone
For those features that use indicators to show
their ON or OFF status.
l
When there is no active call at that telephone
OR
l
When a call is being held at a telephone and
there is no other call active.
User cards
28
Busy Lamp Field User Card
The
Indicator shows you the busy/not busy status of any
telephone within your office. When
a call for one of your co-workers comes to your telephone, there are many possible ways to handle it.
The lists below show some of these options, As soon as you learn who a call IS for, check the
indicator on the
If the indicator is ON
Use Send Message
OR
the indicator is OFF
l
OR
Use Ring Again on Busy
OR
l
l
Try to call on an internal line. The person you
call will hear a muted ringing.
Transfer the incoming call immediately using
the Transfer feature (if equipped)
Announce your call using the Conference/
Transfer or Transfer feature.
indicators
turned ON for busy
telephones
Corresponding Internal
buttons for the
telephones
the layout of your internal
buttons and the matching layout
You will quickly become familiar
number on a
of the Busy Lamp Field indicators. Remember, you can change any internal
memory button and the BLF automatically changes too.
M7310 User Card and your
Please be sure to read your
applicable). They contain of information which shall help you to use
your BLF.
and
User cards
are trademarks of Northern Telecom
Prime Telephone User Card (if
features effectively with
Central Answering Position User Card
Why use the CAP?
29
The Meridian
Central Answering Position (CAP) consists of a
M7324 Telephone and one or two
CAP modules. The CAP allows you
to:
answer calls made from outside your
system
check the busy/not busy or Do Not Disturb status of the telephones in your
system
transfer calls to your co-workers’ telephones
use many more features and
numbers with one-touch access.
l
l
l
l
What is a CAP
module?
A CAP module is an add-on device which provides 48 extra memory or line
buttons for the M7324 Telephone. A CAP module is connected to the side of
the M7324; a second CAP module can be connected to the first CAP module.
Central Answering Position
Card for instructions on
See the
M7324
installation. When two CAP modules are connected to a
Telephone, they provide a total of 96 extra memory or line buttons for the
M7324 Telephone.
M7324 Telephone with one CAP module attached
By pressing a line button on your CAP module and lifting the receiver, you can
system. Pressing the
answer a call made from outside your
appropriate programmed memory button allows you to automatically dial an
internal or external number, or use a feature.
A headset may be plugged into the bottom of the
when Handsfree has been administered.
User cards
30
Central Answering Position User Card
About pre-assigned
buttons
When one or two CAP modules are first plugged into your telephone, each
CAP module button is pre-assigned either to select a line or dial an internal
number.
If you have been assigned up to 12 lines, you can select them by pressing the
buttons in the left-hand column of your M7324 telephone. Remaining lines
are assigned to buttons on the CAP module(s), beginning at the top left-hand
corner of the first CAP module and moving down.
After lines are assigned, any remaining buttons on your CAP module(s)
buttons, starting with the lowest default internal
become Internal
number. These internal numbers can be between two and seven digits. The
numbering length is controlled in Configuration programming.
Note: In order for lines to be automatically assigned to buttons on your CAP
module, your telephone must first be designated as a CAP in
Configuration programming.
Checking the
pre-assigned CAP
module buttons
Customizing your
CAP module
1.
2.
3.
4.
Replace the receiver.
Press
Press the buttons you want to check and read the display.
Ensure that your pre-assigned line buttons and internal
have the correct snap-on caps.
5. Press
when you are finished.
buttons
You can program any of the buttons on your CAP module that do not select
lines. These buttons can be programmed to automatically dial internal or
external numbers. You can also program features onto CAP module buttons.
If you want more line buttons programmed, see your System Coordinator.
Your CAP module will be most effective if you use it along with the Call Park,
Transfer, Conference/Transfer, Camp-On, Message, or Voice Call features.
Make sure that these features are programmed on your CAP module buttons
by following the steps presented in this card.
User cards
Central Answering Position User Card
Programming
CAP module buttons
External
1. Replace the receiver.
2. Press
3. Press a CAP module button.
4. Dial the external number.
5. Press
to store the number.
6. Label your new button.
Erasing memory buttons
1. Replace the receiver.
2. Press
.
3. Press the memory button you want
to erase.
4. Press OK to erase the button.
31
Infernal
1. Replace the receiver.
2. Press
3. Press a CAP module button.
4. Dial the internal number.
5. Label your new button.
f e a t u r e s
Replace the receiver.
2. Press
3. Press a CAP module button.
4. Press (Feature] and the
feature code.
5. Label your new button.
Moving external line buttons
1. Replace the receiver.
2. Press
3. Press the line button which you
want to move.
4. Press the memory button on your
telephone or CAP module to
which you want the line moved.
5. Label your new button.
Monitoring Internal
indicators
It is important that you pay attention to the indicators
beside the internal
buttons on your CAP module. This tells you the status of a
telephone when you answer an external call.
An indicator appears:
l
When the telephone is active on
an internal or external line
OR
l
l
When the telephone is idle
OR
l
When the telephone is using the
Do Not Disturb feature.
The status of a
an Internal
No indicator appears:
l
When the telephone is ringing
OR
When the telephone has one or
hold, but is not
more calls
connected to any active calls.
telephone cannot be monitored by your CAP module if
button has not been programmed.
User cards
32
Central Answering Position User Card
Answering and
transferring a call
Most of the telephone calls which you deal with should involve the following
procedures:
system.
1. Answer a call made from outside the
2. Determine whom the call is for.
telephone on the CAP module.
3. Check the status of the destination
4. If the indicator is OFF, transfer the call to that telephone.
OR
If the indicator
is ON, use the Send Message, Ring Again on Busy, or
Camp-On feature.
Note: If your telephone has been assigned as a CAP in Configuration
programming, you can send up to 30 messages. If your telephone has
not been assigned as a CAP, you can send up to four messages.
Other
documents
User cards
Telephone User Card and your
Please be sure to read your
Prime Telephone User Card (if applicable). They contain information
features more effectively with your CAP
which should help you to use
Technical
data
l eeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
Contents i
Technical specifications 1
Regulatory requirements 3
Interconnect 3
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) 3
Radiated emissions 3
Safety 4
Electrical requirements 4
Electrostatic discharge 4
Electromagnetic compatibility 4
Radiated immunity 4
Conducted immunity 5
Mechanical requirements 5
Transportation methods 6
Environmental requirements 6
Humidity 7
Port numbering 8
Port number coding on the wiring charts
Not-star system numbering plan
9
and
Directory Numbers (DN)
Key Service Unit (KSU)
Two-port Expansion Cartridge 11
Six-port Expansion Cartridge
12
Appendix A
wiring charts
8
13
KSU external lines and auxiliary equipment wiring
14
KSU internal wiring
15
MOX16 Station Module internal wiring
16
Trunk Module with Loop Start Trunk Cartridge
external line wiring
17
Technical data
ii
Contents
Appendix B
Trunk Module wiring charts
Using the
and
wiring charts
18
cross connections
19
Trunk Module with
wiring connections
20
C DID Trunk Module wiring charts
Using the DID wiring charts
22
DID supervisory signaling
23
Emergency transfer conditions
Trunk Module with DID
and
wiring connections
Technical data
23
25
22
18
Technical specifications
1
Technical specifications
The following information lists technical specifications
Modular 1
V and 220 V systems.
the
Power specifications for the 110 V system
Characteristic
KSU
TM
SM’
Voltage V ac
92-127
92-127
92-127
Current A rms
1.75
1.75
1.0
Frequency Hz
47-63
47-63
47-63
Crest
4.0
factor
4.0
Power specifications for the 220 V system
Characteristic
KSU
Voltage V ac
170-264
Current A rms
1 .O
Frequency Hz
45-63
45-63
Crest factor
4.0
4.0
170-264
45-63
Technical data
2
Technical specifications
Telephone loop power for 110 V and 220 V systems
Characteristic
Value
Loop resistance
50 ohms (295 m of 0.5 mm
wire or 1000 ft of 24 AWG wire)
Loop length
150 ohms per conductor
between TC and network
interface for E, SG, M, and SB
TC
leads on an
Terminating impedance
600 ohms
Flash rate
(incoming alerting call)
Hz (50% duty cycle)
Minimum voltage at telephone
Current at telephone (idle)
45
nominal
Current at telephone (active)
80
maximum
Environmental specifications for 110 V and
220 V systems
Technical data
Characteristic
Value
Operating temperature range
0°C to 50°C
(32°F to 122°F)
Storage temperature range
-55°C to 70°C
to 158°F)
Humidity
5% to 95% (non-condensing)
Technical specifications 3
Service tone cadence for 110 V and 220 V systems
Tone
Cadence (seconds)
Busy
0.5 ON
Overflow
0.25 ON IO.25 OFF
.
0.5 OFF
2.0 ON 4.0 OFF
Confirmation tone
.O ON 1 .O OFF (3 bursts
followed by no tone)
Recall tone
1 .O ON 1 .O OFF (3 bursts
followed by steady tone)
Ring splash
0.2 ON (1 burst)
Regulatory
requirements
Interconnect
Modular equipment meets all applicable
requirements of both the Canadian Department of
Communications CS-03 and US Federal Commission FCC
part 68 and has been registered under files:
DOC 3322492A and FCC
(key system)
and
(hybrid system).
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Radiated
emissions
Modular equipment meets all FCC part 15, .
subpart J, class A radiated emissions requirements as
shown on the next page:
Technical data
4 Technical specifications
Radiated emissions requirements
Frequency range
30-88
MHz
Field Strength
at 30 m
30
.
88-216
MHz
216-1000
MHz
50
70
, Conducted emissions
Modular equipment meets all FCC part 15,
subpart J, class A conducted emissions requirements.
Safety
Modular equipment meets ail applicable
requirements of both the Canadian Standards Association
C22.2 No. 0.7 Ml985 and US
Laboratory
1459, issue 1, and has been registered under files:
CSA
and UL El 15515
Electrical
requirements
Electrostatic discharge
The
KSU and telephones meet IEC 801-2 severity
level 4. Specifically, there is no malfunction or discharge up
to 12
with a 150 ohm/l 50
probe. Connectors meet
IEC 801-2 severity level 2.
Electromagnetic compatibility
Immunity
.
Radiated immunity
Modular equipment can function correctly when
exposed to RF fields up to 5 V/m over the frequency range of
10
to 1
hnical data
Technical specifications
Conducted
5
immunity
Modular equipment can function correctly when
exposed to RF signal on the external lines with a common
mode voltage of 2 V rms or a common mode current of
86
over a frequency range of 0.06 to 0.1 MHz and
92
over remaining frequencies in the 0.01 to 30 MHz
range.
Mechanical
requirements
Modular equipment meets the requirements shown
below:
Mechanical requirements
Vibration operational
I EC
Resonance search
Vibration endurance transportation
EC
Shock fragility
I EC
Unpacked drop
I EC 68-2-31
Packaged drop
NSTA Proj.
Technical data
6
Technical specifications
Transportation
methods
No special constraints need be applied to standard methods
of shipment (such as air freight, truck, and rail) except for the
-55°C (-67°F) storage limit.
Environmental
requirements
Modular equipment can operate in the temperature
range
to
to 122°F). In addition, it can
withstand storage in the temperature range of -55°C to
(-67°F to 158°F) and thermal shocks from sudden
temperature changes from
(-67°F) to room ambient
and
(158°F) to room ambient.
The following details apply:
Low temperature operation
68-2-l Test Ad.
32°F) as per I.E.C.
Low temperature storage (16 hrs) at (-55°C;
-67°F) as per I.E.C. 68-2-l Test Ab.
High temperature operation
68-2-2 Test Bd. Methods A.
as per I.E.C.
High temperature storage (16 hrs at
158°F) as per I.E.C. 68-2-2 Test Bd.
Temperature shock (-55°C to
as per I.E.C. 68-2-14 Test Na,
5 cycles.
(-67°F to
Temperature shock
to
(158°F to
per I.E.C. 68-2-l 4 Test Na, 5 cycles.
.
Technical data
Technical specifications
7
Humidity
Modular equipment can operate from 0°C to
50°C (32°F to 122°F) with relative humidities between 5%
and 95% RH except that at temperatures above 34°C
the relative humidity may be limited to 52 mbar of
water vapor pressure.
For the purpose of demonstration of compliance, the product
shall be exposed to 40°C (104°F) at 90% to 95% RH for 3
days followed by operational tests.
In addition, the product (without its transportation package)
shall be able to withstand 10 days storage at 40°C (104°F) at
90% to 95% RH as per I.E.C. 68-2-3, Test Ca, Severity A,
without evidence of corrosion, physical damage or
degradation in electrical performance.
Technical data
8
Port numbering
Port number coding on the wiring charts
The code shown for “Ports” (as on the wiring charts for
Ml
Trunk Module external line wiring and MOX16 Station
Module internal wiring) shows the link between particular
port numbers and the wiring on the distribution block. This is
useful for example, in tracking down faults during a
Maintenance session where codes appear on a
telephone display indicating error messages (see the
Maintenance chapter).
The code shown on the charts (for example: “X12”) has two
components:
corresponds to the number which appears on the
face of the Expansion Cartridge port to which the TM or
SM is connected.
Numerical digits (for example “01” or
identify an
individual port number associated with that Expansion
Cartridge.
For example:
The code “812” appearing as part of an error message for a
TM indicates Expansion Cartridge port
and internal port
“12”. The corresponding TM pins on the distribution block
are Pin 47 (Violet-Orange) and Pin 22 (Orange-Violet).
These codes apply to both
and
(up to “X16” for
for up to 16 telephones; up to “X12” for
for up to 12
external lines).
Technical data
Port numbering
9
system numbering plan
This section describes the numbering plan for conventional
installations.
A numbering plan refers to the digits dialed by the user to
access other
telephones. These are the internal
telephone numbers (also called Directory Numbers or
All internal numbers must have the same number of
A non-expanded system, which only consists of a KSU (no
by default. For an expanded
TM or SM) has two-digit
system (with an Expansion Cartridge installed) the length of
changes automatically to three digits. To match the
numbering plan to that of an existing
or Private
Branch Exchange (PBX) system you can change the
DN length to a maximum of seven digits (on both
expanded and expanded systems).
Note:
If you are installing a non-expanded system, but
plan to expand it later, program the DN length to 3
digits right from the start.
Line Pool access codes can be one to four digits in length,
but if they start with the same digit they must be the same
length. They can not conflict with:
the first digit of any internal number
the first digit of the Auto DN or the
DN
the first digit of any Received number
the Park prefix
.
the Direct-dial digit.
For example, the internal number 2345 can co-exist with the
Line Pool access code 321, but not with access code 231.
Technical data
Port numbering
cannot
Symbols such as an asterisk (*) or a pound sign
be used in internal numbers or Line Pool access codes.
and 52 Directory Numbers (DN)
The terms
and
correspond to channels on
for
transmitting both voice and data. Each DN port number has
DN and one B2 DN associated with it. Devices such
one
as the
telephones only need and use the
channel
DN. Other devices may need both
and
and the
channels, therefore requiring
and B2
Key Service Unit (KSU)
The base Key Service Unit (KSU) has eight lines and 24
telephones. The default DN values shown below are
assigned by performing System Startup. (DN or Directory
Number is the same as the internal number which is
assigned to a telephone.)
Non-expanded system (KSU alone)
Port #
External
lines
line ports
KSU
1-8
201-208
KSU
-
-
External
-
DN
-
-
B2 DN
-
21 -44
-
DN ports
-
45-68
-
-
101-124
Notice that although there are no physical DS-30 ports on a
non-expanded KSU, the port numbers of the telephones and
lines within the system have been assigned ports 101-124
and 201-208 respectively. A non-expanded system has
digit default internal numbers. By expanding the system with
an Expansion Cartridge, the default internal numbers.
become three digits to accommodate the additional internal
numbers.
Technical data
Port numbering
Two-port
Expansion
11
Cartridge
A Two-port Expansion Cartridge accommodates DS-30s for
and
up to a total of two. The
any combination of
default DN values shown below are assigned by performing
System Startup.
Two-port Expansion Cartridge and KSU numbering for ports
(DN is the same as internal number)
and
Expansion poft #
External
External
lines
line ports
DN
DN ports
9-20
401-412
261-276
317-332
401-416
21-32
301-312
24.5260
301-316
301-316
KSU
l-8
KSU
-
Note:
DN
-
-
-
-
221-244
-
-
-
277-300
-
101-124
Port
is the bottom port on the Expansion
Cartridge.
Technical data
12 Port numbering
Six-port Expansion Cartridge
A Six-port Expansion Cartridge accommodates DS-30s for
any combination of
and
up to a total of six. The
default DN values shown below are assigned by performing
System Startup.
Six-port Expansion Cartridge and KSU numbering for ports
(DN is the same as internal number)
and
Expansion port #
External
External
lines
line ports
DN
B2 DN
DN ports
9-20
801-812
325-340
445-460
801-816
21-32
701-712
309-324
429-444
701-716
601-612
293-308
33-44
I
413-428
I
601-616
I
45-56
501-512
277-292
397-412
57-68
401-412
261-276
381-396
401-416
69-80
301-312
245-260
365-380
301-316
KSU
1-8
201-208
KSU
-
Note:
Technical data
-
-
-
-
-
221-244
-
-
341-364
Port
is the bottom port on the Expansion
Cartridge.
-
-
101-124
wiring charts
13
A
wiring charts
Wiring arrangement for
KSU
15.2 m (50 ft.)
Max. Length
Distribution
Block
KSU
External line
connections,
Auxiliary Services,
ET1 and ET2
Auxiliary .
Services
ET2
See the wiring chart for Key Service Unit (KSU) to external
lines and auxiliary equipment connecting arrangement.
Wiring arrangement for
TM
15.2 m (50
Max. Length
Distribution
TM
Block
External line
connections
External
Lines
ET
Connector
ET
See the wiring chart for
Trunk Module (TM) to
external lines connecting arrangement.
Technical data
wiring charts
14
KSU external lines and auxiliary equipment wiring
external
line connector
KSU external lines connector
Pin
26
1
22
Wire color
7
Whrte-Green
Green-White
3
29
4
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
a
Slate-White
Red-Blue
Red-Orange
Orange-Red
Red-Green
Green-Red
number code:
Note:
Port
Service
Line
Pin
201
201
202
202
T
26
1
27
2
203
203
204
204
205
205
206
206
207
207
T
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
a
a
T
T
T
T
T
T
34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12
13
39
14
40
15
41
16
42
17
Auxiliary equipment can not be connected to the
Wire color
Red-Brown
Brown-Red
Red-Slate
Slate-Red
Black-Blue
Blue-Black
Black-Orange
Orange-Black
Black-Green
Green-Black
Black-Brown
Brown-Black
Black-Slate
Service
T
T
Yellow-Blue
Blue-Yellow
Yellow-Orange
Orange-Yellow
T
44 Yellow-Brown
19 Brown-Yellow
45
Yellow-Slate
20
Slate-Yellow
46
Violet-Blue
21
Blue-Violet
427
V2i o l e t - O r a n g e
T
23
49
24
50
25
Vrotel-Green
Green-Violet
Violet-Brown
Brown-Violet
Vrotet-Slate
State-Violet
Technical data
White-Slate
State-Whrte
Red-Blue
Blue-Red
Red-Orange
Orange-Red
Red-Green
Green-Red
connector.
Aux equipment
connections
Yellow-Green
Green-Yellow
43
Orange-White
Whrte-Green
see the explanation page preceding the charts.
- KSU
- -external lines connector
Pin
3
29
4
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
a
Wire color
White-Blue
T
T
T
____
-------
Line
No connectton
No connection
ET 1
ET 1
ET 2
ET2
No connection
No connection
No
No connection
No connection
No connection
No connection
No connectton
No connection
No connection
No connection
No
Auxiliary Ring Make
Auxiliary Ring Common
Auxiliary Ring Break
No connection
Page Relay Make
Page Relay Common
Page Relay Break
No connectron
Page Out Tip
Page Out Ring
No connection
No connection
No connection
No connection
No connection
No connection
P i nWire color
35
10
36
11
Red-Slate
Slate-Red
Black-Blue
Blue-Black
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
43
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
Yellow-Green
Green-Yellow
Yellow-Brown
Brown-Yellow
Yellow-Slate
Slate-Yellow
Blue-Violet
Violet-Orange
Orange-Violet
____
____
----------
wiring charts
15
KSU internal wiring
Pin
Wire color
26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4
101
101
102
102
103
103
104
104
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8
34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12
White-Slate
105
105
Red-Blue
Blue-Red
Red-Orange
106
106
107
107
108
108
109
109
110
110
111
III
38
13
39
14
Black-Green
Green-Black
Black-Brown
Brown-Black
40
15
41
16
42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20
46
21
Black-Slate
Slate-Black
Yellow-Blue
Blue-Yellow
Yellow-Orange
Orange-Yellow
Yellow-Green
Green-Yellow
Yellow-Brown
Brown-Yellow
Yellow-Slate
Slate-Yellow
47
22
48
23
49
24
50
25
Note:
Green-Red
Red-Brown
Brown-Red
Red-Slate
Black-Blue
Blue-Black
Black-Orange
Orange-Black
Service
Telephones (KSU)
T
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
T
T
T
I?
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
112
113
113
T
T
114
115
115
116
116
117
117
T
118
118
119
119
T
T
A
T
Orange-Violet
120
120
121
121
122
122
Violet-Green
Green-Violet
123
123
T
124
124
T
Brown-Violet
Violet-Slate
Slate-Violet
T
T
T
T
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
Music-on-hold ground
Music-on-hold input
Default DN
23122312223
24122412224
25122512225
27122712227
28122812228
33123312233
34123412234
35123512235
37123712237
38123812238
43124312243
44124412244
----
represent station connections and should not be confused with Tip and Ring on external
T and
lines. Station connections are non-polarized.
CAUTION: For “Music -on-hold”, ensure that the polarity of the audio input is the
and
to avoid
same as identified above for pins
damage to audio equipment .
Technical data
16
wiring charts
Station Module internal wiring
Pin
26
1
27
2
Wire color
While-Blue
Port
x01
x01
Service Telephones (SM)
T
T
T
3
29
4
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
a
34
9
35
10
11
37
12
13
39
14
40
15
41
16
42
17
43
la
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
23
49
24
50
25
T
T
T
Red-Blue
Blue-Red
Red-Orange
Orange-Red
T
T
Green-Red
Red-Brown
Brown-Red
Red-Slate
Black-Dluc
Blue-Black
Black-Orange
Orange-Black
Green-Black
Black-Brown
Brown-Black
Black-Slate
Slate-Black
Blue-Yellow
Yellow-Orange
Orange-Yellow
Yellow-Green
Green-Yellow
Yellow-Brown
Brown-Yellow
Yellow-Slate
Slate-Yellow
Violet-Blue
Blue-Violet
Violet-Orange
Violet-Green
Green-Violet
Violet-Brown
Brown-Violet
Violet-Slate
xoa
x09
x09
x10
x10
x11
x11
x12
x12
x13
x13
x14
x14
x15
x15
Xl6
Xl6
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
____
---____
____
----
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
____
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
a
a
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
no connection
no connection
no connection
no connection
no connection
no connection
no connection
no connection
no connection
no connection
no connectton
no
no
no
no connectlon
no connection
no connectlon
no connectlon
Note:
T and
represent station connections and should not be confused with Tip and Ring on
external lines. Station connections are non-polarized.
Note:
Port number code: see the explanation page preceding the charts.
Technical data
Not-star wirinq charts 17
Trunk Module with Loop Start Trunk Cartridge
external line wiring
Note:
TM
TC Slot
For other wiring arrangements see the sections on
Trunk Module wiring and DID Trunk Module wiring.
connector arrangement
RJ-21 connector
Pin
Blue-White
27
2
Orange-White
Green-White
6
32
7
33
a
34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12
Blue-Red
Red-Orange
Orange-Red
Red-Green
Green-Red
42
17
43
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24
50
25
Note:
Poll
Service
Line
Pin
T
26
1
27
2
No connection
No connection
N o connection
No
1
1
2
2
-------------
----
T
T
3
43
29 3
While-Green
White-Brown Green-While
4
Brown-White
T
3
29
4
30
3:
13
39
14
40
15
41
16
Slot 3
Wire color
26
1
____
____
Brown-While
White-Slate
Slate-White Red-Blue
____
____
Brown-Red
Red-Slate
Slate-Red
Black-Blue
Blue-Black
Black-Orange
Orange-Black
Black-Green
Green-Black
Black-Brown
Brown-Black
Black-Slate
Slate-Black
Yellow-Blue
Blue-Yellow
Yellow-Orange
Orange-Yellow
Yellow-Green
Green-Yellow
Yellow-Brown
Brown-Yellow
Yellow-Slate
Slate-Yellow
Violet-Blue
Blue-Violet
Violet-Orange
Orange-Violet
Violet-Green
Green-Violet
Violet-Brown
Brown-Violet
Slate-Violet
No connection
No
No connection
No
connectlon
T
No
No
No
No
connection
connection
connection
connection
T
4
------------5
5
6
6
------------7
7
T
____
____
No
No
No
No
connectlon
connection
connection
connectlon
x09
x09
x10
T
____
----
No
No
No connection
N o conncctlon
____
x11
x11
x12
x12
____
T
T
T
No
No
No
No
connection
connection
connectlon
connection
ET
ET
a
------------9
9
10
10
------------11
11
12
12
------------
Wire color
White-Blue
Blue-White
____
____
____
____
____
30
While-Slate
31
6
-------
Red-Blue
Blue-Red
____
____
____
____
32
7
33
a
-___
____
Red-Orange
Orange-Red
Red-Green
Green-Red
____
____
____
34
9
35
10
----
____
Red-Brown
Brown-Red
Red-Slate
Slate-Red
____
____
____
36
11
37
12
Black-Blue
Blue-Black
Black-Orange
Orange-Black
_--_
No connectlon
No connection
Auxiliary equipment can not be connected to the
connector.
explanation of Port codes, see the section called Port number coding on the wiring charts.
Technical data
18
Trunk Module wiring charts
Appendix B
Trunk Module wiring charts
Using the
wiring charts
Use the diagrams in this section when a
Trunk
Trunk Cartridges (TC) or
Module (TM) contains
mixture of
and DID or Loop Start
Chart:
cartridges
Trunk Module with
shows the
shows the
connections on the TM.
cross-connections:
to be used where
alone are installed.
To obtain the cross-connections for
across the column headings.
service, read
Example of how to read wiring charts for mixed
service
to be used where there is a mixture of
and Loop Start
DID,
To obtain the cross-connections for mixed service, match
Service columns on the appropriate charts in the example.
Technical data
Trunk Module wiring charts
Note:
19
and DID or
When installing a mixture of
Loop Start
it is important to cross-connect the
wiring for each type of TC to a separate distribution
block.
In addition, the cross-connections to each
distribution block must always begin at pins 26 and
1. This allows you to wire to the correct pins for an
connection and for an
connection.
Note:
To retain emergency telephone function, a DID or
Loop Start TC should go in the first slot of the TM.
cross connections
When you are required to connect two
distribution blocks together (connecting to another
Private Branch Exchange), you will need to make these
cross connections:
or
Back-to-back cross connections
1st
Next
distribution
distribution
block
block
T
R
T
R
E
SG
M
SB
SB
M
SG
E
Technical data
20
Trunk Module wirina charts
Trunk Module with
Trunk Cartridges
wiring connections
and
TM
connector arrangement
TC Slot
Pin
Slot 1
26
1
27
2
3
29
4
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
a
2
34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12
Slot 3
13
39
14
40
15
41
16
42
17
43
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
23
49
24
50
25
Note:
Wire color
Blue-While
White-Orange
Orange-White
Green-White
White-Brown
Slate-White
Red-Blue
Blue-Red
Red-Orange
Orange-Red
Red-Green
Green-Red
Red-Brown
Brown-Red
Red-Slate
Slate-Red
Black-Blue
Blue-Black
Black-Orange
Orange-Black
Black-Green
Green-Black
Black-Brown
Brown-Black
Black-Stale
Slate-Black
Yellow-Blue
Blue-Yellow
Yellow-Orange
Orange-Yellow
Yellow-Green
Green-Yellow
Yellow-Brown
Brown-Yellow
Yellow-Slate
Slate-Yellow
Violet-Blue
Blue-Violet
Orange-Violet
Violet-Green
Green-Violet
Violet-Brown
Brown-Violet
Violet-Slate
Slate-Violet
Port
connector .
Service
Line
Pin
T
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
26
1
27
2
White-Blue
3
29
4
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
Green-Whrte
x01
x01
x01
x01
E
SG
M
SB
T
Tl
x02
x02
E
SG
M
SB
T
E
SG
M
SB
T
Rl
T
RI
E
SG
M
SB
T
Tl
Rl
E
SG
M
ET
ET
Auxiliary equipment can not be connected to the
codes, see the section called
For an explanation of
Technical data
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
a
34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12
38
13
39
14
40
15
41
42
17
43
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
23
49
24
Wire color
Brown-White
Slate-White
Red-Blue
Blue-Red
Red-Orange
Orange-Red
Red-Green
Green-Red
Red-Brown
Brown-Red
Red-State
Slate-Red
Black-Blue
Blue-Black
Black-Orange
Orange-Black
Black-Green
Green-Black
Black-Brown
Brown-Black
Black-Slate
Slate-Black
Yellow-Blue
Blue-Yellow
Yellow-Orange
Orange-Yellow
Yellow-Green
Green-Yellow
Yellow-Brown
Brown-Yellow
Yellow-Slate
Slate-Yellow
Violet-Blue
Blue-Violet
Violet-Orange
Violet-Green
Green-Violet
Violet-Brown
Brown-Violet
No connection
No connection
connector.
number coding on the charts.
Trunk Module wiring charts
Example of how to read the
21
wiring charts
connections
Technical data
22
DID Trunk Module wiring charts
pendix C DID Trunk
wiring charts
Using the DID wiring charts
Use the diagrams in this section when a
Trunk
Module (TM) contains DID Trunk Cartridges (TC) or a
or Loop Start
mixture of DID and
Chart:
Trunk Module with DID cartridges
shows the 50-pin connections on the TM.
shows the
to be used where DID
cross-connections;
alone are installed.
To obtain the cross-connections for DID service, read across
the column headings.
Example of how to read wiring charts for mixed
service
to be used where there is a mixture of DID and
or Loop Start
To obtain the cross-connections for mixed service, match
Service columns on the appropriate charts in the example.
Note:
When installing a mixture of DID and
or
Loop Start
it is important to cross-connect the
wiring for each type of TC to a separate distribution
block.
In addition, the cross-connections to each
distribution block must always begin at pins 26 and
This allows you to wire to the correct pins for an
connection and for an
connection.
Technical data
.
DID Trunk Module wiring charts
Note:
23
To retain Emergency Telephone function with mixed
service, a DID or Loop Start TC should go in the first
slot of the TM.
DID supervisory signaling
Allowing this equipment to be operated in a manner that
does not provide for proper answer supervision signaling, as
outlined below, is in violation of FCC Part 68 Rules, and may
be in violation of local tariffs.
This equipment is designed to return supervisory signals to
the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) when the
DID calls are:
answered by the called station
answered by the attendant
routed to a customer controlled recorded
announcement
routed to a dial prompt
This equipment is designed to return supervisory signals on
all DID calls forwarded through the system back to the PSTN
within 20 of the call forwarding sequence being initiated.
Emergency transfer conditions
Every DID Trunk has a Control Circuit Interface
which
should be connected directly to the Central Office for
monitoring purposes.
If the
system loses power or the microcontroller on
the DID Trunk Cartridge malfunctions, the CCI signals the
Central Office that it can no longer handle DID calls. The
Central Office, by pre-arrangement, can then forward the
DID lines to other numbers. A POTS telephone can be
connected to the trunk module ET relay. (See the
Emergency Telephones section of the Installation chapter in
the Installer Guide.)
Technical data
24
DID Trunk Module wirinq charts
Note:
The CCI signaling to report power loss or
malfunction of the DID Trunk Cartridge is not
supported by all carriers. For carriers or installations
which do not use CCI signaling, the CCI and ET
connections should be treated as “No connection”.
Note:
When a DID TC is in the first slot of the TM, pins 26
and 1 of the 25-pair connector are diverted to pins
50 and 25 under emergency transfer conditions.
Technical data
DID Trunk Module wiring charts
25
Trunk Module with DID Trunk Cartridges and
wiring connections
TM
connector
connector arrangement
TC Slot
Slot 1
Pin
26
Line
Pin
White-Blue
T
1
1
‘26
1
27
2
White-Orange
Orange-White
T
27
2
White-Orange
3
Green-White
2
2
-------
3
29
4
30
5
Green-Whrte
Port
1
29
4
30
5
31
6
Brown-White
White-Slate
Slate-White
Red-Blue
Blue-Red
32
7
Red-Orange
Orange-Red
33
a
Slot 2
34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12
13
39
14
40
15
41
16
Slot 3
42
17
43
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
23
49
24
50
25
Note:
Note:
Note:
Wire color
Service
Wire color
Red-Green
Green-Red
Rctl-Brown
Brown-Red
Red-Slate
Slate-Red
Black-Blue
Blue-Black
Black-Orange
Orange-Black
Black-Green
Green-Black
Black-Brown
Brown-Black
Black-Slate
Slate-Black
Yellow-Blue
Blue-Yellow
____
____
____
Violet-Blue
Blue-Violet
Violet-Orange
Orange-Violet
Violet-Green
Green-Violet
Violet-Brown
Brown-Violel
Violet-Slate
CCI NC1
CCI
T
T
____
____
No
No
connection
connection
No
T
T
____
____
____
____
Yellow-Orange
Orange-Yellow
Yellow-Green
Green-Yellow
Yellow-Brown
Brown-Yellow
Yellow-Slate
No
No connection
No
No
connection
CCI NC1
CCI
T
____
____
----
a
a
No connection
No connection
No connection
No connection
-------------
T
9
9
10
10
------------11
11
12
12
------------____
No connection
No connection
CCI NC1
CCI
T
T
No connection
No
connection
No
connection
No
ET
ET
---____
____
------5
5
6
6
------------7
7
T
T
____
____
x11
x11
x12
x12
---____
____
------3
3
4
4
31
6
32
7
Brown-White
___
Blue-Red
Red-Orange
Orange-Red
___
33
a
34
9
35
10
____
____
____
36
11
37
12
____
____
13
39
14
40
15
____
.
---____
____
Red-Brown
Brown-Red
Red-Slate
Slate-Red
___
___
Black-Blue
Blue-Black
Black-Orange
Orange-Black
___
Black-Green
Green-Black
Black-Brown
Brown-Black
Black-Slate
Slate-Black
___
___
No
No connection
Auxiliary equipment can not be connected to the
connector.
Port codes are explained in the section
number coding on the wiring charts.
For CCI connections in Service column: NC1 stands for the normally closed relay and
common relay.
CCI signaling is not supported by all carriers. For carriers or installations which do not use
signaling, the CCI and ET connections should be treated as “No connection”.
CCI wiring is a non-standard wiring arrangement which has been submitted to the DOC.
the
Technical data
26
DID Trunk Module wiring charts
Example of how to read the DID wiring charts
(DID)
Wiring charts for mixed service
Shown here is an installation with two DID
Slots 1 and 2 and one
TC in Slot 3.
Slots 1 and 2: Only the
connccled.
and CCI leads are
Slot 3: All leads are connected.
(on the
Note that the
chart) begin on a new distribution block.
Line numbers begin at pins 26 and 1 lo indicate the
line.
Technical data
telemanuals.com
Glossary
l
e e e e e e e * e * e * e e e e * e e e e e e e * e e o e e e e * e
telemanuals.com
Glossary 1
Access code: A sequence of
characters used to gain entry into
system
any type of
programming.
Administration: A program that lets
one person in your office (the
System Coordinator) assign and
maintain certain settings on the
system.
Administration access code: To
enter Administration programming,
enter:
You
will be asked for an Administration
password.
Administration password: A one to
six-digit password which is used to
prevent unauthorized access to
Administration programming. The
Administration password can be
assigned and changed in
Administration programming.
Alarm code: A number which
appears on the Alarm Telephone’s
display, informing you that the KSU
has detected a fault in the system.
Alarm Set (Alarm Telephone): A
telephone which is designated to
system
receive reports of
problems. This function is usually
assigned to a Prime Telephone, but
this can be changed in Configuration
programming.
Analog Terminal Adapter
A
device which permits the connection
of analog telecommunication
devices such as FAX machines,
answering machines, and single line
system.
telephones to the
Programmed defaults for the
are automatically assigned by the
system.
Answer button: A telephone button
with an indicator which is used to
monitor another telephone. The
Answer button indicates incoming
calls destined for the other
telephone. Someone working at a
telephone with Answer buttons (a
receptionist, for example) can
receive all ringing and visual
indication of incoming calls for other
telephones, and answer those calls
when necessary.
One telephone can have up to four
Answer buttons. An Answer button is
automatically assigned to a
telephone when that telephone is
assigned an Answer DN.
Answer DN: The Directory Number
(DN) of a telephone that is
monitored by an Answer button. Up
can be assigned
to four Answer
to a telephone. This is done in
Configuration programming.
Answer mode: In
programming, this subheading
allows you to set the way in which
system will answer
the
incoming calls on loop start and
E&M trunks. The alternatives are
manual and auto.
Glossary
telemanuals.com
Glossary
Answer with DISA: In Configuration
programming, this subheading
allows you to set whether an
answer trunk will be answered with
Direct Inward System Access.
Automatic Hold: A feature which
automatically places an active call
on hold when you select another
line. Automatic Hold is assigned in
Configuration programming.
button: A memory button
which, if programmed, provides onetouch dialing of external or internal
numbers.
Automatic Privacy: See Privacy.
Auto-answer trunk: A trunk on
which calls are answered by the
system. The system either routes
the call to a target line, or provides
system dial tone or stuttered dial
tone (see Remote Access). How the
call is handled is determined by the
received digits which are all or part
of the telephone number used to dial
the call. See Manual-answer trunk.
Auto DN: The received number
system dial
assigned to
tone. If a caller using an
answer trunk calls a number which is
assigned as the Auto DN, the caller
hears system dial tone and can use
Remote Access features. See
Remote Access. The Auto DN is
assigned in Configuration
programming.
Automatic Dial: A feature that
allows you to dial without having to
pick up the receiver or select a line.
You must have a prime line to use
Automatic Dial.
Automatic Handsfree: A feature
which automatically activates
Handsfree operation when you make
or answer a call. Automatic
Handsfree is assigned in
Administration programming.
Glossary
Automatic Telephone Relocation:
A feature which lets a telephone
retain its personal and system
programming when it is plugged into
modular jack.
a different
Automatic telephone relocation is
enabled in Configuration
programming.
Auxiliary ringer: A separate
external telephone ringer or bell
which can be programmed to ring
when a line or a telephone rings. An
auxiliary ringer may be programmed
to ring only when the system is in a
particular service mode.
Programming of an auxiliary ringer is
done in both Administration and
Configuration programming.
B
Background Music: A feature
which iets you hear music from the
telephone. It
speaker of your
is available only if a music source
has been attached to the KSU.
Background music is set up in
Configuration programming.
B channels: The
and the
channels are paths for transmitting
digital voice or data. Each port
and one
number has one
DN associated with it.
telemanuals.com
Glossary
Busy Lamp Field (BLF): A device
with a liquid crystal display (LCD)
panel of indicators that shows the
status of up to 24 telephones in the
system. The BLF will show a
telephone as busy if it is active on a
call, has Do Not Disturb turned ON,
or is being used for programming.
The BLF attaches to the M7310
Telephone.
Button caps: Interchangeable
plastic caps which fit over the
telephones. They
buttons of
are used to indicate the features
programmed onto each
programmable memory button.
Button caps are either pre-printed or
have clear windows which allow you
to label the buttons.
Button Inquiry: With this feature
you can check the function of each
programmable button on your
telephone.
Bypass Restrictions: Overrides
any Call Restrictions applied to
specific System Speed Dial
numbers. Bypass Restrictions can
be turned on in Administration
programming.
C
Callback: If you park, camp, or
transfer a call to another telephone
and it is not answered there, it will
ring again at your telephone. How
long the system will wait before
Callback occurs is set in
Configuration programming.
Call Forward: With this feature you
can have all the calls arriving at your
telephone forwarded to another
system.
telephone in your
To have calls forwarded outside the
system, use Line Redirection.
Call Forward No Answer: A feature
which forwards all calls arriving at
your telephone to another
designated telephone in your
system after a specific
number of rings. Call Forward No
Answer is assigned in Administration
programming.
Call Forward On Busy: A feature
which forwards all calls at your
telephone to another designated
telephone if your telephone is busy.
This feature is assigned in
Administration programming.
Call Handling: In Configuration
programming, this heading covers a
number of settings which affect how
system handles calls.
the
Call Park: With this feature you can
place a call on hold so that someone
can retrieve it from any other
system by
telephone in the
selecting an internal line and
entering a retrieval code. The
retrieval code appears on the display
of your telephone when you park the
call. You can park up to nine calls on
the system at one time.
Call Park Callback: See Callback.
Glossary
4
Glossary
Call Park prefix: The first digit of the
retrieval code of a parked call. This
digit cannot conflict with the first digit
Line Pool
of any existing
access codes, the Direct-dial digit, or
the external line access code. The
default Call Park prefix digit is “1 It
may be set to none, in which case
Call Park is disabled. Call Park
prefix is assigned in Configuration
programming.
Call Pickup Directed: A feature
which lets you answer a call ringing
telephone by entering
at any
the internal number of that telephone
before taking the call. Call Pickup
Directed is activated in Configuration
programming.
Call Pickup Group: See Pickup
Group.
Call Queuing: If you have several
calls waiting at your telephone, you
can invoke the Call Queuing feature
to answer them in order of priority.
Priority is given to incoming calls,
followed by callback and camped
calls.
Camp-On: A feature which lets you
re-route a call to a telephone even if
all the lines on that telephone are
busy. To answer a camped call, use
Call Queuing or select a line if the
camped call appears on your
telephone. Priority is given to
queued calls over camped calls.
Camp timeout: In Configuration
programming, this subheading lets
you set the length of a delay before
a camped call is returned to the
telephone which camped the call.
Glossary
Capabilities: In Administration
programming, this section heading
covers the dialing filters, remote
access packages, set abilities, and
line abilities which can be assigned
lines, telephones, or
to
Class of Service passwords.
CAP assignment: In Configuration
programming, this subheading sets
telephones are
which
Central Answering Positions. Up to
five Central Answering Positions can
be installed in a single
system.
Central Answering Position (CAP):
A CAP is an M7324 telephone which
has been designated a CAP in
Configuration programming. The
CAP provides backup answering
and can be used to monitor the
system.
telephones within a
One or two CAP modules can be
attached to a CAP to inorease the
number of lines it can handle.
Central Answering Position (CAP)
module: A CAP module is
connected to an M7324 telephone to
provide 48 additional buttons which
buttons or
can be used as
Feature buttons. A maximum of two
CAP modules can be connected to a
single M7324 Telephone.
template: This is one of the
system templates. The
template assigns one
unique external line to each
telephone until the maximum
number of lines is reached
(example: Line 001 to telephone
2221, Line 002 to telephone 2222,
and so on). Any remaining
telephones do not receive a default
line assignment.
four
Glossary
Class of Service (COS): The set of
features and lines available
to the user for a call. The Class of
Service for a call is determined by
the Dialing Filters and Remote
Access Packages assigned to the
telephone in Administration
programming. Class of Service for a
call can be changed by entering a
six digit Class of Service password.
(Internal users cannot change their
access to features with a COS
password, only their dialing filters.)
Class of Service and Class of
Service passwords are assigned in
Administration programming. See
Remote Access.
Class of Service password: See
Class of Service.
Configuration: A type of
programming usually pet-formed by
the installer or service
representative. It establishes the
basic operation of trunks, lines, and
system.
telephones in a
Configuration access code: To
start Configuration programming,
enter:
You must also enter an installer
password before you can perform
Configuration programming.
Control Telephone: A Control
Telephone can place the lines for
which it has responsibility in or out of
a Service Mode. The Direct-dial
Telephone is a Control Telephone
for directing calls to the Extra
dial Telephone. A telephone is made
a Control telephone and has lines
assigned to it in Administration
programming.
5
COS: See Class of Service.
Cursor: A short horizontal line which
telephone
appears on the
display to indicate that characters
can be entered using the dial pad. .
Data Communications Interface: A
device which lets you attach
an RS-232 data device to your
system.
Data terminal: A device such as a
modem which can be used to
transfer data instead of sound over a
telephone network. You cannot use
programming to set up such
devices. See the documentation that
came with the device.
Date: See Show Time or Time and
Date.
DCI: See Data Communications
Interface.
Defaults: The settings for all
features when the system is first
installed. Defaults are determined by
the template chosen at startup.
Settings are changed from their
defaults in Configuration and
Administration programming. In this
manual, default settings are shown
in bold text.
.
Glossary
6
Glossary
Delayed Ring Transfer (DRT) to
Prime: After a specified number of
rings, this feature transfers an
unanswered call on an external line,
to the Prime Telephone associated
with that line. This feature is
activated in Configuration
programming.
Dialing filter: Through a
combination of restrictions and
exceptions, dialing filters prevent
certain telephone numbers from
being dialed. Dialing filters can be
applied to lines (line filters, remote
filters), to sets (set filters), to specific
lines on a set (line/set filters), and to
Class of Service passwords (user
filters, remote filters). The
system can handle up to 100 dialing
filters.
Dial mode: The dialing mode of a
line can be either Tone or Pulse.
Pulse is traditionally used by rotary
dial telephones. Tone is also
referred to as dual tone
multifrequency (DTMF) tones. Dial
mode can be changed in
Configuration programming.
trunk (Direct inward dialing
trunk): A trunk which permits a
caller who dials a particular number
to be connected directly to a target
system. This
line in the
enables a caller to reach someone in
your office without having to go
through the receptionist. A DID trunk
may also connect the caller to the
DN. A DID
Auto DN or the
trunk is used for incoming calls only.
See Trunk and Target Line.
Glossary
Direct-dial: A feature which lets you
dial a designated telephone in your
system with a single digit. As
many as five direct dial sets can be
established. Each telephone in the
system is assigned to one Direct-dial
telephone. There is a single, system
wide digit for calling the assigned
Direct-dial telephone of any
telephone. Direct-dial telephones are
established in Administration
programming. Telephones are
assigned to a Direct-dial telephone
in Administration programming.
Direct-dial #: In Configuration
programming, this subheading sets
the system wide digit used to call a
direct dial telephone.
Direct-dial number: The digit used
to call the Direct-dial telephone.
Direct Inward Dialing trunk: See
DID trunk.
Direct Inward System Access
(DISA): The feature which lets
remote users dial directly into the
system and use
features. Callers will hear stuttered
dial tone and will be required to
enter a Class of Service password to
gain access to the system. See
Remote Access.
Directed Pickup: See Call Pickup
Directed.
Glossary
Directory Number (DN): A unique
number which is automatically
assigned to each telephone or data
terminal. The DN, also referred to as
an internal number, is often used to
identify a telephone when settings
are assigned during programming.
Default DN assignments start at 21
in a two-digit (non-expanded)
system and 221 in a three-digit
(expanded) system.
Directory Number (DN) length: The
number of digits in a Directory
Number. A non-expanded system
can have a DN length of two to
seven digits. An expanded system (a
system with an Expansion Cartridge
installed) can have a DN length of
three to seven digits. All Directory
Numbers for the system must be the
same length. The default DN length
is two digits for a non-expanded
system and three digits for an
expanded system. The DN length
Externally
affects only internal
received numbers, including
received numbers for Target lines
, are
and the Auto and
governed by the Received Digit
Length setting.
DISA: See Direct Inward System
Access.
DN: The received number
Direct
assigned to the
Inward System Access facility. If a
caller dials a number which is
DN, the caller
assigned to the
hears stuttered dial tone and must
enter a Class of Service Password.
Once the password is accepted, the
caller hears system dial tone and
can use Remote Access features.
See Remote Access.
.
Disconnect Supervision: When
disconnect supervision is assigned
system
to a line, the
monitors the line to detect when an
external caller hangs up. This allows
the system to release the line for
other uses. Disconnect supervision
is assigned in Configuration
programming.
Display: A liquid crystal display
(LCD) on the
telephone that
guides you through feature operation
and
programming.
Display button: The
M7310
Telephone and M7324 Telephone
are each equipped with three
buttons located directly beneath the
display. During feature operation or
programming, some or all of these
buttons may be used to provide
further options. If an option is
available, it is shown in the bottom
row of the two row display, directly
above the corresponding display
button. Display buttons are
represented in this manual as
underlined capital, e.g.
Display digits: In Administration
programming, this subheading lets
you set whether an assigned name
or the actual number will be
displayed when someone uses a
system speed dial code.
DN: See Directory Number.
DRT delay: The number of rings
before a Delayed Ring Transfer
occurs. This is assigned in
Configuration programming.
DRT to Prime: See Delayed Ring
Transfer to Prime.
Glossary
8
Glossary
E
E&M trunk: A trunk through which
system connects to a
the
private telephone network. An E&M
tie trunk can be used for both
incoming and outgoing calls. E&M
trunks are supported only on an
system.
expanded
End-to-End Signaling: See Host
System Signalling.
Emergency Telephone: A single
line telephone (also referred to as a
telephone) that becomes
active when there is no power to the
Key Service Unit.
Event message: Event messages
are stored in the system log and
displayed during a Maintenance
session. They record a variety of
events and activities in the
system.
Exceptions: One component of a
Dialing filter. Exception-s are
numbers you can dial even if they
are forbidden by a more general
Restriction. See Restrictions.
Expanded system: A
system with an Expansion Cartridge.
Expansion Cartridge: A cartridge
which connects Trunk modules and
Expansion modules to the Key
Service Unit. Expansion Cartridges
are available with two or six ports.
Expansion module: Either a Trunk
Module or a Station Module. See
Trunk Module, Station Module, and
Expansion Cartridge.
Glossary
External call: A call to a destination
outside the
system.
External Call Forward: See Line
Redirection.
External code: The number you dial
to get an external line. By default it is
9, but this can be changed in
Configuration programming. You
not always need an external code. It
is primarily to support the
Telephone and single line
telephones using an Analog
Terminal Adapter.
External line: A line on your
telephone used for making calls to
destinations outside the
system.
External music source: See Music
source.
External paging: A feature you can
use to make voice announcements
over an externally-mounted
loudspeaker connected to the Key
Service Unit. The external speaker is
component and must
not a
be supplied by the customer.
Extra-Dial set: In Administration
programming, this heading lets you
assign an extra Direct-dial set when
a service mode is active. You can
have one Extra-Dial set for each of
the three service modes.
.
Glossary
9
G
Feature button: Many
features are invoked by pressing the
Feature button followed by a Feature
code. The feature button is also
used to exit a feature.
Feature Cartridge: A replaceable
cartridge containing the
features. The Feature Cartridge, a
combination of a Data Cartridge and
a Software Cartridge, is inserted into
the Key Service Unit.
Gain: In Configuration programming,
this subheading lets you change the
transmission level for signals on an
E&M trunk.
Group Listening: A feature which
allows you to have others in your
office hear a caller through your
phone’s speaker. The caller hears
you only when you speak into the
receiver and cannot hear other
people in the office.
Feature code: A number that is
used to activate a particular feature.
Forward: See Call Forward.
Forward delay: The number of rings
before an unanswered call is
forwarded to another telephone
when the Calf Forward No Answer
feature is ON. Forward delay is
assigned in Administration
programming.
Forward No Answer: See Call
Forward No Answer.
Forward On Busy: See Call
Forward On Busy.
Full
(on idle line): When
this feature is ON, if you select an
available line, and then do
something which selects another
line, the first line is put on hold.
Full Handsfree: See Handsfree.
Handsfree: A feature you can use to
make calls without using the
telephone receiver. Full Handsfree is
activated in Administration
programming. When it is activated, a
Handsfree/Mute button is
automatically assigned to the
telephone.
Handsfree (HF) Answerback:
When activated, this feature
automatically turns ON the
microphone at a telephone receiving
a Voice Call so that the person
receiving the call can respond
without lifting the receiver. It is
activated in Administration
programming.
Handsfree/Mute button: See
Handsfree.
Headset: A head-mounted or
mounted telephone receiver that is
used instead of the hand-held
receiver. Headsets are not
components and must be supplied
by the customer.
Glossary
Glossary
Held (Line) Reminder: A
telephone rings and displays the
message Held call when an
external call has been placed on
hold for a certain period of time. The
Held Line Reminder feature and
Remind delay are set up in
Configuration programming.
HF Answerback: See Handsfree
Answerback.
Hold button: This button is used to
suspend calls so that the person
using the telephone can perform
another task without disconnecting
the caller.
Hookswitch Flash: See Link time.
Host delay: This feature allows you
to assign the delay between the
moment an external line is selected
to make a call and the moment that
digits or codes are dialed out on the
line. The Host delay time is assigned
in Configuration programming.
Host System Signaling: (Also
referred to as End-to-End Signaling.)
telephones can access a
remote system or dial a number on
an alternate carrier by means of
Host feature activation, such as Link,
Pause and Run/Stop.
Hotline: This feature automatically
calls a pre-assigned number when
the telephone’s receiver is lifted or
button is
the
pressed. A Hotline number can be
an internal or external number.
Hotline is assigned in Administration
programming.
Hybrid template: One of the four
system templates. In the
Hybrid template, Line 001 appears
on each telephone, and each
telephone has access to Line Pool
A. The template is assigned in
System Startup.
An abbreviation of Intercom
button. This appears in
Configuration programming.
Individual
In Configuration
programming, this sub-heading is
used to change the internal number
telephone.
of a
Installer: Someone who installs the
equipment, and performs
System Startup and Configuration
programming. The Installer or the
System Coordinator can program
Administration settings.
Installer password: A 1 to 6 digit
password used to prevent
unauthorized access to
Configuration programming. The
default Installer password can be
changed in Configuration
programming.
Intercom button: A button which
provides access to internal lines
used for calls within a
system and access to external lines
through a Line Pool or external
code. A telephone may be assigned
zero to eight Intercom buttons. This
is done in Configuration
programming.
Intercom keys: See Intercom
button.
Glossary
Glossary 11
Internal line: A line on your
telephone dedicated to making calls
to destinations inside your
system. An internal line may still
connect you with an external caller if
youuseittoaccessalinepoolorto
call
pick up a call using
handling features such as Call Park
or Call Pickup Directed,
Internal number: A number (also
referred to as a Directory Number or
DN) that identifies a
telephone or device.
internal user: Someone using a
telephone within a
system.
K
Key Service Unit (KSU): The
central hardware component in the
system. The KSU has its
own processor and memory, and
provides a physical point of
connection for the various types of
devices, telephones, and expansion
The KSU
modules used in
can function on its own as a basic
telephones
system (with 24
and 8 external lines), or with the
addition of a Trunk Module (TM)
which supports more external lines,
or a Station Module (SM) which
telephones.
supports more
L
Line: The complete path of a voice
or data connection between one
telephone (or other device) and
another.
Line abilities: In Administration
programming, the heading under
which you assign Line Filters,
Remote Filters, and Remote Access
Packages to lines.
Line Access: In Configuration
programming, the heading under
which you assign an individual
telephone’s access to lines.
Line assignment: In Configuration
programming, the subheading under
which you define which lines are
accessible to an individual
telephone.
Line Data: In Configuration
programming, the heading under
which you assign certain settings of
individual lines.
Line filter: See Dialing filter.
Line names: In Administration
programming, this sub-heading
allows you to assign names to
external lines.
Line number: A number which
identifies an external line. The total
number of lines depends on how
many Trunk Modules are installed
and the number of Target lines.
Line Pool: A group of lines used for
making external calls. Line Pools
provide an efficient way of giving a
lines
telephone access to
without taking up many line buttons.
A line is assigned to be a member of
a Line Pool in Configuration
programming.
Glossary
Glossary
Line Pool access: In Configuration
programming, the sub-heading
under which you assign the Line
Pools that a telephone may access.
Line Pool access code: A number
that identifies a Line Pool. Line Pool
access codes are assigned in
“Configuration programming.
Line Pool codes: See Line Pool
access codes.
Line Profile: A feature you can use
to review the settings programmed
to lines in Configuration and
Administration programming. The
with this
settings cannot be
feature. Line profile is available only
on the M7310 and M7324
telephones.
Line Redirection: A feature which
allows you to redirect all calls on an
incoming line to a destination
system. Once a
outside the
line is redirected it cannot be
system.
answered within the
The system may be set up to give a
brief ring when a call comes in on a
redirected line. This feature differs
from Call Forward in two ways. It
redirects only external calls (not
internal calls) and it redirects calls to
destinations outside the system. Call
forward redirects calls only to
destinations inside the
system. See Call Forward and
Redirect Ring.
Line type: In Configuration
programming, this setting controls
whether a line is Public, Private, or a
member of a Line Pool.
Glossary
Link time: A specific time delay that
allows access to PBX features
system. Link time
through a
is also referred to as a “Hookswitch
Flash” or “Recall”. Link time is
assigned in Configuration
programming.
Loop Start Trunk: A type of
telephone trunk that provides a
connection to the public telephone
network.
Loop Start Trunk Cartridge: This
cartridge, when inserted into the
Trunk Module, provides the
connection to lines. See Trunk
Cartridge.
M
Telephone: A telephone with
a single line display and one
programmable memory button
without an indicator.
M7208 Telephone: A telephone with
a single line display and eight
programmable memory buttons with
indicators.
Telephone: A telephone
which has a two line display, three
display buttons, 10 programmable
memory buttons with indicators, and
12 dual memory programmable
buttons without indicators. An
M7310 can be equipped with a Busy
.
Lamp Field.
M7324 Telephone: A telephone with
a two line display, three display
buttons, and 24 programmable
memory buttons with indicators. An
M7324 telephone can be equipped
with a CAP module.
Glossary
M7900 Telephone: A telephone with
a touch screen display which
replaces the display and memory
telephones.
buttons of other
It provides simplified access to
Features and an interface to
computer driven applications.
Maintenance: A type of
programming you can use to
diagnose and repair problems in the
system. Maintenance
requires no programmable settings”
Manual-answer trunk: A trunk on
which calls are not automatically
system, but
answered by the
ring at telephones in the usual way.
See Auto-answer Trunk.
Memory buttons: Buttons which
can be programmed to dial
frequently used features or numbers
M7208,
automatically. See
M7324 and M7900
telephone entries for their exact
memory button configurations.
Message: If you call someone in
system and their
your
telephone is busy, you can send
them a message indicating that you
called.
Miscellaneous: A section heading
in Configuration programming that
has a collection of assorted
wide settings.
Music source: A radio or other .
source of music can be connected to
the Key Service Unit to provide
music for the Music on Hold and
Background Music features. A music
source is not part of the
system and must be supplied by the
customer.
Names: Names can be assigned to
System Speed Dial numbers,
external lines, telephones, and
Service Modes. This is done in
Administration programming. You
can use up to sixteen characters to
name a System Speed Dial number,
and seven characters to name a
telephone, line, or Service Mode.
If a Name has not been assigned,
the line number or DN will appear on
the display instead of a Name.
Night Service: See Service Modes.
Programming Overlay: A
paper template which is placed over
the top four memory buttons with
or M7324
indicators on the
Telephone during programming. The
overlay labels indicate the special
function that each of the four buttons
takes on in programming.
0
On hold: In Configuration
programming, this setting controls
whether external callers hear music,
periodic tones, or silence when they
are placed on hold.
Overlay: See
Overlay.
Programming
Glossary
14
P
Page: A feature you can use to
make announcements over the
system. You can choose
Internal Page (announce over the
telephone speakers), External Page
(announce over an
mounted, customer-supplied
loudspeaker), or both Internal and
External Page.
Page Zone: An area in the office
that receives internal Page
announcements independently of
the rest of the office. Each Page
Zone is identified by a number.
Telephones are assigned to Page
Zones in Administration
programming.
Park prefix: See Call park prefix.
Park timeout: The time before an
unanswered parked call calls back to
the telephone which parked it. Park
timeout is defined in Configuration
programming. See Call Park.
Password: A password is a specific
sequence of digits that you enter to
gain access to
programming, to override dialing
restrictions, or to use Remote
A password is
Access with
required for System Startup and
Configuration programming and may
be required for Administration
programming. See Class of Service
password.
Pause: A character which inserts a
1.5 second delay in a dialing
sequence on an external line.
Glossary
PBX template: See Private Branch
Exchange template.
Personal Speed Dial: Two-digit
codes (71-94) can be programmed
to dial external telephone numbers.
Personal Speed Dial numbers are
programmed for each telephone,
and can be used only at the
telephone on which they are
programmed.
Pickup Group: A telephone can be
placed into one of nine Call Pickup
Groups. A call ringing at a telephone
within a Pickup Group can be picked
up at any other telephone within the
same Pickup Group. A telephone is
assigned to a Pickup Group in
Administration programming.
Pool: See Line Pool.
Port number: The identification
number of a specific point of
connection at the Key Service Unit,
Station Module, Trunk Module, or
Expansion Cartridge. KSU ports are
numbered 1 and 2. Expansion
module ports are numbered from 3
to 8. The numbering of Trunk and
Station module ports is dependant
upon the KSU or Expansion Module
port into which they are plugged.
Pre-dial: A feature that allows you to
enter a number and check it on your
telephone display before it is actually
dialed. If the number is incorrect,
you can edit it. The number is dialed
only when you pick up the receiver
or select a line.
Glossary
Prime line: The line on your
telephone which is automatically
selected when you lift the receiver,
button or
press the
use an external dialing feature. A
Prime Line is assigned to a
telephone in Configuration
programming.
Prime Set (Prime Telephone): A
telephone which provides backup
answering for incoming calls on
external lines. The Prime Telephone
for a line will ring for any
unanswered calls on that line. A
Prime Telephone is assigned to a
line in Configuration programming.
Priority Call: A feature you can use
to make a Voice call to a telephone
which is idle, busy or has Do Not
Disturb activated. This feature is
enabled for a telephone in
Administration programming.
Privacy: This feature determines
user may select a
whether a
line in use at another telephone and
join an established call. Privacy is
assigned in Configuration
programming, but can be turned ON
and OFF by users during individual
calls.
Private Branch Exchange
template: One of the four
System Startup templates. In the
Private Branch Exchange (PBX)
template, each telephone is
assigned access to the first Line
Pool.
15
Private network: A telephone
network consisting of owned or
leased telephone lines used to
connect different offices of an
organization independently of the
public network.
Private to: In Configuration
programming, this heading allows
you to assign a line to one telephone
as a Private line. The line cannot
appear on any other telephone,
except the Prime Telephone for that
line. Private lines cannot be placed
into Line Pools.
Programming Overlay: See
Programming Overlay.
Programming reminders: Charts
on which you can record some
commonly-used settings from
Administration and Configuration
programming to keep the
system’s records up-to-date.
Programming: Setting the way the
system will work.
Programming includes system-wide
settings and individual telephone
and line settings.
Public line: An external line which
can be assigned to any telephone
and to many telephones. A line is
assigned as Public in Configuration
programming.
Public network: The regular
telephone network which connects
most homes and businesses.
Private line: See Private to.
Glossary
16
Glossary
R
Radio Frequency (RF) Filter Kit: A
device designed to alleviate
problems associated with radio
frequency interference that may be
experienced when a headset or
-external auxiliary ringer is used with
a telephone.
Recall: See Link time.
Rec’d #: In Configuration
programming, this heading allows
you to assign certain digits received
(that is, all or part of a
by
telephone number dialed by an
external caller or received over a
network link), to a particular target
line. This means that when an
external caller dials this number, the
target line will ring. Received digits
may also connect the call to the Auto
DN, establishing a
DN or the
Remote Access call.
Rec’d length: In Configuration
programming, the subheading which
allows you to set the number of
digits received from an external
source that will be used to route a
call to a target line.
Received digit length: See Rec’d #
length.
Received digits: See Rec’d #.
Receiver: The handset of a
telephone.
Glossary
Redirect ring: In Administration
programming, this subheading
allows you to set whether a line that
has been redirected through Line
Redirection will give a short ring on
those sets on which the line
appears.
.
Remind delay: When a call has
been on hold for a set period, the
telephone beeps and displays the
11. This period is
message
1 d
the Remind delay. It is set in
Configuration programming.
Remote access: The ability to dial
system from outside
into a
the system and make use of
features. The lines,
selected
features, and dialing capabilities
available to a remote user are
determined by the Class of Service.
If the remote access line is
answered with DISA, the user must
enter a Class of Service password to
system’s
gain access to the
features.
Remote access dial filter: See
Remote filter.
Remote access package: In
Administration programming, this
subheading lets you set up access
to Paging and Line Pools for remote
users.
Remote capability: That subset of
features which is available to
users connected through remote
access.
Glossary
Remote filter: A dialing filter applied
to a line in order to control which
digits can be dialed during an
incoming remote access call. It is the
equivalent of a set filter for a remote
user.
Remote paging: This feature allows
remote users to use the
paging feature. Access to this
feature is governed by the Class of
Service for the call. See Remote
Access and Class of Service.
Remote User: Someone who calls
system from a
into a
telephone outside that system and
features or lines. See
uses
Remote Access.
Restrictions: One component of a
Dialing filter. Restrictions are
numbers you cannot dial when that
dialing filter is in effect. See
Exceptions.
Ringing: In Configuration
programming, the heading which lets
ring
you assign a line to ring
at a telephone. If a line has been
assigned as “No ring”, an incoming
call is shown by a flashing indicator
only.
Ringing Sets (Ringing
Telephones): Those telephones
which have been assigned to ring
when a line has been placed into a
Service Mode. Ringing Telephones
are assigned in Administration
programming.
button: The Release button
.
ends a call in the same way that
hanging up the receiver does. It may
also be used to end Startup,
Configuration programming,
Administration programming,
Maintenance sessions and feature
operations.
Run/Stop: A character which
creates a breakpoint in a
programmed external dialing
sequence. When you press a
prograrnmed key, the system dials
the number up to the run/stop. When
you press it again, the system dials
the digits following the run/stop.
S
SAPS: See Station Auxiliary Power
Selective line redirection: See Line
Redirection
Service Modes: Certain features
become active when one or more
lines are placed into a Service
Mode. This is usually done to
provide special ringing and
telephone access after normal office
people
hours, or when there are
available to answer calls. Service
Modes settings are assigned in
Administration programming.
Set: A telephone.
Set ability: In Administration
programming, the subheading under
which set filters, line/set filters, and a
variety of system features are
assigned to individual telephones.
Glossary
18
Glossary
Set Copy: In Configuration
programming, Set Copy allows you
to copy programmable settings from
one telephone to another of the
Set Copy provides two
options: duplicating System Data
and User Data, or duplicating
System Data only. Set Copy does
not provide the same copy capability
as the COPY display button, which
is more selective of the settings that
can be duplicated.
Shift button: A small triangular
button beside the dual memory
buttons on the upper half of the
Telephone. You press the
shift button to store or access
features on the top half of the dual
memory buttons.
Set filter: See Dialing filter.
Signal: In Configuration
programming, this subheading
allows you to change the type of
signaling used by an E&M or DID
trunk.
Set lock (Telephone lock): This
feature allows you to limit the
number of features that may be used
or programmed at a telephone. Full
set lock allows very few changes or
features, Partial set lock allows
some changes and features, and No
set lock allows any change to be
made and any feature to be used.
Set lock is assigned in
Administration programming.
Set Names: In Administration
programming, this sub-heading
allows you to assign Names of up to
seven characters to telephones.
Set Profile: A feature you can use to
review the settings programmed to
telephones in Configuration and
Administration programming. The
settings cannot be changed with this
feature. Set profile is available only
on the M7310 and M7324
telephones.
Set Relocation: See Automatic
Telephone Relocation.
Glossary
Show Time: While on a call,
accessing this feature lets you see
the current date and time on the
telephone display.
Square template: One of the four
system templates. In the
Square template, Lines 001 and 002
are assigned to each telephone. The
Square template is the default during
System Startup. All defaults shown
in bold in this manual are those of
the Square template.
Station: An individual telephone or
device.
other
Station Auxiliary Power Supply
(SAPS): A device which provides
telephone that is
power to a
connected more than 305 m
(1000 ft) and less than 760 m
(2500 ft) from the Key Service Unit,
or to a CAP module.
.
Station Module (SM): An expansion
module that allows you to connect
system to 16 more
the
telephones or other devices. See
Expansion Cartridge.
Glossary
Supervised line: A line for which
disconnect supervision is enabled. If
an external caller hangs up, the
system detects the
disconnection and hangs up its line
also. See Disconnect Supervision.
Supervision: In Configuration
programming, the subheading under
which you choose the time, in
milliseconds, before a line
disconnection is made on a
supervised line.
System Coordinator: The person
responsible for customizing the
system through
Administration programming and for
helping co-workers use the
system.
System Data: 1. An option in the
Set Copy function. System Data
refers to the system settings which
apply to all telephones and lines.
System Data consists of the
programmable settings from System
Startup, Configuration programming
and Administration programming.
2. In Configuration programming, the
heading under which you can
change various settings associated
with the directory numbers and
received numbers of the
system.
System Speed Dial: In
Administration programming, a
heading under which you can assign
up to 70 numbers as system speed
dial numbers.
I
System Speed Dial Code: A
digit code (01 to 70) that can be
programmed to dial a telephone
number up to 24 digits long. System
Speed Dial codes are programmed
system in
for the entire
Administration programming.
System Startup: When a
system is first installed and powered
up, System Startup must be
performed before Configuration or
Administration programming can be
done. Startup initializes the system
programming to defaults.
System Startup access code: To
be in S stem Startu enter:
An Installer password is required
before System Startup can begin.
T
Tandem call: A call established
when a remote user dials into the
system and uses the system
to place an outgoing call. The
combination of the incoming and
outgoing calls forms a tandem call.
See Remote Access.
Target line: A line dedicated to
receiving calls from outside the
system. Several Target
Lines, each identified by a different
received number, can be attached to
a single trunk. You cannot make
outgoing calls on a target +ine.
Target lines require DID or
answer trunks.
System Speed Dial Name: In
Administration programming, a
subheading under which you can
assign a name to a System Speed
Dial Number.
Glossary
20
Glossary
TCM line (Time Compression
Multiplexing line): A two-wire digital
station loop joining the
connect at the Key Service Unit to a
telephone.
Template: A system-wide setting
assigned during System Startup.
The most important effects of a
template are the number of lines
assigned to the telephones, and the
assignment of Line Pool access.
Templates will also assign other
system-wide defaults, such as Prime
line and Ringing line assignment. It
is important to understand that a
template is provided only as a
convenience, and that any settings
affected by a template can be
changed. The four templates are
PBX, Hybrid, and Square.
Tie line: See E&M trunk.
Time: See Show Time or Time and
Date.
Time and Date: The current Time
and Date appear on the display of
telephones. The Time
idle
and Date can be changed in
Administration programming.
Transfer: A feature which lets you
redirect a call to another telephone.
There are four types of Transfer;
Transfer using Hold, Transfer with
Announcement, Transfer without
Announcement, and transfer using
Unsupervised Conference.
Transfer Callback: If a transferred
call is not answered after a specific
number of rings, the call will return to
the telephone which made the
transfer. The number of rings can be
assigned in Configuration
programming. Transfer Callback
does not apply to calls transferred
externally.
data: In Configuration
programming, the heading under
which the capabilities and
characteristics of the
system’s lines and trunks are
established.
Trunk: The physical connection
system and the
between the
outside world using either the public
telephone system or a private
network. One trunk may provide
connections for several lines. See
Auto-answer trunk and
answer trunk.
Trunk Answer: A feature you can
use to answer a call on any line that
has an active Service Mode, even if
that line does not appear on your
telephone. Trunk Answer is enabled
in Administration programming.
Trunk Cartridge (TC): A Trunk
Cartridge is inserted into a Trunk
Module and provides connections for
lines. Up to three cartridges can be
used in one Trunk Module.
Depending on your system and your
.
needs, you may have any
combination of Loop Start, DID or
E&M Trunk Cartridges.
Trunk data: In Configuration
programming, the subheading under
which you set how the trunks of the
system will operate.
Glossary
Glossary 21
Trunk mode: In Configuration
programming, the heading under
which you assign the mode of
operation for a Loop Start trunk.
There are two modes, supervised
and unsupervised. See Disconnect
Supervision.
Trunk Module (TM): An expansion
module that provides up to 12
additional external trunks, depending
on the number and type of Trunk
Cartridges installed. See Expansion
Cartridge.
Voice Call: A feature you can use
make an announcement or begin a
conversation through the speaker of
another telephone in the
system. The telephone you call will
not ring. Instead, the person you call
will hear a beep and then your voice.
Their telephone will beep
periodically to remind them that their
microphone is open.
U
Unsupervised line: A line for which
disconnect supervision is disabled. If
an external caller hangs up, the
system does not detect the
disconnection and does not hang up
its line. See Disconnect Supervision.
User Data: User Data is an option in
the Set Copy feature. User Data
refers to the personal settings which
are unique to an individual
telephone, and are not programmed
in Configuration or Administration
programming. User Data is
programmed at each telephone.
These settings, for example, include
Personal Speed Dial and the
assignment of programmable
memory buttons.
User Filter: See Dialing filter.
Glossary
telemanuals.com
telemanuals.com
Index
Time and Date 7-15
8-32
6
Network Troubleshooting
power specifications 14-l
220
power specifications 14-l
a
Access code
external line 6-61, 12-37
Line pool 6-62
Line pool in a network
8
Startup 5-3
denied
Conference 12-27
Line Redirection 12-59
Speed dial 12-83
Using
features 12-3
Accidental Disconnect Protection
12-85
Administration
Capabilities
Class of Service
passwords 7-51
Line Abilities 7-48
Remote Access
Packages 7-29
Telephone (Set) Abilities
7-31
defaults
Dialing filters 7-23
Direct-Dial 7-19
Names 7-l 1
overview 7-1, 7-21
Password
programming 7-68
programming 7-21
Programming reminders
7-70
saving changes 7-4
Service Modes 7-57
System Speed Dial 7-5
Network Troubleshooting
1 l-4
Network Troubleshooting
Alarm Codes
in System Administration Log
8-30
in System Test Log 8-27
overview 8-32
table of 8-33
troubleshooting 8-34
Alarm Telephone 6-55, 8-32,
description 12-77
joined
Call Pickup 12-21
Dialing 12-40
parked
Call Park 12-18
Analog Terminal Adapter (see
Answer buttons 6-34, 12-22,
12-67
Answer DN 6-34
ringing 6-35
Answer mode 6-4
programming 6-l 9
Answer with
programming 6-20
Answerback 7-37
Answering machine 2-2.
2-2
External line access code
6-61
Long tones 12-63
troubleshooting 1 O-5, 1 O-20
Attendant by-pass 6-6
DR4 Installer Guide
telemanuals.com
2 Index
Auto DN 6-9
characteristics 6-54
deleting 6-54
length 6-54
Auto-answer
DN 6-9
Auto DN 6-9
6-8
network troubleshooting 11-4
trunks 6-3
Auto-answer trunk
definition
12-68
buttons 12-68
cannot be programmed
IO-IO
feature description
2
Host System Signaling
losing data after power
failure
3
full
12-l 2
Speed dial 12-83
6-23
Automatic Dial 12-31
Automatic Handsfree 12-30
programming 7-37
Automatic Start time
programming 7-62
Automatic Stop time
programming 7-62
Automatic telephone relocation
12-85
Auxiliary Equipment
wiring chart 14-14
Auxiliary power supply 2-18
Auxiliary Ringer
installation 3-37
programming 3-37, 6-29,
7-39
Service Modes 7-65
troubleshooting 1 O-5, O-22
Auxiliary ringing
on target lines
DR4 installer Guide
B
, B2 Directory Numbers 14-1
Background Music 6-52, 12-85
installation 3-38
troubleshooting 1 O-l 4
BLF 2-3
troubleshooting 1 O-5
Blocking calls 7-52
Bounce 14-5
Bridge taps 3-3
Busy Lamp Field (see BLF)
Busy status 2-3, 2-5
Busy tone
cadence 14-3
Button assignment
M7100 3-51
M7208 3-51
3-52
M7324 3-53
Button caps 3-47
installation 4-23
erased
2
Button Inquiry 3-47
feature description 12-45
Buttons
Answer 3-50, 12-67
12-68
erasing programming 12-45
external line 3-50
Feature 12-67, 12-68
button 3-49
indicators 12-6
Hold 12-67
Line 12-68
Memory 12-67
Programmed 12-68
Release 12-69
Volume 12-69
telemanuals.com
Index
C
Cable routing 3-4
Cable troughs 2-4
Installation 3-13
Cables
DS-30 2-7
length 3-3
Cadences 14-3
1 blocked
Priority call 12-73
Call Forward
Delayed Ring Transfer 6-44
feature description
5
No Answer 7-41
On Busy 7-40
Override
5
Call Forward No Answer 12-l 5
Call Forward on Busy
Call Handling 6-42
capacity 1-3
defaults 5-8
Call Park 12-6
changed
6-47
feature description
8
Park prefix 6-46
Timeout delay 6-47
Call Pickup 12-6
assigning groups 12-22
feature description 12-20
priority of alerting calls 12-22
programming 7-38
Call Queuing 12-5
Call timer 12-90
Callback 12-5
delay 6-46
on target lines
Calls
incoming 12-l 1
denied
Camp on 12-23
Camp On
Call Queuing 12-24
feature description 12-23
on target lines l-20
ringing 12-7
Camp timeout delay 6-48
Can't
again
Dialing 12-40
send
Message 12-65
Cancel
a feature 12-4
Cancel
Message 12-65
1
Message 12-65
CAP module 2-5; 12-78
assigning to system 6-56
line assignment 6-33
relocating 6-57
troubleshooting 1 O-5
Capabilities
copying data 4-14
defaults 5-l
Dialing filters 7-23
Line filters 7-55
programming 7-21
Remote filters 7-56
User filter 7-54
Cartridge
Data 2-9
Feature 2-9
installation 3-32
replacing 9-l 1
Software 2-9
troubleshooting 1 O-6
Central Answering Position (see
CAP module)
template
default 5-5
default button assignment
3-51
Class of Service 12-86, 12-98
copying data 7-53
defaults 5-13
for Internal Users 7-52
DR4 Installer Guide
telemanuals.com
4 index
Line filter 7-55
number of 7-53
overview 7-51
password
6-8
Remote package 7-56
security 7-52
upgrading from DR3 7-53
User filter 7-54
with
DN 7-51
Codes
external line 6-61, 12-37
Line Pools 12-56
Line pool in a network 1-18
in System Administration Log
8-30
Compatibility
Electromagnetic 14-4
Components
replacing 9-9
Conducted emissions 14-4
Conducted immunity 14-5
Conference
feature description 12-25
on M7100 telephone 12-28
transferring 12-26
with Privacy 12-25
programming 6-l 1
Received number 6-25
Signal type 6-21
System Data 6-66
Data 6-l 2
Trunk mode 6-18
Trunk type 6-15
Confirmation tone
cadence 14-3
Connectivity Test 8-21
procedures
8-23
.
result codes 8-25
results 8-24
Contrast Adjustment 12-30
Control Circuit Interface 14-23
Control telephone 12-78
assigning to lines 7-58
programming 7-59
Copy 6-73
programming settings 4-12
System Data 6-73
User Administration data
6-73
Copying data 6-14
COS (see Class of Service)
COS Line filters (see Line filters
Conference 12-27
Configuration 12-86
Answer mode 6-19
Answer with
6-20
Call Handling 6-42
copying data 6-14
defaults 5-5
Full
6-23
gain 6-22
Line Access 6-31
Line Data 6-26
Miscellaneous 6-51
hardware 3-5
overview 6-1
password
changing 6-64
COS passwords 7-51
changing 12-29
feature description 12-29
programming 7-53
COS Remote Packages (see
Remote Packages (COS))
Crest factor 14-l
Cross Connections
E
Trunk Cartridge
14-19
external wiring 3-21
internal wiring 3-25
Customizing 7-1
Customizing the telephone
Contrast Adjustment 12-30
Dialing modes 12-31
Handsfree 12-30
DR4 Installer Guide
Index 5
Language 12-32
moving line buttons 12-33
Pulse/Tone Dialing 12-34
ringing 12-35
D
Data Cartridge 2-9
installation 3-32
replacing 9-12
Data Communications Interface
(see
Data device 2-6
Date
programming 7-15
DCI 2-6
Defaults 5-5
Dialing filters 7-24
Delay
Call Forward No Answer
7-42
Camp timeout 6-48
Delayed Ring Transfer 6-45
Disconnect Supervision 6-60
Held Line Reminder 6-43
Host 6-59
6-60
Park timeout 6-47
Transfer Callback 6-46
Delay Dial 6-21
Delayed Ring Transfer 6-44,
12-5
on target lines
Denied in
Call Pickup 12-21
Line Pools 12-56
Priority call 12-73
Service modes 12-75
Device
State 8-9
Version number 8-9
Device type 8-8
Diagnostics
overview 8-21
Dial mode
programming 6-23
Dial tone
6-8
Host delay 6-59
troubleshooting 1 O-l 2
Dial-O (see Direct-Dial)
Dial-O Telephone (see
Dial Telephones)
Dialing
Direct-Dial 12-37
pulse or tone 12-34
restrictions 7-23
unrestricted 7-24
Dialing filters 1-3, 7-23
defaults 5-l 1, 7-24
deleting 7-26
number of 7-24
programming 7-27
Dialing Modes
Automatic 12-31
Pre-Dial 12-32
Standard 12-31
Dialing plan 1-3, 1-18
DID line
as Prime line 6-40
in line pools 11-20
DID Trunk Cartridge (4 trunks)
2-20
Emergency telephone 1423
installation 3-l 7
troubleshooting I O-1 7
wiring chart 14-25
DID trunks 1-2,
0, 6-5
as Prime line
Configuration requirements
I-1 1
incoming calls 1 1
Remote access 6-9
signal setting 6-21
Direct-Dial telephone 12-78
programming 7-40
Direct Inward Dial (see DID)
DR4 Installer Guide
6 Index
Direct Inward System Access
(see DISA)
Direct-Dial
defaults
0
DN length 6-53
number 6-52
programming 7-19
Directed pickup
feature description 12-20
programming 6-49
Directory Number (see DN)
Directory numbering
with six-port Expansion
Cartridge
2
with two-port Expansion
Cartridge 14-l 1
Directory Numbers 12-86, 14-9
and
in a network
1-3,
6-7
calling
with 1
4
dial tone 6-8
DN
characteristics 6-54
deleting 6-54
description 12-98
length 6-54
programming 6-53
Disabling 8-6, 8-l 1
modules 8-17
Discharge
Electrostatic 14-4
Disconnect protection 12-85
Disconnect supervision 6-4,
6-18, 12-87
troubleshooting
Display
one line 12-2
Prime telephone
0
two line 12-2
Time and Date 7-16
DN
Changing 6-67
length
DR4 Installer Guide
cautions 6-69
changing 6-69
DND (see Do Not Disturb)
Do Not Disturb 12-6, 12-9,
12-92
feature description 12-43
DRT (see Delayed Ring
Transfer)
DS-30 cables 2-7
connecting to Expansion
Cartridge 3-31
installation 3-29
DTMF
on E M trunks 6-14
receiver inaccessible
DTMF lines
Line Profile 4-30
DTMF signaling
programming 6-23
E
E M lines (see also E M
trunks)
Line Profile 4-28
Restrictions 7-32
E M Trunk Cartridge
cross connections
9
installation 3-17
troubleshooting 1 O-l 7
wiring charts 14-20
E M trunks 1-2, 6-5
Answer mode 6-l 9
as Prime line l-9
configuration requirements
1-9
definition 1-7
Full
6-23
.
gain 6-22
incoming calls 1-8
line numbering 6-16
Private Network 6-8
pulse signaling 6-23
Remote access 6-7, 6-8
Index 7
Signal setting 6-21
voltages on leads
3
Trunk Cartridge (2
trunks) 2-20
Electrical requirements 14-4
Electromagnetic compatibility
14-3, 14-4
Electromagnetic interference 3-1
Electrostatic discharge
Electrostatic interference 3-1
Emergency calls
Priority call 12-73
Emergency telephone 12-79
connecting to a Trunk
Module 3-35
on DID trunk cartridge 14-23
with E
Trunk
Cartridge 14-l 9
connecting to KSU 3-34
testing 3-36
wiring 3-34
Emissions
Conducted 14-4
Radiated 14-3
Enabling 8-13, 8-20
Enter
Speed dial 12-83
Page 12-72
Environmental requirements 3-l
Environmental specifications
14-2
Event messages
complete list of 8-40
overview 8-37
severity 8-37
table of most frequent 8-38
Exceptions
programming 7-28
removing 7-25
Exceptions in a Dialing filter 7-24
Exclusive Hold 12-51
feature description 12-51
Expansion Cartridge
adding to non-expanded
system 9-2
installation 3-l 5
Module numbering 8-16
port numbering 14-11
replacing 9-l 2
six-port 2-8
troubleshooting 1 O-7
two-port 2-8
Extension (see Telephone)
Extension numbers (see
Directory Numbers)
External call
ringing 12-7
External Code 6-61
External line Access Code 12-37
External lines 6-3
buttons 3-50
installation 3-21
line numbers 6-2
Line/telephone filter 7-33
wiring chart 14-14
External paging
troubleshooting 1 O-24
Extra-Dial telephone 12-79
programming 7-65
F
FAX machine 2-2
Feature
cancelling 12-4
overview 12-2
programming 12-45
restrictions 7-34
troubleshooting 1 O-5
Feature Button 12-67
Feature Cartridge 2-9
installation 3-32
replacing 9-l 2
troubleshooting O-6
Filters 1-l 5
Capabilities 7-23
DR4 Installer Guide
8 Index
Dialing 7-23
Line 7-48
Line with COS 7-55
Line/telephone 7-33
Remote Access dialing 7-49
Telephone 7-32
User 7-54
Forward
Call forward
6
Forwarding
Call forward No Answer 7-41
Call Forward On Busy 7-40
Forwarding (see Call Forward)
Full
6-23
Full Handsfree
programming 7-36
G
Gain
programming 6-22
General Administration
defaults 5-10
Get call first
Call Park 12-18
Gord 1-26
Group Listen
feature description 12-48
Group Pickup
feature description 12-20
H
Handsfree
Automatic 7-37
etiquette 12-50
Full Handsfree 7-36
Handsfree Answerback 7-37
12-6
feature description 12-49
button 3-49
Hardware
replacing 9-9
DR4 Installer Guide
Headset
answering a call 12-70
Full Handsfree 7-36
operating 12-69
troubleshooting 1 O-5
Hearing Aid Compatibility 3-ii,
3-42
Held Line Reminder 6-43
delay 6-43
on target lines
Hold
description
12-51
Listen on hold 12-51
music, tones or silence
12-52
on
telephone 12-52
programming music 6-50
Hold Button 12-67
Hold or release
Feature programming 12-47
Host delay 6-59
Host System Signaling 12-53
Link 12-53
Pause 12-53
Programmed Release 12-54
Run/Stop 12-54
Timed Release 12-54
Hotline
programming 7-44
Hotline telephone 12-79
Humidity 3-l
requirements 14-7
Hung lines
releasing 12-87
troubleshooting 1 O-l 3
Hybrid template
default 5-5
default button assignment
.
3-51
I
Idle Display 7-16
Index
immunity
conducted 1 4 - 5
radiated 1 4 - 4
Impedance
external music source 3-38
external Paging output 3-39
Internal call
ringing 12-7
Internal numbers (see Directory‘
Numbers)
Internal wiring
installation 3-25
Invalid code
Line redirection
Indicators 12-6
Installation
Auxiliary Ringer 3-37
brackets 3-11
Buttoncaps
3-47, 4-23
Cable trough 3-l 3
DID Trunk 3-17
DS-30 cables 3-29
E M Trunk 3-l 7
Emergency Telephone 3-34
environmental requirements
3-1
Expansion Cartridge 3-15
external lines 3-21
external paging system 3-39
Feature Cartridge 3-32
internal wiring 3-3, 3-25
Loop Start Trunk 3-17
mounting brackets 3-11
music 3-38
telephones 3-42
power bar 3-54
220
powering up 3-56
Startup 5-l
trunk cartridge 3-17
turning system ON 3-56
wall-mounted telephone 3-43
warnings 3-iv
Installer password (see also
Configuration password) 6-76,
8-2
changing 6-64
Intercom button 3-49
programming 6-38
Interference 3-1
Using
Invalid
features 12-3
location
Customizing your telephone
12-34
Invalid
Page 12-72
K
Key Service Unit (See KSU)
KSU 12-86
connecting an Emergency
Telephone 3-34
Directory numbers 1 4 - l 0
disabling 8-17
enabling 8-20
external line
wiring chart 14-14
hanging on mounting
brackets 3-8
internal line
wiring chart 14-15
physical dimensions 3-7
port numbers 14-10
power source 3-2
power specifications 14-1
Relay
replacing 9-9
status 8-l 5
troubleshooting 1 O-6, 1 O-1 6
turning ON 3-56
.
L
Language choice 12-32
Last Number Redial
feature description 12-37
DR4 Installer Guide
10 Index
Lightening protectors 3-iv
Line
buttons 12-68
maximum number of
6-33
moving 12-33
disabling 8-11
enabling 8-13
external 6-3
line numbers 6-2
hung
indicators on telephones
12-6
Line Profile
Names 7-13
Pools 6-26
Prime 6-39, 12-88
Private 6-26, 12-88
Public 6-26
ringing
preference 12-89
programming 6-35
search for idle 6-27
Target 1-2, 1-5, 6-2, 6-6,
12-89
Tie 1-2
troubleshooting when hung
10-13
Line Abilities
defaults 5-12
Line Filter 7-48
programming 7-48
Remote Filter 7-49
Remote Package 7-50
Line Access 6-31
defaults 5-7
Line assignment
programming 6-33
Line data 6-26
copying 4-l 3, 6-14
defaults 5-5
Line
denied
Call Pickup 12-21
Line redirection 12-59
DR4 Installer Guide
Line filter l-1 5, 7-23
defaults 7-48
programming 7-49
Line filters (COS)
defaults 7-55
programming 7-55
Line in use
Hotline 12-80
Line per set filters 1-15
Line pool 6-26
access 6-27
Access code 6-62
programming 6-37
as Prime line 6-40
in a dialing plan
DID lines 11-20
feature description 12-56
Hotline 7-43
preventing access 7-52
programming 6-27
Ring Again 12-57
System Speed Dial 7-7
Line Pool Access Codes
valid digits 14-9
Line Profile 4-24
Troubleshooting a network
11-2
Line Redirection l-41,
6
Call forward No Answer 7-41
feature description 12-58
hung lines
Redirect Ring 7-42
Line Supervision 12-87
Line/telephone filter
number of 7-33
programming 7-34
Link 12-53
feature description 12-53
.
Link Time 6-58
Listen on Hold 12-51
Logs
System Administration 8-29
System Test 8-26
Index 11
Long Tones
feature description 12-63
Loop resistance 3-3
Loop Start lines (see Loop Start
trunks)
Loop Stan Trunk Cartridge (4
lines) 2-20
installation 3-17
troubleshooting 1 O-l 7
Loop Start trunks l-2, l-1 2, 6-4
as Prime line
configuration requirements
1-13
dial mode 6-23
Full
6-23
incoming calls l-1 2
Line Profile 4-28
remote access 6-7
Loop Supervision 6-18
M
telephone
conferencing 12-28
default button assignment
3-51
description 2-11
display button equivalent
12-2
external line access code
6-61
Hold 12-52
Intercom buttons 6-38
selecting lines 12-4
M7208 telephone
default button assignment
3-51
display button equivalent
telephone 2-13
default button assignment
3-52
M7324 telephone 2-14
as CAP 6-56
default button assignment
3-53
Maintenance 8-1
Alarm codes 8-32
Diagnostics 8-21
Emergency Telephone 3-36
Event Messages 8-37
Line Profile 4-24
Module Status 8-14
Status 8-5
Records 8-43
Set Profile 4-24
System Administration Log
8-29
System Test Log 8-26
System Version 8-3
Maintenance records 8-46
Maintenance session 8-2, 8-46
Make c a l l f i r s t
Camp on 12-24
Group Listen 12-48
calls first
Conference 12-27
Manual-answer
trunks 6-3
Mechanical requirements 14-5
Memory buttons 12-67
programming 12-45
denied
Message 12-65
Messages 12-93
answering 12-64
erasing 12-64
feature description 12-64
sending 12-64
Miscellaneous 6-51
defaults 5-9
Modems 2-2
Module Status
overview 8-l 4
procedure 8-15
Mounting brackets 2-15, 3-8
Moving telephones 6-58
DR4 Installer Guide
Index
Music 12-85
background 6-52
installation 3-38
License for 3-iii
on Hold 6-50
troubleshooting 1 O-l 7
Music on Hold 12-52
Line Pools 12-56
Message 12-66
No calls w a i t i n g
Answering the telephone
12-8
No
lines
number
Last number redial 12-41
line selected
Answering the telephone
12-9
Dialing 12-41
Hotline 12-80
line
Line redirection 12-59
number
Saved Number redial 12-41
saved number
Saved Number redial 12-41
call
Voice Call 12-101
Not in Service
DTMF misconfiguration 1 l-6
in service
Call Forward 12-l 7
Camp on 12-24
Numbering
Directory Numbers 14-9
Ports 14-8
Names
defaults 5-l 0
entering from
4-10
length 7-l 2
moving telephones 7-l 2
programming 7-l 1
Service Modes 7-60
System Speed Dial 7-8
valid characters 7-l 2
Headset 12-70
Network
Configurations l-22
Private
Public 1-23
security l-3, l-1 4
unified dialing plan
8
Network Troubleshooting 1
cos
getting wrong tone
getting wrong tone 1
far-end disconnecting 11-7
not getting through
2
Remote features
getting wrong tone 1
Networking l-l to 1-42
Call handling capabilities
Service
Service modes
No button
Call Pickup 12-21
Dialing
DR4 Installer Guide
5
0
Off-premise Extensions (see
On-hook dialing
Open Switch Interval (OSI) 6-18
programming 6-60
Optional Equipment .
troubleshooting 1 O-5
OPX 3-iv
OSI (see Open Switch Interval)
line
Line redirection 12-60
index
Overflow call routing 6-28
on target lines 1-21
Overflow tone
cadence 14-3
Overlay
for programming 4-5
P
Page
feature description 12-71
installation 3-39
preventing access 7-52
remote access to l-28, 1-35
troubleshooting 1 O-24
zones 7-39, 12-71
timeout
Page 12-72
Page Zone
programming 7-39
busy
Page 12-72
Park den i
Call Park 12-19
Park prefix
programming 6-46
Park timeout delay 6-47
full
Call Park 12-19
Password
Administration 7-68
Configuration 6-64
COS 1-8, 7-51
defaults 5-14
Pause
feature description 12-53
PBX template
default 5-5
default button assignment
3-51
PC interface card 2-16
Personal Speed Dial 12-82
Pick
UP
receiver
Call Queuing 12-9
Pickup 12-20
Call Pickup programming
7-38
Directed 6-49
Pickup denied
Call Pickup 12-21
code
Line redirection 12-60
.
Port numbering 14-8
default KSU
with six-port Expansion
Cartridge 14-l 2
with two-port, Expansion
Cartridge
Status
device type 8-8
overview 8-5
procedures 8-7
State 8-9
Version Number 8-9
Ports
Connectivity test 8-23
Power bar
installation 3-54
220 V 2-17
installation 3-54
with 4 or more modules 3-54
Power failure 5-2
Power source 3-2
Power specifications
Power supply
auxiliary 2-18
Pre-Dial 12-32
Prime line 12-88
Hotline 7-43
on DID trunks
1.
on E M trunks l-9
on Loop Start trunks
3
programming 6-39
Prime Telephone 12-6,
Delayed Ring transfer to
6-44
displays
DR4 Installer Guide
14 Index
misdialed calls 1 l-6, 11-l 0
programming 6-28
Answering the telephone
12-9
Priority Call
feature description 12-73
programming 7-47
ring 12-7
Priority
Priority call 12-73
Privacy
creating a conference 12-25
on target lines
programming 6-30
Private lines 6-26, 6-34
Call pickup 7-38, 12-22
Private network l-30
and HOLD
Feature Programming 12-47
Programmed Release
feature description
Programming 4-1, 7-56
Administration 4-3, 7-4
Administration password
7-69
Alarm telephone 6-55
an example 4-17
Answer mode 6-19
Answer with
6-20
Auto DN 6-54
Automatic Handsfree 7-37
Auxiliary Ringer 6-29, 7-39
Background music 6-52
Call Forward On Busy 7-40
Call forward No Answer 7-41
Call Handling 6-42
Call Pickup (group) 7-38
Camp timeout delay 6-48
CAP 6-56
Capabilities 7-21
Configuration 4-2
Control telephone 7-59
copying data 6-73
Installer Guide
copying settings 4-12
COS Line filter 7-55
COS passwords 7-53
COS Remote Packages 7-56
Date 7-15
defaults 5-5
Delay Ring 6-45
Delayed Ring Transfer 6-44
Dial mode 6-23
Dialing filters 7-23
Direct-Dial 7-19
Direct-Dial number 6-52
Direct-Dial telephones 7-40
Directed pickup 6-49
DN 6-53, 6-54
DN length 6-70
Exceptions 7-28
External Code 6-61
Extra-dial telephone 7-65
features 12-45
Full
6-23
Full Handsfree 7-36
gain 6-22
Handsfree Answerback 7-37
Held Line Reminder 6-43
delay 6-43
Host delay 6-59
Hotline 7-44
Intercom buttons 6-38
introduction 4-7 to 4-16
Line Abilities 7-48
Line
6-32
Line Data 6-26
Line filters 7-49
Line Pool access 6-37
Line pool access code 6-62
Line Profile 4-24
Line/telephone filters 7-34
Link time 6-58
Miscellaneous 6-51
music on hold 6-50
Names 7-l 1
On hold 6-50
6-60
Index 15
Overlay 4-5
Page Zone 7-39
Park prefix 6-46
Park timeout 6-47
Prime line 6-39
Prime telephone 6-28
Priority Call 7-47
Privacy 6-30
Received number 6-25
Received number length
6-72
Redirect Ring 7-43
reminders 7-70
Remote Access Packages
7-29
Remote Filters 7-49
Remote Packages
Restrictions 7-27
reviewing 4-25
ringing 6-36, 7-65
saving changes 6-l 1
Service Mode 1 7-60
Service Mode 2 7-67
Service Mode 3 7-67
Service Modes 7-58
Automatic Start time
7-62
Automatic Stop time
7-62
Name 7-60
Set Profile 4-24
Signal type 6-21
Startup
System Data 6-66
System Startup 4-2
Telephone (Set) Abilities
7-32
Telephone filter 7-33
Telephone relocation 6-58
Time 7-15
Transfer Callback delay 6-46
Transfer delay 6-45
Trunk Answer 7-64
Trunk data 6-15
Trunk mode 6-18
Trunk type 6-15
User filter 7-54
Programming Overlay 4-5
Programming Record 4-6
Programming reminders 4-22
Public line 6-26
Public network l-3, 1-4, l-23
Pulse dialing 12-34
Pulse
signaling
.
programming 6-23
Queuing
priorities 12-5
R
Radiated emissions 14-3
Radiated immunity 14-4
Radio frequency interference 3-l
Radio noise emissions 3-iv
Real Time Processor (RTP) 8-3,
8-44
Rec’d #(see Received digit
string)
Recall tone
cadence 14-3
Received digit string 6-12
Received number 6-25
length 6-25
changing 6-71
mismatching 11-6, 11-l 0
programming 6-25
uniqueness 6-25
4321
Line redirection 12-60
Redirect Ring 12-7
programming 7-43
Regulatory requirements 14-3
Relay contacts 3-40
DR4 Installer Guide
16 Index
Release a call
Answering the telephone
Release button 12-69
Relocating
telephones 12-85
Remote Access
busy tone
1
cos 1-14
getting wrong tone 11-l 5
dialing filters 1-l 5
1 I-14,
getting wrong tone 1 l-14
misdialed calls 11 0
not getting through 11-l 2
over a private Network 12-95
over a public Network 12-95
remote features
getting wrong tone
7
security l-1 4, 12-97
tones 12-96
troubleshooting 1
0
trunks required 12-99
using
12-96
Remote Access dialing filter 7-49
Remote Access Packages
COS passwords 7-29
defaults 5-l 1, 7-29
number of 7-29
programming 7-30, 7-50
Remote feature access
Link time 6-58
no response to code 11-9
Remote filters l-l 6
programming 7-49
Remote Packages (COS)
programming 7-56
Repair
Addresses 3-iii
Replacing a device 8-5
Replacing components 9-1
Reset memory 5-4
Resonance 14-5
DR4 Installer Guide
call 11-8
Dialing 12-41
Line redirection 12-60
Restrictions
bypassing 7-10
for external users 7-23
for internal users 7-23
number of 7-25
on E M lines 7-32
programming 7-27 .
removing 7-25
Restrictions in a Dialing filter
7-24
Result Codes 8-25
Ring Again 12-93
feature description 12-38
Ring back tone
cadence 14-3
Ring splash
cadence 14-3
Ring type 12-35
Ringer (See Auxiliary Ringer)
Ringer Equivalence Number 3-ii
Ringing 6-35, 12-7
Changing the ring 12-35
electrical load required 3-ii
On/Off for lines 12-89
programming 7-65
volume 12-35
Interface 3-24
wiring chart
4
Interface
wiring charts 14-20
Run/Stop
feature description 12-54
Restricted
S
.
SAPS 3-3
Saved Number Redial
feature description 12-38
Security l-3, 1-14
cos 1-14
Dialing filters
5
index 17
Service Modes 7-57
Automatic 7-61
cancelling 12-75
Control Telephone 7-58,
12-75
default start and stop times
7-61
defaults 5-13
Extra-Dial telephone 7-64,
12-79
feature description 12-75
Manual 7-61
Names 7-60
ON and OFF 7-61
on target lines
programming 7-58
ringing 7-65
Service Mode 1 7-60
Service Mode 2 7-67
Service Mode 3 7-67
Trunk Answer 7-64
locked
Using
features 12-3
Set Abilities (see a/so
Telephone Abilities)
defaults 5-l 3
Set copy 6-73
Set filters
5
Set Profile 4-24
troubleshooting a network
11-2
Shock fragility 14-5
Signal
programming 6-21
Signaling
Host System 12-53
Single line telephone 2-2
Software Cartridge 2-9
installation 3-32
replacing 9-l 3
Software incompatibility 8-3
Software upgrading 9-13
Speaker
Paging
telephone 7-37
Specifications
environmental 14-2
loop power 14-2
power
Speed Dial (see also System
Speed Dial and Personal Speed
Dial)
cannot be programmed
1 o-1 5
Class of Service 12-84
defaults
0
feature description 12-82
Personal programming
12-82
Square template
default 5-5
default button assignment
3-51
Standard Dial 12-31
Startup
access code 5-3
after power failure 5-2
default templates 5-5
programming
5-2
8-9
Station
wiring 3-25
Station Auxiliary Power Supply
(see SAPS)
Station Module
internal lines
wiring chart
6
power specifications
Station Module 2-19
adding to system 9-8
disabling 8-17
enabling 8-20
hanging on mounting
brackets 3-8
number required 3-5
physical dimensions 3-7
replacing 9-9
DR4 Installer Guide
18 Index
status 8-14
troubleshooting 1 O-l 9
Status
Module 8-14
8-5
Supervision 12-87
System Administration Log 8-37,
8-46
Alarm 8-30
erasing 8-31
overview 8-29
procedures 8-30
time of occurrence 8-31
System Data 6-66
copying 6-73
defaults 5-9
System Processor (SP) 8-3, 8-44
System Speed Dial 7-5
bypassing restrictions
0
changing name 7-9
changing the number 7-6
defaults
0
Display Digits 7-8
Host System Signaling 7-6
line selection 7-7
Name 7-8
programming 7-5
System Test Log 8-37
Alarms 8-27
erasing 8-28
overview 8-26
procedures 8-27
time of occurrence 8-28
System Version 8-3
procedures 8-4
T
Target lines 1-2, 6-2, 6-6, 12-89
as Prime line 6-40
Call Forward On Busy 7-40
definition
line numbers 6-2
Line Profile 4-31
DR4 Installer Guide
on non-expanded systems
6-71
reaching
instead 1
reaching
instead
11-10
received number 6-25
troubleshooting
0
Telephone
Administration lock 12-35
Alarm 6-55,
12-77
Calls cannot be made
changing DN 3-59
Control 7-59, 12-78
Customizing 12-30
Direct-Dial 7-19, 7-39, 12-78
disabling 8-11
display unreadable 1 O-l 6
Emergency 12-79
enabling 8-l 3
Extra-Dial 12-79
Extra-dial 7-65
Hotline 12-79
installation 3-42
M7100 2-l 1
M7208 2-l 2
2-l 3
M7324 2-l 4
moving 3-58
Names 7-l 1
no dial tone
Prime 6-28, 12-6, 12-81
relocating 6-58
replacing 3-58
State 8-9
technical specifications 14-2
troubleshooting
troubleshooting 1 O-l 0, 1 O-l 5
Version Number 8-9 .
wall-mounting 3-43
wiring 3-25
Telephone Abilities 7-31
Automatic Handsfree 7-37
Auxiliary Ringer 7-39
Call forward No Answer 7-41
index 19
Call Forward On Busy 7-40
Call Pickup (group) 7-38
Direct-Dial Telephones 7-39
Full Handsfree 7-36
Handsfree Answerback 7-37
Hotline 7-43
Line/telephone filter 7-33
Page Zone 7-39
Priority Call 7-47
Redirect Ring 7-42
Telephone Administration
Lock 7-34
Telephone filter 7-32
Telephone Administration Lock
7-34
programming 7-36
Telephone buttons 12-67
Telephone data
copying 4-l 3
Telephone filter
programming 7-32
Telephone relocating 12-85
‘Temperature requirements
14-6
Templates
changing 5-4
default 5-5
Test 100 (See Connectivity test)
Their list full
Message 12-66
Tie lines 1-2, 1-24
Time
display 12-90
feature description 12-90
Time and Date
defaults 5-l 0
programming 7-l 5
Timed Release
feature description 12-54
Timer
for calls 12-90
Tone dialing 12-34
Tones
at Remote Access 12-96
cadences 14-3
Long Tones 12-63
On Hold 6-50
denied
Long Tones 12-63
Transfer
feature description 12-91
using conference
using Hold 12-92
with announcement 12-91
Transfer Callback delay
denied
ii
Transfer 12-94
Transfer using Conference
on target lines l-39
Transporting a system 14-6
Data 6-l 2
Troubleshooting
**Line 11-2
**Set 11-2
Alarm codes 8-32
1 O-20
Auxiliary ringer O-22
Connectivity test result code
8-25
Diagnostics 8-21
event messages 8-37
Expansion Cartridge 1 O-7
Feature Cartridge 1 O-6
features 1 O-4
hung lines 1 O-l 3
in a Network (see Network
Troubleshooting)
KSU 10-6,
Maintenance 8-l
Module Status 8-14
music 1 O-l 4
no dial tone 1 O-1
Optional Equipment
overview 1 O-l
paging 1 O-24
Status 8-5
Station Module 1 O-l 9
DR4 Installer Guide
20 Index
System Administration Log
8-29
System Test Log 8-26
telephones 1 O-l 0, 1 O-l 5
Trunk Cartridge 1 O-7, 1 O-l 7
Trunk Module 1 O-l 8
Trunk Answer
feature description 12-20
programming 7-64
Trunk Cartridge 2-20
DID 1-2
disabling 8-l
E&M 1-2
installation 3-l 7
Loop start 1-2
number required 3-5
replacing 9-11
troubleshooting 1 O-7, 1 O-1 7
Trunk data
Copying 6-14
defaults 5-5
programming 6-l 5
Trunk mode
programming 3-17, 6-18
Trunk Module 2-21
adding to system 9-6
connecting an Emergency
Telephone 3-35
disabling 8-l 7
enabling 8-20
hanging on mounting
brackets 3-8
number required 3-5
physical dimensions 3-7
power specifications
replacing 9-9
status 8-14
troubleshooting 1 O-l 8
Trunk type 6-15
programming options 6-16
Trunks 6-3
auto-answer l-5, 6-3
definition l-5
DID I-10, 6-5
DR4 Installer Guide
E M 1-7, 6-5
line numbers 6-2
Line Profile 4-28
Loop Start I-12, 6-4
manual-answer 6-3
wiring 3-21
U
Line redirection 12-61
Upgrading 9-l
Class of Service passwords
7-53
from two to six-port
Expansion Cartridge 9-4
with Expansion Cartridge 9-2
software 9-13
with Station Module 9-8
with Trunk Module 9-6
Unsupervised Conference 12-91
on target lines l-39
User Administration data
copying 6-73
User filter
defaults 7-54
programming 7-54
Version number 8-9
Version number 8-9
Vibration endurance 14-5
Voice Call 12-71
deny
00
feature description
00
Handsfree Answerback 7-37,
.
00
muting tones 12-100
Voice Call Deny 12-6
Voltages
Index
Volume
Button 12-69
W
Wink Start 6-21
Wiring
Auxiliary ringer 3-38
charts,
3
Auxiliary Equipment
14-14
KSU internal lines
5
KSU external lines 14-14
Interface
14-14
Station Module internal
lines
6
Trunk Module with DID
Trunk 14-25
Trunk Module with
E
Trunk 14-20
Trunk Module with Loop
Start Trunk 14-17
external lines 3-21
external music source 3-39
external paging system 3-40
internal station 3-25
Wiring requirements 3-3
list full
Message 12-66
DR4 Installer Guide
Introduction to
Components
2
Introduction to programming
3
Administration
Telephone features
5
Telephone user cards
Glossary
7
telemanuals.com
Introduction
to
telemanuals.com
Contents i
Contents
Welcome to
Customizing
1
2
Personal programming 2
Administration programming 3
Example: Time and Date 3
Example: Names 3
Configuration programming 4
Example: Ringing Lines 4
Example: Delayed Ring Transfer 4
Assisting your co-workers 5
Preparation 5
Objectives 6
Suggestions 6
When to call your Service Representative 8
Configuration programming 8
Introduction to
telemanuals.com
Welcome to
1
Welcome to
Rather than the standard opening, congratulating you on
Business
acquiring your new Meridian
Communication System, we’d just like to say. . .
“Welcome aboard!”
It always takes a bit of time to settle into using any new
equipment. For that reason, we advise new customers to
appoint a
System Coordinator to help.
The Coordinator becomes the “local expert” and is
to your organization. The
responsible for customizing
Coordinator also assists co-workers while they learn to make
part of their day-to-day routine.
This Guide will help a
System Coordinator to:
customize your system
assist co-workers in using
features
know when to call your Service Representative (or
Installer).
Introduction to
telemanuals.com
2 Customizing
Customizing
“One size fits all” is not a particularly good idea for telephone
systems. You need features and services that match the way
your
operates.
has been designed to allow
initial customizing and subsequent updating of information as
your office grows and changes.
can be customized at three levels:
Personal programming
done by telephone users
Administration programming
usually done by you
Configuration programming usually done for you by
the Installer or Service Representative.
Personal programming
Personal programming allows you to personalize individual
telephones by programming features and telephone
specific memory buttons. It is not necessary to
numbers
lift the receiver to program your telephone.
Ask your co-workers which features they will use, and help
them program these features onto memory buttons on their
own telephones.
Everyone can also program specific characteristics of the
telephone to suit their needs. These include, for example,
the way the telephone sounds when it rings, the brightness
of the display, and Personal Speed Dial numbers.
Telephone
Personal programming is described in the
to each of your co-workers. The user
is
User
provided with each telephone and describes the operation of
that particular type of telephone.
Introduction to
Customizing
3
Administration programming
Administration programming allows you to change various .
system-wide settings, as well as some specific settings for
each line or telephone. This is the program that you will use
most often. For a detailed description of Administration
procedures, see the Administration chapter of this Guide.
Your system comes pre-programmed with default settings
that may initially be sufficient for your needs. Familiarity with
Administration programming will help you to determine which
settings, default or customized, will be most useful for your
off ice.
Example: Time and Date
In areas where clocks are adjusted for Daylight Savings
Time, the time and date display on
telephones must
be reset. This simple procedure must be performed twice a
year using the Administration program.
Example: Names
The Names feature adds a personal touch to
It
associates your co-workers’ first or last names with their
telephone. When you program co-workers’ names, the name
of the caller appears on the telephone display of the person
called. Names are also associated with any messages sent.
Changes in co-workers should be reflected in the names that
, appear in Administration.
Introduction to
Customizing
Configuration
programming
Configuration programming may be done for you by your
telephone company. They connect the
system to the
telephone network through this program. Specific
wide parameters are set up in Configuration, such as internal
number length. Some data referring to each line can be
turned ON or OFF, such as Privacy and Autohold.
You must know when to call your Service Representative to
change some aspect of your system’s Configuration. Your
Installer should give you a list of settings for Configuration
programming.
Example: Ringing Lines
With
your co-workers can have more than one line
appearing on their telephones. If every line were to ring,
pandemonium would result. To avoid this, Configuration
programming enables your Installer to choose which lines
appearing on a particular telephone will or will not ring.
Example: Delayed Ring Transfer
If Delayed Ring Transfer is turned ON, an unanswered call
will be transferred to a designated telephone, perhaps to a
secretary.
Introduction to
Assisting your co-workers 5
Assisting your co-workers
It is human nature to ask someone how to do something
rather than read a user guide.
The System Coordinator may be asked to demonstrate to cofeatures. We make
workers how to select and use
the following suggestions to help you prepare for that
possibility.
Preparation
Start by familiarizing yourself with the procedures for using
features. Examine the components of your
system, identifying the buttons on the different types of
telephones. Read the Telephone user cards chapter
of this Guide for more information on each telephone.
Familiarize yourself with the various Programming
Reminders provided at the end of the Administration chapter
of this Guide. You will distribute copies of these reminders to
your co-workers after filling in information such as System
Speed Dial numbers and names.
It is important for everyone in the office to know that you are
the System Coordinator and to know when you are available
for consultation.
You may wish to schedule sessions for small groups or
provide individual assistance to co-workers for programming
features on their
telephones.
Introduction to
6 Assisting your co-workers
Objectives
..
Your co-workers should be able to do the following:
Make and answer a call.
Operate
features, following the display
messages and using the Feature button and feature
codes.
Program features and
numbers onto memory.
buttons. Erase information programmed on memory
buttons. Use Button Inquiry to see what is programmed
on any button.
Program and use Speed Dial. Understand the
difference between Personal Speed Dial and System
Speed Dial. Program numbers in Personal Speed Dial.
Know where to find more information.
Suggestions
Make sure that each of your co-workers has a
Telephone User Card, a
Telephone Feature
Card, and a
Receiver Card (installed under the
telephone).
receiver of the
Show your co-workers where you keep this Guide in
case they want a further explanation of any feature.
Photocopy, use, and distribute the appropriate
Programming reminders, which can be found in the
Administration chapter of this Guide. They provide a
record of programmable settings that your co-workers
may need for frequent reference, such as names,
internal numbers, or call pickup groups.
Assist your co-workers in placing and answering calls
in different ways. Move from simply picking up the
receiver to other methods like using
and making Voice Calls.
Introduction to
Assisting your co-workers 7
Point out that there are two types of calls internal calls
within your company, and external calls to locations
outside your company. Explain how these affect
different features.
Explain the, operation of features. Describe how all
features begin the same way: you press the button
marked “Feature”, enter a code using the dial pad, and
follow the instructions on the display. Your co-workers
should be reassured that the display will prompt them
through any feature operation.
Show your co-workers the adjustments they can make
to the Ring Type and display brightness on their
telephones.
Help your co-workers as they program Autodials and
features on memory buttons. “Home” is always a good
first choice to program as an
number.
Frequently used features can be programmed onto
memory buttons for one-touch access. This is the
easiest and fastest way to use a feature.
Explain the difference between System Speed Dial and
Personal Speed Dial. Show your co-workers how to
program their own Personal Speed Dial numbers and
distribute a System Speed Dial list. A master copy of
the System Speed Dial list can be found with other
Programming reminders in the Administration chapter
of this Guide.
Introduction to
8 When to call your Service Representative
When to call your Service
Representative
Ask your Service Representative for the service
department’s telephone number, and write it down. If you
have problems with your
equipment, telephone your
Service Representative. If you have problems with
programming or using any of the features, first read the
appropriate section of this Guide and try again before calling
your Service Representative.
Record the name and telephone number of the Service
Representative here:
Configuration programming
Your Service Representative may have consulted with you or
with your management before programming the best
Configuration for your
system. If you need more
information, or if you would like to have any of your system’s
settings changed or reviewed, contact your Service
Representative.
Introduction to
telemanuals.com
Components
telemanuals.com
Contents
Contents
About this chapter 1
Analog Terminal Adapter 2
Busy Lamp Field 3
Cable troughs 4
Central Answering Position module 5
Data Communications Interface 6
DS-30 cables 7
Expansion Cartridge 8
Feature Cartridge 9
Service Unit 10
telephone 11
M7208 telephone 12
M7310 telephone 13
M7324 telephone 14
Mounting brackets 15
PC Interface card 16
Power bar 17
Station Auxiliary Power Supply
Station Module 19
Trunk Cartridge 20
.
Trunk Module 21
Components
telemanuals.com
About this chapter 1
About this chapter
This chapter briefly describes the main components of the
Modular system. The components are arranged in
alphabetical order. For quick reference, each component’s
description appears on a separate page. illustrations help
you identify each component.
Components
telemanuals.com
2 Analog Terminal Adapter
Analog Terminal Adapter
The Analog Terminal Adapter
converts the
digital interface to analog signals. This allows the connection
of analog devices such as single line telephones, FAX
machines, modems, and answering machines. The
allows single line telephones to access
features such
as Transfer, Call Pickup, and Exclusive Hold.
Analog Terminal Adapter
Components
telemanuals.com
Lamp Field 3
Busy Lamp Field
The Busy Lamp Field (BLF) contains a panel of LCD
indicators, and connects to the M7310 telephone. These
indicators reflect the status (idle or busy) of
telephones corresponding to dual-memory buttons
programmed for Internal Autodial.
Busy Lamp Field
Components
4 Cable troughs
Cable troughs
Cable troughs are used to route the cabling from the Key
Service Unit (KSU), the Trunk Module, and the Station
Module. Each cable trough is detachable from its module.
There are two sizes of cable troughs:
half-size
quarter-size
l
l
Two half-size cable troughs are attached to the KSU; one
half-size cable trough is attached to the Trunk Module; and
the quarter-size cable trough is attached to the Station
Module.
Half-size and quarter-size cable troughs
Components
Central Answering Position module
5
Central Answering Position
module
The Central Answering Position (CAP) module is a device
which connects to an M7324 telephone. A second CAP
module can also be attached to the first. Each CAP module
shows the status (busy or not busy) of as many as 48
telephones. You can press CAP module buttons to answer
external calls on up to 80 lines (if two CAP modules are
attached). You can also use CAP module buttons to program
features and
numbers. You need a Station Auxiliary
Power Supply for every two CAP modules.
CAP module
Components
6 Data Communications Interface
Data Communications
Interface
The Data Communications Interface (DCI) allows you to attach
any serial RS-232 data device to the
system. You can
then place external data calls using an external line, or place
internal data calls to other
withiri the
system.
.
Data Communications Interface
Components
DS-30 cables 7
DS-30 cables
DS-30 cables connect Trunk Modules and Station Modules
to the KSU. One end of a DS-30 cable plugs into the
appropriate connector in the Trunk Module or Station
Module. The other end plugs into a connector in the
Expansion Cartridge.
DS-30 cables
Components
8 Expansion Cartridge
Expansion Cartridge
The Expansion Cartridge allows for the addition of extra
Trunk Modules and/or Station Modules to the
system. This Cartridge fits into the right slot of the Key
Service Unit (KSU).
The two-port Expansion Cartridge allows up to two additiona!
modules (Trunk Modules and/or Station Modules) to be
connected to the Modular system. The six-port Expansion
Cartridge allows the connection of up to six additional Trunk
or Station Modules.
Two-port and six-port Expansion Cartridges
Components
Feature Cartridge 9
Feature Cartridge
The Feature Cartridge is made up of a Software Cartridge and
a Data Cartridge. The Software Cartridge contains the system
programming. The Data Cartridge contains the data from
Configuration and Administration programming.
The Software Cartridge slides into the Data Cartridge.
Feature Cartridge assembly is then inserted into the KSU.
When there is a software upgrade, only the Software
Cartridge, and not the Data Cartridge, needs to be replaced.
Unassembled and assembled Feature Cartridges
Cartridge
Data Cartridge
Components
Key Service Unit
Service Unit
The Key Service Unit (KSU) is the hub of the
System.
It can function on its own as a basic system (with up to 24
telephones and eight external lines). The system
may also be expanded by any combination of up to six Trunk
Modules and/or Station Modules.
Key Service Unit
i
Components
M7100 telephone
11
telephone
The
l
telephone offers the following features:
a one-line display
. one memory button without an indicator
telephone
Components
12
M7208 telephone
M 7208 telephone
The
M7208 telephone offers the following features:
l
a one-line display
l
eight memory buttons with indicators
l
Handsfree capability
M7208 telephone
Components
telephone
13
M 7310 telephone
The
M7310 telephone offers the following features:
a two-line display
l
three display buttons
l
memory buttons with indicators
l
l
l
l
12 dual memory buttons without indicators
a shift button
Handsfree capability
telephone
Components
14
M7324 telephone
M 7324 telephone
The
M7324 telephone offers the following features:
a two-line display
l
three display buttons
l
. 24 memory buttons with indicators
l
Handsfree capability
M7324 telephone
Components
Mounting brackets
15
Mounting brackets
Mounting brackets support the Key Service Unit, Trunk
Module and Station Module on a wall. These brackets are
notched at the ends to aid in mounting the modules. Three
sizes of mounting bracket are available:
Size:
Full-size
Half-size
Quarter-size
Mounting for:
Key Service Unit
Trunk Module
Station Module
Mounting brackets
Components
16 PC Interface card
PC Interface card
The PC Interface card connects the
system to a
Personal Computer (PC). This allows PC applications to run
system. The PC Interface card fits inside the
with the
PC.
PC Interface card
Components
Power bar 17
Power bar
The ‘power bar provides four plug-in outlets for Trunk
Modules and/or Station Modules. It should be installed in the
lower half of the cable trough. If more modules are required
than can be plugged into one power bar, a second power bar
is required.
There are two types of power bars:
the 110 volt power bar which is
approved
for use in North America
the 220 volt power bar for use outside North America
l
l
110 and 220 volt power bars
Components
18
Station Auxiliary Power Supply
Station Auxiliary Power
.
The Nor-star Station Auxiliary Power Supply (SAPS) is a
power transformer which plugs into a grounded 110 V ac
outlet. The SAPS provides regulated direct current for either
applications:
of two
l
station loops longer than 305 m (1000 ft)
a Central Answering Position (CAP)
One SAPS can power two CAP modules, which do not have
to be connected to the same M7324 telephone.
Station Auxiliary Power Supply
Components
Station Module 19
Station Module
The Station Module allows up to 16 additional
telephones to be connected to the Modular system. A
DS-30 cable connects each Station Module to the KSU.
Station Module
Components
20 Trunk Cartridge
Trunk Cartridge
The Trunk Cartridge, when inserted in a Trunk Module, adds
up to four external lines to the
system. Up to three
Trunk Cartridges can be added to each Trunk Module.
There are three types of Trunk Cartridges:
the Loop Start Trunk Cartridge (4 lines)
the
Trunk Cartridge (2 trunks)
the DID Trunk Cartridge (4 trunks)
l
l
l
The Loop Start Trunk Cartridge supports regular external
Trunk Cartridge connects
to a
lines. The
private network. The DID Trunk Cartridge supports direct
inward dialing on incoming external lines.
Loop Start,
Components
and DID Trunk Cartridges
Trunk Module
Trunk Module
The Trunk Module allows additional Trunk Cartridge
installation. This in turn allows more external lines to be
connected to the
system. The Trunk Module has
three slots in front for inserting Trunk Cartridges. Each Trunk
Module can add a maximum of 12 external lines (four external
lines per Trunk Cartridge). All three types of Trunk Cartridge
and DID) can be mixed in one Trunk
(Loop Start,
Module.
Trunk Module
Components
Introduction
programming
telemanuals.com
telemanuals.com
Contents i
Contents
Customizing
1
Why program the telephones? 1
How programming is done 1
Programming overview 2
System Startup 2
Configuration 2
Administration 3
Reviewing programmed settings 3
Helping the Installer 3
Programming tools 5
The
Programming Overlay 5
The
Modular Programming Record
The Programming reminders 6
The
Telephone User Cards 6
Feature Card 6
The
6
Programming basics 7
What you can do in programming 7
Entering programming 7
Exiting programming 8
Finding your way around 8
Learning about
programming buttons 8
The
Programming Overlay buttons 8
The
display buttons 9
Using
telephone buttons 10
Entering names 10
Entering numbers 11
Viewing long telephone numbers 12
Introduction to Programming
telemanuals.com
ii Contents
Copying
programmed settings 12
Preparing for programming 15
Determining programming requirements 15
Planning when and where you will program 16
A programming example
Scenario 17
Determining programming requirements 17
Preparing for programming 17
Entering programming 18
Programming System Speed Dial 18
Entering the System Speed Dial code 1 8
Entering the new telephone number 1 9
Programming Line Selection 19
Programming Display Digits 19
Programming Name 20
Programming Bypass Restrictions 20
Exiting programming 21
Finishing programming 22
Distributing information 22
Installing button caps 23
Buttons assigned in Configuration 23
Buttons assigned in Administration 23
Using Button inquiry 23
Introduction to Programming
telemanuals.com
Contents iii
Set Profile and Line Profile
24
Using Set Profile and Line Profile 24
Programming you can review 25
To begin Set Profile and Line Profile 26
To begin Set Profile 26
To begin Line Profile 26
To exit Set Profile or Line Profile 26
Using Set Profile 27
or E&M lines 28
Using Line Profile for Loop
Using Line Profile for DTMF lines 30
Using Line Profile for Target lines 31
Introduction to Programming
Customizing
1
Customizing
Programming allows you to optimize the use of the Meridian
telephone system.
features can be
programmed for individual telephones, for specific external
lines, or for the system as a whole. This provides you with
real flexibility in making your telephones work together.
Why program the telephones?
Staff turnover, new business contacts, and other changes
will make many demands on the
system. Staff
names and System Speed Dial numbers are just two
examples of programmed settings that must be updated.
The system comes pre-programmed with default settings
that may initially be sufficient. Familiarity with
programming will help you determine which settings, default
or customized, will be most useful for the installed system.
How programming is done
Programming is done at an M7324 or
Telephone.
You press buttons on the telephone to enter a programmable
setting or to request a specific programming action.
guides you step by step on the telephone display
while you enter programming, select and change what you
want, and exit programming.
Introduction to Programming
Customizing
Programming overview
provides three types of programming that affect the
system as a whole:
System Startup
Configuration
Administration
A diagram illustrating the relationship of the programming
types and their related functions is provided at the end of this
section.
A fourth type, Personal programming, does not follow the
same procedures as the three listed above. Personal
programming allows you to assign a particular function to
some of the buttons, and is unique to each telephone.
System Startup
System Startup is done by the Installer only once, when the
system is first installed. System Startup resets the
system memory, and allows an Installer to assign a specific
arrangement of external lines and feature button
assignments to the telephones.
Configuration
Configuration programming is done by an Installer when the
system is first installed and when system upgrades are
performed. Otherwise, this programming is not expected to
change frequently. Configuration allows an installer to
program a variety of settings for the system as a whole, and
for individual external lines and telephones.
Introduction to Programming
Customizing
3
Administration
Administration programming is performed by a System
Coordinator on an ongoing basis. It includes settings that
will probably have to be updated regularly. Administration
lets you change various
system-wide settings, and
lets you assign some features to individual external lines and
telephones.
Reviewing programmed settings
The Set Profile (set is another word for telephone) and Line
Profile features help you check your programming by
allowing you to review the programmed settings.
Helping the Installer
Configuration programming provides the Set Copy and
Maintenance functions that make an Installer’s job easier.
An Installer can use Set Copy to copy programming from
one
telephone to another. This saves time, as it
allows the Installer to quickly program many telephones with
the same settings.
An Installer can use Maintenance to verify what hardware is
installed, and to diagnose problems within the
system.
Introduction to Programming
4 Customizing
Programming overview
System Startup
access cod0
I
Password:
I Reset memory?
Template:
Square
Show
Show line:
Line Access
Trunk data
I Set abilities
Line data
Line abilities
Service Modes
Password:
Password:
1
.L
A.
Configuration
I
1.
Data
D.
Maintenance
-A-
1
1
speed dial
Version
2. Line Access
2. Names
I
Status
3. Call Handling
3. Time and date
Status
4.
Miscellaneous
I
4. Direct-Dial
I
5. S y s t e m D a t a
5. Capabilities
6. Service Modes
I
1
T e s t Log
Admin Log
7. Password
Note:
The Administration Access code and password
provide access to Administration programming only,
beginning with the 1.
speed dial heading.
Introduction to Programming
Programming tools 5
Programming tools
The
Programming Overlay
The
Programming Overlay is a paper cutout that
labels the function of four telephone buttons used during
programming. This makes it easier for you to recognize the
button you want. The
Programming Overlay is
provided at the end of this chapter.
Programming Overlay
M7310 Telephone with a
Programming
Overlay
M7324 Telephone with a
Programming
Overlay
Introduction to Programming
6 Programming tools
The
Modular Programming Record
The
Modular Programming Record provides a
convenient way to record the settings you have
programmed. The Record also helps you plan your
programming. Space is provided for you to write down all
the settings in the same order that they appear during
programming.
Pages from the Record may be photocopied as necessary
for programming many telephones or lines.
The Programming reminders
The Programming reminders provide a convenient way to
users need on a day
record the settings which most
to day basis. Refer to finishing programming in this chapter
for more information.
The
Telephone User Cards
Each
telephone has a Meridian
Telephone
User Card that lists the most commonly used features and
telephones.
operations of the
The
Feature Card
The
in the
Feature Card lists each of the features available
system that may be accessed by using the
button.
Introduction to Programming
.
Programming basics 7
Programming basics
What you can do in programming
In
.
programming, you can:
scan the settings to review current programming
choose or enter a new setting
erase an existing setting
copy programming to another external line or
telephone.
Programming changes can be made in two different ways.
For some programming settings, you can choose among
some predefined options. For other programming settings,
you must enter a name or number.
the majority of cases, programming changes are saved
the moment they have been chosen or entered. Exceptions
occur when you are changing DN length, Received Number
Length, or Trunk cartridge type. In each of these cases you
must press “Heading”, “Next” or “Back”, after which an
important side-effect of your change is drawn to your
attention, and you are prompted for confirmation that you still
wish the change to take place.
Entering programming
To enter programming, you require:
an access code
a password.
The access code is a sequence of digits that is entered from
the dial pad. To make it easy to remember, the default code
“spells out” a word.
Introduction to Programming
8 Programming basics
The password is entered after the access code. To minimize
the possibility of unauthorized changes to programming, you
should distribute the password only to a limited number of
people.
The procedure for entering programming is described in a
programming example, later in this chapter.
. Exiting programming
You can exit programming at any time by pressing the
button.
Finding your way around
Headings and sub-headings in
programming help
you keep track of where you are in programming.
In Administration programming, an example of a main
heading is 1.
dial for programming System
Speed Dial. If you program this feature, one of the
sub-headings is
for programming a name to the
System Speed Dial number.
Detailed programming procedures are provided in the
appropriate programming chapter.
Learning about
programming buttons
Programming buttons allow you to move through the
programming headings and make the required changes to
the programmable settings.
The
Programming Overlay buttons
Programming Overlay buttons allow you to
“navigate” through the headings and sub-headings of
programming.
Introduction to Programming
Programming basics
The Overlay is placed over the top four memory buttons of
the
or the M7324 Telephone. During programming,
indicators (such as ) will appear next to any buttons that
can be used at that programming step.
The buttons
by the Overlay work as follows:
To move “up” in the hierarchy of headings and
sub-headings.
To move “down” in the hierarchy of headings
and sub-headings, or to begin programming for
a heading or sub-heading.
To move to the next heading, sub-heading or
setting.
To move to the previous heading, sub-heading
or setting.
The Nor-star display buttons
Display buttons can perform many different operations.
Depending on where you are in programming, one, two, or
three display buttons may be available at any one time. You
press one of the display buttons to select the operation that
you want to perform.
Display message
Display button message
---
---
--Display button
Introduction to Programming
10 Programming basics
The most common display button messages are:
To change a programmable setting.
To move the cursor one space backwards
(backspace) and delete a character. This
allows you to re-enter a number or letter.
To copy line or telephone programming.
UIEW->
To view the last part of a displayed message
longer than 16 characters.
To move the cursor one position forwards
when programming a name.
To view the first part of a displayed message
longer than 16 characters.
--
Using
To move the cursor one position backwards
when programming a name.
telephone buttons
Entering names
Letters and numbers can be entered as part of a name for
various settings. The method of entering a name is always
the same.
Begin with a setting that prompts you to enter a name. A
cursor ( ) appears on the display to indicate where you can
enter the next character. To enter a name:
Introduction to Programming
Programming basics 11
1.
2.
Press the dial pad button with the printed letter or
number you want.
Each time you press the button, a new character
appears. For example, the dial pad button for the
number 3 has the letters D, E, and F, where:
appears after the first press
E appears after the second press
F appears after the third press
3 appears after the fourth press
appears again after the fifth press.
(Letters always appear in upper case.)
.
When the character you want is displayed:
to move the cursor to the next character
Press
position.
OR
If you want to correct a character entered by mistake:
to move the cursor back until it is
Press
positioned beneath the character you want to correct.
OR
Press
3.
to move the cursor back and delete a
time the display button is pressed.
Repeat step 1.
Entering numbers
Numbers are entered from the
telephone dial pad.
The backspace display button may be used to edit the
number.
Line numbers must always be entered as a three-digit
number. Line numbers from 10 to 99 must be entered with
one preceding zero (line
for example). Similarly, line
numbers less than 10 must be entered with two preceding
zeros (line
for example).
Introduction to Programming
12 Programming basics
Internal telephone numbers, also referred to as Directory
Numbers
can be from two to seven digits long on a
non-expanded system, and from three to seven digits long
on an expanded system. The default DN length is 2 on a
non-expanded system and 3 on an expanded system. The
DN length can be changed in Configuration programming.
Viewing long telephone numbers
External telephone numbers can be up to 24 digits, but the .
telephone display is only 16 character spaces long. If you
wish to see a previously programmed number that is longer
than 16 digits, you must do the following:
Begin, for example, with 1234567890
The display shows only the first 15 digits. The three dots
at the end of the display indicate that more digits remain to
the external number.
1.
Press
to see the remaining digits.
2.
Press
to again see the first 15 digits.
Copying
programmed settings
Programmed settings for external lines,
telephones
and certain
Capabilities can be copied to other lines
or
telephones. If many lines or telephones require
the same settings, there is no need to program each one
individually. instead, program one line or telephone, and
then copy those settings.
The Copy Record page in the Meridian
Modular
Programming Record provides space to record the lines or
telephones that are copied.
Introduction to Programming
Programming basics 13
Copying line programming
Line programming can be copied only for the following:
Data of Configuration programming.
OR
Line abilities in the Capabilities section of Administration
programming.
.
OR
Service Modes of Administration programming (only Ringing
Telephones may be copied).
Begin with
1 ine:
.
1.
Press COPY .
appears.
2.
Enter the number of the line to be copied.
C OPY to
appears.
OR
Press (Heading] until you return to the desired heading,
if you do not wish to proceed with copying.
3.
Enter the number of the line to receive the
programming.
Copied 00 1 002 appears briefly if, for example,
programming for line 001 was copied to line 002.
While this brief message is on the display, you can
already enter another line number to which the line
programming should be copied , or you can wait for the
C O P Y t o l i n e : , prompt to appear, as in step 2.
Copying
telephone programming
telephone programming can be copied only for the
following headings:
.
Line Access of Configuration programming.
OR
Set abilities in the Capabilities section of Administration
programming.
Introduction to Programming
14 Programming basics
Begin with S h o w
1.
Press
.
.
appears.
2.
Enter the internal number of the telephone to be
copied.
C OPY
appears.
OR
Press [Heading] until you return to the desired heading,
if you do not wish to proceed with copying.
3.
Enter the internal number of the telephone to receive
the programming.
222 1> 2225 appears briefly if, for example,
programming for telephone 2221 was copied to
telephone 2225.
While this brief message is on the display, you can
already enter another internal number to which the
telephone programming should be copied , or you can
wait for the
again to appear, as in step 2.
Copying
Capabilities programming
In addition to Line abilities and Set abilities,
Capabilities programming can be copied for the following
headings:
Dialing filters in the Capabilities section of Administration
programming.
OR
Rem access pkgs in the Capabilities section of
Administration programming.
OR
COS passwords in the Capabilities section of Administration
programming.
.
Introduction to Programming
Programming basics 15
Beginwith S h o w
OR
filter:
Show
OR
Password:
.
Press , and proceed by responding to prompts as you
would if you were copying line programming or
telephone programming.
Preparing for programming
, Determining programming requirements
First read about the available programming settings in the
Configuration or Administration chapters, and then determine
how your co-workers would like the features programmed.
You should gather or define the following information:
For System Startup
the template that will assign the most appropriate
defaults
For Configuration or Administration
the numbers of the installed external lines
internal numbers of each installed
telephone
For Configuration
the appropriate length for internal numbers
appropriate settings for each external trunk and line
appropriate settings for each telephone
appropriate system-wide settings
Introduction to Programming
16 Programming basics
For Administration
telephone numbers that will be programmed into
System Speed Dial
names for external lines and telephones
external lines and telephones that will be subject to
Line abilities and Set abilities programming
required Filters and Remote access packages
Set abilities to be assigned to individual telephones
how the system should be programmed to make the
best use of the Service Modes feature
whether a new Administration password is required
whether Class of Service passwords are required
Planning when and where you will program
Only one
telephone can access Configuration or
Administration programming at a time. The telephone you
are using for programming cannot be used to make or
receive calls. Other users of the
system will still be
able to use their telephones. However, they will not be able
to do any Personal programming while you are
programming.
Introduction to Programming
A programming example 17
programming example
Once you have learned the programming basics, you can
always apply the same rules to guide you through the
programming steps. The following example takes you
through the programming of System Speed Dial settings in
Administration programming.
Scenario
The taxi company your office normally uses has changed
both its telephone number and name. Change the telephone
number and name programmed in System Speed Dial of
Administration programming, and review the other settings.
Determining programming requirements
You have determined the following settings:
System Speed Dial code: 12
System Speed Dial telephone number: 5554568
Line Selection: Use prime line
Display Digits: N (No)
Name: Fleet Taxi
Bypass Restrictions: Y (Yes)
Preparing for programming
1. Choose the
telephone with which you will do
the programming changes.
2.
Obtain the
Programming Overlay and place it
.
over the buttons of your telephone.
3.
Record the changes you make in the appropriate
section of the
Modular Programming Record.
Introduction to Programming
18 A programming example
Entering programming
1.
Enter the Administration access code using the feature
button and the dial pad:
q
Press (Feature]
which is the same as
Press [Feature]
appears.
OR
1.
dial appears if there is no password.
Proceed to Programming System Speed Dial.
2.
Enter the Administration password from the dial pad.
Press
if you need to re-enter the password.
The password does not appear on the telephone
display.
dial appears.
Programming System Speed Dial
Begin with 1.
1.
dial .
Press [Show] to begin programming System Speed
Dial.
dial
appears.
Entering the System Speed Dial code
1. Press
on the dial pad.
Speed dial
Introduction to Programming
12 appears.
A programming example 19
Entering the new telephone number
1. Press
5553872 (the taxi company’s old number) appears.
2.
Press
.
appears.
3.
Enter the new telephone number:
Press
on the dial pad.
5554568, appears.
(If required, press the
display button to
backspace the cursor for re-entering a number).
4.
Press
when have completed entering the number.
Programming Line Selection
1. Press
to move on to the Line Selection
setting.
Use prime 1 i
appears (the default).
OR
Use line: 002 appears (for example, if line 002
was previously assigned).
OR
code: 24 appears (for example, if the Line
Pool access code 24 was previously assigned).
2.
Press
until Use
line appears.
OR
Program Display Digits if that option is already
selected.
Programming Display Digits
1.
Press
setting.
to move on to the Display Digits
appears.
2.
Program Display Digits to
Press
for No.
appears.
OR
Program Name if that option is already selected.
Introduction to Programming
20 A programming example
Programming Name
1.
Press
to move on to the Name setting.
Name appears.
2.
Press [Show] to view the name.
The old company’s name appears (if programmed). If
the name was not previously programmed, then the
default name appears as follows:
Dial 12 .
3.
Press
to change the name.
The cursor ( , ) appears at the first character position
for the name.
4.
Enter the first letter (F) of the new name (Fleet Taxi):
Press (3 on the dial pad.
appears.
5.
Press
two more times.
appears.
6.
to move the cursor to the next position.
Press
F- appears.
Continue entering characters in the same way by
pressing the appropriate dial pad buttons until
FLEET
appears.
A blank space is created by pressing
twice.
If you make a mistake in entering the name, use
to move the cursor and re-enter
,
, or
the character.
Programming Bypass Restrictions
1. Press [Next] to move on to the Bypass Restrictions
setting.
N appears.
2.
Program Bypass Restrictions to Yes.
Press
until
appears
OR
Go to step 3 if that option is already selected.
3.
You have finished System Speed Dial programming.
Follow the next procedure to exit.
Introduction to Programming
A programming example 21
Exiting programming
1.
Press [Heading]
.
three times to return to the main
heading.
dial appears.
OR
Press
to exit Administration programming.
End of session appears.
Introduction to Programming
22 Finishing programming
Finishing programming
Distributing information
You should ensure that programmed settings are recorded
and easily available for reference:
Record settings in the
Record.
Modular Programming
Keep any passwords recorded in a safe place.
Complete the Programming reminders section of the
Administration chapter, and distribute copies of the
sections that your co-workers will find useful. The
Programming reminders that are required will depend
on what has been programmed.
The Programming reminders section identifies:
l
the names and internal numbers of each
telephone
the assignment of Prime Telephones, Central
Answering Positions, and Direct Dial Telephones
. the locations of programmed Page Zones
l
the Line Pool access codes for each Line Pool, and
the type of Lines in that Line Pool (Public network or
Private network)
l
the digit that is dialed first to make an external call
l
the digit that is dialed first to retrieve a parked call
l
the digit that is dialed to reach Direct-Dial telephones
l
l
the members of each Call Pickup Group
the
DN for use by Remote Access callers to
change their Class of Service
Introduction to Programming
Finishing programming 23
Ensure that your co-workers know of any programmed
settings that affect the operation of their telephone.
The assignment of Handsfree, which assigns a
button to a telephone, is an example of this.
Installing button caps
Each
telephone comes with snap-on caps to identify
the buttons that you program. The following buttons may be
assigned to a telephone as a result of Configuration and
Administration programming.
Buttons assigned in Configuration
Answer buttons (from Line Access programming)
external and intercom buttons (from Line Access
programming)
Buttons assigned in Administration
Handsfree buttons (from Set Abilities programming)
Some of the caps are already printed with a line number or
feature name, and some of the caps have a clear top. Write
programmed features or telephone numbers on the paper
labels supplied, and place the label in the clear button cap.
Using Button Inquiry
Use the Button Inquiry feature
to check
the function or stored number programmed onto each button.
You can also use Button Inquiry to deactivate the buttons
before you press the button cap on.
Introduction to Programming
24 Set Profile and Line Profile
Set Profile and Line Profile
Use Set Profile and Line Profile to review the settings
programmed in Configuration and Administration
programming. Set Profile and Line Profile allow you to
browse through, but not change, the programmed settings.
Set Profile allows you to verify settings for each
telephone. Line Profile allows you to verify settings for each
external line.
Using Set Profile and Line Profile
As many as four people in the
system
Set
Profile or Line Profile at the same time. You may access Set
Profile and Line Profile while on a call at your telephone.
If someone is using Configuration or Administration
programming, you can still access Set Profile and Line
Profile from another
telephone. The latest
programming changes can therefore be seen as soon as
they are made.
Set Profile and Line Profile can be used only from an M7310
or M7324 telephone.
Programming Overlay is not required to perform
A
Set Profile or Line Profile.
introduction to Programming
Set Profile and Line Profile 25
Programming you can review
The following table shows the Configuration and
Administration programming headings that can be reviewed
in Set Profile and Line Profile.
Programming that can be reviewed
Line Profile
Set Profile
Line name
Line Access
Trunk data
(physical lines only)
Set abilities
Received number
(target lines only)
Line data
Line abilities
Service Modes
The following table shows how line names and telephone
names appear on the display while you are using Set Profile
and Line Profile.
Telephone
name
2221: 2221
OR
2221:
Line
name
WHITE
Line00 1: Line00 1
OR
Line00 1:
internal number:internal
number or name (if
programmed)
external line
line
number or name (if
programmed)
Introduction to Programming
26 Set Profile and Line Profile
To begin Set Profile and Line Profile
To begin Set Profile
From an
or M7324 Telephone:
1.
Press (Feature]
which is the same as
Press [Feature]
Show set:
appears.
(3
2.
Enter the internal number of the telephone to be
reviewed.
OR
Press F I
to review programming for the
telephone with the first internal number.
3.
222 1: 222 1 appears, for example.
OR
222 1: WHITE appears, for example, if that name
was programmed for the telephone.
To begin Line Profile
From an
or M7324 Telephone:
1.
Press
which is the same as
Press [Feature]
Show 1
appears.
2.
Enter the number of the line to be reviewed.
OR
Press FIRST to review programming for the first line
number.
3.
Li
1: L i
OR
Line00 1:
1 appears, for example.
appears, for example, if that name
was programmed for the line.
.
To exit Set Profile or Line Profile
1. Press
Introduction to Programming
Set Profile and Line Profile 27
Using Set Profile
Begin with:
2221: 2221 .
OR
2221:
1.
WHITE .
To see the Name for the next telephone,
if this telephone is the
(or to return to
.
telephone with the last internal number),
Press NEXT .
OR
To see the Name for the previous telephone
if this telephone is the
(or to return to
telephone with the first internal number),
Press
.
OR
Press SHOW to review settings for this telephone.
2.
appears.
Press SHOW to see programming for Line Access.
Line
OR
Press so that the Name of the telephone
appears, as in step 1.
OR
Press NEXT to review the next setting.
3.
Set abilities appears.
Press SHOW to see programming
Set
OR
Press
step 2.
so that Line
appears, as in
O R
Press NEXT
to return to the Name of the telephone.
Introduction to Programming
28 Set Profile and Line Profile
Using Line Profile for Loop Start or E&M lines
When you begin Line Profile, respond to
with the line number of a Loop Start or E&M line.
You might, for instance, begin with:
.
OR
Line009:
.
1.
To see the Name for the next line,
(or to return to Show 1
if this is the last line
number),
Press NEXT .
OR
To see the Name for the previous line,
(or to return to Show 1
if this is the first line
number),
Press
.
OR
Press SHOW to review other settings.
2.
Trunk data appears.
Press SHOW to see programming for Trunk data.
OR
Press
so that the Name of the line appears, as
in step
OR
Press NEXT to review the next setting.
3.
Line data appears.
Press SHOW to see programming for Line data.
OR
Press
so that Trunk data appears, as in
step 2.
OR
Press NEXT to review the next setting.
Introduction to Programming
Set Profile and Line Profile 29
4.
a b i l i t i e s appears.
Press S H O W t o see programming for
Line
abilities.
OR
Press
so that Line data appears, as in
step 3.
OR
Press N E X T t o r e v i e w the next setting.
5.
Service M o d e s appears.
Press S H O W to see programming for Service Modes.
OR
Press
so that Line ab i 1 it i
appears, as
in step 4.
OR
Press NEXT to return to the Name of the line.
Introduction to Programming
30 Set Profile and Line Profile
Using Line Profile for DTMF lines
When you begin Line Profile, respond to
Show line:
with the line number of a DTMF line.
for instance,
If you entered
.
would be displayed.
1.
To see the Name for the next line,
Press NEXT .
OR
To see the Name for the previous line,
Press
.
OR
Press
2.
to check the DTMF setting.
11: DTMF appears,
confirming that Line 11 is a DTMF line.
Press NEXT or
appears, as in step
Introduction to Programming
so that the Name of the line
Set Profile and Line Profile 31
Using Line Profile for Target lines
When you begin Line Profile, respond to
Show line:
with the line number of a Target line.
If you entered
1, for instance,
.
OR
would be displayed.
1.
To see the Name for the next line,
if this is the last line
(or to return to
1
number),
Press NEXT .
OR
To see the Name for the previous line,
Press
.
OR
Press SHOW to review other settings.
2.
Press
in step 1.
O
555 1629 appears.
so that the Name of the line appears, as
R
Press NEXT to review the next setting.
3.
Line data appears.
Press SHOW to see programming for Line data.
OR
Press
so that
as in step 2.
555 1629 appears,
OR
Press NEXT to review the next setting.
4.
appears.
Press SHOW to see programming for Service Modes.
OR
Press
step 3.
so that
data appears, as in
OR
Press NEXT to return to the Name of the line.
Introduction to Programming
32 Set Profile and Line Profiie
Introduction to Programming
telemanuals.com
Administration
telemanuals.com
Capabilities
Telephone abilities 35
Partial Telephone Administration Lock prevents the
following at a telephone:
l
programming
buttons
l
programming Personal Speed Dial numbers
l
programming feature buttons
l
changing the display language
l
l
changing Dialing Modes (Automatic Dial, Pre-Dial,
and Standard Dial)
using Voice Call Deny
using Administration programming
l
l
moving line buttons
saving a number for Saved Number Redial
Full Telephone Administration Lock prevents the
following at a telephone:
programming
l
buttons
programming Personal Speed Dial numbers
l
programming feature buttons
l
changing Background Music
l
changing Do Not Disturb
l
changing the display language
changing Dialing Modes (Automatic Dial, Pre-Dial,
and Standard Dial)
l
changing Privacy
l
using Ring Again
l
using Call Forward all calls
l
using Send Message
l
using Trunk Answer
Administration
telemanuals.com
36 Capabilities
Telephone abilities
l
using Voice Call Deny
l
using Administration programming
l
moving line buttons
l
activating Service Modes
l
saving a number with Saved Number Redial
Programming Telephone Administration Lock
Begin with
lock:
.
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are
None, Full and Partial.
2.
Press [Heading] until you return to the desired
programming heading.
OR
Press
to program the Full Handsfree feature.
Full Handsfree
This feature allows you to make or receive calls without
picking up the receiver, and allows a headset to be used with
the
telephone.
Programming hints
A
button is automatically assigned to a telephone
that is programmed with Full Handsfree.
Full Handsfree is disabled for an
Telephone.
Programming Full Handsfree
Begin with Full
1.
Administration
N .
Press
to change the setting. Options are N
(No), and Y (Yes).
telemanuals.com
Capabilities
2.
Telephone abilities 37
Press [Heading] until you return to the desired
programming heading.
OR
Press
If you chose No, programming continues with the
Handsfree Answerback feature.
If you chose Yes, programming continues with the
Automatic Handsfree feature.
Automatic
This feature activates the Handsfree microphone and
speaker when you make or receive calls by pressing a line
.
hints
You can program this feature only if the telephone has Full
Handsfree programmed.
Programming Automatic Handsfree
Begin with
N .
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are N
(No), and Y (Yes).
2.
Press
until you return to the desired
programming heading.
OR
Press
to program the Handsfree
Answerback feature.
Handsfree Answerback
This feature allows you to answer a Voice Call without lifting
the receiver.
Programming hints
Regardless of the setting that you program, Handsfree
Telephone.
Answerback is always disabled for an
Administration
38 Capabilities
Telephone abilities
Programming Handsfree Answerback
Begin with HF
..
.
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are N
(No), and Y (Yes).
2.
Press [Heading] until you return to the desired
programming heading.
OR
Press
feature.
to program the Call Pickup (Group)
Call Pickup (Group)
You can assign each telephone to one of up to nine Call
Pickup groups. Members of a Call Pickup group can answer
any calls ringing at another telephone in the group.
Programming hints
Each telephone in a Call Pickup Group does not have to be
assigned the same external lines (programmed by the
Installer in Configuration programming).
A call on a Private line in a Call Pickup Group cannot be
picked up.
You cannot pick up a call that is ringing only the Auxiliary
Ringer.
Programming Call Pickup Group
Begin with
.
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are NO,
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9.
2.
Press
until you return to the desired
programming heading.
.
OR
Press (Next] to program the Page zone feature.
Administration
Capabilities
Telephone abilities 39
Page zone
You can assign each telephone to one of six zones for
receiving Page messages. A zone is any selection of
telephones you want to group together, regardless of
location.
Programming Page zone
Begin with
1 .
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are 1,
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and NO.
2.
Press [Heading] until you return to the desired
programming heading.
OR
Press
feature.
to program the Auxiliary Ringer
Auxiliary Ringer
This feature rings the Auxiliary Ringer (if installed) when the
telephone rings. An Auxiliary Ringer is important in noisy
environments where a
telephone might otherwise not
be heard.
Programming Auxiliary Ringer
Beginwith
N .
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are N
(No), and Y (Yes).
2.
Press
until you return to the desired
programming heading.
OR
Press
to specify a Direct-dial telephone.
Direct-dial telephones
A telephone can be assigned to call a Direct-dial telephone
when the user dials the single digit defined in Configuration
(4. Miscellaneous, Direct-dial).
Administration
Capabilities
Telephone abilities
Each telephone can call only one Direct-dial telephone,
although up to five Direct-dial telephones can be designated
in Administration (4. Direct-Dial). There is no limit to the
number of telephones that can be assigned to call a
particular Direct-dial telephone.
Programming Direct-dial telephones
Beginwith
.
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are
, Set2, Set3, Set4, Set5 and None.
2.
Press
until you return to the desired
programming heading.
OR
Press [Next] to program the Call Forward on Busy
feature.
Call Forward On Busy
This feature always redirects an incoming call to another
system when you are busy on a
telephone on your
call, or when you have Do Not Disturb activated at your
telephone.
Exceptions to this occur as follows:
If you are busy on a target line call, another call to that
target line will be redirected to the Prime telephone for
the trunk that received the second target line call.
If Line Redirection is in effect, it will take precedence.
Programming Call Forward On Busy
Begin with Forward
1.
Administration
Press
Forward to:
.
appears.
Capabilities
2.
Press
Telephone abilities 41
to enter an internal number.
OR
Press
to program the Call Forward No
Answer feature.
3.
Enter the internal number from the dial pad.
4.
Press
until you return to the desired
programming heading.
OR
Press
to program the Call Forward NO
Answer feature.
Call Forward No Answer
This feature lets you redirect an incoming call to another
system when the call is not
telephone on your
telephone. Note, however, that
answered at your
Line Redirection will take precedence over this setting.
Options explained
If you assign another telephone to receive your calls, you
can also assign the number of times that the incoming call
will ring before the call is forwarded (the Call Forward No
Answer delay). To estimate the delay time in seconds,
multiply the number of rings by six.
Programming Call Forward No Answer
Begin with Forward no
1.
.
Press (Show].
or Forward to: 223
appears (for example).
Forward to:
Administration
42 Capabilities
2.
Telephone abilities
Press
to enter the internal number.
OR
If a number is already assigned, press
program the Forward No Answer delay.
to
OR
If you wish to delete an assigned number, press
followed by
The number will be
deleted, and you can move on to program the Redirect
ring feature.
OR
If None, press
feature.
3.
to program the Redirect ring.
Enter the internal number from the dial pad.
OR
Press (Next] to assign none. Programming
continues with Redirect ring.
4.
Press
delay.
to program the Forward No Answer
Programming Forward No Answer delay
Begin with Forward
.
1.
Press
to select the delay. Options are 2, 3, 4,
6, and 10 rings.
2.
Press
until you return to the desired
programming heading.
OR
Press
to program Redirect ring.
Redirect ring
The Redirect ring setting causes a telephone to ring briefly (a
200 millisecond burst) when a call is redirected on one of its
lines. Each telephone with a ringing appearance of that line
will also ring briefly for the redirected call if the Redirect ring
setting for them is
(the default).
Administration
Capabilities
Telephone abilities 43
A user enters the Line Redirection feature code to redirect
calls. See the explanation of Line Redirection in the
.
Telephone Features chapter for more information on
redirecting lines.
Programming Redirect ring
Begin with Redirect
Press
to change the setting. Options are Y
(Yes) and N (No).
2.
Press [Heading] until you return to the desired
programming heading.
OR
Press
to program the Hotline feature.
Hotline
This feature automatically calls a pre-assigned number when
at your telephone.
you lift the receiver or press
Hotline has three options: None, internal (Intrnl), and
external (Extrnl).
Options explained
lntrnl assigns an internal number.
Extrnl assigns an external number.
If you select an external number, you can also select
the line on which the call is made:
1
selects the telephone’s Prime line.
assigns an external line number.
Use l i n e :
assigns the Line Pool access code of
code:
a line pool.
Administration
44 Capabilities
Telephone abilities
Programming hints
The telephone should be labeled to inform anyone using it
that this feature is active.
A telephone’s Prime line, Line Pool access codes, and
access to a line pool are assigned by the installer in
Configuration programming.
Programming Hotline
Begin with Hotline:
.
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are
None, Intrnl, and Extrnl.
2.
If you chose None,
Press
c a l l : N appears for programming the
Priority Call feature.
OR
If you chose Intrnl,
Press [Show].
appears (an internal number
appears if previously programmed).
OR
if you chose Extrnl,
Press ( S h o w ] .
Extrnl
appears (an external number
appears if previously programmed).
3.
Refer to the following procedures for each of the above
options.
O
R
Press (Heading] until you return to the desired heading.
OR
Press
Administration
to program the Priority Call feature.
Capabilities
Telephone abilities 45
Programming the internal number
Begin with:
Intrnl
None .
OR
Intrnl
222, for example, if a number was previously
entered.
1.
To specify an internal number, press
and
.
enter an internal number from the dial pad.
OR
To erase an internal number and return the setting to
None, press
followed by
2.
Press [Heading) until you return to the desired
programming heading.
OR
Press [Next] to program the Priority Call feature.
Programming the external number
Begin with:
.
Extrnl
OR
Extrnl
123456 , for example, if a number of seven
digits or less was previously entered.
OR
If a previously entered number is more than seven digits, the
entire number will be displayed.
and
appear if a previously programmed number is greater than
16 digits.
1.
Press
to enter the external number.
2.
Enter the digits from the dial pad.
Press
to move the cursor back one space to
edit a number.
3.
Press
after the complete number is entered.
4.
Press
to program Line Selection.
Administration
46 Capabilities
Telephone abilities
Programming Line Selection
Begin with:
Use
OR
Use line:
OR
code:
line ,
(example shows external line 01).
1234 (example shows Line Pooi access
code 1234).
1.
Press
2.
Press
until you return to the desired
programming heading.
OR
If you selected the Prime line,
Press
to program the Priority Call feature.
OR
If you selected an external line or a line pool,
Go to step 3.
3.
Enter from the dial pad the three digits of the line or the
one to four digits of the Line Pool access code for the
desired line pool.
4.
Press
until you return to the desired
programming heading.
OR
Press
to program the Priority Call feature.
Administration
to select the option you wish.
Capabilities
Telephone abilities 47
Priority Call
This feature lets you call from your
telephone and
interrupt calls or override Do Not Disturb on another
telephone.
Programming hints
Apply this feature only to telephones from which such
interruptions can be justified.
Programming Priority Call
Beginwith Priority call:
.
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are N
(No), and Y ‘(Yes).
2.
Press
to return to program Set abilities for
another telephone.
Show set:
appears.
OR
Press
until you return to the beginning of Set
abilities programming.
Set abi 1 it
appears on the display.
3.
If you returned to Set abi 1 it i es, press
program Line abilities .
to
Administration
48 Capabilities
Line abilities
Line abilities
Line abilities programming applies dialing filters, remote
access dialing filters and remote access packages to lines.
Line abilities includes the following settings:
Line filter
Remote filter
Remote package
Programming Line abilities
Begin with Line abilities.
1.
Press
Show
2.
line:
appears on the display.
Enter a three-digit line number to begin programming
Line abilities.
Line i 1
03 appears on the display.
OR
Press COPY to copy Line abilities programming from
one line to another.
OR
Press
to return to the heading
Line
abilities
Line filter
A Line filter is a collection of restrictions and exceptions
defined in the Dial ins i
and applied to an
outgoing line. Filter 03 is the default Line filter.
A Line filter on an outgoing line may be used to’limit the
capabilities of that line to carry calls made to specific area
codes or destinations.
Administration
Caoabilities
Line abilities 49
Programming Line filters
Begin with Line filter: 03 .
1.
Press
Line
2.
.
f i l t e r : , appears on the display.
Enter a two-digit filter number.
OR
3.
Press
to set the line filter to 00
Press
to program a Remote filter.
OR
Press (Heading] until you return to the desired
programming heading.
Remote filter
A remote access dialing filter can control dialing on incoming
auto-answer trunks used for making tandem calls (that is,
to use one of its lines for placing calls).
calling into
Filter 04 is the default Remote filter.
Employees can be allowed to telephone into a
system on auto-answer lines, and call out on a line
designated for long-distance calls to specific area codes.
Programming Remote filters
Begin with
i
04 .
1.
Press
.
R e m o t e f i l t e r : , appears on the display .
2.
Enter a two-digit filter number.
O R
Press
3.
to set the line filter to 00
Press (Next] to program a Remote package.
OR
Press [Heading] until you return to the desired
programming heading.
Administration
50 Capabilities
Line abilities
Remote package
Remote access packages control access to line pools and
the Remote Page capability, for calls on incoming
auto-answer trunks.
Package 00 is the default Remote package, which gives no
access to line pools or to Remote page.
.
Programming Remote packages
Begin with Remote
1.
Press
.
Remote
2.
.
appears on the display.
Enter a two-digit remote access package number.
OR
3.
Press
to set the line filter to 00.
Press
or
appears on the display.
Show
4.
Enter another three-digit line number. to program line
abilities on another line.
OR
Press
or
abi 1 it
5.
Administration
appears on the display.
At the Line abilities heading, Press
program Class of Service passwords.
to
Capabilities
Class of Service passwords 51
Class of Service (COS) passwords
Class of Service (COS) passwords permit controlled access
to a system’s resources by remote users. Class of Service
defines passwords, their associated dialing
filters, user filters and remote-user access packages.
The three programming sections of COS passwords are:
User filter
Line filter
Remote access package
A Class of Service can be
with a telephone, a line
or a COS password. Class of Service determines whether a
remote user can or can not access lines in line pools and
remote paging. It also determines the dialing capabilities that
apply to outgoing lines from line pools (in the case of remote
users), or to internal telephones and any lines used for
external calls (in the case of internal users).
The capabilities to which a remote user has access depend
on:
the COS associated with the auto-answer trunk on
which the user is calling
a COS password, if entered.
Depending on the COS in effect, remote users may be able
to access all or some of the system’s resources available to
remote users. Typically, each user has a separate password.
Several users can share a password or one user can have
several passwords.
Entry of a
DN ( if one has been programmed) allows a
remote user to change the COS applied for the duration of
the call.
Administration
Capabilities
Class of Service passwords
COS passwords for internal users
Internal users have a Class of Service associated with their
telephones, in the sense that there are dialing filters
associated with telephones, as well as line pool
assignments. Internal use of a COS password affects only
the telephone’s dialing capabilities.
The ability to change the COS internally means that
someone using another person’s telephone can temporarily .
change the restrictions that would normally be applied.
Password security
Class of Service passwords for a system should be
determined randomly, and should be changed on a
regular basis.
System users should memorize their COS passwords
instead of writing them down.
Employees’ COS passwords should be deleted when
they leave the company.
You can block tandem calls that would use expensive routes
by using Class of Service to restrict access to line pools, and
you can control the external destinations dialed through the
use of dialing filters.
You can use Class of Service to prevent remote access to
line pools and remote paging. Remote calls will then be
limited to target lines in the system.
Groups of users can be restricted, or permitted, to access
remote paging through the Class of Service applied to their
password.
Administration
.
Capabilities
Class of Service passwords 53
Programming hints
A system can have a maximum of 100 six-digit COS
passwords (00 to 99).
You can copy the data from one COS password to
another COS password number using the COPY display
button in the same way that telephone and line data
can be copied.
When a DR3 system is upgraded to DR4, the system
extends existing four-digit restriction override
passwords to six-digits by adding two zeros to the end
of the old password. For example, Pswd 0 1: 1576
changes to Pswd 0 157600. The passwords are
assigned filter 00, to provide no restrictions.
DR4 passwords must be unique. In DR3, different
password identifiers (for example, Pswd 0 1: and
Pswd 02:
could be administered with the same
sequence of digits (for instance, both could be 2345).
When upgrading from DR3 to DR4, if there are two or
more COS passwords with the same digits, the digits
for the first password are kept (with that addition of two
zeros) and any others are changed to the value
Programming COS passwords
Begin with
1.
2.
.
Press (Show].
Show Password:
appears on the display
Enter a two-digit password number. For example, enter
the numbers 01 and
0 1:
appears on the
display.
OR
Press
3.
Press
for password 00.
to enter a new password code.
OR
Press [Heading] to return to the heading
Password:- .
Administration
54 Capabilities
Class of Service passwords
4.
Enter the digits for the new password. When the sixth
digit is entered
and the cursor disappears and
re-appears.
OR
Press
or
to set the password to
the value
.
5.
Press [show] to program COS user filters for the
password appearing on the display.
f 1 tr :
1 t appears on the display.
OR
Press
or (Back] to see other passwords’
that have been programmed (if any).
OR
Press
to return to the heading
Show password:
.
User filter
The COS User filter replaces the telephone (set) filter, the
line/set filter or the remote filter, that would otherwise apply
to a specific call. The default setting for this feature (Def 1 t),
means that any other filters in place (telephone (set) filter,
line/set filter, or remote filter) will still apply.
Programming User filters
Beginwith
.
1.
Press
User
2.
Enter a two-digit filter number.
OR
Press
f1
:
1 t appears on the display.
3.
Press
.
appears on the display.
to program the COS line filter.
Line f 1 tr:
1 t appears on the display.
OR
Press [Heading] .
Password:
appears on the display to.
program another password.
Administration
Capabilities
Class of Service passwords 55
Line filter
The COS Line filter replaces the line filter that would
otherwise apply to a specific call. The default setting for this
t), means that any line filter in place will still
feature
Programming Line filters
.
Begin with Line
1.
Press
Line
2.
.
appears on the display.
Enter a two-digit filter number.
OR
Press
Line
3.
Press
appears on the display.
to program the COS remote package.
appears on the display.
OR
Press
appears on the display to
program another password.
Show Password:
Administration
56 Capabilities
Class of Service passwords
Remote package
The COS Remote package replaces the remote access
package that would otherwise apply to a specific call. The
default setting for this feature
lt) means that any
remote access package in place will still apply.
Programming Remote packages
Begin with
1.
Press
Remote
2.
.
.
appears on the display.
Enter a two-digit package number.
OR
Press [ N e x t ]
1 t appears on the display.
3.
Press
to go to the next highest ‘password
number.
For example,
02: 123456 appears on the
display or if the current password is the highest, then
Show Password:
appears.
‘OR
Press [Heading].
appears on the display to
Show Password:
program another password.
4.
Press (Heading] at the
Password:
Passwords appears on the display.
5.
Press
at the
Passwords prompt to
continue programming with Service modes.
Administration
prompt.
.
Service Modes
Service Modes
What is Service Modes?
..
Service Modes controls how the
system will respond
to calls, depending on the time of day. You can program up
to three different Service Modes, each with unique ringing
arrangements.
Service Modes include the following six settings:
Control telephones
Service Mode name
Service Mode control
Trunk Answer
Extra-dial telephone
Ringing telephones and Auxiliary Ringer.
Select the setting or settings you wish to program, and find
the description and programming procedure. The Service
Modes settings are listed above in the order that the
headings appear during programming.
Administration
58 Service Modes
To begin Service Modes programming
Begin with 6. Service
.
Press [Show].
appears for programming Control
telephones.
2.
Press
Name
appears on the display for
programming the first Service Mode.
OR
Press
twice .
Evening appears for programming.the
second Service Mode.
OR
Press
three times .
Lunch appears for programming the third
Service Mode.
Programming Service Modes
Control telephones
This setting allows you to assign a telephone to each
external line. That telephone can be used to control the
Service Mode by allowing you to turn the Service Mode ON
or OFF for that line.
Programming hints
Only the external lines programmed with a Control telephone
can be placed into a Service Mode.
You can assign a Control telephone to more than one
external line, but a line cannot be assigned to more than one
Control telephone.
.
Only one Service Mode applies at any one time to all
external lines controlled by a given Control telephone.
Administration
Service Modes 59
By default, telephone 221 is assigned as the Control
telephone and as a Ringing telephone, for all lines. This
means that all lines will ring at Control telephone 221, when
it (221) activates a Service Mode. Therefore, when
programming Control telephones you must remember to
remove the default assignment of 221 for each line that
should not ring when Control telephone 221 activates a
Service Mode.
Programming Control telephones
Begin with Control
.
1.
Press [Show].
line:
appears.
2.
Enter a line number from the dial pad.
OR
Press
to assign the Control telephone for the
first line (001).
Line00 1: 22 1 , for example, appears if that Control
telephone has been previously assigned to line 001
(default is 221).
Line00 1: None appears if no Control telephone is
assigned for the line
3.
Press
line.
Line00 1:
to assign a Control telephone to the
appears.
OR
Go to step 5.
4.
Enter an internal number from the dial pad.
5.
Press
to assign a Control telephone to the
next line.
Name 1:
appears alter the last line has been
assigned a Control telephone.
OR
Press
of step 1.
to return to Show 1
Administration
60 Service Modes
Service Mode
You can assign all Service Mode settings except the Control
telephones.
Beginning Service Mode 1 programming
Begin with Name 1 :
Press
1:
.
to change the Service Mode name.
appears.
OR
Press
to program the Service Mode control.
appears.
OR
Press
to program the second Service Mode.
Service Mode name
The Service Mode name identifies the active Service Mode,
and appears on the display of the Control telephone when
the Service Mode is turned ON.
Programming hints
The default names of the three possible Service Modes are
only suggestions, and may be changed to any other name.
A Service Mode name can be one to seven characters.
Programming Service Mode name
Begin with Name
1.
Enter the first character of the name by pressing the
appropriate dial pad button one, two, three, or four
times.
2.
Press
to move the cursor to the next position.
Continue entering characters (maximum of seven).
3.
Press (Next] to program Service Mode control.
Administration .
.
Service Modes 61
Service Mode setting
This setting allows you to control how the Service Mode can
be turned ON and OFF.
Options explained
“Manual” allows you to turn the Service Mode ON and
OFF at any time from a Control telephone. The Service
Modes feature code must be entered at the telephone
to access this feature.
“Automatic” allows you to
a stop and start
time during which the Service Mode will be active. You
will still be able to start and stop the Service Mode by
entering the Service Modes feature code at a Control
telephone.
You can also turn the Service Mode OFF, so that it can
not be activated.
Programming hints
Default stop and start times correspond to typical hours
which may be required for a night Service Mode.
Default Service Mode times
Service Mode
Start time
Service Mode 1:
23:00
Service Mode 2:
i
17:oo
Stop time
23:00
Service Mode 3: Lunch
Overlapping times may be assigned. For example, if Service
Mode 1 is assigned from 9:00 am to 4:00 pm and Service
Mode 2 is assigned from
pm to
pm, then the start
time of the second Service Mode is treated as a stop time for
the first Service Mode. This is also true if two
Modes
have the same start time but different stop times.
Administration
62 Service Modes
If one Service Mode starts and stops within the times of
another Service Mode, the first service temporarily ends
when the second service starts. The first service then
resumes when the second service has ended.
Programming Service Mode setting
Beginwith
.
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are
Manual, Off and Auto.
2.
Press ( N e x t ] .
If you chose Manual,
appears for programming the
Trunk answer:
Trunk Answer feature.
OR
If you chose Off,
Even i n s appears for programming the next
Service Mode.
OR
If you chose Automatic,
S t a r t t i m e : 2 3 : 0 0 appears for programming the
start and stop time.
Programming the Automatic start time
Begin with Start t i m e : 2 3 : 0 0 .
1.
Press
to change the start time.
Hour: 23 appears.
2.
Press
3.
Enter the digit(s) for the hour in
from the dial pad.
4.
Press
to programthe hour.
or 24-hour format
to program the minutes.
M i n u t e s : 00 appears.
5.
Press
6.
Enter the digit(s) for the minutes from the dial pad.
Administration
.
.
Service Modes 63
7.
Press [ N e x t ] .
or PM appears, go to step 8.
If
OR
Programming continues with the Automatic stop time.
to choose the
or PM setting.
8.
Press
9.
Press (Next] to program Automatic stop time.
OR
Press
until you return to the desired
programming heading.
Programming the Automatic stop time
Begin with
time:
.
Press
to change the stop time.
1.
07 appears.
2.
3 .
4.
Press
to change the hour.
Enter the digit(s) for the hour in
from the dial pad.
Press
or 24-hour format
to program the minutes.
M i n u t e s : 0 0 appears.
5.
Press
6.
Enter the digit(s) for the minutes from the dial pad.
7.
Press
If
or PM appears, go to step 8.
OR
Programming continues with the Trunk Answer feature.
8.
Press
9.
Press
.
to choose the
or PM setting.
to program Trunk Answer.
OR
Press
until you return to the desired
programming heading.
Administration
64 Service Modes
Trunk Answer
This feature allows you to answer, from any telephone, an
external call which is ringing at another telephone in your
off ice.
This feature is useful if the other telephones have not been
assigned the same lines as the telephone you are using to
answer the call.
Programming Trunk Answer
Begin with Trunk answer:
1.
Press
.
to change the setting.
are
and
2.
Press
Extra-dial
to program the Extra-dial telephone.
telephone
A telephone normally in service as a Direct-Dial telephone,
can be programmed in Service Modes to extend its ringing to
an Extra-Dial telephone.
When this is programmed, internal calls to the Direct-Dial
telephone also ring at the Extra-dial telephone.
Programming hints
Up to five Direct-Dial telephones can be assigned in the
Direct-Dial section of Configuration programming. The
dial telephone provides the option of assigning one more
system for each
Direct-Dial telephone in the
operational Service Mode.
Administration
Service Modes 65
Programming the Extra-dial telephone
Beginwith Extra-dial: 221 .
1.
2.
Press
to change the Extra-dial telephone.
Enter an internal number from the dial pad. Default is
221.
OR
3.
Press
for
Press
to program Ringing.
appears.
Show line:
Ringing
You can assign additional telephones to ring for incoming
calls on each external line. Ringing can also be assigned to
target lines.
You can also
will also ring
that the Auxiliary Ringer (if installed)
those calls.
Programming hints
A Ringing telephone can be assigned to more than one
Service Mode.
Programming Ringing
Begin with
1.
1
.
Enter an external line number from the dial pad.
Rinsing Sets appears.
OR
Press
to copy the Ringing telephone
assignments from one line to another.
OR
Press
to program the next Service Mode.
Administration
66 Service Modes
2.
Press
(Flux.
to program Auxiliary Ringer in step 6
appears).
OR
Press [Show) to assign ringing telephones.
sets if none
set: 221 appears, or
are assigned. Default is 221.
3.
Press
to add a new ringing telephone for the line.
Go to step 4.
OR
Press REMOVE to remove the ringing telephone from
the line. Repeat step 3.
OR
Go to step 5.
4.
To add a new ringing telephone:
Enter the internal number from the dial pad.
Repeat step 3 to assign more ringing telephones.
5.
Press (Next] to program the Auxiliary Ringer.
Flux.
appears.
6.
Press
Y(Yes) and
7.
to change the setting. Options are
Press (Next] to program Ringing for another line.
appears.
Show line:
OR
Press [Heading] until you return to the desired
programming heading.
Administration
Service Modes 67
Service Mode 2
The second Service Mode is programmed in the same way
as Service Mode 1.
Beginning Service Mode 2 programming
Begin with
1.
Press
.
to change the Service Mode name.
appears.
OR
Press [Show] to program the Service Mode control.
Manual appears.
OR
Press
to program the third Service Mode.
Service Mode 3
The third Service Mode is programmed in the same way as
Service Mode 1.
Beginning Service Mode 3 programming
Begin with
1.
Press
Lunch .
to change the Service Mode name.
appears.
OR
Press (Show] to program the Service Mode control.
Manual appears.
OR
Press
to program the Passwords feature.
Administration
68 Password
What is Password?
The Administration password helps prevent misuse of the
telephone system. To ensure security, limit the
distribution of the passwords to selected personnel.
The password is a one to six-digit number that allows access
to Administration programming. This prevents unauthorized
or unintentional changes to settings.
Th default value of the Administration password’is :
which is the same as:
The digits you enter for the password are not shown on the
display.
Programming hints
Keep a record of your password in a secure place.
The password will be easier to remember if the digits
correspond to the letters in a word.
If you forget the Administration password, you will not be
able to access Administration programming. Call your
Service Representative to re-assign a new Administration
password through Configuration programming.
For security reasons, it is a good idea to change the
password periodically.
Administration
Password 69
Programming the Administration password
Begin with 7. Password .
Press
Password appears for programming the
Administration password.
2.
Press
.
appears.
3.
Enter the digits of the new password (maximum
digits) from the dial pad. Use the
display button
if required.
OR
Press
to erase the password.
Password erased briefly appears.
R d m i n . Password appears.
to go to step 6.
Press
4.
to confirm the new password.
Re-enter:
appears.
5.
Enter the new password again.
6.
Press
Press
:
Password changed
briefly appears.
OR
briefly appears if you did not
enter the same password again. The display returns to
Rdmin.
at the beginning of Administration
programming.
Pswd not changed
7.
Press
until you return to the desired
programming heading.
Administration
70 Programming reminders
Programming reminders
The Programming reminders are a record of programmable
users may need to know on a day-tosettings which
day basis.
Fill out whatever sections are programmed and must be
known. If more space is required to record the information,
first photocopy the page before you begin. Not all of the
programmable features may be required information.
Programmable settings can be determined from a review of
the
Modular
Programming Record and use of
the Set and Line Profile feature.
Distribute the Programming reminders to each desk that has
a
telephone, or post them on the wall next to the
telephone.
Administration
Programming reminders 71
Not-star telephones
User name/location
internal number Page zone
Administration
72
Programming reminders
Prime telephones
Prime
Internal number
Lines answered at the Prime telephone
-
-
-
-
-
-
Prime Telephone operator
Internal number
- - - - - - -
Lines answered at the Prime telephone
Prime
Internal number
- - - -
Lines answered at the Prime telephone
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
_ _ _
-
-
-
-
-
Prime Telephone operator
Internal number
Lines answered at the Prime telephone
-
-
-
_ _ _
-
-
Central Answering Position
CAP
Administration
Internal number
Programming reminders 73
Page zones
Page zone
Location
1
2
3
4
5
6
Line Pools
Access code
n
E
-
-
-
-
F
G
- - - -
H
K
-
-
-
-
M
N
-
-
-
-
0
-
-
-
-
L
Miscellaneous programming
Direct-dial telephone
DN (used to change COS)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-.
Direct-dial digit
Call Park Prefix digit
Dial first to make external calls
Administration
74 Programming reminders
Call Pickup Groups
Pickup Group
Administration
Names of members in the group
Programming reminders
75
Service Modes
Service Mode 1
Service Mode 2
Service Mode 3
Name
Name
Name
Start
Time
Control telephone
Start
Time
stop
Time
Control telephone
Start
Time
stop
Time
Control telephone
- - - - - - -
Ringing telephones
Ringing telephones
Ringing telephones
- - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - - _ _ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Extra-dial telephone
Extra-dial telephone
Extra-dial telephone
- - - - - - -
Administration
telemanuals.com
Telephone
features
l eemaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
Contents i
Contents
Administration overview 1
Administration headings 1
Getting started 3
Before you begin programming 3
Entering Administration 4
Exiting Administration 4
System Speed Dial 5
What is System Speed Dial? 5
To begin System Speed Dial programming 5
Programming System Speed Dial 6
System Speed Dial number 6
Line Selection 7
Digits 8
System Speed Dial Name 8
Bypass Restrictions IO
Names 11
What is Names? 11
To begin Names programming 11
Programming Names 11
Telephone Names 11
Line Names 13
Time and Date 15
What is Time and Date? 15
To begin Time and Date programming
Programming Time and Date 16
Time 16
Date 17
15
Administration
ii Contents
Direct-Dial 19
What is Direct-Dial? 19
Programming Direct-Dial 19
Capabilities
21
What is Capabilities? 21
To begin Capabilities programming 22
Dialing filters 23
Remote access packages 29
Telephone (Set) abilities 31
Programming Telephone (Set) abilities 32
Telephone (Set) filter 32
Line/telephone (Line/set) filter 33
Telephone Administration Lock 34
Full Handsfree 36
Automatic Handsfree 37
Handsfree Answerback 37
Call Pickup (Group) 38
Page zone 39
Auxiliary Ringer 39
Direct-dial telephones 39
Call Forward On Busy 40
Call Forward No Answer 41
Redirect ring 42
Hotline 43
Line abilities 48
Line filter 48
Remote filter 49
Remote package 50
Class of Service (COS) passwords 51
User filter 54
Line filter 55
Remote package 56
Administration
Contents iii
Service Modes
What is Service Modes? 57
To begin Service Modes programming
58
Programming
Service
Modes
58
Control telephones 58
Service Mode 1
60
Service Mode name 60
Service Mode setting
61
Trunk Answer
64
Extra-dial telephone 64
Ringing
65
Service Mode 2
67
Service Mode 3
67
Password
68
What is Password? 68
Programming the Administration password 69
Programming reminders 70
Administration
Administration overview 1
Administration overview
Administration programming lets you change settings for the
system, as well as settings for individual
entire
telephones and external lines.
Pre-programmed default settings may initially be sufficient
for your needs. You can use Administration programming,
System by changing
however, to customize your
these default settings.
Administration headings
Administration programming has seven major sections:
System Speed Dial assigns a two-digit code (01-70)
for fast dialing of up to 70 telephone numbers from any
telephone.
Names identifies external lines and telephones by
name (for example, LAURA or ROOM 6). When you
call a co-worker, your name appears on the display of
telephone.
your co-worker’s
Time and Date adjusts the time and date displayed on
telephone.
each
Direct-Dial designates the telephones that can be
reached by dialing a single digit. There can be five
Direct-Dial telephones, each with a group of telephones
from which it will receive Direct-Dial calls.
Capabilities defines dialing filters, remote access
packages, line abilities and telephone abilities. It
assigns restrictions and capabilities to Class of Service
to
(COS) passwords, to telephones, to lines
line/telephone combinations. Dialing filters, remote
access packages and COS passwords control access
to the system’s resources by internal and remote users.
Administration
2
Administration overview
Service Modes controls how the
system will
respond to calls, depending on the time of day. For
example, incoming calls during lunch can be made to
ring both at their normal destination, and at a
receptionist’s desk.
Password changes the password that controls access
to Administration programming.
Administration
.
Getting started 3
Getting started
Before you begin programming
Obtain
the
Programming Overlay
the
Modular
Programming Record
Know how
to enter and exit Administration programming
to use the buttons associated with the Programming
Overlay.
Remember
to record programming changes on the
Modular
Programming Record. Photocopy the
appropriate pages, and distribute them to everyone
system. You can also record
who uses the
information for distribution on the Programming
reminders charts at the end of this chapter.
that default options are shown in bold type. Most
display messages in procedures show a default option.
that defaults correspond to those assigned during
installation. The option you see while
programming may be different if that feature has been
changed. If a line number or internal number appears
on the display during programming, an example is
shown in the Administration procedures.
that the default
installed
internal numbers depend on the
system. The defaults are:
two-digit internal numbers (beginning at 21 for
expanded
systems
three-digit internal numbers (beginning at 221) for
systems.
expanded
l
l
Administration
4
started
Entering
1.
Administration
Complete all calls on your
or M7324 Telephone.
(The receiver should remain on the telephone during
programming.)
2.
Enter the Administration access code, using the feature
button and the dial pad:
Press (Feature]
which is the same as:
Press
3.
appears.
Enter the Administration password from the dial pad.
(The password does not appear on the display as you
enter it.)
dial
appears, and three triangular indicators appear on
the vertical display next to the rows of buttons.
If the password is correct, 1.
If the password is incorrect, the display does not
change. Check the password. Press
and reenter the password.
4.
Exiting
Place the
Programming Overlay over the
buttons pointed to by the indicators
Administration
1. Press
End
i
appears.
Since
records all changes as you make them, there
is no need to worry about leaving the session without
“saving” them.
Administration
.
System Speed Dial 5
System Speed Dial
What is System Speed Dial?
System Speed Dial allows you to program up to 70
telephone numbers that can be dialed, using a two-digit code
from any
telephone.
(01 to
System Speed Dial includes the following five settings:
System Speed Dial number
Line Selection
Display Digits
System Speed Dial Name
Bypass Restrictions.
Select the setting or settings you wish to program, and find
the description and programming procedure. The System
Speed Dial settings are listed above in the order that they
appear during programming.
To begin System Speed Dial programming
Begin with 1.
1.
Press [Show]
dial
2.
dial .
appears.
Enter the two-digit System Speed Dial code (from 01 to
70) from the dial pad.
Speed dial
12 , for example, appears if
was
entered.
OR
Press
Dial number.
dial
to program the first
01 appears.
Administration
6 System Speed Dial
Programming System Speed Dial
System Speed Dial number
This setting lets you assign a System Speed Dial telephone
number to a two-digit code. The System Speed Dial number
may contain 24 characters.
You may first view a previously programmed number before
changing it, or directly proceed to change the number.
Programming hints
A Host System Signaling feature code may be inserted into
the System Speed Dial number. Pause and Run/Stop each
use one character position; and Link, Timed Release, and
Programmed Release each use two positions.
Programming the System Speed Dial number
Begin with
dial
1 , for example.
1.
Press
only if settings for this System Speed
Dial code were already assigned, and you wish now to
assign default settings.
Go to step 6.
2.
Press
:
appears if no number was
NO
previously assigned.
OR
5552466 , for example, appears if a number was
previously programmed. I EW- and -UI EW
appear if the number is longer than 16 digits.
3.
Press
Administration
.
appears.
.
System Speed Dial 7
4.
Enter the new telephone number from the dial pad
(maximum of 24 digits), including ail digits such as an
initial
or an area code that must be dialed to call the
number manually.
99975823, appears, for example.
If the number is more than 16 digits long, the left-most
digits disappear from the display as you continue to
enter the System Speed Dial number.
Press the
display button if required to
backspace the cursor.
5.
Press
6.
Press
to program another System Speed
Dial number.
Speed dial
appears on the display to allow you to
continue programming at step 1.
when the number has been entered.
OR
Press
to program Line Selection.
Line Selection
This setting allows you to specify the external line that will be
used for a System Speed Dial number. The options are the
Prime line (the default), an external line, or a line pool.
Programming Line Selection
Begin with:
1 ine (the default).
OR
Use line: 002 , for example, if a line is already assigned.
OR
Pool
42 , for example, if a Line Pool access code
is already assigned.
1.
If you wish to change the setting,
Press
until the required setting appears.
2.
If you have chosen a line number or a Line Pool access
code, enter the digits from the dial pad. A Line Pool
access code can be from one to four digits long.
Administration
8 System Speed Dial
3.
Press [Next) when the digits have all been entered,
to program
Digits.
Display Digits
This setting determines whether the telephone number will
be displayed when a System Speed Dial number is used, or
whether a name associated with that number will be
displayed.
Programming Display Digits
Begin with
.
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are Y
(Yes), and N (No).
2.
Press [Next] :
If you chose No, program System Speed Dial Name.
OR
If you chose Yes, program Bypass Restrictions.
System Speed Dial Name
This setting allows you to assign a name to the stored
System Speed Dial number. The name can be up to the full
length of the display (16 characters).
When the Display Digits setting is “No”, this name will be
display when someone uses the
displayed on the
System Speed Dial feature.
This option appears only if the Display Digits setting is “No”.
If no name is specified, only the System Speed Dial number
appears. The display shows, for example,
Dia 1 82 for System Speed Dial code 02.
Administration
System Speed Dial 9
Programming the System Speed Dial Name
Begin with
1.
.
Press (Show].
Dial 02
appears, for example.
OR
COURIER appears
if, for example, the name “Courier”
was assigned.
2.
Press
to enter the new name.
OR
Press
3.
to program Bypass Restrictions.
Enter the first character of the name by pressing the
appropriate dial pad button one, two, three, or four
times.
OR
Press [Next] to restore the default name and
proceed to program Bypass Restrictions.
4.
to move the cursor to the next position.
Press
Continue entering characters (remember the 16
character limit).
5.
Press
to program Bypass Restrictions.
Administration
10 System Speed Dial
Bypass Restrictions
This setting allows the System Speed Dial number to bypass
any previously programmed restrictions.
Restrictions prohibiting calls are programmed in the
Capabilities section of Administration programming.
Programming Bypass Restrictions
Begin with
N .
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are N
(No), and Y (Yes).
2.
Press [Heading] until you return to the desired
programming heading.
OR
Press
Dial number.
Administration
to program the next System Speed
.
Names 11
Names
What is Names?
Names allows you to assign names to identify external lines,
telephones. During
target lines and your co-workers’
a
call, the name (if programmed) appears on each
telephone’s display instead of the external line
number or internal telephone number of the caller.
Names includes the following settings:
Telephone Names
Line Names
Select the setting or settings you wish to program, and find
the description and programming procedure. The Names
settings are listed above in the order that they appear during
programming.
To begin Names programming
Begin with 2. Names .
1.
Press [Show].
appears for programming telephone
names.
2.
Press ( N e x t ] .
appears for programming line names.
Programming Names
Telephone Names
You personalize your off ice communication by assigning
system. A
names to the telephones in the
telephone’s internal number is its default name (for example,
“227: 227”).
Administration
12 Names
Programming hints
Telephone names can contain both letters and numbers, but
cannot be longer than seven characters. The # and *
symbols cannot be used.
If Automatic Telephone Relocation is turned ON, the name
and internal number of a telephone are saved if the
telephone is moved within your system.
You can give the same name to two or more telephones, or.
to a telephone and a line in your system. To avoid confusion,
however, you should avoid such duplication. Use initials,
abbreviations, or even nicknames to give each telephone a
unique name.
Programming a Telephone Name
with Set
.
Press [ s h o w ] .
set:
appears.
2.
Enter the internal number of the telephone.
OR
Press
for the name of the telephone with the
first internal number.
22 1: JOHN appears, for example, if the name John is
already assigned; or,
22 1: 22 1 appears, for example, if a name has not yet
been assigned.
3.
Administration
Press
.
A cursor appears, and the name disappears from the
display.
Names 13
4.
Enter the first character of the name by pressing the
appropriate dial pad button one, two, three, or four
times.
OR
Press
to restore the default name and
proceed to program the name for the next internal
number.
5.
to move the cursor to the next position.
Press
Continue entering all of the required characters .
(remember the seven-character limit) for the name.
6.
To enter the name for another telephone:
Press [Back) to return to S h o w s e t :
.
OR
Press
number.
to show the name for the next internal
Line Names
This setting allows you to assign a name to an external line.
The line number is the default name (for example,
For example
One external line in your company is assigned to calls to the
main warehouse only. Name the line “WAREHSE”.
Programming hints
Line names can contain both letters and numbers but cannot
be longer than seven characters. The # and * symbols
cannot be used.
You can name a line by its seven-digit telephone number.
Two lines cannot have the same name. If you enter a line
error
name which has already been used, you will hear
tone, and Use
n a m e appears on your telephone’s
display. You can, however, give the same name to a
telephone and a line in your system.
Administration
14
Names
Programming a Line Name
Begin with Line
.
1.
Press
Show line:
2.
appears.
Enter the line number from the dial pad.
OR
Press
line (001).
to program the name of the first
Line00 1:
appears, for example, if the name
WATS is already assigned; or,
1 appears, for example, if a name
has not been assigned.
3.
Press
. A cursor appears, and the name
disappears from the display.
4.
Enter the first character of the name by pressing the
appropriate dial pad button one, two, three, or four
times.
OR
Press (Next] to restore the default name and
proceed to program the name for the next external line.
5.
Press
to move the cursor to the next position.
Continue entering all of the required characters
(remember the seven-character limit) for the name.
6.
To enter the name for another external line:
Press
to return to Show 1 ine:
.
OR
Press
line.
Administration
to show the name for the next external
Time and Date 15
Time and Date
What is Time and Date?
.
When a
telephone is in its normal idle state, the
current time and date appear on the display
(Mar 31
PM , for example). When active, some
features cause a different message to appear.
Time and Date adjusts the following settings:
Time
Date
Select the setting or settings you wish to program, and find
the description and programming procedure. The Time and
Date settings are listed above in the order that the headings
appear during programming.
To begin Time and Date programming
Begin with 3. Time and date .
Press ( S h o w ] .
T i m e 15: 45 , for example, appears for programming
the time.
2.
Press [Next].
3 1 Mar 9 1 , for example, appears for
programming the date.
Administration
16 Time and Date
Programming Time and Date
Time
This feature allows you to assign the time.
Programming hints
During normal service, the time display in English is in
format showing
or
. In the Alternate
Language, the time is always displayed in 24-hour format as
follows:
English
Mar 31
French
31 mar
PM
Spanish 31 Mar 15: 45
If the display on a telephone is blank, the telephone may be
disconnected, or there may be no power to the Key Service
Unit (KSU). if power is out for more than three consecutive
days, or if you reset the system, the display will show
Jan 1 1: 00
when the system is restarted. When
power is restored, the clock will begin to run again, but the
time will be incorrect.
All entries must consist of either one or two digits. If the
system is being administered in English and the hour entry is
less than 13, the display prompts you to specify
or PM .
Programming Time
Begin with Time 15: 45 .
1.
Press
.
Hour: 15 appears.
2.
Press
to program the hour. The hour is
.
erased.
OR
If you do not wish to change the hour, go to step 4.
Administration
Time and Date 17
3.
Enter the digit(s) for the hour in 12 or 24-hour format
from the dial pad.
4.
Press
Minutes: 45 appears.
If you do not wish to change the minutes, go to step 7.
5.
Press
6.
Enter the digit(s) for the minutes from the dial pad.
7.
Press
If
or PM appears, and you wish to change the’
setting, go to step 8.
.
OR
Go to step 9 if you do not wish to change AM/PM.
OR
Programming continues at step 10.
8.
Press
9.
Press
10.
Date 31 Mar 91 appears.
Proceed to program the date.
.
OR
Press (Heading] until you return to the desired
programming heading.
OR
Press (Next] to program Direct-Dial.
Date
This feature allows you to assign the date.
Programming hints
All entries must consist of either one or two digits. The month
is entered as a one or two-digit number between 1 and 12.
For example, March is entered as either “3” or “03”. Only the
last two digits of the year are entered.
Administration
18 Time and Date
Programming Date
Begin with Date 31 Mar 91 .
1.
Press
.
91
2.
Press
appears.
to program the year.
OR
If you do not wish to change the year, go to step 4.
3.
4.
Enter the last two digits of the year from the dial pad.
Press
appears.
If you do not wish to change the month, go to
step 7.
Month:
03
5.
Press
6.
Enter the digit(s) for the month from the dial pad.
7.
Press [Next].
3 1 appears.
If you do not wish to change the day, go to step
8.
Press
9.
Enter the digits from the dial pad.
10.
Press
until you return to the desired
programming heading.
.
.
OR
Press [Next] to program Direct-Dial.
Administration
Direct-dial 19
Qirect-Dial
What is Direct-Dial?
This feature allows
users to call a Direct-Dial
telephone assigned to their telephone, by dialing a single
digit. Up to five Direct-Dial telephones can be designated to
handle calls from five groups of telephones.
Use this Administration heading to specify which telephone
directory numbers
will be designated as Direct-Dial
telephones.
Programming hints
You must select the Direct-Dial digit in Configuration
Mi
11
You must also specify which
telephones can call a Direct-Dial telephone, and which one
1 it
they will call, in Administration (5.
Programming Direct-Dial
Begin with 4. Direct-Dial .
1.
Press
1: 22 1, for example, appears as the default DN
assigned as the first Direct-Dial telephone.
OR
Press
to program Capabilities.
2.
You can assign a new DN as a Direct-Dial telephone by
pressing
and entering the digits of the new
DN.
OR
You can change the value to
by pressing
, and pressing
Administration
20 Direct-dial
Press (Heading) until you return to the programming
heading 4. Direct-Dial .
OR
Press
to continue programming up to a total
of five Direct-Dial telephones.
After the fifth Direct-Dial programming heading,
pressing (Next] displays the programming heading
for Capabilities.
Administration
Capabilities programming 21
Capabilities
What is Capabilities?
Capabilities programming assigns limitations, permissions,
and remote access capabilities to Class of Service (COS)
passwords, telephones, and lines.
The main sections of Capabilities programming are:
Dialing Filters
Remote access packages
Telephone (set) abilities
Line abilities
Class of Service (COS) passwords
Dialing filters allows you to group restrictions on dialed-digit
sequences into “filters”. These filters can later be applied to
specific telephones or external lines.
Remote access packages allows you to define the types of
access to Page and line pools that you will permit remote
users.
Telephone abilities applies Dialing filters to telephones.
Line abilities applies Dialing filters, Remote access dialing
filters, and Remote access packages to lines for remote
access.
Class of Service (COS) passwords use Dialing filters and
Remote Access packages to control remote users’ access to
the system’s resources. COS password programming
defines passwords, their associated filters, and their remote
access packages.
Administration
22 Capabilities programming
To begin Capabilities programming
Begin with 5. Capabilities
.
1.
Press
i
appears for programming the first
ia
level of Capabilities.
2.
Press [ S h o w ] .
Show filter:
programmed.
OR
Press
appears for selecting a filter to be
appears for programming the
remote access packages.
OR
Press (Next] twice.
appears on the display for
Set abi 1 it
programming the telephone characteristics.
OR
Press
three times.
Line abi 1 it
appears for programming line
characteristics.
OR
Press
four times
Passwords appears for programming Class of
Service passwords.
Administration
Capabilities
Dialing filters 23
Dialing filters
A dialing filter is made up of restrictions and exceptions.
These specify the external numbers which can or cannot be
dialed from a telephone or on a line.
Filters are defined under the programming heading
Dial i
i
. A dialing filter can be applied later to
one or more telephones, or lines, in programming
,
Set abilities
abilities and
Passwords . They may be used as telephone (set)
filters, line filters and line/set filters to manage outgoing calls,
and as remote filters applied to lines. Remote filters control
the numbers that can be dialed by remote users when they
to use a
line for placing calls.
are calling into
Internal users
Dialing filters restrict the numbers that an internal user can
dial on external lines.
If a line/set filter has been defined for the line selected at the
user’s telephone, it completely replaces any line filters or
telephone filters which might otherwise apply.
If no line/set filters have been defined then dialed digits are
filtered through (and may be rejected by either of) the
telephone filter (if defined) and the line filter (if defined).
External users
For a remote user, who has dialed into
on an
auto-answer line (or a DID line), and passed through any
security, there are no restrictions on the numbers the
user can dial.
For remote users trying to tandem through the
system, the Line filters and Remote filters assigned in Line
abilities apply.
Administration
24 Capabilities
Dialing filters
For a remote user entering the system through
the
filters and Remote access packages associated with their
COS password replace the Remote filter, the Line filter, and
the Remote access package assigned to the incoming line.
Programming hints for Filters with Restrictions
and Exceptions
can have up to 100 dialing filters (00 to 99).
Filter 00 permits unrestricted dialing. Unlike filters 01 to
99, the restrictions and exceptions for filter 00 cannot
be changed.
Filter 01 is pre-programmed with five restrictions and
some associated exceptions. See the Dialing filter
default templates.
Dialing filter default templates
Hybrid
Filter
Square
00
01
Unrestricted dialing
Restr’n 0
Restr’n 1
Excpt’n:
1800
1555
Restr’n 90
Restr’n 9 1
Excpt’n:
91800
91555
91 l
Restr'n
911
Excpt’n 911
Restr’n 4 1 1
Restr’n 9 7 6
02 99
Administration
None
Restr’n
Excpt’n
Restr’n
Restr’n
0*555
9911
9911
9411
9976
Hybrid a n d PBX
settings are the
same as the
Square template
.
Caoabilities
The asterisk
any digit.
Dialing filters 25
is a “wild card” character that stands for
Each filter (01 to 99) can have as many as 48
restrictions; there is no specific limit on the number of
exceptions that can be allocated to any restriction.
The total number of restrictions and exceptions
allocated to the 99 programmable filters cannot
exceed 400.
Filters 02, 03, and 04, although not pre-set with
restrictions and exceptions, are the default filter
settings used later in programming:
Filter
Where the filter appears as a default
setting in Capabilities programming
02
Set
03
04
abilities-abilities--
Line
abilities--
Set filter:
filter:
Remote filter:
The maximum length for a restriction is 15 digits; for an
exception, the maximum is 16 digits.
Any restriction or exception can be used in one or more
filters. Each time it is used, it counts as one entry. For
example, if restriction 411 appears in filters
02 and
03 it has used up three entries of the 400 entries
available.
Removing a restriction also removes the exceptions
associated with it. This also changes the identifying
number of the restriction. For example, removal of
restriction 01 causes restrictions 01 to 48 to be renumbered and displayed as 01 to 47.
Administration
26 Capabilities
Dialing filters
Note:
The removal of a restriction and its exceptions
from one dialing filter has no effect on the
contents of another filter into which the
restriction and exceptions were copied.
Deleting a filter is not possible. Removing the
restrictions programmed on a filter makes it an
unrestricted filter but the filter is not removed (for
example, filter 08 remains filter 08 despite any changes
to it or to other filters).
For example
You may need filters for three different types of users:
Managers may require unrestricted dialing.
Secretaries may need to be limited to calls on line 003
to the west coast office only.
Clerks may need to be limited to calling specific area
codes and the west coast office.
In the table below, notice the reduction in the number of
available restrictions and exceptions after each filter has
been programmed.
ser
Filter # type
00
01
02
manaaer
secretary
clerk
Total
Note:
Administration
of
# of
#of restr’n excpt’n
Restr’n Excpt’n remaining (400 max.)
-5
-5
7
12
12
17
I
400
390
371
Record restrictions and exceptions for each filter on
the
Modular DR4 Programming Record.
Capabilities
Dialing filters 27
Programming Dialing filters with Restrictions and
Exceptions
Restrictions
Beginwith Dialing filters ,
1.
Press [ s h o w ] .
appears on the display for entering
a filter number to be programmed.
Show filter:
2.
Enter a two-digit filter number (for example, 05).
The prompt N O restrictions appears on the
display if this filter has not been programmed before.
3.
Press
4.
Enter the digits for the restriction.
5.
Press
to program a restriction.
appears on the display.
0 1:
to program the restriction.
0 1: 1234, for example, appears on the
display.
6.
Press
to program another restriction for the filter.
appears on the display.
02:
OR
Press
to program any exceptions to this
restriction.
i
appears.
No
OR
Press (Heading] or
to program another filter.
appears
on
the display.
Show filter:
7.
At the Show i
then press
Remote Access
prompt, press [Heading],
to continue programming with
Administration
28 Capabilities
Dialing filters
Exceptions
Exceptions, if required, are entered for individual restrictions
as soon as the restriction is programmed.
Begin, for example, at
from step 5 above).
1.
0 1: 1234 (continuing
Press
i
appears on the display.
2.
Press
3.
Enter the digits for the exception (for example 12345).
4.
Press
5.
Press
to program another exception to the
restriction.
002:
appears on the display.
to program an exception.
appears on the display.
00 1:
to program the exception.
00 1: 12345 appears on the display.
OR
Press
or
to return to programming
restrictions.
0 1: 1234 appears on the display.
OR
Press
Show f i l t e r :
6.
Administration
appears on the display.
prompt, press [Heading], to
i1
heading, then press
to continue programming with Remote
Access Packages.
filter:
return to the Dial ins
Capabilities
Remote access packages 29
Remote access packages
Remote access packages allow you to control the remoteline pools and the Remote Page feature.
use of
Remote access packages are associated with COS
passwords and the auto-answer lines used by remote users.
Programming hints
systems can have up to 16 Remote access
packages (00 to 15). The limitations are:
Package 00 permits no access to line pools or to
remote paging. Unlike packages 01 to 15, package 00
cannot be changed.
For remote users calling into the
system to use
lines for calling out, for example, the Remote
dialing filters and the outgoing Line dialing filters (in
Line abilities.) still apply.
Remote access packages default template
Parameter
Square
Hybrid
PBX
Prohibits access to line pools and Remote
Page. Can not be changed.
Package 01
Line Pool
access
Y for Pool A
N for Pools B to 0
Remote Page No
Packages 02
15
N for Pools A to 0
Line Pool
access
Remote Page No
Remote package 00 appears later in programming Line
abilities as the default setting for the Remote package
setting.
Administration
30 Capabilities
Remote access packages
Programming Remote access packages
Begin with R e m
1.
.
Press
Show package:
appears on the display.
OR
Press
to program Telephone (Set) abilities.
2.
Enter a two-digit package number.
The heading L i n e
access appears on the
display.
3.
Press [ S h o w ) .
N , for instance, appears on the display.
Note:
This display shows an alphabetic line pool
identifier, followed by a numeric line pool
access code between brackets (defined in
4. Miscel 1
of Configuration). If no
access code has been identified, the brackets
appear empty (for example
N).
OR
Press (Next] to program Remote paging.
4.
Press
5.
Press
or
to display the settings for
the next or previous line pools.
to allow Line Pool access.
N appears on the display after the last
line pool.
6.
Press
to allow Remote paging.
OR
Press
to return to the heading
to program another Remote
Show
access package.
Program another Remote access package.
OR
.
Press [Heading] to return to Rem access
,
and then press
to continue programming
with Telephone (Set) abilities.
Administration
Capabilities
Telephone abilities 31
Telephone (Set) abilities
Telephone (Set) abilities programming applies dialing filters
and permissions to telephones. Telephone abilities include
the following settings:
Telephone (set) filters
Line/telephone filters
Telephone Administration Lock
Full Handsfree
Automatic Handsfree
Handsfree Answerback
Call Pickup Group
Page zone
Auxiliary Ringer
Direct-dial telephones
Call Forward On Busy
Call Forward No Answer
Redirect ring
Hotline
. Priority Call.
Administration
32 Capabilities
Telephone abilities
Programming Telephone (Set) abilities
Begin with Set abilities.
1.
Press
Show
2.
appears on the display
Enter the digits for a telephone’s DN to begin
programming Set abilities.
i
appears on the display.
OR
Press
to copy Set abilities programming from one
telephone to another.
OR
Press
to return to the heading
Set abilities .
3.
Press
to program the Line/telephone filters.
OR
Press
until you return to the desired
programming heading.
Telephone (Set) filter
A telephone filter is a collection of restrictions and exceptions
defined in Dialing filters. These filters are applied to
telephones through Set filter programming.
Programming hints
Filters are most commonly used to prevent unauthorized
long-distance calls, without restricting local calls.
Telephone filters do not apply to calls dialed out on E&M
trunks. Someone could dial out to a destination on the
private network that is restricted on the public network.
To restrict calling on E&M lines, apply a restriction to the line
rather than to the telephone.
Administration
Capabilities
Telephone abilities 33
Programming Telephone filters
Begin with
.
1.
Press
2.
Enter a new two-digit filter number.
to change the filter number.
OR
Press
without entering any digits to set the
filter to the 00 filter which permits unrestricted dialing.
3.
Press
to program the Line/telephone fitter.
OR
Press (Heading] until you return to the desired
programming heading.
Line/telephone (Line/set) filter
A Line/telephone dialing filter is applied to a line at a
telephone. This type of filter replaces any line or telephone
filters which might otherwise apply.
As with dialing filters applied to telephones, or to lines,
line/set filters control the numbers that may be dialed on
specific external lines.
For example, a Line/set filter can permit a specific telephone
to call a specific long-distance number on line 003, but no
other long-distance numbers, and on no other line.
Programming hints
Remember that up to 100 filters may be defined in the
system (filters 00 to 99). Line/set filters fall under this
limitation.
A maximum of 255 Line/set dialing filters may be
applied to lines at telephones.
.
Administration
34 Capabilities
Telephone abilities
Programming Line/telephone filters
Begin with
1.
filters .
Press [Show].
appears on the display to allow entry
of a three-digit line number.
line:
2.
Enter a three-digit line number.
:
appears on the display for assigning a
Fi 1
filter.
3.
Press
to be able to enter a filter number.
OR
Press
Show line:
to retain the default of
appears on the display.
4.
Enter an appropriate two-digit filter number.
5.
Press [Next] or
to program a Line/set
filter on another line.
Show line:
appears on the display.
6.
Enter a three-digit number to program a filter for
another line
OR
Press
to return to
i
,
and then press
to continue programming
with Telephone Administration Lock.
Telephone Administration Lock
Telephone Administration Lock limits the types of features
that may be used or programmed at a telephone.
There are three options: None, Full and Partial.
Options explained
None allows you to access any feature on your
telephone.
Administration
.
Contents i
sntents
Feature Finder 1
Using
features 2
Answering the telephone 5
Callback 5
Call Queuing 5
Delayed Ring Transfer 5
12
External
Internal
12
Call Forward 15
Call Forward on Busy 15
Call Forward (No Answer)
Call
Override 15
Call Park 18
Call Pickup 20
Directed Pickup 20
Group Pickup 20
Trunk Answer 20
Camp On 23
Conference 25
COS Password 29
Telephone features
ii Contents
Customizing your telephone 30
Automatic Handsfree 30
Contrast Adjustment 30
Dialing Modes 31
Language Choice 32
Move Line buttons 33
Dialing 34
Ring Type 35
Ring Volume 35
Telephone Administration Lock 35
Dialing 37
Direct Dial 37
External line access code 37
Last Number Redial 37
Ring Again 38
Saved Number Rediai 38
Do Not Disturb 43
Feature Programming 45
Erase a button 45
Button Inquiry 45
Group Listen 48
Handsfree/Mute 49
Hold 51
Automatic Hold 51
Exclusive Hold 51
Listen on Hold 51
Music/Tones/Silence on Hold 52
Telephone
Contents iii
Host System Signaling 53
Link 53
Pause 53
Programmed Release 54
Run/Stop 54
Timed Release 54
Line Pools 56
Line Redirection 58
Long Tones 63
Message 64
Telephones 67
Buttons 67
Feature button 67
Hold button 67
Memory buttons 67
Answer buttons 67
68
Line buttons 68
Programmed Feature Buttons 68
Release button 69
Volume Bar 69
Headset 69
Using a headset 69
Hearing Aid Compatibility 70
Wall Mounting 70
.
Page 71
Priority Call 73
Telephone features
iv Contents
Service Modes 75
Special Telephones 77
Alarm telephone 77
Central Answering Position 77
Control telephone 78
Direct Dial 78
Emergency telephone 79
Extra-Dial telephone 79
Hotline telephone 79
Prime telephone 81
Speed Dial 82
Program Personal Speed Dial 82
System features 85
Accidental Disconnect Protection 85
Automatic telephone relocation 85
Background Music 85
Cancel Background Music 86
Class of Service 86
Internal numbers 86
Lines 87
Disconnect Supervision 87
Line appearance 87
Line Pools 87
Private lines 88
Prime line 88
Ringing Line Preference 88
Target line 88
Overflow Call Routing 89
System Speed Dial 89
Time features 90
Call Duration Timer 90
Telephone features
Contents v
Show Time 90
Transfer 91
Transfer with Announcement 91
Unsupervised Conference 91
Transfer using Hold 92
Using
remotely 95
Voice Call 100
Mute Voice Call tones 100
Handsfree Answerback 100
Voice Call Deny 100
Telephone features
Feature Finder 1
Feature Finder
Answer a call
Answering the telephone 5
Answer a call ringing
on another telephone
Call Pickup 6, 21
Bring another person into
a telephone conversation
Conference 26
Group Listen 48
6, 49, 100
Privacy 27
Change how
your telephone works
Button Inquiry 45
Contrast Adjustment 31
Class of Service 30, 86, 98
Customizing your telephone 31
Dialing Modes 32, 39
Do Not Disturb 6, 17, 44
Feature programming 37
Language Choice 34
Line appearance
Line buttons 35, 68
Lines 87
Telephones 67
Prime line 88
Private fines 88
Ring Type 36
Ring Volume 36
Telephone Admin. Lock 36
Communicate with
another person in your office
Dialing 38
Direct Dial 38, 77
Message 6, 64
Page 70
Priority Call 39, 73
Ring Again 38
Voice Call 7, 71, 100
Handle many calls at once
Answer buttons 67
Central Answering Position 77
Call Queuing 5
Hold 51, 67
Prime telephone 6, 11, 81
Have your calls answered
at another telephone
Call Forward 16
Line Redirection 58
Service Modes 75
Make calls quickly without having to
dial the whole number
13, 37, 68
Hotline telephone 79
Last Number Redial 38
Speed Dial 82
Saved Number Redial 39
Make calls to numbers outside your
system
Dialing 38
External line access code 38
Host System Signaling 53
Line Pools 39, 56, 88
See how long
you have been on a call
Call Duration Timer 90
Show Time 90
Transfer a call
to another person
Call Park 19
Camp 24
Transfer 24, 27, 91
Use
Using
remotely
remotely 95
Telephone features
2 Using
features
Using
features
Using a feature
To use a
feature, enter the feature code and watch
your telephone display for instructions. Different displays
come up, at different times, depending on how you invoke
the feature and the choices you make while using the
feature. If you want more information about a display, look
up in the Display section of each feature listing.
Note that some features only work in certain circumstances.
For instance, to use Conference you must have two calls at
your telephone, one active and one on hold.
One line and two line displays
All
telephones have LCD displays that give you
information about your calls and guide you through
features. The
and M7208 telephones have a one-line
display. The M7310 and M7324 telephones have a two-line
display. The second line of a two-line display shows the
functions of the three buttons directly below it. If you have a
telephone with a two-line display, you can use these display
and
buttons. Some display buttons, such as
are simply shortcuts. If you have a telephone with a one line
display, these shortcuts are not available. Other display
and SHOW, perform essential functions.
buttons , such as
If your telephone has a one line display, you can use the
following buttons in place of these display buttons:
Telephone features
Using
features 3
All displays listed in this book are shown as they appear on
the two line display, except those that appear only on
telephones with a single line display. If you are using a
telephone with a single line display, ignore the second line of
the display shown in this book, and the instructions for using
display buttons.
Common feature displays
You may see the following displays when you use a feature.
Someone is in Configuration or
Administration programming. You
cannot use programming features.
Try again later.
You have taken more than 15
seconds to press a button in
response to a display.
You have entered an invalid feature
code.
You have tried to use a feature that
is not available in the present set-up
of your
system.
locked
You cannot use the feature you have
chosen because your telephone is
locked. See Telephone
Administration Lock in Customizing
your telephone.
Dialing and Answering the telephone
Many
features require you to dial telephone
numbers. The displays associated with dialing are listed in
the Dialing section. If you see a display that is not listed with
the feature you are using, look for it in the Dialing section. All
the displays that appear when you are receiving a call are
listed in the Answering the telephone section.
Telephone features
Using
features
One button access
You can program most
feature codes onto telephone
memory buttons so that you can use the feature by pressing
a single button. See Feature programming for instructions.
Whenever this chapter tells you to enter a feature code, you
can do so either by pressing the buttons shown in the feature
description or by pressing a memory button on which the
feature code has been programmed. Similarly, you can enter
a telephone number by pressing an
button.
Cancelling a feature
Some features change the way your telephone works. To
make your telephone work normally again you must cancel
the feature. To cancel a feature, press [Feature], then q
and the feature code. Thus, to cancel Call Forward, which
press
you activate by pressing
If a feature code is programmed onto a memory button, you
can cancel the feature by pressing the memory button.
If you change your mind in the middle of using a feature, you
can back out by pressing
or
Be aware that
pressing
will disconnect your current call.
telephone
Because the
telephone does not have any line
buttons it sometimes works slightly differently from other
telephones. Where other telephones may require
you to select a line button to answer a call, on the
you simply pick up the receiver. Where other telephones
require you to select a line button to take a call off hold, you
press
on the
The
cannot have a
button. You will find special instructions for the
in some feature descriptions.
Telephone features
.
Answering the telephone 5
Answering the telephone
Answering
Your
telephone can receive many different types of
calls. Your telephone’s display tells you what sort of call you
are receiving. The usual way to answer a call is to pick up
the receiver, but there are several other possible methods,
depending on how your system is set up and what kind of
call is ringing.
Callback
When you direct a call you have answered to another
telephone, the system monitors the call to make sure
someone answers it. If no one answers a call within a set
time, the system directs it back to you. Callback generates a
variety of displays. Most occur after a programmable delay
and are listed in this section. Some occur immediately, if the
telephone to which you are directing a call is out of service or
otherwise unavailable. These are listed with the descriptions
of the features in which they occur.
Call Queuing
When you have more than one call ringing at your telephone,
you can choose the call that has the highest priority.
Enter the Call Queuing feature code
The system connects you to the
call that has the highest priority.
Call Queuing answers incoming calls before callback and
camped calls.
Delayed Ring Transfer (DRT)
If no one answers a call within a set time, the system
transfers the call to the Prime telephone.
Telephone features
6
Answering the telephone
Related features
Call Pickup
Call pickup lets you use your telephone to answer a call that
is ringing at someone else’s telephone. See Call Pickup.
Do Not Disturb
If you do not wish to receive calls, turn on Do Not Disturb.
See Do Not Disturb.
Handsfree/Mute
You can answer calls without picking up the receiver using
Handsfree/Mute. See Handsfree/Mute.
Prime telephone
A Prime telephone receives calls that go unanswered at
other telephones. See Special Telephones.
Retrieving a Parked Call
You can retrieve a parked call at any telephone in the
system. See Call Park.
Voice Call Deny
If you do not wish to receive voice calls, turn on Voice Call
Deny. See Voice Call.
What line indicators mean
Flashing on and
off for equal lengths
of time
There is an incoming call on the line.
Flashing on and
off more quickly
You have placed a call on hold:
Flashing on for
longer than off
Someone else has put a call on hold
on that line.
Telephone features
,
Answering the telephone
On, not flashing
7
You are connected to the call on that
line or the line is in use elsewhere.
The line is free.
Off
Rings you may hear
A double beep every
ten seconds
A call has been camped to your
telephone.
A long single ring
There is an external call on the line
for you.
A shorter double ring
There is an internal call on the line
for you or a call is being transferred
t o y o u .
A brief single ring
A call is being redirected on one of
your redirected lines. You cannot
answer this call. See Line
Redirection.
Three beeps
descending in tone.
You are receiving a priority call.
Displays
You will see one or more of the following displays when you
receive a call on your telephone and while you are
answering that call. See Message for a full explanation of the
Message feature. See Dialing for a full explanation of Ring
Again.
You are connected to an internal call.
to transfer
You can press
the call.
4302.
1
Either you are receiving an internal
call from telephone 4302 forwarded
by telephone 4321 or you have an
Answer button for telephone 4321
and an internal call from 4302 is
ringing on 4321.
Telephone features
8 Answering the telephone
You are receiving a call from
telephone 4321.
You have received a Ring Again
offer for a call to an internal
telephone. To call the number again,
press
or the flashing internal
line button. On the M7100, just lift
or
the receiver. Otherwise, press
wait 30 seconds for the Ring Again
offer to expire. For an explanation
Ring Again, see Dialing.
The person to whom you camped the
call did not answer it. The call has
come back to you. Press the
button
line button
to reconnect to the call.
You are connected to an external
call. You can press
to
transfer the call.
The call on line 001 is being
transferred to you by someone else
system.
in your
A camped call is waiting. Press the
line button or use Call Queuing to
answer the call. If you have an
telephone, press [Hold].
Line001
/Line00
No calls
Telephone features
1
Either you are receiving an external
call forwarded from telephone 4321
or you have an Answer button for
telephone 4321 and an external call
is ringing on that telephone.
waiting
You tried to use Call Queuing but no
call was ringing at your telephone.
,
Answering the telephone 9
There is no call ringing at your
telephone. If you have a flashing linebutton but your telephone is not
ringing, you must press the line
button to answer the call on that line.
Nobody answered the call you
parked. The call has come back to
you.
Pick
L
UP
I
You have used the Call Queuing
feature without picking up the
receiver. Auto Handsfree has not
been assigned to your telephone.
You must use the receiver or
to answer a ringing or
camped call.
You are receiving a Priority Call, If
you are on another call, inform the
person you are speaking to that the
call is about to be put on hold. Press
the flashing line indicator of the
Priority Call or wait till the call
connects automatically (in eight
seconds).
The Priority Call goes through when
you hear the next beep.
Your active call is placed on
Exclusive Hold. It will be reconnected
automatically when the priority call
ends (unless you transfer the Priority
Call, in which case you must press
the line button of your original call to
reconnect).
To reject a Priority Call, use DND
press BLOCK.
You have no free line buttonsbn
which to receive a call. Release one
of your current calls and try again to
answer the incoming call.
Telephone features
Answering the telephone
You have received a Ring Again
offer for a line pool. To use the line
pool, press
or the flashing
internal line button. On the
just lift the receiver. Otherwise, press
or wait 30 seconds for the Ring
Again offer to expire. For an
explanation of Ring Again, see
Dialing.
Prime telephone displays
If yours is a Prime telephone, you may see the following
displays.
from 432 1
I
The person at telephone 4321 has
forwarded a call to you using Do Not
Disturb.
The system has transferred a call to
you from a telephone in Do Not
Disturb mode.
so the
Nobody answered this
system transferred it to you.
Line00 1 callback
Someone has camped, parked,. or
transferred a call on line 001, but no
one has answered it. Press the
button or the line button
to connect to the call.
There is no telephone that can
receive a call on line 001 so the
System has transferred it to you.
The call coming in on line 015 was
intended for target line 087. tine 087
is busy so the call has come to
Telephone features
Answering the telephone! I
Notes
There are three indications of an incoming call: ringing, a line
button flashing, and a message on the display. You will not
necessarily receive all three indications for any particular
call. You may have a line that has been set up not to ring at
your telephone. If so, you will see only a flashing line button.
If there is no button free for a camped call to appear, you will
get a special ring and a message on your display, but no line
button will flash. If someone makes a voice call to you, you
will hear a beep followed by their voice. There are many
possible combinations, depending on how your system is set
up. See Lines in the System features section for more
information on the behavior of lines.
There are many ways to answer a call. Many of them
depend on settings in Administration programming.
Depending on various settings and the type of call you are
receiving, you may be able to answer a call by: picking up
the receiver,
the receiver and pressing a line
button, pressing
pressing
and pressing
a line button, pressing a line button, or simply speaking.
If you receive a Priority Call and your telephone has no free
internal line buttons, you cannot transfer the call or do
anything else with it, except release it.
On M7100 telephones, you may answer a second call by
pressing
Your active call is put on hold and you
are connected to the waiting call. You can have no more
than two calls at a time.
Telephone features
12
You can program memory buttons for one-touch dialing of
internal or external telephone numbers.
External
1. Enter the external
2.
3.
4.
feature code
Select the button you want to program.
If you want this autodialer to use a particular line or line
pool, select that line or line pool.
Enter the number.
Internal
1.
Enter the internal
feature code
2.
3.
Select the button you want to program.
Enter the number.
Displays
You will see some of the following displays while
programming an
button. See Dialing for displays
that may occur while using an
button.
Continue to enter digits until the
number is complete. Press
or
(volume down) to erase
an incorrect digit. Press
or
when you are finished.
full
The memory allotted to
numbers in your
system is
full.
While programming External
Autodial, you pressed
before
entering any digits. This erases the
button.
Telephone features
13
Enter the number you wish to
program exactly as you would if you
were dialing it yourself.
You cannot program an
button while you are on a call. Finish
your call or place it on hold before
programming an
button.
Enter the internal telephone number
.
you wish to program.
Press the memory button you want
to program.
QUIT
and
Enter the number you want to
program onto the button, then press
(Hold]. You may include a line or
line pool selection in an
sequence by selecting the line before
entering any digits.
and OK
Enter the number you want to
program onto the button, then press
You may include a
line or line pool selection in an
sequence by selecting the
line before entering any digits.
OK
The number is stored on the button.
system is off for more than three
If the power to your
numbers may be lost from the memory.
days,
numbers must be programmed onto memory
buttons. They can not be programmed onto line buttons, the
button, or Answer buttons.
Telephone features
14
You can program Host System Signaling codes as part of a
number on an External
button. See Host System
Signaling.
.
If you do not include a line selection in an autodialer, the call
will use your prime line, if you have one. If you select a line
button, any line selection
before pressing the
programmed onto the button will be ignored.
You can copy the telephone number from a Last Number
Redial button or Saved Number Redial button onto an
button. Simply enter the Last Number Redial feature
code or Saved Number Redial feature code when the
feature asks you to enter a number.
Telephone features
Call Forward 15
Call Forward
Forward your calls
(Feature]
You can have all your calls forwarded to another telephone
system.
in the
1.
2.
Enter the Call Forward feature code
Enter the number of the internal telephone to which you
want your calls forwarded.
Forwarding remains in effect until you enter the Cancel Call
Forward feature code.
Cancel Call Forward
You can start to receive calls again.
1.
Enter the Cancel Call Forward feature code
Call Forward on Busy
Call Forward on Busy redirects calls to another telephone
when you are busy with a call. The System Coordinator sets
up Call Forward on Busy in Administration programming.
Call Forward (No Answer)
Call Forward (No Answer) forwards unanswered calls to
another telephone. The System Coordinator sets up Call
Forward (No Answer) in Administration programming.
Call Forward Override
You can call someone and ask them to stop forwarding their
calls to you.
1.
Dial that person’s number and ask them to cancel call
forwarding. Your call will ring at that person’s telephone
even though they are forwarding their calls.
Telephone features
16 Call Forward
Related features
Do Not Disturb
You can use the Do Not Disturb feature to forward your calls
to the Prime telephone. See Do Not Disturb.
Line Redirection
Note the differences between Line Redirection and Call
Forward. Call Forward forwards all calls that arrive at a
particular telephone to another telephone within the
system. Line redirection redirects only the lines you specify,
no matter which telephones they appear on, to a telephone
system.
outside the
Displays
You will see some of the following displays while forwarding
your calls. See Do Not Disturb for a full explanation of that
feature. See Answering the telephone for displays that occur
when a telephone receives a call forwarded by another
telephone.
Forward denied
You cannot forward calls to the
number you have chosen. There are
several reasons why this can
happen. For instance, you cannot
forward your calls to a telephone that
has been forwarded to your
telephone.
Forward to:
Dial the internal number or press the
button of the
Internal
telephone to which you want your
calls. to be forwarded.
Your calls are being forwarded to
telephone 4321. Press the
button or w h e n
y o u
want to stop forwarding your calls.
Telephone features
Call Forward 17
Two or more telephones are linked in
a forwarding chain, and one of them
is out of service or is being used to
program the system.
Notes
When a call is forwarded, it does not ring but its line indicator
still flashes on your telephone. You can answer the call by
pressing the button next to the flashing indicator.
If the telephone to which you forwarded your calls does not
have the same external lines as your telephone, the
forwarded calls appear on internal line buttons.
Telephones that have Call Forward on Busy’active can still
receive Priority calls. Call Forward on Busy does not forward
camped calls.
When Call Forward is active, all calls go to the call forward
destination, regardless of the Call Forward on Busy and Call
Forward no Answer settings.
If you are one of a group of people who regularly forward
their calls to one another, be aware that it is possible to set
up forward loops in which a call is forwarded from one
telephone to another in a circle, and is never answered
anywhere.
Calls that are redirected by Line Redirection are not affected
by any of the Call Forward features.
Telephone features
18 Call Park
Call Park
Park a call
You can suspend a call so that it can be retrieved from any
telephone in your system.
1.
2.
Enter the Call Park feature code
Use the Page feature to announce the retrieval code ,
displayed by your telephone.
Retrieving a parked call
1. Select an internal line on any
2.
telephone.
Dial the call park retrieval code.
Displays
You will see some of these displays while parking a call. You
may see some of these displays while retrieving a parked
call.
The person you were talking to has
already parked your call. You cannot
park the same call.
You have attempted to park a call
with no active call on your telephone.
If the call you wish to park is on hold,
you must reconnect to it before you
can park it.
You have entered an invalid retrieval
code.
No call on:
There was no call on the retrieval
code you entered.
You have attempted to park a call,
but there are no calls at your
telephone.
Telephone features
Call Park 19
You have tried to park a conference
call. Split the conference and
the calls separately. The person who
retrieves the calls can reconnect the
conference.
Record the code shown. Use Page
or press
announce the call and its retrieval
code.
All available retrieval codes are in
use. Transfer the call or take a
message instead.
Notes
When you park a call, the system assigns one of nine codes
for the retrieval the call. These codes consist of the Call
Park prefix, which may be any digit from 0 to 9, and a two
digit call number between 01 and 09. Thus, if the Call Park
prefix is 3, parked calls are assigned Retrieve Park codes
301, 302, etc.
Your Installer
Call Park prefix in Configuration
programming. If the Call Park Prefix is set to NONE, parking
is disabled.
Telephone features
20 Call Pickup
Call Pickup
You can pick up a call that is ringing at another telephone.
Directed Pickup
You can answer any telephone that is ringing in your
system
1.
Enter the Directed Pickup feature code
2.
Enter the internal number of the ringing telephone.
Group Pickup
Your
system can be divided into as many as nine
pickup groups. If you are a member of a pickup group, you
can pick up a call that is ringing at any telephone in your
pickup group.
1.
Enter the Group Pickup feature code.
Trunk
Answer
.
The Trunk Answer feature allows you to answer an external
call that is ringing at any other telephone in your office.
Trunk Answer works only with calls that are ringing on lines
for which a Service Mode is active and Trunk Answer is ON
in Administration programming.
1.
Enter the Trunk Answer feature code
Telephone features
Call Pickup 21
Displays
You may see some of these displays while using a Call
Pickup feature.
You are already connected to the
telephone that made the call you are
trying to pick up. This can happen if
you are on a call to a co-worker,.your
co-worker dials the number of a
telephone in your Pickup Group, and
you attempt to pick up that call.
Denied in
Your telephone is not a member of a
Pickup Group.
You have attempted to pick up a call
on someone else’s private line.
You have tried to pick up a call when
you have no line button available.
denied
(Pickup) There is no call that you can
I pick up or the call that was ringing
has already been answered.
(Trunk Answer) The call that is
ringing is on a line that is not in a
Service Mode.
Enter the internal number of the
telephone that is ringing. (You may
use an Internal
button to do
this.)
If you decide not to answer a ringing
call once you have activated
Directed Pickup, press
The call will continue to ring.
Telephone features
22 Call Pickup
Notes
Call Pickup cannot be used on private lines. Group Pickup
can not be used to retrieve a camped call.
To use Directed Pickup, the telephone must be ringing. If, for
example, the auxiliary ringer is ringing, but the call is not
ringing at a telephone, the call cannot be answered using
Directed Pickup. It must be answered normally at a
telephone that has a flashing indicator for the call, or by
using Trunk Answer.
If a call is ringing on an Answer button, you can use Directed
Pickup to answer the call by entering the internal number of
any member of the Answer group.
If there is more than one incoming call at a telephone in a
pickup group, a call ringing on the Prime line is answered
first followed by calls on external lines and, finally, calls on
internal lines.
If there is more than one incoming call on lines in a Service
Mode, the Trunk Answer feature picks up the external call
that has been ringing the longest. See Service Modes.
The System Coordinator can assign telephones to one of
nine Pickup Groups in Administration programming.
Telephone features
Camp On 23
Camp a call
You can send an external call to another telephone, even if
all its lines are busy.
2.
Enter the Camp On feature code ([Feature]
Dial the number of the telephone you want to camp the
call to.
Related features
Transfer
Camp On is a variation of the Transfer feature. See Transfer.
Displays
You will see some of the following prompts while Camping a
call.
You tried to camp a call to a
telephone that already has a camped
call. The call has come back to you.
Press the
button or the
line button to reconnect to the call.
On the
telephone, just pick
up the receiver.
The person to whom you redirected
a call has Do Not Disturb active on
the telephone. The call has come
back to you. Press the
button or the line button to
to the call. On the
telephone,
just pick up the receiver.
denied
You have tried to camp an internal
call. You can only camp external
calls.
Telephone features
24
Camp On
Dial the number of the internal
telephone to which the call will be
sent.
U
P
call first
The telephone to which you camped
a call did not answer the call. The
call has come back to you. Press
or the line button to
reconnect to the call. On the
telephone, just pick up the receiver..
A call you camped has come back to
you, but the caller hung up before
you could reconnect.
You have no call to camp. If the call
you want to camp is on hold, take it
off hold and then camp it.
The telephone to which you have
camped a call is out of service or is
being used for Configuration or
Administration programming. The
call has come back to you. Press
or the line button to
reconnect to the call.
the
teleptione, just pick up the receiver.
The line that the camped call is on is
in use or that line does not appear at
your telephone. Release the line or
release an internal line.
Notes
If you use
to answer a camped call, external
calls are answered before the camped call.
Camped calls appear on a line button on the receiving
telephone, if one is available. If not, there is just a message
on the display and Camp tones.
Telephone features
Conference 25
Conference
Create a conference
(Feature]
(Feature]
You can talk to two people at once.
1.
2.
3.
Make sure you have two calls, one active and one on
hold.
Enter the Conference feature code
Take the held call off hold (this is automatic on the
telephone).
Conference using Privacy
Normally your calls are private; no one else can pick up your
line and join in your conversation. You can turn privacy off
for a call allowing another person with the same line to press
the line button and join in your conversation, forming a
conference.
2.
Enter the privacy feature code
Tell the other person to press the line button and join
your conversation.
Disconnect one party
You can disconnect one party from a conference and
continue talking to the other.
1.
2.
3.
Press the line button of the call that you want to
disconnect. The call that you want to keep is
automatically put on hold.
Press
The call is disconnected.
Press the line button of the held call.
Independently hold two calls
You can put the two people on hold independently so that
they cannot talk to each other.
1.
2.
Press the line button of one person. The other person
is automatically put on hold.
Press
The second person is put on hold.
Telephone features
26 Conference
You can reestablish the conference.
1.
2.
3.
Take one call off hold.
Enter the Conference feature code.
Take the other call off hold.
Put a conference on hold
You can put a conference on hold, allowing the other two
people to continue speaking to each other.
1.
Press
The conference is on hold.
You can reconnect to the conference.
1.
Press either of the held line buttons. You are
reconnected.
Split a conference
You can talk with one person while the other person is on
hold.
1.
Press the line button of the person you want to speak
to. The other person is automatically put on hold.
You can reestablish the conference.
1.
2.
Enter the Conference feature code
Take the held call off hold.
Related Features
Unsupervised Conference
You can disconnect yourself from the conference and leave
the other two people talking by entering the Transfer feature
code
However, if both of the other people
are outside the system there are some restrictions: At least
one of the outside callers must have called you and that call
must be on a disconnect supervised line.
Telephone features
Conference 27
Displays
You will see some of these displays while using the
Conference feature.
Parties
You are trying to add a fourth party
to your conference call, or to join two
conferences together. Release one
call from the conference before
adding another, or keep the two
conferences separate.
Privacy control cannot be used on
internal or conference calls.
hold
You have put a conference call on
hold from your
telephone,
then tried to get another line. Your
M7100 can handle only two lines at a
time, and your conference call is
using both of them.
You have tried to make a conference
call, but your system is already
handling its maximum number of
conference calls.
You are on a conference with the two
lines or telephones shown. You can
drop out of the conference and leave
the other two parties connected
(Unsupervised Conference) by
pressing
or entering the
Transfer feature code.
Make calls first
You have tried to set up a
conference call, without having made
the calls that are to be connected.
Make both calls first.
You have tried to use Privacy Control
when you are not on a call.
Telephone features
28 Conference
(Make second
You have tried to set up a
conference call while connected to
only one caller. Put your first call on
hold, make a second call, and enter
the Conference feature code again.
Press held line
You have activated the Conference
feature with one call active and
another on hold. Press the line of the
call on hold to bring that person into
the conference.
N o t e s
Only the person who established the conference can
process the conference in any of the ways described above.
The Conference feature supports only three people.
telephone:
If you are using an
Your conference is connected as soon as you enter the
Conference feature code. There is no need to take the
second call off hold.
To split a conference, enter
I#
You cannot independently hold two calls.
You cannot join an existing two-party call to establish a
Privacy conference although you can use the Privacy
feature for calls at your telephone.
When a third person joins a conversation on a line that has
privacy turned off, the call becomes a conference. All the
rules applicable to a conference apply except that there is
only one line in use, instead of the normal two. This means
that you cannot split a conference set up using Privacy.
Telephone features
COS Password 29
Password
Change your Class of Service
A Class of Service password is a six digit code that lets you
switch from your current Class of Service to one that lets you
dial numbers prohibited by your current Class of Service.
Enter the COS Password feature code
Enter your COS password.
Displays
You will see the first of these displays when entering a COS
password, you may also see the second.
(Blank display) Enter your password.
It will not be shown on the display.
You have entered a password that is
not programmed into your system.
Notes
If you use your
system from outside the office, you
may have to enter a Class of Service password to gain
access to the system. Class of Service passwords can give
you access to features not available with the regular Class of
Service. See Using
remotely.
You must enter a Class of Service password each time you
wish to make a call using a Class of Service not normally
available on your line or telephone.
allows up to 100 Class of Service Passwords.
The System Coordinator defines Class of Service passwords
in Administration programming.
Telephone features
30 Customizing your telephone
Customizing
your telephone
You can change the way a telephone works in several ways.
Some of the features described below are assigned to
telephones in Administration programming. You can turn
others on and off at individual telephones.
Automatic Handsfree
Automatic Handsfree lets you make or answer a call without
having to pick up the receiver or press the
button.
The telephone’s internal microphone and speaker turn on
automatically when you make or answer a call.
The System Coordinator assigns Automatic Handsfree
capability to a telephone in Administration programming. Full
Handsfree capability must be assigned to a telephone before
Automatic Handsfree capability can be assigned to it. This is
also done in Administration programming.
This feature is not available on
telephones.
Contrast Adjustment
You can set the contrast level of your telephone display.
1.
Enter the Contrast Adjustment feature code.
2.
Choose the contrast level you like best. The number of
contrast levels available varies from one
telephone to another.
This is the display you will see in Contrast adjustment.
UP
Telephone features
OK
Press a number for the contrast level
you want or press
or DOWN.
Press
to set the new
contrast level.
Customizing your telephone 31
Dialing Modes
[Feature]
You can set the dialing mode of your telephone.
1.
2.
Enter the Dialing Modes feature code.
Choose the dialing mode you want.
supports three dialing modes; Automatic Dial,
Dial, and Standard Dial. All three modes support on-hook
dialing. (On-hook dialing means dialing a call without picking
up the receiver.) The special features of the Automatic and
Pre-Dial modes are available only when you dial on-hook.
The Dialing Modes feature code cannot be programmed onto
a memory button.
Standard Dial
In Standard Dial mode you make a call by selecting a line
and dialing the number. If you have a prime line, it is
selected automatically when you lift the receiver or press
ree
.
Standard Dial does not support on-hook dialing on an
telephone. If you have an M7100, use the Automatic Dial or
Pre-Dial feature for on-hook dialing.
Automatic Dial
If you have a prime line assigned to your telephone,
Automatic Dial allows you to dial a number without selecting
a line. Your prime line is selected as soon as you start
dialing a number. Automatic Dial does not work if your prime
line is in use.
Telephones connected to an Analog Terminal Adapter
cannot use Automatic Dialing.
Telephone features
32 Customizing your telephone
Pre-Dial
Pre-Dial allows you to enter a telephone number, check it,
then change it before actually making the call. The call is not
dialed until you select a line or line pool or pick up the
receiver.
You can pre-dial both external and internal numbers. You
must, however, select the correct type of line (external or
internal) for the type of number you have entered.
If all the lines on your telephone are busy, you will not be
able to enter a telephone number.
If ydur telephone starts ringing while you are pre-dialing a
number, you can stop the ringing by turning on Do Not
Disturb ([Feature)
This does not affect numbers you
are entering.
This is the display you will see when selecting a Dial mode.
The current dial mode is shown.
Press
or
until the dial
mode you want appears. Press
to select the
displayed dial mode. If Automatic dial
is not available it is because you
have no prime line.
Language Choice
English
You can select English as the language of your telephone
display.
1.
Enter the English language choice feature code .
Alternate Language
You can select the alternate language as the language of
your telephone display.
Telephone features
.
Customizing your telephone 33
1.
Enter the alternate language choice feature code
([Feature]
Each
system supports English and one alternate
language.
systems are available with either French
or Spanish as the alternate language. Button caps are
available in both alternate languages.
You can select either English or the alternate language at
each telephone. When your system is first installed, all
telephones will use English.
You can program a memory button for one-touch switching
between languages. Program
onto the
button. Pressing the button will switch you back and forth
between English and the alternate language.
cannot be programmed onto a
memory button.
One of the following displays will appear when you enter a
language choice feature code.
Telephone display messages wi II be
Telephone display messages will be
Telephone display messages will be
Move Line buttons
You can move external lines to different buttons on your
telephone. You can use this feature to arrange your lines in
the way that makes the most sense to you.
1.
Enter the Move Lines feature code
2.
3.
Press the button you want to move the line from.
Press the button you want to move the line to.
Telephone features
34 Customizing your telephone
You will see some of these displays while moving lines.
You have tried to move a line to .a
button that cannot be used as a line
button, such as a
button, or an Answer button.
Press the button of the line you want
to move. Press QUIT or (Feature]
when you have finished moving
lines.
Press the button you want to move
the line to. Neither of the buttons is
erased. The lines, or the line and
feature, simply switch places.
The button you are trying to move is
not a line button. If you are trying to
switch a line and a feature, move the
line to the feature button and not vice
versa.
Pulse/Tone Dialing
Each external line is set to either pulse or tone dialing. Pulse
dialing is the traditional method of dialing used by rotary dial
or push button single-line telephones. Tone dialing allows
telephones to communicate with other devices such as
answering machines. Tone dialing is required to access the
features that PBX systems may offer or to use another
system remotely (see Using
remotely).
Your Installer sets your lines to pulse or tone dialing in
Configuration programming.
To switch from pulse to tone dialing
El
If your external lines are programmed for pulse dialing, you
can switch your telephone temporarily to tone dialing.
1.
Press I# while on a call. Once you hang up, your
telephone returns to pulse dialing.
Telephone features
Customizing your telephone 35
Ring Type
You can choose one of four distinctive rings for your
telephone. This makes it easier to identify your telephone in
an open office.
1.
2.
Enter the Ring Type feature code.
Choose the ring type you want.
This is the
you will see when choosing a ring type.
1
NEXT
Press
q , q , or NEXT. You
hear the selected ring for two
seconds. Repeat until you hear the
ring you prefer, then press
Ring Volume
You can set the volume at which your telephone rings.
1.
2.
Enter the Ring Volume feature code. The telephone will
ring.
Press
to adjust the volume.
This is the display you will see while setting Ring volume.
Press either side of the volume bar
to adjust the volume.
Telephone Administration Lock
Telephone Administration Lock limits the ways in which you
can customize your telephone. There are three types of
Telephone Administration Lock: Full, Partial, and None.
Full Administration Lock lets you change the contrast of your
telephone’s display, use Ring Type, Ring Volume
Inquiry, and control the volume of your speaker.
Telephone features
36 Customizing your telephone
Partial Administration Lock allows you to forward your calls,
turn on Do Not Disturb and Service Modes, and use the
Background Music, Send Message, Ring Again, Privacy, and
Trunk Answer features.
No Administration Lock allows you to access all features that
are programmed for your telephone. The System
Coordinator assigns Administration Lock to each telephone
in Administration programming.
Telephone Administration Lock does not affect call handling
features.
Related Features
You can program your telephone’s memory buttons to dial
feature. See
frequently used numbers with the
Autodial.
Feature programming
You can program feature codes onto your telephone’s
memory buttons using the Feature programming feature.
See Feature programming.
Speed Dial programming
You can program personal speed dial numbers onto speed
dial codes 71 to 94 using the Personal Speed Dial
programing feature. See Speed Dial.
Telephone features
.
Dialing 37
ialing
One of the most important features of your telephone system
is the ability to dial telephone numbers. Many features
require you to dial telephone numbers. The displays
associated with dialing are listed here.
Direct Dial
You can dial a Direct Dial telephone with a single digit. The
Direct Dial telephone is usually in a central location, such as
a receptionist’s or secretary’s desk. It is usually a Prime
telephone and a Central Answering Position (CAP).
External line access code
The external line access code is the number you dial to get
an external line. You will need to use an external line access
code if your prime line is an internal line. The code will
connect you to a line pool through your internal line.
If your prime line is an external line, or if you select an
outgoing external line on your telephone, you will not need
an external line access code. You will always need an
external line access code on an
telephone.
Your Installer assigns the external line access code in
Configuration programming.
Last Number Redial
You can redial the last external number you dialed.
1.
Enter the Last Number Redial feature code
((Feature)
Telephone features
38 Dialing
Ring Again
(Feature]
If you can’t get through to someone on your
system
because their telephone is busy or there is no answer,
can have the
system tell you when they hang up or
next use their phone.
1.
Enter the Ring Again feature code
before you hang up.
You can also use Ring Again to tell you when a busy line
pool becomes available.
Using Ring Again cancels any previous Ring Again requests
at your telephone.
Cancel Ring Again
You can cancel a ring again request by entering the Cancel
Ring Again feature code.
Saved Number Redial
You can save the number of the external call you are on
(providing you dialed the call) so that you can call it again
later.
1.
Enter the Saved Number Redial feature code while you
are still on the call.
You can dial a saved number.
1.
Enter the Saved Number Redial feature code when you
are not on a call.
Related Features
The
feature lets you program telephone numbers
onto memory buttons for one-touch dialing. See the
section.
Telephone features
Dialing 39
Dialing modes
supports three different methods of dialing. They
described in the Customizing your telephone section under
the heading Dialing Modes.
Line Pools
Line pools give you access to many external lines. See Line
Pools.
Priority Call
If you get a busy signal when you call someone in your
office, you can interrupt them using Priority Call. See Priority
Call.
Speed Dial
[Feature]
The Speed Dial feature lets you dial programmed numbers
by entering speed dial codes. See Speed Dial.
Displays
You will see some of these displays while selecting lines and
dialing telephone numbers and in response to the numbers
you dial.
You are dialing using Pre-Dial. To
erase an incorrect digit, press
or
(volume down). When
the number is complete, select a line
or lift the receiver.
4321
The telephone you have called has
no internal lines available.
This prompt remains on your display
as long as
on a call you have
dialed. You may transfer the call by
pressing
Telephone features
40 Dialing
Your telephone is already connected
to the telephone you are trying to
call. Check your active line buttons,
and return to that call.
Wait for the telephone to be
answered, or press LRTER to use the
Ring Again or Message features,
Wait for the telephone to be
answered. If no one answers, you
may press
to use the Ring
Again or Message features or press
PRI
to make a priority call.
You cannot use Ring Again on your
current call. You can only use Ring
Again while you have a busy signal
on an internal call or line pool
request or while, an internal call is
ringing.
Can’t
The telephone you are calling is in
Do Not Disturb mode.
to use the Ring Again or Message
features.
In use: 4321
The line you have chosen is in use at
another telephone. Use a different
line, or wait until the line is free.
/In use: Line001
You have tried to use a line that is
active on an external call.
Invalid
You have entered a number that
does not exist.
Line in
Telephone features
number
The line you have chosen is in use.
Try another. If the line remains in use
and never seems to clear, it
hung. See Lines in the System
Features section for information on
hung lines.
Dialing
Enter the digits of the number you
want to dial.
You have tried to make or receive a
call when no line button was
available.
You have not dialed an external
telephone number since the last
power interruption or system reset.
line selected
Either you have no prime line or your
prime iine is busy. Select a line
manually before dialing.
number
You have tried to save the number of
an ‘incoming call. You can only save
numbers that you have dialed
yourself.
You have tried to use Saved Number
Redial, but have not first saved a
telephone number. The Saved
Number Redial memory is empty.
You have entered the number of a
telephone that is not in service.
Not in service
The telephone you have called is on
another call. Press
to use the
Ring Again or Message features.
You have Pre-Dial assigned to your
telephone but you have no free line
buttons. Release one of your calls
and try Pre-Dial again.
Release a call
call
1
The call you are trying to make is not
allowed for your Class of Service.
Make your call on a line or telephone
that is not restricted, or
a Class
of Service password to bypass the
restriction.
Telephone features
42
Dialing
NO
EXIT
Select a line
number
Press
to use Ring Again. Press
if you prefer to send a message.
See Message and Ring Again.
Either you have no prime line, or the
prime line is in use, or the line
programmed onto an Autodialer,
Speed Dialer, Last Number Redial,
Saved Number Redial or Hotline is in
use. Select a line and dial again.
to send a message. See
Press
Messages.
I You have dialed your own number.
The maximum number of digits that Last Number Redial or
Saved Number Redial records is 24.
You can copy the telephone number from a Last Number
Redial or Saved Number Redial button onto an
button. Simply enter the Last Number Redial or Saved
Number Redial feature code when the
feature asks
you to enter a number.
Each telephone can save only one number at a time with
Saved Number Redial, not one number for each line.
Telephone features
Do Not Disturb 43
Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb
You can stop calls from ringing at your telephone.
1.
Enter the Do Not Disturb feature code
Only Priority Calls will ring at your telephone. A line button
will flash when you receive a call, but the call will not ring.
You can refuse to answer a particular call (including a
Priority Call).
1.
Enter the Do Not Disturb feature code
while your telephone is ringing.
([Feature]
Cancel Do Not Disturb
You can cancel Do Not Disturb.
1.
Enter the Cancel Do Not Disturb feature code
Displays
Your telephone is in Do Not Disturb
mode. To cancel Do Not Disturb,
press [Feature]
Your telephone is receiving calls
normally.
Telephone features
44 Do Not Disturb
Notes
If you use Do Not Disturb while an external call is ringing, the
call will be forwarded to the Prime Telephone. It may also be
answered by anyone whose telephone shares the line it is
on. Once you turn Do Not Disturb on, calls will be forwarded
to the Prime telephone only if there is no other telephone on
which the line
(The Delayed Ring Transfer feature
transfers all unanswered calls to the Prime telephone after
set time.)
Telephone features
Feature Programming 45
Feature
Programming
Program a button
You can program a feature code onto a memory button.
1.
2.
3.
Enter the Feature Programming feature code
([Feature]
Select the button you want to program.
Enter the feature code you want to program onto the
button.
Erase a button
You can erase a memory button.
1.
2.
Enter the Erase Button feature code
This is actually the External
feature code.
Erase the button by programming it with no number.
You cannot erase Answer,
buttons.
Intercom, or line
Button Inquiry
You can check the function of any line, intercom, or memory
telephone.
button on your
1.
Enter the Button Inquiry feature code
2.
3.
Press the button you want to know about.
Read the display.
When you are labeling or replacing a button cap, activate
Button Inquiry so that you won’t accidentally
feature.
Telephone features
46
Feature Programming
Displays
You will see some of the following displays while
programming, erasing, or checking buttons. A variety of
displays appear in Button Inquiry. See the display
for information applicable to these displays.
Press
to move either right or left,
or press
or
to view a
number that is too long to fit on the
display. Press
when
you are finished.
The name of the feature assigned to
a button is displayed when you press
appears when there
the button.
is more information available. Press
SHOW for additional
information.
Enter
Enter
code:
If you are checking a Speed Dial
button, enter the two-digit Speed Dial
code that you want to check.
To erase a button, press
While entering a feature code you
can press
or QUIT to quit
to clear out
programming or
the characters you have entered.
The system will accept the entry as
soon as you enter a valid feature
code.
Press (Feature] and enter the
feature code you want to program
onto the button. Invalid codes cannot
be entered.
Telephone features
Feature Programming 47
You have programmed a button with
a feature that was already
programmed onto another button.
The feature has moved to the button
you just programmed. Its original
button is blank.
You cannot program an autodialer or
feature button while you are on a
call.
a button
EXIT
and
Press the button you want to check.
Press w
(Feature]
h eor EXIT
n
y o u
are finistied.
To erase
button, press
To erase a button, press
press
Release
calls
You have tried to use Button Inquiry
while you were on a call or had calls
on hold.
Notes
When this book tells you to enter a feature code, you can do
so by pressing a memory button programmed with that
feature code. In some cases, pressing the button a second
time cancels the feature.
On the M7100 telephone, Button inquiry shows your internal
number followed by the function assigned to your single
memory button.
Any memory button not programmed as an external or
internal line, target line, Answer button, or
button, is available for programming features.
The following feature codes cannot be programmed onto a
memory button: Long Tones and any code beginning with
except Language Choice and Contrast Adjustment.
Telephone features
48 Group Listen
Group Listen
Group Listen
You can let people in your office listen in on a call.
1.
Enter the
feature code
.
You will hear the caller’s voice
through your telephone’s speaker.
Continue to speak to the caller through the telephone
receiver. The caller will not hear people in your office.
Cancel Group Listen
You can cancel Group Listen for the current call.
1.
Enter the Cancel Group Listen feature code
Group Listen is cancelled automatically when you hang up
the Group Listen call.
Displays
You may see one of these displays with Group Listen.
You have tried to use Group Listen
when you are not on a call.
You have tried to use Group Listen
without picking up the receiver.
Notes
Keep the receiver away from the speaker, or you may hear
feedback. The higher the volume, the more the feedback.
button to prevent feedback when hanging up.
Press the
You can switch a Group Listen call to Handsfree by pressing
To switch back to Group Listen, enter the Group
Listen feature code again.
Telephone features
Handsfree/Mute 49
an&free/Mute
Make calls without lifting the receiver
You can make calls without lifting the receiver.
1.
2.
3.
Press
The telephone’s internal microphone
and speaker are automatically turned on.
Dial your call.
Speak normally.
Answer calls without lifting the receiver
You can answer calls without lifting the receiver.
1.
2.
When your telephone rings, press
The
telephone’s internal microphone and speaker are
automatically turned on.
Speak normally.
Mute Handsfree
You can switch off the telephone microphone so that you can
speak privately to someone in your office while you are on a
handsfree call.
1.
Press
The microphone is turned off.
You can turn the microphone back on again and continue
your handsfree call.
1.
Press
Regular call to Handsfree
You can turn any regular call into a handsfree call.
1.
Press
and hang up the receiver.
to regular call
You can turn a handsfree call into a regular call.
1.
Lift the receiver.
Telephone features
50 Handsfree/Mute
Notes
The indicator next to
is solid when you are in
handsfree mode. It flashes when you mute the microphone.
Always tell the person you are speaking to that you are using
Handsfree, and let them know who else is listening to the
conversation.
Direct your voice toward the telephone. The closer you are to
the telephone, the easier it is for the microphone to transmit
your voice clearly to your listener.
Wait for your caller to finish speaking before you speak. The
microphone and speaker cannot both be on at once. Your
caller’s voice may be cut off if you both speak at the same
time. Noises such as a tapping pencil could be loud enough
to turn on your microphone and cut off your caller’s speech.
To prevent a possible echo, keep the area around your
telephone free of paper and other objects that might screen
your microphone. Turning down the microphone’s volume
(using
also prevents echo.
Handsfree calls may be heard in nearby offices. In
concept environments, use the receiver or a headset when
Handsfree communication is not necessary, or when you
need privacy during a call.
Place the telephone so that any unavoidable local noise
(such as an air conditioner) is behind it. This limits the
amount of disruptive background noise.
A Handsfree button is assigned to a telephone by the
System Coordinator in Administration programming.
The Handsfree/Mute.feature is not available on
Telephones.
Telephone features
Hold 51
Hold
Put a call on hold
You can temporarily suspend a call.
1.
Press
When a call is on hold, its indicator flashes on all telephones
that have access to the line. The call can be retrieved from
any of these telephones.
Retrieve a held call
You can connect to a call on hold.
1.
Press the flashing line button of the held call.
Automatic Hold
You can switch from one call to another.
1.
Press the line button of the caller you want to speak to.
Your current caller is put on hold automatically.
Exclusive Hold
You can put a call on Exclusive Hold so that it can be
retrieved only at your telephone.
1.
Enter the Exclusive Hold feature code. The line
appears busy on all other telephones, and the call
cannot be picked up by anyone else in the office.
Listen on
If you have been put on hold, you can hang up the receiver
while you wait for the other person to return.
2.
3.
Press
Hang up the receiver.
Press the line button of the call. You may hear
indications from the far end that you are on hold (for
example, tones or music).
Telephone features
52 Hold
4.
When the person you were talking to returns you will
hear them through your telephone speaker. Lift the
receiver and talk.
on Hold
External callers can hear either music, a periodic tone, or
silence while they are on hold. In order for your caller to hear
music, your company must have installed a music source.
.
Warning
In accordance with U.S. copyright law, a license
required from the American Society of Composers,
Authors and Publishers, or a’ similar organiiation, if radio
or TV broadcasts are transmitted through the Music on
Hold feature of this telecommunication system.
Northern Telecom Inc. hereby disclaims any liability
arisina out of the failure to obtain such a license.
Your installer sets this feature to music, tones, or silence in
Configuration programming.
Notes
On the M7100 telephone,
alternates between two
lines; one active, one on hold. The M7100 cannot retrieve a
call placed on hold by another telephone.
If the Automatic Handsfree feature has been assigned to
your telephone, use the
feature instead of
Listen on Hold.
Telephone features
Host System Signaling 53
Host System Signaling
.
You can access Host systems, such as Private Branch
by using Host System
Exchanges (PBX) from
Signaling features (also known as End-to-End Signaling).
These features either send a special signal to the host
system or allow you to program delays required by
systems onto external
buttons or Speed Dial codes.
Host system signaling codes
Link
If your
system is connected to a Private Branch
Exchange (PBX), you can use a Link signal to access
special features.
The Link signal can also be included as part of a longer
stored sequence on an External
button or in a
uses two of the 24
Speed Dial code. The Link symbol
spaces in a dialing sequence.
Pause
The Pause feature enters a 1.5 second delay in a dialing
sequence on an external line. This is often required for
signaling remote devices, such as answering machines, or
when reaching through to PBX features or Host systems.
You can obtain a Pause with one button press if you
program the feature code onto a memory button. More than
one Pause can be programmed onto an External
button.
The Pausesymbol (8) uses one of the 24 spaces in a dialing
sequence.
Telephone features
54 Host System Signaling
For Pulse Dialing, q
dialing sequence.
inserts a 1.5 second pause into the
Programmed Release
The Programmed Release feature performs the function of
button in a programmed dialing sequence. When the
the
system encounters Programmed Release in a programmed
dialing sequence, it stops dialing and hangs up the call. The .
Programmed Release symbol
takes up two of the 24
spaces in a programmed dialing sequence.
Run/Stop
Run/Stop inserts a break point into a sequence of dialed
numbers or characters used for automatic dialing. This may
be necessary when you are connecting to a PBX or similar
Host system.
For example, you may call a company with an automated
attendant that instructs you to dial the extension number you
need. You can program the company number, a Run/Stop,
then the extension number on one External
button.
Press the autodialer once to dial the company number.
When you hear the automated attendant, press the
autodialer again to dial the extension number.
The Run/Stop symbol (S) uses one of the 24 spaces in an
or Speed Dial sequence.
External
Timed Release
The Timed Release feature inserts a 1.5 second pause into
a sequence. You can use it in a dialing sequence for
accessing a remote system, such as a PBX. You can also
dial it if you wish to release a call from your line but keep the
line for another call. You will return to dial tone.
The Timed Release symbol
takes up two of the spaces
in a programmed dialing sequence.
Telephone features
Host System Signaling 55
Displays
You may see this display while entering Host System
Signaling codes.
You have entered a code that can
only be used in a programmed
or Speed Dial sequence, not
on a call you dial directly.
Programmed Release and Run/Stop
are for use in programmed dialing
sequences only.
Notes
If your external telephone lines are programmed for Pulse
Dialing, you can temporarily switch to Tone Dialing by
after selecting the line. Tone Dialing lets your
pressing
telephone communicate with devices and services
that respond to tone signals, such as automatic
switchboards, and FAX or answering machines.
Telephone features
56 Line Pools
Line Pools
Use a line pool
A line pool is a group of external lines that can be shared by
many telephones. You can use a line in a line pool to make
an external call.
1.
If you have a free internal line, dial a line pool access
code on an internal line. (You do not need the Line
Pool feature code.) If you have no free internal line,
enter the line pool feature code
and
then a line pool access code.
Everyone in the office should have a list of the line pool
access codes for the line pools their telephones can use.
Displays
You may see some of the following displays while using a
line pool. For displays associated with dialing telephone
numbers, see the Dialing section.
Enter a line pool access code.
Denied in admin
Access to the line pool you
requested is denied in Configuration
programming.
Invalid code
You have’entered an invalid line pool
access code.
The line chosen by the system for
your line pool request became active
before connecting with your call.
Retry the line pool request.
button
Telephone features
There is no free button on which the
line pool line can appear.
Line Pools 57
You have tried to access your line
pool, but there are no lines in the line
pool or all the lines are busy. Use
Ring Again or call again later.
Notes
You do not usually need to enter the Line Pool feature code
to use a line pool. Simply dial the line pool access code on
an internal line. If you have no free internal lines, you will
need to use the feature code to get a line pool. You will also
need it to program access to a specific line pool onto a
memory button.
You can program a button to access a line pool by
programming the Line Pool feature code and a line pool
access code onto a memory button in Feature programming
When all the lines in a Line Pool are busy,
the indicator for the Line Pool button turns on. The indicator
turns off when a line becomes available.
Your
system can have 15 line pools, and a
telephone can be programmed to access any number of
them.
You can use a line pool only to make external calls.
If no lines are available in the line pool, you can use Ring
Again at the busy tone. You will be notified when a line in the
line pool becomes available. See Ring Again.
Your Installer gives telephones access to line pools in
Configuration programming. Each line pool is assigned a line
pool access code in Configuration programming.
Telephone features
58
Line Redirection
Line Redirection
Redirect a line
Line Redirection lets you send your external calls to a
telephone outside the office. You may choose to redirect all
your external lines or only some of them.
1
.
2.
3.
4.
Enter the Line Redirection feature code
Select the outgoing line to be used.for redirected calls.
Enter the number to which calls will be redirected.
Select the lines to be redirected.
Cancel Line Redirection
You can cancel Line Redirection.
1.
2.
Enter the Cancel Line Redirection feature code.
Select the lines for which redirection is to be cancelled.
Related Features
Call forward
[Feature]
Note the differences between Line Redirection and Call
Forward. Call Forward forwards all calls that arrive at a
particular telephone to another telephone within the
system. Line redirection redirects only the lines you specify,
no matter which telephones they appear on, to a telephone
system. Line Redirection takes
outside the
precedence over Call Forward
Displays while redirecting lines
You will see some of the following displays while
.
programming Line Redirection. The displays you see while
cancelling redirection are listed under the heading Displays
while cancelling redirection, below. See the Dialing section
for displays that occur while entering telephone numbers.
Telephone features
Line Redirection 59
Continue entering digits. Press
or
(volume down) to
delete incorrect digits. Press
or
when you are finished.
denied
You cannot perform line redirection
on an
telephone.
Enter the telephone number to which
you wish to redirect calls
of the following methods:
Press an External
button.
Enter an externai telephone
number of no more than 24 digits.
Then, press
Press
or
if the line
you have chosen as the outgoing
line is a private network line that
does not require you to dial digits,
In use: 4321
You have tried to program redirection
while someone else is programming
redirection. Only one person can
program line redirection at a time.
The line you are trying to use for
redirecting calls is for incoming calls
only. Choose an outgoing line.
The line you have selected is private
to another telephone. Only the owner
of a private line can redirect it.
Press q
or the
button to begin
to
redirection. Press REMOVE or
cancel a previous redirection.
You have one external line on your
telephone, but you need a second
line to perform line redirection.
Redirect your external line using a
line pool as the outgoing line.
Telephone features
60 Line Redirection
You are attempting to redirect a line
and the line you have chosen is the
outgoing line you have selected as a
destination. You cannot redirect a
line to itself. Select another line.
Enter a valid line pool access code.
This message appears when you ,
have successfully redirected a line or
successfully cancelled redirection of
a line.
You have attempted to redirect a
line, but someone else has already
redirected that line. You may press
or
to override the
previous redirection and redirect the
line as you wish.
The destination you have chosen for
line redirection is restricted.
Select the line that will be used to
redirect calls out of the system, using
one of the following methods:
Press an external
button.
Press an internal line button and
dial a line pool access code.
Press a line pool memory button.
Press an External
button.
Press the lines that are to be
redirected. To deselect a line, press
it again. You may
to
redirect all your lines.
Continue to press the lines that are
to be redirected. Press
or
when you are finished.
Telephone features
Line Redirection 61
The line you are attempting to
redirect cannot be redirected
because the hardware does not
support redirection.
.
Displays while cancelling redirection
You will see the following displays while cancelling Line
Redirection.
This line is redirected by someone
else.
or
to
cancel redirection of the line.
Press the lines that are no longer to
be redirected. The lines light up as
you press them. Once you cancel
redirection for a line you cannot
restore it by pressing the line again.
to cancel
You may press
redirection for all your lines. When
you are finished, press
or
[Hold
Continue to press the lines that are
no longer to be redirected. Press
or
when you are finished.
Notes
You can answer the telephone if it rings while you are in the
middle of programming Line Redirection, but none of the
call handling features will be available until the
feature times out. If you need to use a
feature to
process the call, you must quit Line Redirection programing
button. Do not press
or you
by pressing the
will disconnect the call you are trying to process.
Telephone features
62 Line Redirection
While you are programming Line Redirection you will not
receive any indication of calls that do not actually ring at your
telephone.
The system does not check that the number you give for
Line Redirection is a valid one. If you redirect to an invalid
number, redirection will fail. Using an autodialer to enter the
redirection number helps avoid this possibility. An autodialer
used for line redirection must have a specific line
programmed onto it.
button to redirect all your lines, it is
If you use the
important that you wait until all the lines on your telephone
light up before pressing
or
If you press
(Hold] or
before all the lines light up, those lines not lit
will not be redirected.
Be aware of the consequences of redirecting your lines. If
you redirect your target line to your home, for instance, and
someone calls you from home, they will get a busy signal
when the system tries to call the telephone they are using.
Companies with offices in different time zones should avoid
situations in which the lines from the eastern office are
redirected to the west and those from the west are redirected
to the east. This could result in a costly long distance
redirection loop.
The system can be set up so that redirected calls give a brief
ring on telephones in the
system as they are
redirected. These calls cannot be answered within the
system until you cancel redirection.
The line chosenfor redirecting calls on other lines can still be
used normally when it is not busy on a redirected call. To
avoid redirection failing because the chosen line is in use,
choose a line pool with several
in it.
Telephone features
.
Long Tones 63
Long
Use long tones
The Long Tones feature lets you control the length of a tone
so that you can signal devices such as Fax or answering
machines which require tones longer than the standard 120
milliseconds.
1.
2.
Enter the Long Tones feature code
([Feature]
Press the dial pad buttons to produce the appropriate
tones. Each tone will sound for as long as you hold
down the button.
Displays
You will see some of the following displays while using Long
Tones.
At the appropriate time, press any
dial pad button. Hold each button
down for as long as necessary. You
can cancel Long Tones by pressing
[Feature]
[ H o orl d ] .
/Make call first
You have tried to use Long Tones
when you are not on a
The person you are calling has
pressed
cancelling your
long tones.
Notes
Long Tones can be used on any call except a
call. You can use internal lines of the
system to
activate a device connected to an Analog Terminal Adapter
in another area of your office; or external lines to
access devices outside the
system.
Telephone features
64
Message
Message
.
(Feature]
Send a message
You can leave a message on the display of another
system.
telephone in your
1.
Enter the Message feature code ,
The message sent reads
YOU .
Cancel a sent message
You can cancel a message that you have sent to someone.
1.
‘Enter the Cancel a sent message feature code.
Reply to a message
You can call the person who sent you a message.
Enter the Reply to Message feature code
The system calls the person who
sent the message.
On a telephone with a two line display you can view your
messages and decide if you want to reply to them.
Enter the Reply to Message feature code
2.
Review your messages, reply to them, or erase them.
Show your sent messages
You can show and scan the messages you have sent.
1.
2.
Enter the Message feature code
Press S H O W to display your first sent message.
Erase a waiting message
You can erase a message you have received.
1.
Enter the Erase Message feature code
Telephone features
Message 65
Displays
You will see some of the following displays while sending
messages.
When reviewing the messages you
have sent, press NEXT to view the
next message or
to erase the
message on the display.
This is the-first message in the list.
Press NEXT to see the next
to reply to
message. Press
the message. Press
to
erase the message.
Cancel denied
You have tried to send a message to
Analog Terminal Adapter.
a
The
Analog Terminal
Adapter does not have a display so it
cannot show a message.
You have entered an invalid number
when attempting to cancel a
message.
Dial the internal number to which you
sent the message you wish to
cancel.
You have tried to send a message to
an invalid internal number or to a
telephone that is out of service.
You have a message waiting. Press
to review the message or enter
t o
r e p l y .
The SHOW display button appears
only if you have outstanding
messages. Press SHOW to review or
erase messages you have sent.
Press
to send anew message.
.
Telephone features
66 Message
Enter the internal number of the
telephone to which you would like to
send a message.
You have several messages waiting.
Press
to review the messages
or t o r e p l y t o t h e
first message.
You have no line button free with
which to reply to a message.
Their
list.
full
You don’t have any messages to
cancel or there are no messages to
scan through.
You are trying to send a message to
a telephone whose message waiting
list is full.
You have tried to send a message
but your telephone’s list of sent
messages is full. Cancel one of the
messages you have sent, if possible,
or wait until you have received a
reply to one of those messages.
Notes
You can send up to four messages to different telephones.
Each telephone, including the Prime telephone, can receive
up to four messages from different telephones, but only one
message from any one telephone. Direct Dial telephones
and Central Answering Positions (CAPS) can receive up to
four messages, but can send up to 30 messages.
Any message can be cancelled either by the person who
.
sent it or by the person who received it.
If your reply to a message is forwarded or is answered at
another telephone using the Call Pickup feature, the
message remains on your telephone until you cancel it or
successfully contact the telephone that sent the message.
Telephone features
Telephones 67
Telephones
This section covers the basic features of your
telephone and optional equipment that may be attached to it.
See the Components chapter for the differences between
telephone models.
.
Buttons
Feature button
You use the Feature button to invoke
features section.
the Using
features. See
Hold button
You use the Hold button to put calls on hold. See the Hold
section. It is also used in place of the
display button on
telephones with single line displays.
Memory buttons
Memory buttons are the buttons with indicators on the
M7208,
and M7324 telephones, and the dual buttons
without indicators on the
There is also a single
memory button, without an indicator, on the M7100. Memory
buttons can be used for any of the purposes listed below,
except that lines and Answer buttons must appear on
buttons with indicators.
Answer buttons
You can
an Answer button to monitor calls on another
person’s telephone. All calls to the monitored telephone
at the
appear on the Answer button. Such calls may
telephone with the Answer button, depending on how the
system is configured. Answer buttons are most useful for a
secretary who monitors incoming calls for one or several
managers.
,
Telephone features
68
Telephones
If more than one call is ringing at the manager’s telephone,
the first call appears on the secretary’s Answer button. Any
subsequent calls appear on Intercom buttons if they are
available.
More than one secretary may have an Answer button for a
single manager. This allows two or more secretaries to
handle calls for a busy manager.
Similarly, one person can handle calls for up to four other
people, using separate Answer buttons for each person.
A secretary’s telephone should have a memory button with
button for
an indicator programmed as the Internal
the manager’s telephone. This allows the secretary to call
the manager and to deal efficiently with incoming calls.
You cannot make calls using Answer buttons.
buttons
buttons let you dial numbers by pressing a single
section.
button. See the
Line buttons
You have one line button for each line assigned to your
telephone. You press the line button to select the line you
want to answer or use to make a call. Having several line
buttons allows you immediate access to more than one line
does
so you can handle and monitor calls easily. The
not have line buttons and can have a maximum of two lines.
You can switch between its two lines, one active and one on
hold, by pressing
Buttons
Programmed feature buttons allow you to invoke
features by pressing a single button. See the Feature
Programming section.
Telephone features
Telephones 69
Release button
Pressing
ends a call. You do not have to put the receiver
down.
also ends feature programming.
to end a feature
While you are on a call, do not press
you are using (such as Show Message). If you do, you will
disconnect-the call. Use
instead.
Volume Bar
The Volume Bar controls the volume of the receiver,
telephone ring, Handsfree speaker, headset and Background
to
Music. Press either end of the volume bar
adjust the volume.
Headset
A headset lets you keep both hands free while you are on a
telephone
call without others overhearing
conversations.
If you plug a headset into your telephone while you are on a
call, your telephone’s microphone and speaker (or your
receiver if you are on a regular call) are turned off and your
headset microphone and earpiece are turned on.
You must have the
feature assigned to your
telephone if you wish to use a headset.
While you are using the headset, the receiver and the switch
in the telephone cradle do not work.
A headset cannot be used on an
Using a headset
While on a call using the headset, press
your headset on and off.
to turn
Telephone features
70
Telephones
To answer a call, press
To adjust the volume, press the appropriate side of the
volume bar
To change to a Handsfree call while you are on a call using
your headset, unplug your headset. Your telephone’s
microphone and speaker turn on and the call becomes a
Handsfree call. (It is a good idea to put the call on hold while
you do this.)
You may see this prompt when you try to use a headset.
You are attempting to use a headset,
but
is not
programmed for your telephone. If
you are not using a headset, you
have accidentally plugged your
telephone receiver into the headset
outlet on the bottom of the
telephone.
Hearing Aid Compatibility
The receivers on all
telephones are compatible with
hearing aids as defined in the FCC rules, Part 68, section
68.316.
Note: Not all hearing aids are optimized for use with a
telephone.
Wall Mounting
Most
telephones can be mounted on a wall. Contact
the Installer or Service Representative if you wish to have
any telephones in your system wall-mounted.
Telephone features
Page 71
Page
Make a page announcement
You can make announcements over the
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
system.
Enter the Page feature code
Choose a page type.
If necessary, choose a zone.
Make your announcement.
Press
Page types are :
through the telephone speakers (Internal Page)
through an external speaker (External Page)
q both Internal and External (Combined Page)
Paging shortcuts
Instead of entering the Page feature code followed by the
page type, you can enter the following shortcut codes.
Internal
and zone (0 to 6)
External
(code 2 has no zones)
Combined
[Feature]
and zone (0 to 6)
Related Features
Voice Call
You can make an announcement to one person by placing a
voice call to their telephone. See
Call.
Displays
You
see some of these displays while making a Page
announcement.
Telephone features
72 Page
Enter the desired zone number (O-6)
or press
to page to all zones. (0
equals all zones.)
You have entered a page zone code
that is not between 0 and 6.
Select the type of page you want by
pressing:
q or, SETS Internal Page
or
External Page
(3 or B O T H
Combined Page
timeout
The time allotted for paging has
expired.
The prompt appears while you are
paging and shows the page zone
you have chosen. Press
or
when you are finished paging.
A page is already being made in the
Page Zone you have requested.
Page zone 0 equals all zones.
When making an announcement using External Page or
Combined Page, the Long Tones feature is automatically
activated for the external paging system only. This allows
you to control optional equipment with the Long Tones
feature.
telephone can be assigned to one of six Page
Each
Zones, or to none, in Administration programming.
Make sure that everyone who needs to make page
announcements has a list showing which telephones are in
which page zones.
Telephone features
Priority Call 73
Priority Call
If you get a busy signal when you call someone in your
office, you can interrupt them. Use this feature for urgent
calls only.
1.
2.
Enter the Priority Call feature code
Wait for a connection, then speak.
A person who receives a Priority Call while they are on
another call has eight seconds to accept or reject the call. If
the person does nothing, the Priority Call feature puts their
call on Exclusive Hold and connects your call.
Displays
You will see some of these displays while making a Priority
Call.
/Call
blocked
You tried to place a Priority Call to
another
person you called has blocked your
call. Try to call the person later.
You have tried to make a Priority
Call, but this feature has not been
assigned to your telephone.
You have attempted to use the
Priority Call feature with no ringing or
busy tone on the line. Use Priority
Call only when you hear ringing or a
busy signal.
The party you are calling has eight
seconds to decide whether to accept
or reject your Priority Call.
The telephone you are calling is
already in a Priority Call or is unable
to receive Priority Calls.
Telephone features
74 Priority Call
Notes
You can make a Priority Call only while your telephone
display shows one of the following prompts:
Forward is active at the telephone you are trying to
reach, your call will be forwarded.
If the telephone receiving the Priority Call is in a conference
call, the other two parties are automatically put on hold when
the Priority Call is accepted.
The System Coordinator gives a telephone permission to
make priority calls in Administration programming.
Telephone features
Service Modes 75
Service Modes
Switch to a service mode
You can use Service Modes to make your
system
behave differently at different times of day. For instance, all
incoming external calls can be directed to a security guard’s
telephone during the night, or calls to one receptionist can be
directed to another receptionist during lunch.
1.
2.
Enter the Service Modes feature code
on a Control telephone. (See Special
telephones for information on Control telephones.)
Select the service mode you want.
Cancel Service Modes
You can return to normal operation or cancel the manual
override of an automatic mode. You cannot cancel an
automatic mode.
Enter the Cancel Service Modes feature code.
Displays
Ycu will see some of the following displays when selecting a
service mode.
The name of the current service
mode (“Night Service”, in this case)
is displayed. Press
or NEXT to
see other service mode options.
Press
or
to select the
desired Mode.
Denied in admin
You are trying to activate a service
mode from a telephone that is not a
Control telephone or Direct Dial
telephone, or else all service modes
are disabled in Administration
programming.
Telephone features
76 Service Modes
Notes
A service mode allows you to change which lines ring at
which telephone, to activate or deactivate the auxiliary ringer
for certain lines, and to have Direct-Dial calls ring at the
Extra-Dial telephone. Service modes can be programmed to
begin automatically at certain times or they can be turned on
.
and off at the control telephone. The System Coordinator
sets up service modes in Administration programming.
Automatic service modes are indicated by an asterisk
before the name of the service mode on the display. You can
neither manually activate nor cancel automatic service
modes, although you can override them with manual modes.
The Control telephone can override automatic service modes
at any time by entering the Service Modes feature code
and selecting a different service mode;
this override will remain in effect until it is cancelled by
Note that if you selected a
means of
service mode with an asterisk
the next automatic service
mode will come into effect at the programmed time.
Direct dial calls to a Direct-dial telephone will ring at the
Extra-dial telephone (designated in Administration
programming) only when the Service Modes feature code
is entered at that Direct-dial telephone.
Note that only the Extra-dial telephone will be activated, not
the actual service mode (unless that Direct-dial telephone is
also a Control telephone).
provides three service modes named “Night”,
“Lunch”, and “Evening”. You can change these names to
yourself. In addition, there is normal service when no service
modes are active.
Telephone features
Special Telephones 77
Special Telephones
You can assign several special functions to the telephones in
your
system. Except where noted, you do not need
special hardware. A special function is assigned to a
telephone either by your Installer in Configuration
programming or by the System Coordinator in Administration
programming.
Alarm telephone
An Alarm telephone is a
telephone with a
line
or M7324) that
has assigned to
display
display Norstar’s system alarm codes, should they occur.
If an alarm message appears on the Alarm telephone’s
display, follow the instructions below.
1.
2.
Record the alarm number.
Press T I M E and record the time displayed.
3.
Call your Installer or Service. Representative and report
the alarm code.
After speaking to your Installer or Service
Representative, press
4.
This is an‘example of an alarm display.
Report this alarm and the time it
occurred to your Installer or service
representative.
Telephone features
78 Special Telephones
Central Answering Position
A Central Answering Position (CAP) is a
M7324
Telephone that your installer has defined as a CAP in
Configuration programming. You can connect one or two
CAP modules to the CAP to increase the number of
in a
lines it can handle. There can be from one to five
system. It is best if the CAP is also the Prime
telephone and Direct-Dial telephone for the lines and
telephones it serves.
The CAP module displays the busy/not busy status of the
telephones in your system by using the triangular indicators
beside Internal Autodial, Programmed Feature or line
buttons. A CAP can support 120 external lines.
You can send up to 30 messages from a CAP.
For more information, see the
Position User
Central Answering
Control telephone
The Control telephone lets you place the external lines for
which it has responsibility into and out of Service Modes.
See Service Modes.
Direct-Dial
You can dial a Direct-Dial telephone with a single digit. The
Direct-Dial telephone is usually in a central location, such as
a receptionist’s or secretary’s desk. It is usually a Prime
telephone and a Central Answering Position (CAP).
.
There may be up to five Direct-Dial telephones in your
system, but each telephone in the system is assigned to a
single Direct-Dial telephone. There is a single Direct-Dial
digit for the whole system that lets each telephone call its
assigned Direct-Dial telephone.
Telephone features
Special Telephones 79
Direct-Dial telephone can send up to 30
Each
messages and each can invoke. Service. Modes to activate
the Extra-Dial telephone.
Your Installer sets up Direct-Dial telephones in Configuration
programming. The System Coordinator assigns telephones
to Direct-Dial telephones in Administration programming.
Emergency telephone
The emergency telephone is a single-line telephone (not a
telephone) that functions independently of the
system. You can use the emergency telephone
system is not working.
when your
Emergency Transfer/Power Failure Cut-through provides
basic telephone service on external line 001 through an
Emergency Telephone if the power fails or if a system error
occurs.
The emergency telephone is usually located near the Key
Service Unit (KSU). Each KSU can support two Emergency
telephones, and each Trunk Module can support one
additional Emergency telephone.
Extra-Dial telephone
In Service Modes, a second telephone can be assigned to
ring on calls made to a Direct-Dial telephone. There may be
one Extra-Dial telephone for each Direct-Dial telephone, and
it may be a different telephone in each Service Mode.
Hotline telephone
You can call a programmed internal or external telephone
number simply by picking up the receiver of the Hotline
telephone (or by pressing
Telephone features
80 Special Telephones
A Hotline telephone can be set up to dial an operator or an
emergency number. You should put a notice by the Hotline
telephone to let people know which number will be dialed
when they lift the receiver.
.
If the Hotline telephone is set up to dial an external number
using the prime line, there must be an external prime line
assigned to the telephone. If not, the Hotline call will fail.
The System Coordinator sets up the Hotline telephone, the
telephone number it dials, and the line on which that number
is dialed, in Administration programming.
To bypass a Hotline
Press a line button, or use the Pre-Dial or Automatic Dial
feature before you pick up the, receiver or press
The following displays may occur at a Hotline telephone.
The line assigned to the Hotline is in
use. Make the call using normal
methods or wait until the Hotline line
The Hotline has been set up to dial
an external number on a prime line
but the Hotline telephone does not
have a prime line. This must be
corrected in Configuration or
Administration programming.
Telephone features
Special Telephones 81
The Hotline has been set up to dial
an external number on a prime line
but the Hotline telephone has an
internal prime line and no access to
line pools. This must be corrected in
Configuration or Administration
program’ming.
This message may also appear if the
line pool assigned to the telephone is
busy.
Prime telephone
Each line in a
system can have a telephone
assigned to it as a Prime telephone. Calls not answered at
their normal destinations are transferred to the Prime
telephone. The Prime telephone is usually the telephone on
the receptionist’s desk and it is often the Control telephone
and a Central Answering Position as well. A Prime telephone
is assigned to a line in Configuration programming.
See the Answering the telephone section for the displays
that may occur at a Prime telephone.
Telephone features
.
82 Speed Dial
Speed Dial
Make a speed dial call
You can quickly dial external telephone numbers that have
been programmed onto speed dial codes.
1.
2.
Enter the Speed Dial feature code
Enter the appropriate two-digit Speed Dial code.
supports two types of Speed Dial codes, Personal
and System. System Speed Dial codes are from 01 to 70.
The System Administrator can assign numbers to System
Speed Dial codes for the entire system in Administration
programming. Personal Speed Dial codes are from 71 to 94
and may have different numbers assigned to them on each
telephone. Users can program their own Personal Speed
Dial numbers.
Program Personal Speed Dial
You can add or change a Personal Speed Dial number on
your telephone.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Enter the Personal Speed Dial programming feature
code
Enter the code onto which you want to program a
number.
If you want to include a line selection for this number,
select the line or line pool.
Enter the number you want to program,
Displays
You will see some of these prompts while using or
programming Speed Dial.
Telephone features
Speed Dial 83
Continue entering the number you
wish to program: You can change
the number by pressing the left
of the volume bar or by pressing
When you are finished, press
denied
You have tried to program a
Personal Speed Dial number while
someone else on the system is in
Configuration or Administration.
programming.
You have tried to enter a new
personal speed dial number, but the
memory for these numbers in your
system is full.
Enter a two-digit code between 71
and 94 for the personal speed dial
number you want to program.
Enter the telephone number you
wish to program exactly as you
would if you were dialing it normally.
When you are finished, press
or
Enter
code
No number
and HOLD
You have entered a code outside the
code range (01-94).
There is no number stored on the
speed dial code you have dialed.
If you want to program a line or line
pool selection for this speed dial,
select the line or line pool.
Otherwise, enter the telephone
number you wish to program exactly
as you would if you were
it
normally. When you are finished,
press
Telephone features
84 Speed Dial
If you want to program a line or line
pool selection for this speed dial,
select the line or line pool.
Otherwise, enter the telephone
number you wish to program exactly
as you would if you were dialing it
normally. When you are finished,
press
or
The line associated with your speed
dialer is busy or there is no line
associated with it. Select a free
external line or line pool and enter
the Speed Dial feature code again.
Enter a two-digit Speed Dial code
(01-94). You must enter the zero for
codes
to 09.
Notes
There is no difference between using Personal Speed. Dial
and using System Speed Dial. They differ only in how you
program them.
Speed Dial numbers may include line choices and Host
System Signaling codes.
Speed Dial numbers are subject to the same Class of
Service as regularly dialed numbers. System speed dial
numbers can be programmed to bypass dialing restrictions.
Normally, speed dial numbers are shown on the display
while they are being dialed. System speed dial numbers may
be programmed to show a speed dial name instead of the
number, keeping the actual number confidential.
Telephone features
System features 85
System features ,
The following features are available for the whole
system.
Accidental Disconnect Protection
If you accidentally drop the receiver back into the telephone
cradle while answering a call, you can quickly retrieve the
call.
1.
Pick up the receiver again or press
connected to your call.
You are
Automatic telephone relocation
Automatic telephone relocation is enabled, you can move
jack to another without it
your telephone from one
losing any of its custom programming. Your Installer enables
Automatic telephone relocation in Configuration
programming.
Background Music
You can listen to music through your telephone speaker.
1.
Enter the Background Music feature code.
Warning
In accordance with U.S. copyright law, a license may be
required from the American Society of Composers,
Authors
Publishers or a similar organization if radio or
, TV broadcasts are transmitted through the Background
Music feature of this telecommunication system.
Northern Telecom Inc. hereby disclaims any liability
arising out of the failure to obtain such a license.
The music stops automatically if you make or answer a
Telephone features
86 System features
Your Installer makes this feature available to all telephones
in Configuration programming. You will need to supply a
music source, such as a radio, attached to your KSU (Key
Service Unit.)
Cancel Background Music
You can cancel Background Music.
1.
Enter the Cancel Background Music feature code.
. Class of Service
The Class of Service for a call consists of all the
features and lines available to you for that call. This is
determined by the features assigned to the telephone in
Administration programming, including all Dialing Filters and
Remote Access Packages.
Users who need to dial numbers not permitted by the Class
of Service of the line or telephone that they are using, can
switch to a different Class of Service by entering a Class of
Service Password. Remote users can change the set of
features available to them by entering the
DN
followed by a Class of Service password. See Class of
Service Password.
Internal numbers
Each telephone in the
system has its own internal
number. The length of internal numbers in your system may
be from 2 to 7 digits. All numbers in your system are the
same length. Your Installer sets the length of internal
numbers (also called the DN length) in Configuration
programming.
To find out your internal number, use the Button
feature
on an internal line button. On the
telephone, Button inquiry shows your internal number
followed by the function assigned to your single memory
button.
Telephone features
System features 87
Lines
The following features and characteristics are associated
with the use of lines.
Disconnect Supervision
When Disconnect Supervision is assigned to a line, the
system monitors it to detect if an external caller
hangs up. This allows the system to release the line for other
uses. Your Installer assigns disconnect supervision to lines
in Configuration programming. Disconnect supervision can
be turned on and off only on Loop start trunks. E&M and DID
trunks are always disconnect supervised.
Line appearance
Any of the lines in your system may appear at any of your
telephones. Your Installer assigns lines to telephones in
Configuration programming.
Usually, only the lines that are appropriate for a particular
person appear at that person’s telephone. When a line is
assigned to a telephone it is automatically given a line button
on that telephone, if a button is available. The M7100
telephone has no line buttons for its lines.
Normally, you cannot answer a call that is ringing on a line
that does not appear on your telephone. The following
you to pick up such a call: Call Pickup,
features will
Call Park, and Transfer.
Hung lines
A line that has been redirected using Line Redirection may
remain busy after a call is over. If this happens, the outgoing
line for the redirection will also remain busy. These are hung
lines and you must clear them.
Telephone features
88 System features
Note that a line indicator that has been solid for a long time
is the only real indication that a line is hung. However, the
solid line indicator may also indicate a genuine call in
Make resonably sure that the line is indeed hung
before clearing it or you may cut off a real conversation.
You can clear a hung line only at the telephone that was
used to redirect the line.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select Button inquiry ,
at the
telephone that was used to redirect the line.
Press the button of the redirected line.
Press SHOW or
Press DROP or.
The hung line is cleared.
Clearing the redirected line clears the outgoing line for the
redirection as well.
Line
Pools
A line pool allows each telephone access to external lines
from a group (or “pool”) of external lines. You can access
such lines by pressing an Intercom button and entering a line
pool access code or by pressing a memory button
programmed with the line pool feature code.
Private lines
A private line is exclusive to a particular telephone. Calls that
are put on hold or left unanswered on a private line cannot
be picked up at any telephone except the Prime telephone.
Prime line
Your telephone can be programmed to select an internal or
external line or a line pool automatically whenever you lift the
receiver or press
This is your Prime line.
Telephone features
System features 89
Ringing Line Preference
Each telephone in the
system can be programmed to
ring or remain silent for incoming calls on any external lines
that appear on the telephone.
For example, a telephone may have buttons assigned for
lines 1 to 3, but have only lines 1 and 2 programmed to ring.
An incoming call on any of the three lines causes a line
button indicator to flash, and the telephone can be used to
answer the call. This is especially useful for people who
monitor other telephone lines, but want only their own lines
to actually ring.
If a telephone has an external line as a prime line, that line is
usually made to ring.
Target line
A target line is used to route a call dialed with a particular
number to a particular telephone or group of telephones. A
target line can be used for incoming calls only. A single trunk
may provide connections to several different target lines.
This allows each person or department in the office to have
their own number without having as many trunks on the
system as there are people in the office.
Overflow Call Routing
If a call comes in for a target line that is busy,
routes
the call to the Prime telephone for that target line. If there is
no Prime telephone assigned to the target line or if a call
cannot be directed to a target line, the call will go to the
Prime telephone for the incoming trunk.
System Speed Dial
Speed dial codes 01 to 70 are the same for the entire
system. See the Speed Dial section for details.
Telephone features
..
90 Time features
Time features
The Time features let you check the present time and how
long you have spent on a call.
Call Duration Timer
You can see how long’you spent on your last call or how
long you have been on your present call.
1.
2.
Enter the Call Duration Timer feature code.
Read the display.
Show Time
You can see the present date and time while you are on a
call.
1.
2.
Enter the Show Time feature code.
Read the display.
Displays
One of the following displays will occur when you use a Time
feature.
You have not made a call since your
telephone’s clock was last reset.
The display shows the last call you
made, or the current call, and the
total elapsed time in minutes and
seconds.
432 1 02: 47
9
am
.
Telephone features
The display shows the present time.
Transfer 91
Transfer
Transfer a call
You can transfer a call to another person in your office.
1.
2.
Enter the Transfer feature code
Dial the number of the person to whom you want to
transfer the call.
To transfer a call to someone outside your office, see
Unsupervised Conference below.
Transfer with Announcement
You can consult a co-worker before transferring a call. This
type of Transfer can only be used on the M7324 and M7310
telephones.
2.
3.
4.
Enter the Transfer feature code.
Press
.
Enter the number of the co-worker to whom you are
transferring the call. You can announce the transfer
when your co-worker answers.
Press
I
Unsupervised Conference
You can use the Unsupervised Conference feature to
connect yourself and two other people, then drop out of the
conference leaving the other two to talk to each other. If
both parties are external, certain restrictions apply. See
Notes below.
1.
2.
Establish a Conference call as described in
Conference.
Enter the Transfer feature code
If you are unable to establish
conference,
you can put the conference on hold. See the Conference
section.
Telephone features
92 Transfer
Transfer using Hold
Call the person you want to transfer the call to and tell them
there is a call on hold for them. Do not enter the Transfer
.
feature code. To accept the call, your co-worker presses the
line button with the flashing indicator.
Transfer using Hold can only be used to transfer an external
call to another telephone that has a button for the line that
the external call is on.
An
telephone can transfer a call using Hold but it
cannot receive a call transferred in this way.
Displays
You will see some of the following displays while transferring
calls.
The person to whom you tried to
transfer a call is on another call.
Press
or the flashing line
button to reconnect to the call. On
the
telephone, lift the
receiver.
The person to whom you tried to
transfer a call has Do Not Disturb
active on their telephone. Press
or the flashing line button
to reconnect to the call. On the
telephone, lift the receiver.
The internal caller you were trying to
transfer hung up before the transfer
was complete.
The person to whom you tried
transfer a call did not answer. Press
or the flashing line button
to reconnect to the call. On the
telephone, lift the receiver.
Telephone features
Transfer 93
Press JOIN to transfer the call from
telephone 4321 to telephone 4322.
Calling 4321
JOIN
Dial the internal telephone number of
the person to whom you want to
transfer the call. If you are already
connected to that person, press the
line button of their call.
Press JOIN to connect the two
to reconnect to
calls. Press
the person you were trying to
transfer. If you are not reconnected,
and then press the line
press
button of the call on hold.
Either wait for the telephone to be
answered, or press
to use the
Ring Again or Message features, or
press PRIOR I TV to make a priority
call.
Line001 hung
UP
Line00
JOIN
Make c a l l f i r s t
The external caller you were trying to
transfer has hung up before the
transfer was complete.
Press JOIN to transfer the call on
line 001 to telephone 4321.
You have tried to use the Transfer
feature when you have no call to
transfer:
The telephone to which you are
trying to transfer a call is out of
service. Press
or the
flashing line button to reconnect to
the call. On the
telephone, lift
the receiver.
i n
The telephone to which
trying to transfer a call is out of
service.
Telephone features
94
Transfer
transfer
be completed
for one of these reasons:
All the internal resources needed
to perform a transfer are in use.
Try again later.
You have tried to transfer an
external call to another external
party. Try establishing an
Unsupervised Conference
instead.
An Unsupervised Conference is
not possible for your call. See
Notes below.
if you wish to
Press
/ T r a n s f e r announce the call. Otherwise enter
the internal number of the person
you want to transfer the call to.
Notes
You can establish an Unsupervised Conference whether the
other two people are inside or outside the
system.
However, if both of the other people are outside the system
there are some restrictions: At least one of the outside
callers must have called you and that call must be on a
disconnect supervised line.
You may discover that you can establish an Unsupervised
Conference between two internal calls or one internal and
one external call, simply by hanging up or pressing
This
is not a good habit to get into, because if you do it when you
have two external calls, you will drop the calls.
Telephone features
remotely 95
Using
remotely
You can use the lines, and some of the features, of a
system from outside that system. You can do this over the
public telephone network when you are away from the office,
system in another office from
or you can call into a
your own
system over a private network.
The exact facilities available to you through Remote Access
will vary depending on how your system is set up. The
features that can be made available
users
are: access to lines, access to line pools, and remote paging.
Examples
A salesman who spends most of his time on the road needs
to make long distance calls to the European office. Your
system has a leased line to Europe with reduced
transatlantic charges. You provide that salesman with a
Class of Service password that gives access to the
transatlantic line. The salesman can then telephone into the
system from a client’s site, enter his Class of Service
password, and use the leased transatlantic line to make his
calls.
The manager of one of your branch offices also needs to talk
to the European office. She uses a private network line
between her branch off ice and the head off ice to access the
head office’s
system and use its transatlantic lines.
Accessing
remotely
Over the public network
You can use
network.
remotely over the public telephone
Telephone features
96 Using
remotely
1.
2.
3.
Dial the
system’s remote access number.
If you hear stuttered dial tone, enter a COS password.
Wait for system dial tone.
Over a private network
You can access
line.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Using
remotely using a private network
Select the private network line or the line pool that
contains private network lines.
Dial the number, if any, needed to access the remote
s y s t e m .
If you hear stuttered dial tone, enter a COS password.
Wait for system dial tone.
remotely
Once connected to a remote system you can do any one of
the following:
enter the
DN followed by a COS password to
change your Class of Service.
dial the number of someone on the remote
system.
dial a line pool access code and make an external call.
enter a paging feature code (60 through 63). Use
instead of [Feature] when entering the feature codes.
See Page.
Tones you may hear
Busy tone
Telephone features
The number you dialed on the
system is busy. Your call will
be disconnected after five seconds.
Using
system dial
remotely 97
You may:
tone
enter the DISA DN followed by a
COS password to change your
Class of Service.
dial the number of someone on
the remote
system.
dial a line pool access code and
make an external call.
enter a paging feature code (60
through 63) using
instead of
See Page.
Fast busy tone
You have done one of the following:
entered an incorrect COS
password. Your call will be
disconnected after five seconds.
taken too long while entering a
COS password. Your call will be
disconnected after five seconds.
tried to use a line pool or feature
not permitted by your Class of
Service. You will hear system dial
tone again after five seconds.
dialed a number in the
system which does not exist.
Your call will be disconnected
after five seconds.
Stuttered dial tone
Enter your COS password on the dial
pad of your telephone.
Controlling access to your
system
It is important that you maintain the security of your
system by limiting access to authorized users and limiting
those users to just those features they need. Remember that
a remote user can make long distance calls’that will be
charged to your company and can make page
announcements in your office.
Telephone features
98 Using
remotely
Direct Inward System Access
You can control access to your
system with Direct
Inward System Access (DISA). If you set up the trunk used
for remote access for auto-answer with
callers will
hear stuttered dial tone and must enter a Class of Service
password before they are allowed into the system. Access to
system from the public telephone network
your
should always be controlled with DISA.
If you are setting up access to your system from another
system over a private network, you may not need
DISA. If you set up your E&M trunk to answer without DISA,
systems will receive system dial
callers from remote
tone immediately.
facility has a number (the
DN) which an
Your
external caller can dial when they hear system dial tone to
and enter a Class of Service password to
activate
change to a different Class of Service.
Class of Service
You can control which feature a remote user can access
through the Class of Service for the call. The Class of
Service of a Remote Access call is determined either by the
Class of Service password entered when the system
answers with
or by the Class of Service associated
with the trunk when the system answers without
After having accessed the system, a remote user can
change the Class of Service for the call by dialing the
DN followed by a Class of Service password.
Maintaining security
To maintain the security of your system, the following
practices are recommended:
Telephone features
Using
remotely 99
Warn anyone to whom you give the remote access
number to keep it confidential.
Change Class of Service passwords often.
Warn anyone to whom you give a Class of Service
password to remember it and not to write it down.
Remove the Class of Service password of anyone who
leaves your company.
Notes
Remote Access is possible only on DID and E&M trunks,
and Loop start trunks that are set to auto-answer.
To use the system remotely, the telephone you are using to
call the system must use tone dialing.
If the Loop start trunk used for Remote Access is set to
unsupervised mode, auto-answer will not function and the
caller will hear ringing instead of stuttered or system dial
tone.
If you use one
system to call remotely into another
system, you can use the available features of the
remote
system by pressing
followed by the
you will invoke the
feature code. If you
features of the local system, not the remote one.
Your Installer sets trunks to be auto-answer, with or without
DISA, in Configuration programming.
are set in
Configuration programming. The System Coordinator sets up
Classes of Service and Class of Service passwords in
Administration programming.
Telephone features
100 Voice Call
Voice Call
Make a voice call
You can make an announcement or begin a conversation
through the speaker of another telephone in the system.
.
1.
2.
Enter the Voice Call feature code
Wait for the beep, then speak.
q
).
Mute Voice Call tones
When a Voice Call begins at your telephone, you hear a
beep every 15 seconds as a reminder that the microphone is
on. You can stop it beeping.
1.
Pick up the receiver or press
Handsfree Answerback
If Handsfree Answerback is assigned to your telephone, you
can respond to a Voice Call without touching the telephone.
1.
When someone makes a voice call to you, simply start
talking. Your telephone’s microphone picks up your
voice.
Your telephone will beep periodically to remind you the
microphone is on. You can stop it beeping.
1.
Pick up the receiver or press
Voice Call Deny
You can prevent your telephone from receiving voice calls.
1.
Enter the Voice Call Deny feature code
([Feature)
Voice calls will ring like regular
internal calls. Your other calls will proceed normally.
Cancel Voice Call Deny
You can cancel Voice Call Deny.
1.
Enter the Cancel Voice Call Deny feature code
Telephone features
Voice Call
101
Displays
You will see some of these displays while making a voice
call.
Dial
call
Dial the internal number or press the
button of the person
internal
to whom you want to speak.
The line is open for you to speak.
The telephone receiving the call
cannot accept voice calls for one of
the following reasons: it is active or
ringing with another call; it is in Call
Forward mode; it is in Do Not Disturb
mode; it has Voice Call Deny turned
telephone.
on; it is not a
Your call proceeds automatically as
a regular ringing call.
Notes
Once you have answered a voice call, you can put it on hold,
transfer it, or otherwise treat it as a normal call.
When you have Handsfree Answerback assigned to your
telephone, and you are using an On-Hook Dialing Mode, the
microphone and speaker are both activated for external
calls.
The System Coordinator assigns Handsfree Answerback to
a telephone in Administration programming. You can not
assign Handsfree Answerback capability to the
telephone.
Telephone features
telemanuals.com
Telephone
user
cards
telemanuals.com
MDR4 Feature Card 1
Cancel
Listen to music (provided by your office) through your telephone speaker when you are not on a .
call.
Button inquiry
Check what is stored on any button. Use when labeling memory buttons.
Call Duration
Timer
Temporarily displays the approximate length of your current or most recent call.
Cancel
Call Forward
Send your calls to another telephone within your
system.
Call Park
Automatically puts a call on hold and a retrieval code from 001 to 909 is displayed. The call can
be retrieved from any telephone in your
system.
Call Park
Retrieval
Call Pickup
Directed
Call Pickup
Group
to
Get a parked call from any telephone by selecting an internal line and entering the retrieval code
so just dial the retrieval code.
(001 to 909). The M7100 Telephone has no
Answer any ringing telephone by using the feature code and dialing that telephone’s internal
number.
A member of a pickup group can answer a call that is ringing at another telephone within the
same group.
Call Queuing
Answers the next available call. Gives priority to the longest waiting external call.
Camp-On
Lets you re-route a call to another telephone even if all its lines are busy. Enter the feature code,
then dial the internal number of the receiving telephone. To answer the call, use Call Queuing. If
more than one call is waiting, priority is given to incoming external calls over camped calls.
Class of Service
Enter this feature code and a password provided by your System Coordinator to switch from one
Class of Service to another. The Class of Service determines which numbers you can dial.
Conference/
Transfer
Lets you set up a three-person call or transfer a call to another telephone within or outside of
your
Contrast
Adjustment
Dialing Modes
system.
To adjust the contrast of your telephone display, enter the feature code and then press
through q
(depending on your telephone) to select the correct level.
q
q
Lets you choose the method for dialing without lifting the receiver. To change the Dialing Mode
to select
from Standard Dialing to Pre-Dial or Automatic, enter the feature code, then press
to store the selected Dialing Mode.
the mode. Press
User cards
telemanuals.com
2 MDR4 Feature Card
Standard Dialing: The ordinary way to dial without lifting the receiver. Press a line button, then
dial the telephone number.
Automatic Dialing: Dial a telephone number automatically on the dial pad without picking up the
receiver or pressing a line button.
then press a line button to place
Pre-Dial: Dial a telephone number, revise it by pressing
(volume down) on the volume bar to
the call. For the M7208 or M7100 Telephone, press
revise the number.
Pre-Dial (Line Pool): Program Pre-Dial on the telephone first. Dial a telephone number. Press a
memory button that has been programmed for direct access to a Line Pool.
Cancel (Feature]
Do Not Disturb
Prevents incoming calls from ringing at your telephone.
Exclusive Hold
Temporarily suspends a call and prevents other telephones from picking it up.
Exclusive Hold Retrieval: Press
of the held call (press
on the
Group
Listening
Language
Choice
Cancel
Use both the receiver and your speaker at the same time while you are on a call. To avoid
acoustic feedback, hold the receiver away from the speaker during a call, and before hanging up,
press
English language: Displayed on your telephone.
Alternate language: Displayed on your telephone.
Last Number
Redial
Automatically redials the last external telephone number that you dialed.
Line Pools
Several external lines can be shared by a Qroup of telephones, but not all telephones require a
button for every line. Enter the feature code, then enter the Line Pool access code.
Line
Redirection
Cancel
You can redirect one or more lines on your telephone so that calls coming in on the line(s) will
be directed to one or more locations outside the
system.
Link
Generates a Link signal (also called flash or recall) to access other systems or carriers.
Long Tones
Sometimes necessary to communicate with devices (such as fax or answering machines) which
use longer tone signals. A Long Tone lasts as long as a dial pad button is held down.
Messages
Cancel [Feature]
Message, Reply: Call back the co-worker who sent you a message on your display.
Cancel
Message, Send: Leave a message on a co-worker’s telephone display to call you back.
Feature not available on the
User cards
Telephone.
telemanuals.com
MDR4 Feature Card 3
Lets you change the position of a line button. Enter the feature code and press the line button
you want to move. Then, press the button to which you want the line to move. The two lines
,
switch positions, Lines can not be moved to positions occupied by
[Answer] buttons
Page
and zone (0 to 6) (0 means all zones)
internal (Zone): Make announcements, through the
telephone speakers, to a select group
telephones.
or to all
[ F e a t u r e ]
External: Make announcements through your office’s loudspeaker system (if connected).
and zone (0 to 6) (0 means all zones)
Make announcements through both your
office’s loudspeaker system.
telephone speakers.and your
q
and code (1
3) then zone (0 to 6)
General: You have a choice of making announcements through the internal and external
for internal,
for external or
for both.
speakers. Press q
Pause
For Pulse and Tone Dialing: Inserts a 1.5 second delay in a number being dialed.
E l
For Pulse Dialing only: Inserts a 1.5 second delay in a number being dialed.
Priority Call
Permits you to interrupt another telephone while it is on another call, or to override a telephone
on Do Not Disturb. See your System Coordinator. When you are on another call, you have the
option of blocking a Priority Call on your telephone by entering the Do Not Disturb feature code or
by pressing
Privacy
Prevents another telephone, which shares your line, from joining your current call or permits it to
join.
Programmed
Release
q q
When programmed at the end of an External
Ring Again
sequence, performs the same function as
Cancel
When another telephone or Line Pool within the
system is busy, Ring Again
to call back when the teleohone or Line Pool becomes available.
you
Ring Type
Select a distinctive ring to help differentiate between your telephone and others nearby. Enter the
through q
to select the new Ring Type. Press
to store
feature code and press q
the new ring.
Ring Volume
Makes your telephone ring so you can adjust the volume, even while you are on a call
Feature not available on the
Telephone.
User cards
4 MDR4 Feature Card
Run/Stop
When using the External
programming feature, store more than one number on a
memory button by inserting a break point between each two numbers. The first press of the
memory button dials the first number: the second press dials the second number. and so on.
Saved Number
Stores the external telephone number appearing on the display.
feature code is entered.
Service Modes
the number when the
Cancel
You can assign a specific telephone lo accept all ringing, external, incoming calls. You can
program up to three different telephone answering options for specific times of the day, for
example, at night or at lunch time. This eliminates the need to forward all your calls. Only an
assigned Control Telephone can turn ON Service Modes. See your System Coordinator.
.
Show Time
You can temporarily display the date and the time while you are on a call.
Speed Dial
Personal: Lets you program a telephone number into a Personal Speed Dial code (from 71 to 94)
Personal and System: Lets you dial a telephone number using Personal codes (71-94) or System
codes (01-70). System Speed Dial codes are programmed by your System Coordinator.
Telephone
programming
External Autodial: Lets you store an external telephone number onto a memory button for
button access to that number.
Internal Autodial: Store an internal telephone number onto a memory button for
button access to that telephone number.
Program Features: Store a feature onto a memory button for one-button access to that feature.
You cannot program
Timed
or
buttons.
Release
Generates a longer Link signal (1.5 seconds). Use this feature when you want to release a call on
vour line but retain the use of the line for another call.
Transfer
Sends a call to another telephone within your
system.
Trunk Answer
Lets you pick up an external call that is ringing on a line which has been placed into Service
system. This feature does not work on private
Modes from any telephone within the
lines.
Voice Call
can make a voice announcement or begin a conversation through the speaker of another
telephone without first making the other telephone ring.
Voice Call Deny
Cancel
Prevents your telephone from receiving Voice Calls, permits only ordinary ringing calls.
User cards
MDR4 Feature Card
How to use
You can use many features by pressing
f e a t u r e s 1. Press
5
plus a code.
2. Enter the code from the dial pad.
3. Follow the display messages for specific operations of a feature.
How to program
features
You can program many features onto memory buttons by pressing
1. If you are on a call or have an open line, press
or
2. Press ( F o r
Telephones, go to step 4.)
3. Press the memory button that you wish to program.
then enter the code from the dial pad.
4. Press
Note: See your System Coordinator for more detailed information.
With a Line Pool, several external lines can be shared by a group of
telephones without requiring each telephone to have a button for every line.
Telephones have access to external lines through a programmed system-wide
access code. This code is assigned in Configuration programming and is
particularly useful for M7100 Telephones which have no line buttons.
To program a Line Pool
1. If you are on a call or have an open line, press [J or
2. Press
q .
3. Press the memory button you want to program.
4. Press
5. Enter the access code for a Line Pool.
To use a Line Pool
and dial the Line Pool access code for one of the Line
1.
Pools assigned to your telephone.
OR
Press
(if
2. If you are using a line pool which connects you to the public network, dial
the telephone number of the person you want to call.
If you are using a line pool which automatically connects you to another
system, see Using
from outside the office.
to a system
If you are using a line pool which automatically connects
follow the procedure for using that system. Ask your
other than
System Coordinator if you need help.
Meridian and
are trademarks of Northern
User cards
6 MDR4 Feature Card
To conference (three-way conference call)
1. Make or answer the first call.
2. Put the first call on hold.
3. Make or answer the second call.
4. After the second call is connected, press
(or press
if programmed).
5. Press the line button of the first held call. (This step is not required on the
M7100 Telephone.)
to end the conference call.
6. Press
Managing three-way conference calls
See your System Coordinator for complete instructions for these operations:
a conference on ho/d Put your end of the call on hold; the other two
callers can still speak to each other.
Splitting a conference Speak privately to one of the callers.
one party Drop one call and stay connected to the other.
holding two calls Put both parties on hold as separate calls.
To establish an unsupervised conference
When you are on a conference call, press
if programmed). The other two parties remain connected.
(or
Note: If both of the parties are external, one of them must have called you.
Some external lines may not support this type of transfer if two
external parties are involved.
(Transfer
Transfer
Announcement
1. Make or answer a call.
2. Press
(or
if programmed).
3. Dial an internal telephone number or press an Internal
The call is immediately transferred.
button.
Note: If an external call is transferred to a busy internal line, or not answered
after a few rings, the call automatically rings you back and the display
indicates that the line was busv or that no one answered.
Transfer
Announcement
(Not available on the M7100 Telephone.)
Make or answer a call.
2. Press
The call is automatically put on hold.
3. Dial an internal telephone number or press an Internal
4. Announce the call after the called party answers.
5. Press
(or
if programmed).
6. Press the line button of the first held call.
User cards
button.
MDR4 Feature Card
About Speed Dial
codes
7
Speed Dial lets you dial external telephone numbers using a two-digit code.
There are two types of Speed Dial codes. System Speed Dial codes (01
70) can be used from any
telephone in the system and are assigned
by your System Coordinator. Personal Speed Dial codes (71 to 94) can be
used exclusively at your telephone and are assigned by you.
You cannot assign Speed Dial codes while someone is programming
Business Communication System.
your Meridian
Assigning numbers
to Personal Speed Dial
codes
1. If you are on a call or have an open line, press
2. Press
or
to enter Personal Speed Dial codes.
3. Enter a two-digit code (from 71 to 94).
4. Dial the telephone number you want to assign to that code.
Telephone numbers cannot exceed 24 digits.
5. Press
to finish programming.
6. Keep a record of each Personal Speed Dial code.
Using Speed Dial
1. Press
(or press
if programmed).
Dial code (01 to 70) or Personal Speed
2. Enter the two-digit
Dial code (71 to 94) for the number you want.
A line is automatically selected and your call is placed.
Calling
from
outside the office
You can use your
system even when you are not in the office. You
to make calls or use the paging feature. You may
will be able to use
be required to enter a Class of Service password to get onto the system.
Your Class of Service will determine which features you can use and which
numbers you can dial.
To connect
system
1. Dial the remote access number provided by your System Coordinator.
2. If you hear stuttered dial tone, enter a 6-digit COS password.
system.
3. When you hear steady dial tone, you are connected to the
You can do one of the following:
Change your Class of Service by dialing the
DN and entering a Class
of Service password.
Dial the number of someone in the office.
Enter a line pool access code to use external lines in a line pool.
Enter a Page feature code
through
and the
appropriate page type and zone number to page someone in the office.
Note: Ask your System Coordinator for details on your Classes of Service
and Class of Service passwords.
User cards
8 DR4 Prime Telephone User Card
What is a Prime
Telephone?
A Prime Telephone can be any Meridian
telephone that has been
assigned to provide a backup answering service for incoming external calls.
An external call rings at a Prime Telephone when the call is not answered at
any other telephones with that call’s line appearance.
A Prime Telephone can be any one of the following:
l
l
.
l
Your role in
operating a Prime
Telephone
any
telephone
an M7310 telephone with a Busy Lamp Field (BLF)
an M7324 telephone with a Central Answering Position (CAP) module(s).
As the assigned Prime Telephone operator, you are responsible for
answering unanswered external calls. You are alerted to these calls when
your telephone display shows you a descriptive message, the line indicator
flashes, and the call rings.
After answering a call, you may take a message or redirect the call to another
telephone.
Who assigns the
external lines
my
Prime Telephone?
Check with your System Coordinator to determine which external lines have
been assigned for backup answering and which of those lines ring at your
Prime Telephone. To help you do your job well, this person should provide a
telephone and
list of names and numbers associated with each
external line, and a list of System Speed Dial names and numbers. This
person can also tell you which features have been assigned to your telephone.
There may be more than one Prime Telephone operator in your
system. If this is the case, then each Prime Telephone operator is responsible
for a particular group of assigned lines when providing a backup answering
service. Let the appropriate people within your backup answering group know
that you are now providing a service for them.
Meridian and
User cards
are lrademarks of Northern Telecom.
DR4 Prime Telephone User Card 9
When do
a call?
answer
You answer a call if:
someone within
calls you. You hear the
internal ring
quick rings followed by a longer pause), and an indicator
flashes besideone of your telephone’s intercom buttons.
an external call comes directly to your Prime Telephone. You hear the
flashes beside one of
familiar external telephone ring, and an indicator
your telephone’s external line buttons.
a call is redirected to your Prime Telephone from somewhere else within the
system. You hear an internal ring, an external ring, or the Camp-On
tone (two quick beeps), and you see a message on the display of your
telephone.
You do not answer the call if your Prime Telephone does not ring.
How do I answer
a call?
If you want a line to be automatically selected:
1. Pick up the receiver or press
(if assigned).
OR
If you want to manually answer a line:
Press the line or intercom button with a slow flashing indicator
2. Pick up the receiver if you want the handsfree microphone OFF.
Nate: A fast flashing indicator
Handling more than
one call at once
shows that a line is on hold.
When you have more than one call arriving at your telephone, the Call
Queuing feature allows you to answer each of the wailing calls by
automatically selecting the next call for you.
Use Call Queuing when you are on a call and a new call alerts you by ringing
tones.
at your telephone, or by sending Call
1. Pick up the receiver to answer the first call.
2. Press
q or the Call Queuing button if programmed.
The call you were on is automatically put on hold.
3. To return to a previous call:
Press the external line button of the call on hold.
4. Continue to answer incoming calls.
5. Press
when you are finished with the call you are on.
User cards
Prime Telephone User Card
Redirecting calls
using display
messages
The display messages which appear on your Prime Telephone for redirected
calls should help you to understand why those calls were passed to
your Prime Telephone. This information is useful when you need to decide
what to do with the call once it has been answered.
The following table lists some example display messages that could appear on
a Prime Telephone when you receive redirected calls:
Karen holds a call for too long.
JOHN
Line025
Line012 to
The call you transferred is returned to you
because the telephone is in Do Not
Disturb mode.
Delayed Ring Transfer redirects an
unanswered call on line 025.
A call on line 012 cannot ring elsewhere.
A call on line 010 was forwarded or
routed to Janet, but was not answered.
Line003 c a l l b a c k
A transferred, camped, or parked call on
line 003 was returned to the originator
using the Callback feature, but was not
answered.
1 d call is repeated periodically after
The Held Line Reminder message
appears. This message is
the first message Held
accompanied by the same tone used with the Camp-On feature (two quick
beeps).
User cards
DR4 Prime Telephone User Card 11
Your options
You have just answered a call for someone else. What do you do next?
.
You can:
Transfer the call to another telephone within or outside of the
OR
Camp the call on another
telephone.
OR
Announce the call to the office, asking that someone take the call.
OR
Take a message.
Transferring
the active call
system.
To another
telephone:
1. Check whether the telephone to which you want to transfer is already
busy:
Is there an indicator
beside the Internal
button for the other
telephone?
If you have a
is the indicator ON for the other telephone?
If you have a CAP module, is the indicator
ON for the other
telephone?
2. Transfer the call using one of these four methods:
Transfer with Announcement you first talk on the telephone to the
person to whom you want to transfer the call.
Transfer without Announcement you immediately transfer the call after
talking to the caller.
. Establish a conference call.
Transfer using hold.
l
l
l
Do not forget that you can use programmed
telephone and CAP module (if installed) to select a
buttons on your
telephone.
To a telephone outside the Not-star system:
1. Call the person to whom you wish to transfer the call.
2. Establish a conference with the two parties.
3. Drop out of the conference using the Unsupervised Conference feature.
Some external lines may not support an unsupervised conference call.
In this case, you may put the conference on hold, allowing the other
two parties to continue talking to each other.
Do not use the
button to create an unsupervised conference.
Although it will create an unsupervised conference with internal parties,
it will not work in a conference with two external parties.
User cards
12
DR4 Prime Telephone User Card
Camping the call
If the
telephone you want to transfer the call to is busy on another
call, you may want to camp the call on that telephone. The person receiving
the camped call will hear Camp-On tones (two quick beeps).
Press
or the Camp-On button (if programmed).
2. Dial the internal number of the other telephone or press its Internal
button if programmed.
-Announcing
the active call
You are trying to pass calls you have answered to co-workers who are not at
their telephones. Using the Page feature, you can announce the calls over, the
telephones, an external loudspeaker, or both. A co-worker hearing an
telephone.
announcement can answer the call from
you
your co-worker
telephone:
fake
call from a specific
1. Place the call on hold.
2. Using the Page feature, announce the call and the location of the telephone
to which you will transfer the call.
3. Transfer the call to the appropriate
telephone.
OR
Camp the call on the appropriate
telephone.
4. Replace your receiver.
you want your co-worker
fake
call on a specific line:
1. Place the call on hold.
2. Use the Page feature to announce the call and its line number.
3. Replace the receiver.
Your co-worker can now go to the nearest
telephone that has that
line, select the line, and lift the receiver.
you want your co- worker
fake
from any
1. Use the Call Park feature to place the call on hold. Your telephone shows a
three-digit Call Park Retrieval code on the display.
2. Use the Page feature to announce the call and the Call Park Retrieval code.
3. Replace your receiver.
Your co-worker can now retrieve the call from any other
telephone
by lifting the receiver and dialing the three-digit code.
Note: Remember that callback (the call is redirected back to your Prime
Telephone) occurs if your transferred, parked, or camped call goes
unanswered.
User cards
DR4 Prime Telephone User Card
Informing your
co-workers about
their calls
13
Use the Send Message feature to notify co-workers that they should call
for information.
If the person you are trying to call is on another line, or their telephone has Do
Not Disturb ON, a display message shows you that their ielephone is busy. If
the person you are trying to call does not answer, a display message informs
you that there is no reply. In each case, you can use the Ring Again feature.
The Ring Again feature is a method of ensuring that you Immediately know
when there is a change in the use of the other telephone. You can then try
again to place a call.
Working with other
features
Some of the many special features which
provides may be particularly
useful to you. Some of these features, however, are only available if assigned
during Configuration or Administration programming. Speak to your System
use, and to obtain details on
Coordinator to determine which features
how to use them.
Answer Group: You can immediately answer and monitor a specific group of
telephones, for example, your managers’, using Answer buttons.
Automatic Handsfree: If programmed, you can use the Handsfree
microphone and speaker for all your calls.
Call Pickup Directed: Anyone in the office can answer a call ringing at any
telephone by dialing that telephone’s internal number.
other
Call Pickup Group: Any member of a specified group can answer an external
or internal call ringing at another telephone within that specified group.
Direct-Dial Telephone: if your Prime Telephone is administered as a
Dial telephone, anyone assigned to your Direct Dial telephone can quickly
contact you by dialing an assigned single-digit number.
Hotline: A
telephone may be programmed to automatically dial your
Prime Telephone as soon as its receiver has been lifted.
Multiple Prime Telephones: There may be a requirement for more than one
Prime Telephone to provide backup answering.
Page Zone: If you do not want to disturb the entire off ice with an
announcement, you can direct the page to a choice of smaller areas.
Priority Call: If you have answered an urgent call for someone who is busy
on another line, you can interrupt the person with this feature.
User cards
14
DR4 Prime Telephone User Card
Some unique
situations
If an external call comes to you, and no remaining external line buttons are
for that call will appear next to any available
available, the indicator
intercom buttons on your telephone.
If your Prime Telephone receives a callback call, you will hear the internal
telephone ring instead of the familiar external telephone ring.
The Held Line Reminder or the Delayed Ring Transfer feature is not available
unless assigned during Configuration programming.
If you are using all of your external line buttons and intercom buttons, you
can still receive a camped call (you will hear two quick beeps).
If your Prime Telephone is an M7324 telephone, you can monitor the busy/not
telephones. Check for the presence or absence
busy status of other
beside the Internal
buttons for the other telephones.
of indicators
Where to get help
To learn more about
and its features, the System Coordinator can
documents:
provide you with the following
The Meridian
Telephone User Cards show you how to:
make an external call
make an internal call
put a call on hold
use
program memory buttons.
The Meridian
features.
Feature Card lists the feature codes and describes the
Busy Lamp Field (BLF) User Card describes how to use
The Meridian
the Busy Lamp Field.
Central Answering Position (CAP) User Card describes
The Meridian
how to use Central Answering Position modules.
User cards
M7100 User Card
15
Release button
cancels
calls.
Display
shows the time, date, call information and guides
features.
you while using
is programmable to store a feature or to
automatically dial internal or external
number.
Feature button
starts or ends a feature.
Volume
control
Hold button
Button inquiry
Confirm that your memory button has the correct snap-on cap by checking its
programming.
Release all calls and open lines with dial tone.
2. Press
.
3. Read the display.
when finished.
4. Press
Adjusting display
contrast
1. Press
2. Press
Selecting a ring type
and volume
1. Press
or
to hear the different types of rings.
2. Press
3. While the telephone is ringing, press
to adjust the volume.
louder
to store the ring.
4. Press
Adjusting receiver or
telephone speaker
volume
Meridian and
to
.
for the level you want.
Press
when using the receiver or the speaker.
louder
are lrademarks of Norlhern Telecom.
User cards
16
User Card
Internal calls
1. Pick up the receiver.
2. Dial the internal number.
External calls
Pick up the receiver.
(or your system’s external line access code).
2. Dial
3. Dial the external telephone number.
Internal numbers and the external access code are supplied by your
System Coordinator.
Making and
answering a second
call
The
By using
telephone allows you to have two calls active at the same time.
you can switch between calls.
To answer a second
while on another call
1. Press
to put the first call on hold.
The second call automatically comes onto the line.
To hold a call and make a second call
1. Press
to put the first call on hold.
2. Dial the telephone number for the second call.
To return
1. Press
again to return to the first call on hold.
The second call is automatically put on hold.
[Hold
To ho/d a
1. Press [Hold) .
2. Press
again to return to the call on hold.
Check the display for confirmation or additional information.
User cards
00 User Card 17
The memory button can store
telephone number or feature
code to give you one touch
dialing or feature activation. You
can change the memory button
by programming it with a new
number or feature code.
About the
memory button
Memory
Remember: Press
Programming
memory buttons
button
.
to check the memory button.
External
1. If you are on a call or an open line with dial tone, press
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press
Dial the external number.
Press [Hold] to store the number.
Label your new button.
Internal aufodial
1. If you are on a call or an open line with dial tone, press
2. Press
3. Dial the internal number.
4. Label your new button.
Features
1. If you are on a call or an open line with dial tone, press
2. Press
.
and the feature code.
3. Press
4. Label your new button.
Erasing memory buttons
1. If you are
a call or an open line with dial tone, press
2. Press
3. Press
q .
to erase the button.
User cards
18
M7208 User Card
Display
I
shows the time, date, call information and guides you
features.
while using
Indicators
appear beside active lines and features.
Feature button
starts or ends a feature.
Release button
cancels active calls.
Memory and line buttons
are buttons with indicators for one
touch dialing, feature operation or line
access.
Button Inquiry
Confirm that your memory and line buttons have the correct snap-on caps by
checking their programming.
1. Release all calls and open lines with dial tone.
2. Press
q .
3. Press the button you want to check.
4. Read the display,
5. Press
when finished.
Adjusting
contrast
1. Press
display
2. Press a number on the dial pad for the contrast level you want, the higher
the number the higher the contrast level.
Selecting a Ring
Type and volume
level
Adjusting receiver or
telephone ‘speaker
volume
Meridian and
User cards
are trademarks
1. Press
.
q tto hear the different types of rings.
2. Press
3. While the telephone is ringing, press
to adjust the volume.
to store the ring.
4. Press
1. Press
Northern Telecom
when using the receiver or the speaker.
M7208 User Card 19
About line buttons
systems can have different types of line buttons. Match the line
buttons on your telephone with the ones below for instructions on how to use
them.
Infernal calls using Intercom buttons
Pick up the receiver.
2. If
appears beside an Intercom’
button, then dial.
OR
Press an Intercom button without
then dial.
External calls using numbered Line
buttons
1. Pick up the receiver.
2. When
appears beside a
numbered Line button, then dial.
OR
Press a numbered
without
then dial.
Note: Internal numbers are supplied by your System Coordinator.
Internal calls using extension
buttons
1. Pick up the receiver.
appears beside an
2. When
extension button, then dial.
External calls using extension
buttons
1. Pick up the receiver.
appears beside the
2. When
extension button, dial
(or your system’s external line
access code) and the number.
Holding Calls
1. Press T h e
f l .a s h e s b e s i d e t h e l i n e o n h o l d .
2. Press the line button with the flashing
to return to the call.
Check the display for confirmation or additional information.
Automatic hold
Calls are put on hold automatically when you switch from one line to another.
This button operates the telephone’s built-in microphone and speaker in place
of the receiver. Your System Coordinator can program Handsfree to your
telephone.
Making calls
1.
instead of picking up the receiver.
Switching between
and handset
1.
and replace the handset to switch to Handsfree.
2. Pick up the receiver to switch back.
Using Mute
1.
to turn the microphone OFF.
again to turn the microphone ON.
2.
Dialing without
lifting the handset
1.
line button without
then dial your call.
2. When answered, pick up the receiver, or press
3. If the call is not answered, or the line is busy, press
.
User cards
20 M7208 User Card
Memory buttons are the buttons
with indicators other than line or
Handsfree buttons. Memory
buttons store telephone numbers
or feature codes to give you one
touch dialing or feature activation.
You can change what a memory
button does by just programming
it with a new number or feature.
You cannot program a line or
Handsfree button.
About memory
buttons
Remember:
Programming
memory buttons
to check a memory or line button.
External
1. If you are on a call or an open line with dial tone, press (Hold] or
2. Press
3. Press a memory button.
4. Dial the external number.
5. Press
to store the number.
6. Label your new button.
2.
3.
4.
5.
If you are on a call or an open line with dial tone, press
Press
Press a memory button.
Dial the internal number.
Label your new button.
Features
1. If you are on a call or an open line with dial tone, press
2. Press
3. Press a memory button.
and the feature code.
4. Press
5. Label your new button.
Erasing memory buttons
1. If you are on a call or an open line with dial tone, press
2. Press
3. Press the memory button you want to erase.
4. Press
to erase the button.
User cards
or
or
or
M7310 User Card
21
Shift button
for using the top function of a dual-memory button.
Display
shows the
date, call information and guides you while using
The lower line of the display is reserved for display button instructions.
Dual-memory
buttons
store any two features and/or
numbers.
Display buttons
Feature button
starts or cancels a feature.
Release button
cancels active calls.
Hold button
Dial pad
Memory and line buttons
are buttons with indicators for
Indicators
appear beside active lines and features.
Display buttons change with each feature you use.
The labels for display buttons appear in capital
letters directly above them on the second line of
the display. A display button with an “OK” label
in this card.
above it is represented as
Using display
buttons
Confirm that your memory and line buttons have the correct snap-on caps by
Button inquiry
checking their programming.
1. Release all calls or open lines with dial tone.
2. Press
3. Press the button(s) you want to check and read the display.
when finished.
4. Press
Adjusting display
contrast
1. Press
2. Press
3. Press
Selecting a ring type
and volume level
Press
2. Press
q or to hear the different types of rings.
3. While the telephone is ringing, press
to adjust the volume.
to store the ring.
4. Press
and
are trademarks of
or
level you want.
whenfinished.
Telecom.
User cards
22
User Card
About line buttons
systems can have different types of line buttons. Match the
buttons on your telephone with the ones below for instructions on how to use
them.
calls using
1. Pick up the receiver.
appears beside an intercom
2. If
button, then dial.
OR
Press an Intercom button without
then dial.
External calls using numbered Line
buttons
1. Pick up the receiver.
appears beside a
2. When
numbered Line button, then dial.
OR
Press a numbered Line button
without
then dial.
Internal numbers are supplied by your System Coordinator.
Internal calls using extension
buttons
Pick up the receiver.
appears beside an
2. When
extension button, then dial.
External calls using extension
buttons
Pick up the receiver.
appears beside the
2. When
extension button, then dial
(or your system’s external line
access code) and the number.
Holding Calls
1. Press T h e
f l.a s h e s b e s i d e t h e l i n e o n h o l d .
2. Press the line button with the flashing
to return to the call.
Check the display for confirmation or additional information.
Automatic hold
Calls are put on hold automatically when you switch from-one line to another.
This button operates the telephone’s built-in microphone and speaker in place
of the receiver. Your System Coordinator can program Handsfree to your
telephone.
Making calls
Press
instead of picking up the receiver.
Switching between Handsfree and handset
Press
and replace the handset to switch to Handsfree.
2. Pick up the receiver to switch back.
Using Mute
1. Press
2. Press
Dialing without
lifting the handset
User cards
to turn the microphone OFF.
again to turn the microphone ON.
Pressaline button without
then dial your call.
2. When answered, pick up the receiver, or press
3. If the call is not answered, or the line is busy, press
.
.
M7310 User Card 23
There are two types of memory
About memory
buttons
codes to give you one touch
dialing or-feature activation.
Shill
Dual-memory buttons
To use the bottom function, press
the dual-memory button.
To use the top function, press the
shift button, then press the
memory button.
Single-memory buttons
Single-memory buttons are the
buttons with indicators other than
line or Handsfree buttons.
Remember: Press
Programming
memory buttons
to check a memory or line button.
External
Internal
1. If you are on a call or an open line
with dial tone, press
or
2. Press
3. Press a memory button.
4. Dial the external number.
5. Press OK to store the number.
6. Label your new button.
1. If you are on a call or an open line
with dial tone, press
or
.
2. Press
3. Press a memory button.
4. Dial the internal number.
5. Label your new button.
Features
Erasing memory buttons
2.
3.
4.
5.
If you are on a call or an ooen line
with dial tone, press
or
Press
,
Press a memory button.
Press
and the feature
code.
Label your new button.
If you are on a call or an open line
with dial tone, press
or
2. Press
3. Press the memory button you
want to erase.
4. Press OK to erase the button.
User cards
24 M7324 User Card
Memory and line buttons
are buttons with indicators for one touch dialing, feature operation or
access.
features. The lower
you while using
of the display is reserved for display
button instructions.
Display buttons
Dial pad
Volume control
Feature button
starts or ends a feature.
appear beside active lines and features.
Using display
buttons
Display buttons change with each feature you
use. The labels for display buttons appear in
capital letters directly above them on the
second line of the display. A display button
with an “OK” label above it is represented as
in this card.
Button inquiry
Confirm that your memory and line buttons have the correct snap-on caps by
checking their programming.
1. Release all calls or open lines with dial tone.
2. Press
3. Press the button(s) you want to check and read the display.
when finished.
4. Press
Adjusting display
contrast
1. Press
2. Press
3. Press
Selecting a ring type
and volume level
Meridian and
User cards
or
level you want.
whenfinished.
1. Press
2. Press
,
,
or
to hear the different types of rings.
3. While the telephone is ringing, press
adjust the volume.
louder
the ring.
4. Press OK
are trademarks of Northern Telecom.
M7324 User Card 25
About line buttons
systems can have different types of line buttons. Match the line
buttons on your telephone with the ones below for instructions on how to use
them.
internal calls using intercom buttons
1. Pick up the receiver.
2. If
appears beside an Intercom
button, then dial.
OR
Press an Intercom button without
then dial.
External calls using numbered Line
buttons
1. Pick up the receiver.
appears beside a
2. When
numbered Line button, then dial.
OR
Press a numbered Line button
then dial.
without
Internal numbers are supplied by your system coordinator.
Internal calls using extension
buttons
External calls using extension
buttons
1. Pick up the receiver.
appears beside an
2. When
extension button, then dial.
1. Pick up the receiver.
appears beside the
2. When
(or
extension button, then dial
external line access
your
code) and the number.
Holding Calls
1. Press T h e
flashes beside the line on hold.
2. Press the line button with the flashing
to return to the call.
Check the display for confirmation or additional information.
Automatic hold
Calls are put on hold automatically when you switch from one line to another.
This button operates the telephone’s built-in microphone and speaker in place
of the receiver. Your System Coordinator can program Handsfree to your
telephone.
Making calls
Press
instead of picking up the receiver.
Switching between Handsfree and handset
1. Press
and replace the handset to switch to Handsfree.
2. Pick up the receiver to switch back.
Using Mute
1. Press
2. Press
Dialing without
lifting the handset
to turn the microphone OFF.
again to turn the microphone ON.
1. Press a line button without
then dial your call.
2. When answered, pick up the receiver, or press
3. If the call is not answered, or the line is busy, press
User cards
26
M7324 User Card
Memory buttons are the buttons
.
with indicators other than line or
Handsfree buttons. Memory
buttons store telephone numbers
or feature codes to give you one
touch dialing or feature activation.
You can change what a memory
button does by just programming
it with a new number or feature.
About memory
buttons
If you have programmed a
memory button with an internal
number the indicator comes on
when the number is busy.
Remember: Press
Programming
memory buttons
to check a memory or line button.
External
1. If you are on a call or an open line with dial tone,
2. Press
3. Press a memory button.
4. Dial the external number.
5. Press OK to store the number.
6. Label your new button.
internal
1. If you are on a call or an open line with dial tone, press
2. Press
3. Press a memory button.
4. Dial the internal number.
5. Label your new button.
Features
1. If you are on a call or an open line with dial tone, press
2. Press
3. Press a memory button.
4. Press
and the feature code.
5. Label your new button.
Erasing memory buttons
1. if you are on a call or an open line with dial tone, press
.
2. Press
3. Press the memory button you want to erase.
to erase the button.
4. Press
User cards
Or
or
or
or
.
Busy Lamp Field User Card 27
Busy Lamp Field
User Card
The Meridian
Busy Lamp Field (BLF) is a device with indicators that turn ON individually when
telephones in your office are in use. The BLF attaches to your M7310 telephone and is a welcome aid
when you answer the telephone for co-workers or operate a message center. You can tell at a glance
which telephones are in use and avoid interrupting people who are busy on calls.
The Busy Lamp Field
attached to an
telephone
The Busy Lamp Field indicators are arranged to match up with the dual-memory buttons above the
display of your M7310 telephone. Each half of a dual-memory button that has been programmed as an
button is matched with one half of a BLF indicator. The top portion of a BLF indicator
internal
turns ON when showing an active call on the top half of a dual-memory button; the bottom portion turns
ON when showing an active call on the bottom half of a dual-memory button.
number from one button to another, the BLF indicator moves
If you move an internal
automatically. BLF indicators corresponding to internal
buttons turn ON and OFF.
l
l
The BLF indicator is ON
When a call is active on a
telephone
OR
For those features that use indicators to show
their ON or OFF status.
l
l
The BLF indicator is OFF
When there is no active call at that telephone
OR
When a call is being held at a telephone and
there is no other call active.
User cards
28 Busy Lamp Field User Card
The
shows you the busy/not busy status of any
telephone within your office. When
a call for one of your co-workers comes to your telephone, there are many possible ways to handle it.
.
The lists below show some of these options. As soon as you learn who a call is for, check the
appropriate indicator on the BLF.
the indicator is ON
l
l
the indicator is OFF
Use Send Message
OR
Use Ring Again on Busy
OR
Try to call on an internal line. The person you
call will hear a muted ringing.
l
l
Transfer the incoming call immediately using
the Transfer feature (if equipped)
OR
Announce your call using the Conference/
Transfer or Transfer feature.
BLF indicators
turned ON for busy
telephones
Corresponding internal
buttons for the
telephones
buttons and the matching layout
You will quickly become familiar with the layout of your internal
number on a
of the Busy Lamp Field indicators. Remember, you can change any internal
memory button and the BLF automatically changes too.
User Card and your
Please be sure to read your
applicable). They contain of information which shall help you to use
your BLF.
‘Meridian and
User cards
are trademarks
Northern Telecom.
Prime Telephone User Card (if
features effectively with
Central Answering Position User Card 29
Why use the CAP?
The Meridian
Central Answering Position (CAP) consists of a
M7324 Telephone and one or two
CAP modules. The CAP allows you
to:
answer calls made from outside your
system
check the busy/not busy or Do Not Disturb status of the telephones in your
system
transfer calls to your co-workers’ telephones
use many more features and
numbers with one-touch access.
l
l
l
l
What is a CAP
module?
A CAP module is an add-on device which provides 48 extra
line
buttons for the M7324 Telephone. A CAP module is connected to the side of
the M7324; a second CAP module can be connected to the first CAP module.
Answering Position
Card for instructions on
See the
M7324
installation. When two CAP modules are connected to a
Telephone, they provide a total of 96 extra memory or line buttons for the
M7324 Telephone.
M7324 Telephone with one CAP module attached
By pressing a line button on your CAP module and lifting the receiver, you can
system. Pressing the
answer a call made from outside your
appropriate programmed memory button allows you to automatically dial an
internal or external number, or use a feature.
A headset may be plugged into the bottom of the M7324 Telephone
when Handsfree has been administered.
User cards
30
Central Answering Position User Card
About pre-assigned
buttons
When one or two CAP modules are first plugged into your telephone, each
CAP module button is pre-assigned either to select a line or dial an internal
number.
If you have been assigned up to 12 lines, you can select them by pressing the
buttons in the left-hand column of your M7324 telephone. Remaining lines
are assigned to buttons on the CAP module(s), beginning at the top left-hand
corner of the first CAP module and moving down.
After lines are assigned, any remaining buttons on your CAP module(s)
buttons, starting with the lowest default internal
become Internal
number. These internal numbers can be between two and seven digits. The
numbering length is controlled in Configuration programming.
In order for lines to be automatically assigned to buttons on your CAP
module, your telephone must first be designated as a CAP in
Configuration programming.
Checking the
pre-assigned CAP
module buttons
Customizing your
CAP module
1. Replace the receiver,
2. Press
3. Press the buttons you want to check and read the display.
4. Ensure that your pre-assigned line buttons and Internal
have the correct snap-on caps.
5. Press
when you are finished.
buttons
You can program any of the buttons on your CAP module that do not select
lines. These buttons can be programmed to automatically dial internal or
external numbers. You can also program features onto CAP module buttons.
If you want more line buttons programmed, see your System Coordinator.
Your CAP module will be most effective if you use it along with the Call Park,
Transfer, Conference/Transfer, Camp-On, Message, or Voice Call features.
Make sure that these features are programmed on your CAP module buttons
by following the steps presented in this card.
User cards
Central Answering Position User Card 31
Programming
CAP module buttons
External
1. Replace the receiver.
2. Press
3. Press a CAP module button.
4. Dial the external number.
5. Press OK to store the number.
6. Label your new button.
Erasing memory buttons
1. Replace the receiver.
2. Press
.
3. Press the memory button you want
to erase.
4. Press OK to erase the button.
Internal
Replace the receiver.
2. Press
3. Press a CAP module button,
4. Dial the internal number.
5. Label your new button.
Features
Replace the receiver.
2. Press
3. Press a CAP module button.
4. Press
and the
feature code.
5. Label your new button.
Moving external line buttons
1. Replace the receiver.
2. Press
3. Press the line button which you
want to move.
4. Press the memory button on your
telephone or CAP module to
which you want the line moved.
5. Label your new button.
Monitoring Internal
Autodiai indicators
It is important that you pay attention to the indicators
beside the internal
buttons on your CAP module. This tells you the status of a
telephone when you answer an external call.
indicator appears:
An indicator appears:
l
l
When the telephone is active on
an internal or external line
OR
When the telephone is using the
Do Not Disturb feature.
The status of a
an Internal
l
l
When the telephone is idle
OR
When the telephone is ringing
OR
l
When the telephone has one or
more calls on hold, but is not
connected to any active calls.
telephone cannot be monitored by your CAP module if
button has not been programmed.
User cards
32
Central Answering Position User Card
Answering and
transferring a call
Most of the telephone calls which you deal with should involve the following
procedures:
Answer a call made from outside the
system.
2. Determine whom the call is for.
3. Check the status of the destination
telephone on the CAP module.
4. If the indicator is OFF, transfer the call to that telephone.
OR
If the indicator is ON, use the Send Message, Ring Again on Busy, or
Camp-On feature.
If your telephone has been assigned as a CAP in Configuration
programming, you can send up to 30 messages. If your telephone has
not been assigned as a CAP, you can send up to
Other
documents
User cards
Please be sure to read your
Telephone User Card and your
Prime Telephone User Card (if applicable). They contain information
features more effectively with your CAP.
which should help you to use
telemanuals.com
telemanuals.com
Glossary
Glossary
A
Access code: A sequence of
characters used to gain entry into
system
any type of
programming.
Administration: A program that lets
one person in your office (the
System Coordinator) assign and
maintain certain settings on the
system.
Administration access code: To
enter Administration programming,
enter:
will be asked for an Administration
password.
Administration password: A one to
six-digit password which is used to
prevent unauthorized access to
Administration programming. The
Administration password can be
assigned and changed in
Administration programming.
Alarm code: A number which
appears on the Alarm Telephone’s
display, informing you that the KSU
has detected a fault in the system.
Alarm Set (Alarm Telephone): A
telephone which is designated to
system
receive reports of
problems. This function is usually
assigned to a Prime Telephone, but
this can be changed in Configuration
programming.
Analog Terminal Adapter
A
device which permits the connection
of analog telecommunication
devices such as FAX machines,
answering machines, and single line
system.
telephones to the
Programmed defaults for the
are automatically assigned by the
system.
Answer button: A telephone button
with an indicator which is used to
monitor another telephone. The
Answer button indicates incoming
calls destined for the other
telephone. Someone working at a
telephone with Answer buttons (a
receptionist, for example) can
receive all ringing and visual
indication of incoming calls for other
telephones, and answer those calls
when necessary.
One telephone can have up to four
Answer buttons. An Answer button is
automatically assigned to a
telephone when that telephone is
assigned an Answer DN.
Answer DN: The Directory Number
(DN) of a telephone that is
monitored by an Answer button. Up
can be assigned
to four Answer
to a telephone. This is done in
Configuration programming.
Answer mode: In Configuration
programming, this subheading
allows you to set the way which
system will answer
the
incoming calls on loop start and
E&M trunks. The alternatives are
manual and auto.
Glossary
telemanuals.com
2
Glossary
Answer with DISA: In Configuration
programming, this subheading
allows you to set whether an
answer trunk will be answered with
Direct Inward System Access.
Automatic Hold: A feature which
automatically places an active call
on hold when you select another
line. Automatic Hold is assigned in
Configuration programming.
button: A memory button
which, if programmed, provides
touch dialing of external or internal
Automatic Privacy: See Privacy.
Auto-answer trunk: A trunk on
which calls are answered by the
system. The system either routes
the call to a target line, or provides
system dial tone or stuttered dial
tone (see Remote Access). How the
call is handled is determined by the
received digits which are all or part
of the telephone number used to dial
the call. See Manual-answer trunk.
Auto DN: The received number
system dial
assigned to
tone. If a caller using an
answer trunk calls a number which is
assigned as the Auto DN, the caller
hears system dial tone and can use
Remote Access features. See
Remote Access. The Auto DN is
assigned in Configuration
programming.
Automatic Dial: A feature that
allows you to dial without having to
pick up the receiver or select a line.
You must have a prime line to use
Automatic Dial.
Automatic Handsfree: A feature
which automatically activates
Handsfree operation when you make
or answer a call. Automatic
Handsfree is assigned in
Administration programming.
Glossary
Automatic Telephone Relocation:
A feature which lets a telephone
retain its personal and system
programming when it is plugged into
a different
modular jack.
Automatic telephone relocation is
enabled in Configuration
programming.
Auxiliary ringer: A separate
external telephone ringer or bell
which can be programmed to ring
when a line or a telephone rings. An
auxiliary ringer may be programmed
to ring only when the system is in a
particular service mode.
Programming of an auxiliary ringer is
done in both Administration and
Configuration programming.
B
Background Music: A feature
which lets you hear music from the
telephone. It
speaker of your
is available only if a music source
has been attached to the KSU.
Background music is set up in
Configuration programming.
B channels: The
and the
channels are paths for transmitting
digital voice or data. Each
number has one
DN and one B2
DN associated with it.
telemanuals.com
Glossary
Busy Lamp Field (BLF): A device
with a liquid crystal display (LCD)
panel of indicators that shows the
status of up to 24 telephones in the
system. The BLF will show a
telephone as busy if it is active on a
call, has Do Not Disturb turned ON,
or is being used for programming.
The BLF attaches to the M7310
Telephone.
Button caps: Interchangeable
plastic caps which fit over the
telephones. They
buttons of
are used to indicate the features
programmed onto each
programmable memory button.
Button caps are either pre-printed or
have clear windows which allow you
to label the buttons.
Button Inquiry: With this feature
you can check the function of each
programmable button on your
telephone.
Bypass Restrictions: Overrides
any Call Restrictions applied to
specific System Speed Dial
numbers. Bypass Restrictions can
be turned on in Administration
programming.
C
Callback: If you park, camp, or
transfer a call to another telephone
and it is not answered there, it will
ring again at your telephone. How
long the system will wait before
Callback occurs is set in
Configuration programming.
Call Forward: With this feature you
can have all the calls arriving at your
telephone forwarded to another
telephone in your
system.
To have calls forwarded outside the
system, use Line Redirection.
Call Forward No Answer: A feature
which forwards all calls arriving at
your telephone to another
designated telephone in your
system after a specific
number of rings. Call Forward
Answer is assigned in Administration
programming.
Call Forward On Busy: A feature
which forwards all calls at your
telephone to another designated
telephone if your telephone is busy.
This feature is assigned in
Administration programming.
Call Handling: In Configuration
programming, this heading covers a
number of settings which affect how
system handles calls.
the
Call Park: With this feature you can
place a call on hold so that someone
can retrieve it from any other
system by
telephone in the
selecting an internal line and
entering a retrieval code. The
retrieval code appears on the display
of your telephone when you park the
call. You can park up to nine calls on
the system at one time.
Call Park Callback: See Callback.
Glossary
4
Glossary
Call Park prefix: The first digit of the
retrieval code of a parked call. This
digit cannot conflict with the first digit
Line Pool
of any existing
access codes, the Direct-dial digit, or
the external line access code. The
default Call Park prefix digit is
It
may be set to none, in which case
Call Park is disabled. Call Park
prefix is assigned in Configuration
programming.
Call Pickup Directed: A feature
which lets you answer a call ringing
at any
telephone by entering
the internal number of that telephone
before taking the call. Call Pickup
Directed is activated in Configuration
programming.
Call Pickup Group: See Pickup
Group.
Call Queuing: If you have several
calls waiting at your telephone, you
can invoke the Call Queuing feature
to answer them in order of priority.
Priority is given to incoming calls,
followed by callback and camped
calls.
Camp-On: A feature which lets you
re-route a call to a telephone even if
all the lines on that telephone are
busy. To answer a camped call, use
Call Queuing or select a line if the
camped call appears on your
telephone. Priority is given to
queued calls over camped calls.
Camp timeout: In Configuration
programming, this subheading lets
you set the length of a delay before
a camped call is returned to the
telephone which camped the call.
Glossary
Capabilities: In Administration
programming, this section heading
covers the dialing filters, remote
access packages, set abilities, and
line abilities which can be assigned
lines, telephones, or
to
Class of Service passwords.
CAP assignment: In Configuration
programming, this subheading sets
telephones are
which
Central Answering Positions. Up to
five Central Answering Positions can
be installed in a single
system.
Central Answering Position (CAP):
A CAP is an M7324 telephone which
has been designated a CAP in
Configuration programming. The
CAP provides backup answering
and can be used to monitor the
system.
telephones within a
One or two CAP modules can be
attached to a CAP to increase the
number of lines it can handle.
Central Answering Pdsition (CAP)
module: A CAP module is
connected to an M7324 telephone to
provide 48 additional buttons which
buttons or
can be used as
Feature buttons. A maximum of two
CAP modules can be connected to a
single M7324 Telephone.
template: This is one of the
system templates. The
template assigns one
unique external line to each
telephone until the maximum
number of lines is reached
(example: Line 001 to telephone
2221, Line 002 to telephone 2222,
and so on). Any remaining
telephones do not receive a default
line assignment.
four
.
Glossary 5
Class of Service (COS): The set of
features and lines available
to the user for a call. The Class of
Service for a call is determined by
the Dialing Filters and Remote
Access Packages assigned to the
telephone in Administration
programming. Class of Service for a
call can be changed by entering a
six digit Class of Service password.
(Internal users cannot change their
access to features with a COS
password, only their dialing filters.)
Class of Service and Class of
Service passwords are assigned in
Administration programming. See
Remote Access.
Class of Service password: See
Class of Service.
Configuration: A type of
programming usually performed by
the installer or service
representative. It establishes the
basic operation of trunks, lines,. and
system.
telephones in a
Configuration access code: To
start Configuration programming,
enter:
You must also enter an installer
password before you can perform
Configuration programming.
Control Telephone: A Control
Telephone can place the lines for
which it has responsibility in or out of
a Service Mode. The Direct-dial
Telephone is a Control Telephone
for directing calls to the Extra
dial Telephone. A telephone is made
a Control telephone and has lines
assigned to it in Administration
programming.
COS: See Class of Service.
Cursor: A short horizontal line which .
telephone
appears on the
display to indicate that characters
can be entered using the dial pad.
D
Data Communications interface: A
device which lets you attach
data device to your
an
system.
Data terminal: A device such as a
modem which can be used to
transfer data instead of sound over a
telephone network. You cannot use
programming to set up such
devices. See the documentation that
came with the device.
Date: See Show Time or Time and
Date.
DCI: See Data Communications
Interface.
Defaults: The settings for all
features when the system is first
installed. Defaults are determined by
the template chosen at startup.
Settings are changed from their
defaults in Configuration and
Administration programming. In this
manual, default settings are shown
in bold text.
Glossary
6
Glossary
Delayed Ring Transfer (DRT) to
Prime: After a specified number of
rings, this feature transfers an
unanswered call on an external line,
to the Prime Telephone associated
with that line. This feature is
activated in Configuration
programming.
Dialing filter: Through a
combination of restrictions and
exceptions, dialing filters prevent
certain telephone numbers from
being dialed. Dialing filters can be
applied to lines (line filters, remote
filters), to sets (set filters), to specific
lines on a set (line/set filters), and to
Class of Service passwords (user
filters, remote filters). The
system can handle up to 100 dialing
filters.
Dial mode: The dialing mode of a
line can be either Tone or Pulse.
Pulse is traditionally used by rotary
dial telephones. Tone is also
referred to as dual tone
multifrequency (DTMF) tones. Dial
mode can be changed in
Configuration programming.
DID trunk (Direct inward dialing
trunk): A trunk which permits a
caller who dials a particular number
to be connected directly to a target
system. This
line in the
enables a caller to reach someone in
your office without having to go
through the receptionist. A DID trunk
may also connect the caller to the
DN. A DID
Auto DN or the
trunk is used for incoming calls only.
See Trunk and Target Line.
Glossary
Direct-dial: A feature which lets you
dial a designated telephone in your
system with a single digit. As
many as five direct dial sets can be
established. Each telephone in the
system is assigned to one Direct-dial
telephone. There is a single, system
wide digit for calling the assigned
Direct-dial telephone of any
telephone. Direct-dial telephones are,
established in Administration
programming. Telephones are
assigned to a Direct-dial telephone
in Administration programming.
Direct-dial In Configuration
programming, this subheading sets
the system wide digit used to call a
direct dial telephone.
Direct-dial number: The digit used
to call the Direct-dial telephone.
Direct Inward Dialing trunk: See
DID trunk.
Direct Inward System Access
(LISA): The feature which lets
remote users dial directly into the
system and use
features. Callers will hear stuttered
dial tone and will be required to
enter a Class of Service password to
gain access to the system. See
Remote Access.
Directed Pickup: See Call Pickup
Directed.
.
Glossary 7
Directory Number (DN): A unique
number which is automatically
assigned to each telephone or data
terminal. The DN, also referred to as
an internal number, is often used to
identify a telephone when settings
are assigned during programming.
Default DN assignments start at 21
in a two-digit (non-expanded)
system and 221 in a three-digit
(expanded) system.
Directory Number (DN) length: The
number of digits in a Directory
Number. A non-expanded system
can have a DN length of two to
seven digits. An expanded system (a
system with an Expansion Cartridge
installed) can have a DN length of
three to seven digits. All Directory
Numbers for the system must be the
same length. The default DN length
is two digits for a non-expanded
system and three digits for an
expanded system. The DN length
Externally
affects only internal
received numbers, including
received numbers for Target lines
, are
and the Auto and
governed by the Received Digit
Length setting.
DISA: See Direct Inward System
Access.
DN: The received number
Direct
assigned to the
Inward System Access facility. If a
caller dials a number which is
DN, the caller
assigned to the
hears stuttered dial tone and must
enter a Class of Service Password.
Once the password is accepted, the
caller hears system dial tone and
can use Remote Access features.
See Remote Access.
Disconnect Supervision: When
disconnect supervision is assigned
system
to a line, the
monitors the line to detect when an
external caller hangs up. This allows
the system to release the line for
other uses. Disconnect supervision
is assigned in Configuration
programming.
Display: A liquid crystal display .
telephone that
(LCD) on the
guides you through feature operation
and programming.
Display button: The
M7310
Telephone and M7324 Telephone
are each equipped with three
buttons located directly beneath the
display. During feature operation or
programming, some or all of these
buttons may be used to provide
further options. If an option is
available, it is shown in the bottom
row of the two row display, directly
above the corresponding display
button. Display buttons are
represented in this manual as
underlined capital, e.g.
Display digits: In Administration
programming, this subheading lets
you set whether an assigned name
or the actual number will be
displayed when someone uses a
system speed dial code.
DN: See Directory Number.
DRT delay: The number of rings
before a Delayed Ring Transfer
occurs. This is assigned in
Configuration programming.
DRT to Prime: See Delayed Ring
Transfer to Prime.
Glossary
8 Glossary
External call: A call to a destination
system.
outside the
E&M trunk: A trunk through which
system connects to a
the
private telephone network. An E&M
tie trunk can be used for both
incoming and outgoing calls. E&M
are supported only on an
system.
End-to-End Signaling: See Host
System Signalling.
Emergency Telephone: A single
line telephone (also referred to as a
telephone) that becomes
active when there is no power to the
Key Service Unit.
Event message: Event messages
are stored in the system log and
displayed during a Maintenance
session. They record a variety of
events and activities in the
system.
Exceptions: One component of a
Dialing filter. Exceptions are
numbers you can dial even if they
are forbidden by a more general
Restriction. See Restrictions.
Expanded system: A
system with an Expansion Cartridge.
Expansion Cartridge: A cartridge
which connects Trunk modules and
Expansion modules to the Key
Service Unit. Expansion Cartridges
are available with two or six ports.
Expansion module: Either a Trunk
Module or a Station Module. See
Trunk Module, Station Module, and
Expansion Cartridge.
Glossary
External Call Forward: See Line
Redirection.
External code: The number you dial
to get an external line. By default it is
9, but this can be changed in
Configuration programming. You do
not always need an external code. It
is primarily to support the M7100
Telephone and single line
telephones using an Analog
Terminal Adapter.
External line: A line on your
telephone used for making calls to
destinations outside the
system.
External music source: See Music
source.
External paging: A feature you can
use to make voice announcements
over an externally-mounted
loudspeaker connected to the Key
Service Unit. The external speaker is
component and must
not a
be supplied by the customer.
Extra-Dial set: In Administration
programming, this heading lets you
assign an extra Direct-dial set when
a service mode is active. You can
have one Extra-Dial set for each of
the three service modes.
Glossary 9
F
G
button: Many
features are invoked by pressing the
Feature button followed by a Feature
code. The feature button is also
used to exit a feature.
Gain: In Configuration programming,
this subheading lets you change the
transmission level for signals on an
E&M trunk.
Feature Cartridge: A replaceable
cartridge containing the
features. The Feature Cartridge, a
combination of a Data Cartridge and
a Software Cartridge, is inserted into
the Key Service Unit.
Feature code: A number that is
used to activate a particular feature.
Forward: See Call Forward.
Forward delay: The number of rings
before an unanswered call is
forwarded to another telephone
when the Call Forward No Answer
feature is ON. Forward delay is
assigned in Administration
programming.
Forward No Answer: See Call
Forward No Answer.
Forward On Busy: See Call
Forward On Busy.
(on idle line): When
this feature is ON, if you select an
available line, and then do
something which selects another
line, the first line is put on hold.
Full Handsfree: See Handsfree.
Group Listening: A feature which
allows you to have others in your
office hear a caller through your
phone’s speaker. The caller
you only when you speak into the
receiver and cannot hear other
people in the office:
H
Handsfree: A feature you can use to
make calls without using the
telephone receiver. Full Handsfree is
activated in Administration
programming. When it is activated, a
button is
automatically assigned to the
telephone.
Handsfree (HF) Answerback:
When activated, this feature
automatically turns ON the
microphone at a telephone receiving
a Voice Call so that the person
receiving the call can respond
without lifting the receiver. It is
activated in Administration
programming.
button: See
H a n d s f r e e .
Headset: A head-mounted or
mounted telephone receiver that is
used instead of the hand-held
receiver. Headsets are not
components and must be supplied
by the customer.
Glossary
10
Glossary
Held (Line) Reminder: A
telephone rings and displays the
11 when an
message He 1 d
external call has been placed on
hold for a certain period of time. The
Held Line Reminder feature and
Remind delay are set up in
Configuration programming.
Hybrid template: One of the four
system templates. In the
Hybrid template, Line 001 appears
on each telephone, and each
telephone has access to Line Pool
A. The template is assigned in
System Startup.
HF Answerback: See Handsfree
Answerback.
Hold button: This button is used to
suspend calls so that the person
using the telephone can perform
another task without disconnecting
the caller.
Hookswitch Flash: See Link time.
Host delay: This feature allows you
to assign the delay between the
moment an external line is selected
to make a call and the moment that
digits or codes are dialed out on the
line. The Host delay time is assigned
in Configuration programming.
Host System Signaling: (Also
referred to as End-to-End Signaling.)
telephones can access a
remote system or dial a number on
an alternate carrier by means of
Host feature activation, such as Link,
Pause and Run/Stop.
Hotline: This feature automatically
calls a pre-assigned number when
the telephone’s receiver is lifted or
button is
the
pressed. A Hotline number can be
an internal or external number.
Hotline is assigned in Administration
programming.
An abbreviation of Intercom
button. This appears in
Configuration programming.
Individual
In Configuration
programming, this sub-heading is
used to change the internal number
telephone.
of a
Installer: Someone who installs the
equipment, and performs
System Startup and Configuration
programming. The Installer or the
System Coordinator can program
Administration settings.
Installer password: A 1 to 6 digit
password used to prevent
unauthorized access to
Configuration programming. The
default Installer password can be
changed in Configuration
programming.
Intercom button: A button which
provides access to internal lines
used for calls within a
system and access to external lines
through a Line Pool or external
code. A telephone may be assigned
zero to eight Intercom buttons. This
is done in Configuration
programming.
Intercom keys: See Intercom
button.
Glossary
Glossary 11
Internal line: A line on your
telephone dedicated to making calls
to destinations inside your
system. An internal line may still
connect you with an external caller if
you use it to access a line pool or to
pick up a call using
call
handling features such as Call Park
or Call Pickup Directed.
Internal number: A number (also
referred to as a Directory Number or
DN) that identifies a
telephone or device.
Internal user: Someone using a
telephone within a
system.
K
Key Service Unit (KSU): The
central hardware component in the
system. The KSU has its
own processor and memory, and
provides a physical point of
connection for the various types of
devices, telephones, and expansion
The KSU
modules used in
can function on its own as a basic
telephones
system (with 24
and 8 external lines), or with the
addition of a Trunk Module (TM)
which supports more external lines,
or a Station Module (SM) which
telephones.
supports more
L
Line: The complete path of a voice
or data connection between one
telephone (or other device) and
another.
Line abilities: In Administration
programming, the heading under
which you assign Line Filters,
Remote Filters, and Remote Access
Packages to lines.
Line Access: In Configuration
programming, the heading under
which you assign an individual
telephone’s access to lines.
Line assignment: In Configuration
programming, the subheading under
which you define which lines are
accessible to an individual
telephone.
Line Data: In Configuration
programming, the heading under
which you assign certain settings of
individual lines.
Line filter: See Dialing filter.
Line names: In Administration
programming, this sub-heading
allows you to assign names to
external lines.
Line number: A number which
identifies an external line. The total
number of lines depends on how
many Trunk Modules are installed
and the number of Target lines.
Line Pool: A group of lines used for
making external calls. Line Pools
provide an efficient way of giving a
telephone access to external lines
without taking up many line buttons.
A line is assigned to be a member of
a Line Pool in Configuration
programming.
Glossary
12
Glossary
Line Pool access: In Configuration
programming, the sub-heading
under which you assign the Line
Pools that a telephone may access.
Line Pool access code: A number
that identifies a Line Pool. Line Pool
access codes are assigned in
programming.
Line Pool codes: See Line Pool
access codes.
Link time: A specific time delay that
allows access to PBX features
system. Link time
through a
is also referred to as a “Hookswitch
Flash” or “Recall”. Link time is
assigned in Configuration
programming.
Loop Start Trunk: A type of
telephone trunk that provides a
connection to the public telephone
network.
Line Profile: A feature you can use
to review the settings programmed
to lines in Configuration and
Administration programming. The
settings cannot be changed with this
feature. Line profile is available only
on the M7310 and M7324
telephones.
Loop Start Trunk Cartridge: This
cartridge, when inserted into the
Trunk Module, provides the
connection to lines. See Trunk
Cartridge.
Line Redirection: A feature which
allows you to redirect all calls on an
incoming line to a destination
system. Once a
outside the
line is redirected it cannot be
system.
answered within the
The system may be set up to give a
brief ring when a call comes in on a
redirected line. This feature differs
from Call Forward in two ways. It
redirects only external calls (not
internal calls) and it redirects calls to
destinations outside the system. Call
forward redirects calls only to
destinations inside the
system. See Call Forward and
Redirect Ring.
Telephone: A telephone with
a single line display and one
programmable memory button
without an indicator.
Line type: in Configuration
programming, this setting controls
whether a line is Public, Private, or a
member of a Line Pool.
Glossary
M
M7208 Telephone: A telephone with
a single line display and eight
programmable memory buttons with
indicators.
Telephone: A telephone
which has a two line display, three
display buttons, 10 programmable
memory buttons with indicators, and
12 dual memory programmable
buttons without indicators. An
M7310 can be equipped with a Busy
Lamp Field.
M7324 Telephone: A telephone
a two line display, three display
buttons, and 24 programmable
memory buttons with indicators. An
M7324 telephone can be equipped
with a CAP module.
.
Glossary
13
M7900 Telephone: A telephone with
a touch screen display which
replaces the display and memory
telephones.
buttons of other
It provides simplified access to
Features and an interface to
computer driven applications.
Music source: A radio or other
source of music can be connected to
.
the Key Service Unit to provide
music for the Music on Hold and
Background Music features. A music
source is not part of the
system and must be supplied by the
customer.
Maintenance: A type of
programming you can use to
diagnose and repair problems in the
system. Maintenance
requires no programmable settings.
N
Manual-answer trunk: A trunk on
which calls are not automatically
system, but
answered by the
ring at telephones in the usual way.
See Auto-answer Trunk.
Memory buttons: Buttons which
can be programmed to dial
frequently used features or numbers
M7208,
automatically. See
M7310, M7324 and M7900
telephone entries for their exact
memory button configurations.
Message: If you call someone in
system and their
your
telephone is busy, you can send
them a message indicating that you
called.
Miscellaneous: A section heading
in Configuration programming that
has a collection of assorted
wide settings.
Names: Names can be assiqned’to
System Speed Dial
external lines, telephones, and
Service Modes. This is done in
Administration programming. You
can use up to sixteen characters to
name a System Speed Dial number,
and seven characters to name a
telephone, line, or Service Mode.
If a Name has not been assigned,
the line number or DN will appear on
the display instead of a Name.
Night Service: See Service Modes.
Programming Overlay: A
paper template which is placed over
the top four memory buttons with
indicators on the M7310 or M7324
Telephone during programming. The
overlay labels indicate the special
function that each of the four buttons
takes on in programming.
0
On hold: In Configuration
programming, this setting controls
whether external callers hear music,
periodic tones, or silence when they
are placed on hold.
Overlay: See
Overlay.
Programming
Glossary
14
Glossary
P
Page: A feature you can use to
make announcements over the
system. You can choose
Internal Page (announce over the
telephone speakers), External Page
(announce over an
mounted, customer-supplied
loudspeaker), or both Internal and
External Page.
Page Zone: An area in the office
that receives internal Page
announcements independently of
the rest of the office. Each Page
Zone is identified by a number.
Telephones are assigned to Page
Zones in Administration
programming.
Park prefix: See Call park prefix.
Park timeout: The time before an
unanswered parked call calls back to
the telephone which parked it. Park
timeout is defined in Configuration
programming. See Call Park.
Password: A password is a specific
sequence of digits that you enter to
gain access to
programming, to override dialing
restrictions, or to use Remote
Access with DISA. A password is
required for System Startup and
Configuration programming and may
be required for Administration
programming. See Class of Service
password.
Pause: A character which inserts a
1.5 second delay in a dialing
sequence on an external line.
Glossary
PBX template: See Private Branch
Exchange template.
Personal Speed Dial: Two-digit
codes (71-94) can be programmed
to dial external telephone numbers.
Personal Speed Dial numbers are
programmed for each telephone,
andcanbeusedonlyatthe
telephone on which they are
programmed.
Pickup Group: A telephone can be
placed into one of nine Call Pickup
a telephone
Groups. A call
within a Pickup Group can be picked
up at any other telephone within the
same Pickup Group. A telephone is
assigned to a Pickup Group in
Administration programming.
Pool: See Line Pool.
Port number: The identification
number of a specific point of
connection at the Key Service Unit,
Station Module, Trunk Module, or
Expansion Cartridge. KSU ports are
numbered 1 and 2. Expansion
module ports are numbered from 3
to 8. The numbering of Trunk and
Station module ports is dependant
upon the KSU or Expansion Module
port into which they are plugged.
Pre-dial: A feature that allows you to
enter a number and check it on your
telephone display before it is actually
dialed. If the number is incorrect,
you can edit it. The number is dialed
only when you pick up the receiver
or select a line.
Glossary
Prime line: The line on your
telephone which is automatically
selected when you lift the receiver,
button or
press the
use an external dialing feature. A
Prime Line is assigned to a
telephone in Configuration
programming.
Prime Set (Prime Telephone): A
telephone which provides backup
answering for incoming calls on
external lines. The Prime Telephone
for a line will ring for any
unanswered calls on that line. A
Prime Telephone is assigned to a
line in Configuration programming.
Priority Call: A feature you can use
to make a Voice call to a telephone
which is idle, busy or has Do Not
Disturb activated. This feature is
enabled for a telephone in
Administration programming.
Privacy: This feature determines
user may select a
whether a
line in use at another telephone and
join an established call. Privacy is
assigned in Configuration
programming, but can be turned ON
and OFF by users during individual
calls.
Private Branch Exchange
template: One of the four
System Startup templates. In the
Private Branch Exchange (PBX)
template, each telephone is
assigned access to the first Line
Pool.
Private network: A telephone
network consisting of owned or
leased telephone lines used to
connect different offices of an
organization independently of the
public network.
Private to: In Configuration
programming, this heading allows
you to assign a line to one telephone
as a Private line. The line cannot
appear on any other telephone,’
except the Prime Telephone for that
line. Private lines cannot be placed
into Line Pools.
Programming Overlay: See
Programming Overlay.
Programming reminders: Charts
on which you can record some
commonly-used settings from
Administration and Configuration
programming to keep the
system’s records up-to-date.
Programming: Setting the way the
system will work.
Programming includes system-wide
settings and individual telephone
and line settings.
Public line: An external line which
can be assigned to any telephone
and to many telephones. A line is
assigned as Public in Configuration
programming.
Public network: The regular
telephone network which connects
most homes and businesses.
Private line: See Private to.
Glossary
16
Glossary
R
Radio Frequency (RF) Filter Kit: A
device designed to alleviate
problems associated with radio
frequency interference that may-be
experienced when a headset or
external auxiliary ringer is used with
a telephone.
Recall: See Link time.
Rec’d #: In Configuration
programming, this heading allows
you to assign certain digits received
(that is, all or part of a
by
telephone number dialed by an
external caller or received over a
network link), to a particular target
line. This means that when an
external caller dials this number, the
target line will ring. Received digits
may also connect the call to the Auto
DN, establishing a
DN or the
Remote Access call.
Rec’d length: In Configuration
programming, the subheading which
allows you to set the number of
digits received from an external
source that will be used to route a
call to a target line.
Received digit length: See Rec’d #
length.
Received digits: See Rec’d #.
Receiver: The handset of a
telephone.
Glossary
Redirect ring: In Administration
programming, this subheading
allows you to set whether a line that
has been redirected through Line
Redirection will give a short ring on
those sets on which the line
appears.
Remind delay: When a call has
been on hold for a set period, the
telephone beeps and displays the
11. This period is
message He 1 d
the Remind delay. It is set in
Configuration programming.
Remote access: The ability to dial
system from outside
into a
the system and make use of
features. The lines,
selected
features, and dialing capabilities
available to a remote user are
determined by the Class of Service.
If the remote access line is
answered with DISA, the user must
enter a Class of Service password to
system’s
gain access to the
features.
Remote access dial filter: See
Remote filter.
Remote access package: In
Administration programming, this
subheading lets you set up access
to Paging and Line Pools for remote
users.
Remote capability: That subset of
features which is available to
users connected through remote
.
access.
Glossary
Remote filter: A dialing filter applied
to a line in order to control which
digits can be dialed during an
incoming remote access call. It is the
equivalent of a set filter for a remote
user.
Remote paging: This feature allows
remote users to use the
paging feature. Access to this
feature is governed by the Class of
Service for the call. See Remote
Access and Class of Service.
Remote User: Someone who calls
system from a
into a
telephone outside that system and
features or lines. See
uses
Remote Access.
Restrictions: One component of a
Dialing filter. Restrictions are
numbers you cannot dial when that
dialing filter is in effect. See
Exceptions.
Ringing: In Configuration
programming, the heading which lets
you assign a line to ring or not ring
at a telephone. If a line has been
assigned as “No ring”, an incoming
call is shown by a flashing indicator
only.
Ringing Sets (Ringing
Telephones): Those telephones
which have been assigned to ring
when a line has been placed into a
Service Mode. Ringing Telephones
are assigned in Administration
programming.
button: The Release button
ends a call in the same way that
hanging up the receiver does. It may
also be used to end Startup,
Configuration programming,
Administration programming,
Maintenance sessions and feature
operations.
Run/Stop: A character which
creates a breakpoint in a
programmed external dialing
sequence. When you press a
programmed key, the system dials
the number up to the run/stop. When
you press it again, the system dials
the digits following the run/stop.
S
SAPS: See Station Auxiliary Power
Selective line redirection:
Redirection
See Line
Service Modes: Certain features
become active when one or more
lines are placed into a Service
Mode. This is usually done to
provide special ringing and
telephone access after normal office
hours, or when there are few people
available to answer calls. Service
Modes settings are assigned in
Administration programming.
Set: A telephone.
Set ability: In Administration
programming, the subheading under
which set filters, line/set filters, and a
variety of system features are
assigned to individual telephones.
Glossary
18 Glossary
Set Copy: in Configuration
programming, Set Copy allows you
to copy programmable settings from
one telephone to another of the
same type. Set Copy provides two
options: duplicating System Data
and User Data, or duplicating
System Data only. Set Copy does
not provide the same copy capability
display button, which
as the
is more selective of the settings that
can be duplicated.
Shift button: A small triangular
button beside the dual memory
buttons on the upper half of the
Telephone. You press the
shift button to store or access
features on the top half of the dual
memory buttons.
Set filter: See Dialing filter.
Signal: In Configuration
programming, this subheading
allows you to change the type of
signaling used by an E&M or DID
trunk.
Set lock (Telephone lock): This
feature allows you to limit the
number of features that may be used
or programmed at a telephone. Full
set lock allows very few changes or
features, Partial set lock allows
some changes and features, and No
set lock allows any change to be
made and any feature to be used.
Set lock is assigned in
Administration programming.
Set Names: In Administration
programming, this sub-heading
allows you to assign Names of up to
seven characters to telephones.
Set Profile: A feature you can use to
review the settings programmed to
telephones in Configuration and
Administration programming. The
settings cannot be changed with this
feature. Set profile is available only
on the M7310 and M7324
telephones.
Set Relocation: See Automatic
Telephone Relocation.
Glossary
Show Time: While on a call,
accessing this feature lets you see
the current date and time on the
telephone display.
Square template: One of the four
system templates. In the
Square template, Lines 001 and 002
are assigned to each telephone. The
Square template is the default during
System Startup. All defaults shown
in bold in this manual are those of
the Square template.
Station: An individual telephone or
device.
other
Station Auxiliary Power Supply
(SAPS): A device which provides
telephone that is
power to a
connected more than 305 m
(1000 ft) and less than 760 m
(2500 ft) from the Key Service Unit,
or to a CAP module.
Station Module (SM): An expansion
module that allows you to connect
the
system to 16 more
telephones or other devices. See
Expansion Cartridge.
Glossary
Supervised line: A line for which
disconnect supervision is enabled. If
an external caller hangs up, the
system detects the
disconnection and hangs up its line
also. See Disconnect Supervision.
Supervision: In Configuration
programming, the subheading under
which you choose the time, in
milliseconds, before a line
disconnection is made on a
supervised line.
System Coordinator: The person
responsible for customizing the
system through
Administration programming and for
helping co-workers use the
system.
System Data: 1. An option in the
Set Copy function. System Data
refers to the system settings which
apply to all telephones and lines.
System Data consists of the
programmable settings from System
Startup, Configuration programming
and Administration programming.
2. In Configuration programming, the
heading under which you can
change various settings associated
with the directory numbers and
received numbers of the
system.
System Speed Dial: In
Administration programming, a
heading under which you can assign
up to 70 numbers as system speed
dial numbers.
19
System Speed Dial Code: A
digit code (01 to 70) that can be
programmed to dial a telephone
number up to 24 digits long. System
Speed Dial codes are programmed
system in
for the entire
Administration programming.
System Startup: When a
system is first installed and powered
up, System Startup must be
performed before Configuration or
Administration programming can be
done. Startup initializes the system
programming to defaults.
System Startup access code: To
enter:
be in S stem
An Installer password is required
before System Startup can begin.
T
Tandem call: A call established
when a remote user dials into the
system and uses the system
to place an outgoing call. The
combination of the incoming and
outgoing calls forms a tandem call.
See Remote Access.
Target line: A line dedicated to
receiving calls from outside the
system. Several Target
Lines, each identified by a different
received number, can be attached to
a single trunk. You cannot make
outgoing calls on a target line.
Target lines require DID or
answer trunks.
System Speed Dial Name: In
Administration programming, a
subheading under which you can
assign a name to a System Speed
Dial Number.
Glossary
20
Glossary
TCM line (Time Compression
Multiplexing line): A two-wire digital
station loop joining the
connect at the Key Service Unit to a
telephone.
Template: A system-wide setting
assigned during System Startup.
The most important effects of a
are the number of lines
assigned to the telephones, and the
assignment of Line Pool access.
Templates will also assign other
system-wide defaults, such as Prime
line and Ringing line assignment. It
is important to understand that a
template is provided only as a
convenience, and that any settings
affected by a template can be
changed. The four templates are
PBX, Hybrid, and Square.
Tie line: See E&M trunk.
Time: See Show Time or Time and
Date.
Time and Date: The current Time
and Date appear on the display of
telephones. The Time
idle
and Date can be changed in
Administration programming.
Transfer: A feature which lets you
redirect a call to another telephone.
There are four types of Transfer;
Transfer using Hold, Transfer with
Announcement, Transfer without
Announcement, and transfer using
Unsupervised Conference.
Transfer Callback: If a transferred
call is not answered after a specific
number of rings, the call will return to
the telephone which made the
transfer. The number of rings can be
assigned in Configuration
programming. Transfer Callback
does not apply to calls transferred
externally.
data: In Configuration
programming, the heading under
which the capabilities and
characteristics of the
system’s lines and trunks are
established.
Trunk: The physical connection
system and the
between the
outside world using either the public
telephone system or a private
network. One trunk may provide
connections for several lines. See
Auto-answer trunk and
answer trunk.
Trunk Answer: A feature you can
use to answer a call on any line that
has an active Service Mode, even if
that line does not appear on your
telephone. Trunk Answer is enabled
in Administration programming.
Trunk Cartridge (TC): A Trunk
Cartridge is inserted into a Trunk
Module and provides connections for
lines. Up to three cartridges can be
used in one Trunk Module.
Depending on your system and your
needs, you may have any
combination of Loop Start, DID or
E&M Trunk Cartridges.
Trunk data: In Configuration
programming, the subheading under
which you set how the trunks of the
system will operate.
Glossary
Glossary
Trunk mode: In Configuration
programming, the heading under
which you assign the mode of
operation for a Loop Start trunk.
There are two modes, supervised
and unsupervised. See Disconnect
Supervision.
Trunk Module (TM): An expansion
module that provides up to 12
additional external trunks, depending
on the number and type of Trunk
Cartridges installed. See Expansion
Cartridge.
Voice Call: A feature vou can use to
make an announcement or begin a
conversation through the speaker of
another telephone in the
system. The telephone you call will
not ring. Instead, the person you call
will hear a beep and then your voice.
Their telephone will beep
periodically to remind them that their
microphone is open.
U
Unsupervised line: A line for which
disconnect supervision is disabled. If
an external caller hangs up, the
system does not detect the
disconnection and does not hang up
its line. See Disconnect Supervision.
User Data: User Data is an option in
the Set Copy feature. User Data
refers to the personal settings which
are unique to an individual
telephone, and are not programmed
in Configuration or Administration
programming. User Data is
programmed at each telephone.
These settings, for example, include
Personal Speed Dial and the
assignment of programmable
memory buttons.
Filter: See Dialing filter.
Glossary
telemanuals.com
telemanuals.com
Index 1
Answer Button
Answering machine 2-2
A
Access Code
external line 5-37
description 2-2
Long tones 5-63
5-68
buttons 5-68
feature description 5-l 2
Host System Signaling 5-14
losing data after power
failure
3
denied
Conference 5-27
Line Redirection 5-59
Speed dial 5-83
Using
features 5-3
Accidental Disconnect Protection
5-85
Administration
Capabilities
Class of Service
Passwords 4-51
Line Abilities 4-48
Remote Access
Packages 4-29
Telephone
Abilities
4-31
Dialing filters 4-23
Direct-Dial 4-l 9
Names 4-11
overview 4-1, 4-21
Password 4-68
programming 4-69
programming 4-21
Programming reminders
4-70
saving changes 4-4
Service Modes 4-57
System Speed Dial 4-5
Time and Date 4-15
Alarm telephone
description 5-77
joined
Call Pickup 5-21
Dialing 5-40
Parked
Park 5-18
Analog Terminal Adapter (see
Answerback
4-37
full
5 - 1 2
Speed dial 5-83
Automatic Dial 5-31
Automatic Handsfree 5-30
programming 4-37
Automatic Start time
programming 4-62
Automatic Stop time
programming 4-63
Automatic telephone relocation
5-85
Auxiliary power supply 2-l 8
Auxiliary Ringer
programming 4-39
Service Modes 4-65
B
Background Music 5-85
BLF
description 2-2
Blocking calls 4-52
Busy Lamp Field (see BLF)
Busy status 2-2, 2-5
Button caps
installation 3-23
erased
5-l 2
Button
Inquiry
feature description 5-45
Buttons
Answer 5-67
DR4 System Coordinator Guide
telemanuals.com
2
Index
5-68
erasing programming 5-45
Feature 5-67, 5-68
Hold 5-67
indicators 5-6
Line 5-68
Memory 5-67
Release 5-69
Volume 5-69
Cable troughs
description 2-2
Cables 2-7
blacked
Priority call 5-73
Call forward
feature description 5-15
No Answer 4-41, 5-l 5
On Busy 4-40, 5-15
Override
15
Call Park 5-6
feature description 5-18
Call Pickup 5-6
assigning groups 5-22
feature description 5-20
priority of alerting calls 5-22
Call Pickup (group)
programming 4-38
Call Queuing 5-5
priority of alerting calls 5-22
Call Timer 5-90
Callback 5-5
Calls
Incoming
1
denied
Camp on 5-23
Camp On
Call Queuing 5-24
feature description 5-23
ringing 5-7
Can’t
Dialing
DR4
Coordinator Guide
Can’ t
Message 5-65
Cancel
a feature 5-4
denied
Message 5-65
Cancel
Message 5-65
CAP module 5-78
Capabilities
copying data 3-14
Dialing filters 4-23
Line filters 4-55
programming 4-21
Remote filters 4-56
User filter 4-54
Cartridges
DID 2-20
E
2-20
Expansion 2-8
Data 2-9
Feature 2-9
Loop Start 2-20
Software 2-9
Central Answering Position (see
CAP module)
Class of Service 5-86, 5-98
Class of Service
copying data 4-53
for internal users 4-52
Line filter 4-55
number of 4-53
overview 4-51
passwords (see COS
passwords)
Remote package 4-56
security 4-52
upgrading from DR3 4-53
User filter 4-54
DN 4-51
with
Code
external line 5-37
Line Pools 5-56
telemanuals.com
index 3
Conference
feature description 5-25
on M7100 telephone 5-28
transferring 5-26
with Privacy 5-25
Conference
Conference 5-27
Configuration 5-86
Contrast Adjustment 5-30
Control telephone 5-78
assigning to lines 4-58
programming 4-59
programming settings 3-12
COS Line filters (see Line filters
COS passwords 4-51
changing 5-29
feature description 5-29
programming 4-53
Remote Packages (see
Remote Packages (COS))
Customizing the. telephone
Contrast Adjustment 5-30
Dialing modes 5-31
Handsfree 5-30
Language 5-32
moving line buttons 5-33
Pulse/Tone Dialing 5-34
ringing 5-35
D
Data Cartridge 2-9
Data Communications Interface
programming 4-l 5
DCI
description 2-6
Defaults
Dialing filters 4-24
Delay
Call Forward No Answer
4-42
Delayed Ring Transfer 5
Denied in admin
Call Pickup 5-21
Line Pools 56
Priority call 5-73
Service modes 5-75
Dial-0 (see Direct-Dial)
Dial-O Telephone (see Direct-Dial
Telephones)
Dialing
Direct-Dial 5-37
pulse or tone 5-34
restrictions 4-23
unrestricted 4-24
Dialing filters 4-23
defaults 4-24
deleting 4-26
number of 4-24
programming 4-27
Dialing Modes
Automatic 5-31
Pre-Dial 5-32
Standard 5-3 1
DID trunk cartridge
description 2-20
Direct-Dial
programming 4-l 9
Direct-Dial telephone 5-78
programming 4-40
Directed Pickup
feature description 5-20
Directory Numbers 5-86
description 5-98
Disconnect protection 5-85
Disconnect Supervision 5-87
Display
one-line
5-2
Prime telephone 5-l 0
Time and Date 4-16
two-line 5-2
DR4 System Coordinator Guide
telemanuals.com
4 Index
DND (see Do Not Disturb)
6,
Do Not Disturb 5-6, 5-9,
5-92
feature description 5-43
DS-30 cables
description 2-7
DTMF lines
Line Profile 3-30
__ E
E
M lines
Line Profile 3-28
Restrictions 4-32
E
trunk cartridge
description 2-20
Emergency calls
Priority call 5-73
Emergency telephone 5-79
Enter
Speed dial 5-83
Enter
Page 5-72
Exceptions
programming 4-28
removing 4-25
Exclusive Hold 5-51
feature description 5-51
Exceptions in a Dialing filter 4-24
Expansion Cartridge
Two-port 2-8
Six-port 2-8
Extension numbers (see
Directory Numbers)
External call
ringing 5-7
External lines
Access Code 5-37
Line/telephone filter 4-33
Extra-Dial telephone 5-79
programming 4-65
F
FAX machine 2-2
Feature
cancelling 5-4
overview 5-2
programming 5-45
Restrictions 4-34
Feature Button 5-67
Feature Cartridge 2-9
Feature
Using
features 5-3
Filters
Capabilities 4-23
Dialing 4-23
Line 4-48
Line with COS 4-55
Line/telephone 4-33
Remote Access dialing 4-49
Telephone 4-32
User 4-54
Forward denied
Call forward 5-l 6
Forwarding (see also Call
Forward)
Call forward No Answer 4-41
Call Forward On Busy 4-40
Full Handsfree
programming 4-36
G
Get call first
Call Park 5-18
Group Listen
feature description 5-48
Group Pickup
feature description 5-20
H
Handsfree
Automatic 4-37
DR4 System Coordinator Guide
,
timeout
telemanuals.com
Index 5
etiquette
Full Handsfree 4-36
Handsfree Answerback 4-37
5-6
feature description 5-49
Headset
answering a call
Full Handsfree 4-36
operating 5-69
Hold
description 5-51
Listen on hold 5-51
music, tones or silence 5-52
on M7100 telephone 5-52
Hold Button 5-67
Hold or r e l e a s e
Feature programming 5-47
Host System Signaling 5-53
Link 5-53
Pause 5-53
Programmed Release 5-54
Run/Stop 5-54
Timed Release 5-54
Hotline
programming 4-44
Hotline telephone 5-79
Hung lines
releasing 5-87
I
Invalid location
Customizing your telephone
5-34
Invalid
Page 5-72
K
Key Service Unit 2-10, 5-86
L
Language choice 5-32
Last Number Redial
feature description 5-37
Line
buttons 5-68
moving 5-33
hung 5-87
indicators on telephones 5-6
Line Profile 3-28
Names
3
Prime 5-88
Private 5-88
ringing preference 5-89
Target 5-89
Line Abilities
Line Filter 4-48
programming 4-48
Remote Filter 4-49
Remote Package 4-50
Idle display 4-16
Line denied
Incoming
Call Pickup 5-21
Line redirection 5-59
Line filter 4-23
defaults 4-48
programming 4-49
Line filters (COS)
defaults 4-55
programming 4-55
Line Pool
feature description 5-56
Hotline 4-43
preventing access 4-52
Line redirection 5-59
Indicators 5-6
Installation
Button caps 3-23
Internal call
ringing 5-7
Internal numbers (see Directory
Numbers)
Invalid
Using
features 5-3
DR4 System Coordinator Guide
6
Index
Ring Again 5-57
System Speed Dial 4-7
Line Redirection
Call forward No Answer 4-41
Redirect Ring 4-42
Line/telephone filter
programming 4-34
number of 4-33
Line data
copying 3-13
i n
Hotline
line Profile 3-24
Line Redirection
6
feature description 5-58
Line Supervision 5-87
Link 5-53
feature description 5-53
Listen on Hold 5-51
Long Tones
feature description 5-63
Loop Start lines
Profile 3-28
Loop Start trunk cartridge
description 2-20
M
telephone
conferencing 5-28
description 2-11
display button equivalent 5-2
Hold 5-52
selecting lines 5-4
M7208 telephone
description 2-l 2
display button equivalent 5-2
telephone
description 2-13
M7324 telephone
description 2-14
Maintenance
Line Profile 3-24
Set Profile 3-24
DR4 System Coordinator Guide
Make
call
Camp on 5-24
Group Listen 5-48
Make
calls
Conference 5-27
Memory buttons 5-67
programming 5-45
Message 5-93
Message 5-65
Messages
answering 5-64
erasing 5-64
feature description 5-64
sending 5-64
Modems 2-2
Mounting brackets
description 2-l 5
Music 5-85
Music on Hold 5-52
N
Names
entering from dial pad 3-10
length 4-12
moving telephones 4-12
programming 4-11
Service Modes 4-60
System Speed Dial 4-8
valid characters 4-12
Need
Headset 5-70
Service
Service modes 5-75
No
button
Call Pickup 5-21
Dialing 5-41
Line Pools 5-56
Message
5-66
No calls waiting
Answering the telephone 5-8
No
last
number
Last number
Index
No line
Answering the telephone 5-9
Dialing5-41
Hotline
No line to
Line redirection 5-59
No number saved
Saved Number redial 5-41
number
Saved Number redial 5-41
No
call
Voice Call 5-l 01
in service
Call Forward 5-17
Camp on 5-24
Not
Using
features 5-3
0
On-hook dialing 5-31
line
Line redirection 5-60
Overlay
for programming 3-5
P
Page
feature description 5-71
preventing access 4-52
zones 4-39, 5-71
timeout
Page 5-72
Page Zone
programming 4-39
Paging
Page 5-72
Park denied
Call Park 5-l 9
Park
full
Call Park 5-l 9
Passwords
Administration 4-68
cos
Pause
feature description 5-53
PC Interface card 2-16
Personal Speed Dial 5-82
Pickup 5-20
Call Pickup programming
4-38
Pick U P r e c e i v e r
Call Queuing 5-9
Pickup denied
,
Call Pickup 5-21
code
Line redirection 5-60
Power bar
110 V 2-17
220 v 2-17
Power supply
Auxiliary 2-l 8
Pre-Dial 5-32
Prime lines 5-88
Hotline 4-43
Power supply
auxiliary 2-18
Prime telephone 5-6, 5-81
displays
0
Answering the telephone 5-9
Priority Call
feature description 5-73
ring 5-7
Priority denied
Priority call 5-73
Privacy
creating a conference 5-25
Private lines 5-88
Call pickup 4-38, 5-22
Program and HOLD
Feature Programming 5-47
Programmed Release
feature description 5-54
Programming 3-l
Administration 1-3, 3-3, 4-4
DR4 System Coordinator Guide
8 Index
Administration password
4-69
an example 3-17
Automatic Handsfree 4-37
Auxiliary Ringer 4-39
Call forward No Answer 4-41
Call Forward On Busy 4-40
Call Pickup (group) 4-38
Capabilities4-21
Configuration 1-4, 1-8, 3-2
Control telephone 4-59
copying settings 3-12
COS Line filter 4-55
COS passwords 4-53
COS Remote Packages 4-56
Date 4-15
Dialing filters 4-23
Direct-Dial 4-19
Direct-Dial telephones 4-40
Exceptions 4-28
Extra-dial telephone 4-65
Features 5-45
Full Handsfree 4-36
Handsfree Answerback 4-37
Hotline 4-44
introduction 3-7 to 3-16
Line Abilities 4-48
Line filters 4-49
Line Profile 3-24
Line/telephone filters 4-34
Names 4-11
overlay 3-5
Page Zone 4-39
personal
Priority Call 4-47
Redirect Ring 4-43
Reminders 4-70
Remote Access Packages
4-29
Remote Filters 4-49
Remote Packages 4-50
Restrictions 4-27
reviewing 3-25
Ringing 4-65
DR4 System Coordinator Guide
Service Mode 1 4-60
Service Mode 2 4-67
Service Mode 3 4-67
Service modes 4-58
Automatic Start time
4-62
Automatic Stop time
4-62
Name 4-60
Set Profile 3-24
System Startup 3-2
Telephone (Set) Abilities
4-32
Telephone filter 4-33
Time 4-15
Trunk Answer 4-64
User filter 4-54
Programming Overlay 3-5
Programming Record 3-6
Programming Reminders 3-22
Pulse dialing 5-34
Q
Queuing
priorities 5-5
R
4321
Line redirection 5-60
Redirect Ring 5-7
programming 4-43
Release a call
Answering the telephone 5-9
Release button 5-69
Relocating
telephones 5-85
Remote Access
over a private Network 5-95
over a public Network 5-95
security 5-97
Tones 5-96
trunks required 5-99
.
Index 9
5-96
Using
Remote Access dialing filter 4-49
Remote Access Packages
COS passwords 4-29
defaults 4-29
number of 4-29
programming 4-30, 4-50
Remote Filter
programming 4-49
Remote Packages (COS)
programming 4-56
Restricted
call
Dialing5-41
Line redirection 5-60
Restrictions
bypassing 4-l 0
for external users 4-23
for internal users 4-23
number of 4-25
on E M lines 4-32
programming 4-27
removing 4-25
Restrictions in a Dialing filter
4-24
Ring Again 5-93
feature description 5-38
Ring type 5-35
Ringing 5-7
changing the ring 5-35
ON/OFF for lines 5-89
programming 4-65
volume 5-35
Run/Stop
feature description 5-54
S
SAPS
description 2-18
Saved Number Redial
feature description 5-38
Service Modes 4-57
Automatic 4-61
cancelling 5-75
Control telephone 4-58, 5-75
default start and stop times
4-61
Extra-dial telephone 4-64,
5-79
feature description 5-75
manual 4-61
Names 4-60
ON and OFF 4-61
programming 4-58
ringing 4-65
Service Mode 1 4-60
Service Mode 2 4-67
Service Mode 3 4-67
Trunk Answer 4-64
Service Representative l-8
Set Abilities (see Telephone
Abilities)
Set locked
Using
features 5-3
Set Profile 3-24
Signaling
Host System 5-53
Single line telephone 2-2
Software Cartridge 2-9
Speaker
paging 5-71
telephone 4-37
Speed Dial (see also System.
Speed Dial and Personal Speed
Dial)
Class of Service 5-84
feature description 5-82
Personal programming 5-82
Standard Dial 5-31
Station Auxiliary Power Supply
(see SAPS)
Station Module 2-l 9
Supervision 5-87
System Coordinator l-l
System Speed Dial 4-5
bypassing restrictions 4-l 0
changing name 4-9
changing the number 4-6
DR4 System Coordinator Guide
Index
Display Digits 4-8
Host System Signaling 4-6
line selection 4-7
Name 4-8
programming 4-5
T
Target lines 5-89
Call Forward On Busy 4-40
Line Profile 3-31
Telephone
Administration lock 5-35
Alarm 5-77
Control 4-59, 5-78
customizing 5-30
Direct-Dial 4-19, 4-39, 5-78
Emergency 5-79
Extra-Dial 4-65, 5-79
Hotline 5-79
2-11
M7208 2-12
2-13
M7324 2-14
Names 4-l 1
Prime 5-6, 5-81
Telephone Abilities 4-31
Automatic Handsfree 4-37
Auxiliary Ringer 4-39
Call forward No Answer 41
Call Forward On Busy 40
Call Pickup (group) 4-38
Direct-Dial Telephones 4-39
Full Handsfree 4-36
Handsfree Answerback 4-37
Hotline 4-43
Line/telephone filter 4-33
Page Zone 4-39
Priority Call 4-47
Redirect Ring 4-42
Telephone Administration
Lock 4-34
Telephone filter 4-32
DR4 System Coordinator Guide
Telephone Administration Lock
4-34
programming 4-36
Telephone buttons 5-67
Telephone data
copying 3-l 3
Telephone filter
programming 4-32
Telephone relocating 5-85
Their list full
Message 5-66
Time
display 5-90
Time and Date
programming 4-15
Timed Release
feature description 5-54
Timer
for calls 5-90
Tone dialing 5-34
Tones
for Remote Access 5-96
Long 5-63
denied
Long Tones 5-63
Transfer
feature description
using conference 5-91
using Hold 5-92
with announcement 5-91
denied
Transfer 5-94
Trunk Answer
feature description 5-20
programming 4-64
Trunk Cartridge 2-20
Trunk Module 2-21
Trunks
Line Profile 3-28
U
line
Line redirection 5-61
Index 11
Unsupervised Conference 12-91
Upgrading
Class of Service passwords
4-53
User filter
defaults 4-54
programming 4-54
V
Voice Call 5-71
deny
feature description
Handsfree Answerback
4-37, 5-100
muting tones 5-100
Voice Call Deny 5-6
Volume
Button 5-69
Y
Your list full
Message 5-66
DR4 System
Guide

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project